GT Designer 2 Manual Reference
Uploaded by
mangoody207901GT Designer 2 Manual Reference
Uploaded by
mangoody207901MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Reference Manual
(Graphic Software for GOT900 Series)
SW2D5C-GTWK2-E
SW2D5C-GTD2-E
Art. no. 169379
01 03 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
SH(NA)-080522ENG
Version N
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Be sure to read these instructions before using the product)
Before using this product, read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully
and handle the product correctly with full attention to safety.
Note that these precautions apply only to this product.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in
DANGER death or severe injury.
CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
Note that failure to observe the CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious results
depending on the circumstances.
Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure personal safety.
Please keep this manual in accessible place and be sure to forward it to the end user.
[Test operation precautions]
DANGER
When testing the operation (e.g. turning bit devices ON/OFF or changing a current word device
value, a current or set timer/counter value, or a current buffer memory value), thoroughly read the
relevant manual to fully understand the operating procedures. When testing, never change the data
of the devices that control the operation essential for the system.
Faulty output and malfunction may result in an accident.
A-1
Cautions for using this software
1. Required PC memory
The processing may be terminated by Microsoft Windows on a personal computer of which main
memory capacity is less than 64M bytes. Make sure to secure the capacity of 64 M bytes or more.
2. Free capacity of hard disk (virtual memory)
At least 100M bytes of free capacity of virtual memory should be secured within hard disk to run this software.
The processing may be terminated by Windows , if 100M bytes or more of free space cannot be secured
within hard disk while running GT Designer2.
Secure enough free capacity of virtual memory within hard disk space in order to run the software.
When enough free capacity cannot be secured, make sure to save projects frequently.
3. Error messages displayed while starting and editing
"Operation will be terminated because of insufficient memory. Would you like to stop?"
If the above message appears, close other running application software or reboot Windows in order to
secure at least 50M bytes of free hard disk space.
4. GT Designer2 and GOT display
(a) Cautions for displaying straight line other than full line (dotted line, for example) in bold.
When straight line other than full line is drawn in bold, the line may not be displayed with its actual line
width on a personal computer. However, it will be displayed correctly on GOT. This phenomenon does
not mean data problem.
(b) Display of end points of straight line/line freeform/polygon
As shown below, the end points of straight line/line freeform/polygon are displayed differently between
GT Designer2 and GOT.
On GT Designer2 On GOT
(c) Start position for filling patterns
Some filling patterns may be differently displayed. For example, the start position may be different
between GT Desginer2 and GOT.
(d) Drawing of different type lines
The length of the dots varies in different dotted lines (for example: the chain lines).
(e) Display of object
The display position of the memory data display in graph function is different between GT
Designer2 and GOT.
Even if the display-start-line of a comment has been set, the comment will be displayed from the
first line on GT Designer2.
(f) Display magnification
When display magnification is changed, the connected lines or figures may be separated or the
filled-paint may be out of outline of the figure.
However, if they are displayed correctly on the preview screen, they will appear correctly on GOT as
well.
A-2
(Example): When filled-paint is out of the outline.
Display magnification: 200% Display magnification: 100%
Position of Paint mark may be shifted and the
filled-paint may exceed the outline of the figure.
5. Restrictions when the color setting is changed to the setting of less colors in the system environment (256
colors 2 colors)
The color palette for setting color will be changed according to the new settings.
The color on the drawing screen will be kept the same as prior to the change.
If the color setting for a [red] rectangle-figure is changed to the 2 colors (B/W), the [red] color will
remain.
The colors of the image data (BMP format file) will be reduced when the project is stored, the screen is
closed and that image data is double-clicked.
6. Object function and device type
The object (bit lamp or word lamp),for which bit device setting and word device setting are separated,
cannot be converted between bit device and word device.
7. When device type is changed
Confirm the device type when the set bit device is changed from bit device into word device.
The device flag may be represented as "??", depending on the settings .
Example) D0. b0 D0 D0.b5 ??
8. OS setting
Set the font size as "Small Font" when setting OS (Windows ) screen.
The GT designer2 dialog box cannot be displayed correctly if the font size is set as "Large font".
9. When the toolbar icon appears in smaller size after startup of GT Desinger2
The toolbar icon may appear in smaller size right after GT Deseiger2 is started up.
To correctly display the icon, initialize it as instructed below.
(Click on [Project] [References] from the menu, and select the toolbar tab. Click on Reset All button in
that tab.)
10. When using GT Designer2 in the PC in which the OS other than applicable language version
The text may not be displayed correctly depending on the OS versions; some version include the fonts
incompatible with GT Designer2 or GOT.
11. When using Microsoft Narrator
GT Designer2 cannot be used with Microsoft Narrator.
When using GT Designer2, do not use Microsoft Narrator.
A-3
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover.
Print Date Manual Number Revision
Oct., 2004 SH(NA)-080522ENG-A First Printing
Mar., 2005 SH(NA)-080522ENG-B Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.09K
Partial corrections
Chapter 1, Section 2.2.1, Section 4.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.2, 4.3.3, 8.3.3, Section 9.1,
9.2, 9.2.5, Section 12.4.3, 12.4.4
Partial additions
Section 2.2.2, Section 4.1.2, Section 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, Section 8.1.5, 8.3.5,
Appendix 7
Additions
Section 9.1.1, 9.2.1, Section 12.4.1
Section 4.3.3 Section 9.1.1
Section 9.1.1 to 9.1.5 Section 9.1.2 to 9.1.6
Section 9.2.1 to 9.2.6 Section 9.2.2 to 9.2.7
Section 12.4.1 to 12.4.3 Section 12.4.2 to 12.4.4
Apr., 2005 SH(NA)-080522ENG-C Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.11M
Partial corrections
Section 4.5.2, Section 11.2.2
Partial additions
Section 2.6.2, Section 10.3.1, 10.3.3, 10.4.3, 10.7.1, 10.7.3
Oct., 2005 SH(NA)-080522ENG-D Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2.17T
Partial corrections
Section 3.1.1, Section 6.1.2, 6.2.2, Section 7.5.2,
Section 10.3.3, 10.7.3, Section 12.2.2, 12.2.3,
Section 14.1.1, 14.2.3
Partial additions
Section 2.6.2, Section 4.1.8, Section 5.3.1, 5.5,
Section 7.1.4, 7.3.4, Section 8.3.3, Section 9.2.1,
Section 11.2.2, Section14.4.2, Appendix7
Additions
Section 5.2
Section 5.2 to 5.7 Section 5.3 to 5.8
Jan., 2006 SH(NA)-080522ENG-E Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.27D
Partial corrections
Section 2.6.1, Section 3.6.3, Section 4.5, 4.5.2, 4.5.3, Section 6.2.2, 6.2.5,
6.2.6, Section 11.3.2
Partial additions
Manuals, Section 2.1.1, 2.3.1, Section 3.5.3, Section 6.1.6, Section 12.1.2,
12.1.4, 12.1.5
A-4
* The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover.
Print Date Manual Number Revision
Jun., 2006 SH(NA)-080522ENG-F Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.32J
Partial corrections
Section 3.5.3, 4.5.2, 6.2.2, 12.2.2, 12.6, 12.6.3
Partial additions
Section 7.3.4
Nov., 2006 SH(NA)-080522ENG-G Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.43V
Partial corrections
Section 8.3.3
Partial additions
Section 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 3.2, 4.5.2, 8.3.5, 13.1.1, Appendix7
Feb., 2007 SH(NA)-080522ENG-H Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.47Z
Partial additions
Section 2.1.2, 4.5.2, Appendix7
May, 2007 SH(NA)-080522ENG-I Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2.58L
Partial corrections
Section 4.6.4, 7.3, 11.3.2, 12.5, 12.5.2, 13.1.1
Partial additions
Section 3.4.2, 4.5, 5.3.2, 5.3.3, 6.2.12, 11.1.2, 11.1.3
Aug., 2007 SH(NA)-080522ENG-J Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2.63R
Partial corrections
Section 4.5.2, 5.3.1
Dec., 2007 SH(NA)-080522ENG-K Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2.73B
Partial corrections
Section 3.1.3, 5.3.3, 6.2.12, 7.1.1, 7.2.2, 7.3.2, 7.4.1, 7.5.1, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.2,
10.1.2, 10.2.2, 10.3.2, 10.4.2, 10.5.2, 10.6.2, 10.7.2, Appendix6, Appendix7
Feb., 2008 SH(NA)-080522ENG-L Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.77F
Partial corrections
Section 2.2, 8.3.3, 14.2, Appendix7
Oct., 2008 SH(NA)-080522ENG-M Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.90U
Partial corrections
Section 4.2.1, 5.3.3, 7.1.4, 7.3.4, 10.2.2
Partial additions
Appendix7
A-5
* The manual number is given on the left bottom of the back cover
Print Date Manual Number Revision
Mar., 2009 SH(NA)-080522ENG-N Compatible with the GT Designer2 Version 2.96A
Partial corrections
Section 3.1.3
Partial additions
Appendix7
Japanese Manual Version SH-080515-Q
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of
using the contents noted in this manual.
2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-6
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal (Mitsubishi GOT).
Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly
in advance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................................................A - 1
Cautions for using this software ........................................................................................................................A - 2
REVISIONS.......................................................................................................................................................A - 4
INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................................................A - 7
CONTENTS ......................................................................................................................................................A - 7
Function Quick Reference............................................................................................................................... A - 15
Manuals........................................................................................................................................................... A - 24
Abbreviations and Generic Terms................................................................................................................... A - 25
How to Use This Manual ................................................................................................................................. A - 30
1. OVERVIEW 1 - 1 to 1 - 2
1.1 Overview 1-1
2. SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1 to 2 - 74
2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens 2-1
2.1.1 Base screen specifications ................................................................................................... 2 - 2
2.1.2 Window screen specifications .............................................................................................. 2 - 2
2.1.3 Whole screen specifications ................................................................................................. 2 - 6
2.1.4 Data size of screen and project ............................................................................................ 2 - 8
2.2 Figures and Data Capacity 2-9
2.2.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series ........................................................................................... 2 - 9
2.2.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series ......................................................................................... 2 - 15
2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions 2 - 18
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series ......................................................................................... 2 - 18
2.3.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series ......................................................................................... 2 - 30
2.4 Clock Function 2 - 36
2.4.1 Clock function for monitoring by GOT ................................................................................ 2 - 36
2.4.2 PLC CPU with clock function (GOT-A900 series only) ....................................................... 2 - 38
2.5 Overlap Setting 2 - 40
2.5.1 Overlap between figure and object ..................................................................................... 2 - 40
2.5.2 Overlap between objects .................................................................................................... 2 - 40
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 42
2.6.1 GOT internal devices .......................................................................................................... 2 - 42
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series ..................................................................... 2 - 49
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series ..................................................................... 2 - 64
2.7 Precautions for Object Setting 2 - 74
A-7
3. COMMON SETTING 3 - 1 to 3 - 52
3.1 GOT/ PLC Type Setting 3-1
3.1.1 Settings................................................................................................................................. 3 - 1
3.1.2 Setting items ......................................................................................................................... 3 - 2
3.1.3 Precautions........................................................................................................................... 3 - 3
3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting 3-7
3.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 10
3.2.2 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 11
3.2.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 13
3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting 3 - 14
3.3.1 Methods of switching station No. ........................................................................................ 3 - 14
3.3.2 Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 17
3.3.3 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 18
3.3.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 20
3.4 Password Setting 3 - 21
3.4.1 Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 22
3.4.2 Password setting items....................................................................................................... 3 - 23
3.4.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 27
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 28
3.5.1 Setting methods.................................................................................................................. 3 - 31
3.5.2 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 31
3.5.3 Application example............................................................................................................ 3 - 40
3.5.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 48
3.6 Print Format Setting 3 - 49
3.6.1 Settings............................................................................................................................... 3 - 49
3.6.2 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 50
3.6.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 3 - 51
4. PREPARATORY OPERATION FOR OBJECT SETTING 4 - 1 to 4 - 72
4.1 Comment Registration 4-1
4.1.1 Required knowledge for comment registration ..................................................................... 4 - 1
4.1.2 Basic operation for comment registration ............................................................................. 4 - 3
4.1.3 Registering a comment......................................................................................................... 4 - 8
4.1.4 Copying or cutting a comment registered ........................................................................... 4 - 10
4.1.5 Deleting/clearing the text of a comment registered ............................................................ 4 - 13
4.1.6 Changing the registered comment's settings...................................................................... 4 - 15
4.1.7 Saving/reading a comment as file....................................................................................... 4 - 16
4.1.8 Editing the comment as text/csv file ................................................................................... 4 - 19
4.1.9 Precautions for comment registration ................................................................................. 4 - 23
4.2 Parts Registration 4 - 24
4.2.1 Required knowledge for parts registration .......................................................................... 4 - 24
4.2.2 Basic operation for parts registration .................................................................................. 4 - 26
4.2.3 Registering parts................................................................................................................. 4 - 28
4.2.4 Copying the registered parts............................................................................................... 4 - 31
4.2.5 Deleting the registered parts............................................................................................... 4 - 32
4.2.6 Changing the registered parts settings ............................................................................... 4 - 33
4.2.7 Changing property of the registered parts .......................................................................... 4 - 34
A-8
4.2.8 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 35
4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card 4 - 37
4.3.1 Before using the BMP image parts ..................................................................................... 4 - 39
4.3.2 Storing the BMP file parts into the PC card ........................................................................ 4 - 40
4.3.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 41
4.4 Registering Gaiji 4 - 42
4.4.1 What are external characters ............................................................................................. 4 - 42
4.4.2 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 4 - 42
4.4.3 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 42
4.4.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 44
4.5 Auxiliary Settings 4 - 45
4.5.1 Settings............................................................................................................................... 4 - 51
4.5.2 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 4 - 52
4.5.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 59
4.6 Key Window 4 - 61
4.6.1 Key window type................................................................................................................. 4 - 61
4.6.2 Keys on default key window and display items .................................................................. 4 - 62
4.6.3 How to operate key window................................................................................................ 4 - 63
4.6.4 How to create user-created key window............................................................................. 4 - 65
4.6.5 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 4 - 72
5. COMMON SETTINGS FOR OBJECTS 5 - 1 to 5 - 64
5.1 Device Setting 5-1
5.1.1 Device setting ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 1
5.1.2 Settings................................................................................................................................. 5 - 2
5.1.3 Setting items ......................................................................................................................... 5 - 3
5.2 Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT 5 - 19
5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting 5 - 20
5.3.1 Object arrangement ............................................................................................................ 5 - 20
5.3.2 Object shape setting ........................................................................................................... 5 - 22
5.3.3 Object size change ............................................................................................................. 5 - 25
5.4 State Setting 5 - 28
5.4.1 Display priority .................................................................................................................... 5 - 29
5.4.2 Arrangement and settings .................................................................................................. 5 - 29
5.4.3 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 30
5.4.4 Example of state setting operation ..................................................................................... 5 - 33
5.4.5 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 34
5.5 Trigger Setting 5 - 35
5.5.1 Arrangement and settings .................................................................................................. 5 - 41
5.5.2 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 41
5.5.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 43
5.6 Data Operation Function 5 - 45
5.6.1 Arrangement and settings .................................................................................................. 5 - 48
5.6.2 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 49
5.6.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 51
5.7 Offset Function 5 - 52
5.7.1 Arrangement and settings .................................................................................................. 5 - 54
A-9
5.7.2 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 54
5.7.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 54
5.8 Security Function 5 - 56
5.8.1 Security function setting...................................................................................................... 5 - 63
5.8.2 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 5 - 64
6. LAMP, SWITCH 6 - 1 to 6 - 83
6.1 Lamp Display 6-1
6.1.1 Arrangement and settings..................................................................................................... 6 - 2
6.1.2 Setting items of bit lamp ....................................................................................................... 6 - 3
6.1.3 Setting items of word lamp (for GOT-A900 series only) ....................................................... 6 - 6
6.1.4 Setting items of bit lamp area (for GOT-F900 series only) ................................................. 6 - 13
6.1.5 Setting items of screen lamp (for GOT-F900 series only) .................................................. 6 - 13
6.1.6 Setting items of external lamp (for GOT-F900 series only) ................................................ 6 - 14
6.1.7 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 6 - 14
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 15
6.2.1 Arrangement and settings................................................................................................... 6 - 18
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch ................................................................................................... 6 - 19
6.2.3 Setting items of data set switch .......................................................................................... 6 - 36
6.2.4 Setting items of special function switch .............................................................................. 6 - 41
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch ................................................................................... 6 - 49
6.2.6 Setting items of change station No. switch (specific for GOT-A900 series) ....................... 6 - 59
6.2.7 Setting items of key code switch......................................................................................... 6 - 65
6.2.8 Setting items of data change switch (specific for GOT-F900 series).................................. 6 - 68
6.2.9 Setting items of recipe transfer switch (specific for GOT-F900 series)............................... 6 - 71
6.2.10 Setting items of multi action switch..................................................................................... 6 - 73
6.2.11 Keyboard function............................................................................................................... 6 - 78
6.2.12 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 6 - 80
7. NUMERICAL/CHARACTER DISPLAY 7 - 1 to 7 - 83
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7-1
7.1.1 Arrangement and settings..................................................................................................... 7 - 3
7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display ........................................................................................ 7 - 4
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input.......................................................................................... 7 - 13
7.1.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 24
7.2 Data List 7 - 28
7.2.1 Required knowledge for data list setting............................................................................. 7 - 29
7.2.2 Arrangement and settings................................................................................................... 7 - 31
7.2.3 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 32
7.2.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 43
7.3 ASCII Display/Input 7 - 44
7.3.1 Before setting ASCII display/input ...................................................................................... 7 - 46
7.3.2 Arrangement and settings................................................................................................... 7 - 47
7.3.3 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 48
7.3.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 55
7.4 Clock Display 7 - 57
7.4.1 Arrangement and Settings .................................................................................................. 7 - 58
7.4.2 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 7 - 59
A - 10
7.4.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 62
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 63
7.5.1 Arrangement and settings .................................................................................................. 7 - 64
7.5.2 Setting items of bit comment .............................................................................................. 7 - 65
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment .......................................................................................... 7 - 72
7.5.4 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 7 - 83
8. ALARM 8 - 1 to 8 - 71
8.1 User Alarm Display 8-1
8.1.1 Before setting user alarm ..................................................................................................... 8 - 2
8.1.2 Placement and settings ........................................................................................................ 8 - 9
8.1.3 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 8 - 10
8.1.4 Touch switch for displaying user alarm .............................................................................. 8 - 19
8.1.5 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 8 - 20
8.2 System Alarm Display 8 - 23
8.2.1 Before setting system alarm ............................................................................................... 8 - 24
8.2.2 Placement and settings ...................................................................................................... 8 - 27
8.2.3 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 8 - 28
8.2.4 Precaution .......................................................................................................................... 8 - 30
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 31
8.3.1 Before setting alarm history display.................................................................................... 8 - 33
8.3.2 Placement and setting ........................................................................................................ 8 - 39
8.3.3 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 8 - 41
8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display ..................................................... 8 - 62
8.3.5 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 8 - 64
8.4 Floating Alarm 8 - 67
8.4.1 Settings............................................................................................................................... 8 - 68
8.4.2 Setting items of floating alarm ............................................................................................ 8 - 69
8.4.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 8 - 71
9. PARTS 9 - 1 to 9 - 62
9.1 Parts Display 9-1
9.1.1 Parts displaying method ....................................................................................................... 9 - 3
9.1.2 Arrangement and settings .................................................................................................... 9 - 7
9.1.3 Setting items of bit parts display ........................................................................................... 9 - 8
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display ..................................................................................... 9 - 13
9.1.5 Setting items of fixed parts display ..................................................................................... 9 - 23
9.1.6 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 9 - 26
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 28
9.2.1 Moving and displaying parts ............................................................................................... 9 - 29
9.2.2 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen) .......................................... 9 - 37
9.2.3 Arrangement and setting .................................................................................................... 9 - 39
9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement ................................................................................... 9 - 40
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement ............................................................................... 9 - 46
9.2.6 Setting items of fixed parts movement ............................................................................... 9 - 57
9.2.7 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 9 - 62
A - 11
10. GRAPH, METER 10 - 1 to 10 - 104
10.1 Panelmeter 10 - 1
10.1.1 Required knowledge for panelmeter setting ....................................................................... 10 - 1
10.1.2 Arrangement and settings................................................................................................... 10 - 3
10.1.3 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 10 - 4
10.1.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 13
10.2 Level 10 - 14
10.2.1 Required knowledge for level setting................................................................................ 10 - 15
10.2.2 Arrangement and settings................................................................................................. 10 - 17
10.2.3 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 19
10.2.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 26
10.3 Trend Graph 10 - 28
10.3.1 Required knowledge for trend graph setting..................................................................... 10 - 28
10.3.2 Arrangement and settings................................................................................................. 10 - 31
10.3.3 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 32
10.3.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 43
10.4 Line Graph 10 - 44
10.4.1 Required knowledge for line graph setting ....................................................................... 10 - 44
10.4.2 Arrangement and settings................................................................................................. 10 - 46
10.4.3 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 47
10.4.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 58
10.5 Bar Graph 10 - 59
10.5.1 Required knowledge for bar graph setting........................................................................ 10 - 59
10.5.2 Arrangement and settings................................................................................................. 10 - 61
10.5.3 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 62
10.5.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 70
10.6 Statistics Graph 10 - 71
10.6.1 Required knowledge for statistics graph setting ............................................................... 10 - 72
10.6.2 Arrangement and settings................................................................................................. 10 - 73
10.6.3 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 74
10.6.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 10 - 80
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 81
10.7.1 Required knowledge for scatter graph setting .................................................................. 10 - 82
10.7.2 Arrangement and settings................................................................................................. 10 - 88
10.7.3 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 10 - 89
10.7.4 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 101
10.8 Sampling 10 - 102
10.8.1 Settings........................................................................................................................... 10 - 102
10.8.2 Setting items ................................................................................................................... 10 - 103
10.8.3 Precautions..................................................................................................................... 10 - 104
11. TRIGGER ACTIONS 11 - 1 to 11 - 28
11.1 Status Observation Function 11 - 1
11.1.1 Settings............................................................................................................................... 11 - 2
11.1.2 Setting items ....................................................................................................................... 11 - 3
11.1.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 11 - 10
A - 12
11.2 Recipe Function 11 - 12
11.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 11 - 13
11.2.2 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 11 - 14
11.2.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 11 - 20
11.3 Time Action Function 11 - 22
11.3.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 11 - 23
11.3.2 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 11 - 24
11.3.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 11 - 27
12. EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT 12 - 1 to 12 - 73
12.1 Report Function 12 - 1
12.1.1 Arrangement and settings .................................................................................................. 12 - 3
12.1.2 Report screen creation (screen property) ........................................................................... 12 - 5
12.1.3 Setting common to each report (report setting) .................................................................. 12 - 8
12.1.4 Print layout setting ............................................................................................................ 12 - 13
12.1.5 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 12 - 23
12.2 Hard Copy 12 - 25
12.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 12 - 26
12.2.2 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 12 - 27
12.2.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 12 - 29
12.3 Operation Panel 12 - 31
12.3.1 Required knowledge for operation panel setting .............................................................. 12 - 32
12.3.2 Settings............................................................................................................................. 12 - 33
12.3.3 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 12 - 34
12.3.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 12 - 38
12.4 Bar Code Function 12 - 39
12.4.1 Arrangement and settings ................................................................................................ 12 - 39
12.4.2 Settings............................................................................................................................. 12 - 40
12.4.3 Setting items of bar code function .................................................................................... 12 - 41
12.4.4 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 12 - 42
12.5 Sound 12 - 46
12.5.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 12 - 46
12.5.2 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 12 - 47
12.5.3 Precautions ...................................................................................................................... 12 - 48
12.6 Video 12 - 50
12.6.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 12 - 63
12.6.2 Setting items of video ....................................................................................................... 12 - 64
12.6.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 12 - 67
12.7 RGB 12 - 68
12.7.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 12 - 71
12.7.2 Setting items of RGB ........................................................................................................ 12 - 72
12.7.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 12 - 73
13. OTHERS 13 - 1 to 13 - 12
13.1 Set Overlay Screen Function 13 - 1
13.1.1 Arrangement and settings .................................................................................................. 13 - 2
13.1.2 Check of the settings .......................................................................................................... 13 - 4
A - 13
13.1.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................... 13 - 5
13.2 Test Function 13 - 10
13.2.1 Arrangement and settings................................................................................................. 13 - 11
13.2.2 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 13 - 11
13.2.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 13 - 12
14. SCRIPT FUNCTION 14 - 1 to 14 - 56
14.1 Overview 14 - 1
14.1.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 14 - 1
14.1.2 Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................ 14 - 3
14.2 Specifications 14 - 6
14.2.1 Type.................................................................................................................................... 14 - 6
14.2.2 Control structure ................................................................................................................. 14 - 7
14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods ................................................................... 14 - 11
14.2.4 Script execution ................................................................................................................ 14 - 20
14.3 Settings and Procedure for Execution 14 - 23
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 14 - 24
14.4.1 Settings............................................................................................................................. 14 - 24
14.4.2 Setting items ..................................................................................................................... 14 - 25
14.4.3 Precautions....................................................................................................................... 14 - 41
14.4.4 Message displayed during syntax check .......................................................................... 14 - 41
14.5 Program Examples 14 - 43
14.5.1 Touch switches with interlock function.............................................................................. 14 - 43
14.5.2 Lamps which change the display attributes under multiple conditions ............................. 14 - 44
14.5.3 Password input screen with time limit function ................................................................. 14 - 46
14.6 Precautions for using BMOV 14 - 48
14.7 Troubleshooting 14 - 51
14.7.1 Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger ............................................ 14 - 51
14.7.2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT ............................................... 14 - 54
APPENDICES App - 1 to App - 18
App.1 Object Display Speed (Reference Value) App - 1
App.2 Key Code List App - 3
App.3 Drawing Sheet App - 6
App.4 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function (Reference Value) App - 12
App.5 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR App - 13
App.6 Comparison between GT Designer terms and GT Designer2 terms App - 16
App.7 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT900 Series) App - 17
INDEX Index - 1 to Index - 6
A - 14
Function Quick Reference
Edit Operation (GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
Image Function Page
Preview
Shows the preview of screen image of GOT. Page 4-43
Align
Aligns objects or images Page 8-22
Property sheet
Sets same attributes to objects or images in the
Page 9-1
same screen
Guidelines
Displays lines to align figures and objects when
Page 8-25
arranging a placed figure or object.
Replace colors
Base 2 Base 2
Base 3
Base 3
Changes the color(s) of the objects and figures
Page 9-12
arranged on plural screens at the same time
Base 1 Base 1
Replace shapes
Base 2 Base 2
Base 3 Base 3
Changes the switch/lamp figures at the same
Page 9-12
time
Base 1 Base 1
Replace devices
M10 M11 M12 M100 M101 M102
Changes the preset devices at the same time Page 9-12
Data View
Overlapping images or objects Page 9-16
Select
Device list
Base 2
Base 3
D100 Numerical display Display the set device in list Page 9-17
D200 ASCII display
300 Panel meter display
Base 1
A - 15
Image Function Page
Text list
Base 2
Base 3
Run Bit Switch Displays the direct input texts in a list. Page 9-19
Stop Bit Switch
Error Word Lamp
Base 1
Multiple language input
Input characters or comments in other
Man. Auto Page 9-26
language.
English Chinese
Import BMP/DXF file
BMP file Import Imports BMP/DXF files Page 8-13
DXF file
Import Project
Import Utilizes other project data Page 9-35
A - 16
Object Functions (GT Designer2 Version Reference Manual)
1 Lamp/Switch
Image Function Page
Lamp display
Red Blue Displays device value via lamp color
Page 6-1
changing
RUN STOP
Bit switch
MO:ON OFF
Touch it to switch device ON/OFF Page 6-19
Data set switch
D100:
200 350
Touch it to change bit device value Page 6-36
Special function switch
Touch it to switch the screen to such as
Page 6-41
Utility screen.
Go to screen switch
Operation
Touch it to switch between the base and
Stop Page 6-49
window screen
Base 1 Base 2
Change station No. switch
Touch it to switch the monitored PLC station
Change monitor Page 6-59
destination
No.
Key code switch
Used as the key for inputting numerical
A Page 6-65
A B C D value/ASCII
E F G H
2 Digit/font display
Image Function Page
Numerical display
D100 334
D100:334 Displays device value in numerical value Page 7-1
Numerical input
D100 45
D100:45 Write value on device Page 7-1
A - 17
Image Function Page
Data list D100: 55
D101:122 D100 55
D102: 34 D101 122 Display multipledevice value in list Page 7-28
D102 34
ASCII display
D10:4241H(BA)
D11:4443H(DC)
ABCD
Displays device value in text Page 7-44
ASCII input
D10:4241H(BA)
ABCD
D11:4443H(DC) Inputs text code device Page 7-44
Clock display
02/03/18
15:27 Displays hour/minutes, year/month/date Page 7-57
Comment display
RUN STOP Displays command Page 7-63
3 Alarm
Image Function Page
Alarm list
02/04/18 13:25:40 Displays message at alarm occurence Page 8-1
RUN STOP
Alarm history display
Time message
13:25 RUN A STOP
Displays alarm history Page 8-31
13:05 Hight limit over
13:03 Motor trip
Alarm flow display
Displays alarm in floating Page 8-67
Alarm Alarm occur
4 Parts
Image Function Page
Parts display
Display entered device Page 9-1
Part1 Part2
Parts movement display
Displays moving parts Page 9-28
A - 18
5 Graph/Meter
Image Function Page
Panel meter display
Displays device data on panel meter Page 10-1
Level display
Displays device data in proportional level Page 10-14
Trend graph display
Displays device data in trend graph Page 10-28
Line graph display
Displays device data in line graph Page 10-44
Bar graph display
Displays device data in bar graph Page 10-59
Statistics graph display
Circle graph Bar graph
Displays device data in statistics graph Page 10-71
Scatter graph display
Displays device data in scatter grap Page 10-81
Sampling
Collect the device value and edit collected
Page 10-102
data on PC
A - 19
6 Trigger action
Image Function Page
Status observation function
Monitors status of device and write value to
D100: 0 150 device or operates GOT when condition Page 11-1
Write
meets
Recipe functioin
Write D100: 150
D101: 300 Monitors status of device and write/read
/Read Page 11-12
D102: 208 device data when condition meets
Time action function
Outputs the device writing and sound at
Page 11-22
specified time.
7 External input/output
Image Function Page
Report
Collects numerical data when condition
meets and prints the numerical data and Page 12-1
corresponding code.
Hardcopy
Outputs the GOT monitor screen to printer or
Page 12-25
PC card
Operation panel
Uses operation panel to execute device
Page 12-31
X0
writing
Bar code
Writes data read by bar code reader to
1350 Page 12-39
device
Sound
Outputs sounds Page 12-46
A - 20
Image Function Page
Video
Displays video Page 12-50
RGB display
Displays PC screens Page 12-68
8 Others
Image Function Page
Set overlay screen Menu
Base 1
Menu
Base 3 Set overlay screen from other screens Page 13-1
Menu
Base 2
Test
Changes device value via test window in
Page 13-10
monitor screen
9 Script function
Image Function Page
Script
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=1;}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=2;} Controls GOT display by scripts Page 14-1
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=3;}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON))
{[w:D10]=4;}
10 Object setting
Image Function Page
Data operation
D100 : 45
Operates device values by expression and
D100 180
Page 5-45
180 enables objects using the operated value
Offset
Numerical value input: D100
200 Accumulates the offset device value in
Write to D110 Page 5-52
10 monitor device address and monitor.
Offset device: D200
A - 21
Image Function Page
Security
***** Restricts the password users Page 5-56
A - 22
Data Transmission (GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
Image Function Page
Download
Transimits monitor screen data from PC to
Page 5-1
GOT
Upload
Transmits monitor screen data from GOT to
Page 5-20
PC
Print (GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
Image Function Page
Print screen
Prints the project information (screen image,
Page 6-1
title list, etc.).
A - 23
Manuals
The following table lists the manual relevant to this product.
You can order it as necessary.
Related Manuals
Manual Number
Manual Name
(Type code)
GT Designer2 Version2 Operating Manual (Startup Introductory Manual)
SH-080520ENG
Describes methods of installing GT Designer2 and introductory drawing methods (Sold separately)
(1DM215)
(Sold separately)
GT Designer2 Version2 Operating Manual
SH-080521ENG
Describes methods of operating GT Designer2 and transmitting data to GOT
(1DM216)
(Sold separately)
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual
(GT Designer2 Version2 compatible Extended Option Functions Manual)
Describes the following extended functions and optional functions applicable to GOT
Extended and optional function of GOT are as follows:
SH-080523ENG
Utility Ladder monitor System monitor
(1DM218)
Special module monitor Network monitor List editing
Module monitor Servo amplifier monitor CNC monitor
Font change System dialog language switching
(Sold separately)
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual
(GT Designer2 Version2 compatible Connection System Manual)
SH-080524ENG
Describes the system configuration of which connection method is compatible with GOT-A900 series as
(1DM219)
well as processing cables
(Sold separately)
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual
(GT Designer2 Version2 compatible Gateway Functions Manual)
SH-080525ENG
Describes the gateway function specifications, system configuration and methods of setting GOT-A900
(1DM220)
series
(Sold separately)
A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/A960GOT User's Manual
Provides performance specification, setting method, and communication board/communication module SH-4005
installation method of each GOT (1DM099)
(Sold separately)
A950GOT/A951GOT/A953GOT/A956GOTUser's Manual
Provides performance specification, setting method, and communication board/communication module SH-080018
installation method of each GOT (1DM103)
(Sold separately)
GOT-F900 Series HARDWARE Manual [CONNECTION]
Explains the specifications, system configuration and connection diagram of each connection form avail- JY992D94801
able for the GOT-F900 series. (09R805)
(Sold separately)
GOT-F900 Series OPERATION Manual [GT Designer2 Version]
Explains the drawing specifications, utility function/HPP mode/special function unit monitoring function JY997D09101
specifications, and dedicated monitor screen operation methods available for the GOT-F900 series. (09R813)
(Sold separately)
A - 24
Abbreviations and Generic Terms
Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows:
GOT
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
A985GOT-V A985GOT-TBA-V, A985GOT-TBD-V
A985GOT A985GOT-TBA, A985GOT-TBD, A985GOT-TBA-EU
A975GOT-TBA-B, A975GOT-TBD-B, A975GOT-TBA,
A975GOT
A975GOT-TBD, A975GOT-TBA-EU
A970GOT-TBA-B, A970GOT-TBD-B, A970GOT-TBA,
A970GOT-TBD, A970GOT-SBA, A970GOT-SBD,
A970GOT
A970GOT-LBA, A970GOT-LBD, A970GOT-TBA-EU,
A970GOT-SBA-EU, A970GOT-LBA-EU
A97*GOT A975GOT, A970GOT
A960GOT A960GOT-EBA, A960GOT-EBD, A960GOT-EBA-EU
A956WGOT A956WGOT-TBD
A956GOT-TBD, A956GOT-SBD, A956GOT-LBD,
A956GOT A956GOT-TBD-M3, A956GOT-SBD-M3, A956GOT-LBD-M3
A956GOT-SBD-B, A956GOT-SBD-M3-B
GOT-A900
A953GOT-TBD, A953GOT-SBD, A953GOT-LBD,
series
A953GOT A953GOT-TBD-M3, A953GOT-SBD-M3, A953GOT-LBD-M3
A953GOT-SBD-B, A953GOT-SBD-M3-B
A951GOT-TBD, A951GOT-SBD, A951GOT-LBD,
A951GOT A951GOT-TBD-M3, A951GOT-SBD-M3, A951GOT-LBD-M3
A951GOT-SBD-B, A951GOT-SBD-M3-B
A951GOT-QTBD, A951GOT-QSBD, A951GOT-QLBD,
A951GOT-Q A951GOT-QTBD-M3, A951GOT-QSBD-M3, A951GOT-QLBD-M3
A951GOT-QSBD-B, A951GOT-QSBD-M3-B
A950GOT-TBD, A950GOT-SBD, A950GOT-LBD,
A950GOT A950GOT-TBD-M3, A950GOT-SBD-M3, A950GOT-LBD-M3
A950GOT-SBD-B, A950GOT-SBD-M3-B
A950GOT-SBD-M3-H, A950GOT-LBD-M3-H, A953GOT-SBD-M3-H,
A95*handy GOT
A953GOT-LBD-M3-H
A956GOT, A953GOT, A951GOT, A951GOT-Q,
A95*GOT
A950GOT
F940GOT-SWD, F940GOT-LWD, ET-940BH(-L),
F940GOT
ET-940PH(-L)
F930GOT-K F930GOT-BBD-K
F930GOT F930GOT-BWD, F933GOT-BWD
GOT-F900
F920GOT-K F920GOT-BBD5-K, F920GOT-BBD-K
series
F940GOT-SBD-H, F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-RH,
F940 handy GOT F940GOT-LBD-RH, F943GOT-SBD-H, F943GOT-LBD-H,
F943GOT-SBD-RH, F943GOT-LBD-RH
F940WGOT F940WGOT-TWD
A - 25
Communication board/communication module
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
A9GT-QBUSS, A9GT-QBUS2S, A9GT-BUSS, A9GT-BUS2S,
Bus connection board
Communication A9GT-50WQBUSS, A9GT-50WBUSS
board Serial communication A9GT-RS4, A9GT-RS2, A9GT-RS2T, A9GT-50WRS2,
board A9GT-50WRS4
A9GT-QBUS2SU, A9GT-BUSSU, A9GT-BUS2SU, A7GT-BUSS,
Bus connection module
A7GT-BUS2S
Data link module A7GT-J71AP23, A7GT-J71AR23, A7GT-J71AT23B
Communication Network module A9GT-QJ71LP23, A9GT-QJ71BR13, A7GT-J71LP23, A7GT-J71BR13
module CC-Link communication
A8GT-J61BT13, A8GT-J61BT15
module
Ethernet communication
A9GT-J71E71-T
module
Option Module
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
External I/O module A9GT-70KBF, A8GT-50KBF
Printer interface module A9GT-50PRF type
Memory card interface
A1SD59J-MIF
module
Video/RGB mixed input
Option Module A9GT-80V4R1
interface module
Video input interface
A9GT-80V4
module
RGB input interface
A9GT-80R1
module
A - 26
Option
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
A9GT-80LTT, A9GT-70LTTB, A9GT-70LTT, A9GT-70LTS,
Backlight
A9GT-50LT, F9GT-40LTS, F9GT-30LTB
Debug stand A9GT-80STAND, A9GT-70STAND, A9GT-50WSTAND, A9GT-50STAND
A9GT-FNB, A9GT-FNB1M, A9GT-FNB2M, A9GT-FNB4M,
Memory board A9GT-FNB8M, A9GT-QFNB, A9GT-QFNB4M, A9GT-QFNB8M,
F9GT-40FMB, F9GT-40UMB
Ten-key panel A8GT-TK
Bus connector
A7GT-CNB
conversion box
Option Bus distance connector
A9GT-QCNB
box
A9GT-80PSC, A9GT-70PSC, A9GT-60PSC, A9GT-50WPSC,
Protective sheet
A9GT-50PSC, F9WGT-40PSC, F9GT-40PSC, F9GT-30PSC
Attachment A77GT-96ATT, A85GT-95ATT, A87GT-96ATT, A87GT-97ATT
PC card (memory card) Flash PC card/Commercially available flash PC card/SRAM type PC card
Flash PC card A9GTMEM-10MF, A9GTMEM-20MF, A9GTMEM-40MF
Compact Flash PC card Commercially available flash PC card
Connector conversion
Abbreviation of F9GT-HCNB
box
Software
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
GT Works2 Version SW D5C-GTWK2-E, SW D5C-GTWK2-EV
GT Designer2 Version SW D5C-GTD2-E, SW D5C-GTD2-EV
GT Designer2 Abbreviation of GOT900 series graphic software-GT Designer2
GT Simulator2 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator2 for GOT1000/GOT900 series
GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviation of monitoring software-GT SoftGOT2
Software
GT Converter Abbreviation of GOT900 series data conversion software-GT Converter
GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C-GPPW(-V)/SW D5F-GPPW(-V) type software package
Abbreviation of SW D5C-LLT(-V) type download test tool function software package
GX Simulator
(SW5D5C-LLT(-V) or later)
DU/WIN Abbreviation of FX-PCS-DU/WIN
A - 27
License key (for GT SoftGOT, GT SoftGOT2)
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
License key A9GTSOFT-LKEY-P (for DOS/VPC)
License key FD SW5D5F-SGLKEY-J (for PC CPU module)
CPU
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU,
QCPU (Q Mode) Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU,
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU
QCPU
QCPU (A Mode) Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A
Network module for MELSECNET/H network system remote I/O station
Remote I/O station
(QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15)
Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q2AHCPU, Q2AHCPU-S1,
QnACPU type
QnACPU Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU, Q4ARCPU
QnASCPU type Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, Q2ASHCPU-S1
AnUCPU A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU, A4UCPU
AnACPU A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1, A3ACPU
AnNCPU A1NCPU, A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1, A3NCPU
AnCPU type AnUCPU, AnACPU, AnNCPU
AnUS (H) CPU A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2USHCPU-S1, A3USCPU
ACPU A1SCPU, A1SCPUC24-R2, A2SCPU, A2SCPU-S1,
AnS (H) CPU
A1SHCPU, A2SHCPU, A2SHCPU-S1
A1SJ (H) CPU A1SJCPU, A1SJCPU-S3, A1SJHCPU
AnSCPU type AnUS(H)CPU, AnS(H)CPU, A1SJ(H)CPU
A1FXCPU A1FXCPU
A0J2HCPU, A2CCPU, A2CCPUC24, A2CJCPU
FX0 series, FX0N series, FX0S series, FX1 series,
FX1N series, FX1NC series, FX1S series, FX2 series,
FXCPU
FX2C series, FX2N series, FX2NC series,
FX(2N)-10GM/20GM series FX3UC series,
Motion controller CPU
Q172CPU, Q173CPU
(Q series)
A273UCPU, A273UHCPU, A273UHCPU-S3,
Motion controller
A373CPU, A373UCPU, A373UCPU-S3,
CPU Motion controller CPU
A171SCPU, A171SCPU-S3, A171SCPU-S3N,
(A series)
A171SHCPU, A171SHCPUN, A172SHCPU,
A172SHCPUN, A173UHCPU, A173UHCPU-S1
FA controller LM610, LM7600, LM8000
MELDAS C6/C64 FCA C6, FCA C64
Inverter
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
FREQROL series A500 series, E500 series, F500 series
A - 28
Other PLC
Abbreviations and generic terms Description
C200HS, C200H, C200H series (C200HX, C200HG,
C200HE), CQM1, C1000H, C2000H,
CV500, CV1000, CV2000,
Omron PLC CVM1-CPU01, CVM1-CPU11, CVM1-CPU21, CS1,
CS1D, CJ1H, CJ1G, CJ1M,
CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C,
CQM1H
GL60S, GL60H, GL70H, GL120,
Yaskawa PLC GL130, CP-9200SH, CP-9300MS, MP-920,
MP-930, MP-940, MP-9200(H), PROGIC-8
SLC500-20, SLC500-30, SLC500-40, SLC5/01,
SLC500 series
SLC5/02, SLC5/03, SLC5/04, SLC5/05
1761-L10BWA, 1761-L10BWB, 1761-L16AWA,
Allen-
1761-L16BWA, 1761-L16BWB, 1761-L16BBB,
Bradley
MicroLogix1000 series 1761-L32AWA, 1761-L32BWA, 1761-L32BWB,
PLC
1761-L32BBB, 1761-L32AAA, 1761-L20AWA-5A,
1761-L20BWA-5A, 1761-L20BWB-5A
MicroLogix1500 series 1764-LSP
JW-21CU, JW-22CU, JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH,
Sharp PLC JW-33CUH, JW-50CUH, JW-70CUH, JW-100CU,
JW-100CUH, Z-512J
PROSEC T series T3, T3H, T2E, T2N
Toshiba PLC
PROSEC V series Model3000, S2T
SIMATIC S7-200 series, SIMATIC S7-300series,
SIEMENS PLC
SIMATIC S7-400 series
H-302(CPU2-03H), H-702(CPU2-07H), H-1002(CPU2-10H),
Large-sized H series H-2002(CPU2-20H), H-4010(CPU3-40H), H-300(CPU-03Ha),
H-700(CPU-07Ha), H-2000(CPU-20Ha)
H-200(CPU-02H,CPE-02H), H-250(CPU21-02H),
HITACHI PLC H-200 252 series H-252(CPU22-02H), H-252B(CPU22-02HB),
(HIDEC H series) H-252C(CPU22-02HC, CPE22-02HC)
H-20DR, H-28DR, H-40DR, H-64DR,
H series board type H-20DT, H-28DT, H-40DT, H-64DT,
HL-40DR, HL-64DR
EH-150 series EH-CPU104, EH-CPU208, EH-CPU308, EH-CPU316
FP0-C16CT, FP0-C32CT, FP1-C24C, FP1-C40C,
FP2, FP2SH, FP2-CCU, FP3,
Matsushita Electric Works PLC
FP5, FP10 (S), FP10SH,
FP-M(C20TC), FP-M (C32TC)
A - 29
How to Use This Manual
Following symbols are used in this manual
Shows functions applicable to GOT-A900 series
(GOT-A900) GOT-F900 series (GOT-F900).
" ", Applicable
" ", N / A
Shows the items including detailed explanation
(manual and the chapter, section, item).
Indicates the operation steps.
Brackets used for the menu and items differ.
[ ] : Refers to menu in menu bar.
: Refers to dialog box item or
GOT utility menu.
: Refers to dialog box buttons or
PC keyboard.
Refers to information required
for operation.
Refers to information useful
for operation.
Refers to supplementary
Remark
explanations.
Shows functions applicable to GOT-A900
series (A) GOT-F900 series (F).
" ", Applicable
" ", N / A
* The above is user for explanation only and differs from the actual page.
A - 30
MEMO
A - 31
1. OVERVIEW
1.1 Overview
This manual explains the GT Designer2 common setting, object function specifications, object setting/
arrangement.
When applying any of the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system, verify the appli-
cability and confirm that no problems will occur in the system control.
1 GT Designer2-relevant manuals
The following manuals are relevant to the GT Designer2.
Refer to the corresponding manual according to needs.
Startup
Purpose Reference Manual Operating Manual
Introductory Manual
Detailed
Installing product on PC
Detailed
Overview
Creating projects
Detailed
Overview
Creating screens
Detailed
Overview
Drawing figures
Detailed
Overview
Making common setting
Detailed
Overview
Object arrangement/setting
Detailed
Overview
Transferring data to GOT
Startup and Introduction
Describes the installation methods of the product, and explains the series of operations from
creating simple screens to using them on GOT with example.
Reference manual
Provides specifications of object/figure/screen and setting methods of object
Operating manual
Describes GT Designer2 screen configuration, screen customizing methods and the series of
operations from object creation to data transfer.
1-1 1.1 Overview
MEMO
1.1 Overview
1-2
PREPARATORY
NUMERICAL/ COMMON SETTINGS OPERATION FOR
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ALARM CHARACTER DISPLAY LAMP, SWITCH FOR OBJECTS OBJECT SETTING COMMON SETTING SPECIFICATIONS OVERVIEW
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens
Type and number of creatable screens differ in GOT-A900 series and GOT-F900 series.
GOT-A900 series Base screen, window screen (overlap window, superimpose window, key window),
and report screen.
GOT-F900 series Base screen, key window screen (the displaying method is overlap window).
Base screen ( Section 2.1.1 Base screen specifications)
The basic screen for screen display on GOT.
Production status screen 1
A1254 B 348
Production status screen 1
A1254 B 348 Window screen ( Section 2.1.2 Window screen specifications)
A screen displayed over the base screen.
The created window screen can be displayed using either of the following methods.
Overlap window
A pop-up window that appears over the base screen.
This type of window can be moved and closed manually.
Up to two windows can be displayed simultaneously.
Superimposed window
A window composited on the base screen.
If superimposed window is switched, the
corresponding part of the base screen will be changed.
Key window
A pop-up window displayed over the base screen when
inputting (e.g. Numerical input). There are two types of
The 02/11/
prod 18
uctio 16:5
key window: default key window and user-created key
Pro. Line n volum3:24
Pro.
Pro.
vol.
vol.
vol.
L1 L2
L1 L2
L1 L2
50
60
20
Vo e ta
10 l. Line
L3 L4
ble
Vol
.
window.
L3 L4 30
10090 40
L3 L4 70
1 80
11505
Report screen ( Section 12.1 Report Function)
A screen for data output and format creation using report function.
02/11/18 16:53:24
The production volume table
Line Vol. Line Vol.
Pro.vol. 10 30
L1 L2 20 L3 L4 40
50 L3 L4 70
Pro.vol. L1 L2 60 80
90 105
Pro.vol. L1 L2 100 L3 L4 115
2-1 2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens
2.1.1 Base screen specifications 1
The following table describes the base screen specifications.
OVERVIEW
Screen size Number of screens can be
GOT type Number of screens can be set
(W H dots) registered
GT SoftGOT 1280 1024, 1024 768
A985GOT/GT SoftGOT 800 600
2
A97*GOT/GT SoftGOT 640 480
4096 1 to 32767
SPECIFICATIONS
A960GOT 640 400
A956WGOT 480 234
A95*GOT 320 240
F940WGOT 480 234
F94*GOT, CF94* handy GOT 320 240
3
500 1 to 500
F93*GOT(-K) 240 80
COMMON SETTING
F920GOT-K 128 64
2.1.2 Window screen specifications
The following table describes the window screen specifications.
4
OBJECT SETTING
Screen size
OPERATION FOR
Number of
PREPARATORY
(W H dots) Number of screens Initial value
GOT type screens can be
can be registered (W H dots)
Maximum*1 Minimum set
GT SoftGOT 800 480
A985GOT/GT SoftGOT "798 463"
318 176
5
A97*GOT/GT SoftGOT 640 400
COMMON SETTINGS
A960GOT "638 383"*2
1024 1 to 32767
FOR OBJECTS
480 234
A956WGOT 94 81
"478 217"
190 126
320 240
A95*GOT
"318 223"
F940WGOT "480 214" 182 120
6
F94*GOT, F94* handy GOT "318 220" 3 1 to 500 182 120
F93*GOT(-K) "240 80" 16 20 182 80 LAMP, SWITCH
F920GOT-K - - - - -
*1 The values in " " (quotation marks) in the above table indicates the screen sizes when a close key and a
movement bar are displayed on the overlap window.
For F94WGOT and F94*GOT, the close key and movement bar are additionally displayed on GOT side. (See 7
below)
CHARACTER DISPLAY
The close key and movement bar are not displayed on F93*GOT(-K).
NUMERICAL/
Close key and move bar provided Close key and move bar not provided
GOT-A900 series: 17 dots are used.
GOT-F900 series: 20 dots are used.
8
1 dot is used.
(For GOT-A900 series only)
*2 Create the screen of 638 322 dots or less for the usage of user-created key window.
If the screen of more than 638 322 dots is created, the user-created key window may not be displayed.
ALARM
2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens 2-2
2.1.1 Base screen specifications
1 Methods of displaying window screen
(1) Methods of displaying window screens and superimpose screens
The created window screens will be displayed when the corresponding window screen No. is
stored in the screen switching device for the window screen (overlap window, superimposed
window).
Example: Relation between created window screen and device for switching window screen.
Screen switching device for overlap window 1 : D100
Screen switching device for superimposed window : D200
Created w indow screen Display w indow screen
1 as an overlap w indow .
Window screen 1 Window screen 2 Production status window 1
A 1254 B 348
Production status window 1 D100 0 1
A1254 B 348 As 1 has been stored in the device for superimpose w indow sw itching,
the w indow screen 1 is displayed as an overlap w indow .
Display w indow screen
2 as a superimpose w indow
Production status window 1
A1254 B 348
D200 0 2
As 2 has been stored in the device for sw itching superimpose w indow ,
the w indow screen 2 is displayed as a superimpose w indow .
When erasing a window screen, store 0 to the device for screen switching. An overlap window can
be erased by touching the close key, if it is displayed there.(0 will be stored to the device for screen
switching.)
Section 3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting
(2) Methods of displaying key window
A key window is displayed by touching the numerical/ASCII input function objects.
Section 4.6 Key Window
2-3 2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens
2.1.2 Window screen specifications
1
2 Display position of window screen
Set the display position using GT Designer2.
A window screen is displayed in the center of a base screen if its display position has not been set.
OVERVIEW
1 Select [Object] [Window Position] [Overlap Window 1]/[Overlap Window 2]/[Superimposed
window]/[Key Window] from the menu.
2
2 Click the display position of each window.
(Specify multiples of 16 for the X and Y coordinates of the overlap window. If a non-multiple of 16 is
SPECIFICATIONS
specified for the coordinate, the overlap window is placed on the coordinate of the rounded down
number when the remainder is 7 or less, or on the coordinate of the rounded up number when the
remainder is 8 or more.)
COMMON SETTING
Set the position to the
Window screen upper left of the screen.
4
Display position of overlap window
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
The display position of an overlap window can be controlled using device.
Section 3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting
5
When a window screen has been set to be out of the base screen
COMMON SETTINGS
The window screen size will not be checked when setting its display position.Make
FOR OBJECTS
sure to set the display position of a window screen while considering its screen size.
Overlap window
When the window screen is
Base screen out of the base screen, GOT
will automatically move the
6
window screen to inside of the
base screen.
LAMP, SWITCH
Window screen
Superimpose window
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Base screen The part outside the base screen
Operation switch will not be displayed.
NUMERICAL/
Opera
The object will not be displayed.
Window screen
8
ALARM
2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens 2-4
2.1.2 Window screen specifications
3 Methods of moving window screen
The window screens that can be moved are window 1, 2 and key windows only.
Move the window screen as explained below.
Touch the Move key at top of the window to replace
the window.
During the Move key is highlighted, the GOT is the
window move mode with beeping the buzzer.
Touch the replaced position within three seconds.
The GOT leaves the move mode (Highlighted Move
key) without touching for three or more seconds.
The touched objects is not operated within three
seconds.
The window will move to the specified position.
Methods of checking window move mode (for GOT-A900 series only)
When setting up GOT security set the alarm sound to [LONG] or [Short]. With this
setting, the alarm will activate while the window is in move mode.
This function is not available if the alarm sound has been set to [None].
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Extended Option Function Manual)
Remark Closing the window after movement.
If a window has been moved and then closed, it will appear at the new position when
opened again.
2-5 2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens
2.1.2 Window screen specifications
2.1.3 Whole screen specifications 1
1 Screen laying
OVERVIEW
The screens are layered by type and displayed as shown below.
SPECIFICATIONS
en 1
tus scre
tion sta
Produc
B 348
A1254
Base screen
tion sta
tus scre
en 1 3
Produc
B 348
A1254
COMMON SETTING
Superimposed w indow
Overlap w indow 1, 2
Back
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Key w indow
Front
5
COMMON SETTINGS
(1) Base screen
Located at the back.
FOR OBJECTS
(2) Superimposed window (for GOT-A900 only)
Superimposed window overlaid in front of the base screen is displayed as a base screen.
The superimposed window including the figures and objects are arranged in the free area of the
6
base screen.
(3) Overlap window 1, 2 (for GOT-A900 only)
LAMP, SWITCH
The overlap window including the figures and objects can be displayed in front of the base screen
and superimposed window. The later appeared Overlap window is displayed in the front. The
objects of the base screen arranged in the rear of the overlap window are not displayed. To confirm
or operate the rear objects, close or move the overlap window.
Touch the rear overlap window to display it in the front.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
The w indow at the back
NUMERICAL/
w ill appear in the front.
* In case of GOT-F900 series, overlap window 1, 2 can be displayed overlapping each other on the base screen.
8
(4) Key window
Located in the front.
ALARM
2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens 2-6
2.1.3 Whole screen specifications
2 Overlap-display of figures and objects
Overlapping figures and objects are displayed according to the order of layer.
On the base screen and superimposed window, the object being changed is brought to the front.
3 Input object operation
(1) In the case of GOT-A900 series
The input objects at the back of the superimposed window can be used.
If the input objects of the superimposed window and base window overlap, both switches can be
used.
(If the touch time is not long enough, only the input objects of the superimposed window may
operate.)
The input objects at the back of an overlapped window will not operate.
Input object areas arranged within 16 dots from the peripheries of overlap windows are invalidated
and inoperable.
: Valid input object area
Overlap window 1
: Invalid input object area
: Invalidated input object area
Overlap window 2
(2) In the case of GOT-F900 series
The input objects at the back of overlap window are operable (screen overlaying).
To make overlap window without the invalid input object area
Set close key and move bar as "Non" and the 16 dot times size of the window.*1
The above setting window has no invalid input object area, as shown below.
: Valid input object area
Overlap window 1
: Invalid input object area
: Invalidated input object area
Overlap window 2
*1 In the case of GOT-F900 series, the length and height should be multiples of 16 and 20 respectively
due to the mesh of L16 x H20 dots (side by side arrangement).
The mesh setting is recommended for setting the touch switch size.
To make the above setting, click [Project] [Drawing Environment] display tabs.
4 Overlapping the quota objects
Make sure to set in order that more than two system alarms (alarm list display) in one screen by using
overlap window or superimposed window.
* In one screen, only one of this type object can be set.
2-7 2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens
2.1.3 Whole screen specifications
2.1.4 Data size of screen and project 1
Data size of screen and project differs by the set objects.
It is recommended to confirm the sizes before downloading a project to the GOT.
OVERVIEW
The following provides how to confirm the sizes on GT Designer2.
1 Select [Tools] [Data Size] [Screen] or [Project] from the menu.
2
2 The used data size can be confirmed on the displayed screen.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Refer to the following sections for the used memory size of each object.
COMMON SETTING
Section 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity
Section 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.1 Type/Number of Creatable Screens 2-8
2.1.4 Data size of screen and project
2.2 Figures and Data Capacity
2.2.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
The following table shows figures, text type, attributes and data capacity of GOT-A900 series.
The data capacity is defined by the shape. The attributes and size are not relevant.
Figure Drawing examples Attributes Data capacity (byte)
Line 20
Style, Width,
Color
Line Freeform 16 + 4 number of vertexes
Rectangle 24
16 + 4 number of vertexes
Style, Width,
Polygon Color, Pattern, (Start point and end point
Pattern color, Background counted as one vertex)
Circle 24
Style, Width,
Arc 32
Color
Style, Width,
Sector Color, Pattern, 36
Foreground, Background
Boundary, Pattern
Paint 16
Foreground Background
Import Bitmap 20 + data capacity of bit map file
-
Varies according to the contents of
Import DXF
an image.
Text Style, Text color,
Text Solid Color, Size,
Interval, Direction,
28 + 2 (No. of characters + 1)
Text Alignment,
128 number. of characters
High Quality Font
(High quality font is used when the
zoom rate of fonts are 2, 4, 6, and 8)
Scale points, Direction,
Scale Center line, Style, 24
Width, Color
(Continued to next page)
2-9 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity
2.2.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
Figure Drawing examples Attributes Data capacity (byte) 1
Report Line
- *1
OVERVIEW
Report Text
*1 Data size of report figure is included in the report setting capacity. For the report setting capacity, refer to the
following.
2
Section 2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
SPECIFICATIONS
When using A956WGOT
In wide display, the length of the actual screen display is 1.15 longer compared
to the screen drawn with GT Designer2.
3
The actual screen display can be checked using the Preview of GT Designer2.
COMMON SETTING
GT Designer2 screen A956WGOT screen
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Remark (1) GOT-compatible text
Text supported by the GT Designer2 is also supported by GOT.
However, those texts that would be changed into [?] or its size would be changed
5
on the drawing screen after being input and defined, will not be displayed in GOT.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
(2) About 1) to 15) LAMP, SWITCH
In the DATE area of the rated plate, the rounding frame of 1 to 15 will be displayed
almost like round circle if using GOT units later than [0212*T]. (The use of [*] is
different with the GOT versions.)
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.2 Figures and Data Capacity 2 - 10
2.2.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
1 Selectable attributes
Attribute Drawing examples
Full line , broken line , dotted line ,
Line style
one dot chain line, , two dots chain line
1 Dot 2 Dot 3 Dot
Line width
4 Dot 5 Dot 7 Dot
Line color, text
Maximum 256 colors (Displayed colors are reduced to the colors supported by the used GOT.)
color, text solid
The text solid color can be set to "Solid" or "Carve" text style.
color
Screen pattern
Pattern color,
pattern
Maximum 256 colors (Displayed colors are reduced to the colors supported by the used GOT.)
background color,
boundary color
Text style Standard , Thick , Solid , Carve
Direction Horizontal , Vertical
Left ,
Alignment Center ,
Right ,
Can be specified to "Horizontal" only.
Size Horizontal 0.5, 1 to 8; Vertical 0.5, 1 to 8
Between lines 0 to 16 dots
Scale points 2 to 255 points
Center line None , With
2 - 11 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity
2.2.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
1
Screen flickering when A956WGOT is used
Several types of objects or graphic patterns, which are used when creating
OVERVIEW
images, may cause the screen to flicker. This is due to the characteristics of the
liquid display crystal panel.
Confirm the combination of patterns and color types on an actual machine before
using. 2
(1) Example of patterns that can cause screen flickering
Pattern of lines, points or similar of which colors change line-by-line (horizontal
SPECIFICATIONS
pattern) particularly tends to cause a screen to flicker. (A basic figure that uses a
horizontal pattern may also cause screen flickering)
Also, a graphic pattern with high contrast is likely to flicker.
(When "Background: Black", "Foreground: White" is selected.)
3
< Example of patterns that can cause screen flickering >
COMMON SETTING
(2) Methods of preventing screen flickering. 4
Selecting a solid color pattern reduces screen flickering.
Selecting similar colors for foreground and background reduces screen flickering.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Example 2: Select similar colors for
Example 1: Select a filled color for
[Foreground] and [Background].
[Pattern].
Foreground: Blue
Pattern: Filled color
Background: None 5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.2 Figures and Data Capacity 2 - 12
2.2.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
2 Figures in BMP/DXF file format
The BMP/DXF file described below can be displayed.
If any color non-displayable for the GOT are used for a BMP file, the color will be subtracted when
displayed.
(1) BMP file
The BMP data specified below can be used.
Item Description
BMP data 256 colors, 16 colors or monochrome
2000 1600 or more: Display the BMP data reduced to a resolution of 2000 1600 or
less on GT Designer2. When the data is reduced, the resolution
Resolution*1
for vertical and horizontal is the same ratio.
2000 1600 or less: Display without changing the resolution.
*1 Errors may occur when a personal computer has insufficient memory for reading the BMP data.
When errors occur, the BMP data is not displayed on a screen for GT Designer2.
(2) DXF file
The DXF data described below can be used.
Item Description
DXF data Release 12, Release 13, Release 14
Resolution 2048 1536 or less
Difference between data available for BMP file parts and registered parts
The BMP file that can be stored in the PC card (BMP file parts) differs with the BMP
file that can be used in the GT Designer2 (registered parts).
The data used as a registered part may not be used as a BMP file part.
For the BMP file that can be used as BMP file parts, refer to the following.
Section 4.3.1 BMP files that can be displayed
Remark The BMP/DXF format files
Refer to the following manual for how to vead the BMP/DXF format files to the GT
Designer2 or precautions for use.
GT Designer2 Version2 Operating Manual
2 - 13 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity
2.2.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
1
3 Character size by magnification
The character size is 16 dots (height) 8 dots (width) when magnified by 1.
Example: When five fonts (magnified by 1) are displayed.
OVERVIEW
SBC character DBC character
16 dots 5 = 80 dots 8 dots 5 = 40 dots
2
16 dots 16 dots
Character size (dots) changes according to the magnification as follows.
SPECIFICATIONS
Height Width (dots)
Height Width magnification
magnification 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0.5 8 8 8 16 8 32 8 48 8 64 8 80 8 96 8 112 8 128 3
1 16 8 16 16 16 32 16 48 16 64 16 80 16 96 16 112 16 128
COMMON SETTING
2 32 8 32 16 32 32 32 48 32 64 32 80 32 96 32 112 32 128
3 48 8 48 16 48 32 48 48 48 64 48 80 48 96 48 112 48 128
4 64 8 64 16 64 32 64 48 64 64 64 80 64 96 64 112 64 128
5 80 8 80 16 80 32 80 48 80 64 80 80 80 96 80 112 80 128
6 96 8 96 16 96 32 96 48 96 64 96 80 96 96 96 112 96 128 4
7 112 8 112 16 112 32 112 48 112 64 112 80 112 96 112 112 112 128
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
8 128 8 128 16 128 32 128 48 128 64 128 80 128 96 128 112 128 128
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.2 Figures and Data Capacity 2 - 14
2.2.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
2.2.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series
The following table shows figures, text type, attributes and data capacity in GOT-F900 series.
The data capacity is defined by the shape. The attributes and size are not relevant.
Figure Drawing examples Attributes Data capacity (byte)
Line Style, Color 20
Rectangle
Style, Pattern,
24
Pattern color:
Circle
Import BMP/
- 20 + data capacity of bitmap file
DXF format
Text color, Size,
Text 34 + number of fonts
Alignment
1 Selectable attributes
Attribute Drawing examples
Full line , broken line , dotted line ,
Line style
one dot chain line, , two dots chain line
Line width 1 Dot
Maximum 256 colors (The GOT will choose the nearest color when an incompatible color is
Display color
specified.)
Pattern
Pattern color
Maximum 256 colors (The GOT will choose the nearest color when an incompatible color is
Pattern
specified.)
background
2 Figures in BMP/DXF file format
The BMP/DXF file described below can be displayed.
If any color non-displayable for the GOT are used for a BMP file, the color will be subtracted when
displayed.
GOT types Drawing examples
F920GOT(-K) Bitmap figure of 2 colors (monochrome) or more will be displayed in black and white. (The colors
F930GOT(-K) other than black are displayed as white.)
F940GOT 16 colors type : Bitmap figure of 16 colors or more will be displayed in 8 colors.
F940 handy Monochrome type : Bitmap figure of 2 colors (monochrome) or more will be displayed in 2
GOT colors.
F940WGOT Bitmap figure of 256 colors or less will be displayed in similar 256 colors.
2 - 15 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity
2.2.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series
(1) BMP file
1
The BMP data specified below can be used.
Item Description
OVERVIEW
BMP data 256 colors, 16 colors or monochrome
2000 1600 or more: Display the BMP data reduced to a resolution of 2000 1600 or
less on GT Designer2. When the data is reduced, the resolution
Resolution*1
for vertical and horizontal is the same ratio. 2
2000 1600 or less: Display without changing the resolution.
*1 Errors may occur when a personal computer has insufficient memory for reading the BMP data.
SPECIFICATIONS
When errors occur, the BMP data is not displayed on a screen for GT Designer2.
(2) DXF file
The DXF data described below can be used.
Item Description
3
DXF data Release 12, Release 13, Release 14
COMMON SETTING
Resolution 2048 1536 or less
Difference between data available for BMP file parts and registered parts
The BMP file that can be stored in the PC card (BMP file parts) differs with the BMP
file that can be used in the GT Designer2 (registered parts). 4
The data used as a registered part may not be used as a BMP file part.
For the BMP file that can be used as BMP file parts, refer to the following.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Section 4.3.1 BMP files that can be displayed
Remark The BMP/DXF format files
Refer to the following manual for how to vead the BMP/DXF format files to the GT 5
Designer2 or precautions for use.
COMMON SETTINGS
GT Designer2 Version2 Operating Manual
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.2 Figures and Data Capacity 2 - 16
2.2.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series
3 Character size magnification
The character size is 16 dots (height) 8 dots (width) when magnified by 1.
Example: When five fonts (magnified by 1) are displayed.
SBC character DBC character
16 dots 5 = 80 dots 8 dots 5 = 40 dots
16 dots 16 dots
Character size (dots) changes according to magnification as follows:
The character (switch, numeric value and ASCII) in objects can be set to 6 8 dots.
Height Width (dots)
Width magnification
Height magnification
1 2 3 4
0.5 8 16 8 32 8 48 8 64
1 16 16 16 32 16 48 16 64
2 32 16 32 32 32 48 32 64
3 48 16 48 32 48 48 48 64
4 64 16 64 32 64 48 64 64
The width size is half of height size
2 - 17 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity
2.2.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series
2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions 1
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
OVERVIEW
1 Object specifications 2
This section explains the main object specifications in table.
Refer to the explanation (reference section) of the corresponding object function for details since the
SPECIFICATIONS
specifications and precautions may differ by the used GOT.
Note that max. number of setting objects and memory capacity in the table are based on default value
settings.
When the memory capacity is increased by data operation, display methods and other settings, the
number of objects may be reduced. 3
COMMON SETTING
(1) Max number of objects can be set.
Up to 512 objects can be set in one screen.
513th object or later is invalid. (The object will not operate.)
(2) Max number of objects in which "Trigger" has been set to "Sampling".
Up to 100 objects can be set in one screen. 4
101st object or later is invalid. (The object will not operate.)
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions 2 - 18
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
Numeric value, character display
Max. No. of
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Memory Hardware
Function Display attribute Reference
capacity restriction
applicable for
one object
(byte)
512 Figure Frame
Plate Color Color - Section 7.1
Numerical
24 Blink Reverse
Display
256 Figure Frame
Plate Color Color - Section 7.1
Numerical
32 Blink Reverse
Input
1 Figure Frame
Plate Color Color - Section 7.2
Refer to (1)
Data List Blink Reverse
below
256 Figure Frame
Plate Color Color - Section 7.3
ASCII 8 + No of
Blink Reverse
Display characters
256 Figure Frame
Plate Color Color - Section 7.3
8 + No of
ASCII Input Blink Reverse
characters
2 Figure Frame
Plate Color - Section 7.4
Clock
8 Display Color
Display
256
Figure Frame
- Section 7.5
Comment Display Size Blink
24
Display
Style Text Solid
32767*1
Color Reverse
Comment Blink High - Section 4.1
Refer to (2)
Quality
below
Font
*1 Maximum of 32767 comments can be registered in one project.
(1) Memory capacity for data list display function
32 + {12 (CN + 1)} + (6 DN)
CN: Number of columnsDN: Number of devices
(2) Memory capacity of comment
16 + (14 RC) + (2 AT)
(Value within a parenthesis will be converted into multiples of 4.)
RC: Number of registered commentsAT: Number of all characters
2 - 19 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
1
Alarm
Max. No. of
OVERVIEW
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Hardware
Function
Memory
capacity
Display attribute
restriction
Reference 2
applicable for
one object
SPECIFICATIONS
(byte)
1
Figure Frame Refer to
Alarm List Plate Color Display
This section
Section 8.2 3
(System Size
184
Alarm)
COMMON SETTING
24*1 Figure Frame Refer to
Plate Color Display Section 8.1
Alarm List 160 + device *2 This section
Size
(User Alarm)
points 24
4
1) Figure Frame Refer to
OBJECT SETTING
Plate Color Title Section 8.3
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Alarm Refer to (1) This section
Ruled Line
History below
1
(1 object for
Floating
each project) Text Size
*3
- Section 8.4 5
Alarm 80
COMMON SETTINGS
*1 Up to 16 objects with "Store Memory" setting can be set.
FOR OBJECTS
*2 Objects with "Store Memory" setting is unusable.
*3 Operable only during ON.
(1) Memory capacity for alarm history display 6
80 + {(2 TT + 4) DI} + (16 DN)
TT: Number of title characters DI: Number of display items DN: Number of devices
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions 2 - 20
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
Animation
Max. No. of
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Memory Hardware
Function Display attribute Reference
capacity restriction
applicable for
one object
(byte)
256 Display Mode Positioning
Point
- Section 9.1
Part Color
Parts Display 44 Blink
256 Movement Type
Display Mode
- Section 9.2
Part Positioning Point
60 Part Color Blink
Movement
Figure
High Quality Font
256 Frame
Lamp
Back Ground
Pattern - Section 6.1
Lamp Blink
Text Style
24 Text Color
Solid Color
L W
Figure
Frame
256 Plate Color
Needle Color
Meter Panel Color Section
Text -
Display Size 10.1
Panel meter
Text Color
40 High Quality Font
Scale Display
Scale Points
Boundary Color
256 Level Color
Pattern Section
-
Background 10.2
Level 40 Graph Color
Pattern
Figure
24*1 Frame
Plate Color Section
Scale Display Scale Points -
Graph Color 10.3
Trend graph *3 *3
76 + device
Style
points 2 Width
Figure
Frame
32*2
Plate color
Scale Display Section
-
Scale Points 10.4
Line graph *4 *4
76 + device Graph Color
points 2 Style
Width
(Continued to next page)
2 - 21 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
Max. No. of
1
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
OVERVIEW
Memory Hardware
Function Display attribute Reference
capacity restriction
applicable for
one object 2
(byte)
SPECIFICATIONS
Figure
256 Frame
Plate color Section
-
Graph color 10.5
Bar graph 220 Pattern
Background
Figure 3
Frame
32 Plate Color
COMMON SETTING
Division Number Section
Direction -
Statistics Scale Display 10.6
Graph 444 Scale Points
Graph Color Pattern
BackGround
24*1
Figure
Frame
4
Plate Color Section
-
Scatter Display mode 10.7
OBJECT SETTING
Refer to (1)
OPERATION FOR
*3 *3
Graph frame display
PREPARATORY
Graph below Graph display format
*1 Up to 16 objects with "Store Memory" settings can be set.
*2 Only one object with "Locus mode" settings can be set to one project.
*3 Objects with "Store Memory" settings is unusable.
*4 Objects with "Locus" settings is unusable. 5
(1) Memory capacity for scatter graph
COMMON SETTINGS
128 + {4 SN (PN + 1)}
FOR OBJECTS
SN: Number of stored graphsPN: Number of points
Touch switch
Max. No. of
6
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
LAMP, SWITCH
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Memory Hardware
Function Display attribute Reference
capacity restriction
applicable for
one object 7
(byte)
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Figure
Frame
NUMERICAL/
256*1*2 Switch
Pattern BackGround
Style Text Color - Section 6.2
Touch switch Solid Color
48 X Y
Text
8
High Quality Font
*1 Up to 10 touch switches with its max. number of times for operation set can be set in one screen.
*2 Up to 100 touch switches with "ON/OFF delay" settings can be set.
ALARM
2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions 2 - 22
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
Trigger Action
Max. No. of
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Memory Hardware
Function Display attribute Reference
capacity restriction
applicable for
one object
(byte)
512
(512 objects
for each Section
- -
Status project) 11.1
Observation Refer to (1)
below
256
(256 objects
for each Refer to Section
-
project) This section 11.2
Recipe
Refer to (2)
below
32
(32 objects for
Section
each project) - -
11.3
Time action
1592
(1) Memory capacity for status observation
64 + (36 TS) + {16 (AI + AW)} + (20 WT)
TS : Number of set triggers
AI : Number of indirect devices and bit ALT devices under all conditions
AW : Total number of write devices under all conditions
WT : Number of conditions of word range
(2) Memory capacity for recipe function
Stored in built-in memory : 8 + (4 RD) + (108 RF)
RD : Total number of devices for each recipe
RF : Number of recipe files
Saved in PC card : This section Data capacity available for storage on memory
card/hard disk
2 - 23 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
1
Auxiliary
Max. No. of
OVERVIEW
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Memory Hardware
Function
capacity
Display attribute
restriction
Reference 2
applicable for
one object
SPECIFICATIONS
(byte)
Not available in
- A950 Handy
GOT, A95*GOT, 3
A956WGOT, GT Section
Test -
SoftGOT 13.2
COMMON SETTING
Refer to This
-
section
256
(256 objects
for each
4
project) - - Chapter 14
OBJECT SETTING
Script
OPERATION FOR
Refer to (1)
PREPARATORY
below
2047
- -
Section 5
13.1
Script Depending on
COMMON SETTINGS
the object
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Memory capacity for script function (The memory capacity for script function set in each window will
be 0 if the window screen is not displayed.)
{36 (1 + BC + WC1 + WC2 + SC)} + {40 (1 + PS + BS + WS1 + WS2 + SS)}
BC : Number of settings for overlaying base screen currently displayed 6
WC1 : Number of settings for overlaying window screen 1 currently displayed
WC2 : Number of settings for overlaying window screen 2 currently displayed
LAMP, SWITCH
SC : Number of settings for overlaying superimposed window currently displayed
PS : Number of settings for project scripts
BS : Number of settings for scripts of base screen currently displayed
WS1 : Number of settings for scripts of window screen 1 currently displayed
WS2 : Number of settings for scripts of window screen 2 currently displayed 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
SS : Number of settings for scripts of superimposed window currently displayed
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions 2 - 24
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
External input and output
Max. No. of
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Memory Hardware
Function Display attribute Reference
capacity restriction
applicable for
one object
(byte)
1 Print Format
(1 object for Print Digits Not available in
each project) Decimal Point A950 handy
GOT Section
Refer to This 12.1
Report
Refer to (1) section
Print Digits
below
1 Not available in
(1 object for A950 handy
each project) GOT Section
-
Refer to This 12.2
Hard copy
4
section
1 Not available in
(1 object for A950 handy
each project) GOT, GT Section
- SoftGOT2 12.3
Operation Panel Refer to This
128
section
32
Not available in
(32 objects for
A950 handy Section
each project) Text size
GOT, GT 12.4
Bar code
- SoftGOT2
100
(100 objects Not available in
for each A950 handy Section
-
project) GOT, GT 12.5
Sound
SoftGOT2
128
4
Available in
(4 objects for
A985GOT-V Section
Video each project) - Refer to This 12.6
- section
Available in
-
A985GOT-V Section
RGB - Refer to This 12.7
-
section
2 - 25 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
(1) Memory capacity for report function//shiki
1
136 + 4 Nin + (2 Nfnv) + 20 Nobv + (4 + Nchv 2) Nclv + (36 + 8 Nrv)
Nprv + (44 + 8 Nrv) Npcv
OVERVIEW
For the calculation above, convert the values below to a multiple of 4.
(Example: If the value is "10", assume "12" to calculate.)
Nlin : Number of lines set in the print format of the report setting 2
Nfnv : Number of characters of file name
Nobv : Total number of objects arranged on the report screen
SPECIFICATIONS
Nchv : Number of characters
Nclv : Number of lines and characters set
Nrv : Number of data items in the expression
Nprv : Number of numerical prints set
Npcv : Number of comment prints set 3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions 2 - 26
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
2 Required device
Each object function may require optional modules depending on the GOT used.
(1) In the case of A985GOT (-V)/A97*GOT/A960GOT
Function name Required device
Recipe Memory board
Sound output Memory board and external speaker
Operation panel External I/O interface module
Video input interface module
Video display
Video/RGB hybrid interface module
RGB input interface module
RGB display
Video/RGB hybrid interface module
(2) In the case of A956WGOT
Function name Required device
SRAM card: Memory card interface module
When using PC card
Alarm history Compact flash PC card: Optional module not required
display When printing
Printer interface module
historical data
SRAM card: Memory card interface module
When using PC card
Hard copy Compact flash PC card: Optional module not required
When printing Printer interface module
Printer interface module
Report SRAM card: Not available
When using PC card
Compact flash PC card: Optional module not required
Recipe Memory board
SRAM card: Memory card interface module
Use PC card
Compact flash PC card: Optional module not required
Operation panel External I/O interface module
(3) In the case of A95*GOT
Function name Required device
SRAM card: Memory card interface module
When using PC card
Alarm history Compact flash PC card: N/A
display When printing alarm
Printer interface module
history
When using PC card Printer interface module
Hard copy Memory extension type GOT (A95*GOT-*BD-M3)
When printing
Printer interface module
Report Memory extension type GOT (A95*GOT-*BD-M3)
SRAM card: Memory card interface module
Recipe When using PC card
Compact flash PC card: N/A
Operation panel External I/O interface module
2 - 27 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
1
When using an optional module with A956WGOT and A95*GOT
The external I/O interface module, printer interface module and memory board
OVERVIEW
interface module cannot be used simultaneously for A956WGOT and A95*GOT
(External input/output, printing and storing data to PC card cannot be executed
simultaneously).
Therefore, when using a function such as the alarm history display function by which 2
printing and storing to PC card are simultaneously executed, some function can not
be used.
SPECIFICATIONS
(When using compact flash PC card for A956WGOT, printing and storing to PC card
can be performed simultaneously because no interface is required.)
3 Data capacity available for storage on memory card/hard disk
3
(1) Data capacity available for storage on memory card (In the case of A985GOT/A97*GOT/
A960GOT/A956WGOT/A95*GOT)
COMMON SETTING
Some objects have a function that allows storing data into a memory card.
The data capacity available for a memory card is shown as follows.
Object name Data capacity
Report function (DN 8) + 36 + {(DN 8 + 8) CT} 4
(byte) DN: Number of devices CT: Number of times for collecting (sampling)
When saving 3072 alarm historical data
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Alarm history function
PREPARATORY
Cumulation mode (when saved in CSV format) : Approx. 97 (Approx. 400)
(k byte)
History mode (when saved in CSV format) : Approx. 72 (Approx. 360)
Data capacity per screen (The following are reference values.) Number of screens to be stored
Data capacity per screen
Model BMP format JPEG format
5
COMMON SETTINGS
A985GOT-V 470.0 (Video window: 1406.3) 133.4
A985GOT 470.0 113.9
FOR OBJECTS
A975GOT 301.0 86.6
A970GOT-TB* 150.0 86.6
Hard copy function
A970GOT-SB* 150.0 84.5
(k byte)
A970GOT-LB* 37.6 N/A
6
A960GOT 37.6 N/A
A956WGOT 110.0 33.2 LAMP, SWITCH
A95*GOT-TBD 76.1 26.8
A95*GOT-SBD 37.6 27.6
A95*GOT-LBD 9.4 N/A
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(149 F) + (9 16) + (14 2)
Recipe function RF : Number of recipe files
NUMERICAL/
(byte) R16 : Total number of 16-bit devices in each recipe file
R32 : R16: Total number of 32-bit devices in each recipe file
8
ALARM
2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions 2 - 28
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
(2) Data capacity available for storage on hard disk (When using GT SoftGOT2)
Some objects have a function that allows storing data into a hard disk.
The data capacity available for storage on the hard disk is shown as follows.
Object name Data capacity
CT + (PCT-1)
{(HR+1) RD} + CT (RR RD)
Report function PCT
(byte) CT : Number of times for collecting (sampling) PCT : Sampling number available for 1 printed page
RD : Data size of 1 line RR : Repeated lineHR : Number of header lines
Data size per line (See below) (Number of print (Number of occurrences, restorations, confirmations) + 1)
Mode Data capacity
History mode 80
Alarm history function Cumulation mode (Status only) 79
(byte) Cumulation mode (Cumulation time or occurrence
88
time, status)
Cumulation mode (Cumulation time, occurrence
97
time, status)
Data capacity per screen (The following are reference values.) Number of screens to be stored
Data capacity per screen
Model BMP format JPEG format
Hard copy function SoftGOT2 (1280 1024) 1281.0 107.0
(k byte)
SoftGOT2 (1024 768) 767.0 93.6
SoftGOT2 (800 600) 469.8 84.6
SoftGOT2 (640 480) 301.0 64.8
(149 RF) + (9 R16) + (14 R32)
Recipe function RF : Number of recipe files
(byte) R16 : Total number of 16-bit devices in each recipe file
R32 : R16: Total number of 32-bit devices in each recipe file
2 - 29 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
2.3.1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
2.3.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series 1
1 Specifications of individual objects
OVERVIEW
Specifications for object functions are listed as follows.
For details of the specifications and precautions, refer to the section of the relevant object function.
Maximum number of setting objects and memory capacity in the table are determined assuming all of 2
the setting items are set to the default values.
When the memory capacity is increased by setting data operation or display methods, the number of
SPECIFICATIONS
objects may be reduced.
(1) The maximum number of setting objects
The maximum number of setting objects per screen may differ depending on the 3
parts.
Refer to the GOT-F900 Operating Manual for the maximum setting number.
COMMON SETTING
(2) Number of parts that can be actually displayed
The number of parts that can be actually displayed is shown as follows.
[Max. No. of settings in table] = [Base screen] + [Set overlay screen]
(3) Memory capacity
The memory size may increase or decrease depending on the conditions such as 4
presence or absence of frames.
The memory size shown in the table is the minimum unit of each part.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions 2 - 30
2.3.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series
Numerical or character display
Max. No. of
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Memory Hardware
Function Display attribute Reference
capacity restriction
applicable for
one object
(byte)
50
Shape Frame
- Section 7.1
Numerical Plate Number color
32
display
50
Shape Frame
- Section 7.1
Numerical Plate Number color
48
input
10
Shape Frame
- Section 7.3
ASCII Plate Text color
32
display
10
Shape Frame
- Section 7.3
Plate Text color
ASCII input 32
10
Shape Frame
- Section 7.4
Plate Display color
Clock display 28
50
Shape Frame
- Section 7.5
Comment Word: 36 Display size
display Bit: 44
2 - 31 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
2.3.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series
1
Alarm
Max. No. of
OVERVIEW
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Hardware
Function
Memory
capacity
Display attribute
restriction
Reference 2
applicable for
one object
SPECIFICATIONS
(byte)
1
Shape Frame,
- Section 8.1 3
Alarm list Plate Display size
(user alarm) 32
COMMON SETTING
1
Shape Frame
- Section 8.3
Alarm history Plate Title color
48
display
4
1
(1 object for
Shape Frame
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
each project) - Section 8.4
PREPARATORY
Floating Plate Title color
alarm 80
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions 2 - 32
2.3.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series
Motion
Max. No. of
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Memory Hardware
Function Display attribute Reference
capacity restriction
applicable for
one object
(byte)
50 Display mode
Positioning point - Section 9.1
Word: 32
Parts display Parts color
Bit: 36
50 Frame Lamp color
Text - Section 6.1
Lamp display 32 Text color, X Y
Shape Frame
50
Plate Needle color Section
-
Panel meter Meter panel color 10.1
40
display Scale
1 Shape Frame
Not available for Section
Plate Graph color
Trend graph 40+2 No of F920GOT-K 10.3
Line style Scale
display graphs
1 Shape Frame
Not available for Section
Plate Graph color
Line graph 36+2 No of F920GOT-K 10.4
Line style Scale
display graphs
50 Shape Frame
Section
Plate Graph color -
Bar graph 10.5
44 Scale
display
Shape Frame
1
Plate Division
Not available for Section
number
Statistics 28+No of F920GOT-K 10.6
Direction Graph color,
graph display devices
Scale
4
(4 objects for Not available for
Section
each project) - F920GOT-K,
10.8
Sampling F930GOT (-K)
-
2 - 33 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
2.3.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series
1
Touch switch
Max. No. of
OVERVIEW
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Hardware
Function
Memory
capacity
Display attribute
restriction
Reference 2
applicable for
one object
SPECIFICATIONS
(byte)
50 Shape Frame
Not available for
Touch switch 28
Switch
H W
Text color
Text
F920GOT-K
Section 6.2
3
COMMON SETTING
Trigger Action
Max. No. of
setting objects Trigger Device Others
4
in one screen
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
PREPARATORY
Memory Hardware
Function Display attribute Reference
capacity restriction
applicable for
one object
(byte) 5
COMMON SETTINGS
40
(4 objects for
FOR OBJECTS
Section
each project) - -
Status 11.1
8+28 No of
observation
set points
256
(256 objects
6
for each Section
- -
project) 11.2 LAMP, SWITCH
Recipe
-
8
(8 objects for
each project) - -
Section 7
11.3
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Time action
-
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions 2 - 34
2.3.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series
Auxiliary
Max. No. of
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Memory Hardware
Function Display attribute Reference
capacity restriction
applicable for
one object
(byte)
4
Section
- -
Set overlay Depending on 13.1
screen the object
External input/output
Max. No. of
setting objects Trigger Device Others
in one screen
Ordinary
Sampling
Range
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
Bit Trigger
ON Sampling/OFF sampling
Bit device
Word device
Offset specification
Switching Station No
Security
Data Operation
Memory Hardware
Function Display attribute Reference
capacity restriction
applicable for
one object
(byte)
1
(1 object for Not available for
Section
each project) - F930GOT (-K),
12.2
Hard copy F920GOT-K
24
-
Section
- -
Operation 12.3
-
panel
32
Not available for
(32 objects for
F940 Handy Section
each project) Text size
GOT, 12.4
Bar code
- F920GOT-K
2 - 35 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
2.3.2 In the case of GOT-F900 series
2.4 Clock Function 1
2.4.1 Clock function for monitoring by GOT
OVERVIEW
The clock function differs depending on the GOT.
This section explains the clock function used by various GOTs.
2
1 GOT-A900 series
SPECIFICATIONS
Using the clock function of the PLC CPU (GOT does not have clock data.), the GOT verifies the clock
data of the PLC CPU every hour.
The monitoring target depends on the connection type.
Connection type Location from which time data are read
Bus connection Connected PLC CPU
3
CPU direction connection
COMMON SETTING
Connected PLC CPU*1
Computer link connection
MELSECNET (II)
PLC CPU of master station
MELSECNET/B
When using A9GT-QJ71LP23 or A9GT-QJ71BR13
MELSECNET connection PLC CPU of control station 4
MELSECNET/10 When using A7GT-J71LP23 or A7GT-J71BR13
OBJECT SETTING
PLC CPU of control station (When QCPU is used, monitoring is
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
available by making the settings in "Hint (1)")
Intelligent device station PLC CPU of master station
CC-Link connection
Remote device station Clock function not available
Ethernet connection PLC CPU set as host in GT Designer2
5
Microcomputer connection Clock function not available
COMMON SETTINGS
Third party PLC connection Connected PLC CPU
FOR OBJECTS
*1 When connecting GOT to a remote I/O station, make sure that the master station is connected to MELSECNET/
H network system and powered ON.
(1) Adjusting GOT date/time and PLC CPU date/time.
(a) When adjusting GOT date/time to PLC CPU date/time
6
When adjusting GOT date/time to PLC CPU date/time
GOT reads clock data of PLC CPU once every hour. LAMP, SWITCH
Therefore, if the clock data of PLC CPU has been changed, the time delay of
GOT will remain unchanged for up to one hour. However, by turning the GOT
ready signal (system signal 2 "b1") OFF, GOT can read the clock data at any
timing. 7
(The GOT ready signal (system signal 2 "b1") returns to ON immediately after
CHARACTER DISPLAY
turned OFF)
NUMERICAL/
Section 3.5 System Information Setting
(b) When adjusting PLC CPU date/time to GOT date/time
Set the date/time using "TIME SET" utility.
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Extended Option Functions Manual) 8
ALARM
2.4 Clock Function 2 - 36
2.4.1 Clock function for monitoring by GOT
(2) Using the clock function when connected to QCPU via MELSECNET/10
connection
Place a check-mark to [Use special relay/special register of SM1000/SD1000 or
later] in the [PC system setting] of [PC parameter setting] in GX Developer to use
the clock function. (Not available for Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, and Q01CPU.)
(3) Using the clock function when connecting with micorcomputer
(a) Install the A9GT-RS2T (clock function built-in communication board)to GOT.
(It is not available for the A95*GOT/A956WGOT because the communication
board can not be installed to them.)
For specifications of the A9GT-RS2T, refer to the following manual.
A9GT-RS2T Type Clock Function Built-in Serial Communication Board
Users Manual.
(b) Clock function of the A9GT-RS2T can be used in microcomputer connection
only
Clock function of the A9GT-RS2T is not available in any other connection
types.
Time/Date setting in remote I/O connection
Time/Date setting cannot be performed using "TIME SET" utility when GOT is
connected to a remote I/O station.
In this case, make the time/date setting of the PLC CPU in the master station in the
time/date setting of GX Developer.
2 GT SoftGOT
This GOT displays PC clock data.
3 GOT-F900 series
GOT other than F920GOT-K displays the clock data stored in the GOT.
The F920GOT-K reads the clock data of only FXCPU (the model with clock function) among PLC CPU
models.
2 - 37 2.4 Clock Function
2.4.1 Clock function for monitoring by GOT
1
2.4.2 PLC CPU with clock function (GOT-A900 series only)
The following functions require the clock function of the PLC CPU.
OVERVIEW
These functions are not applicable if the PLC CPU has no clock function.
Clock display function Alarm list display function
Alarm history display function Time action function
2
1 PLC CPU with clock function
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) PLC manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Abbreviations/Generic terms Description
Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU,
QCPU
QCPU (Q Mode) Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, Q25HCPU, 3
Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU, Q12PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU
COMMON SETTING
QCPU (A Mode) Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, Q06HCPU-A
Q2ACPU, Q2AHCPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU,
QnACPU Type
QnACPU Q4ACPU, Q4ARCPU
QnASCPU Type Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, Q2ASHCPU-S1
AnUCPU A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU, A4UCPU
AnACPU A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1, A3ACPU
4
AnNCPU A1NCPU, A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1, A3NCPU
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
A2US(H)CPU A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1, A2USHCPU-S1
ACPU A1SCPU, A1SHCPU, A2SCPU, A2SCPU-S1,
AnS(H)CPU
A2SHCPU, A2SHCPU-S1, A1SCPUC24-R2
A1SJ(H)CPU A1SJCPU, A1SJCPU-S3, A1SJHCPU
A2CCPU A2CJCPU, A2CCPU, A2CCPUC24 5
A1FXCPU A1FXCPU
COMMON SETTINGS
FX1N series, FX1NC series, FX1S series,
FOR OBJECTS
FXCPU FX2 series*1, FX2C series*1, FX2N series,
FX2NC series*1 FX3UC series*1
Motion controller CPU
Q172CPU, Q173CPU, Q172CPUN, Q173CPUN
(Q Series) 6
Motion A373UCPU, A373UCPU-S3, A273UCPU, A273UHCPU,
controller CPU Motion controller CPU A273UHCPU-S3, A171SCPU, A171SCPU-S3, A171SCPU-S3N,
(A Series) A171SHCPU, A171SHCPUN, A172SHCPU, A172SHCPUN, LAMP, SWITCH
A173UHCPU, A173UHCPU-S1
MELDAS C6/C64 FCA C6, FCA C64
*1 A clock function is usable when the real time clock function board or E2PROM memory with real time clock func-
tion is mounted. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.4 Clock Function 2 - 38
2.4.2 PLC CPU with clock function (GOT-A900 series only)
(2) PLC manufactured by other companies
Abbreviations/Generic terms Description
C200HS, C200H*1, C200H series (C200HX, C200HG,
C200HE*2), CQM1*3, CV500, CV1000,
Omron PLC CV2000, VM1-CPU01, CVM1-CPU11, CVM1-CPU21,
CS1 CJ1, CS1D, CS1M,
CPM2A, CPM2C*9, CQM1H*3*10
Yaskawa PLC*4 GL120, GL130
Allen-Bradley PLC*5 SLC5/03, SLC5/04, LC5/05
JW-22CU, JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH, JW-70CUH*6,
Sharp PLC
JW-100CU,J W-100CUH*6, Z-512J
PROSEC T series T3, T3H, T2E, T2N
Toshiba PLC*5
PROSEC V series Model3000(S3), S2T
Siemens PLC SIMATIC S7-300 series, SIMATIC S7-400 series
H-302(CPU2-03H), H-702(CPU2-07H), H-1002(CPU2-10H),
Large-scale H series
H-2002(CPU2-20H), H-4010(CPU3-40H)
H-200(CPU-02H, CPE-02H), H-250(CPU21-02H),
Hitachi PLC H-200 to 252 series H-252(CPU22-02H), H-252B(CPU22-02HB),
(HIDEC H H-252C(CPU22-02HC, CPE22-02HC)
series) H-20DR, H-28DR, H-40DR, H-64DR,
H series
H-20DT, H-28DT, H-40DT, H-64DT,
board type
HL-40DR, HL-64DR
EH-150 series EH-CPU104, EH-CPU208, EH-CPU308, EH-CPU316
FP1-C24C, P1-C40C, FP2*7, FP2SH,
Matsushita Electric Works PLC FP2-CCU*7, FP3*8, FP5, FP10(S),
FP10SH, FP-M(C20TC), FP-M(C32TC)
*1 Memory cassette with built-in clock is required when used with C200H-CPU21/CPU22/CPU23.
C200H-CPU01/CPU02/CPU023 does not support the clock function.
*2 C200H-CPU11 does not support the clock function.
*3 Memory cassette with built-in clock is required.
*4 Use the default value (409988 to 409995) for the device where the clock data are stored.
*5 Day-of-the-week data are not provided.
*6 The clock function is not available if link module (ZW-10CM) is used in the JW-70CUH/100CUH.
*7 Any of the extension memory module, FP2-EM1, FP2-EM2 or FP2-EM3 is required.
*8 Only AFP3210C-F/AFP3211C-F/AFP3212C-F/AFP3220C-F supports the clock function.
*9 Some models do not include the clock function.
*10 The COM-CPU61 FM device cannot be monitored.
2 - 39 2.4 Clock Function
2.4.2 PLC CPU with clock function (GOT-A900 series only)
2.5 Overlap Setting 1
2.5.1 Overlap between figure and object
OVERVIEW
When a figure and an object are overlapped, the object will be always displayed over the figure.
2
2.5.2 Overlap between objects
SPECIFICATIONS
Overlap between objects
Make sure to set in order objects will not overlap each other.
Failure to observe this instruction will cause the overlapping part to appear 3
incorrectly when displayed on GOT.
However, the objects can be set to overlap with each other in the following cases
COMMON SETTING
and .
1 When using combined with touch switch (GOT-A900 series only)
Touch switch can be set to overlap with objects other than touch switch, numerical input and ASCII 4
input.
Always make sure not to set [Shape] to [None] in touch switch setting, in order to make the touch switch
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
overlap with other object.
In this case, [Text] is not allowed to be set.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.5 Overlap Setting 2 - 40
2.5.1 Overlap between figure and object
2 When using combined with level display
Level display can be set to with Numerical display and Comment display.
(One numerical display or comment display can be set to overlap with one level display.)
Example 1: When "Display mode" is set to "Transparent"
The original color of the numeric or the text can be displayed.
This setting is effective for use of the color-display GOT.
20 48 98
Example 2: When "Display mode" is set to "XOR"
This setting enables the object overlapping with the filled part of Level display to be
inversed, which cannot be done in "Transparent" mode.
This setting is effective for use of the monochrome-display GOT.
FULL FULL FULL
Make sure to refer to the instructions on Level display when setting overlapping with Level display,
Numerical display and Comment display.
Section 10.2 Level
2 - 41 2.5 Overlap Setting
2.5.2 Overlap between objects
2.6 Supported Devices 1
2.6.1 GOT internal devices
OVERVIEW
They are devices kept in the internal of GOT.
The internal devices of GOT are classified into the following types.
2
GOT bit register (GB) : Bit register located inside the GOT and used as bit devices.
GOT data register (GD) : Data register located inside the GOT and used as word devices.
SPECIFICATIONS
GOT special register (GS) : Special register located inside the GOT, which stores internal informa-
tion, communication statuses, error information, etc.
By monitoring GS with the object function, various information of the
GOT can be checked.
3
The usage of GB, GD, and GS has no relation with GOT connection types. (However, they cannot be con-
trolled in sequence programs.)
COMMON SETTING
Valid setting ranges of the devices are as follows.
Notation for device
Device name Valid setting range
number
GOT-A900 : GB64 to GB16383
Bit
GOT bit register (GB) GOT-F900 : GB132 to GB255 (For F920GOT-K) Decimal 4
device
: GB132 to GB1023 For other than F920GOT-K)
OBJECT SETTING
GOT-A900 : GD64 to GD16383
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
GOT data register (GD) GOT-F900 : GD100 to GD127 For F920GOT-K)
Word
: GD100 to GD1023 For other than F920GOT-K) Decimal
device
GOT-A900 : GS0 to GS511
GOT special register (GS)
GOT-F900 : N/A
5
COMMON SETTINGS
Value in GOT internal device
FOR OBJECTS
When the GOT is powered off or reset, "0" is stored in the GOT internal device.
When project data is downloaded, the value is held.
Application of GB and GD 6
GB and GD are useful for processing in the areas where the devices do not have to
be used in the PLC CPU.
LAMP, SWITCH
Device for screen switching
Work area for the script function
Storage area for bar code read values
etc
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 42
2.6.1 GOT internal devices
1 GOT bit register
GB devices are listed as follows.
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
Device Function Device Function
GB0 Must not be used GB0 to 12 Must not be used
*1 OUTPUT terminal for external output GB13 Communication error
GB1
GB2 to GB9 Must not be used GB14,GB15 Must not be used
GB10 External output Y0 OUT output GB16 Buzzer (1 beep)*2
GB11 External output Y1 OUT output GB17 Buzzer (3 beeps)*2
GB12 External output Y2 OUT output GB18 Buzzer (continuous beeps)*2
GB13 External output Y3 OUT output GB19 to GB131 Must not be used
GB14 External output Y4 OUT output GB132 to 1023 User area
GB15 External output Y5 OUT output
GB16 External output Y6 OUT output
GB17 External output Y7 OUT output
GB18 External output Y8 OUT output
GB19 External output Y9 OUT output
GB20 External output YA OUT output
GB21 External output YB OUT output
GB22 External output YC OUT output
GB23 External output YD OUT output
GB24 External output YE OUT output
GB25 External output YF OUT output
GB26 to GB29 Must not be used
GB30 External input X0 Input
GB31 External input X1 Input
GB32 Allowed for external input X2 Input
GB33 Allowed for external input X3 Input
GB34 Allowed for external input X4 Input
GB35 External input X5 Input
GB36 External input X6 Input
GB37 External input X7 Input
GB38 External input Fuse blown
GB39 to GB63 Must not be used
GB64 to GB16383 User area
*1 Turning it ON enables output (Lamp lit, buzzer sounds) from the OUTPUT terminal block of the GOT power
supply.
*2 Buzzer is available for the following versions.
GOT-F900 Version
F940WGOT Ver.1.40 or later
F940GOT Ver.6.40 or later
F930GOT Ver.4.40 or later
F930GOT-K Ver.4.60 (the first version) or later
F920GOT-K Ver.1.00 (the first version) and later
F94* Handy GOT Ver.6.40 and later
ET-900 Ver.6.40 and later
2 - 43 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.1 GOT internal devices
1
2 GOT data register
GD devices are listed as follows.
OVERVIEW
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
Device Function Device Function
GD0 to GD63 Must not be used GD0 Current time (Second) 2
GD64 to GD16383 User area GD1 Current time (Minute)
SPECIFICATIONS
GD2 Current time (Hour)
GD3 Current time (Day)
GD4 Current time (Month)
GD5 Current time (Year)
GD6 Current time (Day of the week) 3
GD7 Must not be used
COMMON SETTING
Upper limit of numerical input value
GD8, GD9
(32 bits)
Lower limit of numerical input value
GD10, GD11
(32 bits)
GD12
Echo display of numerical and ASCII
input
4
GD13 to GD99 Must not be used
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
GD100 to 1023 User area
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 44
2.6.1 GOT internal devices
3 GOT special register
The GS list and device functions are as follows.
(1) Read device
Device Function Reference
GS0 Common information 1 See (a) below
GS1 Base screen information See (b) below
GS2 to GS5 Must not be used -
GS6 CC-Link G4 station No. See (c) below
GS7 1 second binary counter See (d) below
GS8 Scan time of monitor See (e) below
GS9 Must not be used -
GS10 Scan counter of monitor See (f) below
GS11 to GS13 Must not be used -
GS14 Script common information
GS15 Script error pointer
GS16 Script No.
GS17 Error code
Section 14.7.2 Errors and corrective actions for
script execution on GOT
GS46 Script No.
GS47 Error code
GS48 Script execute pointer
GS49 to 79 Script execute No.
GS80 to 199 Must not be used -
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Gateway
GS200 to 229 Gateway information
Function Manual)
GS230 Number of error stations See (g) below
GS231 to 238 Error station See (h) below
GS239 to 251 Must not be used -
GS252 Error detection common information See (i) below
GS253 to 259 Must not be used -
GS260 status
Section 14.2.3 Integer Real number
GS261 Error code conversion function
GS262 to 383 Must not be used -
(a) Common information1 (GS0(16bit))
b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b0 : Repeats turning ON and OFF for every communication cycle*1.
b1 : Turns ON when the base/window screen is switched and remains ON until a
cycle of the on-screen setting processing is complete. (It functions in the same
way for the station No. switching and security level switching.)
It is used to check (debug) the screen switch settings.
b2 : Turns ON when the base/window screen is switched and remains ON until a
cycle of the on-screen object processing of the status observation is complete.
(It functions in the same way for the station No. switching and security level
switching.)
It is used to activate the status observation for once when switching the screen.
b3 : Turns ON while the initial screen is displayed at power-on.
It turns off when the base screen is switched over.
b4 : Always ON.
2 - 45 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.1 GOT internal devices
b5 : Always OFF.
b6 to b15 : Must not be used
1
*1 A cycle is the elapsed time for GOT to read the objects on the current screen display and the data set in the
common settings.
(b) Base screen information (GS1(16bit))
OVERVIEW
b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0
b0 : Repeats turning ON and OFF for every communication cycle*1 while the base 2
screen is displayed.
b1 : Turns ON when the base/window screen is switched and remains ON until a
SPECIFICATIONS
cycle of the on-screen setting processing is complete. (It functions in the same
way for the station No. switching and security level switching.)
It is used to check (debug) the screen switch settings
b2 : Turns ON when the base/window screen is switched and remains ON until a
cycle of the on-screen object processing of the status observation is complete.
3
(It functions in the same way for the station No. switching and security level
COMMON SETTING
switching.)
It is used to activate the status observation for once when the screen is
switched over.
b3 to b15 : Must not be used.
(c) CC-Link G4 station No. (GS6(16bit)) 4
Stores AJ65BT-G4-S3's station No. when the GOT is connected to the CC-Link network via
AJ65BT-G4-S3 and the GOT is powered ON.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(d) 1 second binary counter (GS7(16bit))
Starts counting every second immediately after the power is switched on.
Any given value can be written to this counter to start the count from the written value.
The obtained data are stored as binary data. 5
This is used to check how long the time has elapsed from specific timing (operation, etc.).
COMMON SETTINGS
(e) Scan time of monitor (GS8(16bit))
FOR OBJECTS
Stores the time (ms) of a complete processing cycle set on the display screen as binary data.
Data will be updated when all of the processing set on the display screen is complete.
An error of 10 ms may be produced depending on the processing settings. Also, this does not
apply to the objects that have not been processed by the security function.
It is useful for load checking (debugging) of the monitor processing.
6
(f) Scan time counter of monitor (GS10(16bit))
Counts up the number of cycles every time the processing cycle set on the display screen is LAMP, SWITCH
complete.
Used to check (debug) the number of scan of monitor.
(g) Number of error stations (GS230(16bit))
Used to detect the stations in which an error has occurred. 7
For details of the Number of error stations (GS230), refer to the following manual.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection System Manual)
NUMERICAL/
(h) Error station (GS231 to 238(16bit))
Turns ON when an error/communication timeout has occurred in the corresponding station.
Turns OFF when the error is cleared.
For details of the Error station (GS231 to 238), refer to the following manual.
8
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection System Manual)
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 46
2.6.1 GOT internal devices
(i) Error detection common information (GS252(16bit))
b15 to b1 b0
b0 : Turns ON if an error is detected in the alarm information file to be stored when
executing PC card storage function by alarm history display.
The alarm information file is not stored into a PC card while this bit is ON.
Turns OFF when the error detection common control (GS452.b0) is turned ON.
Useful for error detection during file storage.
b1 to b15 : Must not be used.
(2) Write device
Device Function Reference
GS384 Script common control
Section 14.7.2 Errors and corrective actions for
GS385 Script monitoring time
GS386 Screen script initial operation script execution on GOT
GS387 to 399 Must not be used -
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Gateway
GS400 Gateway common control
Function Manual)
GS401 to 449 Must not be used -
GS450 Monitor common control See (a) below
GS451 Auto screen save time Below (b)
GS452 Error detection common control See (c) below
GS453 (b15 to b8) System dialog language switching device GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Extended
GS453 (b7 to b0) Font change device Option Functions Manual)
GS454 to 459 Disabled -
GS460 Conversion start indication
GS461 Number of conversion devices
Section 14.2.3 Integer Real number
GS462 Conversion source head device No.
GS463 Conversion destination head device No. conversion function
GS464 Store error value
GS465 to 499 Disabled -
GS500 GT SoftGOT2 common information See (d) below
GS501 to 511 Must not be used -
(a) Monitor common control (GS450(16bit))
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 to b9 b8 b7 to b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b0 : When it is on, displays a confirm message after numerical/ASCII data are input.
b1 : Controls the displaying methods of the message displayed when an numerical
value exceeding the valid range is input.
Turning ON displays a message during input of the numerical value.
Turning OFF displays a message after the numerical value is entered.
b2 : Turns ON to activate "Numeric Value Input Number", "Cursor Position's Numeric
Value Input" and "Numeric Value Input Signal" of the system information
function during ASCII input as well.
b3 : Turns ON to store "0" in the following devices set by system information
function, "Cursor Position's Numeric Value Input", "Current Cursor Position" and
"Previous Cursor Position" when a cursor is erased.
b4 to b7 : Must not be used.
b8 : When it turns ON, BMP files in a PC card can be used as parts in parts display/
parts movement.
b9 to b11 : Must not be used
2 - 47 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.1 GOT internal devices
b12 : Controls the timing when the screen/station No. changes by touch switch
operation.
1
This applies when multiple actions including either of the bit Set/Reset/Alternate
and either of screen switching/station No. switching have been set for a touch
switch.
OVERVIEW
For details, refer to the following.
Section 6.2.12 Precautions
2
b13 : Storing historical information of the previous touch switch to PC card is enabled
when it is turned ON.
SPECIFICATIONS
b14 : Set the action of the previous touch switch as history mode when it is turned
ON.
b15 : Disabled
(b) Auto screen save time (GS451(16bit)) 3
Store the time before close (OFF) the monitor screen in screen save function.
COMMON SETTING
Store the value by 1 to 60 (Min).
(To store value higher than 60, store it as 60)
The changed value is validated after canceling screen save when changing value in screen
save.
4
Relationship between GS451 and GOT utility (screen save time)
If value other than 0 is stored in GS451, the screen save time set in GOT utility will
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
be invalidated.
To validate the screen save time of utility, store 0 in GS451.
(c) Error detection common control (GS452(16bit))
5
b15 to b1 b0
COMMON SETTINGS
b0 : Turns ON to turn the error detection common information (GS252.b0) OFF.
FOR OBJECTS
b1 to b15 : Must not be used.
(d) GT SoftGOT2 common information (GS500(16bit))
b15 to b1 b0
6
b0 : Used for GT SoftGOT2.
Displays the dialog box for exiting GT SoftGOT2 when it turns ON.
Turns OFF when the exit instruction is canceled in the dialog box. LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 48
2.6.1 GOT internal devices
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
The device ranges of PLC CPUs that can be used for GOT are as follows.
Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer2.
Since the device specifications may be different depending on the models even though they belongs to the
same series of the PLC CPU,
Please make setting according to the specifications of the PLC CPU actually used.
When a non-existent device or device No. outside the range is specified, other objects may not be moni-
tored.
For the device setting methods, see the following section.
Section 5.1 Device Setting
1 Mitsubishi Electric PLC (Including motion controllers)
(1) MELSEC-QnA, Q, MELDAS C6/C64
Device No.
Device name Setting range Notation
Representation
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
Hexadecimal
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay (M)*9 M0 to M32767
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767
Timer*9
Bit device
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767
Counter*9
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767
Decimal
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2047
Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
Retentive timer*9
Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF Hexadecimal
Specified bit of the following word devices
Word device bit -
(Except Index register and Buffer memory)
Data register (D)*9 D0 to D32767
Decimal
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal
Timer (current value) (TN)*9 TN0 to TN32767
Counter (current value) (CN)*9 CN0 to CN32767 Decimal
Retentive timer (current value) (SN)*9 SN0 to SN32767
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF Hexadecimal
Word device
File register (R)*1*2 R0 to R32767
Block 0 to 255
Extension fill register (ER)*1
Device R0 to R32767
Extension file register (ZR)*1*3*4 ZR0 to ZR1042431 Decimal
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15
Buffer memory
BM0 to BM32767
(special function module) (BM)*5
Ww Ww0 to WwFF
Hexadecimal
Wr Wr0 to WrFF
Bit device word*6 Converting the above bit devices to words -
2 - 49 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
*1 Do not set a file register by GT Designer2 when multiple programs are executed with the file of the file register set 1
at "Use the same file name as the program" by the PLC parameter of GX Developer. (With exceptions of
MELSEC-QnA and MELDAS C6/C64).
Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous.
*2 Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET instruction.
OVERVIEW
*3 Available for file register of block No. of file name switched with the QDRSET instruction.
*4 GOT treats them in units of 32k (32767 points).
Make the setting not to break up the 32k-unit block when specifying the extension file register (ZR) in the object
settings. 2
In the case of incorrect setting, the error message "The specified device is outside the valid range" will be
displayed in the system alarm.
SPECIFICATIONS
There is no range limit for the read/write by specifying the file register name with the recipe function.
[Setting Example]: When specifying devices consecutively (line graph): allocate 10 points
Correct: Head device: ZR32768 Wrong: Head device: ZR32767
ZR0 ZR0 3
Block0 Block0
COMMON SETTING
ZR32767 ZR32767
Register ten points starting from
ZR32768 ZR32768
ZR32767 across 2 blocks.
Block1 Block1
4
*5 Only the special function module on the station connected to GOT can be specified.
Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in the special function module.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
*6 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
PREPARATORY
*7 If a word device out of the range is set while monitoring MELDAS C6/C64, this will result in an inconsistent value.
If a bit device out of the range is set, the relevant object may not be displayed, or preset functions may not
operate.
Therefore, make sure to check the set device by reference to the GT Designer2 Device List.
*8 The devices used for C6/C64 system are not usable. 5
*9 Do not use the local device set in a MELSEC-Q system.
COMMON SETTINGS
Otherwise normal monitoring is not performed.
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 50
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
(2) MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion
Device No.
Device name Setting range
Notation
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
Hexadecimal
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay (M)*11 M0 to M32767
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767
Timer*11
Bit device
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767
Counter*11
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767
Decimal
Special relay (SM)*7 SM0 to SM2047
Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
Retentive timer*11
Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF Hexadecimal
Specified bit of the following word devices
Word device bit -
(Except Index register and Buffer memory)
Data register (D)*8*9*11 D0 to D32767
Decimal
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal
Timer (current value) (TN)*11 TN0 to TN32767
Counter (current value) (CN)*11 CN0 to CN32767 Decimal
*11 SN0 to SN32767
Retentive timer (current value) (SN)
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF Hexadecimal
Word device
File register (R)*1*2 R0 to R32767
Block 0 to 255
Extension file register (ER)*1
Device R0 to R32767
Decimal
Extension file register (ZR)*1*3*4 ZR0 to ZR1042431
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15
Buffer memory (special function module) (BM)*5 BM0 to BM32767
Ww Ww0 to WwFF
Hexadecimal
Wr Wr0 to WrFF
Motion device (#)*10 #0 to #8191 Decimal
Bit device word*6 Converting the above bit devices into words -
*1 to *6(1) Refer to the MELSEC-QnA/Q.
Q Motion
*7 When setting special internal relay M9000 to M9255, use SM for the device name and set the value subtracted
9000 for the device number (0 to 255).
*8 The setting range is D9000 to D9255 when setting the special data register.
*9 D8192 to D8999 and D9256 to D9999 are out of the valid setting range.
*10 Monitoring is not available with GT SoftGOT2.
*11 Do not use the local device in a MELSEC-Q(Multi)/Q Motion system.
Otherwise normal monitoring is not performed.
2 - 51 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
(3) MELSEC-A
1
Device No.
Device name Setting range
Representation
OVERVIEW
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
Hexadecimal
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay/Special internal relay (M) M0 to M32767
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal
2
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767
SPECIFICATIONS
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal
Bit device
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767
Timer
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767
Decimal
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767
Counter
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 3
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF Hexadecimal
COMMON SETTING
Specified bit of the following word devices
Word device bit -
(Except Index register and Buffer memory)
Data register/Special data register (D) D0 to D32767 Decimal
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal
Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN32767
Decimal 4
Counter (current value) (CN) CN0 to CN32767
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF Hexadecimal
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
*1 *1
File register (R) R0 to R32767
Block 1 to 255
Word device
Extension file register (ER) *1
Device R0 to R32767
Decimal
Index register *2
(Z) Z0 to Z15
5
(V) V0 to V6
COMMON SETTINGS
Announciator (A) A0 to A1
FOR OBJECTS
Buffer memory (special function module) (BM)) *3 BM0 to BM32767 Decimal
Ww Ww0 to WwFF
Hexadecimal
Wr Wr0 to WrFF
Bit device word *4*5
Converting the above bit devices to words
(Except Timer and Counter)
- 6
*1 In the computer link connection, the bit specification writing of the word device to the ER29-0 (block 29 of the
extension file register) or later of A3ACPU, A3UCPU, A4UCPU is not available.
LAMP, SWITCH
When the bit specification writing of the word device is required, use the range of block No. 0 to 28.
*2 In the computer link connection, writing to the index register (e.g., the touch switch function, numerical input
function) is not available.
*3 Only the special function module on the station connected to GOT can be specified.
Set within the address range of the buffer memory existing in the special function module. 7
*4 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
*5 If the special internal relay (M) is converted to the word device, treat 9000 of the device No. as 0 and set in
multiples of 16.
NUMERICAL/
Example: M9000, M9016, M9240
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 52
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
(4) MELSEC-FX
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Input (X) X0 to X377
Octal
Output (Y) Y0 to Y377
Auxiliary relay (M) M0 to M3071
Bit device
Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8255
State (S) S0 to S999 Decimal
Timer contact (T) T0 to T255
Counter contact (C) C0 to C255
Word device bit *1 Specified bit of the following word devices -
Data register (D) D0 to D0999
RAM file register (D) D1000 to D7999
Word device
Special data register (D) D8000 to D8255
Timer (current value) (T) T0 to T255 Decimal
Counter (current value) (C) C0 to C255
Converting the above bit devices to words
Bit device word *2
(Except Timer contact and Counter contact)
*1 When executing the touch switch function that has been set during the bit specification of the word device, do not
write any data to the word device through the sequence program.
*2 The device No. must be set in multiples of 16.
*3 For FX3UC series, device setting cannot be made exceeding the above range by using GT Designer2.
2 - 53 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
1
2 OMRON PLC (OMRON SYSMAC)
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
OVERVIEW
I/O relay/internal auxiliary relay ..0000 to ..614315
Data link relay (LR) LR00000 to LR19915
Decimal +
Auxiliary memory relay (AR) AR00000 to AR95915
Holding relay (HR) HR00000 to HR51115
hexadecimal
2
Bit device
Internal holding relay (W) WR00000 to WR51115
SPECIFICATIONS
*1*2 TIM0000 to TIM2047
Timer contact (TIM)
Decimal
Counter contact (CNT) *1*2 CNT0000 to CNT2047
Specified bit of the following word devices
Word device bit (Except Data link relay, Auxiliary memory relay, Holding relay -
and Internal holding relay.) 3
I/O relay/internal auxiliary relay 0000 to 6143
COMMON SETTING
Data link relay (LR) LR000 to LR199
Auxiliary memory relay (AR) AR000 to AR959
Holding relay (HR) HR000 to HR511
Internal holding relay (W) WR000 to WR511
Word device
Data memory (DM) DM0000 to DM9999
Decimal 4
Timer (current value) (TIM)*5 TIM0000 to TIM2047
Counter (current value) (CNT)*5 CNT0000 to CNT2047
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
*3 EM0000 to EM9999
Extension data memory (EM current bank)
E00000 to E09999
Extension data memory (E0 to EC: 13 banks)*3*4 :
EC0000 to EC9999
*1 Writing is not allowed when using CV1000, CS1, and CJ1. 5
*2 When executing the touch switch function that has been set during the bit specification of the word device, do not
COMMON SETTINGS
write to word device through the sequence program.
*3 Writing or reading the extension data memory using multiple banks is not allowed.
FOR OBJECTS
*4 The range from E0 to 2 is available when CJ1 is used.
*5 Timer (current value) and counter (current value) are valid within the rage of 0 to 999.
(This applies to the 16 bit/32 bit device data.)
*6 COM1H-CPU61 cannot read from or write to this device.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 54
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
3 Yaskawa PLC
(1) Yaskawa GL/PROG1C8
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Coil (0)*1 O01 to O63424
Input relay (I) I1 to I63424
Bit device
D1 to D2048 Decimal
Link coil (D) D10001 to D12048
D20001 to D22048
Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices -
Input register (Z)*1 Z1 to Z31840
W1 to W28291
Holding register (W)*2*4
SW1 to SW28291
R1 to R2048
Word device
R10001 to R12048 Decimal
R20001 to R22048
*4
Link register (R)
SR1 to SR2048
SR10001 to SR12048
SR20001 to SR22048
Constant register (K)*3 K1 to K4096
Converting the above bit devices to word devices
Bit device word -
(Except Coil and Input relay)
*1 Change the input register "30001 to 30512" to "Z1 to Z512" for setting. (When set in default)
*2 Change the holding register "40001 to 49999" to "W1 to W9999" for setting. (When set in default)
*3 Change the constant register "31001 to 35096" to "K1 to K4096" for setting. (When set in default)
*4 SR and SW indicate registers (virtual register) compatible to the data format where internal data of PLC is
displayed using R or W.
The following shows the difference between the display values of SR, SW and those of R, W corresponding to
the values of PLC internal data.
PLC internal data (16 bit) SR, SW R,W
9999 9999 9999
1001 1001 1001
1000 1000 1000
999 999 999
0 0 0
-1 -1 32769
-999 -999 33767
-1000 -1000 33768
-1001 -1001 33769
-9999 -9999 42767
*5 The internal coil N1 to N1536 can be set as o513 to o2048.
However, setting must not exceed o1 to o512 and o513 to o2048.
2 - 55 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
(2) Yaskawa CP-9200SH/MP-900 series
1
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Decimal +
OVERVIEW
Coil (MB)*1 MB0 to MB32767F
hexadecimal
Bit device
Input relay (IB) IB0000 to IBFFFF Hexadecimal
Bit of word device
Specified bit of the following bit device
(Except Coil and Input relay.)
- 2
Input register (IW) IW0 to IW7FFF Hexadecimal
SPECIFICATIONS
Word device
Holding register (MW) MW0 to MW32767 Decimal
Input relay (IB) IB0 to IBFFF Hexadecimal
Coil (MB) MB0 to MB32767 Decimal
Word device bit Converting the above bit devices to word devices -
*1 MB40960 to MB32767F is available for MP-940 only. 3
COMMON SETTING
(3) Yaskawa CP-9200 (H)
Device name Available setting range Device No. Notation
Coil (OB)*1 OB0 to OB7FF
4
Bit device
Hexadecimal
Input relay (IB) IB0 to IB7FF
Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices -
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Input register (IW) IW0 to IW7F
Hexadecimal
Output register (OW) OW0 to OW7F
Word device
DW0 to DW2047
Data register (DW, ZD)*1
Common register (MW)
ZD0
MW0
to
to
ZD2047
MW7694
Decimal
5
COMMON SETTINGS
Bit device word Converting the above bit devices to word devices -
*1 Setting is available only when CP-9200 is used.
FOR OBJECTS
(4) Yaskawa CP-9300MS (MC compatible)
Device name Available setting range Device No. Notation 6
Coil (OB)*1 OB0 to OB7FF
Bit device
Hexadecimal
Input relay (IB) IB0 to IBFFFF LAMP, SWITCH
Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices -
Input register (IW) W0 to IW7F
Hexadecimal
Output register (OW) OW0 to OW7F 7
Word device
DW0 to DW2047
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Data register (DW, ZD)*1
ZD0 to ZD2047 Decimal
NUMERICAL/
Common register (MW) MW0 to MW7694
Bit device word Converting the above bit devices to word devices -
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 56
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
4 Allen-Bradley PLC
(1) AB SLC500 series
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
B3:0/0 to B3:255/15
Bit (B)
B10:0/0 to B255:255/15
T4:0/14(TT) to T4:255/14(TT)
Timer (Timing bit) (TT)
T10:0/14(TT) to T255:255/14(TT)
T4:0/13(DN) to T4:255/13(DN)
Timer (Completion bit) (TN)
T10:0/13(DN) to T255:255/13(DN)
Bit device
C5:0/15(CU) to C5:255/15(CU)
Counter (Up counter) (CU) Decimal
C10:0/15(CU) to C255:255/15(CU)
C5:0/14(CD) to C5:255/14(CD)
Counter (Down counter) (CD)
C10:0/14(CD) to C255:255/14(CD)
C5:0/13(DN) to C5:255/13(DN)
Counter (Completion bit) (CN)
C10:0/13(DN) to C255:255/13(DN)
N7:0 to N7:255
Integer (N)
N10:0 to N255:255
Bit (B) B3:0 to B3:255
T4:0.1(PRE) to T4:255.1(PRE)
Timer (Set value) (TP)*1
T10:0.1(PRE) to T255:255.1(PRE)
T4:0.2(ACC) to T4:255.2(ACC)
Timer (Current value) (TA)*1
Word device
T10:0.2(ACC) to T255:255.2(ACC)
C5:0.1(PRE) to C5:255.1(PRE) Decimal
Counter (Set value) (CP)*1
C10:0.1(PRE) to C255:255.1(PRE)
C5:0.2(ACC) to C5:255.2(ACC)
Counter (Current value) (CP)*1
C10:0.2(ACC) to C255:255.2(ACC)
N7:0 to N7:255
Integer (N)*1
N10:0 to N255:255
*1 Writing on the device is not allowed for 32-bit data.
*2 Do not set the device outside the range.
If the set device is outside the range, the object set by the device within the range cannot be displayed.
2 - 57 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
(2) AB MicroLogix1000/1500 series
1
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Bit (B) B3:0/0 to B255:255/15
OVERVIEW
Timer (Timing bit) (T) T3:0/14(TT) to T255:255/14(TT)
Timer (Completion bit) (T) T3:0/13(DN) to T255:255/13(DN)
Bit device
Counter (Up counter) (C) C3:0/15(CU) to C255:255/15(CU) Decimal
2
Counter (Down counter) (C) C3:0/14(CD) to C255:255/14(CD)
Counter (Completion bit) (C) C3:0/13(DN) to C255:255/13(DN)
SPECIFICATIONS
Integer (N) N3:0 to N255:255
Bit (B) B3:0 to B255:255
Timer (Set value) (T)*1 T3:0.1(PRE) to T255:255.1(PRE)
Word device
Timer (Current value) (T)*1 T3:0.2(ACC) to T255:255.2(ACC)
Decimal
3
Counter (Set value) (C)*1 C3:0.1(PRE) to C255:255.1(PRE)
COMMON SETTING
Counter (Current value) (C)*1 C3:0.2(ACC) to C255:255.2(ACC)
Integer (N)*1 N3:0 to N255:255
*1 Writing on the device is not allowed for 32 bit data.
*2 Do not set device outside the range.
If the set device is outside the range, the object set by the device within the range cannot be displayed.
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 58
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
5 Sharp PLC (Sharp JW)
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
0 to 15777
I/O relay
20000 to 75777
Bit device
Octal
Timer (Contact) (T) T0000 to T1777
Counter (Contact) (C) C0000 to C1777
Ward device bit Specified bit of the following word devices -
Timer (Current value) (T) T0000 to T1777
Counter (Current value) (C) C0000 to C1777
09000 to 09776
19000 to 19776
29000 to 29776
39000 to 39776
49000 to 49776
59000 to 59776
69000 to 69776
79000 to 79776
89000 to 89776
Register (09 to E7)
Word device
99000 to 99776
E0000 to E0776 Octal
E1000 to E1776
E2000 to E2776
E3000 to E3776
E4000 to E4776
E5000 to E5776
E6000 to E6776
E7000 to E7776
1000000 to 1177776
2000000 to 2177776
3000000 to 3177776
File register (1 to 7) 4000000 to 4177776
5000000 to 5177776
6000000 to 6177776
7000000 to 7177776
2 - 59 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
1
6 Toshiba PLC (Toshiba PROCES T/V series)
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
OVERVIEW
External input (X) X0000 to X511F
External output (Y) Y0000 to Y511F
Internal relay (R)*1 R0000 to R4095F
Hexadecimal 2
Special relay (S)*7 S0000 to S511F
Bit device
Link register relay (Z) Z0000 to Z999F
SPECIFICATIONS
Link relay (L) L0000 to L255F
Timer (Contact) (T)*1 T0 to T999
Decimal
Counter (Contact) (C)*1 C0 to C511
Word device bit*2*7
Specified bit of the following word devices
(Except External input, External output, Internal relay, -
3
Special relay, Link relay, Timer and Counter.)
COMMON SETTING
External input (XW) XW0 to XW511
External output (YW) YW0 to YW511
Internal relay (RW)*6*8 RW0 to RW4095
Special relay (SW)*8 SW0 to SW511
4
Word device
Link relay (LW) LW0 to LW255
Decimal
Timer (Current value) (T)*1 T0 to T999
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Counter (Current value) (C)*1 C0 to C511
PREPARATORY
Data register (D)*4*6*8 D0 to D8191
*3 W0 to W2047
Link register (W)
File register (F)*5 F0 to F32767
5
PROSEC T series
*1 Write of the timer (contact)/(current value), counter (contact)/(current value) is executed after having been read
COMMON SETTINGS
by GOT. Therefore, do not edit it in the sequence program during this period.
FOR OBJECTS
*2 The bit specification of word device is executed after having been read by GOT. Therefore, please do not change
it in the sequence program during this period.
*3 Link register relay (Z) occupies 1 link register (W) bit out of the 1000 bits ranging 0 to 999.
*4 When the mode switch on the CPU module has been set to "P-RUN", writing to D0000 through D4095 is
disabled. 6
*5 Extension file register is not supported.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 60
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
PROSEC V series
*2 The bit specification of word device is executed after having been read by GOT. Therefore, do not change it in the
sequence program during this period.
*6 RW0000 and D0000 indicate the same data register in the same region although they are shown in different
notations.
*7 For bit data, the conversion from Toshiba's address notation to address notation of GOT is shown as follows.
Toshiba's address notation 16=Word address (Quotient)...Bit address (Remainder)
Toshiba's address notation Address notation used by GOT Conversion
S511 F
S8191 8191 16 = 511...15
(Decimal) (Hexadecimal)
R4095 F
R65535 65535 16 = 4095...15
(Decimal) (Hexadecimal)
*8 For word data, the conversion from Toshiba's address notation to address notation of GOT is shown as follows.
Data format Toshiba's address notation Address notation of GOT
16 bit data DW10 D10
DD10
(Integer) D20
(Calculate the device No. in 32-bit unit)
32 bit data
DF10
(Real number) D20
(Calculate the device No. in 32-bit unit)
7 SIEMENS PLC (SIEMENS S7-300/400 series)
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Input relay (I) I0000 to I5117
Output relay (Q) Q0000 to Q5117 Decimal
Bit device
Bit memory (M) M00000 to M20477
Specified bit of the following word devices
Word device bit (Except Input relay, Output relay, Bit memory, Timer and -
Counter.)
Input relay (IW) IW000 to IW510
Output relay (QW) QW000 to QW510
Bit memory (MW) MW0000 to MW2046
Timer (Current value) (T) T0 to T511
Counter (Current value) (C) C0 to C511
Word device
D000100000 to D000165534
Decimal
D000200000 to D000265534
D000300000 to D000365534
Data register (D)
D409400000 to D409465534
D409500000 to D409565534
2 - 61 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
1
8 HITACHI PLC (HITACHI HIDIC H series)
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
OVERVIEW
External input (X) X00000 to X05A95 Hexadecimal +
External output (Y) Y00000 to Y05A95 Decimal
Remote external input (X) X10000 to X49995
Remote external output (Y) Y10000 to Y49995
Decimal 2
1st CPU link (L) L0000 to L3FFF
SPECIFICATIONS
2nd CPU link (L1) L10000 to L13FFF Hexadecimal
Data area (M) M0000 to M3FFF
On-delay timer (TD)*1 TD0 to TD255
Single-shot timer (SS)*1 SS0 to SS255
3
Watchdog timer (WDT)*1 WDT0 to WDT255
Bit device
COMMON SETTING
Monostable timer (MS)*1 MS0 to MS255
Decimal
Retentive timer (TMR)*1 TMR0 to TMR255
Up counter (CU)*1 CU0 to CU511
Ring counter (RCU)*1 RCU0 to RCU511
Up/Down counter (CT)*1 CT0 to CT511 4
Bit internal output (R) R0 to R7BF Hexadecimal
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
*1 DIF0 to DIF511
Rising edge detection (DIF)
PREPARATORY
Decimal
Falling edge detection (DIF)*1 DFN0 to DFN511
Specified bit of the following word devices
(Except External input, External output, Remote external
Word device bit -
input, Remote external output, First CPU link, Second CPU
link and Data area.) 5
External input (WX) WX0000 to WX05A7 Hexadecimal +
COMMON SETTINGS
External output (WY) WY0000 to WY05A7 Decimal
FOR OBJECTS
Remote external input (WX) WX1000 to WX4997
Decimal
Remote external output (WY) WY1000 to WY4997
Word device
First CPU link (WL) WL000 to WL3FF
Second CPU link (WL1) WL1000 to WL13FF Hexadecimal 6
Data area (WM) WM000 to WM3FF
Timer/Counter (Elapsed value) (TC)*1 TC0 to TC511 Decimal
LAMP, SWITCH
Word internal output (WR) WR000 to WR3FF Hexadecimal
*1 The same number cannot be used repeatedly.
*2 Do not set device outside the range.
If the set device is outside the range, the object set by the device within the range cannot be displayed.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 62
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
9 Matsushita PLC (Matsushita MEWNET-FP series)*1
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
*2,*3 X0000 to X511F
Input relay (X)
Output relay (Y)*3 Y0000 to Y511F
Hexadecimal +
Internal relay (R) R0000 to R886F
Decimal
Special relay (R)*2 R9000 to R910F
Bit device
Link relay (L)*5 L0000 to L639F
Timer contact (T)*2,*4 T0 to T3071
Decimal
*2,*4 C0 to C3071
Counter contact (C)
Specified bit of the following word devices
Bit device word (Except Input relay, Output relay, Internal relay, Special relay -
and Link relay.)
Input relay (WX)*2 WX000 to WX511
Output relay (WY) WY000 to WY511
Internal replay (WR) WR000 to WR886
Special relay (WR) WR900 to WR910
Link relay (WL) WL000 to WL639
Word device
Timer/Counter (Elapsed value) (EV)*4 EV0 to EV3071 Decimal
Timer/Counter (Set value) (SV)*4 SV0 to SV3071
Data register (DT) DT0 to DT10233
Special data register (DT) DT90000 to DT90511
*5 LD0 to LD8447
Link register (LD)
File register (FL)*5*6 FL0 to FL32764
*1 The above device range is for the case where FP10SH is used.
For Fp0, FP1, FP2, FP3, FP5, FP-10(S), or FP-M, device ranges are different in individual CPUs.
*2 Writing to device is not allowed.
*3 Only those devices that have been assigned to I/O contacts by peripheral software can be used.
*4 The device points of the timer and counter differs depending on the head numbers of the counter set by the value
of the system register (No. 5).
*5 This device does not exist in FP0, FP1, and FP-M.
*6 When FP2SH is used, one bank of "32765 3 banks" can be monitored.
10 Microcomputer connection
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Bit device
Bit specification of data register (D) Specified bit of data register (D) -
Word device
Data register (D) D0 to D2047 Decimal
*1 Read from/write to the host by GB and GD devices cannot be executed.
2 - 63 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.2 Device range available for GOT-A900 series
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series 1
The device range of the PLC CPU that can be used in GOT is shown as follows.
Note that the device range in the table below is the maximum value that can be set in GT Designer2.
OVERVIEW
The specifications of devices may differ depending on the models even though they belong to the same PLC
CPU series.
Make setting in accordance with the specifications of actual PLC CPUs used.
When non-existent devices or device numbers outside of the range has been set, some of the correctly set 2
objects may not be monitored.
For the setting method, see the following section.
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 5.1 Device Setting
1 Mitsubishi Electric PLC
(1) MELSEC-QnA, Q (Multiple CPUs)
3
COMMON SETTING
Device No.
Device name Setting range
Representation
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
Hexadecimal
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay (M) M0 to M32767
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767 Decimal
4
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal
PREPARATORY
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767
Bit device
Timer
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767
Counter
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767 5
-
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2047
COMMON SETTINGS
Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
FOR OBJECTS
Retentive timer
Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF Hexadecimal
Data register (D) D0 to D32767
Decimal
6
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF Hexadecimal
LAMP, SWITCH
Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN32767
Word device
Counter (current value) (CN) CN0 to CN32767 Decimal
Retentive timer (current value) (SN) SN0 to SN32767
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF Hexadecimal
7
File register (R) R0 to R32767*1
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Decimal
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15
*1 Available for file register of the block No. switched with the RSET instruction.
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 64
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series
(a) Restrictions on setting monitor of A series computer link
When the GOT-F900 has been connected to the QnACPU with A series computer link module
installed, monitoring range of QnACPU is applied. The restrictions are shown as follows:
(depending on restrictions of the computer link).
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Current value
TN0 to TN255 Decimal
Timer (TN)
Word device
Set value (TS) - -
Current value
CN0 to CN255 Decimal
Counter (CN)
Set value (CS) - -
File register (R) - -
(b) PLC No. specification in multiple CPU system
Add a PLC number when specifying a device.
0 : CPU connected (Control CPU for link connection.)
1 to 4 : CPU of station number specified
(2) MELSEC-A, motion controller CPU (A series)
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
Hexadecimal
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay (M) M0 to M8191
Special internal relay (M) M9000 to M9255
Decimal
Latch relay (L) *1 L0 to L8191
Bit device
Annouciator (F) F0 to F2047
Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF Hexadecimal
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT2047
Timer
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC2047
Decimal
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT1023
Counter
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC1023
Data register (D) D0 to D8191
Decimal
Special data register (D) D9000 to D9255
Link register (W) W0 to W1FFF Hexadecimal
Contact (TN) TN0 to TN2047
Timer
Word device
Coil (TS) TS0 to TS2047
Contact (CN) CN0 to CN1023
Counter
Coil (CS) CS0 to CS1023
Decimal
File register (R) R0 to R8191
(Z) Z0 to Z6
Index register*2
(V) V0 to V6
Accumulator (A) A0 to A1
*1 Latch relay (L) is treated as internal relay (M) in GOT-F900.
*2 When connected to computer link, writing to the index register (the touch switch function, numerical input
function, etc) is not allowed.
2 - 65 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series
Condition enabling data changes 1
While the GOT is connected to the A Series CPU or A Series computer link unit, data cannot be
changed in set values (specified directly) of timers and counters and file registers in the following
condition.
OVERVIEW
PLC status While PLC is stopped Wile PLC is running
Memory type Operation with RAM Operation with ROM Operation with RAM Operation with ROM
Not present *1 *1 2
Keyword
Present *2 *2
SPECIFICATIONS
The following error messages are displayed on the screen only when a timer, counter or file register is accessed
through a Numeric Input or ASCII input.
*1 When data of a set value (specified directly) of a timer or counter is tried to be changed, the error message "CAN
NOT WRITE." is displayed.
(Set values of timers and counters can be changed if they are specified indirectly using data registers.)
When data of a file register is tried to be changed, the error message "CAN NOT WRITE." is displayed.
3
*2 The error message "CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE PROTECTED." is displayed.
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 66
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series
(3) MELSEC-FX
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Input (X) X0 to X377
Octal
Output (Y) Y0 to Y377
Auxiliary relay (M) M0 to M3071
Bit device
Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8255
State (S) S0 to S999 Decimal
Timer contact (T) T0 to T255
Counter contact (C) C0 to C255
Data register (D) (Including file register) D0 to D7999
Special data register (D) D8000 to D8255
Current value (T) T0 to T255
Timer (T)
*2 TS0 to TS255
Set value (TS)
Word device
Current value (C) C0 to C199
16bit Decimal
Set value (CS) CS0 to CS199
Counter (C)
Current value (C)*2 C200 to C255
32bit
Set value (CS)*2 CS200 to CS255
Index register (Z) Z
Index register (V) V (16 bits)
*1 For FX3UC series, device setting cannot be made exceeding the above range by using GT Designer2.
*2 Bar code reader cannot be specified as word device.
Condition enabling data changes
While the GOT is connected to the A Series CPU or A Series computer link unit, data cannot be changed in set values
(specified directly) of timers and counters and file registers in the following condition.
PLC status While PLC is stopped While PLC is running
Memory type RAM EPROM EEPROM RAM EPROM EEPROM
Memory cassette
attached to PLC Write protect switch
- - ON OFF - - ON OFF
status
Not present *1 *1 *1 *1 *3
Keyword
Present *2 *2
The following error messages are displayed on the screen only when a timer, counter or file register is accessed
through a Numeric Input or ASCII input.
*1 When data of a set value (specified directly) of a timer or counter is tried to be changed, the error message "CAN
NOT WRITE." is displayed.
(Set values of timers and counters can be changed if they are specified indirectly using data registers.)
When data of a file register is tried to be changed, the error message "CAN NOT WRITE." is displayed.
*2 The error message "CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE PROTECTED." is displayed.
*3 The error message "PLC IS RUNNING." is displayed.
2 - 67 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series
(4) FX series GM positioning
1
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Input (X)*1 X0 to X377
OVERVIEW
Octal
Bit device
Output (Y) Y0 to Y67
Auxiliary relay (M) M0 to M511
Decimal
Special auxiliary relay (M) M9000 to M9175 2
Data register (D) D0 to D3999
Word device
Special data register (D) D9000 to D9313
SPECIFICATIONS
File register (D) D4000 to D6999 Decimal
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z6 (16 bits)
Index register (V) V0 to V6 (32 bits)
*1 Writing to device is not executable.
3
COMMON SETTING
(5) FREQROL series inverter
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Bit device
Control status (S) S0: to S7: Decimal
4
Alarm code (A) A0: to A7:
Word device
OBJECT SETTING
Parameter (Pr) Pr0: to Pr993:
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Decimal
Program operation (PG) PG0: to PG89:
Special parameter (SP) SP108: to SP127:
Set the station No. in for the inverter to be monitored.
There are 2 ways to specify the station No.:
Direct specification : Specifies the station No. of the inverter when setting device.
5
[0Valid range: 0 to 31]
COMMON SETTINGS
Indirect specification : Indirectly specifies the station No. of the inverter using the 16-bit GOT internal register
FOR OBJECTS
(GD100 to GD115) when setting device, allowing changing more than one station No. per
screen.
[Valid range: 100 to 115]* Corresponding to GD100 to GD115 respectively.
GOT-F900 screen # represents a numerical set v alue. 6
Station No Set GD100
LAMP, SWITCH
Indicating GD100
Program operation### PG0 : 100
Parameter display ### Pr0 : 100
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 68
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series
2 OMRON PLC (OMRON SYSMAC)
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
I/O relay ..000000 to ..614315
Internal auxiliary relay WR00000 to WR51115
Data link relay (LR) LR00000 to LR19915
Bit device
Auxiliary memory relay (AR)*1 AR00000 to AR95915 Decimal
Holding relay (HR) HR00000 to HR51115
Timer contact (TIM) TIM0000 to TIM2047
Counter contact (CNT) CNT0000 to CNT2047
Data memory (DM) DM0000 to DM9999
Timer (current value) (TIM)*2 TIM0000 to TIM2047
Word device
Counter (current value) (CNT)*2 CNT0000 to CNT2047
Decimal
Extension data memory (EM current bank) EM0000 to EM9999
E00000 to E09999
Extension data memory (E0 to EC: 13 banks) :
EC0000 to EC9999
*1 ON/OFF operation of the Auxiliary memory relay (AR) is not available when the SYSMAC , CPM1A/2A/2C, CS1
series is connected.
Do not use the key operation setting (bit).
*2 Set values cannot be read.
3 Yaskawa PLC (CP-9200SH/MP-900 series)
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Decimal +
Coil (MB) MB0 to MB4095F
Bit device
hexadecimal
Input relay (IB) IB0000 to IBFFFF Hexadecimal
Word device
Input register (IW) IW0 to IW7FFF Hexadecimal
Holding relay (MW) MW0 to MW32767 Decimal
2 - 69 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series
1
4 Allen-Bradley PLC
(1) AB SLC500
OVERVIEW
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
B3:0/0 to B3:255/15
Bit (B)
B10:0/0 to B255:255/15
T4:0/14(TT) to T4:255/14(TT) 2
Timer (Timing bit) (TT)
T10:0/14(TT) to T255:255/14(TT)
T4:0/13(DN) to T4:255/13(DN)
SPECIFICATIONS
Timer (Timing bit) (TN)
Bit device
T10:0/13(DN) to T255:255/13(DN)
Decimal
C5:0/15(CU) to C5:255/15(CU)
Counter (Up-counter) (CU)
C10:0/15(CU) to C255:255/15(CU)
C5:0/14(CD) to C5:255/14(CD)
Counter (Down-counter) (CD)
C10:0/14(CD) to C255:255/14(CD)
3
C5:0/13(DN) to C5:255/13(DN)
Counter (Completion bit) (CN)
C10:0/13(DN) to C255:255/13(DN)
COMMON SETTING
T4:0.1(PRE) to T4:255.1(PRE)
Timer (Set value) (TP)*1
T10:0.1(PRE) to T255:255.1(PRE)
T4:0.2(ACC) to T4:255.2(ACC)
Timer (Current value) (TA)*1
T10:0.2(ACC) to T255:255.2(ACC)
Word device
Counter (Set value) (TCP)*1
C5:0.1(PRE)
C10:0.1(PRE)
to
to
C5:255.1(PRE)
C255:255.1(PRE)
Decimal 4
C5:0.2(ACC) to C5:255.2(ACC)
Counter (Current value) (CA)*1
C10:0.2(ACC) to C255:255.2(ACC)
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
N7:0 to N7:255
Integer (N)
N10:0 to N255:255
*1 32-bit specification is not available.
*2 Do not set the device outside the valid range.
A communication error may occur if a device outside the valid range has been set. 5
COMMON SETTINGS
(2) AB MicroLogix1000/1200/1500 series
FOR OBJECTS
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
Bit (B) B3:0/0 to B255:255/15
Timer (Timing bit) (TT) T3:0/14(TT) to T255:255/14(TT)
6
Bit device
Timer (Completion bit) (TN) T3:0/13(DN) to T255:255/13(DN)
Decimal
Counter (Up-counter) (CU) C3:0/15(CU) to C255:255/15(CU)
Counter (Down-counter) (CD) C3:0/14(CD) to C255:255/14(CD) LAMP, SWITCH
Counter (Completion bit) (CN) C3:0/13(DN) to C255:255/13(DN)
Timer (Set value) (TP) *1 T3:0.1(PRE) to T255:255.1(PRE)
Timer (Current value) (TA)*1 T3:0.2(ACC) to T255:255.2(ACC)
7
Word device
*1 C3:0.1(PRE) to C255:255.1(PRE) Decimal
Counter (Set value) (TCP)
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Counter (Current value) (CA)*1 C3:0.2(ACC) to C255:255.2(ACC)
Integer (N)*1
NUMERICAL/
N3:0 to N255:255
*1 32-bit specification is not available.
8
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 70
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series
5 FUJITSU PLC (FUJITSU FLEX-PC N series)
Device name Setting range Device name
Input (X) X000 to X7FF
Output (Y) Y000 to Y7FF
Bit device
Internal relay (M) M0000 to M1FFF
Hexadecimal
Latch relay (L) L0000 to L1FFF
State (S) S000 to S7FF
Special internal relay (M) M0800 to M81FF
Timer (current value) (T) T000 to T3FF
Counter (setting value) (C) C000 to C1FF
Word device
Data register (D) D0000 to D2FFF
Hexadecimal
Special data register (D) D8000 to D81FF
Link register (W) W0000 to W3FFF
File register (R) R0000 to F7FFF
2 - 71 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series
1
6 SIEMENS PLC
(1) SIEMENS S7-200 series
OVERVIEW
Device name Setting range Device name
Variable Memory(V) V00 to V51197
Input(I) I00 to I77
2
Output(Q) Q00 to Q77
Bit device
Bit memory(M) M00 to M317
SPECIFICATIONS
Decimal
Special Memory(SM) SM00 to SM1947
Timer(T)*1 T0 to T255
Counter(C)*1 C0 to C255
Sequence Control Relay(S) S00 to S317
3
Variable Memory (V)*6 VW0 to VW5118
COMMON SETTING
Input(I)*6 IW0 to IW6
Output(Q)*6 QW0 to QW6
*2,*6 AIW0 to AIW30
Analog Input(AI)
Analog Output(AQ)*6 AQW0 to AQW30
Word device
Bit memory(M)*6 MW0 to MW30 Decimal 4
Special Memory(SM)*3,*6 SMW0 to SMW192
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Timer(T) (16-bit)*4
PREPARATORY
T0 to T255
*4 C0 to C255
Counter(C) (16-bit)
High Speed Counter(HC) (32-bit)*5 HC0 to HC2
Sequence Control Relay(S)*6 SW0 to SW30
5
*1 Writing to the bit device, T and C is not allowed.
COMMON SETTINGS
*2 Writing to the word device, HC and AL is not allowed.
*3 The word device SM cannot be monitored.
FOR OBJECTS
*4 The word device T and C are 16-bit devices.
*5 The word device HC is a 32-bit device.
*6 The byte address is numbered using even numbers only.
6
(2) SIEMENS S7-300 series
Device name Setting range Device name
LAMP, SWITCH
Input relay (I) I0000 to I5117
Bit device
Output relay (Q) Q0000 to Q5117 Decimal
Bit memory (M) M00000 to M20477 7
Timer (Current value) (T) T000 to T511
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Counter (Current value) (C) C000 to C511
NUMERICAL/
D000100000 to D000165534
Word device
D000200000 to D000265534
Decimal
Data register (D)
D000300000 to D000365534
Setting range
Input relay (I) : 8
:
D102300000 to D102365534
ALARM
2.6 Supported Devices 2 - 72
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series
7 Matsushita Electric Works PLC (Matsushita MEWNET-FP series)
Device name Setting range Device No. Notation
*3 X0000 to X511F
Input replay (X)
Output relay (Y) Y0000 to Y511F
Decimal +
Internal relay (R)*4 R0000 to R886F
Hexadecimal*6
Bit device
Special relay (R)*4 R9000 to R910F
Link relay (L)*1 L0000 to L639F
Error alarm relay (E)*2, *3 E0000 to E2047
*3 T0000 to T3071 Decimal
Timer contact (T)
*3 C0000 to C3071
Counter contact (C)
Timer/Counter (Elapsed value) (EV) EV0000 to EV3071
Timer/Counter (Set value) (SV) SV0000 to SV3071
Word device
*4 DT00000 to DT16383
Data register (DT) Decimal
*1 LD0000 to LD8447
Link register (LD)
File register (FL)*1,*5 FL00000 to FL32764
Pulse relay (P) and Index register (IX, IY) are not supported.
*1 This device is not provided in FP0, FP
*2 Applicable for FP2SH only.
*3 Writing to the device is not allowed.
*4 Includes Special register (R9000 to R910F) and Special data register (DT9000 to DT9255).
However, access is not possible for the FP series when Special data register starts from D90000.
*5 Accessible to Bank 0 only.
*6 Bit device No. (3-digit decimal) + Bit position (1-digit hexadecimal)
8 Microcomputer connection
Device name Setting range Device name
Bit data (M)*1 M0 to M2047
Bit device
Decimal
*2 M8000 to M8063
Special memory (M)
Word device
Word data (D) D0 to D4095
Decimal
Special memory (M)*2 D8000 to D8015
*1 Bit data (M) are provided in GT Designer Version SW1 E or later.
*2 Special memory is a device for special applications of GOT (Interrupt output, communication error information,
etc.).
*3 In the F920GOT-K, D0 to D1023 are available.
2 - 73 2.6 Supported Devices
2.6.3 Device range available for GOT-F900 series
2.7 Precautions for Object Setting 1
Do not write from multiple objects to one device with the same trigger.
OVERVIEW
GOT and PLC may execute the operation that is unnecessary for users.
Example: Status monitor function
Items Condition Action
2
Screen tab X0 in ON status (object base screen1) Data SET D100 300
SPECIFICATIONS
Project tab X0 in ON status Data SET D100 200
(1) The trigger is enabled when monitoring the screen other than base screen1 (X0 OFF ON) <no
problem>
Write 200 to D100 of PLC CPU. 3
COMMON SETTING
Other than
base screen1 D100 200
The status monitor of project unit (save 200 to D100)
4
(2) The trigger is enabled when monitoring base screen1 (X0 OFF ON) <with problem>
Write 300 and 200 to D100 of PLC CPU.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(When displaying numeric value on GOT, display 200 and 300 in turn.)
Base screen1
D100 300
5
D100 200
COMMON SETTINGS
The status monitor of screen unit (save 300 to D100)
The status monitor of project unit (save 200 to D100)
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
2.7 Precautions for Object Setting 2 - 74
3. COMMON SETTING
This section explains how to set devices commonly used in all projects.
3.1 GOT/ PLC Type Setting
After starting GT Designer2, select [New] from the menu bar. Then "System Environment" dialog box will
appear.
In [System Settings] within the dialog box, set the GOT type that uses the project to be created and the PLC
CPU type connected to that GOT.
These settings can be changed after the project is created.
3.1.1 Settings
1 Follow (1) or (2) below:
(1) Changing the GOT and PLC settings during project setting
Select [Common] [System Environment] from the menu.
(2) When making settings at a creation of a new project:
The wizard is displayed when making a new project.
Follow the steps below after finishing the wizard.
2 After the "System Environments" dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following
explanation.
3-1 3.1 GOT/ PLC Type Setting
3.1.1 Settings
3.1.2 Setting items 1
This section explains the setting items for GOT type and PLC type.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Item Description A F
GOT Type Select the GOT type to be used.
4
Select the PLC CPU type to be connected to GOT while considering the available device range, as
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PLC Type the device setting will be made within the device range of the selected PLC CPU.
PREPARATORY
When accessing multiple PLC CPUs, select the PLC CPU type of the largest device range.
Select the color setting for the screen displayed in GOT
Color Settings Select the color setting in accordance with the GOT display color.
The color setting applicable for GT Designer2 will be set.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
(1) When Multiple CPU system is used
FOR OBJECTS
To monitor the multiple CPU system of other station by GOT, select [MELSEC-
Q(Multi)/Q-Motion]. The PLC CPU type of host station (QCPU, QnACPU or
ACPU) is not relevant.
PLC No. setting is disabled if other PLC type has been selected.
(2) When connecting GOT to remote I/O station
6
When connecting GOT to a remote I/O station in MELSECNET/H network system,
set "MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*" as PLC type. LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.1 GOT/ PLC Type Setting 3-2
3.1.2 Setting items
3.1.3 Precautions
There are no Precautions for setting the GOT and PLC type.
However, there are the following precautions for changing the GOT and PLC type.
1 Precautions for changing the GOT type
If GOT type is changed, this may change or delete the some function settings or affect the figure/frame
settings.
Therefore, change GOT type while paying full attention to followings. (Also, make sure to check other
settings.)
(1) If settings, figures and/or objects which are not supported by the GOT type after change exist:
After GOT type is changed, some settings, figures and objects may be deleted, if they are not
supported by the GOT currently set.
Even if GOT type is changed to the previous one, the deleted settings will not be restored.
(2) Undo and Redo
"Undo", "Redo" settings will be reset when GOT type is changed.
(3) Items to be set at the GOT after changing the GOT type
Some setting items must be set after GOT type change is completed, as they are not included in
the previous GOT type. Note that default values are set for these setting items.
(4) Object shape
A shape is changed as indicated below.
(a) When the shape is set [None], the setting remains [None].
(b) A basic figure will be changed to the same figure, if it is included in the currently set GOT.
However, it will be changed to the first basic figure, i.e., figure set at the top of the combo box,
if not included.
(5) If device ranges not applicable to the GOT type after change exist:
The applicable device range/type differs with the GOT type. GT Designer2 displays the device out
of the range as "??". In this case, make device settings again. Some device types (BCD, real
number) may be deleted, as they are not supported by the GOT.
(6) If user defined libraries exist:
User defined libraries will not be changed.
The data within user defined libraries are usable even after GOT type is changed. However, if they
include figures or objects that are not supported by the GOT, the libraries cannot be used.
the previous GOT type. Note that default values are set for these setting items.
3-3 3.1 GOT/ PLC Type Setting
3.1.3 Precautions
(7) Changing to the GOT of which screen size is different
1
When the different GOT type is selected, positions and sizes of figures and objects set on the
screen can be selected whether set or not the adjusting positions and sizes automatically.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Item Description
COMMON SETTING
Check this item to change the screen size only.
Resize the screen only When this item is checked, positions and sizes of figures and objects on the screen
are not changed after the GOT type is changed.
Perform Automatic Scaling on the Check this item to automatically change positions and sizes of figures and objects
positions/sizes of figures and objects to adjust those of the changed GOT type.
Check this item to automatically adjust the positions and sizes of figures and 4
Apply to Window Screen
objects on the window screen.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Clicking this item displays the explanation for the automatic scaling.
PREPARATORY
About Automatic Scaling...
When [Perform Automatic Scaling on the positions/sizes of figures and objects] is checked, figures
and objects are changed as follows:
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.1 GOT/ PLC Type Setting 3-4
3.1.3 Precautions
(a) Automatic scaling of figures and objects
When the different GOT type is selected, figures and objects are zoomed in or zoomed out
automatically.
Figures and objects are zoomed in or zoomed out automatically corresponding to the GOT
screen size.
On the base screen
Figures and objects are zoomed in or zoomed out automatically corresponding to the GOT
screen size.
On the window screen
When the used GOT type is changed to a smaller type, the window screen is zoomed out
automatically. (The window screen is not zoomed in.)
Figures and objects are zoomed out automatically corresponding to the maximum size of
screen.
The following items are restricted to be zoomed in or zoomed out.
Item Restriction
The numerical size is zoomed in or zoomed out within the
available display range set for GT Designer2.
When [6 x 8dot] is set for the fonts, the object area is not
Numerical Display/Input, Ascii Display/
zoomed in or zoomed out.
Input, Date/Time Display
When the frame format is set, figures set for objects are
zoomed in or zoomed out and the object area is not
zoomed in or zoomed out.
The object area is not zoomed in or zoomed out.
Data List, Alarm History When the frame format is set, only figures are zoomed in or
zoomed out.
Objects are zoomed in or zoomed out when [Line] is set for
Parts Movement
the movement way.
For the parts display and the set overlay screen, objects and
Parts Display, Set Overlay Screen, the screen size are not zoomed in or zoomed out.
Window Position For the window position, the position set on the base or
window screen is not changed.
(b) The display range for automatic scaling
Figures and objects set out of the display range are not zoomed in or zoomed out even if
changing to the different type of GOT screen.
Relayout figures and objects into the display range when figures and objects are out of the
display range.
(c) Changing the logo image size
If changed to the GOT of which screen size is different, the size of the logo image may be
changed.
When the size of the logo image is changed, set the logo image again.
3-5 3.1 GOT/ PLC Type Setting
3.1.3 Precautions
(8) When the GOT type is changed from A95*GOT to A956WGOT:
1
The data in the 6-dot area at the bottom of the A95*GOT screen is not displayed on A956WGOT.
Adjust the set points of figure and object positions when utilizing A95*GOT screen data.
OVERVIEW
2
234 A956WGOT
dots A95*GOT screen size screen size
SPECIFICATIONS
6 dots
3
2 Precautions for changing the PLC type
COMMON SETTING
(1) If devices that cannot be converted are included:
When the PLC type is changed, GT Designer2 displays the device cannot be converted (no
corresponding device type, or setting available range is exceeded) as "??". In this case, set the
device again.
(2) If the PLC type after change does not correspond to the network:
4
The network setting will be made as host station.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
When changing GOT/PLC type
When changing GOT/PLC type, make backup for the project in advance in order to
prevent the settings to be deleted by mistake.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.1 GOT/ PLC Type Setting 3-6
3.1.3 Precautions
3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
For GOT, set the device for screen switching in order to switch base screens and display window screen.
Device types for screen switching are as follows:
Device for base screen switching
Device for overlap window 1 switching (For base screen in the case of GOT-F900 series)
Device for overlap window 2 switching (For base screen in the case of GOT-F900 series)
Device for superimposed window switching (For GOT-A900 series only)
1 Switching base screens
Switch base screens by setting a base screen No. to the device for base screen switching.
There are the following two methods for specifying the base screen No. At using these methods, the
screen No. is stored into the switching screen device.
The screen No. is stored into the set device.
The screen is switched by the touch switch (go to screen switch).
Example: In the case of device for base screen switching: D100
Base screen whose
No.is same with
Base screen 10 Base screen 20 screen swith device
Device value value appears
changed
D100 10 D100 20
Remark The value of the device for base screen switching when GOT is powered on
(1) In the case of GOT-A900 series
When the value of device for base screen switching is 0 or the screen No. that has
not been downloaded is stored, GOT will display the base screen with the lowest
screen among those screens already downloaded. Errors will not be displayed
(system alarm).
Downloaded
screen Base screen
Base screen 2 switch device
Base screen 2 D100 "0"
to
Base screen 19
Base screen 2 displayed
3-7 3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting
(2) In the case of GOT-F900 series 1
When the value of device for base screen switching is 0, or the value of screen
No. that has not been downloaded is stored, GOT will display the corresponding
error message (The corresponding screen No. is displayed.)
OVERVIEW
The No. 1 base screen will be always displayed when GOT is powered on.
(Base screen No.1 must have been created.)
(a) Initialization of the device for base screen switching 2
As the user screen No. is always bigger than 1, an error message appears on
the monitoring screen to warn that no corresponding screen is provided when
SPECIFICATIONS
the current value of the word device that specifies a base screen is 0.
In the switching setting of GT Designer2 ( Section 3.2.2 Setting items),
it is recommended to make the settings in order that the device for base
screen switching will be initialized when GOT is powered on, depending on 3
the situation.
(This setting is available in the system screen of GOT.)
COMMON SETTING
2 Displaying or erasing window screen (for GOT-A900 only)
The device for window screen switching stores the window screen No. to switch window screens; and
stores 0 to erase the window screens.
There are the following two methods for specifying the window screen No. At using these methods, the
4
screen No. is stored into the switching screen device.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
The screen No. is stored into the set device.
PREPARATORY
The screen is switched by the touch switch (go to screen switch).
<Downloaded window screen>
Base screen windows screen
5
13451
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
No.1 No.2
<Example of GOT Display>
Device for overlap window 1 switching: D120 6
Windows screen No.1 displayed Windows screen No.2 displayed Overlap windows 1 earased
LAMP, SWITCH
13451
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
D120 1 D120 2 D120 0
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting 3-8
Remark (1) Methods of erasing window screen by touch operation
When close key is displayed on an overlap window, touch it to erase the window.
Section 2.1.2 Window screen specifications
(2) Position of window screen display
Set the position of window screen display using GT Designer2.
Section 2.1.2 Window screen specifications
Specify the display position based on the device value.
Section 3.2.2 Setting items
Switching screen device setting
Switching screen device is set as the following.
(1) GOT internal device
It is recommended to use this device only for switching the screen by the touch
switch (go to screen switch).
Screen switching cannot be controlled by the PLC CPU.
However, screen switching of only base screens can be controlled by the PLC
CPU with the script function.
(Script example)
[w:GD10]=[w:D10]; //D10 value is stored into GD10.
(2) PLC CPU device
It is recommended to use this device to control screen switching from the PLC
CPU.
Screen switching can also be performed by the touch switch (go to screen switch).
3-9 3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting
3.2.1 Settings 1
1 Select [Common] [System Environments] from the menu.
OVERVIEW
2 Double-click on [Screen Switching] in [System Environments] .
3 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following explanation: 2
Remark
SPECIFICATIONS
When setting in project workspace
Double-click on [System Environments] and "System Environment" dialog box
appears, then double-click on [Screen Switching].
COMMON SETTING
Double click 4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting 3 - 10
3.2.1 Settings
3.2.2 Setting items
Set a screen switching device for each screen type (base screen, overlap screen 1, overlap screen 2 and
superimposed screen).
(When setting GOT-A900 series)
(When setting GOT-F900 series)
Items Description A F
Select the data format to process screen switching device value.
BIN : Processes the screen switching device value as binary value.
BCD : Processes the screen switching device value as BCD value.
Data Type The range of the screen (screen No.) can be switched will depend on the set data format.
BIN : 1 to 32767
BCD : 1 to 9999
GOT-F900 series processes it as binary value.
Base Screen Set the screen switching device for base screen. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
(Continued to next page)
3 - 11 3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting
3.2.2 Setting items
Item Description A F
1
Check this item to display Overlap Window 1 or Overlap Window 2
Then set the switching screen device for each window.
Overlap Window 1
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
OVERVIEW
Overlap Window 2 The overlap windows will not be displayed without setting the switching screen devices.
(In the case of GOT-F900 series, the overlap window will overlap with the base screen and the
specified base screen. Check this item to display the base screens to be overlapped.)
2
Check this item to specify the display position of the window based on the device value.
The devices that store display positions will be set consecutively starting from the device set in
SPECIFICATIONS
Specify multiples of 16 for the X and Y coordinates of the overlap window.
If a non-multiple of 16 is specified for the coordinate, the overlap window is placed on the
coordinate of the rounded down number when the remainder is 7 or less, or on the coordinate of
the rounded up number when the remainder is 8 or more.
When the coordinates of rounded up/down numbers are the same with the previous coordinates,
the overlap window will not be drawn again. 3
[Screens Switching] .
Example: In the case that switching screen device is set to D100.
COMMON SETTING
Display position X : D101
Y : D102
The window screen will be displayed as follows:
D101
Display Position is
4
specified with the D102
OBJECT SETTING
device
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
If the device value exceeding the range for display in GOT is stored as the device value that stores
display position, the GOT will automatically adjust the display position and then display the window
screen.
5
The device value will not be updated with the above adjustment.
COMMON SETTINGS
Display position after
FOR OBJECTS
adjustment
Position specified by
device value
Adjust
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Check this item to display the overlap window without window bar.
[Window bar] [Window bar none]
7
Window bar None Close key Movement
CHARACTER DISPLAY
key
NUMERICAL/
Users can move and close Users cannot move the window
this window. To close it, please set the screen
switching device value as "0".
Check this item to display superimposed window.
Then set the switching screen device for the superimposed window
8
Superimpose Window
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
The superimposed windows will not be displayed without setting the switching screen devices.
ALARM
3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting 3 - 12
3.2.2 Setting items
Item Description A F
Uncheck this item to write 1 into the device with the base screen switching settings when GOT is
Uninitialize switching screen powered on.
device This setting prevents the device value from being reset; a screen error from appearing on GOT
screen when GOT is powered on.
3.2.3 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for setting the switching screen device.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Switching screen device for screen switching
Use the switching screen device only when switching GOT screens.
(2) Switching base screen device
The default value of switching base screen device is set to "GD100".
Change the switching base screen device when "GD100" is used in other objects. (The default
value in GT Designer2 is different. (GT Designer: D0))
(3) Display restrictions of used set objects
If the line graph with locus display on the base screen has been set, the overlap window2 cannot
be displayed.
2 Precautions for use
(1) If the value that cannot be displayed is stored into the switching screen device during GOT
monitoring.
(a) In the case of GOT-A900 series
If the screen No. that is not downloaded is saved as the value of the switching screen device,
the screen currently displayed will be kept.
This action is common in all types of screens (base screen, overlap window1, overlap
window2, and superimposed window).
Example: In case of base screen
Downloaded
screen
base screen
Base screen1
to
Base screen33
Base screen switching
As no corresponding base screen is
device D100"9999"
provided, the current display will be kept
(b) In the case of GOT-F900 series
Am error message will appear on GOT.
(2) Word device for base screen switching (for GOT-F900 only)
If the word device that specifies a base screen is not located in the backup battery area (keep area,
latch area), the current value of the word device will be 0 when the PLC CPU is powered off or is
changed to "Stop" status.
As the base screen No. is always 1 or bigger, an error message appears on GOT to warn that the
next screen is not provided. (No.**)".
It is recommended to specify the keep area of the switching base screen device.
3 - 13 3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting
3.2.3 Precautions
3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting 1
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
OVERVIEW
Station No. switching is a function to switch the monitored station No. of the object.
In a system with the same controlled multiple machines to a network, for example, the multiple machines can
be monitored on the same monitor screen by using station No. switching.
2
As the number of object to be set can be reduced, the built-in memory of GOT can be saved.
Switching station No. can be carried out for the station No. that can be monitored by GOT.
SPECIFICATIONS
For more information on station No. that can be monitored by GOT (accessible range),Refer to the following.
GOT-A900 series User's Manual (Connection System Manual)
3.3.1 Methods of switching station No.
3
COMMON SETTING
The device dedicated to switching station No. is used to switch the station No.
The screen object is redrawn after changing the value stored in the station No. switching device
Line B
Station No.1
4
Station No. Monitor Station No.0
switching D100 (Host) Station No.2
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
device
PREPARATORY
Prod. 40
D20 00FF vol.
(hex.)
Line A
Monitoring host station
Prod. vol.
D100 40
5
Change the device value
COMMON SETTINGS
of switching station No.
Line B
and change the monitor
FOR OBJECTS
target of station No. 1. Station No.1
Monitoring Prod. vol.
D100 D100 100
Station No.
switching
Station No.0
(Host) Station No.2 6
device Prod. 100
D20 0101 vol
(hex.)
LAMP, SWITCH
Line A
Change the monitor target to station No.1
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting 3 - 14
3.3.1 Methods of switching station No.
Application example
Monitor different station Nos. on base screen and window
Use Touch switch to change monitor target.
screen.
Set on "Station No. switching device" dialog Set using the Touch switch
box
Station No.1
D10 100
100 Station1 Station1
Station2 Station2
D10 30
Base screen : monitors station No.1 30
Station No.2
Window screen : monitors station No.2 Station No.1 Station No.1
1 Methods of switching station No.
Station No. switching is executed by switching the station No. stored to the station No. switching device.
The station No. can be specified in either of the following methods. The station No. is stored into the
station No. switching device by the methods.
(1) Store a value in the device for switching station No.
Station No. can be switched if a value is stored in the device for switching station No. as follows:.
When GOT has been incorporated into the data link system (MELSECNET) or CC-Link system
GOT
Switching target Storage value (hexadecimal)
Master station 0000H
Local station (1 to 64) 0001H to 0040H
Station No. set for each object
(The same monitor target is set if "Switching station 00FEH
No." has not been set.)
Host (connection target) monitor 00FFH
3 - 15 3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting
3.3.1 Methods of switching station No.
When the GOT is included in a network system (MELSECNET/10) or Ethernet system* 1
GOT
OVERVIEW
Switching target Storage value (hexadecimal)
Relation between change target and storage value
2
Network No. (1 to 255) is as follows:
When monitoring PLC station No: 18,
SPECIFICATIONS
network No.: 1
0112H
PLC station No. (1 to 64) PLC station No.
Network No.
Station No. set for each object
3
(The same monitor target is set if "Switching station 00FEH
No." has not been set.)
COMMON SETTING
Host station (connection target) monitor 00FFH
* For Ethernet connection, Ethernet setting is required on GT Designer2.
Refer to the following manual for details of the setting method.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection System Manual)
4
(2) Use touch switch to switch station No.]
Touch the touch switch dedicated to switching station No. to switch the station No.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Section 6.2 Touch Switch
When using GOT data register (GD) for switching station No. device
5
Module connected to station No.0 of network No.0 is monitored until setting the
COMMON SETTINGS
value of switching station No. device (GD) after turning on GOT.
Thus, the system alarm "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication
FOR OBJECTS
pathway or modules." will occur depending on the connection type.
To not occur the system alarm, create the initial displaying screen and set the value
to switching station No. device in the screen.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting 3 - 16
3.3.1 Methods of switching station No.
3.3.2 Settings
1 Select [Common] [System Environment] from the menu.
2 As "System Environment" dialog box appears, double-click on [Switching Station No]. in the dialog box.
3 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
Before setting switching station No.
When switching station No., set the function available or unavailable for each of
base screen and window screen.
To use the function, make it available in the [Auxiliary Setting] for each screen.
Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
Remark When making the settings in project workspace
Click on [System Environment] to display "System Environment" dialog box, and
then double click on [Switching Station No.] there.
Double click
3 - 17 3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting
3.3.2 Settings
3.3.3 Setting items 1
Set a switching station No. device.
Use the device common to all screens or the different device for each screen.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Items Description A F 4
Switching Station No. Check this item to use "Switching station No.".
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Check this item to make "Switching station No." available for all screens.
All
Then set the switching station No. device.
Check this item to specify the target station No. by screen type.
Screen Type
Then check the screen type to carry out "Switching station No."
Check the screen type(s) that will perform "Switching station No." (base/overlap window1/overlap 5
Base window2/superimposed window).
COMMON SETTINGS
Then set the switching station No. device for each screen type.
"Switching station No." will not be performed without this setting.
FOR OBJECTS
Overlap Window1
Example:
Base screen Monitors host Monitors other
Overlap Window2 station station (Station 1)
Overlap window1
Monitors host
station
Monitors other
station (Station 3)
6
Superimpose Switching station No. device (hexadecimal)
Window Base screen : 00FFH : 0101H LAMP, SWITCH
Overlap window1 : 00FFH : 0103H
Include Touchkey Action/
Check this item to make touch switch action/status observation/script object functions the targets
Status Observation(Screen)/
Script(Screen)
for switching station No.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting 3 - 18
3.3.3 Setting items
Action of touch switch/status observation/script function
When using the device of which station No. has been switched to perform all actions
of switch function, status observation function, and script function, check [Include
Touchkey action/Status Observation(Screen)/Script(Screen)].
If it is not checked, each object operates as shown below:
Object Function Monitor/Action object
ON/OFF figure to display status
Device of which station No. has been switched.
Touch switch function Device for indirect comment
Action at touch Device of which station No. set in the object
Status observation Trigger device Device of which station No. has been switched.
function (screen) Action when condition success Device of which station No. set in the object
Script function (screen)
Device of which station No. has been switched.
Script function (screen) Script (refer to device)
Script (write to device) Device of which station No. set in the object
3 - 19 3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting
3.3.3 Setting items
3.3.4 Precautions 1
This section provides the precautions for switching station No.
OVERVIEW
1 PLC CPU compatible with "Switching station No.".
"Switching station No." is available only when MELSEC-A, MELSELC-QnA, MELSELC-Q series are
monitored. 2
2 Objects incompatible with "Switching station No."
SPECIFICATIONS
The following object devices are not compatible with "Switching station No."
GOT monitors the device of the station No. set in each object.
Note that if the object compatible with "Switching station No." has been set in the same screen, GOT
will monitor the different station No. depending on the object when carrying out "Switching station No."
3
Screen switching function Switching station No. function
COMMON SETTING
System information function Clock display function
Alarm history display function Floating alarm function
Recipe function Report function
Hardcopy function Trend graph display function*1
Alarm list display function*1 Scatter graph display function*1
Line graph display function*2 Script function*3 4
Status observation function*3 Gateway function
OBJECT SETTING
*1 Only when the [memory storage] has been set, GOT monitors the device of the station No. set in the object.
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
GOT monitors the device of the station No. set as the switching target when the [memory storage] is not set.
*2 Only when the [Locus] has been set, GOT monitors the device of the station No. set in the object.
GOT monitors the device of the station No. set as the switching target when the [Locus] is not set.
*3 Only when the settings have been made for each project, GOT monitors the device of the station No. set in the
object. 5
GOT monitors the device of the station No. set as the switching target when the settings have been made for
COMMON SETTINGS
each screen.
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting 3 - 20
3.3.4 Precautions
3.4 Password Setting
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
Passwords can be set to object, screen display/operation, upload operation, and utility operation.
The setting of each password restricts the operable user.
1 Restricting the object and screen display/operation
The screen display can be changed according to the user's security level by setting the security level (0
to 15) for each object and screen.
(In the case of GOT-F900 series, security level can be set for the base screen and utility.)
The security level can be changed by entering the password corresponding to each security level has.
Section 5.8 Security Function
Security level: 2 Security level: 10
Line No.1 Line No.1
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348 Cancel B 348 B 348
Input password and change to Display objects according to the
high security level. changed security level.
2 Restricting the upload operation
By the preset password, the screen data upload operation can be restricted.
For details of data transmission operation, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version2 Operating Manual
Restricted by
password
3 - 21 3.4 Password Setting
1
3 Restricting the utility operation
When starting utility, enter the preset password to prevent the unnecessary utility operation.
For details of utility, refer to the following manual.
OVERVIEW
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Extended Option Functions Manual)
GOT-F900 Series OPERATION Manual [GT Designer2]
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Exit
Switch to utility screen Input password Display utility if the input 3
password is correct
COMMON SETTING
4 Parameter change screen
When displaying the parameter setting screen of motion monitor function or servo amplifier monitor
function, enter the preset password to prevent the unnecessary change of the parameter settings for
motion controller QCPU (Q172CPU/Q173CPU)/servo amplifier to be connected.
For details of servo amplifier monitor function and motion monitor function, refer to the following
4
manual.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Extended Option Functions Manual)
GOT-F900 Series OPERATION Manual [GT Designer2]
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
RUN STOP
Switch to parameter setting Enter password When the password matches,
screen parameter setting screen displayed.
6
3.4.1 Settings
LAMP, SWITCH
1 Select [Common] [System Environment] from the menu.
2 Double click on [Password] in "System Environment" dialog box.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
3 As the "Password" dialog box appears, select the tab for setting the password.
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.4 Password Setting 3 - 22
3.4.1 Settings
3.4.2 Password setting items
1 Security tab
Set the password according to each security level.
Security System
Item Description A F
Check this item to use security function.
Then, set the device (level device) that stores the security level value of GOT display screen.
In case of GOT-A900 series
If the level device is not controlled by PLC CPU, set GOT internal device (GD) .
The security level can be changed by changing the level device value from the PLC CPU.
Example: Level device: D10
Level Device
Base screen 1 Base screen 1
D10: 3 D10: 8
Set to security level 3 Set to security level 8
In the case of GOT-F900 series
The level device value can be checked from PLC CPU
Passwords for changing the security level are listed.
(Passwords are displayed as "*".)
Select the security level No. (0 to 15) for which the password to be registered from the password
list.
Password list Passwords can be set for each security level.
Security level 0 : Security function is not set
Security level 1 : Low
Security level 15 : High
(Continued to next page)
3 - 23 3.4 Password Setting
3.4.2 Password setting items
1
Item Description A F
Edit*1*2 This setting is available for setting a new password or changing the preset password.
Delete*3 Deletes the registered password.
OVERVIEW
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.
*1 Registering new password 2
Enter numeric characters in 1 to 8 digits as new password and then click on OK button.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
*2 Changing password
COMMON SETTING
Before changing password, enter the current password and then verify the password.
1 In "Password Verify" dialog box, enter the current password, and then click on OK button.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
2 As "Password" dialog box appears, enter numerical characters in 1 to 8 digits as new password, and
then click on OK button.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
*3 Deleting password
In "Password Verify" dialog box, enter the current password, and then click on OK button.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.4 Password Setting 3 - 24
3.4.2 Password setting items
2 Password (System) tab
Set the password to restrict screen data upload, utility start, display of parameter change screen for
motion monitor function/servo amplifier monitor function from the GOT .
Security System
Item Description A F
For GOT-A900 series
Registers or changes the password that restricts GOT screen data upload and utility screen
Data Edit*1*2 display.
Transmission/ For GOT-F900 series
Utility Registers or changes the password that restricts GOT screen data upload.
Delete*3 Deletes the registered password.
Motion/Servo Registers or changes the password that displays parameter change screen for motion monitor
Edit*1*2
Amplifier unction/servo amplifier monitor function.
Parameter Delete *3 Deletes the registered password.
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.
*1 Registering new password
In "Password" dialog box, enter alphanumeric characters (0 to 9, A to F) in 1 to 8 digits as new password
and then click on OK button.
3 - 25 3.4 Password Setting
3.4.2 Password setting items
*2 Changing password
1
Before changing password, enter the current password and then verify the password.
1 In "Password Verify" dialog box, enter the current password, and then click on OK button.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
2 As "Password" dialog box appears, enter alphanumeric characters (0 to 9, A to F) as new password,
and then click on OK button.
COMMON SETTING
*3 Deleting password
In "Password Verify" dialog box, enter the current password, and then click on OK button.
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.4 Password Setting 3 - 26
3.4.2 Password setting items
3.4.3 Precautions
This section provides precautions for using password setting.
1 Precautions on drawing
When the security level device value is changed with the numerical input function, the key window used
for the value input is deleted after the input is completed, regardless of the setting for [Close cursor and
key window when RET key is pressed] in the auxiliary setting (per project).
When [Display cursor and key window] is set for [Action when condition success] or [Action when
switching screens] in the auxiliary setting (per project or screen), the key window is redisplayed.
The cursor position for redisplaying the key window is the same position set for switching screens.
Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
2 Making a note of the password
The already registered password cannot be checked later. Therefore, always make a note of the
password.
If the password is forgotten, a security level change or security level password change/deletion cannot
be made, and the project data must be recreated. (Re-setting of only the password cannot be done.)
To prevent the password from being forgotten, it is recommended to fill out the following list.
Tear-off line
Password list
Installation name (No.): Manager:
1. Keep this memo safe from loss.
2. Do not reveal the password.
The GOT display may change depending on the security level.
3. As the security level No. is greater, the security level is higher.
Security level Date of
Password
User entry or Remarks
Level (1 to 8 digits)
(operator or department) change
8 Manager of worksite (John Mitsubishi) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 2004.6.1 Example
0 Do not set the security function.
Low: 1
10
11
12
13
14
High: 15
3 - 27 3.4 Password Setting
3.4.3 Precautions
3.5 System Information Setting 1
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
OVERVIEW
According to the data written to device, GOT operations (screen erasing, invalidating key input, etc) will be
controlled via PLC CPU and GOT status will be notified to PLC CPU.
The following two types of devices are provided for setting the system information.
2
Read device: controls GOT operation via PLC CPU
SPECIFICATIONS
Write device: notifies PLC CPU of GOT operation status
1 Controlling GOT operation (read device)
PLC CPU writes the value to the read device specified for GOT operation and controls GOT operation.
Example: Turning the GOT to screen save mode forcibly by PLC CPU. 3
Read
COMMON SETTING
D10 b2 b1 b0
device
Forced screen saver enable
signal (Erases the screen)
D10.b1=OFF D10.b1=ON
4
Turns the forced screen Checks the change of read
saver enable signal ON device and erases the display.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
2 Writing GOT status (write device)
GOT writes action status to write device to notify PLC CPU.
Example: Write the base screen No. currently displayed to the device. 5
Write device: D20
COMMON SETTINGS
(stores the screen No. currently displayed)
FOR OBJECTS
125
Base screen 1 Base screen 5 Writes GOT
D20 1 5
operation status 6
to write device.
LAMP, SWITCH
Monitoring system information data/update timing
The following explains monitoring the read device set in the system information and
deciding the timing to update the write device.
Read device : monitored at intervals of GOT monitor period. 7
The read device value needs to be longer compared to
CHARACTER DISPLAY
the interval of GOT monitor period.
The monitor period value is stored in the GOT internal
NUMERICAL/
device (GS8). (For GOT-A900 only)
Section 2.6.1 GOT internal devices
Write device : updated when the GOT operation status has changed. 8
ALARM
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 28
3 Function overview (In the case of GOT-A900 series)
The following operations can be confirmed and controlled in the system information.
Function description
Control of GOT operation (read device) Notification of GOT operation status (write device)
Item
Device name/signal Device name/signal
name name
Disables screen save function.
Notifies the base screen No. On-screen base
(Turns backlight off in the case of System signal 1 b0
currently displayed screen No.
Screen GOT-F900 series)
Notifies the window screen No. On-screen window
Forcibly executes screen save System signal 1 b1
currently displayed screen No.
Outputs buzzer System signal 1 b14
Buzzer ---- ----
Outputs buzzer once System signal 1 b15
Human Detects human movement and
---- ---- System signal 2 b5
sensor notifies it
Notifies the GOT status (normal/
System signal 2 b1
abnormal) at power on
Notifies the status of GOT error System signal 2 b13
Error Resets the error occurred in GOT System signal 1 b13
occurrence and error code GOT error code
Notifies the PC card battery error System signal 2 b2
Notifies printer error System signal 2 b15
Turns operation switch lamp of External I/O function Notifies GOT grip switch ON/OFF
Handy GOT System signal 2 b9
handy GOT ON/OFF Output information status
Notifies input range over when
values beyond the input range are System signal 2 b14
stored in the device of write target
Notifies the timing to update the System signal 2 b4
Numerical input data Numerical input NO.
---- ----
input Value before
numerical input
Notifies value before numerical input
change Value after
and after the input is updated
numerical input
change
Notifies that data is read after it is
Bar code Disables bar code function System signal 1 b5 System signal 2 b6
complete
Changes output setting (Black-White
System signal 1 b10 Notifies that hard copy is in printing System signal 2 b7
print)
Hard copy Changes output setting (Color print) System signal 1 b11 Notifies when the number of files in
Changes output setting (Black-White PC card approaches the upper limit System signal 2 b12
System signal 1 b12
Inversion Print) of memory
System signal b8
Notifies that report function is in
Report ---- ---- Report screen in
printing
printing
Notifies that recipe function is in
Recipe ---- ---- System signal 2 b10
processing
Key window ---- ---- Notifies the display of key window System signal 2 b11
3 - 29 3.5 System Information Setting
Function description
1
Control of GOT operation (read device) Notification of GOT operation status (write device)
Item
Device name/signal Device name/signal
name name
OVERVIEW
Cursor position
Notifies the position of the previous Previous cursor
Cursor ---- ----
or current input cursor position Numerical
input of cursor position 2
System signal 1 b9 System signal 2 b3
Key input Disables all Key input System signal 1 b9
Notifies the input key code Input key code
SPECIFICATIONS
Stores the output signal of external I/ External I/O function Stores the input signal of external I/ External I/O function
External I/O
O function Output information O function Input information
* Note that some functions cannot be confirmed or controlled depending on the GOT.
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 30
3.5.1 Setting methods
1 Select [Common] [System Environment] from the menu.
2 Double click on [System Information] in "System Environment" dialog box.
3 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings according to the following explanation.
Remark When making the settings in project work space
Double click on [System Environment] to display "System Environment" dialog box,
and then double click on [System Information] there.
Double click
3.5.2 Setting items
Set devices and functions to be used in the system information.
In the case of GOT-A900 series
3 - 31 3.5 System Information Setting
3.5.1 Setting methods
1
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
In the case of GOT-F900 series 3
Item Description A F
COMMON SETTING
Set this item to control GOT operations with the device of PLC CPU.
If a device No. is assigned to the system signal 1, the devices of the following Nos. will be consecutively
Read Device
assigned to the items following to the system signal 1 automatically. (The unchecked items will not be
set.)
System Signal 1*1 Set the device that stores the data that triggers GOT action. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
External I/O Function Check this item to externally output by turning the bit of the specified device ON when the external I/O
4
Output Information*3 function is used.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Check this item to use recipe function to specify the recipe No. for writing to PLC CPU from the PLC CPU.
PREPARATORY
The recipe No. assigned is less than one of the actual recipe No. to be read/written.
Current Recipe No.
For example: to read/write from/to recipe No. 5,
Set the current recipe No. to 4.
Set this item to write GOT operations to PLC CPU.
Write Device
If the device No. is assigned to the system signal 2 or the base screen currently displayed is set, the
devices of the following Nos. will be consecutively assigned to the items following to the system signal 2. 5
(The device of unchecked items will not be set in GOT-A900 series.)
COMMON SETTINGS
System Signal 2*2 Set the write device of GOT operation status.( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
FOR OBJECTS
Check this item to store the GOT error.
GOT Error Code
( Section 3.5.3 Confirm the error occurred in GOT (for GOT-A900 Series only))
(Continued to next page)
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 32
3.5.2 Setting items
Item Description A F
Write In case of GOT-A900 series
Device Check this item to store the screen No. currently displayed.
The screen No. stored is as follows.
Data format of screen switching device
Display screen
BIN BCD
Hold user-created base
The screen other than user- created
-1 screen No. right before
screen (utility, RGB etc)
being displayed.
During screen switching 0
On-screen Base
Screen Number Currently displayed base screen 1to 32767 1to 9999
In case of GOT-F900 series
The following 15 points will be occupied after device setting.
D+0 : On-screen base screen No.
D+1 : On-screen overlay screen No. 1
D+2 : On-screen overlay screen No. 2
D+3 : Object ID after input is complete (after input value is updated, the user ID
number of numerical input function is stored.)
D+4 : System signal 2*2
D+5 to D+14 : Others
D+5 and D+6 output the information on keys pressed on the keypad in the
F920GOT-K and F930GOT-K. (The system signal 1 of the read device
should be set.)
For the details, refer to the GOT-F900 SERIES OPERATION MANUAL [GT
Designer2 Version].
Check this item to store the currently displayed window screen (overlap window 1).
The screen No. stored is as follows.
Data format of the screen switching device
Display screen
BIN BCD
On-screen Window No screen is displayed or , during
0
Screen Number screen switching
The screen No. of the currently
1to 32767 1to 9999
displayed overlap window 1
The status of screens other than overlap window 1 is confirmed by using switching screen device.
( Section 3.2 Switching Screen Device Setting)
Check this item to store the user ID No. for numerical input function after the input value is updated.
Numeric Value Input
( Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input)
Number
This can be applied to ASCII input function by turning ON the GOT internal device GS450.b2.
Check this item to store the object ID No. of the object in which the cursor is currently located.
Current Cursor
Position ( Section 3.5.3 Confirm cursor's display position (for GOT-A900 Series only))
Check this item to store the object ID No. of the object in which the cursor was previously located.
Previous Cursor
Position ( Section 3.5.3 Confirm cursor's display position (for GOT-A900 Series only))
Check this item to store the set key code when input keys (numerical input, ASCII input, touch switch, and
operating panel) are used for input.
Key Code Input
( Section 3.5.3 Confirm the input key code by input key (for GOT-A900 series only))
Previous Numeric Check this item to store the value (32 bit) before being changed by numerical input function.
Value Input
( Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input)
(32 bit)
Current Numeric Check this item to store the value (32 bit) changed by numerical input function.
Value Input
( Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input)
(32 bit)
(Continued to next page)
3 - 33 3.5 System Information Setting
3.5.2 Setting items
Item Description A F 1
Check this item to store the report screen No. being printed.
Write Currently Printed
Device Report Screen ( Section 12.1 Report Function)
OVERVIEW
External I/O
Check this item to store the information externally input to the specified word device when external I/O
Function Input
*3
function is used.
Information
Cursor Position's
Numeric Value
Stores the user ID No. of the numerical input function currently displayed with input cursor.
( Section 3.5.3 Confirm cursor's display position (for GOT-A900 Series only))
2
Input
This can be applied to ASCII input function by turning ON the GOT internal device GS450.b2.
SPECIFICATIONS
Select All/Unselect Selects/Deselects all the items selected in [Write Device].
Delete Deletes the set read and write devices.
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 34
3.5.2 Setting items
In the case of GOT-A900 series
* 1. System Signal 1
Controls the GOT operation by turning the bit of word device set as system signal 1 ON/OFF
Signal Name Description
ON : Disables screen saver function (that turns monitor screen display OFF) .
Automatic Screen Saver Disable OFF : Enables screen saver function.
Signal (b0)
( Section 3.5.3 Control of Screen Display (for GOT-A900 series only))
ON : Forcibly turns the GOT into screen saver mode.
Forced Screen Saver Enable OFF : Common status (Displays screen again)
Signal (b1)
( Section 3.5.3 Control of Screen Display (for GOT-A900 series only))
ON : Clears the following signal.
Turns [Key input signal (System signal 2)] OFF
Key Code Read Complete Signal
OFF : Does not clear the above signal.
(b3)
( Section 3.5.3 Confirm the input key code by input key (for GOT-A900 series only))
ON : Turns [Numeric value input signal (System signal 2)] OFF.
OFF : Does not turn the above signal OFF
Numeric Value Input Read
Complete Signal (b4) ( Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input)
This can be applied to ASCII input function by turning ON the GOT internal device GS450.b2.
ON : Disables bar code function.
Barcode Input Disable Signal (b5)
OFF : Enables bar code function.
ON : Turns [Barcode input signal (System signal 2)] OFF.
Barcode Input Read Complete OFF : Does not turn the above signal OFF.
Signal (b6)
( Section 12.4 Bar Code Function)
ON : Disables all key-input .
Key-In Disable Signal (b9)
OFF : Enables key-input .
ON : Makes hard copy output setting changeable according to bit ON/OFF status of [Hard copy black-white
print signal (b11)] and [Hard copy black-white inversion signal (b12)] for system signal 1.
Hard Copy Setting Enable Signal
OFF : Carries out hard copy output according to the settings made by GT Designer2)
(b10)
( Section 12.2 Hard Copy)
ON : Changes the hard copy printing mode to [Black-White] .
Hard Copy Black-White Print OFF : Changes the hard copy printing mode to [Color (256 Colors/ 16 Colors)]
Signal (b11)
( Section 12.2 Hard Copy)
ON : Inverses the black-white portion of monitor screen and output.
Hard Copy Black-White Inversion OFF : Outputs the black-white portion of monitor screen without making any changes.
Signal (b12)
( Section 12.2 Hard Copy)
ON : Processes the following signals.
Stores "0" to [GOT error code storage area (Write Device)]
Turns [GOT error detection signal (System signal 2)] OFF.
GOT Error Reset Signal (b13)
OFF : Does not process the above signals.
( Section 3.5.3 Confirm the error occurred in GOT (for GOT-A900 Series only))
ON : Keeps buzzer.
Buzzer Output Signal (b14) OFF : Does not output buzzer.
Even if [Buzzer Volume] of GOT utility (Setup) is set as [None] , buzzer volume will be output when the bit is ON.
ON : Outputs buzzer once.
Buzzer One-shot Output Signal OFF : Does not output buzzer.
(b15) The length of buzzer volume is same with the settings (Long, Short) made in [Buzzer Volume] of GOT utility. (When
set as [None], buzzer volume is same as the setting of [Long].)
3 - 35 3.5 System Information Setting
3.5.2 Setting items
* 2 System Signal 2 1
Writes the GOT operation status to PLC CPU according to the bit ON/OFF status of the word device set in
system signal 2.
OVERVIEW
Signal Name Description
ON : GOT is in screen saver mode.
Screen saving signal(b0)
OFF : GOT is not in screen saver mode.
ON : GOT status normal at power-on
2
OFF : GOT status abnormal at power-on
GOT Ready Signal (b1)
If the signal will not be ON by resetting the GOT again, its possible cause is hardware error of GOT.
SPECIFICATIONS
Consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative.
PC Card Battery Error Detection ON : Battery error detected
Signal (b2) OFF : Battery normal
ON : Key input done
OFF : No key input
Key Input Signal (b3)
( Section 3.5.3 Confirm the input key code by input key (for GOT-A900 series only))
3
COMMON SETTING
ON : The value input by value input function has been updated.
OFF : The value input by value input function has not been updated.
Numeric Value Input Signal (b4)
( Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input)
This can be applied to ASCII input function by turning ON the GOT internal device GS450.b2.
ON : Human movement is detected by human sensor
OFF : Human movement has not been detected by human sensor
(In the case that the human movement can not be detected during the period specified within the GOT
4
Human Sensor Detection Signal
utility)
(valid in A985GOT only) (b5)
OBJECT SETTING
( Section 3.5.3 Control of Screen Display (for GOT-A900 series only))
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Due to the characteristic of human sensor, the signal output remains ON for 60 seconds after starting the GOT.
ON : The data read by bar code reader has been stored into the specified device.
Barcode Input Signal (b6) OFF : No data has been read by bar code reader.
5
( Section 12.4 Bar Code Function)
ON : Hard copy function being executed.
OFF : Hard copy function execution completed, or interrupted.
COMMON SETTINGS
Hard Copy Output Signal (b7)
( Section 12.2 Hard Copy)
FOR OBJECTS
ON : Printing by report function
Report Output Signal (b8) OFF : Printing by report function completed, or interrupted.
( Section 12.1 Report Function)
A950 Handy GOT's Grip Switch
Pressing Signal (b9)
ON
OFF
: A950 Handy GOT's Grip Switch being pressed.
: A950 Handy GOT's Grip Switch is released. 6
ON : Recipe being processed (Write/Read operation)
Recipe Processing Signal (b10) OFF : Recipe process completed, or interrupted.
LAMP, SWITCH
( Section 11.2 Recipe Function)
ON : Key window being displayed
Key window Output Signal (b11)
OFF : Key window not displayed
ON : The number of files (file No.) for screen data stored in PC card by hard copy function exceeds 9900
Hardcopy Sub-signal (b12) OFF : The number of files (file No.) of screen data stored in PC card by hard copy function is less than 9900 7
( Section 12.2 Hard Copy)
CHARACTER DISPLAY
ON : GOT error has occurred.
GOT Error Detection Signal (b13) OFF : Normal
NUMERICAL/
( Section 3.5.3 Confirm the error occurred in GOT (for GOT-A900 Series only))
(Continued to next page)
8
ALARM
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 36
3.5.2 Setting items
Signal Name Description
ON : The value exceeding the input range has been stored into the write target device of numeric value input
function
Numeric Value Error Detection (Check this item on screen switching)
Signal (b14) OFF : The value within the input range has been stored into the write target device of numeric value input
function.
( Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input)
ON : Printer error (power OFF, cable disconnected, No paper provided/ paper jammed, etc) has occurred.
Printer Error Detection Signal
(The signal turns OFF when printer problem is resolved.)
(b15)
OFF : Normal
3 - 37 3.5 System Information Setting
3.5.2 Setting items
* 3 External I/O Function (Input information/ Output information) 1
External I/O function enables data to be input from the outside of GOT (Operation panel); to be output to
the outside of GOT (Lamp or relay), according to the device set in system information.
OVERVIEW
Ten key panel Max. 8 points of
external input External I/O
interface module
2
Connector terminal
block conversion module
External input
SPECIFICATIONS
maximum
General-purpose 16 points
output device
(lamp, relay)
Bit No.
Output signal storage area of external I/O function
(Read Device)
Input signal storage area of external I/O function
(Write Device)
3
b0 Output Y0 Input X0
COMMON SETTING
b1 Output Y1 Input X1
b2 Output Y2 Input X2
b3 Output Y3 Input X3
b4 Output Y4 Input X4
b5 Output Y5 Input X5
4
b6 Output Y6 Input X6
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
b7 Output Y7 Input X7
b8 Output Y8 Fuse blown
b9 Output Y9
b10 Output YA
b11 Output YB
5
COMMON SETTINGS
b12 Output YC Use prohibited
b13 Output YD
FOR OBJECTS
b14 Output YE
b15 Output YF
6
Remark (1) When A950 handy GOT is used
When A950 handy GOT is used, b0 to b3 within the storage area of external
output function (read device) controls the LED status of operation switch. LAMP, SWITCH
b0: LED of operation switch (SW1) for A950 handy GOT
b1: LED of operation switch (SW2) for A950 handy GOT
b2: LED of operation switch (SW3) for A950 handy GOT
b3: LED of operation switch (SW4) for A950 handy GOT 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(2) When external I/O function is used without system information
Data can be input to/output from the outside of GOT by using GOT internal device
NUMERICAL/
(GB).
Section 2.6.1 GOT internal devices
8
ALARM
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 38
3.5.2 Setting items
In the case of GOT-F900 series
*1 System Signal 1
Controls the GOT operation by turning the bit of word device set as system signal 1 ON/OFF.
Signal Name Description
ON : Clears the history data of alarm history function.
Alarm History Clear Signal (b0)
OFF : Does not clear alarm history data.
ON : Turns the backlight OFF after the backlight OFF setting time has passed.
Back Light OFF Signal (b1)
OFF : Keeps the backlight always ON.
ON : Clears the sampling data of sampling function.
Sampling Data Clear Signal (b2)
OFF : Does not clear sampling data.
Unused Signal (b3 to b4) Not used
ON : Disables bar code function and clears the data.
Barcode Input Disable Signal (b5)
OFF : Enables bar code function.
ON : Turns [Barcode input signal (System signal 2)] OFF.
Barcode Input Read Complete
OFF : Does not turn the above signal OFF.
OFF Signal (b6)
Turn OFF b5 of write device +4 (System signal 2) to which input data of bar code reader has been written.
Unused Signal (b7) Not used
Password Input Request Signal ON : Automatically displays the window for password input when switching to a higher lever security.
(b8) OFF : Does not automatically display the window for password input.
Unused Signal (b9) Not used
[Only in the F920GOT-K and F930GOT-K]
Keypad information valid signal 1
ON : Writes the information on pressing of the keypad to the write devices Do +6 and Do +7.
(b10)
OFF : Does not write such information.
ON : Writes information to the write devices D +5 and D +6 when the key pad status is changed or when
a scan processing is executed inside the GOT. (Only in the F920GOT-K)
Keypad information valid signal 2
ON : Writes the information to the write devices D +5 and D +6 when the key pad status is changed and in
(b11)
a constant cycle (1 sec). (Only in the F930GOT-K)
OFF : Writes information to the write devices Do +5 and Do +6 when the key pad status is changed.
Unused signal (b12 to b15) Not used
*2 System Signal 2
Writes the GOT operation status to PLC CPU according to the bit ON/OFF status of the word device set in
system signal 2.
Signal Name Description
Alarm Device ON ON : Turns ON when any of the devices assigned by alarm function turns ON.
Confirmation Signal (b0) OFF : Turns OFF when all of the devices assigned by alarm function turn OFF.
Sampling Function ON : Turns ON while the device value of sampling function is being sampled.
Execution ON Signal (b1) OFF : Turns OFF when the device value of sampling function is not sampled.
ON : The value input by numeric value input function has been updated.
Numeric Value Input Signal (b2) OFF : The value input by in numeric value input function has not been updated.
( Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input)
Battery Voltage Drop Detection ON : GOT battery voltage low (It is recommend to replace it within a month after turning ON.)
Signal (b3) OFF : Normal
Handy GOT's Grip Switch ON : F94* Handy GOT's (except RH type) grip switch is being pressed.
Pressing Signal (b4) OFF : F94* Handy GOT's grip switch is released.
ON : The data read by bar code reader has been stored into the specified device.
Barcode Input Signal (b5) OFF : No data has been read by bar code reader.
( Section 12.4 Bar Code Function)
Unused signal (b6 to b7) Not used.
(Continued to next page)
3 - 39 3.5 System Information Setting
3.5.2 Setting items
Signal Name Description
1
ON : Turns ON when the data is changed by numeric value input and ASCII input function.
Confirmation Signal during data OFF : Turns OFF when the data is not changed by numeric value input and ASCII input function.
change (b8)
( Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input)
OVERVIEW
[Only in the F920GOT-K and F930GOT-K]
Keypad information signal 1 (b9) ON : Indicates that the cursor is displayed in the Alarm List Display or Alarm History Display.
OFF : Indicates that the cursor is not displayed in the Alarm List Display or Alarm History Display.
[Only in the F920GOT-K and F930GOT-K] 2
Keypad information signal 2 (b10) ON : Indicates that the backlight is ON.
OFF : Indicates that the backlight is OFF.
SPECIFICATIONS
Unused Signal (b9 to b15) Not used.
3.5.3 Application example
3
1 Confirm the error occurred in GOT (for GOT-A900 Series only)
COMMON SETTING
The code of the error occurred in GOT can be confirmed.
The error codes within the range of error code 300 to 499 are displayed.
For the details of error code, refer to the following manuals.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual
4
Error occurs
Normal (cause of error removed) *2
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
GOT status
PREPARATORY
GOT error detection signal ON
(System Signal 2 'b13') OFF
5
GOT error code "0" Error code storage *1 "0" is stored
(Write device)
ON
COMMON SETTINGS
GOT error reset signal OFF *3
(System Signal 1 "b13")
FOR OBJECTS
*1. When multiple errors occur simultaneously, the latest error code will be stored.
*2. Error code will not be cleared automatically even after the cause of error is removed.
Clear the error code by using the GOT error reset signal.
*3. Turn the GOT error reset signal OFF after error reset is completed. 6
If the GOT error reset signal is kept ON, error code will be reset when error occurs next time.
LAMP, SWITCH
Error Reset Method
An error can be reset by using GOT as explained below.
When the cause of error is removed, error can be reset by touching the touch
switch.
7
Example: Create the touch switch that keeps GOT error reset signal ON only while
CHARACTER DISPLAY
being touched.
NUMERICAL/
8
ON
GOT error reset signal OFF
(System signal1 "b13")
ALARM
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 40
3.5.3 Application example
2 Confirm the input key code by input key (for GOT-A900 series only)
The input key code can be confirmed by input key (Numeric value input, ASCII input, touch switch).
Key input
Numeric value input, 11 12 13
ASCII input, touch switch input
ON
Input key signal ON
(System Signal 2 "b3") OFF
Input key code 0 11 12 13
(Write device)
ON *1
Input key read complete signal
(System Signal 1 "b3") OFF *2
*1. When key input is completed, the stored key code is held.
When the "Key code read complete signal" turns ON, the "input key signal" turns OFF.
*2. Signal turns OFF after input key is reset.
If [Input key read complete signal] keeps ON, the stored key code will be reset when key input is performed next
time.
3 - 41 3.5 System Information Setting
3.5.3 Application example
1
3 Confirm cursor's display position (for GOT-A900 Series only)
The cursor's display position can be confirmed by writing the data of the object (numeric value input
function, ASCII input function) in which cursor is located into the device.
OVERVIEW
The object information to be written are classified into the following types:
User ID : Can be set to any object.
Set user ID on setting dialog box of each object. 2
Object ID : Automatically set when setting an object with GT Desiger2.
SPECIFICATIONS
Example: Operation example of cursor display
50
User ID No. : 15
Object ID No. : 10000 50 50 50
1200 1200 1200 1200 3
User ID No. : None
COMMON SETTING
Object ID No. : 10001 1) Display cursor 2) Erase cursor 3) Display cursor
1) Displayed 3) Displayed
Cursor status 2) Erased *2
Stored user ID
Cursor position numeric
"0" "15" "0" *3 4
value input (Write device)
Stored object ID
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Current cursor position "10000" "10001"
"0"
(Write device)
Stored object ID
Previous cursor position "0" "10000"
5
(Write device)
When switching screen *1
COMMON SETTINGS
*1. If a cursor is not displayed when switching screens, "0" will be stored.
FOR OBJECTS
*2. The stored user ID and object ID can be held even if a cursor is erased.
*3. If a cursor is displayed at the object (numeric input function, ASCII input function) with a user ID unset, the cursor
position numeric value input will be "0".
6
Deleting the stored user ID and object ID when a cursor is deleted.
Turn ON the GOT internal device (monitor common control: (GS450.b3) to store "0"
LAMP, SWITCH
when a cursor is deleted.
For details of GOT internal devices, refer to the following.
Section 2.6.1 GOT internal devices
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 42
3.5.3 Application example
Remark Object ID
Object ID will be set automatically when object is set.
The object ID cannot be changed by user.
(1) Method of confirming object ID
Object ID can be confirmed on the GT Designer2 screen.
Select [Display] [Option] from the menu to display the object ID on
"Preferences" dialog box.
Object ID not displayed Object ID displayed
For details of the above operation, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
(2) Methods of changing object ID
If the arranged object is deleted, the object ID will change automatically.
Object ID changes from
10002 to 10001
Deleted
3 - 43 3.5 System Information Setting
3.5.3 Application example
1
4 Control of Screen Display (for GOT-A900 series only)
(1) Disable screen saver function
The screen saver function, which is set within the GOT utility, is designed to turn off the screen
OVERVIEW
display if the GOT is not touched within a specified time. This function prevents the screen
performance from deteriorating over its operable life.
By turning [Automatic screen saver disable signal] ON in the system information, the function that 2
is set within the GOT utility (Setup) is disabled
Example 1: Display the monitor screen erased by automatic screen saver function
SPECIFICATIONS
Bit 0 No. 25 D1 10
turns ON D2 20
3
Screen disappeared Screen appears
COMMON SETTING
Example 2: Disables screen saver function to start even after the specified period has passed.
No. 25 D1 10 No. 25 D1 10
Bit 0
D2 20 D2 20
turns ON
4
Set screen saver Screen does not goes to screen
period to 30 minutes saver mode after 30 minutes have passed
OBJECT SETTING
(The set time is made invalid to keep the
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
monitor screen displayed)
(2) Erase screen
By turning [Forced screen saver enable signal] ON, the displayed monitor screen can be erased.
While the bit is ON, monitor screen will not appear even when the GOT screen is touched. 5
Example: Erase displayed monitor screen
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
No. 25 D1 10 Bit 1
D2 20 turns ON
Screen disappeared
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 44
3.5.3 Application example
(3) Display control by human sensor (Specific to A985GOT)
The human sensor is a function that releases the GOT from the screen saving mode without the
necessity to touch the GOT.
This function releases the GOT from the screen saving mode when the operator has come closer
to the GOT.
Approach Go away Approach Go away
Operator motion
"Sensor detect"
ON
OFF
Human Sensor
Detection Signal
"System Signal 2.b5" "Sensor "Sensor
OFF delay" OFF delay"
Screen saving mode released
Screen saving
Screen saving mode active
"Screen save time"
When there is no operator around the GOT for the time set as "Sensor OFF delay", the "Human Sensor Detection Sig-
nal" turns OFF.
When the time set as the "Screen save time" elapses after the "Human Sensor Detection Signal" turns OFF, the GOT
enters the screen saving mode.
Make the human sensor settings (such as "Sensor detect" and "Sensor OFF delay") using the GOT
utility.
Refer to the following manual for the GOT utility.
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Extended Option Functions Manual)
It is possible to make the settings so that the GOT will be released from the screen
saving mode only when human movement is detected; the screen saving mode will not
be released by touch or externally.
Approach Go away Approach Go away
Operator motion
"Sensor detect"
ON
OFF
Human Sensor
Detection Signal
"System Signal 2.b5" "Sensor "Sensor
OFF delay" OFF delay"
ON
Forced Screen Saver OFF
Enable Signal
"System Signal 1.b1"
Screen saving mode released
Screen saving
Screen saving mode active
Associate the "Human Sensor Detection Signal" with "Forced Screen Saver Enable Signal" in the
sequence program to control the screen saving mode.
With this setting, the GOT enters the screen saving mode after the Sensor OFF
delay time elapses, regardless of the screen saving time.
3 - 45 3.5 System Information Setting
3.5.3 Application example
1
Remark GOT Screen Control
The following shows the priority among functions that control the screen status
OVERVIEW
(Displayed/ Not displayed):
Priority
Low High
Display Screen
Screen Saver Function Screen Saver Disable Forced Screen Saver 2
(Utility) Signal Enable Signal
SPECIFICATIONS
No. 25 D1 10
D2 20
No. 25 D1 10
D2 20
With screen saver function ON
Screen save function of
ON
Forces the screen to go into
3
utility is disabled. the screen saver mode.
COMMON SETTING
No. 25 D1 10 The screen saver settings,
D2 20
the status of screen saver
disable signal and human
sensor are irrelevant.
Without screen saver
function
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
DANGER
If the GOT backlight has reached its maximum lifespan, this may cause the mis-operation of touch
switch and result in an accident. 5
When the GOT backlight goes out, the display turns black and causes the monitor screen to appear
COMMON SETTINGS
blank, while the input of touch switches still remain active.
FOR OBJECTS
This may confuse an operator in thinking that display is in screen saver mode, who then tries to
release the GOT display from this mode by touching the display screen, which may cause a touch
switch to operate.
Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out. 6
The monitor screen disappears even when the screen saver mode is not set.
The monitor screen will not come back on by touching the display, even if the GOT is in screen saver
mode. LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 46
3.5.3 Application example
(4) Relation between screen saver functions and Key-In Disable Signal
The relation between screen saver functions and Key-In Disable Signal is as follows.
Forced
Key-in disable Screen saver
screen saver Screen status
signal function
enable signal
The GOT screen goes into the screen saver status.
ON ON/OFF ON/OFF
No response to touching
When the key-in disable signal turns on, the GOT screen does not go into the
screen saver status.
When the key-in disable signal turns on while the GOT screen is in the screen
saver status, the screen saver status is canceled.
ON
No response to touching
ON
The GOT screen does not go into the screen saver status.
OFF
No response to touching
OFF
The GOT screen goes into the screen saver status.
ON Touch the screen, and then
the screen saver status is
canceled.
OFF
The GOT screen does not go into the screen saver status.
Touch the object, and then
OFF
the object responds to
touching.
3 - 47 3.5 System Information Setting
3.5.3 Application example
3.5.4 Precautions 1
This section provides the precautions for using system information
OVERVIEW
1 Precautions for drawing
Do not use a special register as a read device or write device, as it is an internal device of which
specifications are defined within PLC CPU, and cannot be used as a normal internal device for system 2
information.
If a special registered is used as described above, GOT may not operate correctly.
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Precautions for using system information
Do not write to the device set as a read device directly from PLC CPU.
The data of the write device held within the GOT inside will be overwritten.
However, the GOT ready signal (system signal 2 "b1") can be OFF only when clock data of GOT is 3
updated.
COMMON SETTING
Section 2.4.1 Clock function for monitoring by GOT.
3 Precautions for using external I/O function (for GOT-A900 series only)
(1) Extended Function OS 4
When using external I/O function, make sure to install the extended function OS (with key input)
into GOT.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(2) Required optional device
The following device is required when using the external I/O function:
GOT Required device
A985GOT,A97*GOT,A960GOT,
5
External I/O interface module
A956WGOT,A95*GOT
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
For details of external I/O interface module, refer to the following:
For specification and performance of external I/O interface module
External I/O Interface Module User's Manual
6
For connection of external I/O interface module
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection System Manual)
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.5 System Information Setting 3 - 48
3.5.4 Precautions
3.6 Print Format Setting
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
Set the format for printing with alarm history display function or report function.
This setting is common to print (common) tag of alarm history display function and report function.
(With this setting, the same settings are updated on print (common) tag of alarm history display function and
report function automatically.)
Section 8.3 Alarm History Display
Section 12.1 Report Function
Top space Report function Alarm history display function
Left space 02/11/18 16:53:24 Occ. date Time Message Reset Check
Production vol. 02/11/08 10:25 Conveyor1 error 11:25 10:45
02/11/08 12:05 Conveyor1 error 12:40 12:28
Line Vol. Line Vol. 02/11/08 12:35 Conveyor3 error 13:20 12:5
Vol. Line 1 10 Line 3 30
Line 2 20 Line 4 40
Vol. Line 1 50 Line 3 70
Line 2 60 Line 4 80
Vol. Line 1 90 Line 3 105
Line 2 100 Line 4 115
Space and print
area setting
3.6.1 Settings
1 Select [Common] [System Environment] in the menu.
2 When "System Environment" dialog box appears, double click on [Print Format] .
3 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following explanation:
Remark When setting in project workspace
Double click on [System Environment] , and "System Environment" dialog box
appears, then double click on [Print Format]
Double click
3 - 49 3.6 Print Format Setting
3.6.1 Settings
3.6.2 Setting items 1
Set print format.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
Item Description A F
OBJECT SETTING
Set the number of lines (1 to 127) and number of columns (1 to 255) to be printed in one page;
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Lines number of lines (0 to 31) for the top space and number of columns (0 to 254) for the left space in
printout diagram.
Left
Columns space
Columns
5
space
Top
Top Space
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Left Space Lines
Remark Column number is different according to the character
6
For both alarm history display function and report function, one character occupies
one column. LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.6 Print Format Setting 3 - 50
3.6.2 Setting items
3.6.3 Precautions
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Setting precautions
(a) Print format setting is common to alarm history display function and report function.
The settings will be updated on print (common) tag of alarm history display function and report
function.
(b) Report screen size will be automatically adjusted according to the print format settings.
(c) Set print format according to the printable area. (Set "Printable Range" > top space + lines or
left space + columns.)
Print format settings can be calculated as explains below.
2)
Top space
Printable range
Lines
Contents set by alarm
history or report function
Left space Columns
1)
Print range
1) When finding the maximum setting value (width) of columns + left space
(Width of printable range for printer [mm]) / 25.4 15
Example: When width of printable range for printer is "190mm"
190 / 25.4 15 = 112.20
In GOT print format setting, set [Columns] + [Left space] within 112.
3 - 51 3.6 Print Format Setting
3.6.3 Precautions
2) When finding the maximum value (length) of lines + top space 1
(Length of printable range for printer [mm]) / 4.23
Example: When length of printable range for printer is "280mm"
OVERVIEW
280 / 4.23 = 66.19
In GOT print format setting, set [Lines] + [Top space] within 66.
The printable range for printer differs depending on the printer in use. 2
For details of specifications, refer to the instructions of the printer.
SPECIFICATIONS
Remark When top space + lines is out of printable range
If top space + lines is out of printable range, the excess lines will be printed on the
next page.
3
Printable area
COMMON SETTING
Top space + lines
The first page
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
The second page
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
3.6 Print Format Setting 3 - 52
3.6.3 Precautions
4. PREPARATORY OPERATION FOR
OBJECT SETTING
4.1 Comment Registration
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
4.1.1 Required knowledge for comment registration
1 Comment
Registering comments in advance allows users to display their contents with multiple object functions.
(1) Displaying comments with the comment display function ( Section 7.5 Comment Display)
A comment of the comment No. corresponding to the value of the monitored device is displayed.
Registration comment D100 = 1 D100 = 2 D100 = 5
No. 1 Operating
No. 2 Convey stopped Production line Production line Production line
status status status
No. 3 Inspecting
Convey
No. 4 Emergency stopped Operating stopped Completed
No. 5 Completed
Displays comment No. 1 Displays comment No. 2 Displays comment No. 5
(2) Displaying comments with the alarm history function ( Section 8.3 Alarm History Display)
Alarm history and its details are displayed as comments.
Registered comments 1) Alarm occurs 2) Alarm details confirmation
No. 1 Convey 1 normal
No. 2 Convey 2 normal
No. 3 Convey 1 abnormal
No. 4 Convey 2 abnormal
No. 5 Execution encoder
Encoder data
Occur Data Time Message used for
moving error
02/03/01 10:25 Conveyor 1 error
02/03/01 12:05 Conveyor 2 error
Displays comment No. 4 Displays comment No. 5
4-1 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.1 Required knowledge for comment registration
1
2 Object functions using comments
Comments can be used with the following object functions:
Comment display Data list
OVERVIEW
Section 7.5 Comment Display Section 7.2 Data List
Alarm list (User alarm) Floating alarm
2
Section 8.1 User Alarm Display Section 8.4 Floating Alarm
Touch switch function Report function
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 6.2 Touch Switch Section 12.1 Report Function
3 Comment registration screen
3
Comments can be registered and edited on the following 2 types of screens.
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
[Project workspace] Comment list dialog box
Convenient to edit and register comments All comment-related settings can be
confirming the overall project setting done on this screen. Recommended
for registration of new comments.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.1 Comment Registration 4-2
4.1.1 Required knowledge for comment registration
4.1.2 Basic operation for comment registration
1 Basic operation of toolbar (Comment List Setting)
The operation of the toolbar used for comment registration will be explained.
Items Description
New Comment Add a new comment.
Insert Row Add a comment between comments.
Import Read text files and CSV files as the comment.
Export Write a comment in text file and CSV file format.
Attribute The Attribute Setting dialog box of the selected comment is displayed. *1
The Search dialog box is displayed.
Search Enter the text to be searched, select the search direction (up/down), and click the Search Next button to
search the entered text for a comment.
Jump Jump to the specified comment No.
Attribute Display/Non-Display Whether the comment attributes are displayed or hidden can be set.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Attribute Setting dialog box
Set the comment attributes (text style, text color, etc.).
4-3 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.2 Basic operation for comment registration
1
Items Description
Style Select the style to display comment.
OVERVIEW
Standard Thick Solid Carve
Text Select the display color of comment.
Blink Select comment's blink display (None/Low speed/Middle speed/High speed). 2
Solid Select the solid color from Solid/Carve in [Style]
SPECIFICATIONS
Rev Check comment's flip display.
High Quality Font Check comment's high quality font display.
Set As Default Click this item to set the changed attribute as the preset value.
Clear Default Click this item to return the changed attribute to the default.
3
2 Basic operation of project workspace
COMMON SETTING
Select the object that carries out operation and right click it, select setting items.
The displayed items will differ according to different selected objects.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Right click when [Comment] is Right click when a registered
selected comment is selected
Items Description A F
6
New Add a new comment.
Edit Edit the selected comment. LAMP, SWITCH
Saved As File Save the comment in text file/CSV file format.
Cut Cut the selected comment.
Copy Copy the selected comment. 7
Paste Paste the copied or cut comment.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Delete Delete the selected comment.
NUMERICAL/
Remark Comment display of project workspace
In project workspace, only the first line of the comment will be displayed.
8
ALARM
4.1 Comment Registration 4-4
4.1.2 Basic operation for comment registration
3 Basic operation of comment list dialog box
Select [Common] [Comment] [Comment] from the menu to display the following screen.
(1) Setting items for Comment List
Items Description
Comment No. Display the comment No.
Comment Input the comment contents.
Text Select the display color of comment.
Rev Check comment's flip display.
Blink Select comment's blink display (None/Low speed/Middle speed/High speed).
HQ Check comment's high quality font display.
Style Select the style to display comment.
Standard Thick Solid Carve
Solid Select the solid color from Solid/Carve in [Style]
4-5 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.2 Basic operation for comment registration
(2) Menu displayed by right clicking
1
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Description
3
New Adds a new comment row.
COMMON SETTING
Cut *1 Cuts a comment selected.
Copy Copies a comment selected.
Paste Pastes a comment copied or cut.
Insert Inserts a row to the row selected.
Delete *1 Deletes a comment selected.
4
Clear Text Clears a comment of the row or column selected. *3
Copies a comment selected to Excel.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Copy to Excel Copy a comment in row or column unit.*3
After copying, paste the comment on Excel.
Pastes a comment selected from Excel.
Paste from Excel
Copy or cut a comment on Excel and paste it on the Comment List dialog box.
Select All Selects all comments in Comment List. 5
Property Displays the Attribute Setting dialog box of the comment selected. *2
COMMON SETTINGS
*1 Disabled for an entire column.
FOR OBJECTS
*2 For the Attribute Setting dialog box, refer to the following.
This section *1 Attribute Setting dialog box
*3 When selecting a column, select the Comment column.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.1 Comment Registration 4-6
4.1.2 Basic operation for comment registration
(1) Selecting method of multiple comments
When there are multiple comments, all comments can be selected by either of the
following operations.
Click on the top left cell ("Comment No." part) with the mouse.
Click [Select All] in the menu displayed by right-clicking the mouse.
(2) Reusing comments between different projects
Comments can be pasted to the different project comment.
This section (2) Menu displayed by right clicking
(3) Batch setting of Text, Rev, Blink, HQ, Style or Solid
You can apply the same setting to all comments simultaneously by selecting a
column before making a setting.
1 Select a column.
2 Make a setting with the
column selected.
3 All comments are batch
set to the same.
4-7 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.2 Basic operation for comment registration
4.1.3 Registering a comment 1
Register the display comment in object function.
OVERVIEW
1 Click on the comment area of the register comment No.
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Input the comment to [Comment] text box.
3
COMMON SETTING
4
3 Set the display attribute of the comment
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
When the style is set as [solid/carve],
select [Solid Color]
Text display format (Standard/Thick/Solid/Carve)
5
Use/not use high quality text display
COMMON SETTINGS
Blink display of the comment
(None/Low speed/Middle speed/High speed)
FOR OBJECTS
Forward display/not forward display
Text color
4 Click on [New Comment] after the comment registration, the following comment area will be
displayed. 6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
5 To register the comment, close the window with click on the button at top right of the Comment
NUMERICAL/
window.
8
ALARM
4.1 Comment Registration 4-8
4.1.3 Registering a comment
Remark (1) Create multiple row comment
(a) When changing to another row, input Alt and Enter key at the end of the
row.
Present line 1 is in operation Input Alt and Enter key
(b) When writing multiple row comment, GOT will be displayed as follows:
In operation
Y70 is ON.
In operation
Y70 is ON.
Display range
(2) Create a comment by keyboard
This section explains how to create a comment by keyboard.
As a cursor can move within a comment list dialog box by using keys as shown
below, mouse is not needed. (To add a comment No., press Alt and N key at
the same time.)
(a) When a cell is selected
key: Moves right one cell.
key: Moves left one cell.
key: Moves up one cell.
key: Moves down one cell
(b) When a line is selected
key: Moves to the comment cell in the line.
key: Moves to the comment cell in the line.
key: Moves up to the comment cell in the above line.
key: Moves down to the comment cell in the below line.
4-9 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.3 Registering a comment
4.1.4 Copying or cutting a comment registered 1
Copy a comment registered.
OVERVIEW
1 Copying or cutting a comment for another comment No.
1 Select a comment row to be copied or cut.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
2 Click the [Copy] or [Cut] button and then click the [Paste] button.
3 Paste comment dialog box is displayed.
Specify a paste destination No. and click the OK button.
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
4 The selected comment is pasted.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.1 Comment Registration 4 - 10
4.1.4 Copying or cutting a comment registered
2 Copying a comment for another column
1 Select a comment column to be copied and click the [Copy] button.
2 Select a column to which the comment is pasted, and click the [Paste] button.
3 The comment is pasted.
(1) When operating in project workspace
When copy the comment in the project workspace, select the comment and carry
out the following operations.
1 Right click, and select [Copy] from the menu.
2 Right click again, and select [Paste] from the menu.
3 Input the No. of the copied comment, and click on OK button.
(2) In the case that pasting an entire row is disabled
Pasting may be disabled according to the comments of the pasting destination
when copying/cutting and paste an entire row.
In such a case, copy/cut the relevant cells one by one or directly input the
comment to the pasting destination.
4 - 11 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.4 Copying or cutting a comment registered
1
3 Copying/pasting a comment to/from Excel
(1) Copying to Excel
OVERVIEW
1 Select a comment row or column to be copied and right-click on the row/column.
Select [Copy to Excel] from the displayed menu.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
2 Perform the paste operation on the Excel, and the comments are pasted.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(2) Pasting from Excel
1 Perform a copy operation on the Excel.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
2 Select a comment row/column to which the row/column of the Excel is pasted and right-click on 6
the row/column.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
3 The comment is pasted.
8
ALARM
4.1 Comment Registration 4 - 12
4.1.4 Copying or cutting a comment registered
4.1.5 Deleting/clearing the text of a comment registered
1 Deleting comments
Delete registered comments.
1 Select the comment to be deleted.
2 Select [Edit] [Delete] from the menu bar.
3 Click on Yes button when comment delete dialog box is displayed.
4 The selected comment is deleted.
Remark (1) In the case of operating in project workspace
When deleting comment in project workspace, select the comment and carry out
the following operation.
1 Right click, and select menu [Delete].
2 Click on Yes button when the comment delete dialog box is displayed.
(2) Deleting a comment in a column unit
Deleting a comment in a column unit is disable.
4 - 13 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.5 Deleting/clearing the text of a comment registered
1
2 Clear text
The comment texts are cleared in a row or column.
OVERVIEW
1 Select a comment row or column and right-click on it.
Select [Clear Text] from the displayed menu.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
2 The texts are cleared.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.1 Comment Registration 4 - 14
4.1.5 Deleting/clearing the text of a comment registered
4.1.6 Changing the registered comment's settings
Change comment contents, comment No. and the display attribute of registered comment.
1 Select the comment whose setting is to be changed.
2 Change the items of comment.
When style is set to [solid/carve], select [Solid Color]
Display format of font (Standard/Thick/Solid/Carve)
Display with/without high quality font
Blink display of comment
Reverse/without reverse
Text color
Comment contents
Comment No.
3 When the comment setting is changed, close the window with click on the button at top right of the
Comment List dialog box.
Remark When operating in project workspace
When changing the comment setting in project workspace, select the comment and
carry out the following operations.
1 Right click to select [Edit] from the menu.
2 hen a comment list dialog box is displayed, change the comment setting.
4 - 15 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.6 Changing the registered comment's settings
4.1.7 Saving/reading a comment as file 1
Registered comments can be saved as a text file (*.TXT), Unicode text file (*TXT) or CSV file (*.CSV).
Also, the files (Text/CVS file) created by commercially available word processing or spread-sheet software
OVERVIEW
can be used to read comments.
Save
(Export)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Read
(Import) Commercially available
GT Designer2
word-processing/spread-sheet software
3
(1) Add/Overwrite operation when importing comments from a file
No. of the comment imported from the file is compared with No. of previously
COMMON SETTING
registered comment, and the data are handled as follows:
When both comment Nos. are different, the comment in the file is added.
When both comment Nos. are the same, the comment in the file is overwritten.
4
Overwrite
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Add
PREPARATORY
Import
Add
Add
CSV file GT Designer2 GT Designer2 5
COMMON SETTINGS
If the comment Nos. to be created are determined in advance, the comments can
be created efficiently by sharing the task with several operators.
FOR OBJECTS
(2) The Precautions for exporting from GT Designer2
When exporting data from GT Designer2, all the registered comments will be
reflected on the file.If a file is overwritten after exporting, all the previously saved 6
comments will be lost.
LAMP, SWITCH
Remark (1) Unicode text file
The unicode text file is used for "import/export" by the multi-language input.Refer
to the following manual for the multiple language input. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
(2) How to save/read comments in a row or column unit in/from the Excel
NUMERICAL/
Refer to the following for details.
Section 4.1.4 Copying/pasting a comment to/from Excel
8
ALARM
4.1 Comment Registration 4 - 16
4.1.7 Saving/reading a comment as file
1 Save comment as file (Export)
The registered comment is saved as text file/Unicode text file/CSV file.
1 Click on [Export] button.
2 The [Save As] dialog box is displayed.
Select a file type from [File Type]. (txt: Text file/Unicode text file, CSV: CSV file)
Input file names and select the save positions, then click on Save button.
3 When the comment is written, click on the button at top right of the Comment List dialog box.
Remark When operating in project workspace
When comment is to be saved as a file in project workspace, please operate as
follows:
1 Right click to select [Save As File] from the menu.
2 On the Save As dialog box, attach a file name, select the storage place, and click on the
Save button.
4 - 17 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.7 Saving/reading a comment as file
1
2 Read text file/Unicode text file/CSV file (Input)
Read the text file/Unicode text file/CSV file as comment.
OVERVIEW
1 Click on [Input] button.
2 Display the dialog box to open filed. 2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Select the file type from [File Type]. (txt: Text file/Unicode text file, CSV: CSV file)
Select the file to be read and click on Open button.
3 When the comment is registered, [Overwrite Confirmation] dialog box will be displayed, click on Yes
4
button.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
4 When the comment is read, click on the button at top right of the Comment List dialog box.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.1 Comment Registration 4 - 18
4.1.7 Saving/reading a comment as file
4.1.8 Editing the comment as text/csv file
The following explains how to edit the comments saved in a text/CSV file.
1 Text file
The comment saved/imported as a text file is edited with a text editor as shown below.
//1 Comment
"In operation now" Comment contents
166,0,2,1,3,0 Display attributes
1 Before entering the comment, hit the / key twice, input comment No. and press the Enter Register
key.
//1
2 Enter the comment.
Enclose the comment with the marks using the " key, and then press , key, and Enter Register key
at the end.
Each comment must be written within a range of 1 to 512 characters.
//1
"In operation now"
3 Set the comment attributes
//1
"In operation now"
166,0,2,1,3,0,
, , , , , ,
Solid color (Set it same with text color No.)
Style (0: Standard 1: Thick 2: Solid 3: Carve)
Use/not use high quality font (0: Use 1: Not use)
Blink (0: None 1: Low speed 2: Middle speed 3: High speed)
Flip/not flip (0: None 1: Yes)
Text No.
255: White 109: Dark white 0: Black 182: Gray 3: Blue 2: Dark blue
224: Red 160: Dark red 227: Purple 162: Dark purple 28: Green 20: Dark green
31: Light blue 22: Dark blue 31: Light blue 22: Dark blue 252: Yellow 180: Dark yellow
Please confirm corresponding No. of the color not listed above in text list by selecting Other Colors
from [Text ] IN [Comment List] dialog box.
(1) Precautions when saving file
The edited file must be saved in text file (*.TXT) format.
(2) Precautions when inputting comment
Do not input a double quotation ( " ), comma ( , ) and return mark ( ) in that order
consecutively, as the comment may not be correctly imported.
If they are already input in that way, modify the comment in text file, and then
import it again.
4 - 19 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.8 Editing the comment as text/csv file
1
Remark When writing comment with multiple lines
When writing a comment with multiple lines, input Register key at the end of line.
OVERVIEW
When spacing one line, input Register key at the line.
//1
"In operation now
2
Y70 is ON"
SPECIFICATIONS
By / / 1 , Register key input is processed as one comment.
Comment No.
//1 Process as comment No. 1
"In operation now 3
Y70 is ON"
COMMON SETTING
X30 is ON
250, 0, 0, 1, 1,
//2 Process as comment No. 2
"In stop now"
150, 1, 3, 1, 1, 4
//3 Process as comment No. 3
"Operation start",
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
101, 0, 1, 0, 1,
2 CSV format file
The comment saved/ read as CSV format file is edited as follows: 5
(1) When editing with spreadsheet software and so on
COMMON SETTINGS
When editing with spreadsheet software and so on, write each setting items as follows:
FOR OBJECTS
(Following is an example using Microsoft Excel.)
LAMP, SWITCH
Solid color (Set it same with text color No.)
Style (0: Standard 1: Thick 2: Solid 3: Carve)
High quality font (with/ without) 7
Blink (None/ Low speed / Middle speed/ High speed)
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Flip (with/without)
Text name and No.
NUMERICAL/
(White, dark white, gray, dark blue, red, dark red,
purple, dark purple, green, dark green, light blue,
dark blue, yellow, dark yellow)
Please confirm corresponding No. of the color not
listed above in text list by selecting [Other Colors]
from [Text] IN [Comment List] dialog box. 8
Comment text
Comment No.
ALARM
4.1 Comment Registration 4 - 20
4.1.8 Editing the comment as text/csv file
(2) When editing with text editor
The configuration of the comment data saved in the CSV file format is shown as follows on the text.
Specify character string with (" ").
,, Color, Flip, Blink, High quality font, Style, Solid color
1, "During operation preparation", Blue, No, No, Yes, Standard
2, "Line A, supply stops", Red, No, No, Yes, Solid, Red
Six commas divide this into 7 fields. Added when style is
Comma (,) in the character string is [Solid]or [Carve].
recognized as a character.
Precautions for file saving
Edited file must be saved in CSV file format (*.csv).
Remark When the display attributes for the comment are not imported
When the number or position of commas in the CSW file is not correct, the display
attributes for the comment may not be imported.
Confirm the number and position of commas.
3 Unicode text file
Comments are edited as shown below before being stored as a Unicode text file and imported to GT
Designer2.
Specify character string with (" ").
Color Flip Blink High quality font Style Solid color
1 "During operation preparation" Blue No No Yes Standard
2 "Line A, supply stops" Red No No Yes Solid Red
Six Tabs ( ) divide this into 7 fields. Added when style is
Tab ( ) cannot be inserted in the character string. [Solid]or [Carve].
4 - 21 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.8 Editing the comment as text/csv file
1
(1) Display language
Comment text is displayed in various languages that have been input by user.
The attribute (color, flip and blink etc.) is displayed in Japanese.
OVERVIEW
(2) Precautions for storage files
Make sure to save the edited file in unicode text file (*.TXT) format.
(3) Unicode text-compatible code 2
This code is Unicode (file format: UTF16 LittleEndian).
(4) Unicode version
SPECIFICATIONS
The text supported by the unicode version 1.1 or above cannot be displayed in GT
Designer2.
(5) Compatible OS
A Unicode text file can be imported/exported by the following OSs only.
Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Professional 3
Windows XP Home Edition
COMMON SETTING
(6) Editing a Unicode text file by Microsoft(R) Excel
To open a Unicode text file that contains a comment of multiple lines by the
Microsoft(R) Excel, drag the Unicode text file to the Microsoft(R) Excel.
If the Unicode text file is opened in other methods, it may not be displayed in the
Microsoft(R) Excel correctly. 4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
drag
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.1 Comment Registration 4 - 22
4.1.8 Editing the comment as text/csv file
4.1.9 Precautions for comment registration
1 Maximum number of comments
In GOT-A900 Series, up to 32767 comments can be registered.
In GOT-F900 Series, registrations of 10000 comments are available.
2 Maximum number of characters available in one comment
One comment can be created with 1 to 512 characters.
Note that one line feed is equivalent to 2 characters.
Line 1 is in operation. Line feed
Y70 is ON.
3 Character size of comment displaying
The character size of displayed comment is set in the dialog box of each object setting.
4 Comment display attributes
Depending on the object function, some display attributes set in comments may not function.
For restrictions on comments of each object function, please refer to the relevant sections of each
object function.
Object function Display attribute
Alarm list display function "Blink" cannot be displayed.
Alarm history display In GOT-A900 Series, "Blink" and "Flip" cannot be displayed.
function In GOT-F900 Series, "Blink", "Flip" and "Text" cannot be displayed.
Floating alarm function "Blink", "Flip" and "High quality font" cannot be displayed.
Comment display
Depending on the object function, other display attribute can be used instead of the
function
one set for the comment to display.
Touch switch function
4 - 23 4.1 Comment Registration
4.1.9 Precautions for comment registration
4.2 Parts Registration 1
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
OVERVIEW
There are two types for the parts displayed.
Parts registered in the GT Designer2
Parts of BMP files saved in the PC card
2
SPECIFICATIONS
This section describes how to register parts in the GT Designer2.
For how to display a BMP file stored in the PC card as parts, refer to the following.
How to store a BMP file in the PC card
Section 4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card
How to display a BMP file stored in the PC card 3
Section 9.1.1 Parts displaying method
COMMON SETTING
4.2.1 Required knowledge for parts registration
4
1 Parts
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
User-created figures are registered as parts.
The registered figures can be displayed as parts by the part display function and the parts movement
function.
(1) Use the parts display function ( Section 9.1 Parts Display) 5
The several kinds of figures can be displayed by changing a monitor device value.
COMMON SETTINGS
D10 1 D10 3
FOR OBJECTS
Entered parts
Part No.1 Part No. 2 Part No. 3 6
Displays part No.1 Displays part No.3
LAMP, SWITCH
(2) Use the parts movement display ( Section 9.2 Parts Movement) (for GOT-A900 Series only)
By changing a monitor device value, several kinds of figures can be displayed changing each
position. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
D10 2 D10 3
Entered parts
NUMERICAL/
Part No.1 Part No. 2 Part No. 3
8
Displays part No.2 Displays part No.3 at specified position
ALARM
4.2 Parts Registration 4 - 24
4.2.1 Required knowledge for parts registration
2 Screens for registering and editing parts
Register/edit parts on three screens.
Drag to register
the parts.
Click on to
register parts.
Double-click to
edit parts.
[Project Workspace] [Parts Image Display] [Parts Editor]
Drag to register figures as parts. Click on to register figures Registered parts can
as parts. be edited easily on the
dedicated editor.
Double-click to display Parts editing can be done on
"Parts Image Display" or "Parts Editor" with confirming
"Parts Editor". a parts image .
4 - 25 4.2 Parts Registration
4.2.1 Required knowledge for parts registration
4.2.2 Basic operation for parts registration 1
1 Basic operation of project workspace
OVERVIEW
Select an operation execution object and right click it to select setting items.
Owing to the difference of selected objects, the displayed items will be different.
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
Right click when select [Parts] Right click when select parts name
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Items Description A F
New Register a new part.
Edit The selected parts can be edited/corrected on parts editor screen.
5
Cut Cut the selected parts.
COMMON SETTINGS
Copy Copy selected parts.
FOR OBJECTS
Paste Paste the copied or cut parts.
Delete Delete the selected parts.
Property Change [Parts No.] and [Parts Name] of the selected parts.
6
Open Image View Display the parts image in [Parts Image Display] dialog box.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.2 Parts Registration 4 - 26
4.2.2 Basic operation for parts registration
2 Basic operation of parts image display dialog box
Select [Common] [Parts] from the menu for displaying.
Parts image
Parts name
Items Description A F
[Register] Register selected figure to parts.
[New Parts] Register a new part.
[Edit] Correct the contents of registered parts.
[Name] Switch display/not display parts name.
[Cut] Cut the selected parts.
[Copy] Copy the selected parts.
[Paste] Paste the copied or cut parts.
[Delete] Delete the selected parts.
[Property] Change [Parts No.] and [Parts Name] of the selected parts.
4 - 27 4.2 Parts Registration
4.2.2 Basic operation for parts registration
4.2.3 Registering parts 1
Register the parts displayed by parts display function and parts movement display function.
OVERVIEW
1 Select the figure to be registered.
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Drag the figure to be registered to the parts in project workspace. 3
COMMON SETTING
Drag
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
3 Display parts property dialog box.
Input No. and the name of the parts to be registered, and click on OK button. 5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
4 The registration is completed.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
Project workspace
8
ALARM
4.2 Parts Registration 4 - 28
4.2.3 Registering parts
Remark (1) When registering parts with the parts editor
The figure registered as parts can be created with parts editor.
1 1 Right click to select [New Parts] from the menu.
2 2 The parts property dialog box is displayed.
Input No. and the name of the parts to be registered, and click on OK button.
3 3 When the parts editor is displayed, draw the figure as parts when figure is
drawn, then close parts editor.
(2) When registering parts in parts image dialog box
When registering parts in parts image dialog box, select the figure to be registered
and operate as follows.
4 1 Click on [Register] button.
5 2 When the parts property dialog box is displayed, input No. and the names of
the parts to be registered, and click on OK button.
4 - 29 4.2 Parts Registration
4.2.3 Registering parts
(3) Paste the figure registered in parts to the screen 1
Select the parts to be read, and drag it to drawing screen.
Paste from the project workspace
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Drag
COMMON SETTING
Paste from the parts image display dialog box
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Drag
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
The figure can be registered as parts
6
The bitmap file (*.BMP) data input as a figure can be registered by the same
procedure with that of figure.
LAMP, SWITCH
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.2 Parts Registration 4 - 30
4.2.3 Registering parts
4.2.4 Copying the registered parts
Copy the registered parts to other part No.
1 Select the parts to be copied.
2 Click on [Copy] button, then click on [Paste] button.
3 Parts property dialog box is displayed.
Set the destination parts No. and parts name, and click on OK button.
4 Copy the selected parts.
Remark When operating in the project workspace
When copying in the project workspace, select the parts and operate them as
follows.
1 Right click, and select [Copy] from the menu.
2 Right click again, and select [Paste] from the menu.
3 Input the destination parts No. and names.
4 - 31 4.2 Parts Registration
4.2.4 Copying the registered parts
4.2.5 Deleting the registered parts 1
Delete the registered parts.
OVERVIEW
1 Select the parts to be deleted.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
2 Click on [Delete] button.
COMMON SETTING
3 When the parts delete confirmation dialog box is displayed, click on Yes button.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
4 Delete the selected parts.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
Remark When operating in the project workspace
When deleting parts in the project workspace, select the parts and operate them as follows.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
1 Right click, and select [Delete] from the menu.
2 When the parts delete confirmation dialog box is displayed, click on Yes button.
8
ALARM
4.2 Parts Registration 4 - 32
4.2.5 Deleting the registered parts
4.2.6 Changing the registered parts settings
Edit the registered parts.
1 Select the parts to be edited.
2 Click on [Edit] button. (The parts can be double-clicked too.)
3 When the parts editor screen is displayed, edit the parts.
4 When parts edit is completed, close the screen.
(Click on button at the top-right of screen.)
Remark When operating in the project workspace
When editing parts in the project workspace, select the parts and operate them as
follows.
1 Right click, and select [Edit] from the menu. (It can be double-clicked too.)
2 When the parts editor screen is displayed, edit the parts.
4 - 33 4.2 Parts Registration
4.2.6 Changing the registered parts settings
4.2.7 Changing property of the registered parts 1
Change the No. and name of registered parts.
OVERVIEW
1 Select the parts whose property is to be changed.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
2 Right click the mouse, and select [Property] menu.
COMMON SETTING
3 The parts property dialog box is displayed.
Input the parts No. and name to be changed, and click on OK button.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
4 Change the property of selected parts.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Remark When operating in the project workspace
When changing parts property in the project workspace, select the parts and operate
them as follows.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
1 Right click to select [Property] from the menu.
8
2 In the parts property dialog box, set the parts No. and parts name to be changed.
ALARM
4.2 Parts Registration 4 - 34
4.2.7 Changing property of the registered parts
4.2.8 Precautions
1 Maximum number of Parts that can be registered
For GOT-A900 Series, up to 32767 types of parts can be registered.
For GOT-F900 Series, up to 2000 types of parts can be registered.
2 Memory capacity required for parts
It is same with memory capacity for drawing figure.
Section 2.2 Figures and Data Capacity
3 Precautions when registering figure as parts
(1) Line width of figure outline frame
For a figure to be registered as parts, its frame must be drawn in 1-dot line.
If drawn in 2-dot or wider line, it may not appear in actual width on GOT.
However, the frame of 2-dot or wider line can be displayed by following the steps below.
(a) When display with changing the color of figure (figure displayed as mark)
Example: Combine three figures drawn in 1-dot line to make one figure with 3-dot-wide
frame. drawn.
Figure A Figure B Figure C Total frame width
(Length X Width (Length X Width (Length X Width frame of figure A,B
2 X 2 dot) 4 X 4 dot) 6 X 6 dot) and C is 3 dot
(b) Set a figure drawn in 2-dot or wider line on an unused base screen and display the base
screen as parts using parts display function.
1)
Base screen 1 is displayed as parts.
(The square area based on vertex 1)
and 2) will be displayed as parts.)
2)
Drawn in 2-dot-width line
Base screen 1 Base screen 15
(2) Line width (except slant lines)
When the width of a line (except slant lines) to be registered as a part is 2 to 7 dots, the line may
not be displayed with the set width on a GOT.
When displaying a 2-dot or more line on a GOT, refer to the following steps.
(a) Drawing a 2-dot or more line with 1-dot lines
Example: Combine three 1-dot lines and make a part with 3-dot line width.
Line A Line B Line C Total line width of
(Line width: 1 dot) (Line width: 1 dot) (Line width: 1 dot) Line A, B, and C is
3 dots.
(b) Creating a rectangle (filled) and dragging the rectangle to change into the shape of a line
4 - 35 4.2 Parts Registration
4.2.8 Precautions
(3) Changing the color of a figure on the screen (figure marked as a mark)
1
The white area of a part displayed as a mark by Parts Display/Parts Movement, can be changed to
another color.
OVERVIEW
white blue red
2
Change the area color from white to other colors.
SPECIFICATIONS
Register the part displayed as a mark as below.
Draw the color changing area of the figure in white.
Do not use the figure data of imported BMP format file.
The above figures displayed as a mark will not change in color.
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.2 Parts Registration 4 - 36
4.2.8 Precautions
4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
The parts of the BMP files stored in the PC card (herein after referred to as BMP file parts) can be displayed
as parts in Parts Display/Parts Movement.
By registering parts in the PC card as BMP file parts, the size of the project data stored in the GOT can be
reduced.
This section explains how to store a BMP file in the PC card.
For how to display a BMP file stored in the PC card, refer to the following.
For Parts Display : Section 9.1.1 Parts displaying method
For Parts Movement : Section 9.2.1 Moving and displaying parts:
When displaying BMP file part
Store BMP file PC card Install to GOT
BMP file part in PC
card is displayed
When displaying registered part
Download the registered parts to GOT from the GT Designer2
The registered parts are displayed
4 - 37 4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card
1
Remark Time taken to display BMP image parts (reference value)
The following table shows times taken to display a BMP image parts on each GOT.
OVERVIEW
Data format of displayed BMP file Time taken to
Item Resolution Number of colors File capacity display part *1
(Dots) (Colors) (KB) (Seconds)
24-bit, full-color 3850 0.4 2
1280 1024
256 1280 0.3 or less
GT SoftGOT2
SPECIFICATIONS
24-bit, full-color 2300 0.3 or less
1024 768
256 770 0.3 or less
24-bit, full-color 1400 4.9
A985GOT 800 600
256 480 4.4
24-bit, full-color 900 3.5 3
A97 GOT 640 480
256 302 3.1
COMMON SETTING
24-bit, full-color 770 3.2
A960GOT 640 400
256 256 2.8
24-bit, full-color 330 1.7
A956WGOT 480 234
256 112 1.6
24-bit, full-color 230 0.9 4
A95*GOT 320 240
256 76 0.9
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
*1Depending on the used monitor screen data, the time taken may differ from the above value.
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card 4 - 38
4.3.1 Before using the BMP image parts
1 Checking the OS
To use the BMP image parts, the following OS must be installed in the GOT.
OS type Description
Basic function OS Ver. 9.5.5 or later
(1) How to check the basic function OS
Basic function OS versions installed in the GOT can be checked in the built-in memory information
on GT Designer2.
If the basic function OS installed in the GOT is old, reinstall new OS version.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
2 BMP files that can be displayed
The following describes the data format of the BMP file that can be used as BMP file parts.
Item Description
Data format *1
The BMP data of 24-bit, 8-bit, 4-bit or 1-bit
Number of colors *2 256 colors, 16 colors or monochrome
Max.: 1280 1024 dots *3
Resolution
Min.: 1 1 dot
*1 The BMP data compressed by compression software cannot be used.
*2 For the BMP files stored in the PC card, the number of colors will be reduced to the number supported by the
GOT in use.
*3 When specifying an image file larger than the display size of the GOT in use, the file will not be displayed.
Difference between data available to BMP file parts and registered parts
The BMP file that can be stored in the PC card (BMP file parts) differs with the BMP
file that can be used in the GT Designer2 (registered parts).
The data used as a registered part may not be used as a BMP file part.
For the BMP file that can be used as registered parts, refer to the following.
Section 2.2.1 Figures in BMP/DXF file format
4 - 39 4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card
4.3.1 Before using the BMP image parts
4.3.2 Storing the BMP file parts into the PC card 1
1 Create a new folder named IMAGE to store BMP image parts, on the PC card.
OVERVIEW
If BMP file parts are already stored in other folders, parts cannot be displayed in parts display/parts
movement.
SPECIFICATIONS
New folder
COMMON SETTING
2 Save data into the IMAGE folder on the PC card under the name of IMG****. BMP. (**** indicates any of
0001 to 0999)
The last 3-digit value of **** corresponds to that of the parts number from 9001 to 9999.
Example: How to name the BMP file that has been registered as parts number 9123 4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
How to name file
Part number 9123 IMG0123.BMP
5
Same value
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Data configuration on PC card
IMAGE
IMG0001.BMP BMP file for part number 9001
IMG0002.BMP BMP file for part number 9002
6
LAMP, SWITCH
IMG0998.BMP BMP file for part number 9998
IMG0999.BMP BMP file for part number 9999
7
Previewing a BMP file part to be registered
CHARACTER DISPLAY
The BMP file parts to be stored in the PC card can be previewed by the GT
NUMERICAL/
Designer2. ( Section 4.2 Parts Registration)
If the display of a BMP file becomes unclear due to the color reduction or other
reasons, adjust the BMP file.
8
ALARM
4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card 4 - 40
4.3.2 Storing the BMP file parts into the PC card
4.3.3 Precautions
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) The size of the BMP file parts stored in the PC card
The BMP file parts displayed in the GOT is the same size as the BMP image parts stored on the PC
card.
The BMP file parts which are larger than the display size cannot be displayed.
The BMP file parts to be stored onto the PC card should be smaller than the display size of the
GOT.
When the BMP file part is equal to or smaller than the display size of the GOT
Store Install to GOT
BMP file part PC card
Displayed in the same
size as the BMP file
part stored in the PC card.
When the BMP file part is larger than the display size of the GOT
Store Install to GOT
PC card
BMP file part BMP file part is not displayed.
2 Precautions for hardware
(1) GOT with restrictions on use
BMP image parts cannot be used as the A95 * handy GOT does not support PC card.
(2) Required optional Units
The following Units is required to use BMP file parts.
Used GOT Required device
A985GOT, A97 * GOT, A960GOT None
SRAM type: Memory Card Interface Unit
A956WGOT
Compact Flash PC card: No device required
SRAM type: Memory Card Interface Unit
A95 GOT
Compact Flash PC card: Unavailable
(3) SRAM type PC card
When using the SRAM type PC card, carefully check the capacity of the PC card and the total
capacity of the BMP files.
If the total capacity of the BMP files exceeds the PC card capacity, the BMP files cannot be stored.
4 - 41 4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card
4.3.3 Precautions
4.4 Registering Gaiji 1
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
OVERVIEW
4.4.1 What are external characters
2
External characters indicate character patterns, company logos and symbols which are created
SPECIFICATIONS
and registered in advance, then displayed as characters of objects or comments.
In models not equipped with built-in Shift JIS second level Kanji character fonts, such Kanji
characters can be created and displayed as external characters.
4.4.2 Setting
3
COMMON SETTING
1 Select [Common] [Gaiji] from the menu.
2 When the setting dialog box is displayed, please make settings referring to the following explanation.
Remark When setting in the project workspace 4
In the project workspace, when double clicking , the setting dialog box can also
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
be displayed.
PREPARATORY
4.4.3 Setting items
The explanation about Gaiji setting items is as follows. 5
COMMON SETTINGS
Gaiji image
FOR OBJECTS
Gaiji registration list
Gaiji No.
Gaiji layout
Gaiji code
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.4 Registering Gaiji 4 - 42
4.4.1 What are external characters
Items Description A F
Click the mouse in 16 dots 16 dots matrix, dot becomes ON (black) of OFF (white), and Gaiji can be
Gaiji layout created/edited.
Additionally, click the mouse and drag it at the same time, dot will be filled with the selected color.
Gaiji No. Select the Gaiji No. to be created, edited or saved.
Gaiji image The Gaiji being created can be displayed, confirmed and edited with actual-sized image.
Gaiji Code Display character code No. corresponding to the saved Gaiji No. from F040H to F0C0H (Hexadecimal).
Gaiji registration list Display saved Gaiji image with serial number.
Before >>Save>> <<Read<< <<Compose<< is executed, please select Gaiji No. from [Gaiji Registration
List] or [Gaiji No.] and execute as above.
>>Save>> In the selected No. of created image data in [Gaiji Layout], up to 128 Gaiji No. can be
saved.
As previous data is overwritten, please confirm the saved Gaiji No. before execution.
<<Read<< Saved Gaiji can be read ([Gaiji Layout]) and edited.
Before termination, it is necessary to save the changed Gaiji.
<<Compose<< Combine the Gaiji in editing ([Gaiji Layout]) and the Gaiji being saved.
When [Gaiji Layout] or the one being already registered is black, dots are displayed in
black.
Clear All dots of [Gaiji Layout] changes into white and are cleared.
Reverse Dots of [Gaiji Layout] reverse from black white or white black.
Reverse
Reference This function is to utilize Gaiji code that will be created by system font built in GOT-F900.
Open reference dialog box, and select from the displayed list in Shift JIS order.
Shift JIS
Exit Cancel the Gaiji being edited and close the dialog box.
4 - 43 4.4 Registering Gaiji
4.4.3 Setting items
1
Display input method of the Gaiji registered in object and comment
(1) Specify character, comment, lamp, etc.
OVERVIEW
When specify newly-created Gaiji in character input area, indicate Gaiji No. with
"|" (DBC vertical line *1) and it is represented as 1 character.
(Comment is used in alarm message, bit comment, word comment, etc.)
*1: Vertical line can be input by pressing [Shift] key and [\] key at the same time. 2
Input example 1: (Register Gaiji No. = 3)
SPECIFICATIONS
3 MITSUBISHI Electric
MITSUBISHI Electric is displayed.
Input example 2: Register Gaiji No. = 9, = 5, =1
3
9 5 1
is displayed.
COMMON SETTING
(2) Gaiji specification of ASCII input and ASCII display
Please specify character code No. displayed in [Gaiji No.] which is same with
Chinese character and symbol, etc.
4.4.4 Precautions 4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
1 Use of external characters
The external character creation function is available only when "Japanese" is selected in "Language
Character Set" in "System Environment".
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.4 Registering Gaiji 4 - 44
4.4.4 Precautions
4.5 Auxiliary Settings
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
Operation of cursor, key window or other can be set for each screen or project.
The auxiliary settings are explained as follows:
In the case of GOT-A900 series
Setting for Setting for
1 Action of cursor and key window when condition success/ each project each screen
switching screen/condition fail
When condition success/switching screen, cursor and key window are
displayed.
When condition fail, cursor and key window are erased. Setting items
[Action when condition
100
0 100
0
success]
[Switching screen option]
100 Cursor displayed 0
100 Key window erased [Action when condition
100
0 fail]
When condition When condition fail
[Cursor position]
success
Cursor and key Object erased
window displayed
Setting for Setting for
2 Methods of displaying cursor input area each project each screen
For numeric input and ASCII input, cursor display method is selectable.
4567
7
Only one character blinks
4567 Setting items
[Cursor input area]
4567
All characters are reversed
with only one character
blinking
Setting for Setting for
3 Methods of displaying/erasing key window each project each screen
Key window can be displayed as soon as touch input is detected; can be
erased when the RET key is pressed.
100 100
0 100
0 100
0
Setting items
[Close cursor and key
window when RET key is
Display key window with input touch Press RET key (input definition), pressed.]
key window is erased. [When touch input is
detected, open key
window at the same
time]
4 - 45 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
Setting for Setting for
1
4 Check for overlapping objects each project each screen
If objects overlap when screen calling function and superimpose window
are used, message will appear on GOT. As GOT may not the display
OVERVIEW
overlapping objects correctly, correct the monitor screen data.
Setting items
[Carry out check for
2
overlapping objects
within GOT]
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting for Setting for
5 Change of touch key sound each project each screen
3
The sound output when a touch switch is pressed can be set. (Prepare the
files that play sounds.)
COMMON SETTING
Pi Po Setting items
[Change touch key
File change sound]
4
Remark
OBJECT SETTING
Change touch key sound
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
To change touch key sound, sound files must have been registered in advance.
For the GOT that does not support sound function, touch key sound cannot be
changed.
Section 12.5 Sound
5
COMMON SETTINGS
Setting for Setting for
FOR OBJECTS
6 Displaying input range for numeric value Input each project each screen
When a numeric value out of input range is input, a message appears
showing the input range.
6
Setting items
[Display the input range
when inputs the out of LAMP, SWITCH
range in numerical input]
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.5 Auxiliary Settings 4 - 46
Setting for Setting for
7 Action of cursor key each project each screen
If multiple areas for numerical input and ASCII input are provided, the input
order can be set.
After input definition, the cursor is moved to the next input area
automatically. Setting items
[Defined key action]
100 100
0 0 [Position to specify area]
0 0
Input definition The cursor is moved
to the next input area
Setting for Setting for
8 Station No. change execution/inexecution each project each screen
Station No. change can be set to be executed or not for each screen.
Set station
No. change
Setting items
[Carry out station no.
change]
Base screen 1 Base screen 2 Base screen 3
Station No. Station No. Station No.
change is change is change is
executed not executed executed
Setting for Setting for
9 Floating alarm display execution/inexecution each project each screen
Floating alarm display can be set to be executed or not for each screen.
Set floating alarm
Setting items
[Carry out display of
alarm flow]
Base screen 1 Base screen 2 Base screen 3
Floating alarm Floating alarm Floating alarm
is displayed is not displayed is displayed
Setting for Setting for
10 Moving/Not moving key window each project each screen
Moving or Not moving of a key window can be set for each screen.
Setting items
[Move key window]
The key window appears
on the screen without
hiding the input cursor.
4 - 47 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
In the case of GOT-F900 series 1
Setting for Setting for
1 Actions of cursor and key window when switching screen
OVERVIEW
each project each screen
When switching screen, the cursor and key window can be displayed.
2
100
0
Setting items
100 Cursor displayed [Action when switching
SPECIFICATIONS
100
0 screens]
Screen is switched
Cursor and key window displayed
3
Setting for Setting for
2 Method of displaying/erasing key window each project each screen
COMMON SETTING
Key window can be displayed as soon as touch input is detected; can be
erased when the RET key is pressed.
100 100
0
Setting items
[When touch input is 4
detected, open key
Display key window with input touch
window at the same
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
time]
Setting for Setting for
3 Method of erasing key window each project each screen
Key window can be erased when the RET key is pressed.
5
100
0 100
COMMON SETTINGS
Setting items
FOR OBJECTS
[Defined key action]
Touch RET key (input definition) to erase key window
Setting for Setting for
6
4 Use serial port, setup, language, menu key. each project each screen
All kinds of basic settings can be written according to the settings made LAMP, SWITCH
with drawing software.
Check this item when making the settings with drawing software.
Uncheck this item when writing the basic settings within utility of GOT-F900 Setting items
series. [Use Serial Port, Setup,
Language, Menu Key]
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
Serial port, setup, language, and
menu key settings are transferred
from utility screen.
8
ALARM
4.5 Auxiliary Settings 4 - 48
Setting for Setting for
5 Screen division method and layout method (for F940WGOT, each project each screen
F930GOT only)
Screen layout can be classified as vertical installation and horizontal
installation. In latter case, one screen can be divided into two or three. (can
be divided in F940WGOT only) Setting items
[Format]
Full Full Divided [Left] Divided [Both]
[Horizontal] [Vertical]
Auxiliary Auxiliary
screen screen
Divided [Right]
Auxiliary screen
Setting for Setting for
6 Auxiliary screen settings for wide display(for F940WGOT only) each project each screen
For F940WGOT, function(s) and background to be displayed on auxiliary
screen can be selected.
Divided [Left] Keyboard Setting items
Alarm list [Screen configuration
Alarm history
Alarm frequency settings]
Custom screen
Auxiliary screen
Setting for Setting for
7 Cursor key action each project each screen
If multiple areas for numerical input and ASCII input are provided, the input
order can be set.
After input definition, the cursor is moved to the next input area
automatically. Setting items
[Defined key action]
100
0 100
0 0
0 0
Input definition The cursor is moved
to the next input area
4 - 49 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
Setting for Setting for
1
8 Floating alarm display execution/inexecution each project each screen
Floating alarm display can be set to be executed or not for each screen.
OVERVIEW
Set floating alarm
Setting items
[Carry out display of 2
alarm flow]
SPECIFICATIONS
Base screen 1 Base screen 2 Base screen 3
Floating alarm Floating alarm Floating alarm
is displayed is not displayed is displayed
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.5 Auxiliary Settings 4 - 50
4.5.1 Settings
1 When setting for each project
1 Select [Common] [System Environment] from the menu.
2 As "System Environment" dialog box appears, double click on [Auxiliary Settings] there.
3 As "Auxiliary Settings" dialog box appears, make the setting with reference to the following
explanation(Section 4.5.2 Setting dialog box for each project).
Remark When setting in project workspace
Double click on System Environment and "System Environment" dialog box
appears, then double click on Auxiliary Settings
Double click
2 When setting for each screen
1 Select a screen, and then select [Screen] [Properties] from the menu.
2 As the setting dialog box appears, click on "Auxiliary" tab dialog box, and then make the setting with
reference to the following explanation (Section 4.5.2 Setting dialog box for each screen ).
Remark When setting in project workspace
Select a screen and right-click on the screen with a mouse, and then select
[Property]. As the setting dialog box appears, double click on "Auxiliary" tab dialog
box.
Right click
4 - 51 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
4.5.1 Settings
4.5.2 Setting items 1
1 Setting dialog box for each project
OVERVIEW
Make the auxiliary settings for each project.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
GOT-A900 Series
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
GOT-F900 Series 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.5 Auxiliary Settings 4 - 52
4.5.2 Setting items
Items Description A F
Set the display method of cursor and key window with numerical input function and ASCII input
function when the condition is satisfied/switching screen.
Cursor and key window are not displayed:
When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor or key window is not
Action when condition success displayed.
In the case of key input, touch the input area.
D100 0 D100 0
D110 0 D110 0
D120 0 D120 0
Only cursor is displayed:
When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor is displayed automatically.
If there is key for key input on the screen, key input can be executed.
D100 0 D100 0
D110 0 D110 0
D120 0 D120 0
Action when switching success
Both the cursor and key window are displayed:
When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor and key window are
displayed.
Even if there is no key for key input on the screen, key input can be executed.
D100 0 D100 0
D110 0 D110 0
D120 0 D120 0
Set the cursor position when switching screen.
Left top :When switching screen, the cursor is displayed on input area in upper
Cursor Position left part of the screen.
User ID minimum :When switching screen, the cursor is displayed on the input area in
which minimum user ID has been set.
Set the display method of cursor and key window with numerical input function, ASCII input
function and switch touch function when the condition is not satisfied.
They will be erased only when the trigger has been set to [ON] or [OFF].
Shape of numeric value/ ASCII input (frame) is displayed as it is.
Cursor, key window and input object are not erased:
Action when condition fail
When the condition is not satisfied, cursor/key window/ object is displayed as it is.
Cursor and key window are erased:
When the condition is not satisfied, cursor/ key window is erased.
Cursor, key window and input object are erased:
When the condition is not satisfied, cursor/key window/ object is erased.
Set the display method of input area in input area.
1 character blink :One character blinks within input area.
4567
Cursor input area
All reverse + 1 character blink :The characters are reversed within input area, and
only one character blinks
4567
(Continued to next page)
4 - 53 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
4.5.2 Setting items
1
Items Description A F
Close cursor and key window Check this item to automatically erase the key window and input cursor when the RET key is
when RET key is pressed. touched after inputting numeric value/ASCII code with key window
OVERVIEW
Check this item to automatically display the key window when the input area for numeric input
function and ASCII input function is touched. (In the case of ASCII input, ASCII key screen No.
When touch input is detected, must have been set in the key windows screen No. setting.)
open key window at the same D100 0 D100 0 2
time D110 0 D110 0
D120 0 D120 0
SPECIFICATIONS
Check this item to change the sound that is output by touching a touch switch.
Change touch key sound Then set sound No. of the sound file that replays the sound.
The replay sound can be selected from the displayed list by clicking on [Reference] button.
Carry out check for
Check this item to make the GOT to display a message when objects are overlapped due to
3
overlapping objects within
screen calling function and superimpose window.
GOT
COMMON SETTING
Display the input range when
Check this item to display a message showing the input range if the value out of range is input on
inputs the out of range in
a key window while numerical input function is used.
Numerical Input
Use Serial Port, Setup, Check this item to make the settings for system environment setup, language, serial port and
Language, Menu Key menu key with a drawing software.
4
Select the screen direction and division.
OBJECT SETTING
Full Full Divided [Left] Divided [Both]
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
[Horizontal] [Vertical]
Auxiliary Auxiliary
screen screen 5
Divided [Right]
COMMON SETTINGS
View Format
FOR OBJECTS
Auxiliary screen
GOT-F900 series corresponding view format
Horizontal full size GOT-F900 series full type 6
Vertical full size F930GOT and F940WGOT
Divided into 2 horizontally (Right) F940WGOT
Divided into 2 horizontally (left) F940WGOT LAMP, SWITCH
Divided into 3 horizontally F940WGOT
Select a background of auxiliary screen when view format is divided into two or three by
Sub screen color
F940WGOT.
Screen
configura-
Sub screen
Select the alarm list, alarm history, keyboard, and customize to be displayed on auxiliary screen.
7
contents
tion set-
CHARACTER DISPLAY
tings Display auxiliary
Check this item to display the keyboard (Standard only) that appears on auxiliary screen when
screen on key
NUMERICAL/
numerical input or ASCII input is touched.
window
8
ALARM
4.5 Auxiliary Settings 4 - 54
4.5.2 Setting items
2 Setting dialog box for each screen
Make the auxiliary settings for each screen on base screens or window screens.
Basic Auxiliary Key Window
Basic Auxiliary
Items Description A F
Screen setting has the priority
Check this item to give screen settings priority over project setting.
over project setting
Set the display method of cursor and key window with numerical input function and ASCII input
function when the condition is satisfied/switching screen.
Cursor and key window are not displayed:
When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor or key window is not
displayed.
Action when condition
In the case of key input, touch the input area.
success
D100 0 D100 0
D110 0 D110 0
D120 0 D120 0
Only cursor is displayed:
When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor is displayed automatically.
If there is a key for key input on the screen, key input can be executed.
D100 0 D100 0
D110 0 D110 0
D120 0 D120 0
Action when switching Both cursor and key window are displayed:
screens When the condition is satisfied/switching screen, the cursor and key window are
displayed.
Even if there is no key for key input on the screen, key input can be executed.
D100 0 D100 0
D110 0 D110 0
D120 0 D120 0
(Continued to next page)
4 - 55 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
4.5.2 Setting items
Basic Auxiliary Key Window
1
Basic Auxiliary
OVERVIEW
Items Description A F
Set the cursor position when switching screen.
Left top :When switching screen, the cursor is displayed on input area in upper
left part of the screen. 2
Cursor Position User ID minimum :When switching screen, the cursor is displayed on the input area in
which minimum user ID has been set.
SPECIFICATIONS
User ID order :When switching screen, the cursor is displayed on the input area in
which the set user ID order has been set.
Set the display method of cursor and key window with numerical input function, ASCII input
function and switch touch function when the condition is not satisfied.
They will be erased only when the trigger has been set to [ON] or [OFF].
Shape of numeric value/ ASCII input (frame) is displayed as it is.
3
Cursor, key window and input object are not erased:
Action when condition fail
COMMON SETTING
When the condition is not satisfied, cursor/key window/ object is displayed as it is.
Cursor and key window are erased:
When the condition is not satisfied, cursor/ key window is erased.
Cursor, key window and input object are erased:
When the condition is not satisfied, cursor/key window/ object is erased.
Set the display method of input area in input area. 4
1 character blink :One character blinks within input area.
OBJECT SETTING
4567
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Cursor input area
All reverse + 1 character blink :The characters are reversed within input area, and
only one character blinks
4567
Check this item to automatically display the key window when the input area for numeric input
5
function and ASCII input function is touched. (In the case of ASCII input, ASCII screen No. must
COMMON SETTINGS
When touch input is detected, have been set in the key windows screen No. setting.)
FOR OBJECTS
open key window at the same D100 0 D100 0
time D110 0 D110 0
D120 0 D120 0
Select the position to display the input cursor after defined key for numeric value input/ASCII input
6
function is input.
As a right arrow key: (GOT-A900 series only)
LAMP, SWITCH
After defined key input, the cursor moves to the input area at the right of the position set in
[Position to Specify Area].
As a down arrow key: (GOT-A900 series only)
After defined key input, the cursor moves to the input area at the bottom of the position
Defined key action *1
set in [Position to Specify Area].
No movement:
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
After defined key input, the cursor does not move from the written input area.
User ID order (no cursor move when it's immovable):
NUMERICAL/
After defined key input, the cursor moves to the input areas in user ID order.
(This setting is valid when the settings of move destination ID have been made on
"Numeric input/ASCII input function" option tab dialog box.
Cursor and key window are erased:
After defined key input, cursor and key window are erased. 8
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
4.5 Auxiliary Settings 4 - 56
4.5.2 Setting items
Basic Auxiliary Key Window
Basic Auxiliary
Items Description A F
Select a position within input area as a base point to move the input cursor.
Position to specify area *1 Bottom-right :Move the cursor based on the position at the lower-right of input area.
Top-left :Move the cursor based on the position at the upper-left of input area.
Carry out station no. change Check this item to use station No. change function.
Carry out display of alarm flow Check this item to use floating alarm function.
Select a method of displaying key window.
Don't move :Key window is displayed at the set fixed position.
Move key window
Automatic move :Key window is displayed at the position that is not overlapping with input
area.
Back Light Color Select a back light color from (White/Red). (for F920GOT-K only)
For details of * 1, refer to the following.
*1 Relation between [Position to specify area] and specified area of cursor (for GOT-A900 series only)
(1) When the cursor is not moved as designed
The following diagram shows the example of which the cursor is moved to the opposite position
with the cursor direction of the touched arrow key.
When changing the setting of [Position to specify area] from [Top-Left] to [Bottom-Right], the cursor
is enabled to move the same cursor direction as the direction of the touched arrow key.
(Before setting change) (After setting change)
[Position to specify area] [Position to specify area]
3) 3)
2) 2)
1) 1)
Actual specified Touched button Actual specified Touched button
direction of cursor direction of cursor
The cursor is moved in the order, 3) 2) 1). The cursor is moved in the order, 1) 2) 3).
As the bottom-right parts of three objects are on
As the top-left parts of three objects are not on the the same x-coordinate, the cursor is moved to the
same x-coordinate, the cursor is moved to the same direction as the arrow key when changing
closest object on the left when operating to move [Position to specify area] from [Top-Left] to
the cursor to top direction. [Bottom-Right].
4 - 57 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
4.5.2 Setting items
(2) When the cursor is not moved as designed even if changing the setting of above (1)
1
Readjust the arrangement of the objects as follows.
(Before setting change) (After setting change)
OVERVIEW
[Position to specify area] [Position to specify area]
3) 3)
2) 2) 2
1) Touched button 1) Touched button
SPECIFICATIONS
The cursor is moved in the order, 1) 3) 2). The cursor is moved in the order, 1) 2) 3).
Arrange the objects so that the [Position to
As the [Position to specify area] is not on the specify area] may be on the same x-coordinate.
same x-coordinate, the cursor is moved in the
order, 1) 3) 2).
(When moving the cursor from side to side,
arrange the objects so that the [Position to
3
specify area] may be on the same y-coordinate.)
COMMON SETTING
(3) When the cursor is not moved as designed even if readjust the arrangement of the objects
Directly touch the object to input.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.5 Auxiliary Settings 4 - 58
4.5.2 Setting items
4.5.3 Precautions
1 Precautions when making the auxiliary settings for each project
(1) Precaution a touch key sound with reference to precautions for sound function.
Section 12.5 Sound
(2) Precautions for displaying the input range when a value out of range is input by numerical input
function.
(a) In the case of A95*GOT, A956WGOT and GOT-F900 series, the input range cannot be
displayed on key window.
2 Precautions when making the auxiliary settings for each screen
(1) RET key operation setting
Make sure to uncheck [Close cursor and key window when RET key is pressed] in the project
setting when [Close cursor and key window when RET key is pressed] and [User ID order:(no
cursor move when it's immovable)] are used for defined key action setting,
If checked, action of [Close cursor and key window when RET key is pressed] will be executed with
priority.
(2) "Action when condition success", "Switching Screen Option" setting
It is recommended to make the same settings for the base screen and overlap window. Otherwise,
the screens may not operate correctly as described below.
For "Action when condition success", "Switching Screen Option" setting, the settings for the screen
activated most recently remain active.
If the settings of an overlap window are active (the overlap window is displayed after the base
window is switched) as described in 3) below, and then the overlap window is closed as described
in 4), its settings will remain active (a cursor is displayed).
Ex) Base screen 1 When condition success Only a cursor is displayed.
Base screen 2 When condition success A cursor and key window are not displayed.
Window screen 1 When condition success Only a cursor is displayed.
Base screen switching device D100
Window screen switching device D200
<Operaion when condition success>
1) 2) 3) 4)
Window 1
Base 1 Base 2 Base 2
D100 1 D100 2 D100 2 D100 2
D200 0 D200 0 D200 1 D200 0
Activating base screen settings
Make the settings in order that a superimpose window set as a dummy on a base
screen will be switched when closing an overlap window.
(The script function is used to observe the overlap window switching device, and
change the superimpose window switching device when the device value is 0.)
4 - 59 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
4.5.3 Precautions
1
Setting priority when base screen, overlap window 1, 2 are simultaneously switched.
Setting priority of the screens is as follows:
OVERVIEW
Higher Priority Lower
Base screen
Overlap window 1 Overlap window 2
(Superimpose window)
2
When switching the station No. (common to all projects) or security level, GOT
recognizes that screens are switched, and activates the settings of base screen
SPECIFICATIONS
according to the above priority.
(Also when station No. is switched simultaneously for each screen type, GOT
operates as described above.)
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.5 Auxiliary Settings 4 - 60
4.5.3 Precautions
4.6 Key Window
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This section explains how to operate key window for numeric value input function and ASCII input function
as well as how to create user-key-window.
4.6.1 Key window type
Key window can be classified into two types: GOT original key window (Default key window) and key window
created by user (User-created key window).
Default key window is used for numerical input.
The key window for ASCII input must be created by user.
1 Default key window
Default key window will display the key window according to the data type (hexadecimal, decimal, octal
or binary) of input area automatically.
When the data type of input area is hexadecimal, decimal, octal or binary, the key window for
hexadecimal input will be displayed.
(1) Key window for decimal input (2) Key window for hexadecimal input
* The above windows are based on GOT-A900 series. Those for GOT-F900 series are different.
2 User-created key window
User's original key window can be created by registering a user-created window as key window.
To use ASCII input function, create a key window with a user-created key window.
(1) User-created key window (2) User-created key window
(Created for ASCII input) (Created for numeric input (hexadecimal))
* The above windows are based on GOT-A900 series. Those for GOT-F900 series are different.
4 - 61 4.6 Key Window
4.6.1 Key window type
1
Remark Key window to be displayed
A key window to be displayed can be set in project unit or screen unit.
OVERVIEW
A suitable key window for each screen can be displayed from multiple key windows
created beforehand.
Section 4.6.4 How to create user-created key window
2
Base screen 1 Base screen 2 Base screen 3 Base screen 4
SPECIFICATIONS
Default key window User-created key User-created key
window 1 window 2
4.6.2 Keys on default key window and display items 3
Keys displayed on default key window and the display items will be explained as follows.
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(Example: Key window for hexadecimal)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
Items Description A F
FOR OBJECTS
*1
Displays the input value.
*1*2 Displays the numerical input range.
(Does not display in A95*GOT, A956WGOT or GOT-F900 Series.)
6
The key to input numeric value, decimal point and minus symbol. (In GOT-F900
series, decimal point is not displayed.)
LAMP, SWITCH
The key to move the input cursor.
(In GOT-F900 series, left/right keys are not displayed.)
The key to delete the least significant digit of the numeric value being input and shift
the whole numeric value to right by one digit.
7
The key to erase whole input numeric value.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
The key to write the input numeric value to a device. (Confirmation key)
NUMERICAL/
The key to close key window.
*1 Input value and input range can be set to not be displayed. 8
Section 4.6.4 Setting to display key window
*2 When state is set by numerical input, the input range of the state with minimum No. will be displayed.
Section 5.4 State Setting
ALARM
4.6 Key Window 4 - 62
4.6.2 Keys on default key window and display items
4.6.3 How to operate key window
This section explains the methods of displaying a key window.
1 Basic operation method
Basic operation method of key window is explained as follows.
In the following case, numerical input function is used to explain key window operation as an example.
The operation is the same as when ASCII input function is used.
1 Touch the numerical input function to be input.
D100 100
D200 100
2 As a key window appears, input the numeric
D100 200 value.
D200 100
Then, touch the RET key.
By default, a key windows is displayed at the
lower-right.
The user can set key window position.
3 The input value is updated, and key window is
D100 200 closed.
D200 100
Remark (1) Key window position
Key window position can be set as follows.
1 Select either of the following ways from the menu.
GOT-A900 Series: [Object] [Window Position] [Key Window]
GOT-F900 Series: [Object] [Key Window Position]
2 Click on the position to display a key window with a mouse.
key
Upper-left position
of key window is set.
(2) Key window display
By making the auxiliary settings, following operations can be carried out.
Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
Example 1: A key window is displayed at the same time when switching to the
screen on which numeric input function and ASCII input function
are set.
Example 2: A key window will not be displayed when numerical input function
or ASCII input function is being touched.
4 - 63 4.6 Key Window
4.6.3 How to operate key window
1
2 Method of moving key window
This section explains how to move a key window.
OVERVIEW
1 Touch the upper part of key window.
A key window goes to movement mode.
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Touch the position to move the key window to
within three seconds.
If not touched in more than three seconds, the
3
movement mode of the key window will be
COMMON SETTING
released. Even if the position in which the object
has been set is touched within less than three
seconds, the object wil not operate.
3 The key window moves to the specified position.
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
Method of confirming key window movement mode (for GOT-A900 series only)
COMMON SETTINGS
If buzzer volume is set to [LONG] or [SHORT] within GOT menu setup utility, buzzer
FOR OBJECTS
will be output when a key window is in movement mode. If buzzer volume is set to
[NONE], it will not be output.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.6 Key Window 4 - 64
4.6.3 How to operate key window
4.6.4 How to create user-created key window
A user-created key window is created in order to input numeric value on the original key window or display
key window by ASCII input function.
To use a user-created key window, arrange touch switches on a window screen and set the screen as key
window.
The user-created key window can be displayed instead of default key window, and can control as default key
window.
To create key window quickly
Keys for numeric input/ASCII input have been registered in the library.
A user-created key window can be created quickly by utilizing those keys.
Example: The key registered in the library
(Keys other than following types have been registered.)
Keys for numerical input
Keys for ASCII input
For details of library, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
4 - 65 4.6 Key Window
4.6.4 How to create user-created key window
1
1 Outline procedure
The outline procedure of creating a user-created key window is as follows.
OVERVIEW
Start
Create a window screen. Create a new window screen. 2
GT Designer2 Version
Operating Manual
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Right click in workspace Create a new window screen
COMMON SETTING
Set touch switches assigned with key code on the window screen. Set the touch switch assigned with key
code on window screen.
Set touch switches on
the window screen.
Section 6.2 Touch Switch
Library is available. By utilizing the key for numeric input/ 4
ASCII input in the library, it can be
easily set.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Make the settings in order that the created window screen will be Set the screen to be used commonly for
displayed as a key window. a whole project or used for each base 5
screen.
COMMON SETTINGS
Setting to display key
FOR OBJECTS
Select a key window window
to be used as a key window
for ASCII input.
Make the required settings to display input value and input range. Set the view format and position of input LAMP, SWITCH
value and input range.
Set input value position
and number of digits. Input area/Input range
setting (for GOT-A900
series only) 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Preview on GT Designer2. Confirm the display image on GT
NUMERICAL/
Designer2.
GT Designer2 Version
Operating Manual
8
(To next page)
ALARM
4.6 Key Window 4 - 66
4.6.4 How to create user-created key window
(From previous page)
Set the cursor action and key window action as necessary. Set the key window display method and
When condition success, cursor cursor action.
100 100
0
and key window are displayed Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
automatically.
Cursor and key
window are displayed.
Completed
4 - 67 4.6 Key Window
4.6.4 How to create user-created key window
1
2 Setting to display key window
Set a key window to be used for a whole project or for each screen. (for GOT-A900 series only ).
OVERVIEW
(1) Settings
(a) When setting a key window used for a whole project
1 Select [Common] [System Environment] from the menu.
2
2 As [System Environment] dialog box appears, double click on [Key Window].
SPECIFICATIONS
3 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following
explanation ((2)(a)).
Remark When setting in project workspace
3
Double click on it to display "System Environment" dialog box. And then double click
on "Key Window" there.
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Double click
(d) When setting a key window used for each screen (for GOT-A900 series only)
1 Select a screen, and then select [Screen] [Property] from the menu.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
2 As the setting dialog box appears, double click on "Key window" tab dialog box, and make
FOR OBJECTS
the settings with reference to the following explanation ((2)(b)).
Remark When setting in project workspace
Select a screen and right-click on the screen with a mouse, and then select 6
[Property]. As the setting dialog box appears, double click on "Auxiliary" tab dialog
box.
LAMP, SWITCH
Right click 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.6 Key Window 4 - 68
4.6.4 How to create user-created key window
(2) Setting items
(a) When setting a key window for a whole project
Items Description A F
Use default key window Select this item to use a default key window.
Select key window sheet No. Select this item to use a user-created key window.
DEC key Set a window screen to be used as key window for numerical input (Decimal/Hexadecimal) and
sheet No. ASCII input.
HEX key The screen can be confirmed by clicking on [Browse] button.
sheet No. DEC/HEX key sheet No.... :When the No. is set to 0, a default key window will be
displayed.
ASCII key ASCII key sheet No.... :When the No. is set to 0, a key window will not be displayed in
sheet No. GOT-A900 series.
In GOT-F900 series, a default key window will be displayed.
Display value during input Check this item to display the value being input on a key window.
Display input function range Check this item to display the data input range on a key window.
To display the value being input and the input range in GOT-F900 series
To display the value being input and the input range in GOT-F900 series, arrange
numerical display on the created window.
(1) When displaying value being input
Arrange numerical display and set GOT internal device (GD12) in the device.
(2) When displaying input range
Arrange numerical display and set GOT internal device in the device.
For upper limit of input numeric value, set GOT internal device GD8 to 32 bit
(GD8, GD9).
For lower limit of input numeric value, set GOT internal device GD10 to 32 bit
(GD10, GD11).
4 - 69 4.6 Key Window
4.6.4 How to create user-created key window
(b) When setting a key window for each screen 1
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Key Window
PREPARATORY
Basic Auxiliary
Items Description A F
Screen setting has priority over Check this item to give screen settings priority over project setting.
project setting After setting, select the type of key window to be used.
5
Use default key window Select this item to use a default key window.
COMMON SETTINGS
Select key window sheet Select this item to use a user-created key window.
FOR OBJECTS
DEC key Set a window screen to be used as a key window for numerical input (Decimal/Hexadecimal) and
sheet No. ASCII input.
HEX key The screen can be confirmed by clicking on [Browse] button.
sheet No. DEC/HEX key sheet No. :When the No. is set to 0, a default key window will be
displayed. 6
ASCII key ASCII key sheet No. :When the No. is set to 0, a key window will not be displayed in
sheet No. GOT-A900 series.
In GOT-F900 series, a default key window will be displayed. LAMP, SWITCH
Screen setting has priority over Check this item to give screen settings priority over project setting.
project setting After setting, select the display of key window to be used.
Display value during input Check this item to display the value being input on a key window.
7
Display input function range Check this item to display the data input range on a key window.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
4.6 Key Window 4 - 70
4.6.4 How to create user-created key window
3 Input area/Input range setting (for GOT-A900 series only)
Set the area to display the value being input and the input range on user-created key window.
1 Select [Object] [Key Window Setting] [Input Value Area] or [Input Range Area] from the
menu.
2 Click on the position to display input value/input range.
The input value/input
range area is displayed
on which a mouse is
clicked.
3 Double click on the assigned input value area/input range area to set the attribute.
Items Description A F
Select the view format of the input value to be displayed.
Dec :Select this item when a decimal key window has been created.
Type
Hex :Select this item when a hexadecimal key window has been created.
ASCII :Select this item when a key window for ASCII input has been created.
Size Select character size of the input value to be displayed.
When setting input value area
For ASCII input, select the number of digits (1 to 80) to be used for display.
Details When [Type] is set to [Decimal], [Digits] will be fixed to 32 digits; set to [Hexadecimal], [Digits]
Digits
will be fixed to 16 digits.
When setting input range
Fixed to 36 digits.
4 - 71 4.6 Key Window
4.6.4 How to create user-created key window
4.6.5 Precautions 1
This section provides the precautions for using key window are as follows.
OVERVIEW
1 Precautions for using default key window and user-created key window.
A key window cannot be displayed when details of alarm is displayed on a comment window by using
alarm list display function and alarm history display function. 2
2 Precautions for creating user-created key window (for GOT-A900 series only)
SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Object that can be set on user-created key window
Make sure to set only touch switches in which key codes for numerical input/ASCII input has been
set on a user-created key window.
3
(2) Action of the touch switch set on a user-created key window
COMMON SETTING
(a) If the actions of key code, bit SET and word SET are set together in the action setting, only key
code action will be available.
(b) Even if ON/OFF shape is set, touch switch will be displayed in OFF shape.
To create a key that includes function (1) and (2) 4
When creating a key window with a key that includes the above functions, use a
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
normal window screen as a key window without making the settings for displaying
PREPARATORY
the key window.
Example: Normal overlap window used as key window
Set the objects except
Numerical input and 5
ASCII input. Turn ON the other device (bit SET)
simultaneously with RETURN (0000H).
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
(3) Size of user-created key window
The key window size is same with the size of set window screen.
It can be changed by changing the size of window screen. LAMP, SWITCH
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
The applicable size of window screen is different according to the status of close key and move
key, i.e., whether they are displayed or not. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Section 2.1.2 Window screen specifications
(4) Input value area/Input range area (for GOT-A900 Series only)
NUMERICAL/
(a) In A95*GOT and A956WGOT, input range area can not be displayed.
In GOT-F900 series, input value area and input range area cannot be set.
(b) Multiple input value areas/input range areas cannot be set on one window screen. 8
ALARM
4.6 Key Window 4 - 72
4.6.5 Precautions
5. COMMON SETTINGS FOR OBJECTS
This chapter is described the items to be set commonly after Chapter 6.
5.1 Device Setting
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This chapter explains the setting method of the device applicable for monitoring or writing using object func-
tions.
5.1.1 Device setting
1 Device that can be set by GT Designer2
For details on the device type and setting range, please refer to the following.
Section 2.6 Supported Devices
2 Device usable for PLC monitoring
The device range available for setting by GT Designer2 depends on the PLC type selected when the GT
Designer2 project is created. ( Section 3.1 GOT/ PLC Type Setting)
As the following table shows, the device range set by GT Designer2 may be different with the usable
range in PLC.
Example: Difference between the device setting range of PLC and GT Desiguer2
SIEMENS PLC: Matsushita Electric Works PLC:
Device setting range SIMATIC S7-300 Series MEWNET-FP Series
(Input relay) (Index register)
PLC 10000 to 11277 IX0 to IX13, IY0 to IY13
GT Designer2 10000 to 15117 N/A
GT Designer2 does not check whether the device settings (device name, device No.) are actually
available for the target PLC.
For the availability, check it as follows:
(1) Check the following when drawing
Device type and setting range available for setting by GT Designer2.
Section 2.6 Supported Devices
Device type and setting range available for PLC monitoring
User's Manual of the connected PLC
(2) Check when monitoring
Check the device name and range with the system alarm.
If a device name or range invalid for the PLC is set for monitoring, system alarm "322 Out of device
range error" will occur.
5-1 5.1 Device Setting
5.1.1 Device setting
5.1.2 Settings 1
Click the Device button in the setting dialog box provided for each object function and make setting for
devices.
OVERVIEW
Example: Setting a device to be monitored by "Lamp"
Click 2
SPECIFICATIONS
Set device
COMMON SETTING
4
Device setting dialog box.
Lamp display dialog box.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Device can be set
by input from keyboard.
COMMON SETTINGS
Specifying a bit device to the device of word format (16/32bits)
FOR OBJECTS
The device number that can be set is a multiple of 16.
Setting of frequently-used device.
Once a device is set, it can be selected from the displayed list for setting from the 6
next time.
Maximum 10 device names can be added to the list. If more than 10 devices are
LAMP, SWITCH
kept, the device name will be deleted from the oldest one.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.1 Device Setting 5-2
5.1.2 Settings
5.1.3 Setting items
1 Mitsubishi Electric PLC
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
Items Description A F
Select the device name to be set.
Then, set the device number by 0 to F buttons (or by direct input).
Device
When setting BM (buffer memory), set the buffer memory address in the space for the device
number.
Reading the device comment data created by GX Developer and confirming the device comment/
Device Comment device name is available during device setting.
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
Kind of Device Displays the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range Displays the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
Set the bit position of the word device to be monitored.
Bit position
(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting.)
Set the block number of the extended file register.
Block
Extended (It can be set when "ER" is selected as the device name.)
Set the head I/O number of the buffer memory for the special function module.
Unit top I/O Set the first 2 digits of the 3-digit head I/O number.
(It can be set when "BM" is selected as the device name.)
Network*1 Set the station number of the PLC to be monitored.
Host Select this when monitoring the host PLC.
Select this when monitoring other PLC.
Then, set the station number and network number of the PLC to be monitored.
Other*2
NW No. : Set the network No.
Station No. : Set the station No.
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
5-3 5.1 Device Setting
5.1.3 Setting items
*1 When monitoring multi-CPU system 1
In the case of GOT-A900 series
Set the CPU No. (1 to 4) in the network setting when monitoring a multiple CPU system.
When the CPU No. is set to "0", set the CPU No. (1 to 4) in the network setting.
OVERVIEW
Connection method Monitor device
Direct CPU connection Connected PLC CPU
Bus connection Computer link connection MELSECNET connection 2
Control CPU
Ethernet connection CC-Link connection
SPECIFICATIONS
If monitoring a single CPU system, set CPU No. to 0.
3
In the case of GOT-F900 series
COMMON SETTING
In the Q multi-CPU system, set the CPU unit No. (1 to 4) in the network setting.
In the single-CPU system, select "System Settings"-"PLC Type", then select "MELSEC-QnA/Q".
*2 When monitoring B and W assigned in link parameter and network parameter.
Set device B and W running cyclic communication as [Host].
If it is set as [Other] in the network setting, the cyclic transmission will be changed to the transient transmis-
4
sion irrespective of the network type, resulting in delay of the object display.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Setting device by inputting directly from keyboard
When setting it by inputting directly from the keyboard, set the items as follows:
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Bit condition
Device number
Device name
CPU No.
PLC station number 6
NW No.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.1 Device Setting 5-4
5.1.3 Setting items
2 Omron PLC
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
Items Description A F
Select the device name to be set.
Device
Then, set the device number by 0 to F buttons (or by direct input).
Kind of Device Displays the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range Displays the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
Set the bit position of the word device to be monitored.
Extended Bit position
(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting.).
5-5 5.1 Device Setting
5.1.3 Setting items
1
3 Yaskawa PLC
(For GOT-A900: CP-9200 (H), CP-9200SH, CP-9300MS, CP-9300MC (only a portion
of this range), MP-920, MP-930, PROGIC-8
OVERVIEW
For GOT-F900: CP-9200SH, MP-920, MP-930)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
Items Description A F
Select the device name to be set.
Device*1
Then, set the device number by 0 to F buttons (or by direct input). 4
Kind of Device Displays the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Range Displays the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
Set the bit position of the word device to be monitored.
Extended Bit position
(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting).
For details of *1, refer to the following.
5
*1 Device settings for Yaskawa PLC (For CP-9200SH, CP-9300MS, MP-920, MP-930)
COMMON SETTINGS
Set the coil device (MB) as follows:
FOR OBJECTS
(1) Set the link and coil as a bit device
Set it in the format of word address (DEC)+bit position (HEX).
6
Device No.
LAMP, SWITCH
Device name Bit position (HEX)
Word address (DEC)
(2) Set a register as a word device
Set it with a word address (DEC).
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
Device name
Device No.
Word address (DEC)
8
ALARM
5.1 Device Setting 5-6
5.1.3 Setting items
4 Allen-Bradley PLC
GOT-A900 series
GOT-F900 series
Items Description A F
Select the device name to be set.
Device*1
Then, set the file numbers/element number by 0 to 9 buttons (or by direct input).
Kind of Device Displays the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range Displays the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
Network Set the station number of the PLC connected to the specified device.
Host Select this when monitoring the host PLC.
Select this when monitoring the other PLC.
Other
Then, set the station number of the PLC to be monitored.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
5-7 5.1 Device Setting
5.1.3 Setting items
*1 Device settings for Allen-Bradley PLC 1
The Allen-Bradley PLC device addressing consists of a file and element.
Make setting as follows using GT Designer2.
OVERVIEW
(1) Set a bit address as a bit device
B 3 : 64 / 15
File type
File No.
Bit No.
Bit delimiter
2
Element delimiter Element No.
SPECIFICATIONS
Setting by GT Designer2
File type
File No.
Bit No.
Element No.
3
COMMON SETTING
T 4 : 7 / TT
File type Bit No.
File No. Bit delimiter
Element delimiter Element No.
Setting by GT Designer2
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
File type Bit No.
File No. Element No.
(2) Set an element address as a word device
5
N 7 : 15
COMMON SETTINGS
File type Element No.
FOR OBJECTS
File No.
Element delimiter
Setting by GT Designer2
6
File type Bit No.
LAMP, SWITCH
File No. Element No.
T 4 : 7 . ACC
File type Bit No.
File No. Bit delimiter 7
Element delimiter Element No.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Setting by GT Designer2
NUMERICAL/
File type Bit
File No. Element No 8
ALARM
5.1 Device Setting 5-8
5.1.3 Setting items
5 SHARP PLC (Compatible with GOT-A900 series only)
Items Description A F
Select the device name to be set.
Device*1
Then, set the address number by 0 to F buttons or by direct input).
Kind of Device Displays the selected device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range Displays the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
Set the bit position of the word device to be monitored.
Extended Bit position
(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting.)
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Device settings of SHARP PLC
Make the device setting for Sharp PLC as follows:
(1) Set a register as a bit device.
(a) Registers
Set the type (first 2 digits) and the address.
Number Address
(b) File register
Set the file number and the address.
File number Address
5-9 5.1 Device Setting
5.1.3 Setting items
1
Remark Monitoring the timer and the counter:
(a) Address setting
OVERVIEW
Be sure not to set the same address range for the timer and the counter.
Even if these addresses are overlapped, GOT will display no error.
GOT monitors them according to the address instead of the device name.
Therefore, if the device invalid for the Sharp PLC side parameter is set using 2
GT Designer2, GOT will monitor other device (the device corresponding to
the set device address range).
SPECIFICATIONS
Example:
Content in Sharp PLC parameter setting
T0000 to T1000
C1001 to C1777 3
Even if GT Designer2 is set to
COMMON SETTING
"C0000", GOT will also monitor
Content in GT Designer parameter setting "T0000".
(b) Contact writing into timer and counter
4
Writing the contact for the timer and counter can only be done while the CPU
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
is in RUN (while the timer and counter is in operation).
(2) Set a register and memory as a word device
(a) I/O relay 5
Set a combination of the device address (multiple of 16)+bit address format (fixed to 0).
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Even number The next line must be set
to 0,for it is bit address.
(b) Registers and file register 6
Set the device address (multiple of 16).
LAMP, SWITCH
Type Even number
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.1 Device Setting 5 - 10
5.1.3 Setting items
6 TOSHIBA PLC (GOT-A900 series only)
Items Description A F
Select the device name to be set.
Device*1
Then, set the device number by 0 to F buttons (or direct input it).
Kind of Device Display the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range Display the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
Set the bit position for the word device to be monitored.
Extended Bit position
(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting.)
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Device settings for Toshiba PLC
Make the device setting for Toshiba PLC as follows:
(1) Set a relay as a bit device
Set the device using the format of word address (DEC)+bit address (HEX)
Device number
Device name
Bit address (HEX)
Word address (DEC)
(2) Set a relay as a word device
Set the word address (DEC).
For device name setting, enter "W" after the bit device name.
Device name Device numb
(adding "W")
Remark Notation of device address (when using PROSEC V series)
The notation of device address setting is different between the Toshiba PLC
peripheral software and GOT. Refer to the following for details.
Section 2.6 Supported Devices
5 - 11 5.1 Device Setting
5.1.3 Setting items
1
7 SIEMENS PLC
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
Items Description A F
Select the device name to be set.
Device*1
Then, set the device number by 0 to F buttons (or direct input it).
4
Kind of Device Display the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Range Display the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
PREPARATORY
Set the bit position for the word device to be monitored.
Extended Bit position
(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting.)
Network Set the monitor target of the set device.
5
Host Select this to monitor the PLC specified as the host from the GOT utility (setup).
COMMON SETTINGS
Select this when monitoring the PLC other than the one specified as [Host].
Other
FOR OBJECTS
Then, set the PLC MPI address.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.1 Device Setting 5 - 12
5.1.3 Setting items
*1 Device settings of SIEMENS PLC
Make the device setting for SIEMENS PLC as follows:
(1) Set a bit memory as a bit device
Set the device using the format of byte address (DEC)+bit address (0 to 7)
Device name Device number
Bit address (0 to 7)
Byte address (DEC)
Remark Notation of bit memory
The difference in bit memory notation between GOT and PLC is as follows:
Notation of GOT Notation of PLC
Q0007 Q0.7
(2) Set a bit memory as a word device
Set it with device number.
For the device name setting, enter "W" after the bit memory device name.
Device name
(W added) Device number
(Setting with even number)
(3) When setting a data register
Set the device using the format of data block (DB) + data word (DW).
Device name
Data word (DW) number
(Setting with even number)
Data block (DB) number
Remark (1) Before setting data register
(a) It is necessary to define the data block using a peripheral software and
sequence program, before using a data register.
(b) Setting more than one data block cannot be done.
(2) Timer (Current value) (T)
Only one device can be set for the write target of this device.
Therefore, multiple devices, such as, using the recipe function, etc., cannot be
used.
5 - 13 5.1 Device Setting
5.1.3 Setting items
1
8 HITACHI PLC (GOT-A900 series only)
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Items Description A F
Select the device name to be set.
Device*1
Then set the device number by 0 to F buttons (or direct input).
Kind of Device Display the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range Display the setting range available for the device selected in [Device]. 4
Set the bit position of the word device to be monitored.
Extended Bit position
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting.)
PREPARATORY
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Device setting for Hitachi PLC
Make the device setting for Hitachi PLC as follows: 5
COMMON SETTINGS
(1) When specifying an external I/O device
FOR OBJECTS
(a) When setting a bit device
Set the device using the format of module No.+ slot No.+ module bit No.
6
Device name
Device number
Module internal bit No. (00-95):DEC
Slot No. (0-A) HEX LAMP, SWITCH
Module No. (0-5) DEC
(b) When setting a word device
Set the device using the format of module No.+ slot No.+ module bit No.
For the device name setting, enter "w" before the bit device name. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
Device name
Device number
Module internal bit No. (00-95):DEC
Slot No. (0-A) HEX
Module No. (0-5) DEC
8
ALARM
5.1 Device Setting 5 - 14
5.1.3 Setting items
(2) When specifying a remote external I/O device
(a) Setting a bit device
Set the device using the format of remote master station + remote slave station + slot No. +
module bit No.
Device name
Device number
Module bit No. (00-95): DEC
Slot No. (0-9) : DEC
Remote slave station (0-9) : DEC
Remote master station (1-4) : DEC
(b) When setting a word device.
Set the device using the format of remote master station + remote slave station + slot No. +
module bit No.
For device name setting, enter "W" before the bit device name.
Device name
Device number
Module bit No. (0-9): DEC
Slot No. (0-9) : DEC
Remote slave station (0-9) : DEC
Remote master station (1-4) : DEC
5 - 15 5.1 Device Setting
5.1.3 Setting items
1
9 MATSUSHITA Electric Works PLC
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
3
COMMON SETTING
Items Description A F
Select the device name to be set.
Device*1
Then, set the device number by 0 to F buttons. (or direct input).
Kind of Device Display the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range Display the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
4
Set the bit position of the word device to be monitored.
OBJECT SETTING
Extended Bit position
OPERATION FOR
(It can be set if the word device name is selected in [Device] in bit device setting.)
PREPARATORY
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Device setting for Matsushita Electric Works PLC
Make the device setting for Matsushita Electric Works PLC as follows.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
(1) Set a contact as a bit device
FOR OBJECTS
Set the device using the format of word address (DEC)+ bit address (HEX).
Device name
Device number 6
Bit address (HEX)
Word address (DEC)
LAMP, SWITCH
(2) Set a contact as a word device
Set the device number.
Enter "W" before the device name, not including the bit address. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Device name
NUMERICAL/
Device number
("W" added)
8
ALARM
5.1 Device Setting 5 - 16
5.1.3 Setting items
10 FUJI Electric Works PLC (GOT-F900 series only)
Items Description A F
Select the device name to be set.
Device
Then, set the device number by 0 to F buttons (or direct input).
Kind of Device Display the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range Display the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
11 Inverter (GOT-F900 series only)
Items Description A F
Select the device name to be set.
Device
Then, set the device number by 0 to 9 buttons (or direct input).
Kind of Device Display the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
Range Display the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
5 - 17 5.1 Device Setting
5.1.3 Setting items
1
12 Microcomputer
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Items Description A F
Device
Select the device name to be set.
Then, set the device number by 0 to 9 buttons (or direct input).
3
Kind of Device Display the device type (Bit/Word) selected in [Device].
COMMON SETTING
Range Display the setting range available for the device selected in [Device].
Set the bit position of the word device to be monitored.
Extended Bit position
(It can be set if the word device name selected in [Device] in bit device setting.)
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.1 Device Setting 5 - 18
5.1.3 Setting items
5.2 Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
GOT supports and handles the following 7 types of numeric data.
16- or 32-bit signed binary (binary including a sign)
16- or 32-bit unsigned binary (binary including no sign)
16- or 32-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)
32-bit real number (floating point data)
The range of each numeric data type is shown below.
The data range varies depending on the data length (16 or 32 bits).
Data range
Data type
Data length: 16 bits Data length: 32 bits
Signed BIN -32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to 2147483647
Unsigned BIN 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295
BCD 0 to 9999 0 to 99999999
Real number Not used Signed 13-digit notation (floating point format only) *1
*1: The real number precision is given up to the sixth decimal place. The accuracy of the 7th and later decimal places
cannot be guaranteed.
If a number having 7th and later digits is displayed on GOT, there are cases the displayed value differs from the
value displayed on GX Developer.
Example:When the value of a real number (floating point data) of the connected PLCs is 4.123
Display on GX Developer : 4.123000
Display on GOT (display of up to 6th digit) : 4.123000
Display on GOT (display of up to 13th digit) : 4.1230001449585
For details of real number (floating point data), refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) (Section 3.9.4 Real numbers
(floating decimal point data)
The following shows an example where the data length and data type are set on the Trigger tab in the
Numerical Input.
5 - 19 5.2 Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT
5.1.3 Setting items
5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting 1
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
OVERVIEW
5.3.1 Object arrangement
2
If the menu/icon for setting object is selected, the cursor will go to arrangement mode (+).
In default setting, clicking on the drawing screen arranges an object. When continuously clicked on the
SPECIFICATIONS
screen, multiple same type objects will be continuously arranged.
The arrangement mode can be released by right-clicking the mouse or using the ESC key.
Click 3
COMMON SETTING
Click
Click Click
4
1 To change the object arrangement method
Object arrangement method can be changed in the Preferences dialog box.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(Select [Project] [Preferences] from the menu to display the dialog box.)
For details of the Preferences dialog box, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Preferences dialog box
Toolbars Icon Operation View 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Items Description A F
Checked : After arranging objects, the selected status (status with handle) is reset.
NUMERICAL/
Figure/Object deselect-after
Not checked : With the selected status (status with handle), figures/objects are arranged on
create
the drawing screen.
Checked : After setting figures/objects, the tool selected status is reset. It is convenient to
Tool de-select after use
arrange different figures/objects. 8
Not checked : After setting figures/objects, the selected status remains active. It is convenient
to arrange the same figures/objects continuously.
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting 5 - 20
5.3.1 Object arrangement
Toolbars Icon Operation View
Items Description A F
Checked : The system settings dialog box (GOT type, PC type, etc.) appears in creation
of a new project.
System setting on new
Not checked : The system settings dialog box (GOT type, PC type, etc.) does not appear in
creation of a new project.
Checked : After arranging objects on the drawing screen, the settings dialog box
automatically appears.
Change object after create
Not checked : After arranging objects on the drawing screen, the settings dialog box does not
automatically appear.
Checked : File is automatically saved.
Auto File Save Saving interval (5 to 720) is set.
Not checked : File is not automatically saved.
Checked : When the GT Designer2 is started, the project selection dialog box (New,
Show "Select Project" dialog Open, etc.) appears.
when you start GT Designer2 Not checked : When the GT Designer2 is started, the project selection dialog box (New,
Open, etc.) does not appear.
Checked : When creating a new project, the wizard screen appears.
Show wizard on new project
Not checked : When creating a new project, the wizard screen does not appear.
Close edit screen before
opening another when open Set the maximum number of screens to be displayed (1 to 25 screens).
screens count is at its The setting is enabled on the next start-up of GT Designer2.
maximum
5 - 21 5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting
5.3.1 Object arrangement
5.3.2 Object shape setting 1
Frames, i.e., shapes can be set to objects in order to make distinction between display images and ranges of
objects such as touch switches, lamps and others.
OVERVIEW
1 Setting procedure
Set the shape in the object setting dialogue box.
2
The following explains the setting procedure of shape with the example of bit lamp.
1 Five basic shapes can be selected in the Basic tab.
SPECIFICATIONS
To select other shapes than basic ones, click on the Others button.
COMMON SETTING
2 Click on the Others button to display the "Image List" dialogue box. Select one shape among them.
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
(When selecting [Basic Figure])
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
GOT-A900 series
(When selecting [Library] except my favorites)
ALARM
5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting 5 - 22
5.3.2 Object shape setting
Basic Text
Items Description A F
Select the shape for an object.
Basic Figure Basic figure : Basic shapes that have been registered for each object
Library*1*2/Parts Library : Shapes that have been registered as library (My favorite, User defined
(Only for lamp function and Libraries, System Libraries). (Only for GOT-A900 series)
touch switch function) Parts : Shapes that have been registered as parts.
(Only for GOT-F900 series)
Library Switch the basic shape type or library type.
On/Off
The buttons are displayed when [Basic Figure] is selected.
(Only for lamp function and
These buttons are used to switch the shapes displayed at the time of ON/OFF.
touch function)
The item is displayed when [Library] (except my favorites) is selected.
Switch colors of the displayed figure.
Image List Select the shape for an object.
Set the No. of shape to be displayed. Click on the Jump button to switch the shapes.
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
*1 Use of high quality font
When the high quality font is included in the library used as the figures of the lamp display or touch switch
function, also make the following setting (1) or (2).
The text is not displayed as the high quality font on the GOT screen without the above setting.
(1) Register to comment
Register the same texts used the high quality font as a comment of high quality font.
It is not necessary to display the registered comment.
(2) Arrange text on screen
Arrange the same texts used the high quality font on the screen as a text of the high quality font.
It is not necessary to display the registered comment.
It is recommended to create a screen to arrange the high quality font.
5 - 23 5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting
5.3.2 Object shape setting
*2 Precautions for changing switch/lamp shape 1
When switch/lamp shape is changed, the ON/OFF shapes may not be switched automatically depending
on the shape used as switch/lamp. Make sure to check whether the ON/OFF shape can be automatically
switched before changing the switch/lamp shape, and make the relevant setting as necessary.
OVERVIEW
Example: Lamp (Bit)
Shape as basic figure Shape as basic figure
2
ON OFF ON OFF
If the ON shape is changed, the OFF shape will be changed
automatically.
SPECIFICATIONS
ON shape is changed
Shape within library Shape within library
ON OFF
ON OFF
Even if the ON shape is changed, the OFF shape will not be 3
changed automatically.
COMMON SETTING
ON shape is changed
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting 5 - 24
5.3.2 Object shape setting
5.3.3 Object size change
This section explains how to change the size of arranged object.
1 Object size change
(1) Method of changing size
1 elect the object to be changed in size.
2 Position the cursor over the sizing handles, click and drag it to change the object size.
012345
012345
Remark The size of some objects cannot be changed using the above method.
The size of data list and alarm history is determined according to the text size set on
the corresponding basic tab. Therefore, changing the size using the above method
is not applicable.
To change the object size, open the setting dialogue box and change the text size
within the basic tab.
(2) Text size
The text size changes with the object size.
The changing details are different according to object types.
Change of text size Object Details of change
Changeable Numerical display The text size is enlarged 0.5 to 8 times from the original object size.
Numerical input
ASCII display The text size is enlarged 1 to 8 times from the original object size.
ASCII input
Unchangeable Touch switch The text size can be changed by setting text size from the dialog box of each object.
Lamp Example) Touch switch
Alarm list
Comment display
Stop
Data list Stop
Alarm history
Trend graph
Line graph
Example) Bar graph
Bar graph
Statistics graph
Scatter graph
Panel meter
5 - 25 5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting
5.3.3 Object size change
1
2 Change size of object with shape
(1) Method of changing size
OVERVIEW
1 Select the object to be changed in size.
2 Position the cursor over the sizing handles, click and drag it to change the object size.
2
322 Specified d
322 Specified device beyond
SPECIFICATIONS
the range
(2) Misalignment of object and shape 3
Some objects, to which shape is set, may cause the following phenomena;
COMMON SETTING
When the whole object size is changed, i.e., enlarged by click and drag, only the shape is enlarged,
but the object remains at the original position, resulting in misalignment between the object and
shape.
(a) Center the object in its shape
Right click on the object to realign the shape with the object.
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Right-click the mouse and selec
[Centering] in menu.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
(b) Move the object to any position within the shape
The position of object and shape can be changed separately as instructed below.
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
Right-click the mouse and selec
[Edit Touch Area/Frame Region] in
Drag the object to align it 7
with the shape.
menu.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting 5 - 26
5.3.3 Object size change
(c) Change the size of object and shape separately
The size of object and shape can be changed separately as instructed below.
Right-click the mouse and select
Drag the object to change
[Edit Touch Area/Frame Region] in
its size.
menu.
(3) Fitting touch switch valid area in object frame
A touch switch valid area can be fit in an object frame.
Right-click on an object, and then Right-click on an object, and then The touch switch valid area is fit in
check [Display Touch Area]. select [Fit in Touch Area]. the object frame.
5 - 27 5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting
5.3.3 Object size change
5.4 State Setting 1
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
OVERVIEW
With this setting, the ON/OFF status of bit device can be changed as well as the color of object shape
according to the word device value.
Word device value being monitored by object function.
2
Bit device ON/OFF for display change.
Word device value for display change.
SPECIFICATIONS
The objects compatible with state setting and the conditions for display change are listed in the following
table.
: Applicable : N/A
Conditions for display changing 3
Object type Word device value being Display changing device
COMMON SETTING
monitored Bit device ON/OFF Word device value
Numerical display
Word parts display
Parts movement (word)
Word lamp
Numerical input
4
Data list
OBJECT SETTING
Word comment
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
*1
Level
Panel meter
Scatter graph
*1 The word device value being monitored must be set as the condition for display change.
5
1 Display changes according to the word device value being monitored.
COMMON SETTINGS
Example: Level display function
FOR OBJECTS
Word device D100 being monitored
D100=40 D100=60 D100=80 LAMP, SWITCH
Display color changes according to the word device value being monitored.
2 Display changes according to bit device ON/OFF.
7
Example: Numerical display function
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Word device D500 (temperature)
being monitored
30 30
NUMERICAL/
Bit device M10 (ON in error
occurrence) for display changing
D500=30 D500=30
Display changes due
M10 ON to an error occurrence.
8
ALARM
5.4 State Setting 5 - 28
3 Display changes according to word device value
Example: Numerical display function
Word device D500
(production output)
being monitored
50 150 200
Word device D100 D500=50 D500=150 D500=200
(defective products) Display changes when the
5 D100 9 10 D100
for display changing number of defective products
exceeds the specified number.
5.4.1 Display priority
Up to 64 (0 to 63) states can be set to one object.
When display change conditions overlap, the state of the smaller No. will be displayed with the priority.
[Display priority]
State No. Priority
1 Higher
63
0 (normal case) Lower The display attribure that must be set to an object
If conditions for other states (1 to 63) have not
been satisfied, the attribute of state No.0 is displayed.
Example: When conditions for displaying state 1 and 2 occur simultaneously.
Display by state 1.
D100: 80
Display attribute Display condition
State 1 50 D100
State 2 0 D100
Not display
5.4.2 Arrangement and settings
State is set for each object function.
For details, refer to the arrangement and setting of the object.
5 - 29 5.4 State Setting
5.4.1 Display priority
5.4.3 Setting items 1
This section explains the setting items for state setting with the example of numerical display.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Items Description A F
PREPARATORY
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
State Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
New State Create a new state. 5
Delete State Delete a specified state.
COMMON SETTINGS
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
FOR OBJECTS
Changes the priority of the current state.
Example: When changing the priority level of "B" in state 2 with the [Up]/[Down] buttons.
State 0 Ordinary
6
State 1 B
Priority up
Up State 2 A
State 0 Ordinary
Up/Down State 3 C LAMP, SWITCH
State 1 A
State 2 B
State 0 Ordinary
State 3 C
Down State 1 A
State 2 C
Priority down
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
State 3 B
Displays the list of preset states.
NUMERICAL/
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Select State
8
Display conditional expression
State
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
5.4 State Setting 5 - 30
5.4.3 Setting items
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the display change conditions according to state.
Bit : Select it when changing the display according to the ON/OFF status of bit
device.
After selecting "Bit", set the bit device and device status (ON/OFF).
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Word : Select it when changing the display according to the value of word device.
After selecting [Word], set a condition expression for the word device value in
[Range].
Set the value of word device range to change the display using a conditional expression.
Select the conditional expression from the following patterns.
Combine device value ($V, $W) and fixed value to set the conditional expression.
Range
Fixed value Device value($V)
being monitored/input value ($W)
Comparison operator
When setting the operation expression other than the above 3 patterns.*1
User-setting conditional expression.
Click on the [Range] button after selecting [Others].
For user-setting conditional expression, the word device for display change can be set as a
condition.
Input the value in decimal.
(Fixed value)
Set the comparison operator of conditional expression.
< : The left value is smaller than right value.
== : The left value is equal to the right value.
(Comparison operator) <= : The left value is smaller than or equal to the right value.
!= : The left value is not equal to the right value.
Indicates the device value monitored using the object.
$V ($W) Indicates the operation value when data operation function is used.
(The input value of numerical input function is expressed as $W.)
*1
Used to display the range input dialogue box.
Numerical color Set the color of numeric value when display conditions of the state are satisfied.
Select the plate color when display conditions of the state are satisfied.
Plate Color
Plate
Select the blinking pattern of numerical value when display conditions of state are satisfied.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
Reverse Check this item to reverse the numerical value when display conditions of state are satisfied.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
5 - 31 5.4 State Setting
5.4.3 Setting items
*1 Input range dialog box setting 1
This dialog box is used to set the value range of word device used for state.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Items Description A F
Select the format of the conditional expression.
3
A B (2 items) : Display condition range is set using two expressions.
COMMON SETTING
A B C (3 items) : Display condition range is set using three expressions.
Example:
$V == 500
10 <= $V($W) <= D50
Value of the word device for dispay change. 4
Style Set the comparison operator (<,<=,==,!=)
of the conditional expression.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
$V: Indicate the value of the device monitored
using object.
It indicates operation value when data
operation function is used.
$W:Indicate the input value of the data
input function.
5
Fixed value directly set by user
(hexadecimal system/decimal system/
COMMON SETTINGS
octal system)
FOR OBJECTS
Click on the 0 to C button to set fixed value and variable value of each item [Input Each Term
(A-C)].
Set the comparison operator of conditional expression.
<
==
: The left value is smaller than the right value.
: The left value equals the right value.
6
<= : The left value is smaller than or equivalent with the right value.
!= : The left value doesn't equal the right value.
LAMP, SWITCH
Set the description of condition expression items.
Fixed Value : Set the fixed value.
Then, input the numeric value and click on the Enter
button.
The data type of numeric value can be selected with the
7
Input Each Term (A-C)
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Hex Dec Oct buttons.
$V, $W (Device Value) : Specify the word device that is set as monitoring and
NUMERICAL/
writing target by using the object.
Other Device : Set the word device for display change.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
8
ALARM
5.4 State Setting 5 - 32
5.4.3 Setting items
5.4.4 Example of state setting operation
This section explains the state setting operation with the example of numerical display setting.
State 0 State 2 State 1
The monitor word device
D500 (productivity)
The word device for display
changes D100 (the number 50 150 200
of defective goods) D500=50 D500=150 D500=200
5 D100 9 10 D100 Displaying changes when the
number of defective goods
exceed the specified number
1 Set state 0
Set state 0 on the basic tab.
The display attribute set on the basic tab is displayed except when the conditions set for state 1,2 are
applied.
(1) Setting the conditions of displaying state 0 is not
required.
(2) Set the display attribute of state 0.
The display attribute set here is changed when the
conditions for each state are satisfied.
Color : Black
Blink : No
Reverse : Unchecked
Plate : White
5 - 33 5.4 State Setting
5.4.4 Example of state setting operation
1
2 Set state 1
Set state 1 on the case tab.
(1) Create state 1 by clicking [New State].
OVERVIEW
(2) Set the conditions displaying state1.
Others (10<=D100)
(3) Set the display attribute of state1.
Numerical Color : White 2
Blink : No
Reverse : Unchecked
SPECIFICATIONS
Plate color : Black
COMMON SETTING
3 Set state 2.
4
(1) Click on the [New State] to create state 2.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
(2) Set the conditions of displaying state 2.
PREPARATORY
Others (5<=D100<=9)
(3) Set the display attribute of state 2.
Numerical Color: Black
Blink : No 5
Reversed: Unchecked
COMMON SETTINGS
Plate Color:Gray Color
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
5.4.5 Precautions 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
1 Precautions for drawing
NUMERICAL/
Do not set the conditional expressions that cannot be satisfied (e.g. "100<$V<10").
GT Designer2 does not check whether the conditional expressions are applicable or not.
If this kind of conditional expression is set, the corresponding state will not be displayed during
8
monitoring by GOT.
ALARM
5.4 State Setting 5 - 34
5.4.5 Precautions
5.5 Trigger Setting
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
The following triggers can be set for monitoring and writing operations of each object function.
(1) Trigger (for display) (For GOT-A900 series only)
Set for the object that monitors device.
When the trigger is not satisfied, the object will stop device monitor or disappear.
(2) Trigger (for write)
Set for the object that writes to device.
When the trigger is not satisfied, the writing operation will be disabled or only the operable objects
will be displayed. (GOT-F900 series can disable writing operation only.)
(3) Trigger (for script execution) (For GOT-A900 series only)
Set for the script function.
When the trigger is not satisfied, the script is not executed.
Example 1: Only the numerical display functions that are monitoring the production line are
displayed.
Production start signal (line1: M11, line2: M12, line3: M13)
M11: OFF, M12: OFF, M13: OFF M11:ON, M12:OFF, M13:ON
Production volume Production volume
Line1 Line1 50
0
Line2 Line2
Line3 Line3 20
0
Production volume will not be Only the production volume of the
displayed if production line stops. line being operated will be displayed.
Example 2: Set an interlock device for a touch switch
Line operation ready signal: M10
M10: OFF M10: OFF M10: ON
Line1 control screen Line1 control screen Line1 control screen
Productive
Productive
output 0
Productive
output
0 output 0
During During
Condition Stopped Condition preparation Condition
Operation Stop Operation Stop
Operation Stop
The line is stopped Operation will not be performed Touch the operation switch to start
even if the operation switch is product line when production
touched lineoperation is ready.
5 - 35 5.5 Trigger Setting
1
1 About triggers
Triggers and actions that can be set are shown below.
OVERVIEW
(1) Triggers (for display and action) of GOT-A900 series
Trigger type Execution trigger Actions when condition is satisfied
<Display condition>
The device is monitored at the monitor sampling of the GOT. 2
Ordinary None
<Action condition>
The action set to the object can be executed at the monitor sampling of the GOT.
SPECIFICATIONS
<Display condition>
ON
When trigger is satisfied : The device is monitored at the monitor sampling of the
ON GOT.
OFF
When trigger is not satisfied : Select to check or not "Hold Display" as the display
condition setting. 3
Checked:The previous object display is retained *2.
COMMON SETTING
Not checked:The object display is erased *3.
<Action condition>
ON
OFF When trigger is satisfied : The action set to the object can be executed.
OFF When trigger is not satisfied : The previous object display is retained.
To erase the object display, set "Action when condition
fail" in the Auxiliary setting.*3 4
ON <Display condition>
Rise
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
OFF When trigger is satisfied : The device is monitored only once.
PREPARATORY
When trigger is not satisfied : The previous object display is retained.
ON To monitor the device and display the object at screen
Fall
OFF switching, set "Initial display" in the display condition.
<Display condition> 5
When trigger is satisfied : The device is monitored at each preset sampling.
COMMON SETTINGS
Sampling Sampling Setting range: 0.1 to 3600 seconds (every 100ms), 1 to
3600 seconds (every one second)
FOR OBJECTS
When trigger is not satisfied : The previous object display is retained.
<Display condition>
When trigger is satisfied : The device is monitored at the monitor sampling of the
Range Word device value
GOT. 6
When trigger is not satisfied : The previous object display is retained*2.
<Action condition>
Logical operation result When trigger is satisfied : The action set to the object can be executed. LAMP, SWITCH
Multi bit trigger *1 of ON/OFF condition of When trigger is not satisfied : The previous object display is retained *2.
the set multi bit device*1 To erase the object display, set "Action when condition
fail" in the Auxiliary setting *3.
Sampling <Display condition> 7
The device is monitored at both of the satisfied trigger (the specified device is ON or
CHARACTER DISPLAY
ON Sampling ON OFF) and each preset sampling.
OFF When trigger is satisfied : The device is monitored at both of the satisfied trigger
NUMERICAL/
(the specified device is ON or OFF) and each preset
Sampling sampling.
OFF Sampling Setting range: 0.1 to 3600 seconds (every 100ms), 1 to
ON
3600 seconds (every one second)
OFF When trigger is not satisfied : The previous object display is retained.
8
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.
ALARM
5.5 Trigger Setting 5 - 36
*1 Multi bit trigger
As trigger, 2 to 8 bit devices and its ON/OFF statuses.
Operate logical AND or logical OR based on the preset ON/OFF status of the multi bit device.
Example: When M10, M11 and M12 are used as the display condition
Area where trigger is satisfied : Trigger satisfied : Trigger not satisfied
Operation result
Display condition M10 is ON M11 is OFF M12 is ON
Logical AND Logical OR
OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF
Upper: ON ON OFF
ON/OFF status
Lower: OFF OFF ON
Satisfied/Not satisfied
ON OFF ON
OFF ON ON
ON ON ON
5 - 37 5.5 Trigger Setting
*2 Trigger and display on GOT 1
When the trigger is not satisfied, GOT does not monitor.
If the trigger is satisfied once and then unsatisfied, the previous display is held.
Example: Condition: range (D100: 50 to 100) Display: D500 is numerically displayed
OVERVIEW
Condition D100 0
2
Monitor D500 300 D500 0
As the trigger is not satisfied, the GOT does not monitor.
SPECIFICATIONS
Condition D100 60
Monitor D500 300 D500 300
As the trigger is satisfied, the GOT monitors.
3
COMMON SETTING
Condition D100 60
Monitor D500 340 D500 340
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Condition D100 120
Monitor D500 400 D500 340 As the trigger turns unsatisfied, the GOT holds the previous
display.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
*3 Object placed into shape
The object shape will remain when the object is erased.
Trigger enabled Trigger not enabled
Object
6
Shape frame 1500
The shape remains
LAMP, SWITCH
(2) GOT-F900 Series
Trigger type Execution trigger Actions when trigger is satisfied
<Trigger>
7
Ordinary None
CHARACTER DISPLAY
The action set for object can always be executed.
ON
NUMERICAL/
ON <Trigger>
OFF When the trigger is satisfied, the actions set for the object can be executed.
When the trigger is not satisfied, the actions set for the object cannot be executed.
ON
OFF ( Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings)
OFF
8
ALARM
5.5 Trigger Setting 5 - 38
(3) Triggers for script execution (GOT-A900 series only)
Trigger type Execution trigger Actions when condition is satisfied
Ordinary Executed always
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Rise
OFF
ON <Trigger for executing script>
Fall When condition is satisfied: The script is executed.
OFF
When condition is not satisfied: The script is not executed.
Sampling Sampling
Sampling
ON sampling ON
OFF
Sampling
OFF sampling ON
OFF
5 - 39 5.5 Trigger Setting
1
2 Objects that support trigger condition
The object types that can be set by a trigger are listed below.
The trigger type varies according to object types.
OVERVIEW
(1) GOT-A900 Series
Trigger type
2
ON
SPECIFICATIONS
Object type
Multi Bit Sampling/
Ordinary ON/OFF Rise/Fall Sampling Range
trigger OFF
Sampling
Numerical display
Data list
ASCII display
3
Comment display
COMMON SETTING
Alarm list
(User alarm) display
Parts display
Parts movement
Line graph
Bar graph 4
Statistics graph
Level
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Trend graph
Scatter graph
Line graph*4
Alarm list (User alarm)*5
Touch switch
5
Numerical input
COMMON SETTINGS
ASCII input
FOR OBJECTS
*4 [Locus] function has been set.
*5 [Store Memory] function has been set using alarm list (user alarm) display function.
(2) GOT-F900 Series 6
Trigger type
ON LAMP, SWITCH
Object type
Multi bit Sampling/
Ordinary ON/OFF Rise/Fall Sampling Range
trigger OFF
Sampling
Touch switch
Numerical input
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
ASCII input
(3) Script execution trigger
NUMERICAL/
Trigger type
Object type
ON sampling/
Ordinary ON/OFF Rise/Fall Sampling
OFF sampling 8
Script function
ALARM
5.5 Trigger Setting 5 - 40
5.5.1 Arrangement and settings
Set the trigger for each object function.
Refer to the arrangement and setting of the object.
5.5.2 Setting items
This section explains the setting items of trigger with the example of numerical display.
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the trigger for displaying/operating the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, the cycle is set in second unit (1 to 3600s).
Trigger Type
Ordinary Sampling Range ON
OFF Rise Fall Bit trigger
When [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall] or [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], click on the
Device button to set the bit/word device range for the trigger. (This is only valid when selecting
Trigger Device
the range for word device.)
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Set the type of word device that has been set when [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type].
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type of word device.
Word Signed BIN: Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Range
Trigger Data Type Unsigned BIN : Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Real : Treats the word device value as a floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
Range*1 Click Range button to set the conditional expression of word device range.
(Continued to next page)
5 - 41 5.5 Trigger Setting
5.5.1 Arrangement and settings
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
1
Items Description A F
Select number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be set as the trigger when [Bit trigger] has been selected in
Multi Bit
OVERVIEW
Bit Number*2 [Trigger Type].
Trigger
After selecting, click on the Setting button to set the bit device and execution trigger.
Check this item to monitor and display device even if the initial trigger of screen switch is not
satisfied when [Rise] or [Fall] has been selected in [Trigger Type]. 2
Initial display
Monitor and display
SPECIFICATIONS
Base screen 2 device when trigger
is not satisfied.
D10 125
Initial Display Base screen 1
Switch to base
screen 2
No initial display
Not display when
3
Base screen 2 trigger is not satisfied.
COMMON SETTING
D10
Check this item to hold the object display if the trigger is not satisfied when [ON] or [OFF] is
selected in [Trigger Type].
Hold display 4
Hold display state when
D10 125 the display conditon
OBJECT SETTING
is satisfied.
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Hold Display
D10 125
Display condition Not hold display
is not satisfied
Clear it as the display
D10
condition is not satisfied. 5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
*1 Edit range dialog box settings
LAMP, SWITCH
7
Items Description A F
CHARACTER DISPLAY
[ ] Button Click on this button to set the fixed value for each term in [Input Each term (A-C)]
NUMERICAL/
Set the comparison operator of range expression.
< : Left value is smaller than right value
(Comparison operator) == : Left value is equal to right value
<= : Left value is smaller than or equal to right value
!= : Left value is not equal to right value 8
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
5.5 Trigger Setting 5 - 42
5.5.2 Setting items
Items Description A F
Input Each Enter Updates the input fixed value on the range expression.
Term
(A-C) Hex/Dec/Oct Select the data type for the numeric value.
*2 Multi bit trigger dialogue box settings
Items Description A F
Device The devices preset as multi bit trigger are listed.
This button will be displayed by clicking on the device bar.
Dev Click on the Dev button to set the bit device used as trigger.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
ON/OFF Select whether ON or OFF status of bit device will be set as the trigger condition.
Select the definition for multi bit trigger condition.
AND : If all triggers that are specified based on the bit device ON/OFF
Trigger statuses are satisfied, the multi bit trigger is set.
OR : If any of the triggers specified based on the bit device ON/OFF
statuses are satisfied, the multi bit trigger is set.
Select the method of setting device.
Continuous : Set the specified number of devices continuously starting from the set
Device
device automatically.
Random : Randomly set the specified number of devices.
5.5.3 Precautions
1 Object of which trigger has been set to sampling
Up to 100 objects can be set on one screen, of which the trigger type was been set to "Sampling".
Therefore, any objects form 101 onwards will not operate on the screen.
5 - 43 5.5 Trigger Setting
5.5.3 Precautions
1
2 Setting of status observation function
(1) When the object display on GOT screen is delayed
When excessive number of devices set as trigger is arranged, or the cycle of monitoring device is
OVERVIEW
short, object display on the screen will be delayed.
In this case, reduce the number of devices set as trigger or set the cycle of monitoring device
longer. 2
(2) When GOT does not monitor according to the setting of observation cycle (E.g. data sampling
SPECIFICATIONS
cannot be operated normally as timing is delayed)
In some cases, GOT may not normally monitor the object for which offset function is specified or
the screen displayed as superimpose window screen according to the setting of status observation.
(E.g. data sampling cannot be operated normally as timing is delayed.)
In this case, set the observation cycle to [Ordinary].
3
COMMON SETTING
(3) Cycle of trigger device
Make the settings in order that the trigger device will turn ON/OFF more frequently than the
observation cycle.
4
3 Setting of trigger for line graph
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
When many devices are monitored in line graph form, and the trigger is set to [Ordinary], the object
PREPARATORY
processing may be delayed.
In this case, change the trigger type to [Sampling] and adjust the sampling cycle to 2 seconds or longer.
5
4 Setting of trigger for each object
COMMON SETTINGS
(1) Trigger type and trigger device
FOR OBJECTS
If trigger types are set while some or all of trigger devices are not set, the object operates by the
default trigger type.
(2) When [Range] is selected in [Trigger] 6
If Real is selected as the data type when [Range] has been set as trigger for each object, GOT
reads decimal data by rounding it off. In case that GOT may read decimal data, select the data type
LAMP, SWITCH
for decimal from GT Designer2
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.5 Trigger Setting 5 - 44
5.5.3 Precautions
5.6 Data Operation Function
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
If data operation function has been set, each object executes the operations set in [Data operation] the pre-
set word device values, and monitors based on the results.
Example: Data operation is used in numerical display function
Monitored device: D101
D100 5000 Expected productive output
D101 1000 Completed productive output
Production
complete 20% Expression operation
rate
D101D100100
Display the complete rate
corresponding to expectation
1 Bit operation
This function executes operation of the word device value in bit unit.
(1) Bit mask (for GOT-A900 only)
Executes a logical operation of the word device value by the preset pattern value.
(a) Logical AND (AND)
The operation result is "1" when the corresponding bits of both the device value and pattern
value are "1".
The operation result is "0" in other cases.
(b) Logical OR (OR)
The operation result is "0" when the corresponding bits of both device value and pattern value
are "0".
The operation result is "1" in other cases.
(c) Exclusive logic XOR (XOR)
The operation result is "0" when the corresponding bits of device value and pattern value are
equivalent; "1" when not equivalent.
Example: When logical AND (AND) is operated
Monitor b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
device value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
AND
Pattern value b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
(Hexadecimal) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Operation result
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
5 - 45 5.6 Data Operation Function
(2) Bit shift (for GOT-A900 series only)
1
Shifts the word device value to the right or left in bit unit to execute an operation on the value.
(It becomes arithmetic shift when it comes to the signed monitor format of device.)
OVERVIEW
Example: Shift right for 4 bits
(a) Signed
Monitor
Device value
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
2
Shift to right
SPECIFICATIONS
by 4 bits
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Operation result
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
(b) Unsigned
Monitor b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 3
Device value 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
COMMON SETTING
Shift to right
by 4 bits
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Operation result
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
2 Data operation
4
Executes the preset data operation on the word device value.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(1) In the case of GOT-A900 series
Select and set the data operation format from the 9 types.
The operation is executed based on the following conditions:
Example: 5
$$($W) * D10
COMMON SETTINGS
Set the operation value to $$, $W
FOR OBJECTS
Fixed value : Directly set by user.
Value of maximum 32 digits
Variable : Minus and decimal point included) can be set.
Word device set by user in data operation function.
Operator
6
* (Multiplication), / (Division), + (Addition), - (Subtraction), % (Remainder)
LAMP, SWITCH
$$ : Indicates the device value monitored by the object.
$W : Indicates the input value of numerical input function.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.6 Data Operation Function 5 - 46
(2) In the case of GOT-F900 series
The data operation is executed using a fixed format.
Example:
Offset + (( $$ * gain1) / gain2
Divided value.
Directly set by user.
Operators are all fixed.
Multiplied value.
Directly set by user.
$$ : Indicates the device value monitored by the object.
SW : Indicates the input value of numerical input function.
Added value.
Directly set by user.
Data operation function is applicable to the following objects. (GOT F900 series, only the Numeric Display
and Numeric Input functions are available)
Numerical display Numerical input *1 Data list display
Comment display Parts display Parts movement
Lamp Panel meter Level
Trend graph Line graph Bar graph
Statistics graph Scatter graph Report
*1 If bit mask operation is used for numerical input function, only logical (AND) is
applicable. Logical add (OR) and exclusive logical add (XOR) are not applicable.
3 Procedure for operation processing (GOT-A900 series only)
The operation processing for device monitoring and numerical inputting is shown as follows.
(1) When monitoring device
1 Bit mask
2 Bit shift
3 Data operation processing
(2) When using numerical input function
Write the value after operation processing to word device
Input numeric value
*1
Data operatio Bit shift Bit mask
prooessing (AND)
12345
*1 Bit mask
Data operatio Bit shift
prooessing (AND)
Display the value
after data operation
processing. Read the value after operation processing from word device
*1: Other data operations can be set for write destination device during monitoring and writing.
5 - 47 5.6 Data Operation Function
1
<Write the value after operation processing to word device>
1 Data operation processing
The input value by the preset operation expression for writing device value is calculated.
OVERVIEW
2 Bit shift
Shifts the input value in the set direction (right / left)
2
3 Bit mask
Executes bit mask (logical AND) on the input value by the preset value.
SPECIFICATIONS
To write the bit and mask the remaining, carry out the following.
[Operation data]
(Write value) = {(Input value) AND (Pattern value)} OR {(Current value) AND (Reverse pattern value)}
User-set value Value created for GOT operation
Example: Writing 12H to the lower two digits of the current value ABCDH
3
Input value (value input by user) : 0012H
COMMON SETTING
Current value (value before write) : ABCDH
Pattern value (value set by user) : 00FFH
Reverse pattern value (value created for GOT operation) : FF00H
4
(Input value) AND (Pattern value) (Current value) AND (Reverse pattern value)
0012 H AND 00FF H ABCD H AND FF00 H
0012 H AB00 H
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
{ (Input value) AND (Pattern value) } OR { (Current value) AND (Reverse pattern value) }
0012 H OR AB00 H
5
Write value
COMMON SETTINGS
AB12 H
FOR OBJECTS
<Read the word device value after operation processing>
4 Bit mask
Executes bit mask (logical (AND) of the device value by the preset pattern value.
6
5 Bit shift
Shifts the device value in the reverse direction.
LAMP, SWITCH
6 Data operation processing
Calculates and displays the written device value by the preset operation expression for reading
device value.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
5.6.1 Arrangement and settings
NUMERICAL/
Data operation function is set for each arranged object function.
For the details, refer to the arrangement and setting of the object.
8
ALARM
5.6 Data Operation Function 5 - 48
5.6.1 Arrangement and settings
5.6.2 Setting items
This section explains the setting items for data operation function with the example of numerical input func-
tion.
1 GOT-A900 series
(Example: When setting GOT-A900 series numerical input function )
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
Select the bit mask type and set the mask pattern value in hexadecimal format.
AND : Executes logical product.
Bit Mask
OR : Executes logical add.
Bit XOR : Executes exclusive logical add.
Opera- Mask Pattern : At data length of 16 bits (0 to FFFF), at 32 bits (0 to FFFFFFFF)
tion Check this item to enable the bit shift operation (for monitoring/writing).
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift [Shift Number].
Bit Shift Left : Shift left
Right : Shift right
Shift Number : At data length of 16 bits (1 to 15), at 32 bits (1 to 31)
Set the data operation for writing to device and for monitoring each.
Data Operation
Switch by Monitor and Write buttons.
Select the data operation format from the following 4 patterns.
When not executing operation by data operation, check this item.
Monitor/ When executing operation by monitor device value ($$) and one
type of constant, select this item.After the selection, set the
Write *1 constant (decimal).
When setting other than above expressions i.e., user-setting
conditional expression.
Select "Others" to set the conditional expression.
After selecting, click on Exp button to display "Edit Data Expression "
dialog box. Set the conditional expression on that dialog box.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
5 - 49 5.6 Data Operation Function
5.6.2 Setting items
*1 Edit data expression dialog box 1
Set the expression for data operation.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Items Description A F
COMMON SETTING
Set the operation expression format.
A B
Fixed value,variable (represented as "$$", "SW" , respectively;
any word device set for operation)
Style Operator
Select from the following 9 types.
1) A 4) (A B) C 7) ((A B) C) (D E) 4
2) A B 5) A ((B C) D) 8) (A B) ((C D) E)
3) A (B C) 6) A (B (C D)) 9) ((A B) (C D)) E
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] Click buttons A to E to set fixed value and variable for each item in [Input f Each Term (A-E)].
Select the operator for operation expression.
+: Add *: Multiply %: Remainder
-: Subtract /: Divide
Operator
% (Remainder operator) 5
The left value is divided by the right value and the remainder the result.
COMMON SETTINGS
Example) 100 % 3 = 1 (100 / 3 = 33 remainder is 1)
FOR OBJECTS
Set each item for data operation.
Fixed value : Select this item when using fixed value to execute the
operation.
After selecting, input the value and click on the Enter button.
Select the data type for the value by Hex , Dec and Oct
6
buttons.
Input Each Term (A-E) $$, $W (Device value) : Select this item to execute the operation of the word device
value that has been set as monitor and write destination. LAMP, SWITCH
Be sure to set one.
Other device : Select this item to execute the operation of the word device
value.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting) 7
Data type is the same as the monitor device ($$ and $W).
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.6 Data Operation Function 5 - 50
5.6.2 Setting items
2 GOT-F900 series
Data Operation
(Example: When setting GOT-F900 series numerical input function)
Basic Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Gain1 Set the multiplication value for monitor device
Gain2 Set the division value for monitor device
Offset Set the addition value for monitor device
5.6.3 Precautions
This section provides precautions for using data operation function.
1 Precautions in using the GOT-F900.
(1) Bit operation (bit mask and bit shift) cannot be executed in GOT-F900 series.
Only data operation is available.
(2) Data operation of "Gain1", "Gain2" and "Offset" cannot be executed in the GOT-F900 series if
"Real" is set in "Format" on the "Basic" tab.
5 - 51 5.6 Data Operation Function
5.6.3 Precautions
5.7 Offset Function 1
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
OVERVIEW
This function enables switching and monitoring plural devices by setting a single device in each object
function. (In the alarm list function, plural comments can be switched and displayed by setting a single
device.)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Switching and monitoring plural device statuses by a single device
The value set in the device using the offset function (hereinafter referred to as offset device) is added to
the device set in each object function.
3
Device set in each object function D200, D201, D202
Offset device Monitor device
value
COMMON SETTING
D200
Offset device D100 0 D201
D202
D210
10 D211
D212
4
D211
11
OBJECT SETTING
D212
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
D213
Sw itch the monitor device according to the
value stored in offset device.
This function is available for the following objects. 5
Numerical display Numerical input Data list ASCII input
COMMON SETTINGS
ASCII display Comment display Parts display Parts movement
FOR OBJECTS
Lamp Panel meter Level Trend graph
Line graph Bar graph Statistics graph Scatter graph
Touch switch* Script Status Observation Function
* The offset device value is added to the device set in the action setting.
6
Example: LAMP, SWITCH
Switch and monitor plural line statuses with a single numerical display function.
Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
Line: Numerical input function Device D100
Plan: Numerical display function Device D200 D100 3 7
Offset device D100
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Result: Numerical display function Device D210 D201 500
Offset device D100 D202 800
D203 650
NUMERICAL/
Line 1 Write 3 to offset Line 3
D211 326
device (D100) in
Plan 500 numerical input Plan 650 D212 277
Result 326 function Result 442 D213 442
Plan to monitor D201 Plan to monitor D203.
8
(D200+1=D201) (D200+3=D203)
Result is to monitor D211 Result is to monitor D213.
(D210+1=D211) (D210+3=D213)
ALARM
5.7 Offset Function 5 - 52
2 Switch and display plural comments by a single device (The alarm list (user alarm))
The offset device value is added to the comment set in the alarm list function.
In a normal alarm list, it needs to set bit devices for the number of displayed comments. However, by
using the offset function, plural comments can be switched and displayed by a single device.
(1) Offset of display setting
The offset device value is added to the number of the comment to be displayed.
Head comment No. :1
Comment No. offset : D200
Alarm Alarm
Line A has stopped Line B has stopped.
Offset device value
changes to 1.
D200 0 D200 1
Display comment1 in alarm occurrence. Display comment2 in alarm occurren
(Head comment No.1 + 0 = 1) (Head comment No.1 + 1 = 2)
(2) Offset of detailed display setting
The offset device value is added to the numbers of comment (comment window), window screen
and base screen to be displayed as details.
Detailed display : Comment window
Detailed No. of alarm device : 1
Detailed No. offset : D200
Alarm Alarm
Line A has stopped. Line B has stopped.
Offset device value
Please check changes to 1. Please check
the power Detail whether there Detail
supply. are products.
D200 0 D200 1
Detailed display displays comment1. Detailed display displays comment2.
(Detailed No.1 + 0 = 1) (Detailed No.1 + 1 = 2)
When executing offset of detailed display setting
When executing offset of detailed display setting, the comment for detailed display
will change. The message of alarm list is not relevant.
To relate the message to the comment, adjust comment and the message displayed
by using offset of display setting.
5 - 53 5.7 Offset Function
5.7.1 Arrangement and settings 1
The offset function is to arrange and set each object function.
Refer to the arrangement and setting of the objects.
OVERVIEW
5.7.2 Setting items
2
The offset function is set in each object function.
Refer to the setting items of the corresponding objects.
SPECIFICATIONS
5.7.3 Precautions
Precautions for using the offset function are as follows.
3
1 Precautions for drawing
COMMON SETTING
(1) When monitoring the trigger device in sampling by the status observation function
When offsetting the trigger device in a constant sampling, set the offset sampling longer than the
monitor sampling.
Example: Changing cycle (7 s) of offset device value > Status observation function sampling (5 s)
4
(2) Abnormal operation of the status observation cycle setting (e.g. uncollected data by affecting the
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
timing shift)
The condition device for the status observation has the delays in monitor screen set an offset
function-specified object. Do not set an offset function-specified object on the monitor screen at
using the status observation.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
(3) Device setting
FOR OBJECTS
(a) The offset function is not available for the bit device word specification.
(b) For the word device bit specification, the device No. is offset.
Example:
Device that has been set in each object D200.b2 6
Offset device Monitor device
value
0 D200.b2 LAMP, SWITCH
Offset device D100
10 D210.b2
11 D211.b2
Offset the device No. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.7 Offset Function 5 - 54
5.7.1 Arrangement and settings
2 Precautions for use
(1) Offset value change
The monitor device will be read as the offset value changes; so do not change the offset value
frequently.
If the offset value is changed frequently, the monitor speed will become low.
(2) When the offset device No. exceeds the PLC word range trigger
When the offset device No. exceeds the PLC device range, monitoring and writing will not be
executed. Error will be displayed in alarm list (system alarm), if it is set in advance.
When monitoring plural devices with a single graph, the display method is determined by the
setting method of monitored device.
(a) Trend graph, line graph, bar graph and statistics graph
When setting the device consecutively: Holds the previous display.
When setting the device at random : Holds the previous display only when the displaying
exceeds word range trigger.
For the display other than the above, the offset device
will be monitored.
(b) Scatter graph
When setting the device consecutively: Holds the previous display.
When setting the device at random : Holds the previous display.
5 - 55 5.7 Offset Function
5.7.3 Precautions
5.8 Security Function 1
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
OVERVIEW
This function determines which screen is displayed depending on the security level.
The security level can be changed by inputting the password corresponding to each level.
The security level (0 to 15) can be set for each screen and object.
2
The objects that are settable by the security level depend on the GOT model type used.
SPECIFICATIONS
GOT-A900 series: Base screen, window screen, each object function
GOT-F900 series: Base screen, each utility screen
Low The authority of security level High 3
COMMON SETTING
Security level 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Security level is not set.
1 Example (when using GOT-A900 series) 4
Change the contents that can be operated by each user in the screen for setting plural objects.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Used objects and security levels
Display product volume
150 (security level: 4)
Display product volume
Line 1 control screen St. condition(Window screen 2)
5
Production volume
(security level: 4)
150
Mt. Switch to Mt. screen
(base screen 10)(security level: 4)
COMMON SETTINGS
St. Mt.
Display passowrd input screen
FOR OBJECTS
Password Password
(security level: 0)
Screen example for each security level
Base secreen 1
Line 1 control screen
Screen design example Mt.screen
6
Production volume
Production volume
150
Password
Base secreen 1 Window secreen 2 Base secreen 10
(Security level: 1) (Security level: 8) (Security level: 15) LAMP, SWITCH
: Enabled : Not enabled.
User's Production volume
Maintenance
screen
User security 150 St. Mt. Password 7
level
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Operator 4
NUMERICAL/
Supervisor 8
8
Maintenance
15
staff
Others 0
ALARM
5.8 Security Function 5 - 56
(1) Operation example
(a) Set the security function in the object function.
The following example shows the object display and operation changed from 0 to 4 of the
security level.
Line 1 control screen Line 1 control screen
Production volume Production volume
150
St. Mt.
Password Password
Security level: 0 Security level: 4
Security level
Screen Operation contents
status
Line 1 control screen
The object function on the screen cannot be used, because
Production volume
the security level is in a low status
Level 0 Base screen 1 (security level 0)
Each object function (security level 4)
Password
Base screen 1
Display secunity
password screen
Line 1 control screen
In order to change the security level, display the password
Production volume
screen by the touch switch.
Level 0 ( Change method of the security level)
Password
1
Base screen 1
Input the password
of security level 4
Input the password, and change the security level into 4.
Level 0
Level 4 1
Password screen 1
Numerlc value
display
Line 1 control screen
Level 4 Production volume Display the object function corresponding to security level 4.
150
St. Mt.
Password
Base screen 1 Display touch switch
5 - 57 5.8 Security Function
1
Remark (1) The security level set in the numerical input, the ASCII input and the touch switch.
2 types of security levels (for input and display) can be set in the numerical input,
the ASCII input and the touch switch.
OVERVIEW
Example: When the security level is set in the numerical input.
Production [Security level 5]
volume 600
Production 600 Numeric value can be 2
volume displayed only.
Security level
Numeric value cannot be input.
For display: 5 For input:10
SPECIFICATIONS
[Security level 10]
Production 600 The input cursor is displayed in
volume order numeric value can be input.
(2) The movement of the input cursor when setting the security function 3
The cursor will move to the currently available numerical input box or ASCII input
box, when setting security level respectively in plural numerical input and ASCII
COMMON SETTING
input.
Example: Input numeric value when the base screen security level is "2".
1500 Security level: 2 Cursor skips the numerical input
150 Security level: 8 box with security level set as 8. 4
200 Security level: 2
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(b) Window screen
The following example shows the object display and operation changed from 4 to 8 of the
5
security level.
COMMON SETTINGS
Line 1 control screen screen
Production volume
FOR OBJECTS
Production volume me
150 150
St. Mt. St. Mt.
Password Password 6
Security level: 4 Security level: 8
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.8 Security Function 5 - 58
Security level
Screen Operation contents
status
Line 1 control screen
Production volume
Base screen 1 (security level 4)
150
Level 4
St. Mt.
Window screen 2 (security level 8)
2 ssword
Base screen 1 Display window screen
through operating touch
switch.
Line 1 control screen
Production volume
Level 4 150 Do not display the window screen.
St. Mt..
Password
Base screen 1
Display security
password screen
Line 1 control screen
Production volume
In order to change security level, display the password
150 screen by touch switch.
Level 4
St. Mt. ( Change method of the security level)
Password
2
Base screen 1 Input the password
with 8 or higher
security level.
Level 4 Input the password, and change the security level into 8 or
higher.
Level 8
2
Password screen
screen
Production volume
n
150
Level 8 Display a window screen.
St. Mt.
Password
Window screen 2
5 - 59 5.8 Security Function
(c) Switching the base screen 1
The following example shows the object display and operation changed from 8 to 15 of the
security level.
OVERVIEW
Line 1 control screen Maintenance screen
Production volume
Power
Circuit
supply
150
St. Mt. Oper Stop
2
Password Password
SPECIFICATIONS
Security level: 8 Security level: 15
Security level
Screen Operation contents
status
3
Line 1 control screen Base screen 1 (security level 8)
COMMON SETTING
Production volume
Level 8 150
Base screen 10 (security level 15)
St. Mt.
4
Password
3
Base screen 1 Switch screen through
operating touch switch
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Level 8
Display the password screen automatically.
Input the password, and change the security level into 15.
Level 15
3
5
COMMON SETTINGS
Password screen Input the password
FOR OBJECTS
of security level 15.
Maintenance screen
Power
Circuit
Level 15 Switch to base screen 10
6
supply
Oper Stop
Password
LAMP, SWITCH
Base screen 10
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.8 Security Function 5 - 60
2 Change method of the security level
In order to change the security level, the password of each security level needs to be input on the
password screen.
(1) In the case of GOT-A900 series
Either of the following methods is available to display the password screen.
(a) Use the touch switch for switching to the password screen. (Extension: Password)
(b) Display the GOT utility, and touch [Password]
The following indicates how to change the security level.
1 Display the password screen.
2 Input the password of the security level to be changed and touch (GOT-A900 series)/
ENT (GOT-F900 series)
To close the password screen, touch at the top-left of the password display window.
Changing the security level from the PLC CPU (GOT-A900 series only)
The level of security is stored in the device storing "security level status" (Level
device)
( Section 3.4 Password Setting)
Current security level can be changed by directly changing the level device value
from the PLC CPU.
Security level "1" in Level device
Line control
current situation Production
Vol. volume D100
"1" Status Change
Sta.
into D100 "10"
Security level "10" in Line control
current situation 500
Oper.
Sta.
Change the display according to the changed security level.
When the value stored in the level device is set to below the security level for the
base screen currently displayed, a screen for changing security levels is displayed.
For returning to the previous screen, input the password for the set security level or
higher.
5 - 61 5.8 Security Function
(2) In the case of GOT-F900 series
1
Switching to the password input screen or canceling the security password (Level 0), can be done
by creating touch switches on the base screen and setting key codes to each touch switch.
Security password input screen : Key code "FF68"
OVERVIEW
Security password cancellation (level 0): Key code "FF69"
It is recommended to arrange the touch switches for the security password input and cancellation
on the same screen. 2
(a) Automatic display setting of the security password input screen.
When switching to the screen with a higher security level, the security password input screen
SPECIFICATIONS
can be displayed.
When displaying the security password input screen, it is necessary to turn ON the read device
system signal 1 (b8) of the system information except in the F920GOT-K.
In the F920GOT-K, the security password input screen is automatically displayed.
Use the ten keys to input the password. 3
(b) Password setting for the security level 15 (essential)
COMMON SETTING
If at least one security password is set, utility screens (system screens) are set to the level 15.
Accordingly, system screens cannot be displayed if the password is not set for the level 15.
Make sure to set the password for the level 15.
The level of a utility (system screen) can be changed by right-clicking a system screen whose
level is to be changed in the project work space, selecting the property, then selecting a 4
desired level.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
To undo temporarily-raised security level
The security level that is increased temporarily for maintenance and inspection
tasks can be restored back to its original state easily.
(a) Inform the users of the normal security level password to restore the security 5
level through the normal password input operation.
COMMON SETTINGS
(b) Create the touch switch for restoring the security level to normal level.
FOR OBJECTS
Example: When changing the security level to "0" with the touch switch.
Level device :D30
Touch switch : Write "0" into level device D30
Level device
6
Control menu
D30 "15"
Line 1 All lines
Line 2 Change
Change into
LAMP, SWITCH
Write "1" into D30 "0"
level device
Security level: 15 D30 15
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Control menu
Line 1
Line 2
NUMERICAL/
Security level: 0 D30 0
Restore to the display of security level 0.
8
ALARM
5.8 Security Function 5 - 62
5.8.1 Security function setting
The following setting is needed when using the security function.
1 Setting the password for the security function
Set its password and the device (level device) where each security level is to be stored.
Section 3.4 Password Setting
2 Setting the security level of each screen/object
Set security level in the screen (using security function) and object function.
(1) Object function (GOT-A900 series only)
Set the security levels in the setting dialogue box for each object function.
(2) Screen
1 In the workspace (the project tab), select the screen whose security function is to be set, and
right click the mouse to select [Property] in the menu.
5 - 63 5.8 Security Function
5.8.1 Security function setting
2 Display the Screen Property dialogue box.
1
Set the security level (that is set to the screen) in Security of the basic tab.
OVERVIEW
2
Set security level
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
5.8.2 Precautions
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
1 Making a note of the password
The already registered password cannot be checked later. Therefore, always make a note of the 5
password.
COMMON SETTINGS
If the password is forgotten, a security level change or security level password change/deletion on GT
Designer2 cannot be made, and the project data must be recreated. (Re-setting of only the password
FOR OBJECTS
cannot be done.)
2 Precautions for using GOT-F900 series
6
(1) When GOT power supply is OFF
When GOT power supply is OFF, the security level will be canceled (level 0).
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
5.8 Security Function 5 - 64
5.8.2 Precautions
6. LAMP, SWITCH
6.1 Lamp Display
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
1 Bit lamp ( Section 6.1.2 Setting items of bit lamp)
This function turns ON/OFF the lamp according to the ON/OFF status of the bit device.
X10 = ON X10 = OFF
Run Stop
ON OFF
2 Word lamp ( Section 6.1.3 Setting items of word lamp (for GOT-A900 series
only))
This function enables changing lamp color according to the word device value.
(GOT-A900 series only)
D100 = 0 D100 = 1 to 99 D100 = over 100
Stop Run Error
OFF ON Flicker
3 Bit lamp area ( Section 6.1.4 Setting items of bit lamp area (for GOT-F900
series only))
This function enables exchange of two colors used within the specified range according to the ON/OFF
status of the bit device.
(GOT-F900 series only)
M100 = OFF M100 = ON
6-1 6.1 Lamp Display
1
4 Screen lamp ( Section 6.1.5 Setting items of screen lamp (for GOT-F900
series only))
This function enables overlapping of the specified screen No. according to the ON status of the bit
OVERVIEW
device. (GOT-F900 series only)
M100 = OFF M100 = ON
SPECIFICATIONS
Screen not overlapped Screen overlapped
5 External lamp ( Section 6.1.6 Setting items of external lamp (for GOT-F900
series only)) 3
This function enables control of the operation switch lamps for GOT-F900 series (F930GOT-K, F94*
COMMON SETTING
handy GOT only) according to the ON/OFF status of the bit device.
Assign the operation switch and function switch lamp to bit devices. (GOT-F900 series only)
<In the case of handy GOT>
M200 = OFF M200 = ON
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Lamp ON
5
COMMON SETTINGS
6.1.1 Arrangement and settings
FOR OBJECTS
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
Click on [Bit Lamp]/ [Word Lamp]/ [Bit Lamp Area]/ [Screen Lamp]/ [External 6
Lamp].
Select [Object] [Lamp] [Bit Lamp]/[Word Lamp]/[Bit Lamp Area]/[Screen Lamp]/[External
LAMP, SWITCH
Lamp] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the lamp is to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.
For the screen lamp and external lamp, the arrangement is not required.) 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
3 Double click on the arranged lamp to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with reference to
the following explanation.
NUMERICAL/
(For the screen lamp and external lamp, the dialog box is not displayed.)
Easier setting method 8
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
4
ALARM
6.1 Lamp Display 6-2
6.1.1 Arrangement and settings
6.1.2 Setting items of bit lamp
1 Basic tab
Set the device to be monitored and the lamp figure (shape/color) to be displayed when the device is
ON/OFF.
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
Basic Text Extended
Items Description A F
Set the device to be monitored.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
ON Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns ON.
OFF Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns OFF.
Set a Lamp Figure.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library shapes can be
selected. ( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame Select the color of the lamp shape.
Lamp Select the color of the lamp figure.
Select the pattern and background color of the lamp figure.
Display BackGround
The selected pattern in the lamp color is displayed on the background color.
Style
Pattern + Lamp
Example: Background :
Pattern
Pattern :
Lamp :
Background
Select the blinking pattern of the Lamp.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
6-3 6.1 Lamp Display
6.1.2 Setting items of bit lamp
1
2 Text tab
Set the text to be displayed at the center or on the top, bottom, right or left of the lamp.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Basic Text Extended
4
Items Items Description A F
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
ON Click on this item to set the text to be displayed when the device turns ON.
PREPARATORY
OFF Click on this item to set the text to be displayed when the device turns OFF.
Used to copy the set attribute.
Copy OFF ON / Copy OFF ON :The "OFF" attribute is copied to the "ON" attribute.
Copy ON OFF Copy ON OFF :The "ON" attribute is copied to the "OFF" attribute.
5
The contents to be copied differ depending on the selected item.
COMMON SETTINGS
All Settings Copies all text attributes.
FOR OBJECTS
Text Only Copies only text.
Text Select the color of text to be displayed.
Style
Select the view format of the text 6
(Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised).
Regular Bold Solid Raised
Solid Select the solid color when [Solid] or [Raised] is set in [Style]
LAMP, SWITCH
Select the size (X Y) of the text that is displayed to the right, left, top or bottom of the object.
GOT-A900 series: GOT-F900 series:
Size
A 1 to 8 A 0.5 to 4
1 to 8 1 to 8 7
Check this item when using high quality font to display the text.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Use High Quality Font
(Only when display size X, Y is set to any of 2, 4, 6 or 8.)
NUMERICAL/
T
Select the position where the text is to be displayed on the object.
Select Position to Edit Text L C R
(Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right)
B
Horizontal Alignment Select the horizontal position of the text.
8
Vertical Alignment Select the vertical position of the text.
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
6.1 Lamp Display 6-4
6.1.2 Setting items of bit lamp
Basic Text Extended
Items Description A F
Input the text to be displayed. (Up to 32 characters)
Text Input Area Press the Enter key to input a new line of the end of the first line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)
Text
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text Offset to frame
Offset to Frame
and object shape, i.e., frame. (Up to 100 dots)
3 Extended tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set the security level and offset value.
Check "Extended" at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
Basic Text Extended
Items Description A F
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
6-5 6.1 Lamp Display
6.1.2 Setting items of bit lamp
6.1.3 Setting items of word lamp (for GOT-A900 series only) 1
1 Basic tab
OVERVIEW
Set the lamp figure (shape/color) corresponding to the device to be monitored or monitor device value.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Basic Text Extended Data Operation
Items Description A F
Set the device to be monitored.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
5
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
COMMON SETTINGS
State *1 Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
FOR OBJECTS
New State Creates a new state.
Delete State Deletes a specified state.
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state. 6
Up/Down Changes the priority of the current state.
Displays the list of preset states. LAMP, SWITCH
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Set the condition by which the display attribute is changed.
When a word device value is taken as a condition, click on Exp to enter the conditional expression
Exp
in the dialog box for editing the display range.
( Section 5.4 State Setting)
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Display Style Set the display attribute for the lamp.
Set a lamp figure.
NUMERICAL/
By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library shapes can be
Shape
selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame Select the frame color of the lamp figure. 8
Lamp Select the color of the lamp figure.
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
6.1 Lamp Display 6-6
6.1.3 Setting items of word lamp (for GOT-A900 series only)
Basic Text Extended Data Operation
Items Description A F
State *1 Select the pattern and background color of the lamp figure.
Background
The selected pattern in the lamp color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Lamp
Example: Background :
Pattern
Pattern :
Lamp :
Background
Select the blinking pattern of the Lamp.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
For details of *1, refer to the following.
6-7 6.1 Lamp Display
6.1.3 Setting items of word lamp (for GOT-A900 series only)
*1 State 1
For details of states, refer to the following.
Section 5.4 State Setting
OVERVIEW
(1) When conditions are overlapped
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Monitor device : D100 2
Data view format : Signed decimal, 16-bit signed decimal
SPECIFICATIONS
The operation
priority for setting State No. Display range Lamp Display text Blink
overlap conditions
High 1 M10 ON Red Stop No
2 60<=$V<=80 Yellow Caution No
3
COMMON SETTING
3 81<=$V Red Alarm Low
Normal case
Low - Blue Normal operation -
(State 0)
* $V is the monitor device value.
When M10 is ON, the lamp will 4
be red and the displayed text
State 1 will be "Stop".
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Stop
When the device value is
State 2
between 60 and 80 (60 $V
80), the lamp will be yellow
5
and the displayed text will be Caution
COMMON SETTINGS
"Caution".
FOR OBJECTS
When the monitor device value
is 81 or more (81 $V), the Blink
display (lamp color and every
State 3 displayed text) on state 3 and second. 6
the lamp color on state 0 will Alarm
blink alternately. The text set
on state 0 is not displayed. LAMP, SWITCH
When condition is other than
state 1, 2 and 3, the lamp will
Normal case be blue and the displayed text
(State 0) will be "Normal operation". Normal oper 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.1 Lamp Display 6-8
6.1.3 Setting items of word lamp (for GOT-A900 series only)
2 Text tab
Set the text to be displayed at the center or on the top, bottom, left or right of the lamp.
Basic Text Extended Data Operation
Items Description A F
Previous/Next When changing the lamp text setting of the preset state, select the state No. and then change the
Select State setting.
Text Select the color of text to be displayed.
Select the view format of the text
Style
(Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised).
Regular Bold Solid Raised
Solid Select the solid color when [Solid] or [Raised] is set in [Style]
Select the text size (X Y).Size of 1 1 represents 16 x 8 dots.
GOT-A900 series: GOT-F900 series:
Size
A 1 to 8 A 0.5 to 4
1 to 8 1 to 8
Check this item when using high quality font to display the text.
Use High Quality Font
(Only when display size X, Y is set to any of 2, 4, 6 or 8.)
T
Select the position where the text is to be displayed on the object.
Select Position to Edit Text L C R
(Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right)
B
Horizontal Alignment Select the horizontal position of the text.
Vertical Alignment Select the vertical position of the text.
Input the text to be displayed. (Up to 32 characters)
Text Input Area Press the Enter key to input a new line of the end of the first line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)
(Continued to next page)
6-9 6.1 Lamp Display
6.1.3 Setting items of word lamp (for GOT-A900 series only)
Basic Text Extended Data Operation
1
Items Description A F
Text
OVERVIEW
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text Offset to frame
Offset to Frame
and object shape, i.e., frame. (Up to 100 dots)
2
Copy Copy the set text attribute.
Paste Clicking on the Paste button in other state completes the copy of the text attribute.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.1 Lamp Display 6 - 10
6.1.3 Setting items of word lamp (for GOT-A900 series only)
3 Extended tab
Set the data type, security level and offset value of the monitor device.
Check "Extended" at the bottom of this dialog box to display this tab.
Basic Text Extended Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
Signed BIN16 : Lamp display is executed by a signed 16-bit binary value of a word
device.
Data Type Unsigned BIN16 : Lamp display is executed by an unsigned 16-bit binary value of a word
device.
BCD16 : Lamp display is executed by a 16-bit BCD (Binary-Coded Decimal)
value of a word device.
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
6 - 11 6.1 Lamp Display
6.1.3 Setting items of word lamp (for GOT-A900 series only)
1
4 Data Operation tab
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
OVERVIEW
dialog box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function 2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Data Operation
Basic Text Extended
5
Items Description A F
COMMON SETTINGS
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
FOR OBJECTS
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR. 6
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift LAMP, SWITCH
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.1 Lamp Display 6 - 12
6.1.3 Setting items of word lamp (for GOT-A900 series only)
6.1.4 Setting items of bit lamp area (for GOT-F900 series only)
Set the device to be monitored and the colors to be exchanged.
Items Description A F
Set the device to be monitored.
Bit Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Operating When Select the condition for color replacement when bit device is ON/OFF.
Exchange the Color Select 2 colors to be exchanged in 1-dot unit within the arranged area on the screen.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
6.1.5 Setting items of screen lamp (for GOT-F900 series only)
Set the device to be monitored and overlapped screen of color.
Items Description A F
Set the device to be monitored.
Bit Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Only base screen can be set here.
Screen Type
(Up to 3 screens in total can be overlapped on one and other)
Screen No. Select the screen to be overlapped by screen No.
Screen Name Select the screen to be overlapped by the screen name.
The image for the object arrangement is not displayed on the screen.
6 - 13 6.1 Lamp Display
6.1.4 Setting items of bit lamp area (for GOT-F900 series only)
6.1.6 Setting items of external lamp (for GOT-F900 series only) 1
Set the device that makes the external lamp ON.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Items Description A F
Set the head of the bit device that is related to the operation switch lamp on the F930GOT-K or
F94* handy GOT ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Head Device
The ON/OFF of the operation switch lamp is controlled according to the ON/OFF status of a bit 3
device that is set by a PLC.
COMMON SETTING
The image for the object arrangement is not displayed on the screen.
6.1.7 Precautions
The following is the precautions for using the lamp function. 4
1 Precautions for drawing
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(1) Maximum number of lamp objects settable on one screen
GOT-A900 series : 256
GOT-F900 series : 50
(2) Display on GT Designer2 and GOT 5
With GT Designer2, only figures for which bit devices are ON are displayed. However, with GOT, a
COMMON SETTINGS
figure corresponding to bit device ON may be displayed overlaying a figure that corresponds to bit
device OFF state. (When a bit device is ON, bit lamp display may differ between GT Designer2 and
FOR OBJECTS
GOT.)
In such a case, take appropriate measures so that the figure corresponding to bit device OFF will
not be displayed. Setting a lamp color or background color can be effective.
6
Example of a bit lamp displayed differently between GT Designer2 and GOT
Display
LAMP, SWITCH
Item
Bit device ON Bit device OFF
Setting at GT Designer2
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Display on GOT
NUMERICAL/
* The representation above is given only for the purpose of explanation and it differs from actual display.
8
ALARM
6.1 Lamp Display 6 - 14
6.1.6 Setting items of external lamp (for GOT-F900 series only)
6.2 Touch Switch
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
1 Bit switch ( Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch)
Turns bit device ON/OFF.
Stop Oper.
2 Data set switch ( Section 6.2.3 Setting items of data set switch)
Changes word.
380
Target 380
value
3 Special function switch ( Section 6.2.4 Setting items of special function
switch)
Switches to special function screen such as ladder monitor, test window, etc.
Test P0
187
M999
K
MO V
K
1
K
D1
window
- 1234 D100 MO V 2 D2
RST V
K
MO V 90 D162
K
MO V 110 D167
K
MO V 100 D172
List edit K K
SET M 9028
DUTY 35 0 400 M 9020
D1 D2 V D162 D167 D172
1 2 47 90 110 100
Ladder K
monitor
4 Go to screen switch ( Section 6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch)
Switches base screen/window screen.
Base screen 1 Base screen 2
6 - 15 6.2 Touch Switch
1
5 Change station No. switch ( Section 6.2.6 Setting items of change station
No. switch (specific for GOT-A900 series))
Switches the object device being monitored to the same device of other station No.
OVERVIEW
Station1 Station2
50 130
Station1 Station2 Station1 Station2 50 130
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Monitor station No.1 Switches the monitor target to station No.2
6 Key code switch ( Section 6.2.7 Setting items of key code switch)
Operates as preset key code. 3
COMMON SETTING
1 A 1 ABC
A B C D E F G DEL A B C D E F G DEL
H I J K - ESC H I J K - ESC
7 Data change switch ( Section 6.2.8 Setting items of data change switch 4
(specific for GOT-F900 series))
OBJECT SETTING
Displays the window for numerical input/ASCII input and input data with keys.
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(The windows are provided within GOT.)
1234 1234
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
8 Recipe transfer switch ( Section 6.2.9 Setting items of recipe transfer switch
(specific for GOT-F900 series))
The recipe value is written to the PLC data register.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
9 Multi action switch ( Section 6.2.10 Setting items of multi action switch)
7
Sets the actions same with the switches described in to .
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Multiple actions of to (GOT-A900 series: Max. 105 actions, GOT-F900 series: Max. 50 actions)
are performed with touch operation.
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 16
Touch switch extended function
Switch type Description A F
Turns ON the specified bit device. (SET)
Turns OFF the specified bit device. (RESET)
Bit Switch
Reverses (ON OFF) the current status of specified bit device. (ALT)
Turns ON the specified bit device only while the touch switch is touched. (Momentary)
Writes the set value to specified word device. (Fixed)
Writes the set word device value to specified word device. (Indirect)
Data Set Switch
Writes the set word device value + fixed value to specified word device.
(Fixed + indirect)
Switches to the screen of which base screen No. that was displayed previously.
Switches to the screen of which screen No. that is specified.
Switches to the screen of which screen No. that is specified according to specified bit device ON/
Go to Screen Switch
OFF.
When the current value of specified word device corresponds to the specified comparison
expression, switches to the specified station No.
Special Function Switch Switches to special function screen of ladder monitor, test window, etc.
Switches to the station No. specified as monitor target.
Switches to the specified station No. when the bit device (of which monitor target is specified)
Change Station No. Switch turns ON/OFF.
When the current value of specified word device corresponds to the specified comparison
expression, switches to the specified station No.
Key Code Switch Controls numerical input, key input of ASCII input, alarm list, data list and alarm history.
Displays the key window for numerical input/ASCTII input.
Data Change Switch
(The windows are provided within GOT.)
Writes the recipe value to the specified data register.
Recipe Transfer Switch
Writes the specified data register to recipe.
Multi Action Switch The above operation can be set to this switch.
Application Example
Change the switching screen according to device
Comment display changes with each touch
status
Section 6.2.3 Setting items of data set switch Section 6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
1 will be added to D10 with each touch Base screen 1 Base screen 10
ON Operate
Line 1 checked Line 2 checked starts
M10
Operate Base screen 20
OFF Stop
D10 : 1 D10 : 2 with error
(Device for comment display) Changes the switching screen
according to the status of M10
Switches different station No. among different screen
Return to the previously displayed screen
types
Section 6.2.6 Setting items of change station No. switch
Section 6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
(specific for GOT-A900 series)
Station 1
Graph 1
Graph 1
D10 100
Graph 2 100
Back
D10 30
The screen displayed previously appears 30
Base screen : Station 1 monitored Station 2
Window screen: Station 2 monitored
6 - 17 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.1 Arrangement and settings 1
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
OVERVIEW
Click on each touch switch iron.
Bit switch Go to screen switch
2
Data set switch Key code switch
Special function switch Change station No. switch
SPECIFICATIONS
Data change switch Recipe transfer switch
Multi action switch
Select a touch switch from the menu. 3
[Object] [Switch] [Bit Switch]
COMMON SETTING
[Data Set Switch]
[Special Function Switch]
[Go to Screen Switch]
[Change Station No. Switch]
[Key Code Switch]
[Data Change Switch]
4
[Recipe Transfer Switch]
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
[Multi Action Switch]
PREPARATORY
2 Click on the position where the touch switch is to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
5
3 Double click on the arranged touch switch to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
COMMON SETTINGS
reference to the following explanation.
FOR OBJECTS
Easier setting method
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
6
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 18
6.2.1 Arrangement and settings
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
1 Basic tab
(Example: When setting in GOT-A900 series)
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Items Description A F
Set bit device as write destination.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Switch Select the function corresponding to the bit device as write destination.
Action Set : Turns ON bit when touched.
Action Alternate : Switches bit ON/OFF with each touch.
Reset : Turns OFF bit when touched.
Momentary : Turns on bit only when being touched.
ON Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns ON.
OFF Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns OFF.
Select the shape for touch switch.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library figures can be
Display selected.
Style
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Reverse Switch Check this item to XOR-reverse the touch switch area in which shape is not set, according to the
Area background color.
Frame Select the frame color of the touch switch.
Switch Select the touch switch color.
(Continued to next page)
6 - 19 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
1
Items Description A F
Select the pattern, background color and switch color for the touch switch.
Background
OVERVIEW
The selected pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Display Pattern + Switch
Style
Pattern
Example: Background :
Pattern :
2
Switch :
Background
SPECIFICATIONS
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
Touch switch operation when [Momentary] is set.
3
(1) When any of the following takes place while the switch for which momentary is set
COMMON SETTING
is being touched, the bit device may remain ON even if the switch is released.
GOT hardware error
GOT power supply turned OFF
Communication error with a connected controller
Set a timeout period for the corresponding device concerning continuous ON time 4
as required, and have the connected controller forcibly turn OFF the bit device.
(2) The actual switching of the base screen will occur once the operators finger is
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
released off the touch switch from the moment it is first touched.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 20
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
2 Text/Lamp tab
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Basic Text/Lamp Trigger Action
Items Description A F
Click on this item to set the text to be displayed, positioning point and display position when the
ON
device turns ON.
Click on this item to set the text to be displayed, positioning point and display position when the
OFF
device turns OFF.
Copy ON Used to copy the set attribute.
OFF Copy OFF ON :The "OFF" attribute is copied to the "ON" attribute.
Copy OFF Copy ON OFF :The "ON" attribute is copied to the "OFF" attribute.
ON The contents to be copied differ depending on the selected item.
All Settings Copies all text attributes.
Text Only Copies only text.
Text Select the color of text to be displayed.
Select the view format of the text
Style
Text (Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised).
Regular Bold Solid Raised
Solid Select the solid color for the text when [Solid] or [Raised] is set in [Style].
Select the size of text to be displayed.
Size (GOT-A900 series: 0.5 to 8, GOT-F900 series: 1 to 8 0.5 to 4)
When (1 1) is set, the font size is 8 16 dots.
Use High Quality Check this item when using high quality font to display touch switch text.
Font (Only when dsiplay size X, Y is set to any of 2, 4, 6 or 8.)
Select the position where the text is to be displayed on the T
Select Position to
object. L C R
Edit Text
(Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right) B
Horizontal
Select the horizontal position of the text.
Alignment
Vertical Alignment Select the vertical position of the text.
(Continued to next page)
6 - 21 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
1
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Basic Text/Lamp Trigger Action
OVERVIEW
Items Description A F
Use 6 8dot font Font is displayed in size of 6 8 dots. (Characters only)
Input the text to be displayed. (Up to 32 characters) 2
Text Press the Enter key to input a new line at the end of the first line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)
Text
SPECIFICATIONS
Text
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text Offset to frame
Offset to Frame
and object shape, i.e., frame. (Up to 100 dots)
Lamp Select the method of switching touch switch image (ON shape, OFF shape).
3
ON shape is displayed when the touch switch is touched.
COMMON SETTING
Key
OFF shape is displayed when the touch switch is released.
When the bit device set in [Device] is ON, OFF shape will be switched to ON shape.
Bit
After selecting, set the device ( Section 5.1 Device Setting).
When the range of specified word device is set to [Range] in [Device], OFF shape will be switched
to ON shape. 4
After selecting, make the settings as follows:
OBJECT SETTING
Device :Sets the word device. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Data size
16 bit/32 bit :Selects data size for word device.
Data type
Word Signed BIN :Treats the word device value as signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN :Treats the word device value as unsigned binary value. 5
BCD :Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value.
COMMON SETTINGS
Real :Treats the word device value as floating point type real.
Display range
FOR OBJECTS
Range :After setting the specified word device, click on Range button to set
the switch range for ON/OFF shape.
( Section 5.5 Trigger Setting)
6
Lamp
LAMP, SWITCH
Select the item according to the application of ON/OFF shape set for a touch switch.
(1) When "Key" is selected
Select this item to switch only the image when the touch switch is touched.
With the setting, OFF shape appears when the touch switch is released,
regardless of the device status. Therefore, select "Bit" or "Word" to show the
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
device status.
M100
NUMERICAL/
M100
ON ON
Run Run
8
ON shape appears when the touch switch is OFF shape appears when the touch switch is
touched. released regardless of the device status.
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 22
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
(2) When "Bit" or "Word" is selected
Select this item to switch the image according to the device status.
By setting the same device set in the basic tab, the device status can be shown by
touch switch (lamp function).
Example: Bit: M100 Setting
M100 M100
ON OFF
Run Stop
ON shape appears when M100 is ON OFF shape appears when M100 is OFF.
6 - 23 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
1
3 Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger 4
Items Description A F
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
PREPARATORY
Security Display/ When not using the function, set it to "0".
Security Input ( Section 5.8 Security Function)
The number for security input must be larger than that for security display.
Check this item to disable simultaneous press of touch switch.
On Preference: On status is handled with the priority as shown below.
5
Follow from the outside to inside of the Follow from the inside to outside of the
COMMON SETTINGS
touch key valid area in GOT by finger. Touch key valid area in GOT by finger.
FOR OBJECTS
Touch switch: ON Touch switch: ON status
6
OFF Preference: OFF status is handled with the priority as shown below.
Follow from the outside to inside of the Follow from the inside to outside fo the
Simultaneous Press touch key valid area in GOT by finger. Touch key valid area in GOT by finger. LAMP, SWITCH
Touch switch: Won't be ON Touch switch: OFF
7
Press the outside of touch switch valid area while valid area in GOT is pressed.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(Two points are simultaneously pressed.)
NUMERICAL/
Touch switch: OFF
(Continued to next page)
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 24
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Items Description A F
Set the time from the instance the touch switch is touched to start the operation, i.e., delay time in
1-second unit. (Minimum: 1 second, Maximum: 5 seconds.)
None : No delay time will occur.
ON : Select this item to carry out ON operation by pressing the touch switch
during the set time. Set the delay time. This setting can prevent an
Delay incorrect operation from occurring.
OFF : Select this item to carry out OFF operation in the set time after the
touch switch is turned OFF. Touch switch is ON during the set time.
After selecting, set the delay time.
Press Twice : Select this item to carry out the operation when the touch switch is
touched once and then touched for the second time within the set time.
Attribute Set the display attribute for the touch switch after touched once when [Press Twice] is set in
for middle [Delay].
of two Select the shape for touch switch. When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.By clicking
presses
Shape on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library figures can be selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame Select the frame color of the touch switch.
Switch Select the touch switch color.
Select the pattern, background color and switch color for the touch switch.
Pattern
The seleted pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Switch
Example: Background :
Background Pattern :
Switch :
Background
When displaying text on the touch switch, click on Text button, set the text to be displayed and
Text *1
positioning point and display position.
Select the view format of the text
Style
(Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised).
Regular Bold Solid Raised
Color Select the color of text to be displayed.
Solid Select the solid color for the text when [Solid] or [Raised] is set in [Style].
Size Select the size of text on touch switch (0.5 to 8).
Use High Quality Check this item when using high quality font to display touch switch text.
Font (Only when display size X, Y is set to any of 2, 4, 6 or 8.)
(Continued to next page)
6 - 25 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
1
Items Description A F
Select the time the buzzer is on when the touch switch is touched.
OVERVIEW
Always Set : The buzzer sound is on whenever the touch switch is touched.
Set Only Fill Requirement : The sound is on only when the touch switch is touched and the
Buzzer
trigger has been satisfied.
Always Not Set : The buzzer sound is not on even when the touch switch is 2
touched.
Check this item to output volume at the moment the touch switch is touched when [Always Set] is
One Shot
SPECIFICATIONS
set in [Buzzer Volume] and [Set Only Fill Requirement] is set.
Check this item to keep buzzer beeping while the touch switch is touched when [Always Set] is set
During Push
in [Buzzer Volume] and [Set Only Fill Requirement] is set.
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function) 3
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
COMMON SETTING
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Set the text to be displayed on touch switch
When text is displayed on the touch switch when [Attribute for middle of two presses] is set, the settings
4
must be made as follows.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Items Description A F
Select the position where the text is to be displayed on the object.
Position
(Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right) 6
Horizontal Alignment Select the horizontal position of the text.
Vertical Alignment Select the vertical position of the text. LAMP, SWITCH
Input the text to be displayed. (Up to 32 characters)
Text Press the Enter key to input a new line of the end of the first line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text 7
Offset to Frame
and object shape, i.e., frame. (Up to 100 dots)
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
Displaying text on the top/bottom/left/right of touch switch
To display text on the top/bottom/left/right of touch switch, when [Attribute for middle
of two presses] is set, set the text to be displayed when the device turns ON/OFF on
the text/lamp tab. 8
If the settings are not made for the text display on the text/lamp tab, text will not be
displayed based on the attribute for middle of two presses.
(The display text at the time of ON/OFF may be blank.)
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 26
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
4 Action tab
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Basic Text/Lamp Trigger Action
Items Description A F
Action The set actions will be displayed in list format.
Set the key code of the key for numeric value and ASCII input.
Key Code
( App.2 Key Code List)
Bit *1 Click on this item to set the bit device ON/OFF operation for touch switch.
Word *2 Click on this item to set the word device value change for touch switch.
Click on this item to make the settings in order the base screen will be switched by using touch
Base *3
switch.
Click on this item to make the settings in order the window screen will be switched by using touch
Window *4
switch.
Click on this item to make the settings in order the station No. will be switched by using touch
Station No. *5
switch.
Click on this item to make the settings in order the data of recipe value will be transmitted by using
Recipe
touch switch.
Data Change Click on this item to set the display of key window for numeric/ASCII input by using touch switch.
When intending to edit a preset action, select the action from [Action] and then click on Edit
Edit button.
As the corresponding setting dialog box will appear, edit the action on that dialog box.
When intending to delete a preset action, select the action from [Action] and then click on Delete
Delete button.
As the corresponding setting dialog box will appear, delete the action on that dialog box.
(Continued to next page)
6 - 27 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
1
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Basic Text/Lamp Trigger Action
OVERVIEW
Items Description A F
Check this item to change the text display of touch switch according to a device value.
Change Text by
Device Value After checking, click on the Device button and set the device stored a value.
2
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Device 1 The comment having the same number as the value stored in the set device is displayed.
SPECIFICATIONS
"Text" on the "Text/Lamp" tab becomes invalid with check.
Indirect Check this item to add the value of other device to "Device 1".
Text *6 Device 2 After checking, click on the Device button and set the device stored a value.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Check this item to add the other value to "Device 1" according to the display status (ON/OFF 3
Fixed display) of touch switch.
After checking, set the added value at ON/OFF of touch switch.
COMMON SETTING
Set the comment to be displayed as touch switch text on GT Designer2 screen by the comment
Preview No.
No.
For details of *1 to *6, refer to the following.
*1 Bit 4
The followings can be set as the touch switch actions taken when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Setting of [Action (Bit)] dialog box
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
Items Description A F
Click on Device button to set the bit device of write destination.
Device LAMP, SWITCH
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Select the corresponding function to the bit device as write destination when touched.
Set : Turns ON bit when touched.
Action Alternate : Switches bit ON/OFF when touched. 7
Reset : Turns OFF bit when touched.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Momentary : Turns ON bit when touched only.
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 28
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
*2 Word
When changing the word device value with touch switch, set as show below.
Setting of [Action (Word)] dialog box
Items Description A F
Device Set the device of write destination. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Data Size Select the data size (16 bits/32 bits) of the word device.
Select the data type of the value to be set in [Type] and [Initial Value Condition].
Signed BIN :Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN :Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Data Type
BCD :Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value.
Real :Treats word device value as floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
Fixed :Check this item to write a fixed value into the word device set as write
destination, and then set the value.
(This item must be always set when GOT-F900 is used.)
Indirect :Check this item to write the specified value into a word device, and then
Type set the word device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
When [Fixed] and [Indirect] are both checked, the value (fixed value + indirect value) will be written
into the word device.
If the value becomes the condition value when [Fixed] and [Indirect] are both set in [Type], the
reset value will be written into the specified word device.
Condition Value :Set the value as condition for writing the reset value into the specified
Initial Value Condition
word device.
Reset Value :Set the value written into the word device when the condition value is
satisfied
6 - 29 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
*3 Base 1
When switching base screen with touch switch, set as shown below.
For the details of the base screen switching function, refer to the following.
OVERVIEW
Section 6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch (Basic tab)
Setting of [Action (Base Switching)] dialog box
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Items Description A F
Next Screen Select the action of switching screen.
Select this item to switch to the base screen of the specified No.
Fixed
Set the base screen No. as switching destination.
Previous Select this item to switch to the base screen of which screen No. was displayed previously.
4
Select this item to switch to the base screen specified by the No. based on the ON/OFF status or
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
current value of the specified device.
PREPARATORY
Select the data type of the device to be monitored.
Bit :Switches base screen when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
Device Signed (BIN16) :Switches base screen based on the word device (BIN16) binary value.
BCD16 :Switches base screen based on the word device (BCD16) binary
decimal value. 5
After setting the device, click on Details button. As the corresponding dialog box will appear, set
COMMON SETTINGS
the action on that dialog box.
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 30
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
*4 Window
Make the settings in order that window screen will be displayed or switched by using the touch switch, as
shown below.
For the details of the window screen switching function, refer to the following.
Section 6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch (Basic tab)
Setting of [Action (Window)] dialog box
Items Description A F
Next Screen Select the action of switching screen.
Select this item to switch to the window screen of the specified No.
Fixed
Set the window screen No. as switching destination.
Select this item to switch to the window screen specified by the No. based on the ON/OFF status
or current value of the specified device.
Select the data type of the device to be monitored.
Bit :Switches window screen when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
Signed (BIN16) :Switches window screen based on the word device (BIN16) binary
Device
value.
BCD16 :Switches window screen based on the word device (BCD16) binary
decimal value.
After setting the device, click on Details button. As the corresponding dialog box will appear, set
the action on that dialog box.
Select the window screen type to be switched to when the touch switch is touched.
Overlap Window 1:
Displays the window screen specified as overlap window 1 when the touch
switch is touched.
Overlap window 1 is displayed at the set display position on the base screen.
Overlap Window 2:
Type Displays the window screen specified as overlap window 2 when the touch
switch is touched.
Overlap window 2 is displayed at the set display position on the base screen.
Superimpose Window:
Displays the window screen specified as superimpose window when the touch
switch is touched.
Superimpose window is displayed at the set display position on the base screen.
6 - 31 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
*5 Station No. 1
When setting the station No. switching function with the touch switch, set the following actions.
For the details of the station No. switching function, refer to the following.
OVERVIEW
Section 6.2.6 Setting items of change station No. switch (specific for GOT-A900 series)
(Basic tab)
Setting of [Action (Station No.)] dialog box 2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Items Description A F
4
Next Station Select the action of switching station No.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Host Select this item to monitor the station No. connected with GOT.
Select this item to switch the monitor target to other station.
Other
Set the network No. and station No. that will be switched to in decimal.
Select this item to switch to the station, specified by the No., based on the ON/OFF status of
current value of the specified device.
5
Select the data type of the device to be monitored.
COMMON SETTINGS
Bit : Switches base screen when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
FOR OBJECTS
Device Signed (BIN16 : Switches base screen based on the word device (BIN16) binary value.
BCD16 : Switches base screen based on the word device (BCD16) binary
decimal value.
After setting the device, click on Details button. As the corresponding dialog box will appear, set
the action on that dialog box. 6
All : Select this item to switch the whole project by station No.
Mode
Screen Type : Select this item to switch the specified screen by station No.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 32
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
*6 Indirect Text
Set Indirect Text to change the text displayed on the touch switch according to the value of device.
(1) When set "Device 1" only Device 1 10
The comment having the same number as Touch switch ON display Touch switch OFF display
"Device1" is displayed without regarding ON/OFF
of touch switch.
Line A operation Line A operation
Comment No. 10 is displayed.
(2) When set "Device 1" and "Device 2" Device 1 10
The comment having the same number as the Device 2 4
total of "Device 1" + "Device 2" values is Touch switch ON display Touch switch OFF display
displayed without regarding ON/OFF of touch
switch.
Line E operation Line E operation
Comment No. 14 is displayed.
(3) When set "Device 1" and "Fixed" Device 1 10 Device 1 10
During touch switch is ON, the comment having Fixed ON 1 Fixed OFF 0
the same number as the total of "Device 1" + Touch switch ON display Touch switch OFF display
"Fixed ON" values is displayed.
During touch switch is OFF, the comment having
the same number as the total of "Device 1" + Line B operation Line A operation
"Fixed OFF" values is displayed.
Comment No. 11 is displayed. Comment No. 10 is displayed.
6 - 33 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
1
5 Trigger tab
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger 4
Trigger
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Basic Text/Lamp Action
PREPARATORY
Items Description A F
Check this item to disable simultaneous press of touch switch.
ON Preference: On status is handled with the priority as shown below.
Follow from the outside to inside of the Follow from the inside to outside o the 5
touch key valid area in GOT by finger. touch key valid area in GOT by finger.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Touch switch: ON Touch switch: ON status
OFF Preference: OFF status is handled with the priority as shown below.
Follow from the outside to inside of the Follow from the inside to outside fo the
6
Simultaneous Press touch key valid area in GOT by finger. touch key valid area in GOT by finger.
LAMP, SWITCH
Touch switch: Won't be ON Touch switch: OFF
Press the outside of touch switch valid area while valid area in GOT is pressed. (Two
points are simultaneously pressed.) 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
Touch switch: OFF
Select the trigger for displaying the object. ( Section 5.5 Trigger Setting)
Trigger Type
In the case of GOT-A900 series:
Ordinary Range ON/OFF Bit Trigger
8
In the case of GOT-F900 series:
Ordinary ON/OFF
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 34
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Basic Text/Lamp Trigger Action
Items Description A F
When [ON], [OFF] or [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], click on Device button to set bit device
Trigger Device and word device (only when [Range] is selected).
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], click on Device button to set bit device.
Trigger Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items for the word device set as
Word Range Trigger
trigger.
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type of word device.
Signed BIN :Treats the word device value as signed binary value.
Data Type Unsigned BIN :Treats the word device value as unsigned binary value.
Real :Treats the word device value as floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
Click on the Range button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
Range
( Section 5.5 Trigger Setting)
When selecting [Bit Trigger] in [Trigger Type], set the set bit device number (2 to 8) as multi bit
trigger.
Multi Bit
Bit Number
Trigger After the setting, click on Setting button to set bit device and trigger conditions.
( Section 5.5 Trigger Setting)
Auto Repeat The device repeatedly turns ON/OFF in a certain period, while the touch switch is being pressed.
6 - 35 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch
6.2.3 Setting items of data set switch 1
1 Basic tab
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Items Description A F
Device Set the device of write destination. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
5
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
COMMON SETTINGS
Select the data type of the value to be set in [Set Value].
FOR OBJECTS
Data Type Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Switch Fixed : Check this item to write a fixed value into the word device set as write
Action destination, and then set the value.
(This item must be always set when GOT-F900 is used.) 6
Indirect : Check this item to write the specified value into a word device, and then
Set Value set the word device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting) LAMP, SWITCH
When [Fixed] and [Indirect] are both checked, the value (fixed value + indirect value) will be written
into the word device.
ON Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns ON.
OFF Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns OFF.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Select the shape for touch switch. When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library shapes can be
Display Shape
NUMERICAL/
selected.
Style
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Reverse Switch When [None] is set in [Shape], check this item to XOR-reverse the touch switch (no shape) area
Area according to the background color.
8
Frame Select the frame color of the touch switch.
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 36
6.2.3 Setting items of data set switch
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Items Description A F
Switch Select the touch switch color.
Select the pattern, background color and switch color for the touch switch.
Background
The selected pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Display
Pattern + Switch
Style
Example: Background :
Pattern Pattern :
Switch :
Background
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
6 - 37 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.3 Setting items of data set switch
1
2 Text/Lamp tab
The setting items of text/lamp tab are the same with those of bit switch.
For the details of the set data, refer to the following.
OVERVIEW
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Text/Lamp tab)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
3 Extended tab (specific for GOT-A900 series)
The setting items of extended tab are the same with those of bit switch. 5
For the details of the set data, refer to the following.
COMMON SETTINGS
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only))
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 38
6.2.3 Setting items of data set switch
4 Extended tab (for GOT-F900 series only)
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Items Description A F
If the value becomes the condition value when [Fixed] and [Indirect] are both set in [Type], the
reset value will be written into the specified word device.
Example:
Creating touch key that adds "1" to D0 when touched; and returns the
value to "0" when it reached "10".
Device : D0 (Initial value = 0)
Initial Value Condition Fixed :1 Indirect : D0
Condition value: 11 Reset value: 0
D0=0 D0=10 D0=0
Touch the touch switch Touch the touch switch The value of D0
for ten times again returns to 0
Condition Value Set the condition value for writing the reset value to the specified word device.
Reset Value Set the value that is written to the word device, when the condition value is satisfied.
6 - 39 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.3 Setting items of data set switch
1
5 Action tab
The setting items of action tab are the same with those of bit switch.
For the details of the set data, refer to the following.
OVERVIEW
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Action tab)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
6 Trigger tab 5
The setting items of action tab are the same with those of bit switch.
COMMON SETTINGS
For the details of the set data, refer to the following.
FOR OBJECTS
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Trigger tab)
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 40
6.2.3 Setting items of data set switch
6.2.4 Setting items of special function switch
1 Basic tab
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Select the screen type for the special function screen to be displayed.
Utility* : Displays the utility.
Ladder monitor* : Displays the screen of ladder monitor function.
Key window* : Displays the key window for numerical/ASCII input function.
System Monitor* : Displays the screen of system monitor function.
Test window* : Displays the window for test function.
( Section 13.2 Test Function)
Special function monitor* : Displays the screen of special function module monitor
function.
Hard copy start* : Starts hard copy function.
Switch Action (Starts to collect screen data)
Hard copy interrupt* : Interrupts the presently processed hard copy function.
( Section 12.2 Hard Copy)
Password : Displays password screen.
Clock setting : Displays clock setting screen.
Screen clear* : Displays the screen for screen clear.
Network monitor* : Displays the screen of network monitor function.
Change brightness : Displays the change brightness screen.
List editor : Displays the screen of list editor function.
Motion/CNC monitor* : Displays the screen of motion/CNC monitor function.
Servo amplifier monitor* : Displays the screen of servo amplifier monitor function.
* Not corresponding to GOT-F900 series.
(Continued to next page)
6 - 41 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.4 Setting items of special function switch
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Trigger
1
Items Description A F
ON Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns ON.
OVERVIEW
OFF Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns OFF.
Select the shape for touch switch. When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library shapes can be 2
Shape
selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
SPECIFICATIONS
Reverse Switch When [None] is set in [Shape], check this item to XOR-reverse the touch switch (no shape) area
Area according to the background color.
Display
Style Frame Select the frame color of the touch switch.
Switch Select the touch switch color. 3
Select the pattern, background color and switch color for the touch switch.
COMMON SETTING
Background
The selected pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Switch
Example: Background :
Pattern
Pattern :
Switch :
Background 4
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
OBJECT SETTING
Category
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
Remark (1) Brightness Adjustment
In the GOT of which brightness can not be changed, settings can not be made 5
although the corresponding screen is displayed.
COMMON SETTINGS
(2) When using A95*GOT, A956WGOT
(a) In A95*GOT, [Ladder Monitor], [Test Window] and [Special Function Monitor]
FOR OBJECTS
of special function can not be used.
(b) In A956WGOT, [Test Window] and [Special Function Monitor] of special
function can not be used.
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 42
6.2.4 Setting items of special function switch
2 Text/Lamp tab
The setting items of text/lamp tab are the same with those of bit switch.
For the details of the set data, refer to the following.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Text/Lamp tab)
6 - 43 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.4 Setting items of special function switch
1
3 Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Trigger 4
Items Description A F
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security Display/ When not using the function, set it to "0".
Security Input The number of security input must be larger than that for security display.
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item to disable simultaneous press of touch switch.
5
ON Preference: On status is handled with the priority as shown below.
COMMON SETTINGS
Follow from the outside to inside of the Follow from the inside to outside of the
FOR OBJECTS
touch key valid area in GOT by finger. Touch key valid area in GOT by finger.
Touch switch: ON Touch switch: ON status 6
OFF Preference: OFF status is handled with the priority as shown below.
Follow from the outside to inside of the Follow from the inside to outside of the LAMP, SWITCH
Simultaneous Press touch key valid area in GOT by finger. Touch key valid area in GOT by finger.
Touch switch: Won't be ON Touch switch: OFF
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Press the outside of touch switch valid area while valid area in GOT is pressed.
(Two points are simultaneously pressed.)
NUMERICAL/
Touch switch: OFF 8
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 44
6.2.4 Setting items of special function switch
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Set the time from the instance the touch switch is touched to start the operation, i.e., delay time in
1-second unit. (Minimum: 1 second, Maximum: 5 seconds.)
None : No delay time will occur.
ON : Select this item to carry out ON operation by pressing the touch switch
during the set time. Set the delay time. This setting can prevent an
Delay incorrect operation from occurring.
OFF : Select this item to carry out OFF operation in the set time after touch
switch is turned OFF. Touch switch is ON during the set time. After
selecting, set the delay time.
Press Twice : Select this item to carry out the operation when the touch switch is
touched once and then touched for the second time within the set time.
Attribute for middle of two Set the display attribute for the touch switch after touched once when [Press Twice] is set in
presses [Delay].
Select the shape for touch switch. When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library sahpes can be
Shape
selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame Select the frame color of the touch switch.
Switch Select the touch switch color.
Select the pattern, background color and switch color for the touch switch.
Pattern
The selected pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Switch
Example: Background :
Background Pattern :
Switch :
Background
When displaying text on the touch switch, click on Text button, set the text to be displayed and
Text *1
positioning point and display position.
Select the view format of the text
Style
(Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised).
Regular Bold Solid Raised
Color Select the color of text to be displayed.
Solid Select the solid color for the text when [Solid] or [Raised] is set in [Style].
Size Select the size of text on touch switch (0.5 to 8).
Use High Quality Check this item when using high quality font to display touch switch text.
Font (only when display size X, Y is set to any of 2, 4, 6 or 8.)
Select the time the buzzer sound is on when the touch switch is touched.
Always Set :The buzzer sound is on whenever the touch switch is touched.
Set Only Fill Requirement :The buzzer sound is on only when the touch switch is touched
Buzzer
and the trigger has been satisfied.
Always Not Set :The buzzer sound is not on even when the touch switch is
touched.
(Continued to next page)
6 - 45 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.4 Setting items of special function switch
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Trigger
1
Items Description A F
Check this item to output volume at the moment the touch switch is touched when [Always Set] is
One Shot
OVERVIEW
set in [Buzzer Volume] and [Set Only Fill Requirement] is set.
Check this item to keep buzzer beeping while the touch switch is touched when [Always Set] is set
During Push
in [Buzzer Volume] and [Set Only Fill Requirement ] is set.
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices. 2
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
SPECIFICATIONS
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Change Text by Check this item to change the text display of touch switch according to a device value.
Device Value After checking, click on the Device button and set the device stored a value.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting) 3
The comment having the same number as the value stored in the set device is displayed.
Device1
COMMON SETTING
"Text" on the "Text/Lamp" tab becomes invalid with check.
Indirect Check this item to add the value of other device to "Device 1".
Text *2 Device2 After checking, click on the Device button and set the device stored a value.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Check this item to add the other value to "Device 1" according to the display status (ON/OFF
Fixed display) of touch switch. 4
After checking, set the added value at ON/OFF of touch switch.
OBJECT SETTING
Preview No. Set the No. of comment to be displayed as touch switch text on GT Designer2 screen.
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
For details of *1, refer to the following.
For details of *2, refer to *6 in Section 6.2.3 Setting items of bit switch (Action tab).
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 46
6.2.4 Setting items of special function switch
*1 Setting text displayed on switch
Make the following settings when displaying text on the switch based on the attribute for middle two
presses.
Items Description A F
Select the position where the text is to be displayed on the object.
Position
(Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right)
Horizontal Alignment Select the horizontal position of the text.
Vertical Alignment Select the vertical position of the text.
Input the text to be displayed. (Up to 32 characters)
Text Press the Enter key to input a new line of the end of the first line.
(A line feed is counted as two characters.)
Set the number of dots for the distance between the text
Offset to Frame
and object shape, i.e., frame. (Up to 100 dots)
When the text is displayed on top/bottom/left/right of the touch switch
When displaying the text on top/bottom/left/right of touch switch, based on the
attribute for middle of two presses, set the text display on the text/lamp when the
device is ON/OFF.
If not set, the text of the attribute for middle of two presses will not be displayed.
(The displayed text may be blank when the switch is ON/OFF.)
6 - 47 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.4 Setting items of special function switch
1
4 Trigger tab
Action setting is available when [Key window] is set in [Action] on the basic tab.
The setting items of trigger tab are the same with those of bit switch.
OVERVIEW
Refer to the following for details of the set data.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Trigger tab)
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 48
6.2.4 Setting items of special function switch
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
1 Basic tab
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Items Description A F
Select the screen type of switching destination.
Base :Switches to base screen.
Screen Type Overlap Window1 :Switches to or display overlap window1 screen.
Overlap Window2 :Switches to or display overlap window2 screen.
Superimpose Window :Switches to or display superimpose window.
Go to Screen Select the action of switching screen.
Select this item to switch to the base screen/window screen specified by the screen No..
After selecting, set the base/window screen of switching destination.
Fixed
Click on Browse button to display the screen image dialog box. Make the settings while checking
the image of the currently edited screen on that dialog box.
Select this item to switch to the screen of base screen No. that was displayed previously.
Previous*1 This item is available only when switching base screen.
As GOT can store the displayed screen No. including the current base screen, up to 10 base
screens can be switched based on the history.
(Continued to next page)
6 - 49 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
1
Items Description A F
Select this item to switch to the base/window screen specified by screen No., according to ON/
OVERVIEW
OFF status/current value of the specified device.
Before setting device, select data type of monitor device.
Go to Bit :Switch screens according to ON/OFF status of bit device.
Screen
Device *2
Word (BIN16) :Switch screens according to 16-bit binary value of word device. 2
Word (BCD16) :Switch screens according to 16-bit BCD (binary coded decimal)value to
switch screen.
SPECIFICATIONS
After setting device, click on Details button to set action.
ON Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns ON.
OFF Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns OFF.
Select the shape for touch switch. When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed. 3
By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library shapes can be
Shape
selected.
COMMON SETTING
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Reverse Switch When [None] is set in [Shape], check this item to XOR-reverse the touch switch (no shape) area
Area according to the background color.
Display
Style Frame Select the shape, i.e., frame color of the touch switch
4
Switch Select the touch switch color.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Select the pattern, background color and switch color for the touch switch.
PREPARATORY
Background
The selected pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Switch
Example: Background :
Pattern Pattern
Switch
:
:
5
Background
COMMON SETTINGS
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
FOR OBJECTS
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 50
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
*1 Previous
Select the hierarchy mode or history mode using the specific touching switch.
Hierarchy mode (Upper tier switch mode)
Pressing the touch switch display, i.e., switches to the base screen set as the upper tier.
This cycle can be repeated up to 10 times.
Example:
1) 2)
Base 1 Base 12 Base 23
3)
When the screens are switched as shown above, 1) 2) 3), and then the touch switch on the
base screen 12 is pressed, the base screen1, that is set as the upper tier, will be displayed.
History mode (Previous screen switch mode)
Pressing the touch switch returns to the base screen that was previously displayed.
This cycle can be repeated up to 10 times.
Example:
1) 2)
Base 1 Base 12 Base 23
3)
When the screens are switched as shown above, 1) 2) 3), and then the touch switch on the
base screen12 is pressed, the base screen23, that was previously displayed, will be displayed
again. (After this, whenever the touch switch is pressed, the screen will return to base screen12
base screen1.)
Hierarchy/history mode information
If GOT is powered off, the hierarchy/history information become invalid.
Therefore, once GOT is powered off, and then on again, the screen will not be
switched based on the previous hierarchy/history. (The history information can be
stored in a Memory card as instructed in (2).)
(1) Method of switching between the hierarchy mode and history mode
The hierarchy mode is set as default.
When changing to history mode, turn on GOT internal device GS450.b14 by using status
observation function.
For more information, refer to (2) (c).
(2) Storing the history information in a Memory card
When history mode is used, up to 10 screens of history information can be stored into a Memory
card. (Mount a Memory card to GOT in advance.)
By using the stored history information can return to the screen before GOT is powered off.
(a) How to store the history information
When the history mode is used (GS450.b14 is ON), turn on the GOT internal device
GS450.b13. This enables the history information to be saved in a Memory card.
Make sure to turn the above device on by using status observation function.
6 - 51 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
(b) Operation overview 1
Store the history information into a memory card when switching screen.
After powering on GOT, read the historical information stored in the memory card when
switching the initial screen.
OVERVIEW
Run Line A status Line ctrl status
Pro. target vol.
Screen switching action 1) After switching the screen,
300
150
History mode action turn power OFF.
Pow. Run Stop Lad.
1)
Password
2) After turning power ON, touch 2
the Previous switch of history
mode to return to the screen
GOT powered OFF GOT powered ON before power-OFF.
SPECIFICATIONS
3) After turning power ON, screen
Run Line A status Line ctrl status
No.1 can be switched to the 10th
Pro. target vol.
300
150
No.2 screen before power-OFF.
Pow. Run Stop Lad.
Password
2) 3) 3
COMMON SETTING
(c) Setting example
Set the history mode at the first line of status observation function.
(After GOT is powered ON, it switches to the history mode instantly.)
When switching from the hierarchy mode to the history mode during monitoring, if screen 4
change has been done, the screen information within GOT might be lost. In this case, it is
impossible to return to the previous screens as the history.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
When the history mode is used, it is recommended to switch to the history mode instantly after
PREPARATORY
powering GOT on.
Making the setting in the status
observation function of project 5
Setting history mode
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Setting for storing
history information
in a Memory card Set the trigger observation
cycle as [Ordinary]
LAMP, SWITCH
7
(3) Precautions
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(a) If the history information has been stored into a Memory card, do not change the screen
switching device value in PLC CPU while GOT is off.
NUMERICAL/
As the history information while GOT is off is not saved, it is impossible to switch back to the
screen as controlled in PLC CPU.
(b) Once the hierarchy mode is switched to the history mode, it is impossible to switch to the 8
hierarchy mode even by turning the above devices off. To switch to the hierarchy mode, power
GOT off.
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 52
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
*2 Device (Switch base/window screen according to ON/OFF status/current value of specified device.)
Set the following actions.
Switch to the base/window screen specified by screen No. according to ON/OFF status of the
specified device.
When the current value of specified device corresponds to the set comparison expressions, switch to
the base/window screen specified by screen No.
(Up to 64 comparison expressions can be set.)
(1) When specifying bit device
After setting bit device, click on Details button, and set the action when switching screen on the
following dialog box.
Setting of "Details of Action" dialog box
Items Description A F
Select this item when switching to base/window screen specified by screen No. when the specified
No. devices turns ON/OFF.
ON/OFF Set the screen No. of the switching destination screen.
Select this item when making the settings in order the screen will not be switched when the
Hold
specified device turns ON/OFF.
6 - 53 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
(2) When specifying word device
1
After setting word device, click on Details button, and set the action when switching screen on the
following dialog box.
OVERVIEW
Setting of Details of Action dialog box
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Items Description A F
Set the conditions for change the operation and details of the changed operation for each state. 4
State Up to 64 states (including the normal case) can be set.
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case).
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
New State Creates a new state.
Delete State Deletes a specified state.
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
Up/Down Changes the priority of the current state.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
Displays the list of preset states.
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
FOR OBJECTS
Range Set the range of word device values for operation change using a conditional expression.
No. : Switch to base/window screen specified by screen No. when the specified
device value corresponds to the set condition.
Set the screen No. of the target screen on the Spin box. 6
Click on Browse button to display the screen image dialog box.
Set the screen, while checking the image of the currently edited screen on that
Switching Type
dialog box. LAMP, SWITCH
Indirect : Switch to the screen No. corresponding to specified word device when specified
device value corresponds to the set conditional expression.
Hold : Do not switch screen when specified device value corresponds to the set
conditional expression.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 54
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
Methods of Switching Screen
Sequence program also can be used to switch screen.
Create the sequence program that writes value of the device for switching each
screen No. by using the value of the screen No. to be switched.
By using this sequence program, the base/window screen can be switched without
touch switch function.
Base Screen No. 1 Base Screen No. 10
M0 M0
MOVP K10 D100 MOVP K10 D100
No sequence program can be used to switch base/window screen when GOT
internal devices (GB, GD, GS) are used as base/window screen switching device
6 - 55 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
1
Remark (1) Methods of erasing window screen
When erasing window screen, touch the Close button, or set the switching screen
device value to "0" by using touch switch or sequence program. (Fixed: 0)
OVERVIEW
(2) Timing to switch screen
The base/window screen is switched at the moment when the touch switch is
released.
If the touch switch is kept touched for a long time, this will delay the timing when
2
the actual screen is displayed, and the screen may not appear as specified with
SPECIFICATIONS
the device value.
When using status observation function to monitor switching screen device, the
value different from actually displayed screen No. may be stored, depending on
the timing of scanning.
Lift
3
Touch
COMMON SETTING
Switch to screen
No. 20
Touch switch
Switch screen
4
Device: GD10 10 20
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Base screen Base screen Base screen
Actual displayed No.10 No.10 No.20
screen 10 20 20
Do not switch Switch display screen 5
display screen. to base screen No.20
Monitor screen switching device
COMMON SETTINGS
(Save the value of screen switching
device GD10 according to the status
FOR OBJECTS
observation function)
In this case, set the script function for each screen as shown below, in order that the
screen will be displayed as specified by screen No.. 6
Screen script function
LAMP, SWITCH
Trigger : GB100 (Ordinary ON, Rise)
Script : [w: GD87] = [w: GD10];
Make sure to set GOT special register GS386 (screen script initial action) to
"0" to execute script function after switching screen.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 56
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
2 Text/Lamp tab
The setting items of Text/Lamp tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details of setting items.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Text/Lamp tab)
3 Extended tab (specific for GOT-A900 series)
The setting items of Extended tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details of setting items.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only))
6 - 57 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
1
4 Action tab
The setting items of Action tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details of setting items.
OVERVIEW
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Action tab)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5 Trigger tab
The setting items of Trigger tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details of setting items. 5
COMMON SETTINGS
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Trigger tab)
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 58
6.2.5 Setting items of go to screen switch
6.2.6 Setting items of change station No. switch (specific for GOT-A900
series)
1 Basic tab
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Items Description A F
Go To Station No. Select the action of switching station No.
Host Select this item to monitor the station No. connected with GOT.
Select this item to switch the monitor target to other station.
Other Set the network No.( in [N/W No.]) and station No. ( in [Station No.])of the PLC CPU as switch
destination in decimal.
Select this item to switch to the station specified by the No. based on the ON/OFF status or current
value of the specified device.
Select the data type of the device to be monitored.
Bit : Switches station No. when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
Device *1 Signed (BIN16) : Switches station No. based on the word device (BIN16) binary value.
BCD16 : Switches station No. based on the word device (BCD16) binary
decimal value.
After setting the device, click on Details button. As the corresponding dialog box will appear, set
the action on that dialog box.
All : Select this item to switch the whole project by station No.
Mode
Screen Type : Select this item to switch the specified screen by station No.
(Continued to next page)
6 - 59 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.6 Setting items of change station No. switch (specific for GOT-A900 series)
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
1
Items Description A F
ON Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns ON.
OVERVIEW
OFF Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns OFF.
Select the shape for touch switch. When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.By clicking
Shape on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library shapes can be selected. 2
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
SPECIFICATIONS
Reverse Switch When [None] is set in [Shape], check this item to XOR-reverse the touch switch (no shape) area
Area according to the background color.
Display
Frame Select the shape, i.e., frame color of the touch switch.
Style
Switch Select the touch switch color.
3
Select the pattern, background color and switch color for the touch switch.
Background
The selected pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
COMMON SETTING
Pattern + Switch
Example: Background :
Pattern
Pattern :
Switch :
Background
4
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
For details of *1, refer to the following.
The required settings for switching station No.
(1) To change station No., set whether station No. is to be switched for each screen. 5
Select [Screen] [Property] from the menu. As the corresponding dialog box
COMMON SETTINGS
appears, set whether station No. will be changed on the screen dialog box
FOR OBJECTS
(Auxiliary Setting tab).
(2) To change station No., set device for switching station No..
Section 3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 60
6.2.6 Setting items of change station No. switch (specific for GOT-A900 series)
*1 Device (Switch station No. to be monitored according to the ON/OFF status/current value of the specified
device.)
Set the following actions.
Switch station No. according to the ON/OFF status of the specified bit device.
Switch to the screen specified by station No. when current value of specified word device
corresponds to the set condition. (Up to 64 conditions can be set.)
(1) When specifying bit device
After setting bit device, click on Details button to set action for switching station No. on the
following dialog box.
Setting of "Details Of Action" dialog box
Items Description A F
Host Select this item to monitor the station No. connected with GOT.
Select this item to switch monitoring destination to other station.
Other Set the network No. (in [N/W No.]) and station No. (in [Station No.]) of the PLC CPU as switch
ON/OFF
destination in decimal.
Select this item when making the settings in order that the screen will not be switched when the
Hold
specified device turns ON/OFF.
6 - 61 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.6 Setting items of change station No. switch (specific for GOT-A900 series)
(2) When specifying word device
1
After setting word device, click on Details button to set action on switching screen according to
device status.
Refer to the following for the details about setting method.
OVERVIEW
Section 5.4 State Setting
Setting of action (word) dialog box 2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Items Description A F
PREPARATORY
Set the conditions for changing the operation and details of the changed operation for each state.
State Up to 64 states (including the normal case) can be set.
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case.)
New State Creates a new state.
5
Delete State Deletes a specified state.
COMMON SETTINGS
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
FOR OBJECTS
Up/Down Changes the priority of the current state.
Displays the list of preset states.
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
6
Select the displaying method for switching station No. when the specified word device value
corresponds to the condition set in "Range". LAMP, SWITCH
( Section 3.3 Switching Station No. Device Setting)
Host : Monitor the PLC connected with GOT when the specified device value
corresponds to the set condition.
Switching Type Other : Switch the monitor destination to other station when the device value 7
corresponds to the set condition.Set the network No. (in [N/W No.]) and station
CHARACTER DISPLAY
No. (in [Station No.]) of the PLC CPU as switch destination in decimal.
Indirect : Switch to monitoring destination corresponding to the specified device when the
NUMERICAL/
specified device value corresponds to the set condition.
Hold : Do not switch monitoring destination when the specified device value
corresponds to the set condition.
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 62
6.2.6 Setting items of change station No. switch (specific for GOT-A900 series)
2 Text/Lamp tab
The setting items of Text/Lamp tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Text/Lamp tab)
3 Extended tab
The setting items of Extended tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only))
6 - 63 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.6 Setting items of change station No. switch (specific for GOT-A900 series)
1
4 Action tab
The setting items of Action tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
OVERVIEW
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Action tab)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5 Trigger tab
The setting items of Trigger tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items. 5
COMMON SETTINGS
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Trigger tab)
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 64
6.2.6 Setting items of change station No. switch (specific for GOT-A900 series)
6.2.7 Setting items of key code switch
1 Basic tab
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Action Trigger
Items Description A F
Set the key code of the key for numeric value and ASCII input.
Key Code
( App.2 Key Code List)
ON Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns ON.
OFF Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns OFF.
Select the shape for touch switch. When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.By clicking
Shape on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library shapes can be selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Reverse Switch When [None] is set in [Shape], check this item to XOR-reverse the touch switch (no shape) area
Area according to the background color.
Display
Frame Select the shape, i.e., frame color of the touch switch.
Style
Switch Select the touch switch color.
Select the pattern, background color and switch color for the touch switch.
Background
The selected pattern in the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Switch
Example: Background :
Pattern
Pattern :
Switch :
Background
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
6 - 65 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.7 Setting items of key code switch
1
2 Text/Lamp tab
The setting items of Text/Lamp tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
OVERVIEW
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Text/Lamp tab)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
3 Extended tab (specific for GOT-A900 series)
The setting items of Extended tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items. 5
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only))
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 66
6.2.7 Setting items of key code switch
4 Action tab
The setting items of Action tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Action tab)
5 Trigger tab
The setting items of Trigger tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Trigger tab)
6 - 67 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.7 Setting items of key code switch
6.2.8 Setting items of data change switch (specific for GOT-F900 series) 1
1 Basic tab
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
Basic Text/Lamp Trigger
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Items Description A F
Check this item when setting the user ID No. (1 to 65535).
By setting the user ID for data change switch function, the following operations are available.
UserID Changes data if the user ID set for this function is the same as that for numerical input func-
tion. 5
Changes data if the user ID set for this function is the same as that for ASCII input function.
COMMON SETTINGS
Select the keyboard displayed on window when touched.
FOR OBJECTS
F940GOT, F940WGOT, Handy GOT, ET-900
DEC: 8x4 DEC: 16x2 DEC: 10x4 Characters 1: 16x5
6
DEC: 8x8 DEC: 16x4 DEC: 10x8 Characters 2: 16x5
Switch
Action LAMP, SWITCH
KeyboardType
In the case of F930GOT, F930GOT-K
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
DEC DEC (H) HEX
NUMERICAL/
In the case of F920GOT-K
The data changes switch function is not provided.
X/Y Set the start point position where keyboard window will be displayed.
8
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 68
6.2.8 Setting items of data change switch (specific for GOT-F900 series)
Basic Text/Lamp Trigger
Items Description A F
ON Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns ON.
OFF Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns OFF.
Select the shape for touch switch. When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.By clicking
Display
Shape on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library shapes can be selected.
Style
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame Click on this item to set the display attribute to be displayed when the device turns OFF.
Switch Select the touch switch color.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
2 Text/Lamp tab
The setting items of Text/Lamp tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Text/Lamp tab)
6 - 69 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.8 Setting items of data change switch (specific for GOT-F900 series)
1
3 Trigger tab
The setting items of Trigger tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
OVERVIEW
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Trigger tab)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 70
6.2.8 Setting items of data change switch (specific for GOT-F900 series)
6.2.9 Setting items of recipe transfer switch (specific for GOT-F900 series)
1 Basic tab
Basic Text/Lamp Trigger
Items Description A F
Select the recipe file No. (1 to 256) directly or indirectly (indirect specification using a device in the
PLC).
The reference destination of the recipe No. to be transferred can be set as follows by direct or
indirect specification:
Direct :The recipe file No. can be specified directly.
Recipe No.
Indirect :The recipe file No. to be referred to can be specified as the value stored in the
Switch data register of the PLC specified by "Read Device (D+1)" of "System
Action Information".
The number of recipe files, number of points and specification of transfer device should be set in
advance in "Common"-"Recipe".
Select the direction to transfer the recipe data when touched.
Function GOT PLC : Data is written from the GOT to a data register of the PLC
PLC GOT : Data is read from a data register of the PLC to the GOT.
ON Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns ON.
OFF Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns OFF.
Select the shape for touch switch. When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.By clicking
Display
Shape on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library shapes can be selected.
Style
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame Select the shape, i.e., frame color of the touch switch
Switch Select the touch switch color.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
6 - 71 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.9 Setting items of recipe transfer switch (specific for GOT-F900 series)
1
2 Text/Lamp tab
The setting items of Text/Lamp tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
OVERVIEW
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Text/Lamp tab)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
3 Trigger tab
The setting items of Trigger tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items. 5
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Trigger tab)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 72
6.2.9 Setting items of recipe transfer switch (specific for GOT-F900 series)
6.2.10 Setting items of multi action switch
1 Basic tab
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Indirect Text Trigger
Items Description A F
Action The set actions will be displayed in list format.
Set the key code of the key for numeric value and ASCII input.
Key Code
( App.2 Key Code List)
Bit *1 Click on this item to set the bit device ON/OFF operation for touch switch.
Word *2 Click on this item to set the word device value change for touch switch.
Click on this item to make the settings in order that the currently displayed screen will be switched
SP Function
to the specified extension function screen by using touch switch.
Click on this item to make the settings in order that the base screen will be switched by using
Base *3
touch switch.
Click on this item to make the settings in order that the window screen will be switched by using
Window *4
touch switch.
Click on this item to make the settings in order that the station No. will be switched by using touch
Station No. *5
switch.
Click on this item to make the settings in order that the data of recipe value will be transmitted by
Recipe
using touch switch.
Data Change Click on this item to set the display of key window for numeric/ASCII input by using touch switch.
When intending to edit a preset action, select the action from [Action] and then click on Edit
Edit button.
As the corresponding setting dialog box will appear, edit the action on that dialog box
When intending to delete a preset action, select the action from [Action] and then click on Delete
Delete button.
As the corresponding setting dialog box will appear, delete the action in that dialog box
(Continued to next page)
6 - 73 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.10 Setting items of multi action switch
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Indirect Text Trigger
1
Items Description A F
ON Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns ON.
OVERVIEW
OFF Click on this item to set the display attributes when the device turns OFF.
Select the shape for touch switch. When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
By clicking on the Others button, shapes other than those in the list box or library shapes can be 2
Shape
selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
SPECIFICATIONS
Reverse Switch When [None] is set in [Shape], check this item to XOR-reverse the touch switch (no shape) area
Area according to the background color.
Display
Style Frame Select the shape, i.e., frame color of the touch switch.
Switch Select the touch switch color. 3
Select the pattern, background color and switch color for the touch switch.The selected pattern in
COMMON SETTING
Background
the switch color is displayed on the background color.
Pattern + Switch
Example: Background :
Pattern
Pattern :
Switch :
Background 4
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
OBJECT SETTING
Category
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
For details of *1 to *5, refer to the following.
The explanations of *1 to *5 in Section 6.2.2 Action tab.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 74
6.2.10 Setting items of multi action switch
2 Text/Lamp tab
The setting items of Text/Lamp tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Text/Lamp tab)
3 Extended tab (specific for GOT-A900 series)
The setting items of Extended tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only))
6 - 75 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.10 Setting items of multi action switch
1
4 Indirect Text tab (specific for GOT-A900 series)
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Basic Text/Lamp Extended Indirect Text Trigger 4
Items Description A F
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Change Text by Check this item to change the text display of touch switch according to a device value.
Device Value After checking, click on the Device button and set the device stored a value.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
The comment having the same number as the value stored in the set device is displayed.
Device1
"Text" on the "Text/Lamp" tab becomes invalid with check.
5
Check this item to add the value of other device to the value of "Device 1".
COMMON SETTINGS
Indirect After checking, click on the Device button and set the device where the added value will be
Device2
Text *1 stored.
FOR OBJECTS
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Check this item to add the other value to "Device 1" according to the display status (ON/OFF
Fixed display) of touch switch.
After checking, set the added value at ON/OFF of touch switch.
Set the comment to be displayed as touch switch text on GT Designer2 screen by the comment
6
Preview No.
No.
For details of *1, refer to the following. LAMP, SWITCH
The explanations of *6 in Section 6.2.2 Action tab.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 76
6.2.10 Setting items of multi action switch
5 Trigger tab
The setting items of Trigger tab are the same as the bit switch.
Refer to the following for the details about setting items.
Section 6.2.2 Setting items of bit switch (Trigger tab)
6 - 77 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.10 Setting items of multi action switch
6.2.11 Keyboard function 1
In the GOT-F900 series, a keyboard built in the GOT can be always displayed.
Eight types of keyboards are provided for inputting numeric values only or inputting both numeric values and
OVERVIEW
ASCII codes.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
1 Setting
1 Select [Object] [Keyboard] from the menu.
2 When the setting dialog box appears, set required items while referring to the explanation below. 4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 78
6.2.11 Keyboard function
2 Set items
Set the keyboard function.
Items Description A F
Select the keyboard to be always displayed on the screen among the eight types below.In the
F940GOT, F940WGOT or F94* handy GOT.
DEC: 8x4 DEC: 16x2 DEC: 10x4 Characters 1: 16x5
DEC: 8x8 DEC: 16x4 DEC: 10x8 Characters 2: 16x5
Type
In the F930GOT or F930GOT-K
DEC DEC (H) HEX
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
3 Precautions
The precautions on using the keyboard function are as follows:
(1) Precautions on screen creation
Only one keyboard can be set for one screen.
(2) Unavailable GOT type
The keyboard function is not available in the F920GOT-K because the touch switch function is not
provided in it.
(3) Combined use with key window
A key window cannot be used on the screen set a keyboard.
A key window will not pop up with touching Numerical Input or ASCII Input.
6 - 79 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.11 Keyboard function
6.2.12 Precautions 1
This section provides the precautions for using touch switch.
OVERVIEW
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Maximum number of touch switch objects set in one screen
GOT-A900 series : 256 2
GOT-F900 series : 50 (Up to 50 overlapped screens)
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Action of touch switch
(a) Multiple functions can be set for one touch switch.
(Multiple functions cannot be set if extension key is set.)
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series Action sequence for multi setting 3
Momentary : 20 Momentary : 50 High
COMMON SETTING
Set : 20 Set : 50
Reset : 20 Reset : 50
Alternate : 20 Alternate : 50
Word Set : 20 Word Set : 50
Base screen switching : 1 Base screen switching : 1
Window screen switching : 1 Recipe : 50
Overlap Window1 : 1 Data change : 50 4
Overlap Window2 : 1
Superimpose : 1
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Station No. switching : 1 Low
Total : 105 Total : 50
(b) When setting multiple functions for one touch switch, some functions cannot work according to
the combination of the set functions.
: Available : N/A
5
COMMON SETTINGS
Key Type High Action sequence for multi setting Low
FOR OBJECTS
Word set
Set
Reset
Key Code Setting
Alternate
Numerical value/
Function Extension Function Key Code Setting
ASCII input
Momentary
Basic Screen switch
6
confirmation
Window
Screen switch
LAMP, SWITCH
Station No. switch
Extension Function
Key Code Setting
Key Code Setting 7
(Numerical value/
CHARACTER DISPLAY
ASCII input confirmation key)
NUMERICAL/
Only in the following case, the key code of GOT-F900 series can be set simultaneously.
Muffle function that does not output the sound when the touch switch is touched: FFFEH
(3) Size of touch switch 8
GOT-A900 series : minimum 16 dots (Y) 16 dots (X)
GOT-F900 series : minimum 16 dots (Y) 20 dots (X)
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 80
6.2.12 Precautions
(4) Valid range of touch switch
(a) GOT-A900 series
The setting unit of switch shape is 1 dot. The setting unit of valid range is 16 dots.
By right-clicking an object and checking [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region], the size of the switch
shape and the valid area of the touch switch can be set respectively.
The valid area of a touch switch can be fit in an object frame with [Fit in Touch Area].
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
Screen 1 Switch shape
Valid area of Touch switch
(b) GOT-F900 series
The setting unit of switch shape is 1 dot.
The valid area is workable in the more than half of 16 dots x 20 dots.
(5) Precautions for using comment (specific for GOT-A900 series)
Only one line of comment can be displayed as touch switch text.
When text size is larger than touch switch shape size, the comment part outside of the shape will
not be displayed.
To use comment as touch switch text, make sure to install the currently used OS of GT Designer2
(basic function OS) into GOT.
(6) Key code setting
For key code setting, directly input the key to be used.
Even though invalid key code is set for touch switch, it cannot be checked in GT Designer2.
(7) Precautions in using the F920GOT-K
The touch switch function is not available because touch switches are not provided on the screen.
Set the switch function to the function switches by setting the operation panel.
In this case, however, key codes cannot be set.
2 Precautions for using
(1) Simultaneously press is enabled.
When three switches are simultaneously touched, the third one will not work.
(2) When multiple actions including either of bit Set/Reset/Alternate and either of screen switching/
station No. switching are set for a touch switch
When multiple actions including either of bit Set/Reset/Alternate and either of screen switching/
station No. switching are set for a touch switch, the timing when the screen or station No. changes
will vary depending on the standard monitor OS version in GOT, as shown below.
Setting item Standard monitor version 9.0.7 or earlier Standard monitor version 9.1.1 or later
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +
When the touch switch is released When the touch switch is touched
Set
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +
When the touch switch is released When the touch switch is touched
Reset
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +
When the touch switch is released When the touch switch is touched
Alternate
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +
When the touch switch is released
Momentary
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +
When the touch switch is touched When the touch switch is touched
Word
Standard monitor version 9.0.7: Stored in GT Designer Version5 30G edition
Standard monitor version 9.1.1: Stored in GT Designer Version5 31H edition or GT Designer2 Version1 00A edition
6 - 81 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.12 Precautions
Example: When multiple actions including followings are set for a touch switch. 1
When multiple actions including both screen switching and bit Alternate are set for a
touch switch, the device status after screen change is reversed between standard
monitor version 9.0.7 or earlier and 9.1.1 or later.
OVERVIEW
(However, when bit Momentary is set with other actions for a touch switch, the same
operation as standard monitor version 9.0.7 or earlier is performed.)
Bit Alternate : M100
Screen switching : Screen changes to base screen 2 when M100 turns ON. 2
Screen switching : Screen changes to base screen 1 when M100 turns OFF.
SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Action when standard monitor version 9.0.7 or earlier is used.
For standard monitor version 9.0.7 or earlier, the screen or station No. changes simultaneously
when the specified bit device has turned ON/OFF/ON OFF. The GOT operates based on the
value after the bit Set/Reset/Alternate is executed. 3
COMMON SETTING
Base screen 50 Base screen 2 Base screen 2 Base screen 1
M100
M100 turns ON when
M100
The screen changes when
M100
M100 turns OFF when the
M100
The screen changes when 4
the touch switch is touched. the touch switch is released. touch switch is touched again. the touch switch is released.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(b) Action when standard monitor version 9.1.1 or later is used.
For standard monitor version 9.1.1 or later, the screen or station No. changes simultaneously
when the specified bit device has turned ON/OFF/ON OFF. The GOT operates based on the
value before the bit Set/Reset/Alternate is executed. 5
COMMON SETTINGS
Base screen 50 Base screen 1 Base screen 1 Base screen 2
FOR OBJECTS
M100 M100 M100 M100 6
M100 turns ON and the screen M100 turns OFF and the screen
changes when the touch switch is touched. changes when the touch switch is touched.
(The operation is based on the value (M100: (The operation is based on the value (M100:
OFF) before the bit Alternate is executed.) ON) before the bit Alternate is executed.) LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
6.2 Touch Switch 6 - 82
6.2.12 Precautions
<Corrective action>
The same operation as standard monitor version 9.0.7 or earlier is preformed by turning the GOT
internal device (GS450.b12) ON before pressing the touch switch.
GS450.b12
Setting item
ON OFF
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +
When the touch switch is released When the touch switch is touched
Set
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +
When the touch switch is released When the touch switch is touched
Reset
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +
When the touch switch is released When the touch switch is touched
Alternate
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +
When the touch switch is released
Momentary
Screen switching/Station No. Switching +
When the touch switch is touched When the touch switch is touched
Word
The following example shows how to make the settings so that the status observation function will
work to automatically turn GS450.b12 ON after the GOT is powered ON.
<Example of setting the status observation function>
Make the following settings in the "Status Observation" screen.
The GOT internal device (device that is always ON: GS0.b4) functions as a trigger.
GS450.b12 turns ON when the trigger is ON.
With this settings, the status observation function works and GS450.b12 turns ON after the GOT is
powered ON.
For details of observation function, refer to the following.
Section 11.1 Status Observation Function
Make the settings in the
"Project" tab within the "Status
Observation" screen
Put the settings in the first line
(GS450.b12 turns ON righit
after the GOT is powerd ON)
Set "Observe Cycle" to
"Ordinary"
6 - 83 6.2 Touch Switch
6.2.12 Precautions
1
7. NUMERICAL/CHARACTER DISPLAY
OVERVIEW
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 2
SPECIFICATIONS
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
1 Numerical display ( Section 7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display) 3
This function allows the data saved in PLC CPU devices to be displayed as numeric values on GOT.
COMMON SETTING
D100 349 D100 722
4
D100=349 D100=722
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
2 Numerical input ( Section 7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input)
This function enables writing any value from GOT to PLC CPU device.
5
D100 130 D100 365
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
D100=130 D100=365
Example: 6
Displays numeric values in various patterns Displays/Inputs numeric value with decimal points
Section 7.1.2 setting Section 7.1.2 setting
LAMP, SWITCH
125
24.4
321
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Uses numerical display/numerical input in combination
Changes display /background color depending on the
with the lever display function
value (GOT-A900 Series only)
NUMERICAL/
(GOT-A900 Series only)
Setting on Case tab Section 10.2 Level
Present temperature Present temperature 8
58 125 25 98
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7-1
When inputting using the numerical input function
Setting for various operations such as input operation is available for each project or
screen.
<Setting example>
Setting the input order of multiple numerical values
Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
Sets the input order 1) 3) Sets the input
1) A 50 based on coordinate A 100 B 0 order in desired
B 150 position order
2) C 200 C 200 D 50
4) 2)
Setting the input key window
Section 4.6 Key Window
1
Uses user-created key w indow 0<$W<20 Displays input
(GOT-A900 Series only) value/input range
on key w indow
When the input value is out of range, displaying input range with message
Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
Data out of range was Data out of range was input
input $W < 300 $W < 300
OK
350
OK
Display/Not display of input range
can be selected
When input is out of range, setting display timing of message
Section 2.6.1 GOT internal devices
Data out of range was Data out of range was
input $W < 300 input $W < 300
OK OK
350 350
When GS450.b1 is ON, When GS450.b1 is OFF,
displays message during displays message on entry
numerical input. of numerical input
(Input check mode) (Input confirmation mode)
Setting Display/Not display confirmation message when inputting numerical
values
Section 2.6.1 GOT internal devices
Change to the Change to the following value
following value
353 353
OK Cancel
OK Cancel
350
When GS450.b0 is ON, displays When GS450.b0 is OFF,
confirmation message on entry of does not display confirmation
7-2 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.1 Arrangement and settings 1
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
OVERVIEW
Click on [Numerical Display]/ [Numerical Input]
Select [Object] [Numerical Display]/[Numerical Input] from the menu.
2
2 Clicking at a desired position completes the numerical display/numerical input setting.
(After the arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
SPECIFICATIONS
3 Double-clicking on the setting area of the numerical display/numerical input displays the setting dialog
box. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
3
Easier setting method
COMMON SETTING
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
4
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
Adjust the display position of object and the shape after
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Object outline frame
enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Shape frame
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7-3
7.1.1 Arrangement and settings
7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display
1 Setting items of Basic tab
(Example: When setting GOT-A900 series) (Example: When setting GOT-F900 series)
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Type Select the function to be used (Numerical display/Numerical input).
Set the device to be monitored.
Device
Device ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the displayed data format of a monitored device.
Signed (Unsigned) decimal: The value is displayed in decimal.
Hexadecimal :The value is displayed in hexadecimal.
Octal :The value is displayed in octal.
Binary :The value is displayed in binary.
Real :The value is displayed in real number.
(The GOT-F900 series displays a binary float value in real number.)
View Format Example: GOT display examples
Format Signed decimal : -12623 Binary : 0011000101001111
Unsigned decimal : 12623 Octal : 30517
Real : 1262.3 Hexadecimal : 314F
The default of a handled data format is signed BIN. To monitor by the other data format (unsigned
decimal, BCD, floating-point type real number) , change the setting in "Data Form" on the
Extended tab.
Color Select the color of the numeric character to be displayed.
(Continued to next page)
7-4 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
1
Items Description A F
Set the number of digits for the numeric value to be displayed.
OVERVIEW
Available number of digits is different depending on the [Format] setting.
Signed (Unsigned) decimal: 1 to 13 digits (including minus (-))
Digits Hexadecimal : 1 to 8 digits
Octal : 1 to 6 digits 2
Binary : 1 to 32 digits
Real : 1 to 32 digits (including minus (-), decimal point and decimal part)
SPECIFICATIONS
When REAL is selected in [Format], set the number of digits after the decimal points (1 to 32).
The lower digits of the set digit are rounded off.
At the setting "0", the lower digits of the decimal point are rounded off.
Example: Device value: 6.57
Number of digits after decimal point: 1
3
Decimal Point Rounded off
COMMON SETTING
6.57
6.6
6.57
4
View Select the text size (magnification of X Y) of the numeric value.Text size of 1X and 1Y
Format represents 16 8 dots.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Size
GOT-A900 series: A 0.5 to 8 multiple
0.5 to 8 multiple
GOT-F900 series: A 0.5 to 4 multiple
1 to 8 multiple 5
Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value/figure frame
COMMON SETTINGS
No : Not blink.
FOR OBJECTS
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
Reverse Check this item when reversing the numeric character.
Check this item when using high quality font to display numeric values.
6
(Only when display size X, Y is set to any of 2, 4, 6 or 8.)
LAMP, SWITCH
Use High Quality
Font
Normal Using high quality font 7
(Continued to next page)
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7-5
7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item to display the device value of integer (data format other than real number) as a
value with decimal point.
The device value is displayed at the number of digits set in "Decimal Point".
Example: Number of digits after Number of digits after
decimal point: 2 decimal point: 3
PLC device value: 20 PLC device value: 20
Adjust Decimal 0.20 0.02
Point Range
0.20 is displayed on GOT. 0.02 is displayed on GOT.
The automatic adjustment is also available for the following:
Display range : $V (Value of monitor device/Value of data operation result), the
View
specified device value
Format
Data operation : $$ (Value of monitor device), the specified device value
Characters (alphabets, numeric, Kanji and symbols) can be arbitrarily added to the number to be
displayed.
Each "#" indicates one numeric.
The rightmost number goes for the last digit. If the numeric characters exceed the set digit
number, the redundant numbers will not be displayed.
Example:
Format String
Adding a decimal point (.) and characters (Measured value and ) to the four-digit number (each #
is one numeric):
Setting in character format Data register in PLC Display in GOT-F900
Measured value ###.# K1234 Measured value 123.4
Use 6 8 dot font Font is displayed in size of 6 8 dots. (Characters only)
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame
Format Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Frame
Frame
Plate
Plate
Bg Transparent Select this when the background is to be transparent.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
7-6 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display
1
2 Extended Tab
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
In case of GOT-A900 Series In case of GOT-F900 Series 4
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Items Description A F
Select the data type of the device to be displayed.
GOT-A900 Series
Signed BIN : Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value. 5
BCD : Treats the word device value as a BCD (binary decimal) value.
Data Type
COMMON SETTINGS
Real : Treats the word device value as a floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
FOR OBJECTS
GOT-F900 Series
Signed BIN : Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary
Select the position to display the numeric value.
Left Center Right
6
Alignment
LAMP, SWITCH
150 150 1500 150
When [Right Alignment] is selected in [Alignment] and displaying zeros on the left to the numeric
value is needed, check this item. 7
Example: (In the case of five digits)
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Zero not suppressedZero suppressed
Fill with Zeros
NUMERICAL/
5 00005
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15). 8
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7-7
7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Select a blink area.
Blink Scope Data only : Makes the numerical area blink.
Data and Plate : Makes the numerical area and plate blink.
Select a desired display mode when displaying a numeric value with the level display overlapped.
Transparent : Displays the numeric value on the
level display.
[Transparent]
XOR : In order to identify the level and
numeric easily, the numeric
character is displayed in color
98
Display Mode
different from the level color based
on XOR. This is valid when GOT is [XOR]
Monochrome type/EL type.
20 50
( App.5 Synthesized Colors
Available for XOR)
Gain1 Set the value by which the monitor device value is multiplied.
Gain2 Set the value by which the monitor device value is divided.
Offset Set the value to be added to the monitor device value.
7-8 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display
1
3 Case Tab (GOT-A900 Series only)
The attribute can be changed on this setting tab depending on the device status.
For details of states, refer to the following.
OVERVIEW
Section 5.4 State Setting
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation 5
Items Description A F
COMMON SETTINGS
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
FOR OBJECTS
State*1 Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
New State Creates a new state.
Delete State Deletes a specified state. 6
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
Up/Down Changes the priority of the current state. LAMP, SWITCH
Displays the list of preset states.
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Select a condition for display change depending on the state.
Bit : Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit device.Then, 7
set the bit device and the device status (ON/OFF).
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Word : Select this to change the display based on a word device value.Then, set a
NUMERICAL/
conditional expression for the word device value in [Range].
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
Numerical Color Select a numerical color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied. 8
Plate Color Select a plate color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7-9
7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the blinking pattern of the numeric value.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
State*1 Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
Reverse Check this item to reverse numeric display.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 State
(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is in condition other than those set on the Case tab, it is displayed with the display
attribute set on the Basic tab.
(2) Display when conditions are overlapped
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Monitor device : D100
Data view format : Signed decimal with 16-bit data size
Priority level for
State No. Range Color
overlapped setting
High 1 M10 ON Red (Blink)
2 200<=$V<=300 Blue
3 1000<=$V Yellow (Reverse)
Normal case
Green
Low (State 0)
* $V represents the monitor device value.
When M10 is ON, the numeric value will be displayed in red
(Blink).
State 1 150
When the device value is within a range of 200 to 300
(200<=$V<= 300), the numeric value will be displayed in blue.
State 2 200
When the device value is 1000 or more (1000<=$V), the
numeric value will be displayed in yellow (Reverse)
State 3 3000
When the condition is out of the range of State 1 to 3, the
numeric value will be displayed in green.
Normal Case
150
(State 0)
7 - 10 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display
1
4 Trigger Tab (GOT-A900 Series only)
Set conditions for displaying the object.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
OVERVIEW
dialog box.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting 2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
FOR OBJECTS
Items Desctiption A F
Select trigger by which the object is displayed.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) in 1-second unit.
Trigger Type
Ordinary ON OFF Rise 6
Fall Sampling Range Bit Trigger
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
LAMP, SWITCH
When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items.
Word Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Range Select the data type (Signed BIN/ Unsigned BIN/Real) of the word device.
Trigger Data Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size]. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Range Click on the Exp button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used
Multi Bit
NUMERICAL/
Bit Number for the trigger.
Trigger
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their conditions.
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
Initial Display displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the conditions are not
satisfied.
8
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be
Hold Display held even though the conditions are not satisfied.
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the conditions become invalid.
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7 - 11
7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display
5 Data Operation Tab (GOT-A900 Series only)
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Desctiption A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
7 - 12 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.2 Setting items of numerical display
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input 1
1 Basic Tab
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(Example: GOT-A900 Series setting) (Example: GOT-F900 Series setting)
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
5
Type Select the function to be used (Numerical Display/Numerical Input)
COMMON SETTINGS
Device Set a word device to which the value is written. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
FOR OBJECTS
Device
Data Size Select data size of word device (16 bit/32 bit)
Select the displayed format of a write device value.
Signed (Unsigned) decimal : The value is displayed in decimal.
Hexadecimal : The value is displayed in hexadecimal. 6
Octal : The value is displayed in octal.
Binary : The value is displayed in binary.
Real : The value is displayed in real number. LAMP, SWITCH
(The GOT-F900 series displays a binary float value in real
number.)
View Format
Example: Example of GOT display
Format
Signed decimal : -12623 Binary : 0011000101001111 7
Unsigned decimal : 12623 Octal : 30517
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Real : 1262.3 Hexadecimal : 314F
NUMERICAL/
The default of a written data format is signed BIN. To write by the other data format (unsigned
decimal, BCD, floating-point type real number), change the setting in "Data Form" on the Extended
tab.
Color Select the color of the numeric character to be displayed. 8
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7 - 13
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Set the number of digits for the numeric value to be displayed.
Available number of digits is different depending on the Format setting.
Signed/ Unsigned decimal : 1 to 13 digits (including minus (-))
Hexadecimal : 1 to 8 digits
Digits
Octal : 1 to 6 digits
Binary : 1 to 32 digits
Real : 1 to 32 digits (including minus (-), decimal point and decimal
part)
When REAL is selected in [Format], set the number of digits after the decimal points (1 to 32).
The lower digits of the set digit are rounded off.
At the setting "0", the lower digits of the decimal point are rounded off.
Example: Device value: 6.57
Number of digits after decimal point: 1
Decimal Point Rounded off
6.57
6.6
6.57
View
Select the text size (magnification of X Y) of the numeric value.Text size of 1X and 1Y
Format
represents 16 8 dots.
Size
GOT-A900 Series: A 1 to 8 multiple
1 to 8 multiple
GOT-F900 Series: A 0.5 to 4 multiple
1 to 8 multiple
Select the blink pattern of the numeric value/figure frame
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
Reverse Check this item when reversing the numeric character.
Check this item when using high quality font to display numeric values.(Only when display size X,
Y is set to any of 2, 4, 6 or 8.)
Use High Quality
Font
Normal Using high quality font
(Continued to next page)
7 - 14 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
1
Items Description A F
Check this item to display the device value of integer (data format other than real number) as a
OVERVIEW
value with decimal point.
The device value is displayed at the number of digits set in "Decimal Point".
Example: Number of digits after Number of digits after
decimal point: 2 decimal point: 3 2
PLC device value: 20 PLC device value: 20
SPECIFICATIONS
0.20 0.02
Adjust Decimal
Point Range
0.20 is displayed on GOT. 0.02 is displayed on GOT.
The automatic adjustment is also available for the following: 3
Input range :$W (Input value), value of the specified device
Data operation :<Monitor expression> $$ (Value of monitor device), value of
COMMON SETTING
View
specified value
Format
<Write operation expression> $W (Input value)
Characters (alphabets, numeric, Kanji and symbols) can be arbitrarily added to the number to be
displayed.
Each "#" indicates one numeric.
The rightmost number goes for the last digit. If the numeric characters exceed the set digit
4
number, the redundant numbers will not be displayed.
OBJECT SETTING
Example:
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Format String
Adding a decimal point (.) and characters (Measured value and ) to the four-digit number (each #
is one numeric):
Setting in character format Data register in PLC Display in GOT-F900
Measured value ###.# K1234 Measured value 123.4 5
COMMON SETTINGS
Use 6 8 dot font Font is displayed in size of 6 8 dots. (Characters only)
FOR OBJECTS
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
6
Frame
Format Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Frame
Frame LAMP, SWITCH
Plate
Plate
Bg Transparent Select this when the background is to be transparent.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
7
Category
CHARACTER DISPLAY
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7 - 15
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input
2 Extended Tab
In case of GOT-A900 Series In case of GOT-F900 Series
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the data type of the device to be displayed or input.
GOT-A900 Series
Signed BIN : Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value.
BCD : Treats the word device value as a BCD (binary decimal) value.
Data Type
Real : Treats the word device value as a floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
GOT-F900 Series
Signed BIN : Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Select the position to display the numeric value.
Left Center Right
Alignment
150 150 1500 150
When [Right Alignment] is selected in [Alignment] and displaying zeros on the left to the numeric
value is needed, check this item.
Example: (In the case of five digits)
Zero not suppressedZero suppressed
Fill with Zeros
5 00005
(Continued to next page)
7 - 16 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input
Extended
1
Basic Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
OVERVIEW
When not using the function, set it to "0".
Security Be sure to set a larger value to Security (Input) than Security (Display).
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
2
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
SPECIFICATIONS
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Select a blink area.
Blink Scope Data only
Data and Plate
: Makes the numerical area blink.
: Makes the numerical area and plate blink.
3
Check this item when writing the value input in [Numerical Input] to devices.
COMMON SETTING
Write When the data operation has been set, the data before operation can be saved.
After checking, set the device.
After completion of numerical input, check this item when turning ON a bit device.
After checking, click on the Device button and set the device.
When setting is completed, set the device operation.
ON : When numerical input is completed, the set bit device is turned on.
4
ON to OFF : When numerical input is completed, the set bit device is turned on, and
Write Check
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
it will be turned off after a certain period of time has elapsed.
PREPARATORY
It is very convenient for the case that handshake on the PLC CPU side
is difficult.
After selecting, set the time for which the bit device is on (0.5 to 3
seconds).
User ID *1 Check this item when setting user ID No. (1 to 65535).
5
COMMON SETTINGS
When numerical input is completed, check this item to move the cursor for the numerical input of
the specified user ID No.
FOR OBJECTS
After checking, set the user ID No. to move the cursor for the next numerical input.
After setting, click on the Screen Properties button and set [Defined Key Action] to [User ID Order]
to display this function.
Move Destination ID
User ID Move Destination ID 6
A B A 2 1
B 4 3
C D C 3 2
D 1 4 LAMP, SWITCH
Arrow: Cursor's movement
Use the radio buttons to select whether to set upper/lower values as fixed values or to set with the
Controller
value saved in the specified device.
Fixed : Select this when setting by inputting upper/lower limit values.
7
Upper/Lower
CHARACTER DISPLAY
value range Device : Select this when setting the values stored in the specified devices as the upper/
lower limit values.
NUMERICAL/
Click on the Device button and set the word devices.
Gain1 Set the value by which the write value is multiplied.
Gain2 Set the value by which the write value is divided.
Offset Set the value to be added to the write value.
8
For details of *1, refer to the following.
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7 - 17
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input
*1 User ID
The user ID setting allows the cursor position setting for screen switching ( Section 4.5 Auxiliary
Settings) and confirm timing of numerical input to be stored into devices ( refer to the following).
(1) Confirm timing of numerical input (System Information)
In the case of GOT-A900 series
When a input value is entered using the numerical input function, the user ID is written to
"Numeric Value Input Number" in "System Information" and "Numeric Value Input Signal" turns
on.
When clearing the user ID written to "Numeric Value Input Number" or turning off "Numeric Value
Input Signal", turn on "Numeric Value Input Read Complete Signal".
(After clearing, turn off the numeric value input read complete signal. If the signal remains ON,
storing the user ID or turning on the bit device cannot be done even if the numerical value has
been input.)
Key input of numeric value 1 2 Confirm
ON
Numeric value input signal OFF
System signal 2.b4
Numeric value input number Stores user ID number Stores "0"
ON
Numeric value input read
OFF
complete signal
System signal 1.b4
System signal 2 b4 Numeric value input signal : Turn on when a value is entered using the numerical input function.
System signal 1 b4 Numeric value read complete signal: When this signal turns on, the numeric value input signal (System
signal 2 b4) turns off.
In the case of GOT-F900 series
When the input value is determined in the Numeric input function, the user ID is written in "User
ID" in "System Information", and the "data change completion" signal turns ON.
To set to OFF the "data change completion" signal, reset it in the sequence program.
Key input of numeric value 1 2 Confirm
ON
Data being changed signal
System signal 2.b8
ON
OFF
Data chang completion
signal system signal 2.b2
Stores user ID number
Numeric input No.
ON
The data change completion OFF
signal is reset by the PLC
For the setting method of the system information, refer to the following.
Section 3.5 System Information Setting
7 - 18 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input
1
3 Case Tab (GOT-A900 Series only)
The attribute can be changed on this setting depending on the device status.
For details of states, refer to the following.
OVERVIEW
Section 5.4 State Setting
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation 5
Items Description A F
COMMON SETTINGS
Check this item when setting the display range and the input range separately.
FOR OBJECTS
Set Display Range and Input After checking, click on the Display or Input button to set each range.
Range Separately*1 Display : Set condition and attribute for the numerical display.
Input : Set input range for the numerical input function.
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state. 6
*2 Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).
State
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
LAMP, SWITCH
New State Creates a new state.
Delete State Deletes a specified state.
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
Up/Down Changes the priority of the current state.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Displays the list of preset states.
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
NUMERICAL/
Select a condition for display change depending on the state.
Bit : Select this to change the display based on ON/OFF status of a bit device.
Then, set the bit device and the device status (ON/OFF).
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
8
Word : Select this to change the display based on a word device value.
Then, set a conditional expression for the word device value in [Range].
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7 - 19
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
Numerical
Select a numerical color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
Color
Plate Color Select a plate color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
State Select the blinking pattern of the numeric display.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
Reverse Check this item to reverse numeric display.
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
*1 Set Display Range and Input Range Separately
By setting display range and input range separately, the attribute can be changed depending on the
displayed value and the input exceeding the set range can be restricted.
(1) When displaying
The attributes (Numerical color/Background color/Reverse display/Blink) can be changed
depending on the display value.
125 759 1250
Case : 0<=$W<=500 Case : 510<=$W<=1000 Case : 1000<=$W
Numerical color : Blue Numerical color : Green Numerical color : Green
Plate color : White Plate color : Red Plate color : Red
Blink: : None Blink: : None Blink: : Set
(2) When inputting
When an input exceeds the set range, a message will be displayed and the numerical input will be
restricted.
Input of the data exceeding
the range is not available
338 0 <= $W <= 1000
OK
Case : 0<=$W<=1000
Value from 0 to 1000 Input of a value exceeding the
can be input. range (0 to 1000) is not available.
7 - 20 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input
*2 State 1
(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is in condition other than those set on the Case tab, it is displayed with the display
attribute set on the Basic tab.
OVERVIEW
(2) Display when conditions are overlapped
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Monitor device : D100 2
Data view format : Signed decimal with 16-bit data size
SPECIFICATIONS
Priority level for
State No. Range Color
overlapped setting
High 1 200<=$W<=300 Blue
2 1000<=$W Yellow (Reverse)
3
Normal case
$W<=0 Red (Blink)
3
---- Green
Low (State 0)
COMMON SETTING
* $V represents the monitor device value.
When the device value is 200 to 300 (200<=$W<= 300),
numeric value will be displayed in blue.
State 1 200
4
OBJECT SETTING
When the device value is 1000 or more (1000<=$W), the
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
numeric value will be displayed in yellow (reverse).
State 2 3000
When the device value is 0 or less ($W<= 0), the numeric
5
value will be displayed in red (blink).
COMMON SETTINGS
State 3 -200
FOR OBJECTS
When the condition is out of the range of State 1 to 3, the
Normal case
numeric value will be displayed in green. 6
150
(State 0)
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7 - 21
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input
4 Trigger Tab
Set conditions for displaying the object.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting
(Example: On GOT-A900 Series setting)
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the trigger type for displaying the object.
GOT-A900 Series
Trigger Type*1 Ordinary ON OFF Range Bit Trigger
G0T-F900 Series
Ordinary ON OFF
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items.
Word Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Range Select the data type (Signed BIN/ Unsigned BIN/Real) of the word device.
Trigger Data Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
Range Click on the Exp button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used for
Multi Bit
Bit Number the trigger.
Trigger
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their conditions.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Cursor display when condition fails in numerical input
For cursor display when the condition fails in numerical input, refer to the following.
Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
7 - 22 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input
1
5 Data Operation Tab (GOT-A900 Series only)
Operational expression is set on this tab when operating the input value and writing the obtained value
to the device.
OVERVIEW
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
2
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Bit Mask
Check this to enable bit mask operation.
6
Set the bit mask pattern value in hexadecimal format.
Bit Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Operation Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number]. LAMP, SWITCH
Bit Shift
Left : Left shift
Right : Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
Monitor Click on this and set the operational expression for monitoring device. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Write Click on this and set the operational expression for writing to device.
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7 - 23
7.1.3 Setting items of numerical input
7.1.4 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using the numerical display/input function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Maximum number of objects that can be set on 1 screen
(a) GOT-A900 Series
Number of numerical display objects : 512
Number of numerical input objects : 256
(b) GOT-F900 Series
Number of numerical display objects : 50
Number of numerical input objects : 50
(2) When overlaying numerical display with level display
When displaying numerical values with the level display overlapped, refer to the level
precautions.
Section 10.2 Level
(3) Numerical input arrange position
Depending on the arranged position of the numerical input, there are cases the input operation is
not possible.
Before downloading the created project data to a GOT, check the arranged position of the
numerical input by the data check function of GT Designer2.
For the procedure for using the data check function, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual (Section 9.3 Checking Monitor Data for
Errors)
If an error is detected in data check, take the corrective action as below.
1 Change the GT Designer2 grid spacing to 16 dots.
2 Change the arrangement of object so that a center point of 16-dot grid is included in the object.
Grids displayed by GT Designer2
1234
1234
Input operation is not possible Arrange an object so that it includes the
unless the center point of 16-dot grids center point of 16-dot grids.
is included in the position where an
object is arranged.
7 - 24 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.4 Precautions
2 Precautions for use
1
(1) When numerical input is set on window screen
When the numerical input function is used on the base screen and the window screen at the same
OVERVIEW
time, the input cursor is displayed only on the window screen.
D10 150 2
D10 20 0
D30 0
SPECIFICATIONS
D40 0
(2) When special function switch (key window) is set
If a key window is displayed using a special function switch when an input cursor is not displayed at 3
a numerical input, the key window will be displayed as follows;
COMMON SETTING
(a) For default key window
A default key window for hexadecimal input will be displayed.
(b) For user-created key window
The screen set at [DEC key sheet No.] will be displayed.
If the above setting is not made, a default key window for hexadecimal input will be displayed. 4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(3) When blink is set
The input cursor will stop blinking temporarily when it is displayed.
(4) When [ON and OFF after] is set in write check (GOT-A900 series only) 5
(a) Don't turn on twenty-one devices above simultaneously.
COMMON SETTINGS
Or not, the 22nd device or later cannot be turned off automatically.
FOR OBJECTS
(b) At using the same write completed device for multiple numerical inputs, set the numerical input
to not be able to input the value while the write completed device is ON.
Setting example) Set the operation condition to trigger type "OFF" and the device "M10"
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7 - 25
7.1.4 Precautions
At inputting before turning OFF, the write completed device will not turn OFF at normal timing.
Example: Write completed device: M10 (which turns OFF in 3 seconds after it turned ON)
Numerical input A 0 400
Numerical input B 0 100
OFF timing of numerical input B
ON Actual OFF timing
Write completed
OFF
device (M10)
3 seconds
(c) The write completed device will not turn OFF if screen switching (including switching to the
utility) occurs while the write completed device is ON. It keeps ON for the specified period of
time.
(5) To insert/delete numerals in a numeric value
The cursor is fixed to the right end of the object. Continue to delete numerals from that point until
the cursor reaches the position you want to insert/delete numerals.
3 When using input check mode (GOT-A900 series only)
(1) For use of the input check mode
(a) When using the input check mode, install the standard monitor OS of the GT Designer2
Version1 00A or later into GOT.
If the standard monitor OS version is old, install it again.
For how to install the standard monitor OS, refer to the following manual.
GT Designer2 Version2 Operating Manual
(b) The input check mode will be enabled when GOT's internal device GS450.b1 is ON.
When GOT is started, GS450.b1 must be turned on with the touch switch, etc.
Activating the input check mode when starting GOT
Using the script function allows the input check mode to be activated when starting
GOT.
Rise trigger : GS0.b4
Script description example : set ([b:GS450.01])
(2) Precautions for using input check mode
The input check mode operates under the following conditions.
(a) One Case
If the number of cases is more than one, the input range check is executed not during input but
when the RET key is pressed.
7 - 26 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
7.1.4 Precautions
(b) When range expression pattern is as follows:
1
A<B,A<=B
A: Monitor device ($W) B: Fixed value/Specified device
(B is a positive numeric value)
OVERVIEW
A<B<C,A<=B<C,A<B<=C,A<=B<=C
A: Fixed value/Specified device,B: Monitor device ($W),C: Fixed value/Specified device
(C is a positive numeric value) 2
Remark (1) Lower limit value check
SPECIFICATIONS
The lower limit value check is executed when the RET key is pressed.
(2) Comparison with specified device
When comparing with the specified device, if the device value cannot be read, an
error message will be displayed.
3
COMMON SETTING
4 Precautions for input confirmation message display
(1) Number of digits for numeric value available for message
Depending on GOT types, the numeric value digits available for display is different.
The digits exceed the following limit are not displayed on the message.
GT SoftGOT2, A985GOT, A97*GOT, A960GOT: 35 digits
4
A956WGOT, A95*GOT: 23 digits
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Example) A956WGOT, A95*GOT
Do you want to change
to the following value?
12345678901234567890123 4567890
OK Cancel
The 24th digits or later
are not displayed.
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
(2) Message position
The message position will be different depending on the key window type.
(a) When using default key window
The message is displayed on the key window. 6
(b) When using user-created key window or no key window
The message is displayed on the center of the screen.
LAMP, SWITCH
5 Precautions in using the GOT-F900 series
(1) Real number display and availability of data operation when "Real" is set in "Format" on the "Basic"
tab, data operation of "Gain1", "Gain2" and "Offset" cannot be executed. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input 7 - 27
7.1.4 Precautions
7.2 Data List
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This section explains the data list function that displays multiple word device values in list form.
With this function, line No. and ruled lines of the list are displayed automatically.
No. Line Plan Output Fault
1 Line 1 1000 800 2
2 Line 2 500 250 0
3 Line 3 800 600 1
4 Line 4 900 850 3
No. Line Plan Output Fault
D10:1000 D11:800 D12: 2
1 Line 1 1000 800 2
D20: 500 D21:250 D22: 0
2 Line 2 500 250 0
D30: 800 D31:600 D32: 1
3 Line 3 800 600 1
D40: 900 D41:850 D42: 3
4 Line 4 900 850 3
Example:
Sort lines according to the values of the prior setting
Display the list with statistics graph on the same screen
item.
Set on Basic tab Section 10.6 Statistics Graph
No. Line Plan Output Fault
No. Line Plan Output Fault
2 Line 2 500 250 0
1 Line 1 1000 800 2
3 Line 3 800 600 1
2 Line 2 500 250 0
1 Line 1 1000 800 2
3 Line 3 800 600 1
4 Line 4 900 850 3
4 Line 4 900 850 3
The lines will be displayed in ascending order of
Device status can be displayed effectively.
"Output" values.
Remark Comments displayed by using data list
Comments must be registered in advance for displaying in data list.
Section 4.1 Comment Registration
7 - 28 7.2 Data List
7.2.1 Required knowledge for data list setting 1
1 Methods of setting data list
OVERVIEW
The basic function of data list can be set on the following to tab screen in order.
1 Basic tab 2
Set the number of columns and lines for data list.
SPECIFICATIONS
Fixed Comment
text column Data column
No. Line Plan Output Fault Setting item name is displayed.
1 Line 1 1000 800 2
2 Line 2 500 250 0
3
Number of lines (rows, display rows)
COMMON SETTING
3 Line 3 800 600 1
4 Line 4 900 850 3
Label Comment is Device value is
(Rows) displayed. displayed.
4
2 List tab
Set devices, comments, label color or similar on each dialog box.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Set devices, comments,
label color to be displayed
in lines
COMMON SETTINGS
Set the view format of
FOR OBJECTS
comment columns.
1) 1)
2) 2)
3) 3)
4) 4)
6
Set the view format of data
columns.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
Continuous : Set continuous comments and devices.
Set the head comment and device in 1).
Random : Set comments and continuous devices for each line.
Set comments and the head device in 1) to 4).
8
ALARM
7.2 Data List 7 - 29
7.2.1 Required knowledge for data list setting
2 Data list function
(1) Scroll function
In data list, the number of screen display lines (display rows) can be set separately from the
number of corresponding set lines (rows).
When scroll up/scroll down key is set, data list can be scrolled up and down
Lines displayed on screen
Lines monitored actually
No. Line Plan Output Fault No. Line Plan Output Fault
1 Line 1 1000 800 2 1 Line 1 1000 800 2
2 Line 2 500 250 0 Display 2 Line 2 500 250 0
3 Line 3 800 600 1 rows: 4 lines 3 Line 3 800 600 1
4 Line 4 900 850 3 4 Line 4 900 850 3 Rows:
8 lines
5 Line 5 1000 900 1
Scroll up Scroll down
6 Line 6 1000 950 2
Create scroll keys by setting key code in touch switch.
7 Line 7 800 300 0
Scroll up: 00F2H
Scroll down: 00F3H 8 Line 8 900 700 0
No. Line Plan Output Fault
5 Line 5 1000 900 1
6 Line 6 1000 950 2
7 Line 7 800 300 0
8 Line 8 900 700 0
Scroll up Scroll down
Touch scroll up/scroll down key to switch the screen
display by one screen.
(2) Sort function
Lines can be sorted based on device status of specified columns (ascending/descending order of
device value).
Example: Sort the lines in descending order of device values of the third column.
Make the settings on basic tab as follows:
Rows : 8 lines Sort : Descending
Display rows : 4 lines Sort/Attribute column : 3 columns
The columns will be sorted in descending order of "Output" values.
No. Line Plan Output Fault No. Line Plan Output Fault
1 Line 1 1000 800 2 6 Line 6 1000 950 2
Display 2 Line 2 500 250 0 5 Line 5 1000 900 1
rows
3 Line 3 800 600 1 4 Line 4 900 850 3
4 Line 4 900 850 3 1 Line 1 1000 800 2
5 Line 5 1000 900 1 8 Line 8 900 700 0
Lines not 6 Line 6 1000 950 2 3 Line 3 800 600 1
displayed 7 Line 7 800 300 0 7 Line 7 800 300 0
8 Line 8 900 700 0 2 Line 2 500 250 0
7 - 30 7.2 Data List
7.2.1 Required knowledge for data list setting
7.2.2 Arrangement and settings 1
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
OVERVIEW
Click on [Data List]
Select [Object] [Data List] from the menu.
2
2 Click on the data list display position to complete the data list arrangement.
SPECIFICATIONS
3 Double click on the arranged data list to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with reference
to the following explanation.
Easier setting method
3
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
COMMON SETTING
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
4
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
OBJECT SETTING
Object outline frame
OPERATION FOR
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
PREPARATORY
Shape frame
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.2 Data List 7 - 31
7.2.2 Arrangement and settings
7.2.3 Setting items
1 Basic tab
This tab screen is used to set the device value to be monitored and the list form to display a comment.
Basic List Extended Case Trigger
Items Description A F
Rows Set the number of lines for monitoring devices using data list (1 to 128).
Set the number of lines to be displayed on screen (1 to 27).
Display Rows The lines out of the screen can be displayed with scroll up/scroll down key.
( Section 7.2.1 Required knowledge for data list setting)
Columns Set the number of columns to be displayed (2 to 6).
Check this item to display a label.
Label
After check, set number of label digits (2 to 6). (one digit for one character)
Set the text (title, comment, numeric value) to be displayed and ruled line space of the list (0 to 32
dots).
List Form
Space
No. Result Output
Select the size of text (title, comment, numeric value) to be displayed.
Size
Size of X Y is 16 8 dots.
Set the method of arranging (sort) lines.
No. order : Display in line number column order.
Sort Ascending : Arrange from small value to large value.
Descending : Arrange from large value to small value.
Without sort : Not sort.
(Contenued to next page)
7 - 32 7.2 Data List
7.2.3 Setting items
Basic List Extended Case Trigger
1
Items Description A F
Sort/Attr Column Set the sort basis column.
OVERVIEW
List Form Check this item to display numeric values as high quality font.
Use High Quality
Font (only when the magnification factor of X Y is set to 2, 4, 6, 8)
Set a frame for the object.
2
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
SPECIFICATIONS
selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame Set the color for each part of the list.
Frame
Plate
Title
(The color of each title) Frame 3
Format Title
COMMON SETTING
No. Line Output Fault
Text 1 Line 1 25 3
2 Line 2 30 3 Text
3 Line 3 32 5
4 Line 4 41 3
5 Line 5 38 0 Plate
Ruled Line
Ruled Line
4
Reverse Check this item to reverse text.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.2 Data List 7 - 33
7.2.3 Setting items
2 List tab
Click on Column button and Row button on this dialog box to display the corresponding setting dialog
box. Then set devices and comments on the dialog box.
For the settings on each setting dialog box, refer to the following explanation (1) to (3).
(1) Edit rows dialog box
Make the settings to be displayed in rows.
(Device, comment, label)
(2) Edit columns dialog box (comment column)
Set the display attribute of comment column.
(3) Edit rows (Data column) dialog box
Set the display attribute of data column.
Title, device and comment can be input directly.
Title
Comment No. Device
Basic List Extended Case Trigger
Items Description A F
Select a device setting method.
Continuous : Set devices of continuous No. through all rows.
Random : Set devices of continuous No. in each row.
Example: When "Continuous" is set When "Random" is set
Device No. Set initial device Set initial device in each row
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4
Line 1 1 D10 D11 D12 Line 1 1 D10 D11 D12
Line 2 2 D13 D14 D15 Line 2 2 D20 D21 D22
Line 3 3 D16 D17 D18 Line 3 3 D30 D31 D32
Select a comment setting method.
Comment No. Continuous : Set comments of continuous No. through all rows.
Random : Set comments of continuous No. in each row.
7 - 34 7.2 Data List
7.2.3 Setting items
(1) Edit Rows dialog box
1
This dialog box is used to set the device to be monitored, comment to be displayed and label
(display attribute).
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
Items Description A F
COMMON SETTING
Set the device to be monitored.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Comment No. Set the comment No. to be displayed in the selected line.
Label Pattern Select label pattern/label foreground/label background.
Label Foreground
The pattern is displayed in color of the label foreground on the label background. 4
OBJECT SETTING
Example: Label Pattern + Label Foreground
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Label Pattern :
Label Background Label Foreground :
Label Background :
Label Background
COMMON SETTINGS
(2) Edit columns (comment column) dialog box
This dialog box is used to set the number of comment characters, the title and title color of the
FOR OBJECTS
column.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Items Description A F
Digits Set number of comment characters from 1 to 80 (80 characters).
NUMERICAL/
Title Input the title of comment column.
Color Select the title color.
8
ALARM
7.2 Data List 7 - 35
7.2.3 Setting items
(3) Edit Columns (Data Column) dialog box
(a) View format tab
This tab is used to set the number of digits for device value, view format/ data type of the
device to be monitored, title and title color of the column.
Format Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the view format of the monitor device value.
Signed decimal : Displays the value in signed decimal.
Unsigned decimal : Displays the value in unsigned decimal.
Format Hexadecimal : Displays value in hexadecimal.
Octal : Displays value in octal.
Binary : Displays value in binary.
Real : Displays the value in floating point type real number.
Select the position based on the width of data column.
Left : Align left.
Alignment
Center : Align center.
Right : Align right.
When [Right Alignment] is selected in [Alignment] and displaying zeros on the left to the numeric
Fill with Zeros
value is needed, check this item.
Set the number of digits for the device value to be displayed in data column.
Available number of digits is different depending on the [Format] setting.
Signed (Unsigned) decimal : 1 to 13 digits (includes minus (-))
Hexadecimal : 1 to 8 digits
Digits
Octal : 1 to 6 digits
Binary : 1 to 32 digits
Real : 1 to 32 digits (includes minus (-), decimal point and decimal
part)
Decimal Point When REAL is selected in [Format], set the number of digits (1 to 32) for the decimal part.
(Contenued to next page)
7 - 36 7.2 Data List
7.2.3 Setting items
Format Data Operation
1
Items Description A F
Select the data type of word device to be monitored.
OVERVIEW
After selecting, set the data size (16 bit, 32 bit).
Signed BIN : Treats word device value as signed binary value.
Data Type Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as unsigned binary value.
BCD : Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value. 2
Real : Treats word device value as floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
SPECIFICATIONS
Title Input the title of data column.
Color Select the title color.
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.2 Data List 7 - 37
7.2.3 Setting items
(b) Data Operation tab
This tab is used to set the expression to operate the device value and display the results.
For details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function
Format Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
7 - 38 7.2 Data List
7.2.3 Setting items
1
3 Extended tab
Set the security and offset.
This tab is displayed by checking "Extended" at the bottom of dialog box.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Basic List Extended Case Trigger
Items Description A F
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15). 5
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
COMMON SETTINGS
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
FOR OBJECTS
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting) 6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.2 Data List 7 - 39
7.2.3 Setting items
4 Case tab (GOT-A900 Series only)
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
This tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the dialog box.
For details of state, refer to the following.
Section 5.4 State Setting
Basic List Extended Case Trigger
Items Description A F
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
State *1
Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case). (State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
New State Creates a new state.
Delete State Deletes a specified state.
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
Up/Down Change the priority of the current state.
Displays the list of preset states.
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression
Text Color Select a text color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied
Plate Color Select a plate color for the case that conditions for the state display are satisfied.
Reverse Check this item to revers text.
* For details of 1, refer to the following.
*1 State
(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is in condition other than those set on the Case tab, it is displayed with the display
attribute set on the Basic tab.
7 - 40 7.2 Data List
7.2.3 Setting items
(2) Display when conditions are overlapped
1
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
(3) State conditions of data list
OVERVIEW
In data list, $V value of a state condition (monitor device) is the device value set in the 2nd column.
Example:
SPECIFICATIONS
3
D10, D20, D30 and D40 are treated as $V value.
COMMON SETTING
Example: Device : D10, D20, D30, D40
Data view format : Signed decimal, with size of 16 bits
No. Line Output Fault
1
2
Line 1
Line 2
D10
D20
D11
D21
4
3 Line 3 D30 D31
4 Line 4 D40 D41
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Action priority
when setting State No. Range Text color Plate color
overlaps
High 1 1000<= $V White Green 5
2 900<=$V<=999 Yellow White
COMMON SETTINGS
Normal case
Low ---- Black White
FOR OBJECTS
(State 0)
When monitor device value is over
No. Line Output Fault
1000 (1000 $V), the plate color will 1 Line 1 1000 2
State 1 be changed to green. 2
3
Line 2
Line 3
1000
950
0
1
6
4 Line 4 980 3
When monitor device value is 900 to LAMP, SWITCH
No. Line Output Fault
999 (900 $V 999), the text color 1 Line 1 890 2
State 2 will be changed to yellow. 2 Line 2 880 0
3 Line 3 920 1
4 Line 4 910 3
When monitor device value is out of
7
No. Line Output Fault
CHARACTER DISPLAY
the range (below 899), the text color
Normal case 1 Line 1 890 2
will be black and the plate color will be 2 Line 2 880 0
(State 0)
NUMERICAL/
white. 3 Line 3 820 1
4 Line 4 810 3
8
ALARM
7.2 Data List 7 - 41
7.2.3 Setting items
5 Trigger tab
Set conditions to display an object.
This tab is displayed by checking the extended function at the bottom of dialog box.
For details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting
Basic List Extended Case Trigger
Items Description A F
Select the trigger type for displaying the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) in 1-second unit.
Trigger Type
Ordinary ON OFF Rise
Fall Sampling Range Bit Trigger
Trigger Device Click on button Dev to specify the device used for the trigger.
Word Range Trigger When Range is selected in Trigger Type , set the following items.
Date Size Select the data size (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type (Signed BIN/ Unsigned BIN/Real) of word device.
Data Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
Range Click on the Exp button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used
Multi Bit
Bit Number for the trigger.
Trigger
After setting, click the Setting button to set the bit device and operation condition.
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
Initial Display displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the conditions are not
satisfied.
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be
Hold Display held even though the conditions are not satisfied.
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the conditions become invalid.
7 - 42 7.2 Data List
7.2.3 Setting items
7.2.4 Precautions 1
This section provides the precautions for using data list function.
OVERVIEW
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Maximum number of data list objects in one screen
GOT-A900 Series: 1 2
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Applicable screen
Only base screen can be set.
(3) Precautions for using together with other object
(a) The object that cannot be set on the same screen
3
Alarm history cannot be set on the same screen.
COMMON SETTING
(b) The object restricted on the applicable function
In alarm list, the touch switch used for alarm list (user alarm) cannot be set.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.2 Data List 7 - 43
7.2.4 Precautions
7.3 ASCII Display/Input
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
1 ASCII display
ASCII display is the function that treats the data stored in word device as text code (ASCII code) to
display the text column.
QX 40 QX 42
D12 5851H (XQ) D12 5851H (XQ)
D13 3420H (4 ) D13 3420H (4 )
D14 0030H (0) D14 0032H (2)
2 ASCII input
ASCII input is the function that writes the input text into word device in text code (ASCII code).
The keys for input are created by assigning key codes to touch switch.
Input from the touch switches arranged on the screen
ABC ABCD
A B DEL A B DEL
C D E F - ESC
CC C D E F - ESC
CCCC
Input from the key window
ABC ABCD
Input a text Using the Write key (key code: 000DH),
write the input text in text code
D10 0000H D10 4241H (BA)
D11 0000H D11 4443H (DC)
*1 The key window must be created by the user.
Refer to the following section for the creating method, types and operation method of the key window.
Section 4.6 Key Window
7 - 44 7.3 ASCII Display/Input
1
(1) The key for ASCII input
(a) To use the key registered in GT Designer2 library
The key for ASCII input is registered in GT Designer2 library.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
(b) To create the key window for ASCII input.
Users can create key window for ASCII input.
Register the window screen in which keys for ASCII input are arranged as
key window. 4
The created key window operates as numerical input function key window.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Section 4.6.4 How to create user-created key window
PREPARATORY
Register the user-created window for
ABCD ASCII input as key window. (Only with
A
H
B
I
C
J
D
K
E F G
L M N
GOT-A900 series)
5
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z
COMMON SETTINGS
(2) Input operation during ASCII input
The input status during ASCII input (display of key window and cursor) and the
FOR OBJECTS
input order (cursor sort) can be customized for each project and screen.
Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
Example 1: Setting the input order of multiple ASCII input
6
Make the settings 1 3 Make the settings
A J71L P according the positions A T.K B A.S at random
B J71BR
LAMP, SWITCH
C J71AR
C C.B D K.D
4 2
Example 2: Erasing ASCII input function when trigger is disabled
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
ABC ASCII input function is erased.
A B C D E F G
NUMERICAL/
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z When the trigger ABC
is disabled
When the trigger
is disabled
The key window for ASCII input is erased.
8
ALARM
7.3 ASCII Display/Input 7 - 45
7.3.1 Before setting ASCII display/input
1 Text code reading/writing order
Read/written text codes are stored in order from lower to higher byte.
Read/written text codes are stored in reverse order every 8 bits.
Example: In the case of ASCII display (ASCII codes "41 (A)", "42 (B)" are displayed)
Set device ASCII display
L 41H AB
D10
H 42H
(4142H)
(4241H)
L: Lower byte H: Higher byte
2 Number of display digits and available devices
One word device is used for ASCII display/input every two display digits.
Example: Set device (head device) : D1
Number of display digits : 3
Two word devices D1 and D2 are used.
7 - 46 7.3 ASCII Display/Input
7.3.1 Before setting ASCII display/input
7.3.2 Arrangement and settings 1
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
OVERVIEW
Click on [ASCII Display]/ [ASCII Input]
Select [Object] [ASCII Display] / [ASCII Input] from the menu.
2
2 Click on the position where ASCII Display/ASCII Input to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
SPECIFICATIONS
3 Double click on the arranged ASCII Display/ASCII Input to display the setting dialog box.
Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
Easier setting method
3
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
COMMON SETTING
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
4
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
Object outline frame
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
PREPARATORY
Shape frame
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.3 ASCII Display/Input 7 - 47
7.3.2 Arrangement and settings
7.3.3 Setting items
1 Basic tab
This tab is used to select ASCII display function or ASCII input function, and set the target device and
view format (text size, digits, display frame)
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
Basic Extended Trigger
Basic Others
Items Description A F
Type Select the function to be used (ASCII display/ASCII input).
Device Set the head bit device where text code is stored
Select the size of text (width height).
Size of X Y is 8 16 dots.
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
Size
0.5 to 8 (ASCII display) 0.5 to 4 (ASCII display)
A 1 to 8 (ASCII input) A 1 to 4 (ASCII input)
1 to 8 1 to 8
Set the number of digits (1 to 80) for the text to be displayed/input.
The applicable number of digits differ according to text type:
View Digits
Text (ASCII code) : 1 digit
Format
Text (ASCII code) : 1 digit
Color Select the color of text to be displayed.
Select the position to display the text.
Left: AAAA Center: AAAA Right: AAAA
Alignment
BB BB BB
CCCC CCCC CCCC
Use 6 8 dot font Font is displayed in size of 6 8 dots. (Characters only)
(Continued to next page)
7 - 48 7.3 ASCII Display/Input
7.3.3 Setting items
Basic Extended Trigger
1
Basic Others
OVERVIEW
Items Description A F
Select the blinking pattern of the text/figure frame
No : Not blink.
View
Blink
Low : Blinks every 1 second.
2
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
Format High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
SPECIFICATIONS
If blink setting is made, it will not blink while the input cursor is displayed.
Reverse Check this item to reverse text.
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be 3
selected.
COMMON SETTING
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame
Format Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Frame
Frame
ABCDEFG
4
Plate
Plate
Bg Transparent Select this when the background is to be transparent.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
PREPARATORY
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.3 ASCII Display/Input 7 - 49
7.3.3 Setting items
2 Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
This tab is used to set security, offset, blink scope, user ID and move destination ID.
(When setting ASCII display function) (When setting ASCII input function)
Basic Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Security
(ASCII display only) When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security Display When not using the function, set it to "0".
(ASCII input only) The number for security input must be larger than that for security display.
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Security Input
(ASCII input only)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Select a blink area.
Blink Scope Text only : Makes the text area blink.
Text and Plate : Makes the text area and plate blink.
Check this item when setting the user ID No. (1 to 65535).
By setting the user ID, the following operations are available.
User ID *1 Decides the cursor display position when switching screen.
(Only when setting ASCII input ( Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings)
function)
Confirms the ASCII input definition timing using PLC CPU.
( Section 3.5 System Information Setting)
(Continued to next page)
7 - 50 7.3 ASCII Display/Input
7.3.3 Setting items
Basic Extended Trigger 1
Items Description A F
Check this item when moving the cursor to the ASCII input specified by the user ID No. after an
OVERVIEW
Move Destination ID *1 ASCII input is defined.
(Only when setting ASCII input After checking, set the user ID No. for the ASCII input to which the cursor is moved. Then, click on
function) the Screen Properties button and set [Defined key action] to [User ID order] to make the function
available.
2
For details of *1, refer to the following.
SPECIFICATIONS
*1 Relation between User ID and Move Destination ID
The destination ID No. indicates the user ID No. of ASCII input function to which the cursor will move.
Example: Cursor movement to the destination ID
Move
3
ASCII input User ID
1) Destination ID
COMMON SETTING
A AB C B DEF
2) A 1 2
User ID: 1 User ID: 2
B 2 3
4)
3) C 3 4
C GHI D JKL
User ID: 3 User ID: 4
D 4 1
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.3 ASCII Display/Input 7 - 51
7.3.3 Setting items
3 Trigger tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
This tab is used to set the display and operation condition of object.
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting
(When setting ASCII display function) (When setting ASCII input function)
Basic Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
When setting ASCII display function:
Select the trigger by which data is displayed in ASCII.
When [Sampling] is selected, sampling (1 to 3600 s) is set with 1 sec as unit.
Ordinary ON OFF Rise
Trigger Type *1
Fall Sampling Range Bit Trigger
When setting ASCII input function
Select the trigger to operate ASCII input
Ordinary ON OFF Range Bit Trigger
Trigger Device Specify the device used as trigger.
When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items.
Word Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Range Select the data type of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
Trigger Data Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
Range Click on the Exp button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used as
Multi Bit
Bit Number trigger.
Trigger
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their conditions.
Initial Display When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
(Only when setting ASCII displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the conditions are not
display function) satisfied.
(Continued to next page)
7 - 52 7.3 ASCII Display/Input
7.3.3 Setting items
Basic Extended Trigger 1
Items Description A F
Hold Display When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be
OVERVIEW
(Only when setting ASCII held even though the conditions are not satisfied.
display function) If not checked, the object will be deleted when the conditions become invalid.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
2
*1 The cursor display when trigger is enabled during ASCII input
SPECIFICATIONS
Refer to the following for the cursor display when trigger is enabled during ASCII input.
Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.3 ASCII Display/Input 7 - 53
7.3.3 Setting items
4 Other tabs (for GOT-F900 series only)
This tab is used to set ASCII input function trigger, user ID and destination ID.
The Others tab is displayed only when the ASCII input function is set.
Basic Others
Items Description A F
Select the trigger for displaying the data in ASCII.
Type ( Section 5.5 Trigger Setting)
Trigger Ordinary ON OFF
The bit device range can be set by clicking the Dev button when [ON]/[OFF] is selected in [Type].
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Check this item when setting the user ID No. (1 to 65535).
By setting the user ID, the following operations are available.
Decides the cursor display position when switching screen.
User ID ( Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings)
Confirms the ASCII input definition timing using PLC CPU.
( Section 3.5 System Information Setting)
Check this item when moving the cursor to the ASCII input specified by the user ID No. after an
ASCII input is defined.
After checking, set the user ID No. for the ASCII input to which the cursor is moved.
Then, click on the Screen Properties button and set [Defined key action] to [User ID order] to
make the function available.
Move Destination ID Example:
User ID Destination ID
A A 2 1
B
B 4 3
C D C 3 2
D 1 4
Arrow: Cursor moving route
7 - 54 7.3 ASCII Display/Input
7.3.3 Setting items
7.3.4 Precautions 1
This section provides the precautions when using ASCII display/ASCII input function.
OVERVIEW
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Maximum Number of ASCII display/input objects that can be set in one screen
GOT-A900 series: 256 2
GOT-F900 series: 10
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) ASCII input arrange position
Depending on the arranged position of the ASCII input, there are cases the input operation is not
possible.
Before downloading the created project data to a GOT, check the arranged position of the ASCII
input by the data check function of GT Designer2. 3
For the procedure for using the data check function, refer to the following manual.
COMMON SETTING
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual (Section 9.3 Checking Monitor Data for
Errors)
If an error is detected in data check, take the corrective action as below.
1 Change the GT Designer2 grid spacing to 16 dots. 4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
2 Change the arrangement of object so that a center point of 16-dot grid is included in the object.
FOR OBJECTS
Grids displayed by GT Designer2
ABCD 6
ABCD
LAMP, SWITCH
Input operation is not possible Arrange an object so that it includes the
unless the center point of 16-dot grids center point of 16-dot grids.
is included in the position where an
object is arranged.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.3 ASCII Display/Input 7 - 55
7.3.4 Precautions
2 Precautions for use
(1) When unavailable ASCII codes are stored
Note that if the text code with meaning other than the text (000H to 001FH, 0080H to 009FH,
00E0H to 00FFH) is included in the data that enables ASCII display, the whole character string with
the text code cannot be displayed.
(2) To insert/delete characters in a character string
As the cursor is fixed to the right end of the object. Continue to delete characters from that point
until the cursor reaches the position you want to insert/delete characters.
(3) Message display and ASCII input/display
The character code to be displayed differs depending on the language that is set for the utility.
- Japanese : Treated as the Shift JIS code.
- English : Treated as the ASCII code (Characters such as Kana are not displayed.)
7 - 56 7.3 ASCII Display/Input
7.3.4 Precautions
1
7.4 Clock Display
OVERVIEW
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
SPECIFICATIONS
1 Date display
Date display is the function for displaying a date on GOT.
Year display is the function for displaying the last 2 digits of the year.
3
02/12/25
COMMON SETTING
2 Time display
Time display is the function for displaying the time on GOT. 4
The hour is displayed in 24-hour display format.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
13:48
5
Displayed clock data
COMMON SETTINGS
Different clock data are displayed depending on the GOT type.
FOR OBJECTS
(1) GOT-A900 series
Displaying the clock data of the connected PLC CPU.
(There are no clock data in the GOT.)
Every hour the PLC CPU clock data is verified. 6
(2) GOT-F900 series
Displaying the GOT built-in clock data.
LAMP, SWITCH
F920GOT-K displays the clock data of the connected PLC CPU (FX).
(3) GOT SoftGOT2
Displaying the clock data of PC.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.4 Clock Display 7 - 57
7.4.1 Arrangement and Settings
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
Click on [Clock Display]
Select [Object] [Date Display]/[Time Display] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where Clock Display to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
3 Double click on the arranged Clock Display to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
reference to the following explanation.
Easier setting method
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
Object outline frame
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Shape frame
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
7 - 58 7.4 Clock Display
7.4.1 Arrangement and Settings
7.4.2 Setting items 1
1 Basic tab
OVERVIEW
Set the view items (date/time) and the displaying format.
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
4
Basic
OBJECT SETTING
Extended
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Items Description A F
Select whether to display the date or time
Type Date : Displays the Year/Month/Day
Time : Displays the time
5
Select view format of date and time.
COMMON SETTINGS
View format of date View format of time
FOR OBJECTS
(In the case of 12/25/2002) (In the case of 13:48:20)
GOT-A900 series GOT-A900 series
yy/mm/dd : 02/12/25 Time : Minute : 13:48
Date Format/Time mm/dd/yy : 12/25/02
Format dd/mm/yy
GOT-F900 series
: 25/12/02
GOT-F900 series
6
yy/mm/dd : 02/12/25 Type 1 : 13:48
mm/dd/yy : 12/25/02 Type 2 : 13:48:20
LAMP, SWITCH
dd/mm/yy : 25/12/02
Type 1: Dec. 25, 2002 (Wednesday)
View Type 2: Dec. 25, 2002
Format
Select the text size for the date/time display (X , Y )
When (1 1) is set, the font size is 8 16 dots. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Size GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
A 1 to 8 multiple A 0.5 to 4 multiple
NUMERICAL/
1 to 8 multiple 1 to 8 multiple
Color Select the color for displaying the date and time.
Use High Quality Check this item when displaying the date and time using the high quality font. (Only when display
Font size X, Y is set to any of 2, 4, 6 or 8.) 8
Use 6 8dot
Font is displayed in size of 6 8 dots. (Characters only)
Font
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
7.4 Clock Display 7 - 59
7.4.2 Setting items
Basic Extended
Items Description A F
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame
Format Frame
Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Plate Plate
Frame
Bg Transparent Select this item when the background is to be transparent.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
7 - 60 7.4 Clock Display
7.4.2 Setting items
1
2 Extended tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Make the security setting on this tab.
This tab will be displayed by checking the corresponding "Extended" at the bottom of this dialog box.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
Basic Extended
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Items Description A F
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.4 Clock Display 7 - 61
7.4.2 Setting items
7.4.3 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the clock display function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) The maximum number of the clock displays that can be set on one screen.
GOT-A900 series: 2
GOT-F900 series: 10
2 Precautions for use
(1) System configuration in which the clock function is not available
GOT-A900 series and F920GOT-K
The clock display function may not be used depending on the PLC CPU or connection type.
Section 2.4 Clock Function
GOT-F900 series (other than F920GOT): Uses GOT built-in clock.
(2) When reading/writing the clock data with sequence program
The clock data will not set properly with this function if it is uploaded/downloaded to the PLC CPU
side using a sequence program.
(3) When M9028 is on in ACPU
When the connected PLC CPU is ACPU and M9028 is ON, the clock setting function of GOT utility
is not available.
(4) When Character Set is not set to Japanese
The type1 and the type2 of the date/time format are displayed in irregular characters.
7 - 62 7.4 Clock Display
7.4.3 Precautions
1
7.5 Comment Display
OVERVIEW
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
1 Bit comment ( Section 7.5.2 Setting items of bit comment)
SPECIFICATIONS
It is the function to display the comment corresponding to the ON/OFF status of bit device.
X10=OFF X10=ON
Pro. line con.
Conv. st.
Pro. line con.
During oper.
3
COMMON SETTING
Comment when bit Comment when bit
device is OFF device is ON
2 Word comment ( Section 7.5.3 Setting items of word comment)
4
It is the function to display the comment corresponding to word device value.
D100 1 D100 10 D100 100
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Pro. line con. Pro. line con. Pro. line con.
During oper. Conv. st. Completed
Display comment of Display comment of Display comment of
5
comment No.1 comment No.10 comment No. 100
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Remark Comment displayed by comment display
The comment to be displayed by comment display needs to be registered in
advance.
6
Section 4.1 Comment Registration
LAMP, SWITCH
Switch all the comment on the screen Used with level function
(Comment display (bit/word)) (Comment display (bit/word))
Display comment tab setting Set in extended tab
<GOT-A900 series only> 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Production
Production Production
NUMERICAL/
Actual
50 Line 1 50 Targ. 1 comp. Targ. 2 comp.
150 Line 2 150
8
ALARM
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 63
7.5.1 Arrangement and settings
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
Click on [Bit Comment]/ [Word Comment]
Select [Object] [Comment Display] [Bit Comment] / [Word Comment] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where Comment Display to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
3 Double click on the arranged Comment Display to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
reference to the following explanation.
Easier setting method
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
Remark (1) Method of adjusting objects in which shape is set D10
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region]. Object outline frame
Shape
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
(2) When displaying the comment out of the display range
(GOT-A900 series only)
When the comment is out of the horizontal display range, display the remaining
part in the next line.
Comment
Please checkthe frame.
Please check
the frame.
Comment display
When the comment is out of the vertical display range, only the part within the
display range is displayed.
Comment
Please check the frame.
OK: Res. aft. switch. OK
NG: Res. aft. switch. NG
Please check the frame.
OK: Res. aft. switch. OK
Comment display
7 - 64 7.5 Comment Display
7.5.1 Arrangement and settings
7.5.2 Setting items of bit comment 1
1 Basic tab
OVERVIEW
Set the view format of device to be monitored and comment (Shape/Size/Alignment).
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
Basic Comment Extended Trigger
5
Basic Comment
COMMON SETTINGS
Items Description A F
FOR OBJECTS
Set the device to be monitored.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed. 6
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
Frame selected.
LAMP, SWITCH
Format ( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame Select the shape color.
Bg Transparent Select this item when the background is to be transparent.
Select the size of comment to be displayed (0.5 to 8).
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
GOT-A900 series: A 1 to 8
Size 1 to 8
NUMERICAL/
GOT-F900 series: A 0.5 to 8
1 to 8
Select the position to display the text value. 8
Alignment Left: AAAA Center: AAAA Right: AAAA
BB BB BB
CCCC CCCC CCCC
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 65
7.5.2 Setting items of bit comment
Basic Comment Extended Trigger
Basic Comment
Items Description A F
Use 6 8dot Font Font is displayed in size of 6 8 dots. (Characters only)
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
7 - 66 7.5 Comment Display
7.5.2 Setting items of bit comment
1
2 Comment tab
Set the device ON/OFF comment and display attributes.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Basic Comment Extended Trigger
Basic Comment
Items Description A F 5
ON Click on this item to set the text to be displayed when the device turns ON.
COMMON SETTINGS
OFF Click on this item to set the text to be displayed when the device turns OFF.
FOR OBJECTS
Select this item to display the registered comment data.
After selecting , set the comment No. to be displayed .
Comment No.
Comment will not be displayed if its No. is set to 0.
(Set the comment No. to 0 during OFF if the comment is to be displayed only ON.)
6
Select this item to directly input the displayed comment.
After selecting, enter comment.
Direct Comment
Up to 512 characters can be entered. LAMP, SWITCH
(Two characters corresponding to the line feed are occupied.)
Change Attribute of Comment Check this item to display the display attribute which is different from the one set in comment
Setting registration.
Text Select the color of text to be displayed. 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Select the view format of the text
Style
(Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised).
NUMERICAL/
Regular Bold Solid Raised
Solid Select the solid color when [Solid] or [Raised] is set in [Style]
(Continued to next page)
8
ALARM
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 67
7.5.2 Setting items of bit comment
Basic Comment Extended Trigger
Basic Comment
Items Description A F
Select the blinking pattern of the Comment.
Change No : Not blink.
Attribute Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
of Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
Comment High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
Setting Check this item to reverse comment.
Reverse
This item can be set at "Regular" in "Style" category.
Check this item when displaying the comment using the high quality font setting.
Use High Quality Font ("Direct
(Only setting at both of the height and width to 2, 4, 6 or 8 times in "Size" on the Basic tab)
Comment Only")
Only the display comment which is input directly by keyboard can use this font.
Select the background color for the inside display area of the comment.
Plate
Plate color
Used to copy the set attribute.
Copy OFF ON/ Copy OFF ON :The "OFF" attribute is copied to the "ON" attribute.
Copy ON OFF Copy ON OFF :The "ON" attribute is copied to the "OFF" attribute.
The contents to be copied differ depending on the selected item.
All Settings Copies all text attributes.
Direct Comment Copies only direct comment.
Only Setting is allowed only when Direct Comment is selected at both ON and OFF.
7 - 68 7.5 Comment Display
7.5.2 Setting items of bit comment
1
3 Extended tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set the method of displaying security, offset and comment (Display Mode/Line No. of Display Start, etc.)
This tab is displayed when Extended is checked at the bottom of the dialog box.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Basic Comment Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15). 5
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
COMMON SETTINGS
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
FOR OBJECTS
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting) 6
Data length is fixed to 16 bits.
Select a desired display mode when displaying a comment with the level display overlapped.
Transparent : Displays the comment on the level display. LAMP, SWITCH
FULL
XOR : In order to identify the level and comment, the comment is displayed in 7
Display Mode color different from the level color based on XOR.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
20% 40%
NUMERICAL/
This is effective when GOT is Monochrome type/EL type.
( App.5 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR)
Select a blink area.
8
Blink Scope Text : Makes the comment blink.
Text and Plate : Makes the comment and plate blink.
(Continued to next page)
ALARM
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 69
7.5.2 Setting items of bit comment
Basic Comment Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Check this item to change the line No. of display start when multiple comments have been set.
Fixed : Select this item to set the line No. of display start by direct input.
Device : Select this item to display comments of which line No. is the same as the device
value to be set. After selecting, set the device. ( Section 5.1 Device
Setting)
Comment registered in GT Designer2 Display in GOT
Insp.1 Device: D10 1
Line No. of Display Start Line1Insp.1 Conv. insp. Start displaying from the
Line2Conv. insp.
Line3Insp.2 first line of comment.
Line4Proc. prod. insp. Device value
Line5Insp.3 changes from 1 to 3
Line6Line insp.
Insp.2 Device: D10 3
Proc. prod. insp.
Start displaying from the
third line of comment.
The created comment will not be displayed if the line No. out of the range is specified for it.
In this case, confirm the line No. specified for that comment.
Check this item to change the line No. of display start when multiple comments have been set.
Fixed : Select this item to set the line No. of display start by direct input.
Device : Select this item to display comments from which line No. is the same as the
device value to be set.
After selecting, set the device. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Comment registered in GT Designer2 Display in GOT
Number of Lines Insp.1 Device: D20 2
Line1Insp.1 Conv. insp. Display 2 lines of comment.
Line2Conv. insp.
Line3Insp.2
Line4Proc. prod. insp. Device value
Line5Insp.3 changes from 1 to 4
Line6Line insp.
Insp.1 Device: D20 4
Conv. insp. Display 4 lines of comment.
Insp.2
Proc. prod. insp.
If the fixed/device value is "0", the comment will not be displayed.
7 - 70 7.5 Comment Display
7.5.2 Setting items of bit comment
1
4 Trigger tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
OVERVIEW
dialog box.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting 2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
Basic Comment Extended Trigger
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Items Description A F
Select trigger for displaying the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) in 1-second unit.
Trigger Type
Ordinary ON OFF Rise
Fall Sampling Range Bit Trigger 6
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
Word Range Trigger When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items. LAMP, SWITCH
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
Data Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
7
Range Click on the Range button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used
Multi Bit
Bit Number for the trigger.
NUMERICAL/
Trigger
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their triggers.
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
Initial Display
displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be 8
Hold Display held even though the trigger is not satisfied.
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not satisfied.
ALARM
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 71
7.5.2 Setting items of bit comment
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
1 Basic tab
Set a view format of the device to be monitored and comment (Shape/Size/Alignment).
(Example: When setting GOT-A900 series)
Basic Comment Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Basic Comment
Items Description A F
Set the device to be monitored.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
Frame selected.
Format ( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame Select the shape color.
Bg Transparent Select this when the background is to be transparent.
Select the size of comment to be displayed (0.5 to 8).
GOT-A900 series: A 1 to 8
Size 1 to 8
GOT-F900 series: A 0.5 to 8
1 to 8
Alignment Select the position to display the text value.
(Continued to next page)
7 - 72 7.5 Comment Display
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
Basic Comment Extended Case Trigger Data Operation 1
Basic Comment
OVERVIEW
Items Description A F
Preview Comment No. Displays the comment with specified comment No. on the GT Designer2 screen.
Use 6 8 dot font Font is displayed in size of 6 8 dots. (Characters only)
2
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 73
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
2 Comment tab
Set the comment to be displayed and its attributes.
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
Basic Comment Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Basic Comment
Items Description A F
Sets display attribute of comment.
To change the display attribute in this setting, it is necessary to set state in the case tab.
Indirect [Device Value] : Check this item to display comment No. corresponding to
monitor device value.
Attribute [Normal case]
Hold : Check this item to hold currently displayed comment.
Comment No. : Check this item to display the registered comment data.
After this, set the displayed comment No. The comment is not
displayed when comment No. is set as 0.
Change Attribute of Comment Check this item to display with the display attribute different from the one set during comment
Setting registration.
Text Select the color of text to be displayed.
Select the view format of the text
Style
(Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised).
Regular Bold Solid Raised
Solid Select the solid color when [Solid] or [Raised] is set in [Style]
Select the blinking pattern of the Comment.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
Check this item to reverse comment.
Reverse
This item can be set at "Regular" in "Style" category.
(Continued to next page)
7 - 74 7.5 Comment Display
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
Basic Comment Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
1
Basic Comment
OVERVIEW
Items Description A F
Select the background color for the inside display area of the comment.
Plate
Plate color 2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 75
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
3 Extended tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set the data type, security, and offset of monitor device and the method of displaying comment (Display
Mode/Line No. of Display Start).
This tab will be displayed when Extended is checked at the bottom of this dialog box.
Basic Comment Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
Word (BIN16) : Comments will be displayed based on the word device (BIN16) binary
Data type value.
Word (BCD16) : Comments will be displayed based on the word device (BCD16) binary
coded decimal value.
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Data length is fixed to 16 bits.
(Continued to next page)
7 - 76 7.5 Comment Display
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
Basic Comment Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
1
Items Description A F
Select a desired display mode when displaying a comment with the level display overlapped.
OVERVIEW
Transparent : Displays the comment on the level display.
FULL
2
XOR : Displays the comment in XOR-combined color.
Display Mode
SPECIFICATIONS
20% 40%
Level can be distinguished from the comment.
This is effective when GOT is Monochrome type/EL type.
( App.5 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR) 3
Select a blink area.
COMMON SETTING
Blink scope Text : Makes the comment blink.
Text and Plate : Makes the comment and plate blink.
Check this item to change the line No. of display start when multiple comments have been set.
Fixed : Select this item to set the line No. of display start by direct input.
Device : Select this item to display comments of which line No. is the same as the device
value to be set. 4
After selecting, set the device. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Comment registered in GT Designer2 Display in GOT
Insp.1 Device: D10 1
Line No. of Display Start Line1 Insp.1 Conv. insp. Start displaying from the
Line2 Conv. insp.
Line3 Insp.2 first line of comment.
Line4 Proc. prod. insp. Device value
Line5 Insp.3 changes from 1 to 3
Line6 Line insp.
Insp.2
Proc. prod. insp.
Device: D10 3
Start displaying from the
5
third line of comment.
COMMON SETTINGS
The created comment will not be displayed if the line No. out of the range is specified for it.
In this case, confirm the line No. specified for that comment.
FOR OBJECTS
Check this item to change the line No. of display start when multiple comments have been set.
Fixed : Select this item to set the line No. of display start by direct input.
Device : Select this item to display comments of which line No. is the same as the device
value to be set.
6
After selecting, set the device. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Comment registered in GT Designer2 Display in GOT
Number of Lines Insp.1 Device: D20 2 LAMP, SWITCH
Line1 Insp.1 Conv. insp. Display 2 lines of comment.
Line2 Conv. insp.
Line3 Insp.2
Line4 Proc. prod. insp. Device value
Line5 Insp.3 changes from 1 to 4
Line6 Line insp.
Insp.1 Device: D20 4
Conv. insp.
Insp.2
Proc. prod. insp.
Display 4 lines of comment.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
If the fixed/device value is "0", the comment will not be displayed.
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 77
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
4 Case tab (GOT-A900 series only)
The attribute can be changed on this setting depending on the device status.
For details of states, refer to the following.
Section 5.4 State Setting
Basic Comment Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
State *1 Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
New State Creates a new state.
Delete State Deletes a specified state.
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
Up/Down Changes the priority of the current state.
Displays the list of preset states.
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Select the display change conditions according to state.
Bit : Select it when changing the display according to the ON/OFF status of bit
device.
Device State After selecting, set the bit device and device status (ON/OFF).
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Word : Select it when changing the display according to the value of word device. After
selecting, set the conditional expression of word device value in [Range].
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
(Continued to next page)
7 - 78 7.5 Comment Display
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
Basic Comment Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
1
Items Description A F
Select the method of displaying comment.
OVERVIEW
Indirect [Device value] : Display the comment corresponding to the word device value.
Hold : After it is selected, the comment display is held even if state
State *1 Attribute condition is satisfied.
Comment No. : Specify the comment to be displayed. 2
After this, set the parts/screen to be displayed.
Parts/screen will not be displayed when parts No. is set to 0.
SPECIFICATIONS
Change Attribute of Check this item to display the display attribute which is different from the one set in comment
Comment Setting registration.
Text Select the color of text to be displayed.
Style
Select the view format of the text 3
(Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised).
Regular Bold Solid Raised
COMMON SETTING
Solid Select the solid color when [Solid] or [Raised] is set in [Style]
Select the blinking pattern of the Comment.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds. 4
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
Check this item to reverse comment.
OBJECT SETTING
Reverse
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
This item can be set at "Regular" in "Style" category.
Select the plate color when the condition to display state is satisfied.
Plate
Plate color
5
For details of *1, refer to the following.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 79
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
*1 State
(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is in condition other than those set on the Case tab, it is displayed with the display
attribute set on the Basic tab.
(2) Display when conditions are overlapped
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Monitored device : D100
Data view format : Signed decimal, 16bit length
Registered comment : Comment No.1 .......The production volume is 1 set
Comment No.100 ...Over 100 sets
Comment No.101 ...Production completed
Operation priority
State No. Display range Display comment
for repeated setting
High 1 $V<=0 No.0
2 1<=$V<=100 Indirect
3 101<=$V<=199 Hold
Ordinary
Low ---- No.101
(State0)
* $V represents the monitor device value.
Comment is not displayed when the monitor
device value is 0 or lower ($V 0)
State1
Comment corresponding to the monitor device
value is displayed when monitor device value is
between 1 and 100
State2 Production volume Over 100 sets
is 1 set.
(1 $V 100).
Comment display will not be switched when
monitor device value is between 101 and 199 (101
$V 199).
State3 Over 100 sets
Comment No.101 is displayed when condition is
other than state 1 to 3.
Normal case Production is
completed.
(State 0)
7 - 80 7.5 Comment Display
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
1
5 Trigger tab (GOT-A900 series only)
The setting items of trigger tab are the same with bit comment.
Refer to the following for the details of setting items.
OVERVIEW
Section 7.5.2 Setting items of bit comment
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 81
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
6 Data operation tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function
Basic Comment Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
7 - 82 7.5 Comment Display
7.5.3 Setting items of word comment
7.5.4 Precautions 1
This section provides the precautions for using comment display function.
OVERVIEW
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Maximum arranged number of objects set on one screen
GOT A900 series: 256 comments 2
GOT-F900 series: 50 comments
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Precautions for using cascading level display
Following restrictions are applied for cascading comment display and level display.
(a) Only one comment can be cascaded to one level function.
At arranging two or more comments, the second or later comments are not displayed. 3
(b) Comment cannot be set to blink (flickering display).
COMMON SETTING
(c) Comment cannot be reversed.
(d) A comment extended off the display frame of a level is not XOR-combined.
(e) At setting a frame figure to a comment, the level is displayed only inside the frame figure.
(f) The display is updated only at changing the monitor device value of the level display.
4
The display is not updated at changing the monitor device value set to the comment display.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(3) Precautions for comment registration
Make sure to follow the basic precautions before registering comments for comment display.
Section 4.1 Comment Registration
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
7.5 Comment Display 7 - 83
7.5.4 Precautions
8. ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
User alarm is a function that displays user-created comments as alarm messages when an alarm occurs.
When multiple devices turn on, the comments are displayed as alarm messages in the set display order.
M100: OFF ON
M101: OFF ON
M100 Temp. error M100 Temp. error
Replace the fuse
M101 Fuse error M101 Fuse error
of the power
module with
new one.
Detail Detail
Remark Comments to be displayed as user alarm
The comments must be registered in advance.
Section 4.1 Comment Registration
Example:
Start the ladder monitor function from alarm list Displaying the number of alarms occurred
Set by Touch Switch (Section 6.2.4) Set on the Device tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Alarm Status
02/02/01 10:25 Mac. err.
M999 K M100 ON Temp. error
MOV 1 D1 Temp. error M101 ON Fuse error
02/02/01 13:25 Lin.1 err. K
MOV 2 D2 Fuse error M102 ON Oil error
M103 ON Fuel error
Lad. dis.
Alarm event count 6 M104 ON Internal pressure error
M105 ON Timing belt error
Displays the ladder monitor Monitor the ladder statusof The number of all alarms occurred is
function by touch operation. device corresponding to the displayed on the alarm list display.
alarm occurrence causes
8-1 8.1 User Alarm Display
8.1.1 Before setting user alarm 1
This function displays alarm occurrence time and user-registered comments as alarm messages.
OVERVIEW
1 Number of displayed alarms
Select whether to display multiple alarm occurrences (with plural comments) or only one (with single
comment). 2
Display range Display range
Number of comment: "Plural" Number of comment: "Single"
SPECIFICATIONS
04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove 04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error Cancel [Supply stops] and restart supply. 3
COMMON SETTING
One alarm is displayed in one line. The texts will be continuously displayed in the
The text out of the line will not be displayed. second line.
If a comment is longer than two lines, only the Even if the comment size exceeds two lines, the 4
first line is displayed. texts from the second line can be displayed,
providing it does not exceed the display range.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Remark Display method for multi line comment ( Section 8.1.3 Extended tab)
Any line of the multi line comment can be specified to display. 5
COMMON SETTINGS
Example: Display any line of the 6-line comment that has been registered
FOR OBJECTS
Multi line comment contents
Inspection1
Conv. insp. Method of displaying comment
Inspection2
Start line of display : 3rd 6
Proc. prod. insp. Number of display lines : 2(only when the number of
comment is set as "one")
Inspection3
LAMP, SWITCH
Line insp.
Number of comment: "Plural" Number of comment: "Single" 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
04/6/1 13:52:20 Inspection2 04/6/1 13:52:20 Inspection2
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error Processed products inspection
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
Only one line can be randomly specified to be displayed. The range of lines to be displayed can be specified.
ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display 8-2
8.1.1 Before setting user alarm
2 Sort
Set the order to display alarm occurrences.
It can be set by the device No. order (ascending/descending) and alarm occurrence order (Oldest /Latest).
Example: Display alarms by "Latest" sort
Alarm Status
M2 04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
M4 04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
M0 04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
M3 04/6/1 05:22:35 Fuel error
M5 04/6/1 04:33:12 Internal pressure error
M1 04/6/1 02:30:16 Timing belt error
Number of comment: "Plural" Number of comment: "Single"
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error 04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
3 Scroll on
Checking if the alarm comment exceeds the display range is done by scrolling the user alarm with touch
switches
Create the touch switches for user alarm.
Section 8.1.4 Touch switch for displaying user alarm
Number of comment: "Plural" Number of comment: "Single"
04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove 04/6/1 13:52:15 Machine No.1 is ove
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
heat
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
Cancel [Stop Supply] and restart the supply.
Scroll up Scroll down Scroll up Scroll down
04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error Display 1 04/6/1 11:35:52 Temp. error
Switch to
04/6/1 09:45:30 Fuse error
04/6/1 08:15:45 Oil error
line by the next
each alarm display.
scrolling.
Scroll up Scroll down Scroll up Scroll down
8-3 8.1 User Alarm Display
8.1.1 Before setting user alarm
1
4 Details of display (only for [Plural] number of comment)
(1) Applicable screen ( Section 8.1.3 Device tab (GOT-A900 series only))
OVERVIEW
To display the cause and corrective action of alarm in details, select a screen from the following
three types.
(a) Comment window
Display the user-registered comment in a comment window.
2
The comment different from that in user alarm comment can be displayed as a detailed
SPECIFICATIONS
comment.
Temp. error at the
power supply module
on Line 1
3
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error 04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
COMMON SETTING
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error 04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base Screen1 Base Screen1+Comment Window
(b) Base screen 4
Display the specified base screen.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Tank control screen
PREPARATORY
Tank A Tank B Tank C
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
5
90 40 60
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
COMMON SETTINGS
RUN STOP RUN STOP RUN STOP
FOR OBJECTS
Base Screen1 Base Screen5
(c) Window screen (GOT-A900 series only)
Display the specified window screen (overlap window 1).
6
Feed material from the feed
opening. LAMP, SWITCH
Feed opening
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error 04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error 04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Base Screen1 Base Screen1+Window Screen10
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display 8-4
8.1.1 Before setting user alarm
(2) Screen that includes user alarm and the corresponding detailed alarm type screen.
Detailed alarm display type screen
Screen that includes user alarm
Comment window Base screen Window screen
Base screen Switch Simultaneous display
Overlap window 1 Switch
Simultaneous display
Overlap window 2 Simultaneous display
Simultaneous display
Superimpose window
* Switch : Switch the screen that includes user alarm to the corresponding detailed alarm display type
screen.
Simultaneous display : Display the detailed alarm display type screen keeping the screen that includes user alarm on
the display.
(3) Specifying a comment No. to be displayed or offset value for screen No. (Offset for Detailed No.)
By setting 'Offset for Detailed No.' on the Device Tab, an offset value for details display described
below can be specified: ( Section 8.1.3 Device tab (GOT-A900 series only))
No. of the comment that will be displayed on the comment window
No. of the Base screen and Window screen
While monitoring by the GOT, the comment No. or screen No. can be switched using the device.
Example: When the device for "Offset for Detailed No." is set to "D0", and the following comments
are registered
Comment No. Comment
Temperature error at the power supply module on Line 1.
1
Check the power supply module.
2 Replace the fuse of the power supply module on Line 1.
. .
. .
. .
Temperature error at the power supply module on Line 2.
11
Check the power supply module.
12 Replace the fuse of the power supply module on Line 2.
D0 0 D0 10
Temperature error at the Temperature error at the
power supply module on power supply module on
Line 1. Check the power Line 2. Check the power
supply module. supply module.
04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error 04/06/01 16:51:15 Temp. error
04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error 04/06/01 15:20:41 Fuse error
04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error 04/06/01 14:25:17 Oil error
Comment No.1 is displayed Comment No.11 is displayed
8-5 8.1 User Alarm Display
8.1.1 Before setting user alarm
1
To match the user alarm display with details screen:
By using "Offset for Detailed No." the comment on the user alarm cannot be
OVERVIEW
changed.
An offset value for comment No. on the user alarm should be specified in "Offset for
Comment No." on the Extended tab.
( Section 8.1.3 Extended tab)
2
Match display the user alarm with the comment on the details screen by using
SPECIFICATIONS
"Offset for Detailed No. and "Offset for Comment No.".
(4) Display method
Select the method for details display from the following two types.
(a) One touch ( Set in the device tab) 3
Touch the alarm list directly to display the detailed information.
COMMON SETTING
Temperature error at
the power supply
module on Line 1
4
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
04/6/1 10:25:26 Oil error
PREPARATORY
(b) Touch switch ( Section 8.1.4 Touch switch for displaying user alarm) 5
Create touch switches for user alarm to display the detailed information.
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error 04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error 04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
Replace the fuse at
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 04/6/1
the 15:51:38
power Fuse error
supply
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error 04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error 04/6/1 10:25:16
module on Line Oil
1. error
6
Cursor on Up Detail Cursor on Up Detail Display Up Detail
Delete Down Delete Down Delete Down
LAMP, SWITCH
Display the cursor Move (up/down) the cursor to Display the detailed information
the alarm for details display.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display 8-6
8.1.1 Before setting user alarm
5 Store memory
Check "Store Memory" when collecting the information on alarm occurrence date/time even when a
screen including no user alarm is displayed.
The GOT monitors the alarm occurrence status at all times and stores the information in the GOT
internal memory.
"Store memory" settings are provided as shown below.
GOT-A900 Series :Trigger tab
GOT-F900 Series :Other tab
With the settings made, the alarm occurrence date/time is displayed as follows:
Store Memory enabled: The alarms are displayed with the date and time when the alarm actually
occurred.
Store Memory disabled:The alarms are displayed with the time and date when the screen is
displayed.
Example: The following shows differences of the user alarm display according to the "Store memory"
settings (enabled or disabled) when the screen switches and the alarm devices turn ON/OFF
at the timing below.
04/6/1 12:10:15
Display on the screen Display Screen Display Screen Display Screen
including alarm list No.10 No.20 No.10
display
ON (04/6/1 10:15:35)
M100 OFF
ON (04/6/1 11:38:08)
Alarm
Device M101 OFF
ON (04/6/1 09:00:22)
M102 OFF
04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Temp. error 04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Temp. error
04/6/1 10:15:35 M100 Temp. error
04/6/1 11:38:08 M101 Fuse error
Display Screen No.10
(Store Memory enabled)
Alarm occurrence date and time can be
displayed correctly
04/6/1 09:00:22 M102 Temp. error 04/6/1 12:10:15 M100 Temp. error
04/6/1 12:10:15 M101 Fuse error
04/6/1 12:10:15 M102 Oil error
Display Screen No.10
(Store Memory disabled)
Alarm occurrence time shows date and time
when the screen has changed to Screen No.10
(all alarms show the same date and time)
8-7 8.1 User Alarm Display
8.1.1 Before setting user alarm
1
(1) The timing when the data stored in memory is cleared.
The data stored in memory is cleared when the GOT is reset or powered off.
OVERVIEW
(2) The timing when the alarm occurrence date/time is cleared with the Store Memory
disabled.
When "Store Memory" is disabled, alarm occurrence time information is not
collected at any of the timings below, causing the collected alarm occurrence time 2
to be cleared:
The screen including the user alarm is hidden and then displayed again.
SPECIFICATIONS
The screen is switched to the base screen while the user alarm is on the
superimpose window.
The security switching is made.
The machine No. switching is made.
The offset switching is made. 3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display 8-8
8.1.1 Before setting user alarm
8.1.2 Placement and settings
1 Carry out either or the following operations.
(1) In case of GOT-A900 series
Select [Object] [Alarm List] [User Alarm] from the menu
Click on [User Alarm]
(2) In case of FOT-F900 series
Select [Object] [Alarm List] from the menu
Click on [Alarm List]
2 Click on the position where user alarm to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
3 Double click on the arranged user alarm to display the setting dialog box.
For the setting method, refer to the explanation on the next page.
4 After setting user alarm, set the touch switch for scrolling user alarm up/down and to display the alarm
detailed information.
Section 8.1.4 Touch switch for displaying user alarm
Method of adjusting display range
Method of adjusting display rangeAdjust the display range as following when the
comment cannot be displayed completely.
04/6/1 13:52:20 Temp. error Use 16 dots as vertical size in 1 row
when text size is 1 x 1 times.
Occurrence time Comment
(fixed to 20 digits) Display the longest comment for confirmation in drawing screen.
Display with 160 dots Set the longest comment No. in "head comment No." (basic tab) and
when text size is 1 x 1 times. adjust display range to display all the comments.
After the adjustment, undo the setting of "head comment No."
Easier setting method
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
Object outline frame
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Shape frame
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
8-9 8.1 User Alarm Display
8.1.2 Placement and settings
8.1.3 Setting items 1
1 Basic tab
OVERVIEW
Set the number of monitor devices and view format (number of comments/sort/shape).
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Basic Device Extended Trigger
Basic Other Detail
5
Items Description A F
COMMON SETTINGS
Device as many alarms are set continuously starting from the specified device.
Device
FOR OBJECTS
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Set the number of monitor devices.
[GOT-A900 series]
The devices that can be set are different on the settings made in [Device No.] of device tab.
Alarm (Device)
Points
In [Continuous] setting
In [Random] setting
: 8129 devices
: 512 devices
6
[GOT-F900 series]
Up to 256 devices can be set.
View LAMP, SWITCH
Set the comment to be displayed when an alarm occurs. (Setting range: 1 to 32767)
Format
The comment No. set here is assigned in head device of device tab.
Continuous No. will be set respectively according to the number of monitor devices from the
comment No. of head comment No.
Head Comment
Example: Head device: M10, head comment No.: 1 7
No.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Monitor device Comment No.
M100 1 Temp.error Head comment No.
NUMERICAL/
M101 2 Fuse error The comment of continued
M102 3 Oil error No. is set from head comment No.
(Continued to the next page)
8
ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display 8 - 10
8.1.3 Setting items
Basic Device Extended Trigger
Basic Other Detail
Items Description A F
Select the size of text to be displayed.
When (1 1) is set, the font size is 8 16 dots.
When displaying comments that is set to high quality font in comment registration as high quality
font, set the font size to the multiple of even number.
Size If set to the multiple of odd number, it will not be displayed as high quality font.
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
1 to 8 0.5 to 4
1 to 8 1 to 8
Set the number of comments to be displayed.
Number of
Plural :Display plural comments in frame.
Comment
Single :Display only one comment in frame.
Select the position to display the text.
Alignment Left: AAAA Center: AAAA Right: AAAA
BB BB BB
CCCC CCCC CCCC
Select the sort of comment.
Ascending : display according to the order of the smallest to the biggest.
Descending : display according to the order of the biggest to the smallest
Oldest : display according to the order of the oldest to the latest
Latest : display according to the order of the newest to the oldest.
When monitor is set randomly, [Ascending] [Descending] will be based on the setting order of
View device.
Format Example: When making following settings in device tab.
Display comment
Sort
Temp. error
Fuse error
Oil error
Displayed in [Ascending] Displayed in [Decending]
M100 ON Temp. error M102 ON Oil error
M101 ON Fuse error M101 ON Fuse error
M102 ON Oil error M100 ON Temp. error
When [Oldest] or [Latest] is selected, set [Store Memory] on the Trigger tab for collecting data of
the alarm occurrence date.
Check this item to display date when an alarm occurs.
Date is displayed in the form of "yy/mm/dd: hh: mm: ss"
(Year is displayed with the last 2 digits, and hour is displayed in the 24-hour system.)
Date Display
04/06/01 09:30:40 Temp. error
Space Space
20 digits Comment
Use 6 8dot
Font is displayed in size of 6 8dots. (Characters only)
Font
(Continued to the next page)
8 - 11 8.1 User Alarm Display
8.1.3 Setting items
Basic
1
Device Extended Trigger
Basic Other Detail
OVERVIEW
Items Description A F
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
2
selected.
Frame
SPECIFICATIONS
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Format
Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Frame
Frame
Plate Plate
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
3
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display 8 - 12
8.1.3 Setting items
2 Device tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set the monitor device and the detailed alarm display type when an alarm occurs.
Basic Device Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Select the method of displaying the detailed alarm comment information.
This setting is usable only when [Plural] is selected in [Number of Comment].
Not Display :No detailed information to be displayed.
*1 :A
Comment Window comment window is displayed to provide detailed information.
A registered comment is used for the window.
Detailed Alarm Display Type Base screen :The detailed information is displayed on a base screen.
The base screen specified by detailed displayed No. of the alarm
device is used.
Window screen :Display the window screen (Overlap window1) by details display.
Display the window screen that is set in the detailed No. of alarm
device.
Select the method of setting the device to be monitored.
Device No. Continuous :Devices are consecutively numbered from the set device.
Random :Devices are numbered at random.
Select the method of displaying the comment window/base screen/window screen used for
providing detailed information of alarm.
Detailed Display No. Continuous :Devices are consecutively numbered starting from the set comment
No./base screen No./window screen No.
Random :Devices are numbered at random.
Alarm Device Setting the screen No. for monitor device and detailed display.
Set the device to be monitored.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Number the comment/base screen/window screen used for displaying the detailed information
Detailed No.
when an alarm occurs (when the specified device condition is satisfied.)
Select the comment to be displayed in details when selecting [Comment Window] in [Detailed
Detailed
alarm display type].
Selection
The comment can be displayed when confirming the comment contents.
(Continued to next page)
8 - 13 8.1 User Alarm Display
8.1.3 Setting items
Device
1
Basic Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Check this item to store the number of alarms (the number of bit devices that have turned ON) in
OVERVIEW
the word device.
Device for Occurring Number
After checking, set the device to store alarms.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Check this item to switch the detailed information on screen according to the value of one device.
2
The comment No./base screen No./window screen No. set as the detailed No. of alarm
SPECIFICATIONS
device is added to the device (offset device) value set here.
Offset for Detailed No.
(The data size of the set device is fixed to 16 bits)
For the details about offset function, refer to the following.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
One Touch
Check this item to display the detailed display screen by touching any row of the user alarm.
(This setting is usable in the basic tab when [Plural] is set in [Comment Number])
3
For details of *1, refer to the following.
COMMON SETTING
*1 Display Method of Comment Window
(1) Numver of characters available for comment window
A960GOT, A97*GOT, A985GOT
39 characters 11 lines (429 characters) 4
A95*GOT, A956WGOT
OBJECT SETTING
23 characters 7 lines (161 characters)
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
(2) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen
The operation of moving and closing the window is the same as that of the window screen.
(3) Comment text is displayed as follows
Text size: fixed to 1 length, 1 width
5
The setting reverse, blink and style are not supported, regardless of the comment registration
COMMON SETTINGS
settings.
FOR OBJECTS
(4) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
Comments are displayed from top-left to right in the comment window.
If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a new
line. 6
To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line feed
for the comment.
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Preparing for operation
Preparing for operation Please wait for about 6 minutes.
Please wait for about 6 minutes.
NUMERICAL/
8
When a comment is registered Comment window display
ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display 8 - 14
8.1.3 Setting items
3 Detailed tab (GOT-F900 series only)
Check the Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
Basic Other Detail
Items Description A F
Select a detailed display screen type for displaying the alarm details, of which comment is on the
screen as the corresponding device has turned ON.
This setting is usable only when the number of displayed comment is plural (set in the basic tab).
*1 No display :No detailed display
Detailed Display
Comment Window :Displays in details on the dedicated comment window screen for the
alarm list.
Base Screen :Display in details on the base screen with specified base screen No.
*1 Detailed Display
The detailed error information is displayed on the base screen/comment window.
Section 8.1.1 Before setting user alarm
8 - 15 8.1 User Alarm Display
8.1.3 Setting items
1
4 Extended tab
Set the security, offset.
Check the Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
In case of GOT-A900 series In case of GOT-F900 series 4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Extended
PREPARATORY
Basic Device Trigger
Basic Other Detail
Items Description A F
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
5
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
COMMON SETTINGS
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
FOR OBJECTS
Check this item to switch the comment on the user alarm according to the device value.
The device (offset device) value set here is added to the comment No. that has been set in "Head
Comment No." on the Basic tab.
Offset for Comment No. (The data size of the device is fixed to 16 bits.)
For details on offset function, refer to the following.
6
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Check this item to store the current number of bit devices being monitored in the word device. LAMP, SWITCH
Device for Occurring Number After checking, click on Device button to set the store device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
(Continued to next page)
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display 8 - 16
8.1.3 Setting items
Basic Device Extended Trigger
Basic Other Detail
Items Description A F
Check this item to store the date when the monitor device turns ON while the screen including
alarm list display is not being displayed, i.e., the screen is switched from the one including alarm
list display to another, and then returned to the first one.
When the data is not stored into the memory and the alarm list display screen is displayed again,
all the data time stamp displayed in the alarm list will be as same as the displayed time.
Switch
M1 00/5/31 12:00:15 Conveyor check screen 00/5/31 14:00:33 M5 ON
M2 00/5/31 13:30:25 Products check Screen Alarm
Store Memory
00/5/31 14:14:00 Switch screen
Memory is stored Memory is not stored
M1 00/5/31 12:00:15 Conveyor check 00/5/31 14:14:00 Conveyor check
M2 00/5/31 13:30:25 Products check 00/5/31 14:14:00 Products check
M5 00/5/31 14:00:33 Conveyor error 00/5/31 14:14:00 Conveyor error
M5 is the date and time of ON. M5 is the date and time
when the alarm list is displayed.
Check this item to operate the user alarm by using a touch switch for which key code has been set for
user alarm.
After checking, arrange above touch switch.
( Section 8.1.4 Touch switch for displaying user alarm)
Scroll On
Note that this item is not available in the following cases:
If the data list and alarm history are set to be displayed on the same screen
If multiple user alarms including the one with [Scroll On] checked are placed on a single
screen.
Check this item to specify the display start line of the multiple-line comment.
Then, set the number of the line.
Fixed :Set by direct input (1 to 32767)
Line No. of Display Start Device :Select this option to set the device value to the start line No.
Then, set the device. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
When comment appears as blank, check if the value set as the start line No. is within the number
of created comment lines.
Specify the number of lines of the multiple-line comment.
This option is available only when "Number of Comments" is set to "Single" (set in the Basic tab).
Then, set the value of each line.
Number of Lines
Fixed :Set by direct input. (1 to 32767)
Device :Select this option to set the device value to the number of comment lines.
Then, set the device. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
8 - 17 8.1 User Alarm Display
8.1.3 Setting items
1
5 Trigger tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
OVERVIEW
dialog box.
For the details about trigger setting, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting 2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Basic Device Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Select the trigger for displaying which the object.
5
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) in 1-second unit.
COMMON SETTINGS
Trigger Type
Ordinary ON OFF Rise
FOR OBJECTS
Fall Sampling Range Bit Trigger
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items
Word
Range
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device. 6
Trigger Select the data type of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real)
Data Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
LAMP, SWITCH
Range Click on the Exp... button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
Multi Bit When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used as
Bit Number
Trigger trigger. After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their triggers.
Initial Display
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be 7
displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be
Hold Display held even though the trigger is not satisfied.If not checked, the object will be deleted when the
NUMERICAL/
trigger is not satisfied.
Check this item to collect the alarm occurrence time while the screen where user alarm has not
Store Memory been set is displayed. ( Section 8.1.1 Store memory)
8
The alarm occurrence status are always monitored and stored to the GOT internal memory. After
checking, set the cycle to collect data (1 to 3600 s) in [Trigger Type].
ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display 8 - 18
8.1.3 Setting items
8.1.4 Touch switch for displaying user alarm
Set the touch switches for operating user alarm.
For the touch switches, create by setting the following key codes to them or read from the GT Designer2
library.
Example 1 Example 2
Up Scroll Down Scroll Up Down
1) 2) 5) 6)
View Era. Det. Lad.
3) 4) 7) 8)
Switch display by the Up/Down Scroll key. Move cursor by the Up/Down Move key to start the details
Touching the user alarm enables the details display display screen of alarm specified by cursor and the ladder
screen. (Set by checking [One Touch] of Device tab.) monitor screen.
Function Function Key code
*1, *2 Scroll to the upper part of the display. 00F2H
1) Up Scroll
2) Down Scroll *1, *2 Scroll to the lower part of the display. 00F3H
3) Display (cursor) Display the cursor. FFB0H
4) Erase (cursor) Erase the cursor. FFB1H
Move the cursor up when the cursor is displayed.
5) Up Move FFB2H
Move to the next page when the cursor is not displayed.
Move the cursor down when the cursor is displayed.
6) Down Move FFB3H
Move to the next page when the cursor is not displayed.
7) Details Display the screen of details. FFB8H
Search the alarm device and display on the ladder monitor screen.
8) Ladder *2 FFBCH
(Automatically search the specified device ladder and display it.)
*1 It will not act when the cursor is displayed.
*2 Not supported by GOT-F900 series.
To use the touch switches for user alarm
When using the touch switches for user alarm, make sure to check [Scroll] on the
Extended tab.
Remark For the setting method of the touch switch
For details, refer to the following.
Section 6.2.7 Setting items of key code switch
8 - 19 8.1 User Alarm Display
8.1.4 Touch switch for displaying user alarm
8.1.5 Precautions 1
This section provides the precautions to be taken when using user alarm.
OVERVIEW
1 Drawing precautions
(1) Maximum number of alarm list objects set in one screen
GOT-A900 series :24 2
GOT-F900 series :1
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) Maximum number of devices applicable for monitoring
Continuously specified device : 8192 devices (GOT-A900 series)
: 256 devices (GOT-F900 series)
Randomly specified device : 512 devices (GOT-A900 series only)
(3) When [Store Memory] is checked 3
(a) Up to 16 alarm list display objects with "Store memory" set can be set for each project.
COMMON SETTING
(b) Up to 8192 alarm list objects can be set in the whole projects as the devices applicable for
monitoring by [Store Memory]. The preset number of alarm lists display is not relevant.
(4) The character display of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the
screen pattern color or [Plate] of the Basic tab is set to White.
4
(Characters will be hidden since the color of the text and cursor are the same with the screen color.)
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the screen
PREPARATORY
pattern color or [Plate] of the Basic tab to other than White.
(5) Precautions when selecting [Random] for [Device No.]
When selecting [Random] for [Device No.], set the same quantity of alarm devices as the value
specified for [Alarm (Device) Points]. 5
If the number of set alarm devices is less than the value specified for [Alarm (Device) Points], all the
COMMON SETTINGS
user alarms are not displayed on a GOT.
FOR OBJECTS
2 Precautions for use
(1) Display of comment window
When key window is on display, the comment window cannot be displayed. 6
Make sure to erase the key window before displaying the comment window.
LAMP, SWITCH
Comment
window
Key window 7
1000
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Numerical input User alarm
NUMERICAL/
(2) Display of occurrence time
The occurrence time may not be displayed due to the connection type and connection destination.
(GOT-F900 series uses the clock function built-in GOT.)
8
Section 2.4 Clock Function
ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display 8 - 20
8.1.5 Precautions
(3) Cursor color for alarm list (for GOT-F900 only)
When touching the touch key for which the key code (FFB0H) has been set, the cursor will be
displayed in black at the top of the alarm list.
Therefore, if the screen background is black, the cursor is invisible. Make sure to set the alarm list
object and plate in the color other than black.
(4) When used with other objects
After checking [Scroll] in the extended tab (settings to use touch switch for user alarm), the
following objects cannot be set in the same screen.
Data list function object
Alarm history function object
(5) Touch switch for user alarm
(a) Setting screen
Make sure to set the touch switch for user alarm and user alarm in the same screen.
If not, the touch switch may operate instead of the user alarm, when both alarm history and
data list are displayed.
(b) Setting only the touch switch on another screen
To set only the touch switch for user alarm on another screen, make the setting by referring to
the following priority order:
Priority order corresponding to the touch switch screen
Screen for which touch switch has been set
Base screen
High
Call screen 1 to 5
Priority Order
Superimpose window
Overlap window1
Overlap window2
Low
Example: When touch switch has been set for other screens (overlap window2)
Cursor OFF Up
Cursor ON Down
04/6/1 13:25:49 Temp. error
Alarm list
04/6/1 12:15:30 Fuse error
(Set in the overlap window1)
Occurred Message Restore Check Alarm history
04/6/1 13:25:49 Temp. error 13:30 (Set in the base screen)
04/6/1 12:15:30 Fuse error 12:28
04/6/1 10:45:30 Oil error 11:26 11:15
As the base screen has higher priority,
operates it as the touch switch of alarm history.
(6) Commend display line range (GOT-F900 series only)
Only the first line of each comment is displayed.
The second and later lines of each comment are not displayed.
8 - 21 8.1 User Alarm Display
8.1.5 Precautions
(7) Precautions in using the F920GOT-K
1
"Occurred date" and "Time" are not available in the F920GOT-K.
If these items are set, a screen error will occur.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.1 User Alarm Display 8 - 22
8.1.5 Precautions
8.2 System Alarm Display
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
System alarm is a function used to display error codes and error messages when error occurs in the GOT,
PLC CPU or the network.
Displaying system alarm allows a user to check how the error occurred and its cause.
322 Specified device is out of the range 16:40:30
Error occur 104 Parameter error
246 Data from master station is not received
Remark Comments to display
Comments to display in system alarms do not need registration (Registered in
GOT).
8 - 23 8.2 System Alarm Display
8.2.1 Before setting system alarm 1
1 Types of system alarm
OVERVIEW
System alarm has the following three types:
1) GOT error : Displays a GOT error as an alarm
2) CPU error : Displays a PLC CPU error as an alarm 2
3) Error detected by communication module : Displays a network error as an alarm
(Only when connected with MELSECNET or CC-Link)
SPECIFICATIONS
2 Method of collecting data
Even while the screen that does not include system alarm is displayed, data are always collected every
3 seconds and stored into GOT.
3
3 Displayed information
COMMON SETTING
The error code, error message as well as error time will be displayed in system alarm.
The error code and error message for display are provided by default within GOT. Therefore, they do
not need to be created by user.
302 Specified device is out of range 16:40:30 4
104 Parameter error
246 Master station falls to receive data.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Error code Error message Occurred time
(Only for GOT erroe display)
4 Method of displaying alarm
5
(1) Maximum number of alarms can be displayed
COMMON SETTINGS
Each system alarm is displayed in one line type; up to 3 lines can be displayed.
The alarm display is updated when new alarm is detected.
FOR OBJECTS
Example: When new alarm (Parameter error) is detected by PLC CPU
302 Specified device is out of range
104 Para,eter error
16:40:30 302 Specified device is out of range
41 SP. UNIT DOWN
16:40:30
6
246 Master station falls to receive data. 246 Master station falls to receive data.
Error display of PLC CPU is refreshed.(9 104)
LAMP, SWITCH
(2) Display priority
When the display range is lower than 2 lines, alarms will be displayed in the following order.
1) GOT error
2) CPU error 7
3) Error detected by communication module
CHARACTER DISPLAY
When the number of alarm occurrence exceeds the display range, the lower priority alarms will not
NUMERICAL/
be displayed.
The error code, error message and error time beyond a single line will not be displayed.
8
ALARM
8.2 System Alarm Display 8 - 24
8.2.1 Before setting system alarm
5 Factors for each alarm type and corrective actions for error codes
Alarm type Factors How to read error code Reference manual
A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/
Alarm detected GOT communication error, Not corrective action is required (It is required to calculate A960GOT Users Manual
by GOT hardware error error code and read it again) A950GOT/A951GOT/A953GOT/
A956GOT Users Manual
The error code is stored to ACPU Users Manual
Not corrective action is required (It is required to calculate
D9008 of connection (Refer to the items of explanation
error code and read it again)
destination CPU (ACPU) for special link relay)
The special relay No. of FXCPU are as follows.
Error code Special relay No.
100 M8060
The error code is stored to : :
FXCPU Programming Manual
FXCPU 100 M8069
Alarm detected Example: When error code is 100
by PLC CPU *1 Carry out the corrective action referring to the
explanation of M8060.
The error code is stored to
Refer to the error message to specify the error factors. PLC CPU manual (other company
the CPU manufactured by
(ignore the error code.) product)
other company
The error code is stored to
the SD0 of connection Not corrective action is required (It is not required to calculate
QnACPU, QCPU Users Manual
destination CPU (QnACPU error code and read it again.)
and QCPU)
Execute the following calculation.
Type MELSECNET/B,
Error code + 9000 = Referred relay No. for use of link
MELSECNET(II) Data Link System
Data link special relay Example: When error code is 210
Reference Manual (Refer to the
(M9200 to M9299) is ON 210 + 9000 = 9210
items of explanation for special link
Carry out the corrective action referring to the
relay)
explanation of M9210.
Execute the following calculation.
Error code - 500 = Referred relay No. for use of link
Type MELSECNET/10 Network
Alarm detected (Replace DEC number with hexadecimal number)
Network link special relay System Reference Manual (Refer
by Example: When the error code is 510
SB is ON to the items of explanation for
communication 510 - 500 = 10 "000AH"
special link relay)
module Carry out the corrective action referring to the
explanation of SB000A.
Execute the following calculation.
Error code - 800 = Referred relay No. for use of link
CC-Link System Master/Local
(Replace DEC number with hexadecimal number)
CC-Link special relay SB is Module User's Manual (Refer to
Example: When the error code is 910
ON the items of explanation or special
910 - 800 = 110 "006EH"
link relay)
Carry out the corrective action referring to the
explanation of SB0006E.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
8 - 25 8.2 System Alarm Display
8.2.1 Before setting system alarm
*1 Alarm detection target for network connection and multi-CPU system connection 1
(1) For network connection
For network connection, following alarms detected by PLC CPU will be displayed in system alarm.
OVERVIEW
Connection type Alarm detection target
Bus connection
CPU direct connection PLC CPU of the connection destination
2
Computer link connection
MELSECNET MELSECNET/B (II) Master station
SPECIFICATIONS
connection MELSECNET/10 Control station of host network
CC-Link connection Master station
Ethernet connection PLC CPU set as host by GT Designer2
3
(2) For multi-CPU system connection
COMMON SETTING
For multi-CPU system connection, following alarms detected by PLC CPU will be displayed in
system alarm.
Connection type Alarm detection target
Bus connection PLC CPU that controls GOT
CPU direct connection PLC CPU that is connected with GOT
4
Computer link connection PLC CPU that controls the computer link module connected with GOT
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
MELSECNET connection PLC CPU that controls the network module connected with GOT
CC-Link connection PLC CPU that controls the CC-Link module connected with GOT
Ethernet connection PLC CPU that controls the Ethernet module set as host by GT Designer2
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.2 System Alarm Display 8 - 26
8.2.1 Before setting system alarm
8.2.2 Placement and settings
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
Click on (System Alarm).
Select [Object] [Alarm List] [System Alarm] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where System Alarm to be located to complete the arrangement.
3 Double click on the arranged system alarm to display the setting dialog box.
For the setting method, refer to the explanation on the next page.
Display field adjusting method
To prevent an alarm message from being truncated on display, adjust the display
field as follows.
If the GOT screen size is smaller than the value described below, adjust the font
size.
302 Specified device is out of range 16:40:30 Set in 3 rows.
104 Parameter error (Use 48 dots as vertical size in 3 rows
246 Master station fails to receive data. when text size is 1 1 times.)
Error message (maximum 52 digits) Occurrence time (fixed to 8 digits)
Display with 480 dots when text size is 1 1 times.
Increase the size to display the occurrence time at the right end.
Easier setting method
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
Object outline frame
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Shape frame
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
8 - 27 8.2 System Alarm Display
8.2.2 Placement and settings
8.2.3 Setting items 1
1 Basic tab
OVERVIEW
Set the display format (shape/text size) of system alarm
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Basic Extended
Item Description A F
Size Select the text size (0.5 to 8) of the error message to be displayed 4
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
selected.
Frame
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Format
Frame Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
5
Shape
COMMON SETTINGS
Plate Plate
FOR OBJECTS
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.2 System Alarm Display 8 - 28
8.2.3 Setting items
2 Extended tab
Set the security.
Check "Extended" at the bottom of this dialog box to display this tab.
Basic Extended
Item Description A F
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
8 - 29 8.2 System Alarm Display
8.2.3 Setting items
8.2.4 Precaution 1
This section describes precautions for using system alarm.
OVERVIEW
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Maximum number of system alarm that can be set in one screen
GOT-A900 series: 1 2
SPECIFICATIONS
(2) When using QCPU in connection with MELSECNET/10 (A7GT-J71LP23/A7GT-J71BR13 only)
(a) Setting of GX Developer
Make sure to check [Use Special Relay/Special Register Later Than SM1000, SD1000] of [A
Series CPU Exchange Setting] in [PC System Setting] of [PC Parameter Setting] of GX
Developer. 3
When this item is not checked, the error detected by communication module and PLC CPU will
COMMON SETTING
not be displayed in system alarm.
(b) Lise Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU
When using Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU, the error detected by communication module
and PLC CPU will not be displayed in system alarm.
(The above [Use Special Relay/Special Register Later Than SM1000, SD1000] of GX
4
Developer cannot be checked in Q00JCPU, Q00CPU and Q01CPU.)
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
2 Precautions for use
PREPARATORY
(1) When using SIEMENS PLC CPU
Alarms detected by PLC CPU are not displayed.
5
(2) Deletion of system alarms on GOT
COMMON SETTINGS
Even if the alarm factors are cleared, message of the alarm detected by GOT will remain in system
alarm.
FOR OBJECTS
To clear the message, make sure to turn the following bit device of system information function ON.
GOT error reset message (system signal1.b13)
Section 3.5 System Information Setting 6
(3) Display of occurrence time LAMP, SWITCH
The date and time may not be displayed due to the connection type and PLC CPU of the
connection destination.
(GOT-F900 series uses the clock function built-in GOT)
Section 2.4 Clock Function 7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
(4) Text and plate color
As the text color for system alarm is fixed to white, set the plate color to non-white.
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.2 System Alarm Display 8 - 30
8.2.4 Precaution
8.3 Alarm History Display
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
The times and comments of the alarms occurred are stored in the GOT incorporated memory and displayed
as a history list when conditions of the device specified for alarm detection are met (Bit OFF to ON/word
device range).
Occurred Message Restore Check
Alarm
04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error 11:25 10:45
occurred 04/03/01 12:05 Oil error
Up Down Check
The occurred date, time and message of the alarm are
displayed when X0 turns ON.
X0:OFF ON
Supply oil to the Alarm details, error measures
Alarm arm of Line 1. and so on are displayed.
detail
Up Down Check
display
The window for detail display is any of the comment window,
base screen, or window screen.
Occurred Message Restore Check
Alarm 04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error 11:25 10:45
checked 04/03/01 12:05 Oil error 12:10
Up Down Check
time
With the touch switch for alarm history
display, the alarm check time is displayed.
To create the touch switch for alarm history display, set a key code to the touch switch.
System Restoration
Occurred Message Restore Check
After 04/03/01 10:25 Fuse error 11:25 10:45
system 04/03/01 12:05 Oil error 12:45 12:10
Up Down Check
restoration
The restoration time
is displayed.
X0:ON OFF
8 - 31 8.3 Alarm History Display
Examples 1
Print out (GOT-A900 series only) Display alarm data on PC
Make setting on Print (Common) tab (GOT-A900 Make setting on Option (Common) tab
series only)
OVERVIEW
Date Time Message Reset Check CSV file
Date Time Message
04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.
02/02/01 10:25 Line1 Err. 11:25 10:45 Date Time Message
02/02/01 12:05 Line2 Err. 12:40 12:28
2
04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.
02/02/01 12:35 Line2 Err. 13:20 12:50
Date Time Message Reset Check Date Time Message Reset Check
Memory card
02/02/01 10:25 Line1 Err. 11:25 10:45
02/02/01 10:25 Line1 Err. 11:25 10:45 02/02/01 12:05 Line2 Err. 12:40 12:28
02/02/01 12:35 Line2 Err. 13:20 12:50
02/02/01 12:05 Line2 Err. 12:40 12:28
02/02/01 12:35 Line2 Err. 13:20 12:50
SPECIFICATIONS
The alarm historical data saved to memory card in CSV file
format are read by spreadsheet software.
Start ladder monitor function from alarm history display Display number of alarm that have been historical
(GOT-A900 series only)
Make setting with Touch Switch (Section 6.2.4) Make setting on Option (Common) tab
3
M999 K
Date Time Message
COMMON SETTING
MOV 1 D1 Date Time Message Date Time Message
02/02/01 10:25 Line Err. K
MOV 2 D2 04/02/01 10:25 Temp.Err. 04/02/01 10:25 Temp. Err.
Ladder 04/02/01 10:25 Atm Err.
display
Alarm his. number 1 Alarm his. number 2
Ladder monitor function is Ladder status of device The number of all alarms historical is displayed
displayed by touch switch displayed as alarm
history is monitored in alarm history
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 32
8.3.1 Before setting alarm history display
This section explains functions applicable to the alarm history display.
1 Alarm collection mode
Select either of the two collection modes, historical mode or cumulative mode.
When an alarm occurs, the following information can be collected and displayed.
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count
04/06/01 20:00 Temp. error - - - 1
04/06/01 18:30 Light error - 18:50 - 2
04/06/01 16:10 Oil error 16:30 16:20 00:20 2
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
(In the example above, 3), 4), and 5) indicate time only.)
Description
Info displayed
Historical mode Cumulative mode
1) Occurrence Displays the date and time of the alarm occurrence.
2) Message When an alarm occurs, displays the comment assigned to the alarm.
3) Restore Displays the date and time of restoration.
Displays the date and time on which alarm occurrence was confirmed.
Alarm occurrence is confirmed with the touch switch for alarm confirmation.
( Section 8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display)
4) Check
Message Restore Check Message Restore Check
Pwr. module error
Check Pwr. module error 19:00
(FFB4H)
Displays the total amount of time for which alarms were
generated in the past.
Cumulative time = t1 + t2 + t3
5) Cumulative
Status of alarm t1 t2 t3
time occurrence
(X0: OFF ON) Alarm Alarm Alarm
occurred occurred occurred
(1st) (2nd) (3rd)
Time
6) Count Displays the number of times of alarm occurrence.
8 - 33 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.1 Before setting alarm history display
Example: Examples of alarm display 1
This section shows examples of alarm history display for each collection mode.
(Timing of alarm occurrence)
OVERVIEW
ON ON
"Temp. error" OFF OFF
(M10:OFF ON)
2
ON
"Fuse error"
(M20:OFF ON)
SPECIFICATIONS
11:30 12:00 15:30 18:25 19:00
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Alarm confirmation
by the user*1
*1 Alarms are confirmed with the touch switch for confirmation.
( Section 8.3.3 Setting items)
3
COMMON SETTING
(1) Historical mode
The information on alarm occurrence status are collected as history.
Status is added to the history every time an alarm occurs.
4
Not collected in the historical mode.
1) "Temp. error" occurs
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count
"Temp. error"
OBJECT SETTING
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error occurs!
2) "Temp. error" is checked
Occurred Message
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error
Restore Check Cumulate Count
12:00 "Temp. error" is
5
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error checked
COMMON SETTINGS
Check (FFB4H)
FOR OBJECTS
3) Restored from "Temp. error"
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 Restoration
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error date/time
is displayed 6
4) The restored "Temp. error" occurred again
LAMP, SWITCH
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error A new line is
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 added and
displayed.
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error
7
5) Restored from "Temp. error"
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error 19:00 Restoration
NUMERICAL/
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 date/time
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error is displayed
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 34
8.3.1 Before setting alarm history display
(2) Cumulative mode
The information on the latest alarm status, the number of alarms that have occurred and the
cumulative alarm occurrence time are collected for each alarm type.
1) "Temp. error" occurs
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 00:00 1 "Temp. error" occurs!
04/06/01 10:25 Temp. error 00:00 1
2) "Temp. error" checked
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 12:00 00:00 1 "Temp. error"
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error 00:00 1 is checked
Check (FFB4H)
3) Restored from "Temp. error"
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count
04/06/01 11:30 Temp. error 15:30 12:00 04:00 1 Restoration time and
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error cumulative time are
displayed.
4) "Temp. error" occurred again
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count The occurrence time when
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error 04:00 2 the alarm occurred again
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error is displayed on the same
line of the alarm freguency
is increased by one.
5) Restored from "Temp. error" Restoration time is
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count displayed.
04/06/01 18:25 Temp. error 19:00 04:35 2 The time during which
04/06/01 10:25 Fuse error the alarm has been
generated is added to
the cumulative time.
2 Collecting and holding alarm data
(1) Collecting alarm data
The GOT collects alarm data at any time and saves the data in the GOT internal memory.
Alarm data are constantly collected and updated even while the monitor screen not including alarm
history display is displayed.
AAA BBB CCC No. 25 D1 10 AAA BBB CCC
AAA BBB CCC D2 20 AAA BBB CCC
AAA BBB CCC
Switch to another screen The alarm data updated while
the other screen was displayed
are shown.
(2) Deleting alarm data
Alarm data are deleted at the following timing.
(a) Power-off or reset of the GOT
(b) Following setting of Utility
Setup
Message change (Japanese/English) using the system message switch button
8 - 35 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.1 Before setting alarm history display
(c) Project data download/upload, OS installation, drive information delete and drive format, or
acquisition of built-in memory information.
1
(d) Clear trigger device
Turning on the device specified at "History Clear" (on the Option (Common) tab) deletes all the
OVERVIEW
alarms in the restored status.
(e) Key operations of the switches for alarm history display (touch switches)
Alarms in the restored status can be deleted using the following touch switches.
2
Delete (FFB6H): Delete the alarms in the restored status one by one.
Delete All (FFB7H): Delete all the alarms in the restored status.
SPECIFICATIONS
Section 8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display
(f) When the number of alarms occurred has exceeded the upper limit (when the collection mode
is "Historical")
In the case where "When number of alarm occurrences exceeds set value, delete oldest alarm 3
occurrences" was check-marked on the Option (common) tab, if the number of alarms
COMMON SETTING
occurred has exceeded the upper limit, the older alarms are deleted from the oldest one.
[Upper limit in total number of alarms occurred]
When the number of monitor devices is 1024 or less :
Alarm historical data can be displayed up to 1024
When the number of monitor devices is 1025 or more : 4
Alarm historical data as many as the monitor device points can be displayed.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
[Operation setting for the case where the maximum number of alarms is exceeded]
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
Alarm History dialog box (Option (Common tab))
(3) Holding alarm data under power failure
6
In the case of GOT-A900 series
Alarm data can be held even if the GOT is powered off by saving them to the memory card.
In the case of GOT-F900 series LAMP, SWITCH
Alarm historical data can be saved in the built-in RAM memory and held in the built-in RAM
battery.
For F920GOT-K, E2PROM memory is used.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 36
8.3.1 Before setting alarm history display
3 Detail display
(1) Usable screens ( Set in device tab)
To display alarm causes and corrective actions in details, any of the following 3 screen types can
be selected.
(a) Comment window
Comment registered by the user are displayed on the comment window.
More detailed comment such as details and corrective actions can be displayed on the
comment window.
Temperature error
of the line 1's
power module
Occurred Message Occurred Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base screen 1 Base screen 1 + Comment window
(b) Base screen
The specified base screen is displayed.
Tank control screen
Tank A Tank B Tank C
Occurred Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
90 40 60
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Run Stop Run Stop Run Stop
Base screen 1 Base screen 5
(c) Window screen (GOT-A900 series only)
The specified window screen (overlap window 1) is displayed.
Feed material from the opening.
Occurred Message Feed opening
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
Base screen 1 Base screen 1 + Window screen 10
8 - 37 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.1 Before setting alarm history display
(2) Display method
1
Select either of the following 2 methods for detail display.
(a) One touch ( Set in basic tab)
OVERVIEW
Display the detail display by touching the alarm history display item directly.
2
Temperature error of
the line 1's power
SPECIFICATIONS
module
Occurrence Message
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
COMMON SETTING
(b) Touch switch ( Section 8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display)
Create a touch switch for alarm history to display the detailed data.
Occurred Message Occurred Message Occurred
Replace
Message
the fuse of
4
04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error 04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error 04/6/1 16:13:01 Temp. error
line 1's power
04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error 04/6/1 15:51:38 Fuse error
module.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error 04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error 04/6/1 10:25:16 Oil error
PREPARATORY
Display Up Detail Display Up Detail Display Up Detail
Delete Down Delete Down Delete Down
Display the cursor Move the cursor (using Up or Down)
to the target alarm.
Make the details displayed
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 38
8.3.1 Before setting alarm history display
8.3.2 Placement and setting
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
Select [Object] [Alarm History] from the menu
Click (Alarm History)
2 Click on the desired position completes the arrangement of the alarm history display.
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
Object outline frame
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Shape frame
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
3 Double click on the arranged alarm history display, and make setting in the displayed dialog box with
reference to the following explanation.
The settings whose tab names are marked with (Common) in the dialog box are common settings in
project.
Project common settings
(Project setting is limited one common setting only)
As shown in the following example, although monitor devices are set in the same way for all alarm
history displays, different display formats (number of display rows/alarm frame color) can be set for each
display.
Monitor device X0: ON
(Common settings X1: ON
for all alarm historial X2: ON
datas) X3: ON
X4: ON
X5: ON
X6: ON
X7: ON
X8: ON
Alarm history Alarm history Alarm history
Alarm history of X0 Alarm history of X3 Alarm history of X5
Alarm history of X1 Alarm history of X4 Alarm history of X6
Alarm history of X2 Alarm history of X7
Alarm history of X8
Base screen No. 1 Base screen No. 2 Base screen No. 3
Different settings for the number of row and frame color are available for each alarm history.
8 - 39 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.2 Placement and setting
1
Easier setting method
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
OVERVIEW
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
Remark Common settings of alarm history
The common settings of alarm history can be set as follows.
2
Select [Common] [Alarm History] from the menu.
SPECIFICATIONS
Select [Project] [Common Settings] [Alarm History] from project workspace
4 Setting touch switches for alarm history
Set the touch switches that are used for alarm history display such as cursor display, movement, 3
detailed alarm display.
COMMON SETTING
Section 8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display
Date Time Message
02/03/01 10:25 Temp. Error
Up Detail...
Down Erase... 4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 40
8.3.2 Placement and setting
8.3.3 Setting items
1 Basic tab
Set the display details (e.g. style, format, order of the display.)
In case of GOT-A900 Series
In case of GOT-F900 Series
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Extended
Item Description A F
Title Input the title names of view items individually.
Occurred Select the text color of date, time and message in alarm display rows (display rows).
(Continued to the next page)
8 - 41 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.3 Setting items
1
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Extended
OVERVIEW
Item Description A F
Alarm Date/Time Input the title names of view items individually.
Contents
Date Select the text color of date, time and message in alarm display rows (display rows).
Select the format or text for alarm date/time display so that it will be displayed in "Occurred" when
2
Time
an alarm occurs.
SPECIFICATIONS
Alarm Text When displaying the date, check this item and select the format.
Set the number of rows displayed for each screen. (Up to 27 rows)
Example: When this is set to 3
Occurred date Time Message Restore Check
Number of Rows
04/11/05
04/11/05
10:25
12:05
Temp. error
Oil error
11:25
12:25
10:45
12:28
Display rows 3
(not including the title line)
04/11/06 08:30 Fuse error 09:45 09:40
COMMON SETTING
When triggers of more than one specified device are satisfied, set from which alarm data are to be
displayed in order of alarm occurrence. (1 to 1024)
When alarms have occurred less frequently than set in "Display Head Row", the lines later than the
last alarm log appear blank.
Example: When this is set to 4
Display Head Row *1 Alarm occurred items
4
1) M0 ON Alarm
2) M0 ON occurred
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Occurred date Time Message Restore Check 3) M0 ON order
PREPARATORY
04/11/05 10:25 M3 No 11:25 10:45 4) M0 ON
04/11/05 12:05 M3 No 12:25 12:28 5) M0 ON
Alarm No.4 and later are displayed
Set how much space is kept between the ruled line of the table and the characters such as time
display. 5
X : 0 to 32 dots (Available in 1-dot units)
COMMON SETTINGS
Y : 0 to 32 dots (Available in 8-dot units)
Space According to the setting of "Size" (magnification of
FOR OBJECTS
Occurrence date/time
character size), the actual horizontal space is as follows:
"Magnification of character size set value in Space"
(Example)
When "Size" is set to 2 and "Space" to 8, space of 16 dots is ensured.
Select a size of the character displayed on the alarm history display (magnification of horizontal 6
size (X) vertical size (Y).
When X Y is 1 1, the character size is 8 16 dots (X Y).
LAMP, SWITCH
Size GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
A 1 to 8 times A 0.5 to 4 times
1 to 8 times 1 to 8 times
Use 6 8 dot font Font is displayed in size of 6 8 dots. (Characters only) 7
Check the checkbox when displaying characters in the high-quality font.
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Use High Quality Font (Only when the character size is set to 2 2, 4 4, 6 6, or 8 8 (horizontal vertical))
To display HQ font characters, set the HQ font in the Comment setting.
NUMERICAL/
Select the display order of alarm items.
Sort Setting Oldest : Displays the alarm data in order of occurrence starting from the oldest data.
Latest : Displays the alarm data in order of occurrence starting from the latest data.
Title Select the title color.
8
(Continued to the next page)
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 42
8.3.3 Setting items
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Extended
Item Description A F
Check this item to display the detailed display screen by touching any row of the alarm history.
The details of the touched row are displayed.
Display Alarm Details by One Touch a row you want to view the details
Occurred Message Restore Check
Touch
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45 Check Line 1
04/11/05 12:05 Oil error 12:25 12:28
Check the items to be displayed on the alarm history display.
Restorations Cumulative Time
Occurrences Checks Occur. Frequency
Display style
Occurred Message Restore Check Cumulate Count
02/11/05 10:25 Conveyer 1 error 11:25 10:45 01:00 1
02/11/05 12:05 Conveyer 2 error 12:25 12:28 00:20 5
The date and time of the alarm occurred and the comment associated with the alarm are
Occurrences
displayed. (This item is always check-marked.)
Check the checkbox when displaying the date and time of restoration from an alarm (when the
Restorations
specified device condition is changed from "met" to "not met").
Check the checkbox to display the time at which alarm occurrence was confirmed.
The time at which the Check switch was touched after alarm occurrence is displayed.
( Section 8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display)
Checks
Message Restore Check Message Restore Check
Oil error
Check Oil error 12:00
Check the checkbox when displaying the time that elapsed from alarm occurrence until restoration
Cumulative Time in minutes.
To set this item, select "Cumulative" in "Mode" on the Device (Common) tab.
Check the checkbox when displaying how many times alarms were generated.
Occur Frequency
To set this item, select "Cumulative" in "Mode" on the Device (Common) tab.
View Format Set the view format of the items set in [Display style].
Title Input the title name for each view item.
Set the number of digits (column width) for each item.
Example: When message width is set to 12
Occurred Message Restore Check
04/11/05 10:25 Oil error 11:25 10:45
Displayed with a width of 12 digits
Width Occurred :Set automatically based on the setting of "Contents" shown below.
(A value is set in the range of 1 to 20 if "Content" is "String.")
Message :1 to 80 digits
Restored/Checks :Set automatically based on the setting of "Contents" shown below.
(A value is set in the range of 1 to 20 if the "Contents" is "String.")
Cum. Time :Fixed to 8 digits
OccurFreq :Fixed to 8 digits
Color Select the title color for each view item.
(Continued to the next page)
8 - 43 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.3 Setting items
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
1
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Extended
OVERVIEW
Item Description A F
Select this item to set the view format for date and time of alarm occurrence.
Date/Time :Displays data and time.
(After selection, select the view format for data and time)
2
Date :Displays date only.
Contents*2 (After selection, select the view format for date)
SPECIFICATIONS
Time :Displays time only.
(After selection, select the view format for time)
String :Displays the specified character string.
(After selection, input the character string to the [Text] below.)
Input characters to display the date and time of the alarm occurred (when triggers of specified
Text
device are satisfied) as a specified character string. 3
Select [String] in [Contents] to set this item.
COMMON SETTING
Maximum 20 characters can be input.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 44
8.3.3 Setting items
*1 Display Head Row
If the number of alarms becomes higher than the numbers set to [Display Head Row] while alarm history
is displayed on the GOT, [Display Head Row] setting will not be valid.
To enable [Display Head Row] setting, switch the screen, and then return the screen to the alarm history
display screen.
Application example of Display Head Row
If different [Display Head Row] are set on screens, different alarm history display
can be displayed for each screen.
Number of alarm occurrences Screen 1
Item No. 1 Item No. 1 (Display Head Row: 1)
Item No. 2 Item No. 2
Item No. 3 Item No. 3
Item No. 4
Item No. 5
Item No. 6
Screen 2
Item No. 7 Item No. 4 (Display Head Row: 4)
Item No. 8 Item No. 5
Item No. 9 Item No. 6
Screen 3
Item No. 7 (Display Head Row: 7)
Item No. 8
Item No. 9
*2 View format of alarm date/time
View format of date
Year is displayed by the last 2 digits of the year.
(Example) Nov. 25, 2004
[yy/mm/dd] : 02/11/25 (8 digits)
[mm/dd/yy] : 11/25/02 (8 digits)
[dd/mm/yy] : 25/11/02 (8 digits)
[mm/dd] : 11/25 (5 digits)
View format of time
Time is displayed by 24-hour format.
(Example) 9: 50: 48a.m.
[hh: mm: ss] : 09: 50: 48 (8 digits)
[hh: mm] : 09: 50 (5 digits)
Display format of date/time
A one-digit space is inserted between the date and time.
04/11/25_09:50:48 (17 digits)
Space (1 digit)
8 - 45 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.3 Setting items
1
2 Frame tab
Set the frame, ruled line/ vertical line for alarm history.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
(Example : In the case of GOT-A900 series)
4
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
Frame
PREPARATORY
Basic Device (Common) Print (Common) Extended
Item Description A F
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed. 5
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
COMMON SETTINGS
selected.
FOR OBJECTS
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame
Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Format
Frame Plate
15963 6
Plate
Frame
LAMP, SWITCH
Check this item to draw ruled lines for alarm history.
After checking, select a color for the ruled line.
Draw Ruled Line Occurred date Time Message Restore Check
7
04/11/05 10:25 11:25 10:45
04/11/05 10:25 11:25 10:45
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 46
8.3.3 Setting items
3 Device (Common) tab
Set the collecting method of alarm data and the device.
The setting on this tab is reflected for display of all the alarm historical data.
In case of GOT-A900 series
In case of GOT-F900 series
8 - 47 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.3 Setting items
Device (Common)
1
Basic Frame Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Extended
OVERVIEW
Item Description A F
Select a collection mode of the alarm history display function.
Historical :Corrects alarm data as history.
If an alarm in the restored status occurs again, the alarm data is 2
collected as a new alarm.
Cumulative :The latest alarm status, the cumulative period of time the alarm has
SPECIFICATIONS
been generated, and the cumulative number of times of the alarm
occurrences are calculated.
Mode
If any alarm in the restored status occurs again, the occurrence
frequency increases, and the previous alarm information (occurrence
date/time, restored time, and checked time) is updated to the latest
one.
3
For differences in the collection modes, refer to the following.
COMMON SETTING
Section 8.3.1 Alarm collection mode
Set the number of monitor device points.
The number of points available for setting varies in types of monitor devices.
Bit device/bit specification for word device :1 to 3072 points
Number of alarms to monitor Word device (16bit) :1 to 1024 points (ON status is recognized
according to value case)
4
Word device (32bit) :1 to 512 points (ON status is recognized
OBJECT SETTING
according to value case)
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Set the cycle in which the GOT monitors the specified devices of the PLC CPU.
Watch Cycle
Cycle can be set from 600ms to 80s in the units of 100ms.
Select a method for displaying alarm details.
Set the comment No./base screen No. and window screen No. in "Detail" field of the monitor
device list.
5
No Display :No details are displayed.
COMMON SETTINGS
Detailed alarm display type *1
Comment Window :Created comments are displayed on the window screen for alarm
FOR OBJECTS
history.
Base Screen :The detailed information is displayed on the base screen.
Window Screen :Displays the window screen on overlap window 1. (GOT-A900 series
only)
Select a data type of the device monitored. 6
Bit :Select this when monitoring a bit device by the ON/OFF change.
Bit Of Word :Select this when monitoring a word device by ON/OFF of specified bits.
Signed BIN16 :The word device value is handled as a signed 16-bit binary. LAMP, SWITCH
Unsigned BIN16 :The word device value is handled as an unsigned 16-bit binary.
Signed BIN32 :The word device value is handled as a signed 32-bit binary.
Unsigned BIN32 :The word device value is handled as an unsigned 32-bit binary.
Data Type
BCD16 :The word device value is handled as a 16-bit BCD (binary-coded
decimal).
7
BCD32 :The word device value is handled as a 32-bit BCD (binary-coded
CHARACTER DISPLAY
decimal).
Real :The word device value is handled as a floating-point real number.
NUMERICAL/
After selecting any of the above, specify the devices monitored in the Device column of the alarm
setting list below.
(Continued to the next page)
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 48
8.3.3 Setting items
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Extended
Item Description A F
Set the devices specified for alarms, conditions for alarm occurrences, and operation when an
Alarm setting list
alarm occurs.
Set the device to be monitored.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
When setting a device as a word device, click the Exp button to set the range of the word device
Alarm Range*2
values for the alarm data display.
Set a comment No. used for the device specified.
Occurred Message Restore Check
Cmnt. No. 04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45
04/11/05 12:05 Oil error 12:25 12:28
Set a comment No. of the message to be displayed in this area.
The comment corresponding to the "Cmnt. No." is displayed.
Comment
Any comment registered can be selected. If a comment is selected here, the "Cmnt. No." is
Selection
switched automatically.
Set the comment No., window screen No., and base screen No. for displaying detailed data when
Detail
an alarm occurs (when specified device conditions are met).
Print When an alarm factor turns ON, GOT will print out the alarm occurred data/time and message.
Even if an alarm factor changes from ON to OFF, without ACK (acknowledge), it can be displayed
Ack
as an alarm status on the alarm list screen.
If "Yes" is selected, the corresponding alarm is selected in the alarm display. Pressing the reset
Reset
touch switch resets the alarm device.
Select whether or not to enable the alarm resetting (turning off or resetting the specified device by
the touch switch for resetting).
RST
After checking this item, set up a reset value if the device is a word device.
( Section 8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display)
Set a value written into the word device (reset value) when the GOT is reset by the touch switch
RSTValue
for alarm history display.
Select a mail-sending mode.
No :No mails are sent.
Occur :The occurred date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an
alarm occurs (when the conditions of the device are met).
Restore :The restored date/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email when an
alarm is restored (when the conditions of the device are not met).
Both :The occurred or restored data/time and comment of the alarm is sent by email
when an alarm occurs or an alarm is restored.
Select a device setting method.
Continuous :Set devices continuously starting from the device specified.
Random :Set devices one by one.
Device No. Fixed :Set more than one alarm range with the same word device when the word
device is set.
When "Random" is selected, it is not allowed to set a bit device and the word device bits together
as monitoring devices.
Select how to set the comment No.
Comment No. Continuous :Set comment No. continuously starting from the comment No. specified.
Random :Set comment No. one by one.
(Continued to the next page)
8 - 49 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.3 Setting items
Device (Common)
1
Basic Frame Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Extended
OVERVIEW
Item Description A F
Select how to set the comment No. , window screen, or base screen for detail display.
Continuous :Set numbers continuously starting from the comment No., window screen No.,
Detailed Display No.
or base screen No. 2
Random :Set numbers one by one.
Copy*3
SPECIFICATIONS
When copying the set data to another field, click the Copy button.
(Import)*4 Reads the alarm history setting that was edited in a CSV file into GT Designer2.
(Export)*4 Saves the alarm history setting that was set by GT Designer2 in a CSV file.
For details of *1 to *4, refer to the following.
3
*1 Displaying the comment window
COMMON SETTING
(1) Number of characters available for comment window
A960GOT, A97*GOT, A985GOT : 39 characters 11 lines (429 characters)
A95*GOT, A956WGOT : 23 characters 7 lines (161 characters)
(2) Comment window is displayed on top-left of base screen
The operation of moving and closing the window is the same as that of the window screen.
4
(3) Comment text is displayed as follows
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Text size: fixed to 1 length, 1 width
The setting reverse, blink style are not supported, regardless of the comment registration settings.
(4) The comment lines are displayed in the comment window as follows.
Comments are displayed from top-left to right in the comment window. 5
If the comment exceeds the display range of the comment window, it is continued starting a new line.
COMMON SETTINGS
To place the comment in the center of the comment window, make adjustment using the line feed
for the comment.
FOR OBJECTS
Temp. error detected at Line 1's power module
Check the power module
Temp. error detected at Line 1's power module
Check the power module
6
When the comment is registered LAMP, SWITCH
When the comment window is displayed
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 50
8.3.3 Setting items
*2 Alarm range
Edit Alarm Range dialog box
Set a range of word device values for displaying alarms.
Item Description
Set a range of word device values for displaying alarms using a conditional expression.
Select any of the following conditional expressions.
Set a conditional expression by a combination of a device value ($V) and constants.
Alarm Range
Constant Device value for alarm display ($V)
Relational operator
To set an expression other than the above 3 patterns, select "Other Range" and then click the "Exp..."
button.
When the Edit Range Expression dialog box appears, set any conditional expression.
In a conditional expression set by a user, the value of another word device can be set as a condition.
(Constant) Enter a value in decimal.
Set a relational operator for the conditional expression.
< : The value of the left term is less than that of the right term
== : The value of the left term is equal to that of the right term
(Relational operator) <= : The value of the left term is equal to or less than that of the right term
!= : The value of the left term is not equal to that of the right term
$V Indicates the value of the device used for alarm display.
*1 Clicking this displays the edit range expression dialog box.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
8 - 51 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.3 Setting items
*1 Edit Range Expression dialog box 1
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Description
Select a format of the conditional expression.
Style A B (2 Terms) : Sets a range of the condition using 2 terms.
A B C (3 Terms) : Sets a range of the condition using 3 terms.
3
By clicking the A , B , or C button, set a constant or variable of the term in "Input Each Term (A-C)."
COMMON SETTING
Set a relational operator of the conditional expression.
< : The value of the left term is less than that of the right term
== : The value of the left term is equal to that of the right term
<= : The value of the left term is equal to or less than that of the right term
!= : The value of the left term is not equal to that of the right term
Set each of the terms of the conditional expression. 4
Fixed Value :Set a constant.
Select this item, enter a value and click the Input button.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Select the data type of the numerical value by the Hex , Dec , or Oct but-
Input Each
ton.
Term (A-C)
$V (Device Value) :Set the word device by which an alarm is displayed.
Other Device :Set s value of device other than the word device set for alarm display as a term
of the conditional expression.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 52
8.3.3 Setting items
*3 Copy
This section explains how to copy the set alarm history items to other place.
Item Description A F
Source No. Set the alarm history No. that will be copied.
Destination No. Set the alarm history No. that will be a copy destination.
Number of Copy Set the number of copies.
Copy Item Check the relevant items.
Comment No. Copies comment No. of the source.
Detailed No. Copies the detailed display No. of the source.
Device Reset Copies the device reset settings of the source.
Alarm Range Copies the range setting of the source.
Send Mail Copies the send mail settings of the source.
8 - 53 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.3 Setting items
*4 Import/Export 1
The exported CSV file can be edited using such as the spreadsheet software.
The CSV file, after editing, can be imported to and opened by GT Designer2.
OVERVIEW
Example: Importing and exporting in CSV file
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
Exported in CSV file 4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Editing the exported file 5
COMMON SETTINGS
Add the setting using applications
R
such as Microsoft Excel.
FOR OBJECTS
6
Importing to GT Designer2
LAMP, SWITCH
The added contents are displayed.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 54
8.3.3 Setting items
4 Option (Common) tab
Set the history retention (history clear, saved to memory card) for alarm history.
The settings on this tab will be reflected in all alarm history display.
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Extended
Item Description A F
Check this item to store the number of alarms currently occurred and restored to a word device.
After checking, click on Dev... button and set the device.
Number of Alarms Occurred ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
The cycle for GOT to monitor the history clear trigger device is the same as [Watch Cycle] set on
the Device (Common) tab.
Check the checkbox when forcibly deleting the restored-state alarm data by changing the specified
device status from OFF to ON.
After checking the box, click on the Dev... button to set the device to be used as a history clear
trigger. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
History Clear
The cycle in which the GOT monitors the history clear trigger device is the same as "Watch Cycle"
set on the Device (Common) tab.
Alarm data can be cleared by the touch switch (the switch for history clearance) as well.
( Section 8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display)
Check this item to save alarm historical data to PC card.
After checking, select the storage cycle in one-minute unit within a range from 1 minute to
Store to Memory Card*2 maximum 60 minutes.
Data can be stored to memory card using the alarm history switch.
( Section 8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display)
Store to CSV File Check the checkbox when saving alarm data to the memory card in the CSV file format.
Format*1 This is selectable only when "Store to Memory Card" is check-marked.
The file name is displayed.
File Name Using the CSV file format: Displayed as ALARMHST.CSV
Not using the CSV file format: Displayed as ALARMHST.DAT
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.
(Continued to the next page)
8 - 55 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.3 Setting items
1
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Extended
OVERVIEW
Item Description A F
When number of alarm
occurrences exceed set value, Check this item to delete the oldest alarm when the number of alarm occurrences exceeds a
delete oldest alarm certain value (GOT-A900 series: 1024 or 3072, GOT-F900 series: 1000) and in the case of the 2
occurrences triggers of the newly specified device are satisfied.
When number of alarm ( Section 8.3.5 Precautions)
SPECIFICATIONS
occurrences exceed 1000, If this item is not checked, when the number of alarm occurrences exceeds a certain value, new
delete oldest alarm alarm data cannot be added.
occurrences
*1 Saving data in the CSV format 3
(1) Data stored
COMMON SETTING
Alarm data are converted into a CSV file data as follows.
The CSV file can be read and displayed on a PC by spreadsheet software.
Example) In case of [Mode] : [Cumulative]
Number of alarms occurred
Number of restored-state alarms
Not collected in
historical mode
4
Number of checked alarms
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Occurrence date/time Comment Restoration Check Cumulative Occurrence
(may be displayed differently date/time date/time time frequency
(e.g. "2004/5/29") depending
on the spreadsheet software
setting.)
5
COMMON SETTINGS
(2) Updating stored data
FOR OBJECTS
Data collected on the alarm history display are overwritten to the CSV file at the user-specified
cycles (1 to 60s).
Because the alarm data deleted on the alarm history display are deleted in the CSV file as well, do
not delete the alarm to be kept in the CSV file.
6
Remark When all of alarm history data are deleted
LAMP, SWITCH
If the alarm history is stored to a CSV file after all data have been deleted with the
touch switch Delete All (FFB7H) or "History Clear," the CSV file is left blank.
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
Stored to a CSV file with alarm history deleted Nothing is stored.
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 56
8.3.3 Setting items
*2 Storing erroneous alarm information data
If the memory card is faulty or the files are different from those in the memory card, the GOT
internal device (error detection common information: GS252.b0) turns ON to disable the alarm
information to be stored (Device data collection is continued).
If the storage operation is done in this situation, the system alarm will occur.
If GS252.b0 turns ON, replace the memory card or check the data within the card.
Turning ON the GOT internal device (error detection common control: GS452.b0) will turn
GS252.b0 OFF. This allows the file storage to be resumed.
For details of GOT internal devices, refer to the following.
Section 2.6.1 GOT internal devices
Turn GS452.b0 ON using
If an alarm information While GS252.b0 is ON, touch switch or similar, Alarm information
file is faulty, the alarm information as this causes GS252. after monitoring
GS252.b0 turns ON.. file is not stored. b0 to turn OFF. starts is stored.
Power ON.
Monitoring Reading alarm Alarm information Alarm information
start information files storage storage
GOT operation
Alarm information Alarm information
Error status is not stored. is stored.
Alarm information
status Normal status
Error detection common ON
information (GS252.b0) OFF
Error detection common ON
control (GS452.b0) OFF
Application of error detection common information
An overlap window (for file error detection) can be displayed by detecting GS252.b0
with script function.
8 - 57 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.3 Setting items
1
5 Print (Common) tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set the print item and print format for printing of the alarm history.
Alarm historical data are printed based on these settings, separately from the settings on the basic tab.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
4
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
OBJECT SETTING
Item Description A F
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Check this item to print out the alarm history.
History print is real time executed at the timing of alarm occurrence, restoration and check.
GOT is capable of accepting 100 lines of print at a time.
When the print data exceeds the limit of 100 lines as the following cases, the exceeded data will
History Print
not be printed. 5
1. When print of data exceeding 100 lines is requested during [Printer Error].
COMMON SETTINGS
2. When more than on e print request exceeding the limit of 100 lines data are issued
concurrently.
FOR OBJECTS
Check this item to print out the following items.
After checking, input the title corresponding to each item.
Title Date : Input the title name for the date column.
Time
Message
: Input the title name for the time column.
: Input the title name for the message column.
6
Check this item to print out the input cumulative time data.
Cumulative Time After checking, input the title name for the cumulative time column. LAMP, SWITCH
When making this setting, set the alarm history mode to [Cumulation] of the Device (Common) tab.
Check this item to print out the input occur frequency item.
Print Item After check, input the corresponding title name to occur frequency.
Occur Frequency
When making this setting, please set the alarm history mode of device (common) tab in
[Cumulation].
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
State Input the title name for the state column.
Set the timing to print out alarm historical data.
NUMERICAL/
After checking each item, input the title name to be printed out at each timing.
Occurred :Printed out when an alarm occurs.
Status Print Out
Restored :Printed out when the alarm is restored.
Checks :Printed out when displayed data are checked (when touching the check/
all check switch).
8
(Continued to the next page)
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 58
8.3.3 Setting items
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
Item Description A F
Set the number of lines (1 to 127) and columns (1 to 255), and the space for the top (the number of
lines) and the left (the number of characters) of the printout.
Left
space Columns
space
Top
Print Format
Lines
This setting is common to the print format for the report function.
Precautions for print format setting
The print format must be set according to the print range of the printer in use.
For the precautions of print format setting, refer to the following.
Section 3.6 Print Format Setting
Remark Printing result of alarm history
The print setting items of alarm history during printing are as follows.
1) Select Print/Not print
4) Set format and space
3) Set print title
2) Set print timing
4) Print example 1)
4)
DATE TIME MESSAGE CUMULATE COUNT STATUS 3)
02/11/01 10:25 Conveyor 1 error 00:00 2 Occurred
2) 02/11/01 10:25 Conveyor 1 error 00:00 2 Check
02/11/01 10:25 Conveyor 1 error 00:25 2 Restore
8 - 59 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.3 Setting items
1
6 Extended tab
Setting of this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
OVERVIEW
2
SPECIFICATIONS
3
COMMON SETTING
In case of GOT-A900 series
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
In case of GOT-F900 series
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 60
8.3.3 Setting items
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Print (Common) Extended
Basic Frame Device (Common) Option (Common) Extended
Item Description A F
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item to display the date and time of alarm restoration (Triggers of specified device are
satisfied/not satisfied).
Restorations Title : Input the title name for the item to be displayed.
Restore Color : Select the text color for the date, time and message displayed on alarm display
lines (display rows).
Select the alarm date/time format or the text to be displayed on the column of restorations when
Contents
alarm is restored.
Restore Date/ Date : In the case of displaying date, check this and select the format.
Time Time : In the case of displaying time, check this and select the format.
Input the text to display it specified when an alarm occurs (Triggers of specified device are
satisfied).
Restore Text
When setting this item, select [Text] from [Contents].
(Then, input the text into [Text].)
Check this item to display the number of alarm occurrence (Triggers of specified device are
satisfied).
Occur Frequency When setting this item, set the history mode to in [Cumulative Mode] on the Device (Common)
tab.
Title: Input the title name for the occur frequency column to be displayed.
8 - 61 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.3 Setting items
8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display 1
Set touch switches used for the cursor display/movement, detailed display of alarm data on the alarm history
display.
OVERVIEW
Touch switch for alarm history display can be read form the library for GT Designer2.
Also, text on the touch switch and its shape can be changed by the user.
By setting a key code to touch switch, a user can create a touch switch for alarm history display.
2
Example: Touch switch for alarm history display registered in library
SPECIFICATIONS
Occurred date Time Message Restore Check
02/09/24 09: 31: 32 09: 3109: 31
02/09/24 09: 31: 32 09: 3109: 31
Display Up Move Confirm Delete Details Save
3
Down Delete
Erase Move All Confirm Reset Ladder
COMMON SETTING
Function Description Key code Example
Display Displays the cursor FFB0H
4
Erase Erases the cursor FFB1H
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
Move the cursor up when it is displayed.
Up Move FFB2H
Move to previous page when cursor is hidden.
(1)
Down
Move
Move the cursor down when it is displayed.
Return to next page when cursor is hidden.
FFB3H 5
COMMON SETTINGS
*1
Confirm Displays the date and time of the selected and check item FFB4H (2)
FOR OBJECTS
Delete
Displays the date and time of all check data FFB5H
All
Delete
*1
Deletes the display of selected alarm data FFB6H (3)
6
Confirm Deletes the display of all alarm data FFB7H LAMP, SWITCH
*1
Details Displays detailed display screen of an alarm data FFB8H
*1*3 7
Reset Changes the state of the specified device to OFF state/the reset value FFB9H (4)
CHARACTER DISPLAY
Save Save current alarm data to memory card FFBBH
NUMERICAL/
Coil-searches the alarm devices of the alarm lines and displays the
*1*2
ladder monitor screen.
Ladder FFBCH
(Automatically searches and displays the ladder of the specified
device)
8
*1 Use together with Display , Erase and Up Move , Down Move touch swithes.
*2 It is not available for GOT-F900 series.
*3 When using RST touch switch, set "RST" and "RST value" fields in the "Device (Common)" tab.
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 62
8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display
(1) Up move/Down move
Action is different depending if the cursor is displayed or not.
Example1: When alarm display cursor is displayed
Move cursor position
Up move
Occurred date Time Message Restore Check Occurred date Time Message Restore Check
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45 04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45
04/11/05 12:05 Fuse error 12:28 04/11/05 12:05 Fuse error 12:28
Down move
Example2: When alarm history cursor is not displayed
Page up/down alarm items.
Up move
Occurred date Time Message Restore Check Occurred date Time Message Restore Check
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45 04/11/05 08:00 Fuel error 09:25 08:45
04/11/05 12:05 Fuse error 12:25 12:28 04/11/05 09:05 Internal press error 10:28
04/11/05 12:35 Oil error 17:25 15:28 Down move 04/11/05 15:05 Motor error
(2) Check date display of selected alarm (GOT-A900 series only)
Displays the check date of the selected (cursor display) alarm data.
Example:
Occurred date Time Message Restore Check Occurred date Time Message Restore Check
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 12:00
Check
04/11/05 11:05 Fuse error 04/11/05 11:05 Fuse error
04/11/06 11:35 Oil error 04/11/06 11:35 Oil error
(3) Deletion of selected alarm items display
Deletes the selected (cursor display) alarm data.
The alarm data that has not been not restored cannot be deleted.
Example:
Occurred date Time Message Restore Check Occurred date Time Message Restore Check
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 12:00 04/11/05 11:05 Fuse error 12:20
Delete
04/11/05 11:05 Fuse error 12:20 04/11/05 11:35 Oil error 13:05
04/11/06 11:35 Oil error 13:05
(4) Reset of specified device
Change the state of the selected alarm data device to OFF status/the reset value to display the
restore date and time (the first timing date and time in the watch cycle after the switch input).
Example:
Occurred date Time Message Restore Check Occurred date Time Message Restore Check
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 04/11/05 10:05 Temp. error 13:00
Reset
04/11/05 12:05 Fuse error 04/11/05 12:35 Fuse error
04/11/06 12:35 Oil error 04/11/05 12:35 Oil error
8 - 63 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.4 Description on touch switches for alarm history display
8.3.5 Precautions 1
This section describes precautions to be taken when using alarm history display.
OVERVIEW
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Maximum number of alarm history displayable for one screen
GOT-A900 series/GOT-F900 series: 1 2
(2) Applicable screen
SPECIFICATIONS
The alarm history is settable for the base screen only.
(3) Monitor device setting
Only one monitor device and its device name can be set for each project.
On each of plural screens, the alarm history function can be set for each object, but monitor
devices have to be the same. 3
(4) Devices to be set
COMMON SETTING
Only one set device and its device name can be set for each project.
On each of plural screens, the alarm history function can be set for each object, but set devices
have to be the same.
(5) Number of alarm historical data that can be displayed
The number of alarm historical data available for GOT display varies according to the number of
4
devices to be monitored.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
If [When number of alarm occurrences exceed set value, delete oldest alarm occurrences] has
PREPARATORY
been checked on the Option (Common) tab, historical data will be erased from the oldest when the
following limit is exceeded.
When the number of monitor devices is 1024 or less:
Alarm historical data can be displayed up to 1024. 5
When the number of monitor devices is 1025 or more:
COMMON SETTINGS
Alarm history data as many as the monitor device points can be displayed.
FOR OBJECTS
(6) The comment window while the key window is on the screen
Erase the key window to display the comment window.
Window screen
for alarm history
6
Key window
1000
Numerical input Alarm history display LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 64
8.3.5 Precautions
(7) When using other objects at the same time
(a) The following objects cannot be set on the screen where the alarm history function has been set.
Data list function object
Alarm list (user alarm) display function object with the up/down scroll function setting
(b) Precautions for the case when the alarm history and alarm list are displayed simultaneously
If the touch switches for alarm list (user alarm) are set for any other screen, they can function
for the alarm history.
Example: When the touch switches for alarm list are set for the other screen (overlap
window2)
Delete Up
Display Down
04/12/01 10:25 Internal pressure error Alarm list display
04/12/01 13:25 Oil pressure error (set to overlap window 1)
Occurred Message Rest. Check Alarm history display
04/11/05 10:25 Temp. error 11:25 10:45 (set to base screen)
04/11/05 12:05 Fuse error 12:28
04/11/05 12:35 Oil error
As the base screen has higher precedence,
the touch switches function for alarm history.
(8) Display of occurred time, check time and restore time
The time may not be displayed depending on the type of PLC CPU and/or the connection method.
Section 2.4 Clock Function
(9) The character display of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed
The characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed are not displayed when the
screen pattern color or [Plate] of the Frame tab is set to White.
(Characters will be hidden since the color of the text and cursor are the same with the screen
color.)
To display the characters of the line on which the cursor is currently displayed, set the screen
pattern color or [Plate] of the Frame tab to other than White.
(10) Timing when alarm history file contents are newly created (overwritten)
When the setting screen of the Alarm history is opened, and after that closed with the OK button, if
the project data is downloaded to the GOT, the alarm histories have been saved in the GOT cannot
be viewed. (Whether setting is changed or not on the setting screen, the above operation disables
viewing of the past alarm histories.)
Moreover, when the alarm history is saved to the memory card of the above GOT, the history data
are cleared. (The file contents are saved in a new file (overwritten).)
At this time, the CSV file is also overwritten and saved.
To view alarm histories also after changing the alarm history setting, make a setting to save alarm
histories in a CSV file beforehand, and back up the CSV file before performing the above operation.
By backing up the CSV file, even if an alarm on the GOT is cleared or overwritten, the alarm history
can be viewed on such as a personal computer.
(For data mismatch prevention, the alarm history data file (extension: DAT) cannot be displayed on
the GOT where the new project data has been downloaded.
8 - 65 8.3 Alarm History Display
8.3.5 Precautions
(11) Timing when alarm history file content is newly created (overwritten)
When the setting screen of alarm history is opened and closed with the OK button, if the project
1
data is down loaded to the GOT, the alarm histories that have been saved in the GOT in the past
cannot be viewed. (Either when any setting change is made or when no setting change is made,
the above operation disables viewing of the past alarm histories.)
OVERVIEW
Moreover, when the memory card save of alarm history is executed in the above GOT, history data
are cleared. (The file content is saved in a new file (overwritten).)
At this time, the CSV file is also overwritten and saved.
2
To view alarm histories even after changing the alarm history settings, make a setting to save alarm
histories in a CSV file in advance, and back up the CSV file before performing the above operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
By backing up the CSV file, even if an alarm is cleared or overwritten on the GOT, the alarm history
can be viewed on a personal computer etc.
(For data mismatch prevention, the alarm history data file (extension: DAT) cannot be displayed on
the GOT where the new project data is downloaded.)
3
2 Precautions for OS
COMMON SETTING
(1) Extended function OS (specific for GOT-A900 series)
Be sure to install the extended function OS (CSV) to GOT when using the CSV format file.
3 Precautions for hardware
4
(1) Required optional device
To use the alarm history function, the following devices are required.
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
GOT in use Required device
A985GOT (-V), A97*GOT, A960GOT None
SRAM type : Memory card interface module
When using PC card
A956WGOT Compact flash PC card : Not required
5
When printing history Printer interface module
COMMON SETTINGS
SRAM type : Memory card interface module
When using PC card
Compact flash PC card : Not used
FOR OBJECTS
A95*GOT
When printing history Printer interface module
4 Number of files that can be stored in PC card (when using A985GOT/A97*GOT/
6
A960GOT/A956WGOT/A95*GOT)
Following table shows the upper limit for the number of object files (including other object files) that can LAMP, SWITCH
be stored.
PC card memory capacity Number of files
1M, 2M 128
7
4M 256
CHARACTER DISPLAY
16M(A9GTMEM-10MF*1), 32M(A9GTMEM-20MF*1), 64M(A9GTMEM-40MF*1) 512
NUMERICAL/
*1 Memory capacity differs according to the hardware versions of flash PC card.
It can be checked on the rated plate of flash card.
5 File data capacity
For the file data capacity that can be stored in a memory card when the alarm history display function is
8
working, refer to the following.
Section 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
ALARM
8.3 Alarm History Display 8 - 66
8.3.5 Precautions
8.4 Floating Alarm
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This section explains the floating alarm function.
When the corresponding bit device turns ON, this function causes the alarm text to scroll across the base
screen from the right to the left. This cycle is repeated until the bit device turns OFF. The comment is dis-
played on the bottom of the base screen.
Comment appears at the bottom of the base screen.
1 When only one bit device turns ON
The comment corresponding to the device that has turned ON scrolls across the screen from the right to
the left.
X1:OFF ON
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
Error Error occurs occurs
Floating alarm
2 When multiple bit devices turns ON
The comments corresponding to the device that have turned ON scroll across the screen from the right
to the left in the error occurrence order.
X1: OFF ON X1: ON X1: ON OFF
X2: OFF X2: OFF ON X2: ON
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348
Error Error 1 occurs Error 2 occurs Error 2 occurs
Floating alarm The comment corresponding When the device is OFF,
to ON device is displayed only the corresponding
continuously. comment will not be displayed.
Remark Comments displayed by floating alarm function
To display comments by floating alarm function, register the comments in advance.
Section 4.1 Comment Registration
8 - 67 8.4 Floating Alarm
8.4.1 Settings 1
1 Select [Common] [Floating Alarm] from the menu.
OVERVIEW
2 As the setting dialog box is displayed, make the settings with reference to the following explanations.
2
Remark When setting in the project workspace
Double click on in the project workspace to display the setting
SPECIFICATIONS
dialog box.
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.4 Floating Alarm 8 - 68
8.4.1 Settings
8.4.2 Setting items of floating alarm
Set the device to be monitored and the comment corresponding to that device.
The following are common settings on all base screens.
(In the case of GOT-A900 series) (In the case of GOT-F900 series)
Items Description A F
Set the number of bit devices that execute floating alarm.
The maximum number of devices that can be set are as follows.
For GOT-A900 Series
Device Points When monitoring bit devices of continuous No. : 512 devices
When monitoring bit device of discontinuous No. : 255 devices
For GOT-F900 Series
When monitoring bit devices of continuous No. : 256 devices
Select the method of setting device.
Continuous : Automatically set the specified number of devices continuously starting
Device No.
from the set device.
Random : Set the specified number of devices at random.
Monitor device List Set the device to be monitored and the comment corresponding to that device.
Set the device to be monitored.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Set the comment number corresponding to the set device.
Cmnt No. When multiple devices are set, the same number of continuous comment Nos. are automatically
set starting from the head comment No.
Comment The comment corresponding to comment No. is displayed.
Size Select the size of comment to be displayed (X Y).
Set the floating alarm display position to either among "Upper", "Middle" and "Lower" of the
screen.
Display Location
Input a comment in only one line. If a comment is input in two or more lines and "Upper" or "Lower"
is selected, characters of the comment are cut in half when displayed.
(Continued to next page)
8 - 69 8.4 Floating Alarm
8.4.2 Setting items of floating alarm
1
Items Description A F
Check this item to store the number of specified bit devices that are ON into word device.
After checking, set the device to be monitored.( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
OVERVIEW
If numerical display is used to monitor the set device, the number of occurred alarms can be
checked.
Storage Device
Occurrence number 2
3
Line1 abnormal
SPECIFICATIONS
If set device is numberically displayed,
alarm occurrence number can be checked.
Delete All Clicking on this item deletes all the settings.
3
COMMON SETTING
4
OBJECT SETTING
OPERATION FOR
PREPARATORY
5
COMMON SETTINGS
FOR OBJECTS
6
LAMP, SWITCH
7
CHARACTER DISPLAY
NUMERICAL/
8
ALARM
8.4 Floating Alarm 8 - 70
8.4.2 Setting items of floating alarm
8.4.3 Precautions
This section explains the precautions for using floating alarm function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Number of floating alarm function objects that can be set
Only one floating alarm function object can be set for each project.
However, the same floating alarm function object can be simultaneously set for multiple base
screens.
In this case, the comment of floating alarm can be set to be displayed/hidden for each base screen.
Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
(2) Floating alarm
The position for comment of floating alarm is fixed at the bottom of the base screen.
It cannot be changed.
(3) Precautions for setting
Even when floating alarm function object is set, the comment cannot be displayed on
GT Designer2.
Make the settings in order that the comment of floating alarm will not overlap with other objects or
window screens.
As the comment of floating alarm is designated to appear in front of other objects and window
screens, if other objects or window screens are located on the bottom of the screen, the message
will be hidden or input cannot be done when an alarm occurs.
Example: When the comment of floating alarm overlaps with touch switch/window screen
When monitored When alarm occurs Window screen does not appear
within the range of floating alarm.
A 1254 A 1254 A 1254 A 1254
When part touch switch is within
B 348 B 348 B 348 B 348 floating alarm range, it will not act
even if being touched.
Error occurs
When all the touch switch is within
floating alarm range, it will not act
even if being touched.
(4) Display of comment
(a) Floating alarm function is disabled if the comment in which "Reverse", "Blink" or "Use high
quality font" has been set.
(b) The comment for floating alarm function must be entered in one line.
In the case of GOT-A900 series
If created in multiple lines, the comment will be displayed as one line and the remaining
comment will be shown as text.
In the case of GOT-F900 series
If a comment is input in two or more lines and "Display Location" is set to "Upper" or "Lower",
characters of the comment are cut in half horizontally, and only upper or lower half portions
are displayed.
8 - 71 8.4 Floating Alarm
8.4.3 Precautions
9
9. PARTS
PARTS
9.1 Parts Display 10
GRAPH, METER
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This function displays the registered parts and base screen/window screen according to the device status.
11
Remark Parts displayed in parts display
ACTIONS
There are two different parts that are displayed in parts display, and they must be
registered in advance.
TRIGGER
(1) Parts data registered on GT Designer2 (registered part)
Section 4.2 Parts Registration
(2) Parts data registered on GT Designer2 (registered part) 12
BMP file stored on PC card (BMP file part)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Section 4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card
1 Applicable parts types
OUTPUT
Type Description Remarks
The figures registered as parts are displayed. Parts must have been reg-
13
istered in advance.
Example: Registrable figures as parts
Section 4.2 Parts
Registration
Parts
OTHERS
Section 4.3
Storing a BMP
file part in the PC
Figures Text BMP file
card 14
The color of the figure registered as a part is displayed according to the change of the BMP format parts cannot
SCRIPT FUNCTION
device value. be used.
The used memory capacity inside of the GOT are saved since different images can be Draw the color-changed
displayed by a single part. area in white.
White Blue Red
Mark
D100 = 0 D100 = 50 D100 = 100
APPENDICES
The color changing is displayed in the white area.
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9-1
Type Description Remarks
The figures on any base screens and window screens are displayed. The objects set on the
base screens and window
Base screen screens are not displayed.
Line A operation Line A operation
Base Screen 1 Base Screen 20
Window screen Screen display
The figure on Base Screen 20
is overlaid on Base Screen 1.
Application example
Display different images of the same part Cascade multiple parts.
(Parts display (bit/word/fixed)) (Parts display (fixed))
Basic Tab Setting Basic Tab Setting
X10=OFF ON X30=OFF ON
Part No. 1 (X10)
Part No. 2 (X20)
Part No. 3 (X30)
Three parts are
arranged in
cascaded way. Part No. 1 is displayed Part No. 3 is displayed
Only the white part of parts changes.
9-2 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.1 Parts displaying method 9
This section describes the parts displaying method of Parts Display.
1 Parts switching method
PARTS
(1) Bit parts display ( Section 9.1.3 Setting items of bit parts display)
This function is used to display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to bit device
10
ON/OFF.
GRAPH, METER
X10 OFF X10 ON
11
ACTIONS
Parts corresponding Parts corresponding
to bit device OFF are to bit device ON are
displayed. displayed.
TRIGGER
(2) Word parts display ( Section 9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display)
This function is used to display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding to word device
value.
12
D100 1 D100 10 D100 100
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
No. 1 part is displayed. No. 10 part is displayed. No. 100 part is displayed.
13
(3) Fixed parts display ( Section 9.1.5 Setting items of fixed parts display)
This function displays the parts/base screen/window screen at rising/falling edge of a bit device.
OTHERS
Only one type of part can be displayed, but the part can be overlaid on the other parts display.
Part of parts display A Part of parts display B
Rising edge 14
X1
SCRIPT FUNCTION
ON
OFF
Parts display B is Parts display B is overlaid
displayed at rising on parts display A.
edge of X1.
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9-3
9.1.1 Parts displaying method
2 Displaying method of the BMP file stored in the PC card
The BMP file parts stored in the PC card can be displayed by specifying a number from 9001 to 9999 for
the parts No.
To display a BMP file part in the PC card by specifying parts No. of 9001 to 9999, make the setting in the
following procedure.
1 Store a BMP file to be displayed as parts in the PC card.
Section 4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card
2 Turn ON the GS450.b8.
Parts No. When GS450.b8 is ON When GS450.b8 is OFF
9001 to 9999 The BMP file part in the PC card is displayed. The part registered by the GT Degisner2 is displayed.
3 The BMP file parts in the PC card will be displayed when the parts displaying condition (Parts No. : 9001
to 9999) is met on Parts Display/Parts Movement.
The display example in the case where the following BMP file parts are stored on the PC card is shown
below.
IMG0001.BMP IMG0500.BMP
IMG0999.BMP
Example: BMP file parts are displayed in parts display (word)
When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in a word device, the
corresponding BMP file part is displayed.
Word device for parts display : D100
D100 9000 D100 9001 D100 9500 D100 9999
When a part No. of 0 or BMP file part BMP file part BMP file part
9000 is specified, no BMP (IMG0001.BMP) (IMG0500.BMP) (IMG0999.BMP)
file part is displayed. is displayed. is displayed. is displayed.
9-4 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.1 Parts displaying method
9
(1) When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999
The parts registered by the GT Designer2 will be displayed even when the
GS450.b8 is ON.
(2) When switching the parts display to the display of the BMP file parts of the
PARTS
corresponding parts No. in the PC card
To display the BMP file parts of the corresponding parts No. in the PC card while 10
displaying parts of parts No. of 9001 to 9999 registered by the GT Designer2,
operate as follows.
GRAPH, METER
1 Turn ON the GS450.b8.
2 Specify the parts No. 0 or 9000 to hide the parts currently displayed.
3 Specify the parts No. of the BMP file parts in the PC card to be displayed.
11
ACTIONS
(3) The example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT powering on
The following shows the example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after
the GOT is powered on by using the status observation function.
TRIGGER
It is convenient for displaying the BMP file parts in the PC card after powering on
the GOT.
On the status monitor function, set the internal device (Ordinary ON device: 12
GS0.b4) to store "1" to GS450.b8 when the Trigger is ON.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
After the GOT is powered on, "1" is stored into GS450.b8 by the status monitor
function.
OUTPUT
Make setting on the status monitor.
Set the first line of the status monitor
function. ("1" is stored into GS450.b8 13
immediately after the GOT is
switched ON.)*1
Set the condition monitor cycle to
[Ordinary].
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1 At a GOT startup, to display or parts movement parts may not be changed to BMP image parts.
(Switch the screen change parts.)
Design screens considering the characteristics of BMP image parts.
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9-5
9.1.1 Parts displaying method
3 Parts No.
The displayable parts or the motions differ depending on the parts No.
The displayable parts for each parts No. are shown in the following table.
When GS450.b8 is ON When the GS450.b8 is OFF
Parts No. Parts registered by the BMP file parts in the PC Parts registered by the BMP file parts in the PC
GT Designer2 card GT Designer2 card
0 *1 *1 *1
1 to 8999
9000 *1
9001 to 9999 *2
10000 to 32767
: Displayable : Not displayable : Hidden
*1 When [Indirect (Device Value)] in the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word Parts Movement has been set, the
parts will not be hidden. (The current display is retained.)
For the method of hiding parts with the Word Parts Movement, refer to the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word
Parts Movement.
( Section 9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement)
*2 The parts cannot be displayed even if they have been registered by the GT Designer2.
Example: When a part registered by the GT Designer2 has been registered for the parts No. 9123
GS450.b8 is ON GS450.b8 is OFF
GS450.b8 GS450.b8
The BMP file part in the The parts registered by the
PC card is displayed. GT Designer2 (Parts No.
9123) is displayed.
9-6 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.1 Parts displaying method
9
9.1.2 Arrangement and settings
1 Carry out either of the following operations
PARTS
Click on [Bit Parts Display]/ [Word Parts Display]/ [Fixed Parts Display]
Select [Object] [Parts Display] [Bit Parts]/[Word Parts]/[Fixed Parts] from the menu. 10
2 Click on the position where the part to be loca ted to complete the arrangement.
GRAPH, METER
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
3 Double click on the arranged part to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with reference to
the following explanation.
11
ACTIONS
Easier setting method
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
TRIGGER
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
Remark Part image displayed when the part is arranged.
12
(1) When parts are displayed
In the case of bit parts display
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Parts of which status is set in ON/OFF attribute of basic tab are displayed.
In the case of word parts display
OUTPUT
Parts of which part No. is set in [Preview No.] of basic tab are displayed.
(2) When base screen and window screen are displayed as parts
"X" mark indicating position is displayed. 13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9-7
9.1.2 Arrangement and settings
9.1.3 Setting items of bit parts display
1 Basic tab
In basic tab, the [Parts Type] and [Parts No.] during ON/OFF are set.
The setting of this screen is for GOT-F900 series only.
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
Basic Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Set the device to be monitored.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Parts Type Select the type of part to be displayed.
Parts Data The registered part is displayed.
Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the device
change.
After selecting this item, set the [Parts No.].
Mark Data
The type of registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.
( Section 4.2 Parts Registration)
Base Screen Displays the registered base screen as part.
Window Screen Displays the registered window screen as part.
(Continued to next page)
9-8 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.3 Setting items of bit parts display
Basic Extended Trigger 9
Items Description A F
Select the method of displaying parts when they are switched.
XOR :Distinguishes between overlapping parts by showing different colors in the
PARTS
overlapping portion of the parts.
For the XOR combination of the overlapped colors, refer to the following.
( App.5 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR) 10
Display Switch
parts parts
GRAPH, METER
Shape (Blue) Overlapped part Part No. 1 Overlapped part Part No.2
changes to yellow. (White) changes to white. (Red)
XOR combination of shape +
color of part No. 1
XOR combination of shape +
color of part No. 2 11
ACTIONS
Replace :Replaces the previous part with the newer part.
Please note this item is not available when the [Parts Type] is for the [Base
Display Mode Screen] or [Window Screen].
( Basic tab [Parts Type])
TRIGGER
Display Switch
parts parts
View
12
Format
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Shape Parts New parts
Overwrite :Displays the new part/base screen/window screen over the previously displayed
part.
OUTPUT
Display Switch
parts parts
13
Shape Parts New parts
Select the reference point to display parts/base screen/window screen.
OTHERS
Top-Left : Set the display position at the top left of the part/base screen/window screen.
Center : Set the display position at the center of the part/base screen/window screen.
Example:
Top-Left Center
14
Positioning Point
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Set display position Set display position
(Continued to next page)
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9-9
9.1.3 Setting items of bit parts display
Basic Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
ON Click on this item to set the part/base screen/window screen to be displayed the device turns ON.
OFF Click on this item to set the part/base screen/window screen to be displayed the device turns OFF.
Set the part/base screen/window screen No. to be displayed.
The registered part/base screen/window screen can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
Parts No. Set zero in "Parts No." to erase the part.
Set the [Parts No.] condition when the device bit is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only
ON/OFF
when the device bit is ON.
Attribute
Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark] has been set in [Parts
Mark Color
Type].
Select the blinking pattern of the parts.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
9 - 10 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.3 Setting items of bit parts display
9
2 Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
Set the security and offset.
This tab will be displayed when the extended function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Basic Extended Trigger
OUTPUT
Items Description A F
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0". 13
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
OTHERS
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9 - 11
9.1.3 Setting items of bit parts display
3 Trigger tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
Set conditions for displaying the object.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting
Basic Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Select the trigger for displaying the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) in 1-second unit.
Trigger Type
Ordinary ON OFF Rise
Fall Sampling Range Bit Trigger
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
Word Range Trigger When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items.
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
Data Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data size].
Range Click on the Exp button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used
Multi Bit
Bit Number for the trigger.
Trigger
After setting, click on the [Setting] button and set the bit devices and their conditions.
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
Initial Display displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the conditions are not
satisfied.
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be
Hold Display held even though the conditions are not satisfied.
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the conditions become invalid.
9 - 12 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.3 Setting items of bit parts display
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display 9
1 Basic tab
PARTS
Here the parts type and parts No. displayed corresponding to word device value is set.
The setting of this screen is for GOT-F900 series only.
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
13
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
OTHERS
Set the device to be monitored.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Device
The default of a written data format is signed BIN.
To write by the other data format, change the setting in "Data Form" on the Extended tab. 14
Parts Type Select the type of part to be displayed.
Parts Data The registered part is displayed. SCRIPT FUNCTION
Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the device
change.
After selecting this item, set the [Parts No.].
Mark Data
The type of registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.
( Section 4.2 Parts Registration)
APPENDICES
Base Screen Displays the registered base screen as part.
Window Screen Displays the registered window screen as part.
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9 - 13
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the method of displaying parts when they are switched.
XOR :Distinguishes between overlapping parts by showing different colors in the
overlapping portion of the parts.
For the XOR combination of the overlapped colors, refer to the following.
( App.5 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR)
Display Switch
parts parts
Shape (Blue) Overlapped part Part No. 1 Overlapped part Part No.2
changes to yellow. (White) changes to white. (Red)
XOR combination of shape + XOR combination of shape +
color of part No. 1 color of part No. 2
Replace :Replaces the previous part with the newer part.
Please note this item is not available when the [Parts Type] is for the [Base
View Screen] or [Window Screen].
Display Mode
Format ( Basic tab [Parts Type])
Display Switch
parts parts
Shape Parts New parts
Overwrite :Displays the new part/base screen/window screen over the previously
displayed part.
Display Switch
parts parts
Shape Parts New parts
Select the reference point to display parts/base screen/window screen.
Top-Left : Set the display position at the top left of the part/base screen/window screen.
Center : Set the display position at the center of the part/base screen/window screen.
Example:
Top-Left Center
Positioning Point
Set display position Set display position
(Continued to next page)
9 - 14 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation 9
Items Description A F
Set the display attribute of parts.
Use the state (Range Setting tab) for switching to multiple parts except "Indirect (Device value)".
PARTS
Indirect (Device value) :Displays the parts/base screen/window screen No.
corresponding to the word device value. 10
Set zero in the word device value to erase the part.
Parts No. :Select this item at displaying the registered parts/base screen/
window screen by specifying it.
GRAPH, METER
Attribute (Normal Case)*1
Click the Browse button to check the registered parts/base
screen/window screen.
Set zero in "Parts No." to erase the part.
Mark Color :At selecting "Mark" in "Parts Type" category, select the
displayed color to change in the white area of the registered 11
ACTIONS
part.
Hold :Select this item to hold the currently displayed parts/base
screen/window screen.
TRIGGER
Select the blinking pattern of the parts.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds. 12
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
Preview Parts Displays the part of specified No. on the GT Designer2 screen.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Specify the offset corresponding to monitor device value.
OUTPUT
Offset For example, if the offset is set to 10 and current monitor device value is 100, the part No. 110 is
displayed.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
13
For details of *1, refer to the following.
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9 - 15
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display
*1 Parts switching method
Set on State (Case tab) except "Indirect (Device value)" in "Attribute (Normal case)" category.
The following describes how to change the displayed part depending on the "Attribute (Normal case)" and
State settings.
"Attribute (Normal State setting
case)" type Set Not set
The part is displayed as below depending on the condition Set the state if required.
set to the state. The displayed part is changed depending on the
When trigger is satisfied monitored device value.
[Indirect
The part set to the state is displayed. Set the state to change the part except the above
(Device Value)]
When trigger is not satisfied condition.
The displayed part is changed depending on the
monitored device value.
The part is displayed as below depending on the condition Set the state at any time.
[Parts No.] set to the state. Only one type of part is kept displayed without sate
When trigger is satisfied settings.
The part set at the state is displayed. It cannot be switched to any other part.
[Mark Color] When trigger is not satisfied
The part set at "Attribute (Normal case)" is displayed.
The part is displayed as below depending on the condition Set the state at any time.
set to the state. Nothing is displayed without sate settings.
When trigger is satisfied
[Hold]
The part set at the state is displayed.
When trigger is not satisfied
The part set at the state is kept displayed.
Example: When "Attribute (Normal case)" is set to "Parts No."
Set the following on each tab.
Basics tab Range Setting tab
[Device]: D10 State 1 State 2
[Parts Type]: [Parts Data] [Range] : 1<= D10 <= 100 [Range] : 100 < D10
[Attribute (Normal Case)]: [Parts No.1] [Attribute] : Parts No.2 [Attribute] : Parts No.3
(Displayed part)
Part No. 2
Part No. 1 Part No. 3
D10 = 0 D10 = 40 D10 = 150
Part set at "Attribute" Part set at State 1 is Part set at State 2 is
is displayed (Part No. 1) displayed (Part No. 2) displayed (Part No. 3)
Refer to the following section for details of the state.
Section 5.4 State Setting
9 - 16 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display
9
2 Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
Set the data type, security and offset of monitor device.
This tab is displayed when the extended function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
13
Signed BIN16 :Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Data Type
Unsigned BIN16 :Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value.
BCD16 :Treats the word device value as a 16-bit BCD (binary decimal) value.
OTHERS
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
14
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9 - 17
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display
3 Case tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
The attribute can be changed on this setting depending on the device status.
For details of states, refer to the following.
Section 5.4 State Setting
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
State*1 Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
New State Creates a new state.
Delete State Deletes a specified state.
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
Up/Down Changes the priority of the current state.
Displays the list of preset states.
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Select the condition to change the display according to the state.
Bit :Select it when changing the display according to the ON/OFF status of bit device.
After selecting, set the bit device and device status (ON/OFF).
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Word :Select it when changing the display according to the vlaue of word device. After
selecting, set the conditional expression of word device value in [Range].
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
(Continued to next page)
9 - 18 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation 9
Items Description A F
Select the display method of parts.
Indirect (Device value) :Display the parts/base screen/window screen corresponding
PARTS
to word device value.
Set zero in the word device value to erase the part.
Parts No. :Select this item at displaying the registered parts/base screen/ 10
window screen by specifying it.
Attribute After selection, set the parts/base screen/window screen to be
displayed.
GRAPH, METER
Set zero in "Parts No." to erase the part.
State*1 Mark Color :When [Mark] selecting in [Parts Type], select this item to switch
the white of the parts to other color.
Hold :Select this item to hold the currently displayed parts/base
screen/window screen. 11
ACTIONS
Select the blinking pattern of the parts.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
TRIGGER
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9 - 19
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display
*1 State
(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is in condition other than those set on the Case tab, it is displayed with the display
attribute set on the Basic tab.
(2) Display when conditions are overlapped
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Monitor device : D100
Data view format : Signed decimal, 16-bit signed decimal
Part No.1 Part No.10 Part No.100 Part No.101
Registered parts :
1 set 10 sets Over 100 sets Complete
Action priority for
setting overlap State No. Display range Display parts
conditions
High 1 $V<=0 No.0
2 1<=$V<=100 Indirect
3 101<=$V<=199 Hold
Low Normal case (State 0) - No.101
*$V indicates monitor device value
When monitor device value is equal to or less than 0 ($V 0),
State 1
the parts will not be displayed.
When monitor device value is between 1 and 100
State 2 (1 $V 100), the parts corresponding to device value will be
1 set Over 100 sets
displayed.
When monitor device value is between 101 and 199
State 3
(101 $V 199), parts display will not be switched. Over 100 sets
Normal case In the case when other than the conditions of state 1 to 3, part
(State 0) No. 101 will be displayed. Complete
9 - 20 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display
9
4 Trigger tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
The setting items of the trigger tab are the same with bit parts display.
For details of setting items, refer to the following.
PARTS
Section 9.1.3 Setting items of bit parts display
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9 - 21
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display
5 Data Operation tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
9 - 22 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.4 Setting items of word parts display
9.1.5 Setting items of fixed parts display 9
1 Basic tab
PARTS
Directly specify and set the parts/base screen/window screen to be displayed.
The setting of this screen is only applicable to GOT-F900 series.
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
OUTPUT
Basic Extended
Items Description A F
13
Parts Type Select the type of part to be displayed.
Parts Data The registered part is displayed.
OTHERS
Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to the device
change.
After selecting this item, set the [Parts No.].
Mark Data The type of registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
14
Refer to the following for the displayed parts by Mark.
( Section 4.2 Parts Registration) SCRIPT FUNCTION
Base Screen Displays the registered base screen as part.
Window Screen Displays the registered window screen as part.
(Continued to next page)
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9 - 23
9.1.5 Setting items of fixed parts display
Basic Extended
Items Description A F
Select the method of displaying parts when they are switched.
XOR :The parts/base screen/window screen by XOR combination is overlaid on a
figure or other part display.
The parts/base screen/window screen is erased at the disabled display
condition.
For the XOR combination of the overlapped colors, refer to the following.
( App.5 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR)
Example: Display condition: Rising edge of M100
When display condition When display condition
is enabled is disabled
(M100: OFF ON) (M100: ON OFF)
Display Mode Shape (Blue) Overlapped part Part No. 1 Part is erased.
changes to yellow. (White)
XOR combination of figure
+ part No. 1 colors
Overwrite :The parts/base screen/window screen is overlaid on a figure or other part
display.
View The parts/base screen/window screen is kept displaying without regarding to the
Format display condition.
Example: Display condition: Rising edge of M100
When display condition When display condition
is enabled is disabled
(M100: OFF ON) (M100: ON OFF)
Shape Parts Part is kept displayed.
Select the reference point to display parts/base screen/window screen.
Top-Left : Set the display position at the top left of the part/base screen/window screen.
Center : Set the display position at the center of the part/base screen/window screen.
Example:
Top-Left Center
Positioning Point
Set display position Set display position
(Continued to next page)
9 - 24 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.5 Setting items of fixed parts display
Basic Extended 9
Items Description A F
Set the display attribute of parts.
Parts No. : Select this item to display the parts/base screen/window screen and screen
PARTS
during registration.
After the selection, set the parts/base screen/window screen No. to be
Attribute
displayed. 10
Mark Color : When the registered parts are [Mark] selected in [Parts Type], select the color to
which the white part of the parts will be switched.
GRAPH, METER
Select the blinking pattern of the Parts.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds. 11
ACTIONS
Select the trigger by which data is displayed.
Trigger Type ( Section 5.5 Trigger Setting)
Display Rise Fall
TRIGGER
Trigger
Click on Dev button to specify the device to be set as trigger.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category. 12
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9 - 25
9.1.5 Setting items of fixed parts display
2 Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
Set the security and offset.
This tab is displayed when the extended function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked.
The setting items of option tab are the same with bit parts display.
For details of setting items, refer to the following.
Section 9.1.3 Setting items of bit parts display
9.1.6 Precautions
The following provides the precautions when using parts display function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Maximum number of parts display objects settable on one screen
For GOT-A900 series: 256
For GOT-F900 series: 50
(2) Precautions for registering parts
Refer to the following for the precautions for registering parts.
(a) When using registered parts
Section 4.2 Parts Registration
(b) BMP file stored on PC card (BMP file part)
Section 4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card
9 - 26 9.1 Parts Display
9.1.6 Precautions
(3) Setting parts display and parts movement
9
The BMP file part will not be displayed if it has been set in the display position where it will extend
off the screen.
Check the display position on the Preview.
PARTS
10
BMP file part is not be displayed.
GRAPH, METER
2 Precautions for hardware
(1) GOT with restrictions on use
BMP image parts cannot be used as the A95* handy GOT does not support PC card.
11
ACTIONS
3 Precautions for use
TRIGGER
(1) Parts erasure
To erase the part, use "Parts" or "Mark" setting in "Parts Type" category.
The part set to "Base Screen" or "Window Screen" in "Parts Type" category is not erased even if
setting to zero. 12
(The part will be erased by redisplaying current screen after switching to another screen.)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
(2) Reading the BMP file
The monitor screen pauses during a file reading.
OUTPUT
(3) The partway-displayed BMP file parts
In the process of a file displaying, the display may be paused with the image partway-displayed.
In such a case, display the parts again or check the BMP file.
13
(4) While displaying the BMP file parts of the PC card
Do not remove the PC card from the GOT while displaying the BMP file parts of the PC card.
OTHERS
(5) Discontinuing to use the BMP file parts of the PC card
Turn the GOT internal device (GS450.b8) OFF.
The BMP file parts of the PC card can be displayed even if the PC card is removed without the 14
operation above. The reason is the below.
The BMP file part displayed on the GOT is retained in the GOT built-in memory. (Only one BMP file
part can be retained.) SCRIPT FUNCTION
If the BMP file part of the same parts No. is specified subsequently, the BMP file part retained in the
GOT built-in memory will be displayed. Accordingly, the part registered by the GT Designer2 is not
displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.1 Parts Display 9 - 27
9.1.6 Precautions
9.2 Parts Movement
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
It is the function to change parts position and display (movement) according to the value of word device.
The parts to be displayed can be switched in movement.
Parts movement can be displayed by the following 2 types of devices.
Position device : The device storing parts move destination.
Parts switching device : The device to switch the types of parts to be displayed.
Remark Parts displayed in parts display
There are two different parts that are displayed in parts display, and they must be
registered in advance.
(1) Parts data registered on GT Designer2 (registered part)
Section 4.2 Parts Registration
(2) Parts data registered on GT Designer2 (registered part)
BMP file stored on PC card (BMP file part)
Section 4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card
1 Applicable parts types
Type Description Remarks
The figures registered as parts are displayed. Parts must have been
registered in advance.
Example: Registrable figures as parts
Section 4.2 Parts
Registration
Parts Section 4.3 Storing a
BMP file part in the
PC card
Figures Text BMP file
The color of the figure registered as a part is displayed according to the change of the device BMP format parts cannot be
value. used.
The used memory capacity inside of the GOT are saved since different images can be Draw the color-changed area
displayed by a single part. in white.
White Blue Red
Mark
D100 = 0 D100 = 50 D100 = 100
The color changing is displayed in the white area.
9 - 28 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.1 Moving and displaying parts 9
1 Move way of parts (control with position device)
PARTS
The following three types of move ways can be selected.
(1) Position
Display parts at the position (dot notation). 10
Specify the display position using 2 points indicated by the word device values in X/Y axis,
respectively.
GRAPH, METER
The display position can be changed in dot unit by changing the value of position device.
2) (200, 16)
1) (30, 90)
11
ACTIONS
3) (130, 170)
TRIGGER
1) 2) 3)
Position device (X coordinate): D100 30 200 130
Position device (Y coordinate): D101 90 16 170
12
(a) Datum position
A part displayed in the overlap window has the datum position at the upper left corner of the
EXTERNAL INPUT/
overlap window.
Example: Overlap window
OUTPUT
Datum position 13
(origin)
In other cases (base screen, superimpose window, etc.), the upper left corner of the displayed
OTHERS
base screen is taken as the datum position.
Example: Base screen Example: Set overlay screen, superimpose window, etc.
14
Datum position Datum position
(origin) (origin)
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 29
9.2.1 Moving and displaying parts
(2) Line
Move parts along lines between starting point and destination that have been set.
Set the starting point as minimum value, and the maximum value for the destination, in order to
display the parts using this method.
<Setting image> <Movement image>
Destination (maximum: 100) 80% 20%
D100:100
Starting point (minimum: 0) D100:20
D100:0
Position device: D100
(a) Part moving distance
A part is moved in the range of 0 to 100% in 1% units.
Destination (Maximum value)
100%
Starting point (Minimum value)
Move in
1% units
For example, if "0" is set for the starting point (minimum value) and "500" for the destination
(maximum value), the part moves when a position device value is an integral multiple of "5".
<Setting image> <Movement image>
Destination (maximum: 500) 1%
1%
D100 :10 14
Starting point D100 :5 9
(minimum: 0)
D100 :0 4
Position device: D100
9 - 30 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.1 Moving and displaying parts
(3) Point
9
Display parts at preset display position (point).
Point setting is made by registering a line connecting multiple points (parts move route).
Parts are displayed at the place indicated by the point No. that is the same as the value of position
device.
PARTS
<Setting image> <Movement image>
1
10
4
3
6
GRAPH, METER
2 5
Parts move route
Point
Position device: D100 5 1 2
11
ACTIONS
Up to 30 Parts move routes can be set in one screen. This setting is made for each screen.
The parts move route can be used for moving multiple parts.
TRIGGER
Route No. 1------For parts movement A
Parts movement A
Parts movement B
Route No. 2------For parts movement B 12
Parts movement C
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Parts movement D
Route No. 3------For parts movement C, D
OUTPUT
Remark Locus 13
Movement locus that keeps the locus can be set in each move way.
The setting of parts movement setting dialog box (basic tab)
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 31
9.2.1 Moving and displaying parts
2 Parts switching method (control with parts switching device)
The following 3 switching methods can be selected.
(1) Bit parts movement ( Section 9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement)
Switches to display 2 types of parts.
(a) Switch different parts according to ON/OFF of bit device.
Parts switching
bit device
: M10
M10: ON M10: OFF
(b) Displays/hides parts according to ON/OFF of bit device.
Parts switching
bit device
: M10
M10: ON M10: OFF
(2) Word parts movement ( Section 9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement)
Switches to display more than 3 types of parts.
(a) Switch to display parts of which parts No. is the same as the word device value.
Parts switching
word device
: D10
D10 1 D10 2 D10 3 D10 4
(b) Switch parts type according to the range and condition of word device value.
Parts switching
word device
: D10
Display condition
1) 50 D10 100 Part No.1 1) D10 1 2) D10 250 3) D10 4
2) D10 < 100 Part No.2
3) Parts No.0 (not displayed) at
normal case (other than above
conditions)
(3) Fixed part movement ( Section 9.2.6 Setting items of fixed parts movement)
Only one type of parts is displayed.
Parts switching device is not set.
Parts switching
word device
: need not to be set
9 - 32 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.1 Moving and displaying parts
9
3 Parts movement example
Execute parts movement display by position device and parts switching device.
1) Position device (D10) 2) Parts switching device (D15)
PARTS
Move way: Point Switching way: Parts movement
Point1 Point2 Point3 Part No. 50 :
Part No. 100 :
10
Part No. 150 :
GRAPH, METER
Changes into the parts
Changes into the parts of part No. 150
Move to point2 of part No. 100 Move to point3
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
1) Position device
1 2 2 3
: D10
2) Parts switching
50 50 100 150
device: D15
12
4 The setting order of parts movement
EXTERNAL INPUT/
When setting the object of parts movement, select parts switching way, then parts move way.
OUTPUT
1 Select parts switching way
Select from the menu. ( Section 9.2.3 Arrangement and setting)
The switching method cannot be changed after setting the object of parts movement.
13
2 Select parts move way
Set in the dialog box that is displayed after selecting parts switching way.
OTHERS
The move method can be changed even after setting the object of parts movement.
When setting the move way of parts movement in [Point] within [Part Move Route] 14
dialog box.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Make sure to set parts move route in advance before setting object of parts
movement.
( Section 9.2.2 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each
screen))
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 33
9.2.1 Moving and displaying parts
5 Displaying method of the BMP file stored in the PC card
The BMP file parts stored in the PC card can be displayed by specifying a number from 9001 to 9999 for
the parts No.
To display a BMP file part in the PC card by specifying parts No. of 9001 to 9999, make the setting in the
following procedure.
1 Store a BMP file to be displayed as parts in the PC card.
Section 4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card
2 Turn ON the GS450.b8.
Parts No. When GS450.b8 is ON When GS450.b8 is OFF
9001 to 9999 The BMP file part in the PC card is displayed. The part registered by the GT Degisner2 is displayed.
3 The BMP file parts in the PC card will be displayed when the parts displaying condition (Parts No. : 9001
to 9999) is met on Parts Display/Parts Movement.
The display example in the case where the following BMP file parts are stored on the PC card is shown
below.
IMG0001.BMP IMG0500.BMP
IMG0999.BMP
Example: BMP file parts are displayed in parts display (word)
When any of the part numbers from 9001 to 9999 is entered in a word device, the
corresponding BMP file part is displayed.
Word device for parts display : D100
D100 9000 D100 9001 D100 9500 D100 9999
When a part No. of 0 or BMP file part BMP file part BMP file part
9000 is specified, no BMP (IMG0001.BMP) (IMG0500.BMP) (IMG0999.BMP)
file part is displayed. is displayed. is displayed. is displayed.
9 - 34 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.1 Moving and displaying parts
9
(1) When specifying a parts No. out of 9001 to 9999
The parts registered by the GT Designer2 will be displayed even when the
GS450.b8 is ON.
(2) When switching the parts display to the display of the BMP file parts of the
PARTS
corresponding parts No. in the PC card
To display the BMP file parts of the corresponding parts No. in the PC card while 10
displaying parts of parts No. of 9001 to 9999 registered by the GT Designer2,
operate as follows.
GRAPH, METER
1 Turn ON the GS450.b8.
2 Specify the parts No. 0 or 9000 to hide the parts currently displayed.
3 Specify the parts No. of the BMP file parts in the PC card to be displayed.
11
ACTIONS
(3) The example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after the GOT powering on
The following shows the example of turning on the GS450.b8 automatically after
the GOT is powered on by using the status observation function.
TRIGGER
It is convenient for displaying the BMP file parts in the PC card after powering on
the GOT.
On the status monitor function, set the internal device (Ordinary ON device: 12
GS0.b4) to store "1" to GS450.b8 when the Trigger is ON.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
After the GOT is powered on, "1" is stored into GS450.b8 by the status monitor
function.
OUTPUT
Make setting on the status monitor.
Set the first line of the status monitor
function. ("1" is stored into GS450.b8 13
immediately after the GOT is
switched ON.)*1
Set the condition monitor cycle to
"Ordinary".
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
*1 At a GOT startup, to display or parts movement parts may not be changed to BMP image parts.
(Switch the screen change parts.)
Design screens considering the characteristics of BMP image parts.
4
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 35
9.2.1 Moving and displaying parts
6 Parts No.
The displayable parts or the motions differ depending on the parts No.
The displayable parts for each parts No. are shown in the following table.
When GS450.b8 is ON When the GS450.b8 is OFF
Parts No. Parts registered by the BMP file parts in the PC Parts registered by the BMP file parts in the PC
GT Designer2 card GT Designer2 card
0 *1 *1 *1
1 to 8999
9000 *1
9001 to 9999 *2
10000 to 32767
: Displayable : Not displayable : Hidden
*1 When [Indirect (Device Value)] in the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word Parts Movement has been set, the
parts will not be hidden. (The current display is retained.)
For the method of hiding parts with the Word Parts Movement, refer to the [Attribute (Normal Case)] of the Word
Parts Movement.
( Section 9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement)
*2 The parts cannot be displayed even if they have been registered by the GT Designer2.
Example: When a part registered by the GT Designer2 has been registered for the parts No. 9123
GS450.b8 is ON GS450.b8 is OFF
GS450.b8 GS450.b8
The BMP file part in the The parts registered by the
PC card is displayed. GT Designer2 (Parts No.
9123) is displayed.
9 - 36 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.1 Moving and displaying parts
9.2.2 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen) 9
Set parts move route as parts display position when setting parts move way in [Point].
Up to 30 parts move routes can be set in one screen
The parts move route can be used for multiple parts movement.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
1 Select [Object] [Parts Movement] [Parts Move Route] from the menu.
ACTIONS
2 After parts move route dialog box appears, make the following settings and click on the OK button.
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Items Description A F
13
Route No. Set route No. (0 to 29) of parts move route to be created.
Points Set points (1 to 100) movement position (position to display parts).
OTHERS
Check this item to move parts in a line.
When arranging in a line, points proportion set in [Points] will be arranged automatically according
to the setting of starting point and destination.
Example: Points: Set to 5
14
Arrange in a line
SCRIPT FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5
Set the start point and destination point
(2 to 4: automatic arrangement)
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 37
9.2.2 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen)
3 As the mark (+) will appear on drawing screen, click on the mark to arrange Point 1.
Click on the positions as many as the number of set points for arrangement.
Click
Click
4 Point No. will appear at the set position after setting.
Remark The correction of parts move route
(1) Change the point position
1 Click to select parts move route, right click on the route to [Edit Point]
2 ClThe route is now in "Edit Vertex" mode. Drag a point of the selected route to
the destination position. Thus, the point position can be changed.
Vertex mode.
Edit vertex mode Drag to change point position
(2) Change the [Points] and [Route No.]
Double click on the parts move route to display the setting dialog box.
Then change the [Points] and [Route No.] in the corresponding items.
9 - 38 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.2 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each screen)
9.2.3 Arrangement and setting 9
1 Carry out any of the following operations
Click on [Bit Parts Movement] / [Word Parts Movement] / [Fixed Parts Movement.].
PARTS
Select [Object] [Parts Movement] [Bit Parts] / [Word Parts] / [Fixed Parts] from menu.
10
2 As the setting dialog box appears, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
GRAPH, METER
When changing the settings of parts movement
Parts movement cannot be arranged on screen when movement type is [Position],
[Point].
Carry out the following method when changing the settings of the preset parts 11
movement.
ACTIONS
(1) Edit using data view
Double click on the parts movement displayed in data view to display the setting
dialog box.
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 39
9.2.3 Arrangement and setting
9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement
1 Basic tab (bit)
Set the parts move way and the parts to be displayed when the device turns ON/OFF.
Basic Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Set the device to switch the part to be displayed.
With this setting, the part to be displayed can be switched even while the parts are moving.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Example:
Parts Switching Device
X10: ON X10: OFF
Display part No.1 Display part No.10
Select the part to be moved.
Parts Data :Displays the registered part
Mark Data :Changes the white part of the registered part into the different color according to
the parts switching device change.
Parts Type After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed as mark. The registered part
can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.
( Section 4.2 Parts Registration)
(Continued to next page)
9 - 40 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement
Basic Extended Trigger 9
Items Description A F
Select the method of displaying parts during parts movement.
Locus :Displays the moving parts while showing the images of previous display on the
PARTS
screen.
Movement :Displays the moving parts without showing the images of previous display on the
screen. 10
Example:
When selecting [Locus]
GRAPH, METER
Display Mode
11
The previous display The previous display
ACTIONS
When selecting [Movement]
TRIGGER
Erase the previous display Erase the previous display 12
Select the base point to display the part.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Top-left :Displays the part with reference to the upper-left position to that part.
View Center :Displays the part with reference to the center of that part.
OUTPUT
Format Example:
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device: 240)
Device for X coordinate Device for X coordinate
13
Device Device
for Y for Y
coordinate coordinate
OTHERS
Top-left Center
When [Line] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D100=50)
Positioning Point
14
Destination Destination
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Starting Starting
point point
Top-left Center
When [Point] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D200=4)
2 4 2 4
APPENDICES
1 3 1 3
Top-left Center
(Cotinued to next page)
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 41
9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement
Basic Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
ON Click on this item to set the part to be displayed when the device turns ON
OFF Click on this item to set the part to be displayed when the device turns OFF
Set the pat No. to be displayed.
The registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
Parts No. Set 0 in "Parts No." to erase the part.
(Set the part No. when the device is OFF to "0" in order to display the part only when the device is
ON/OFF ON.)
Attribute
Select the blinking pattern of the Parts.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
Select the color to be switched from the white area of the part when [Mark] has been set in [Parts
Mark Color
Type].
Select the movement type.
Position :Select this item to display the moving part using two word device values as X/Y
coordinate points respectively.
Set the devices to store the position
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position
storage. (The set device is for X storage)
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Movement Type*1 Line*2 :Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and
end point have been set.
Se the minimum value to the starting point, and maximum value to the end point.
Point :Select this item to display the part at the position (point) specified in advance.
Then, set the parts movement route No. (0 to 29).
The parts movement route must be set on the corresponding screen in advance.
( Section 9.2.2 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each
screen))
After selecting the [Movement Type], set the position device to store the movement destination of
parts.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
The setting items differ according to the settings made in [Movement Type].
Position : Sets the device to store the value of X and Y coordinate.
Device
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position
storage. (The set device is for X storage)
Line : Sets the device storing the relative value corresponding to the starting point and
ending point.
Poin : Sets the device to store the display position (point).
When selecting [Line] from [Movement Type], select the data type of word device (signed BIN16/
Data Type
unsigned BIN16). (Fixed to unsigned BIN16 when selecting [Position], [Point])
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
9 - 42 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement
*1 Movement Type 9
Select the movement type when moving parts.
Refer to the following for the details about parts movement type.
Section 9.2.1 Move way of parts (control with position device)
PARTS
*2 Line
Set the line as the parts move range when the movement type is set as [Line].
10
Execute the following operations after making settings in the setting dialog box.
GRAPH, METER
1 Click on the start position in drawing screen.
11
ACTIONS
2 Set the line as the parts move range after moving cursor and clicking on the destination.
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 43
9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement
2 Extended tab (bit)
It is to set the security and offset.
Check the Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
Basic Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
9 - 44 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement
9
3 Trigger tab (bit)
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
PARTS
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting 10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic Extended Trigger
13
Items Description A F
Select the trigger for displaying the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) in 1-second unit.
Trigger Type
Ordinary ON OFF Rise
OTHERS
Fall Sampling Range Bit Trigger
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items.
14
Word
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Range
Trigger Select the [Data Type] of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
Data Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
Range Click on the Exp button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used as
Multi Bit
Bit Number trigger.
Trigger
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their triggers
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
APPENDICES
Initial Display
displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be
Hold Display held even though the trigger is not satisfied.
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not satisfied.
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 45
9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
1 Basic tab (word)
Set move way of parts, the parts type and Parts No. to be displayed according to word device value.
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Set the device to switch the part to be displayed.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
With this setting, the part to be displayed can be switched even while the parts are moving.
The default of a written data format is signed BIN. To write by the other data format, change the
setting in "Data Form" on the Extended tab.
Parts Switching Device Example:
D10: 1 D10: 2 D10: 3
Display part No.1 Display part No.2 Display part No.3
Select the part to be moved.
Parts Data :Displays the registered part
Mark Data :Changes the white part of the part into the different color
according to the parts switching device change.
Parts Type After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed as mark.
The registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
Refer to the following for the parts displayed by Mark.
( Section 4.2 Parts Registration)
(Continued to next page)
9 - 46 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation 9
Items Description A F
Select the method of displaying parts during parts movement.
Locus :Displays the moving parts while showing the images of previous display on the
PARTS
screen.
Movement :Displays the moving parts without showing the images of previous display on the
screen. 10
Example:
When selecting [Locus]
GRAPH, METER
Display Mode
The previous display The previous display
11
ACTIONS
When selecting [Movement]
TRIGGER
Erase the previous display Erase the previous displa 12
Select the base point to display the part.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Top-left :Displays the part with the reference to the upper-left position to that part.
View Center :Displays the part with the reference to the center of that part.
Format Example:
OUTPUT
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device:240)
Device for X coordinate Device for X coordinate
13
Device Device
for Y for Y
coordinate coordinate
OTHERS
Top-left Center
When [Line] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D100=50)
Positioning Point
14
Starting Destination Starting Destination
SCRIPT FUNCTION
point point
Top-left Center
When [Point] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D200=4)
2 4 2 4
1 3 1 3
APPENDICES
Top-left Center
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 47
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Set the display attribute of parts.
Use the state (Range Setting tab) for switching to multiple parts except "Indirect (Device value)".
Indirect [Device Value] :Displays the parts/base screen/window screen No.
corresponding to the word device value.
The current display is hold at setting 0 (Setting 0 or 9000 when
specifying the BMP file parts in the PC card.) in the parts
switching device.
The part will be erased by redisplaying current screen after
switching to another screen.
(Example)
Attribute (Normal Case)*3
D200: 100
Display the parts Monitor device value
with parts No. 100
Parts No. :Select this time to specify and display the registered part.
After this, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed.
Set 0 in Parts No. to erase the part.
Mark Color :At selecting "Mark" in "Parts Type" category, select the
displayed color to change in the white area of the registered
part.
Hold :Select this item to hold current parts display.
Select the blinking pattern of the Parts.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
Select the movement type.
Position :Select this item to display the moving part using two word devicevalues as X/Y
coordinate points respectively.
Set the devices to store the position
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position
storage. (The set device is for X storage)
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Movement Type*1 Line*2 :Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which starting point and
end point have been set.
Se the minimum value to the starting point, and maximum value to the end point.
Point :Select this item to display the part at the position (point) specified in advance.
Then, set the parts movement route No. (0 to 29).
The parts movement route must be set on the corresponding screen in advance.
( Section 9.2.2 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each
screen))
(Continued to next page)
9 - 48 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation 9
Items Description A F
After selecting the [Movement Type], set the position device to store the movement destination of
parts.
PARTS
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
The setting items differ according to the settings made in [Movement Type].
Device
Position : Sets the device to store the value of X and Y coordinate.
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position
10
storage. (The set device is for X storage)
Line : Sets the device storing the relative value corresponding to the starting point and
GRAPH, METER
ending point.
Point : Sets the device to store the display position (point).
When selecting [Line] from [Movement Type], select the data type of word device (signed BIN16/
Data Type
unsigned BIN16). (Fixed to unsigned BIN16 when selecting [Position], [Point])
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
11
Category
ACTIONS
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.
*1 Movement Type
TRIGGER
Select the movement type when moving parts.
Refer to the following for the details about parts movement type.
12
Section 9.2.1 Move way of parts (control with position device)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
*2 Line
Set the line as the parts move range when the movement type is set as [Line].
OUTPUT
Execute the following operations after making settings in the setting dialog box.
1 Click on the start position in drawing screen. 13
OTHERS
2 Set the line as the parts move range after moving cursor and clicking on the destination.
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 49
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
*3 Parts switching method
Set on State (Case tab) except [Indirect (Device value)] in [Attribute (Normal case)] category.
The following describes how to change the displayed part depending on the "Attribute (Normal case)" and
State settings.
"Attribute State setting
(Normal case)"
Set Not set
type
The part is displayed as below depending on the condition Set the state if required.
set to the state. The displayed part is changed depending on the parts
When trigger is satisfied switching device value.
[Indirect
The part set to the state is displayed. Set the state to change the part except the above condition.
(Device Value)]
When trigger is not satisfied
The displayed part is changed depending on the parts
switching device value.
The part is displayed as below depending on the condition Set the state at any time.
[Parts No.] set to the state. Only one type of part is kept displayed without sate settings.
When trigger is satisfied It cannot be switched to any other part.
The part set at the state is displayed.
[Mark Color] When trigger is not satisfied
The part set at [Attribute (Normal case)] is displayed.
The part is displayed as below depending on the condition Set the state at any time.
set to the state. Nothing is displayed without sate settings.
When trigger is satisfied
[Hold]
The part set at the state is displayed.
When trigger is not satisfied
The part set at the state is kept displayed.
Example: When [Attribute (Normal case)] is set to [Parts No].
Set the following on each tab.
Basics tab Range Setting tab
[Parts Switcing Device]: D10 State 1 State 2
[Parts Type]: [Parts Data] [Range] : 1 <= D10 <= 100 [Range] : 100 < D10
[Attribute (Normal Case)]: [Parts No.1] [Attribute] : Parts No.2 [Attribute] : Parts No.3
(Displayed part)
Part No. 2
Part No. 1 Part No. 3
D10 = 0 D10 = 40 D10 = 150
Part set at "Attribute" Part set at State 1 is Part set at State 2 is
is displayed (Part No. 1) displayed (Part No. 2) displayed (Part No. 3)
Refer to the following section for details of the state.
Section 5.4 State Setting
9 - 50 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
9
2 Extended tab (word)
Set the data type, security and offset of monitor device.
Check "Extended Function" at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
OUTPUT
Items Description A F
Select the data type of the parts switching dvice.
Signed BIN :Treats word device value as a signed binary value. 13
Unsigned BIN :Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
BCD 16 :Treats word device value as 16-bit BCD (binary decimal) value.
Data Type
This setting item is not available for the following devices.
OTHERS
Position device (set in [Move Way] within the basic tab.
[Range] device set in [Trigger Type] within the trigger tab.
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0". 14
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices. SCRIPT FUNCTION
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 51
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
3 Case tab (word)
The attribute can be changed on this setting depending on the device status.
For details of states, refer to the following.
Section 5.4 State Setting
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
State*1 Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
New State Creates a new state.
Delete State Deletes a specified state.
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
Up/Down Changes the priority of the current state.
Displays the list of preset states.
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Select the display change conditions according to state.
Bit :Select it when changing the display according to the ON/OFF status of bit
device.
Device After selecting, set the bit device and device status (ON/OFF).
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Word :Select it when changing the display according to the value of word device. After
selecting, set the conditional expression of word device value in [Range].
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
(Continued to next page)
9 - 52 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation 9
Items Description A F
Select the method of displaying parts.
Indirect (Device Value) :Displays the parts/base screen/window screen No. corresponding
PARTS
to the word device value.
The current display is hold at setting zero in the parts switching
device. 10
The part will be erased by redisplaying current screen after
switching to another screen.
State*1 Attribute
Parts No. :Select this time to specify and display the registered part.
GRAPH, METER
After selection, set the displayed parts No.
Set 0 in "Parts No." to erase the part.
Hold :Select this item to hold current parts
display even though state condition is satisfied.
Mark Color :Select this item to change the white part of the registered part 11
into the different color when mark-selecting in [Parts Type].
ACTIONS
Select the blinking pattern of the Parts.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
TRIGGER
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds.
For details of *1, refer to the following. 12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 53
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
*1 State
(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is in condition other than those set on the Case tab, it is displayed with the display
attribute set on the Basic tab.
(2) Display when conditions are overlapped
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
Example: Parts switching device : D100
Data view format : Signed decimal 16-bit signed decimal
Parts No. 1 Parts No. 10 Parts No. 11 Parts No. 12
Registered parts :
The operation
priority for setting State No. Display range Display parts
overlap conditions.
High 1 M10 ON No.11
2 1<=$V<=9 Indirect
3 10<=$V Hold
Normal Case
Low -------- No.12
(State 0)
*$V indicates the value of monitor device.
State 1 Display parts No.11 when M10 is ON.
Display the parts corresponding to parts switching device value
State 2
when the value is between 1 and 9 (1<=$V<=9).
Do not switch parts display when parts switching device value is
State 3
10 or greater (10<=$V).
Normal Case
Display parts No.12 in the condition other than state 1 to 3.
(State 0)
9 - 54 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
9
4 Trigger tab (word)
The setting items of trigger tab are the same as bit parts movement.
For details of setting items, refer to the following.
Section 9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 55
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
5 Data Operation tab (word)
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
9 - 56 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.5 Setting items of word parts movement
9.2.6 Setting items of fixed parts movement 9
1 Basic tab (fixed)
PARTS
Directly specify and set the parts move way as well as the parts to be display.
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
Basic
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
OUTPUT
Select the part to be moved.
Parts Data :Displays the registered part
Mark Data :Changes the white part of the part into the different color 13
according to the parts switching device change.
Parts Type After selecting, set the [Parts No.] to be displayed as mark.
The registered part can be checked by clicking on Browse button.
Refer to the following for the displayed parts by Mark.
OTHERS
( Section 4.2 Parts Registration)
(Continued to next page)
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 57
9.2.6 Setting items of fixed parts movement
Basic Extended Trigger
Items Description A F
Select the method of displaying parts during parts movement.
Locus :Displays the moving parts while showing the images of previous display on the
screen.
Movement :Displays the moving parts without showing the images of previous display on the
screen.
Example:
When selecting [Locus]
Display Mode
The previous display The previous display
When selecting [Movement]
Erase the previous display Erase the previous displa
Select the base point to display the part.
Top-left :Displays the part with reference to the upper-left position to that part.
View Center :Displays the part with reference to the center of that part.
Format Example:
When [Position] is selected in [Move Way] (X coordinate device: 320, Y coordinate device:240)
Device for X coordinate Device for X coordinate
Device Device
for Y for Y
coordinate coordinate
Top-left Center
When [Line] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D100=50)
Positioning Point
Starting Destination Starting Destination
point point
Top-left Center
When [Point] is selected in [Move Way] (Device: D200=4)
2 4 2 4
1 3 1 3
Top-left Center
(Continued to next page)
9 - 58 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.6 Setting items of fixed parts movement
Basic Extended Trigger 9
Items Description A F
Set the display attribute of parts.
PARTS
Parts No. :Select this item to display parts in registration.
Set the parts No. to be displayed after the selection.
Attribute
Click on Browse button to specify the registered parts.
10
Mark Color :Select the color to change from white color of the part.
mark-selecting registered parts in [Parts Type].
GRAPH, METER
Select the blinking pattern of the Parts.
No : Not blink.
Blink Low : Blinks every 1 second.
Middle : Blinks every 0.5 seconds.
High : Blinks every 0.2 seconds. 11
ACTIONS
Select the movement type.
Position :Select this item to display the moving part using two word device values as X/Y
coordinator points respectively.
Set the devices to store the position
TRIGGER
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position
storage. (The set device is for X storage)
( Section 5.1 Device Setting) 12
Line*2 :Select this item to display the moving part in the line of which\ starting point and
Movement Type*1 end point have been set.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Se the minimum value to the starting point, and maximum value to the end
point.
OUTPUT
Point :Select this item to display the part at the position (point) specified in advance.
Then, set the parts movement route No. (0 to 29).
The parts movement route must be set on the corresponding screen in
advance. 13
( Section 9.2.2 Setting of parts move route (common setting for each
screen))
After selecting the [Movement Type], set the position device to store the movement destination of
OTHERS
parts.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
The setting items differ according to the setting made in [Movement Type].
Position :Sets the device to store the value of X and Y coordinate.
14
Device
From the set device, 2 device points are set continuously for X Y position
SCRIPT FUNCTION
storage. (The set device is for X storage)
Line :Sets the device storing the relative value corresponding to the starting point
and ending point.
Point :Sets the device to store the display position (point).
When selecting [Line] from [Movement Type], select the data type of word device (signed BIN16/
Data Type
unsigned BIN16). (Fixed to unsigned BIN16 when selecting [Position], [Point])
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
APPENDICES
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 59
9.2.6 Setting items of fixed parts movement
*1 Movement Type
Select the movement type when moving parts.
Refer to the following for the details about parts movement type.
Section 9.2.1 Move way of parts (control with position device)
*2 Line
Set the line as the parts move range when the movement type is set as [Line].
Execute the following operations after making settings in the setting dialog box.
1 Click on the start position in drawing screen.
2 Set the line as the parts move range after moving cursor and clicking on the destination.
9 - 60 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.6 Setting items of fixed parts movement
9
2 Extended tab (fixed)
The setting items of extended tab are the same as bit parts movement.
Refer to the following for the details about the setting items.
PARTS
Section 9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
3 Trigger tab (fixed)
OUTPUT
The setting items of trigger tab are the same as bit parts movement.
Refer to the following for the details about the setting items.
Section 9.2.4 Setting items of bit parts movement 13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
9.2 Parts Movement 9 - 61
9.2.6 Setting items of fixed parts movement
9.2.7 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using parts movement function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) The maximum number of parts movement objects can be set for one screen
GOT-A900 series: 256
(2) Display position of parts
If the display position of parts out of screen is set in Designer2, parts will not be movement-
displayed. The previous display will be held.
Example) In the case of movement type [Point]
Parts out of the screen will not be displayed.
(3) Precautions for registering parts
Refer to the following for the precautions of registering parts.
(a) When using registered parts
Section 4.2 Parts Registration
(b) BMP file stored on PC card (BMP file part)
Section 4.3 Storing a BMP file part in the PC card
2 Precautions for use
(1) The value stored in position device
If the value stored in position device exceeding the display range (position, out of the range of
maximum to minimum, point No.), parts will not be movement-displayed. The previous display will
be held.
9 - 62 9.2 Parts Movement
9.2.7 Precautions
9
10. GRAPH, METER
PARTS
10.1 Panelmeter 10
GRAPH, METER
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This function enables meter display (needle display) of the word device value relative to the preset upper/
lower limit value.
11
ACTIONS
D100 = 1000 D100 = 2000 D100 = 3000
10 10 10
TRIGGER
0 20 0 20 0 20
Ammeter Ammeter Ammeter
12
10.1.1 Required knowledge for panelmeter setting
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Panelmeter setting method
OUTPUT
Basic functions of the panelmeter are set on the following tabs of to .
The following example is used to explain the general procedure for the panelmeter setting.
13
Example: Panelmeter that indicates analog/digital conversion value for 12mA
Current input range : 0 to 20mA
Digital output range : 0 to 4000
Conversion value : D10
OTHERS
Conversion value
10 Monitors the value of D10.
14
0 20 Scale value
Ammeter Indicates current input range.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
0 4000
Upper/lower limit
Sets digital output range.
1 Basic tab
Set the meter type, needle color, shape, i.e., frame and upper/lower limit.
APPENDICES
Figure frame
Monitored device (D10)
Direction (Clockwise)
Needle color
Meter frame (top)
0 4000
Upper/lower limit
(Upper limit: 4000, Lower limit: 0)
INDEX
10.1 Panelmeter 10 - 1
10.1.1 Required knowledge for panelmeter setting
Remark Display of value exceeding upper/lower limit
If the monitor device value exceeds the upper/lower limit value, the graph shows it
as the upper/lower limit value.
Lower limit: 0 Upper limit: 4000
D10: -50 D10: 4200
2 Scale/Text tab
Sets the scale and name plate (text) for the panelmeter.
0
Scale (Scale points: 5)
-100 100 Scale display (Scale points: 3)
Ammeter : Default value displayed.
0 4000 Text (Inputs directly)
3 Extended tab
Changes the scale values and the data type of the monitored device.
10
Data type of monitored device
The value of scale value
0 20 (Lower limit: 0, Upper limit: 20)
Ammeter
0 4000
10 - 2 10.1 Panelmeter
10.1.1 Required knowledge for panelmeter setting
10.1.2 Arrangement and settings 9
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
Click on [Panelmeter].
PARTS
Select [Object] [Panelmeter] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the panelmeter is to be located to complete the arrangement. 10
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
GRAPH, METER
3 Double click on the arranged panelmeter to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
reference to the following explanation.
Easier setting method 11
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
ACTIONS
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
TRIGGER
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Object outline frame 12
Shape frame
5.3.3 Object size change
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.1 Panelmeter 10 - 3
10.1.2 Arrangement and settings
10.1.3 Setting items
1 Basic tab
Set the type and view format (upper/lower limit value, display frame) for the panelmeter.
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
Basic Scale/Text Extended Case Data Operation
Basic Display/Scale
Items Description A F
Set the device to be monitored.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Device For GOT-A900 series, the device data format is preset to "Signed BIN (Treats it as signed binary
value)" as a default.
The device data format is changed on the extended tab.
Device
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
Data Type Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Select the panelmeter type.
Top Bottom Left Right Top-left Top-right
View
Type*1
Format
Bottom-left Bottom-right Top Bottom Left Right Full circle
(Continued to next page)
10 - 4 10.1 Panelmeter
10.1.3 Setting items
Basic Scale/Text Extended Case Data Operation
9
Basic Display/Scale
Items Description A F
PARTS
When the full circle is selected for [Type], select the meter needle reference point (the position
where device lower limit value is displayed) for the meter needle.
Base Point
90 10
0 180
GRAPH, METER
270
Select the direction of the needle will move according to the monitor device value.
The base point of the panelmeter changes depending on the direction.
Direction*1
Clockwise : Clockwise rotation
Counterclockwise : Counterclockwise rotation
11
Needle Color*1 Select the needle color of the panelmeter. (The thickness of needle is fixed to 3 dots.)
ACTIONS
Check this item to display the meter frame. Meter frame
Meter Frame Line width of the frame is fixed to 1 dot, and the color fixed to
TRIGGER
View
white.
Format
Check this item to color the meter panel face.
Meter panel
12
Meter Panel*1 After checking, select the panel color.
This item can be set only with "Meter Frame".
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) is displayed based on the setting by
OUTPUT
Upper Limit *1 fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed : Sets the fixed values.
Device : Sets the device values.
13
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
The setting range of the upper and lower limit is specified by the data type of the monitored device.
Lower Limit*1
( Section 5.3 Object Arrangement and Display Image Setting)
Preset the data type of the device. ( Option tab)
OTHERS
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be 14
selected.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
( 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame
Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Format
Frame Plate
Frame
Needle color
Plate
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
APPENDICES
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
*1 In the GOT-F900 series, set Display/Scale tab.
INDEX
10.1 Panelmeter 10 - 5
10.1.3 Setting items
2 Scale/Text tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set the details of the panelmeter (scale upper/lower limit) and the text to be displayed at the center or
on the top, bottom, left or right.
Basic Scale/Text Extended Case Data Operation
Items Description A F
Set the scale and scale value to the panelmeter.
0 0
Scale Style
-100 100 -100 100
Scale Scale value Scale in combination
(Scale points: 5) (Value number: 3) scale value
Check this item to display the scale.
Scale After checking, set the number of scale points (2 to11) and the scale color.
Once this is set, the space between each scale tick is automatically defined.
Check this item to display the scale by using numeric values.
Set the number of numeric values (2 to 11) in [Value Number] and numeric size (0.5 to 8) in [Size].
Scale Value The default numeric values are set within the range -100 to 100.
When changing the numeric value, set the upper limit/lower limit values for the scale value in the
extended tab.
(Continued to next page)
10 - 6 10.1 Panelmeter
10.1.3 Setting items
Basic Scale/Text Extended Case Data Operation
9
Items Description A F
Text Select the color of text to be displayed.
PARTS
Size Select the size of text size to be displayed (0.5 to 8).
Use High Quality
Font
Check this item when using high quality font to display the text.
(Only when display size X, Y is set to any of 2, 4, 6 or 8.)
10
Select Position to This selects the display position of text.
GRAPH, METER
Edit Text Five patterns of text can be displayed simultaneously.
The following positions (A to E) can be set by the combined use of Select Position to Edit Text
(Center/Top/Bottom/Left/Right) and Horizontal/Vertical Alignment.
Horizontal
Alignment Select Position to Edit Text B B B
A: Center
11
Text DA A AE
B: Up DA A AE
C: Bottom
ACTIONS
D: Left DA A AE
Vertical Alignment
E: Right C C C
Text
TRIGGER
Distance from Set the number of dots for the distance between the text
Text
Text
Frame and object shape, i.e., frame. (Up to 100 dots)
Text
12
Input the text to be displayed on the panelmeter. (Up to 32 characters)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Text
Press the Enter key to input a new line at the end of the first line.
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.1 Panelmeter 10 - 7
10.1.3 Setting items
3 Display/Scale tab (GOT-F900 series only)
Basic Display/Scale
Items Description A F
Type Select the type for the panelmeter.
Select the direction of the needle according to the monitor device value.
The base point of panelmeter changes with the direction.
Direction
Clockwise : Clockwise rotation
Counterclockwise : Counterclockwise rotation
When the full circle is selected for [Type], select the meter needle reference point (the position
Base Point
where device lower limit value is displayed) for meter needle.
Needle Color Select the needle color of the panelmeter. (The needle thickness is fixed to 3 dots.)
Display
Meter Panel Select the panel color of the panelmeter.
Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) is displayed based on the setting by
Upper Limit fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed : Sets the fixed values as the upper/lower limit values
Device : Sets the device values as the upper/lower limit values.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Lower Limit The range available for this setting depends on the data format of the device to be monitored. Set
the data format in advance.
Check this item to display the scale.
Scale Scale Display After checking, set the number of scale points (2 to 50) and the scale color.
Once this is set, the space between each scale tick is automatically defined.
10 - 8 10.1 Panelmeter
10.1.3 Setting items
9
4 Extended tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set the security level, offset values, data type of the monitor device and upper/lower limit of scale value.
Check "Extended' at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Extended
Basic Scale/Text Case Data Operation
13
Items Description A F
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Data Type Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
OTHERS
Real : Treats word device value as floating point type real number.
BCD : Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value.
Before changing a scale value, set the upper/lower limit values. 14
Example: Change the lower limit value.
Upper
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Changes automatically
0 50
Scale
Value
-100 100 0 100
Lower
Lower limit change of scale value
-100 0
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
APPENDICES
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
INDEX
10.1 Panelmeter 10 - 9
10.1.3 Setting items
5 Case tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set the change properties of the panelmeter needle color according to the device state.
For details of state, refer to the following.
Section 5.4 State Setting
Basic Scale/Text Extended Case Data Operation
Items Description A F
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
State*1 Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
New State Creates a new state.
Delete State Deletes a specified state.
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
Up/Down Changes the priority of the current state.
Displays the list of preset states.
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
Needle Color Select the needle color that is displayed corresponding to the set condition.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
10 - 10 10.1 Panelmeter
10.1.3 Setting items
*1 State 9
(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is in condition other than those set on the Case tab, it is displayed with the display
attribute set on the Basic tab.
PARTS
(2) Display when conditions are overlapped
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
10
Example: Monitored Device: D100
Operation priority
GRAPH, METER
for setting overlap State No. Display range Needle Color
condition
High 1 21<=$V<=60 Yellow
2 $V<=20 Red 11
ACTIONS
Normal case
Low Blue
(State 0)
* $V indicates the monitored device value.
TRIGGER
When the device value is between 21 and 60
(21 $V 60), the needle color will be yellow. 50
State 1
25 75
12
0 100
EXTERNAL INPUT/
When the device value is 20 or below
OUTPUT
($V 20), the needle color will be red. 50
25 75
State 2
0 100
13
When the condition is other than state 1,2 the needle
color will be blue.
OTHERS
50
Normal case 25 75
(State 0) 0 100
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.1 Panelmeter 10 - 11
10.1.3 Setting items
6 Data Operation tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function
Basic Scale/Text Extended Case Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
10 - 12 10.1 Panelmeter
10.1.3 Setting items
10.1.4 Precautions 9
The following is the precautions for using the panelmeter function.
1 Precautions for drawing
PARTS
(1) Maximum number of panelmeter objects settable on one screen
GOT-A900 series: 256 10
GOT-F900 series: 50
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.1 Panelmeter 10 - 13
10.1.4 Precautions
10.2 Level
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This function is used to fill the specified range (level) equivalent to the device value, corresponding to the to
the percentage of the difference between the upper/lower limit values.
With this function, the device value can be shown as a level in any closed figure.
D100=0 D100=50 D100=100
100 100 100
75 75 75
50 50 50
25 25 25
0 0 0
Example:
When combined with the numerical display function When combined with the comment display function
Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input Section 7.5 Comment Display
Numerical Comment
display display
Decrease
Level Level
D100=25 D100=50 D100=25 D100=50
Numeric value is displayed in the XOR-combined color. Text of comment display is changed according to
level, and displayed in XOR-combined color.
Refer to the following for setting details.
Section 10.2.3 *1 State
10 - 14 10.2 Level
10.2.1 Required knowledge for level setting 9
A level object can be overlapped with figures and numerical/comment display objects.
The following example explains how to make the settings for overlapping a level object with figures and
numerical display objects.
PARTS
Example: Level for tank Injection volume
Tank capacity : 0 to 500 liter 10
Injection volume: D10
Injection rate : 0 to 100%
GRAPH, METER
Set by combining multiple Numerical display
objects and figures. Displayed in XOR-combined
500 100 50 color according to level.
Figure, scale 11
50
50 100
Level is displayed within
ACTIONS
figure frame.
50 Draw scale if required.
0 0
0
TRIGGER
Level
Set level range according
to figure frame.
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Injection volume
D10 value is monitored.
OUTPUT
Upper/lower limit
Set tank capacity.
1 Setting figure, scale and numerical display 13
Make the settings for figure, scale and numerical display before arranging the "level" object.
Scale
100
Numerical display
OTHERS
Set the numerical value to be XOR-reversed.
50 Section 7.1 Numerical Display/Numerical Input
Figure
Draw the figure that overlaps with level object as shown below.
14
0
Use the boundary color set in the basic tab.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Draw the figure in enclosed shape.
Example: Figure drawn for level display
Drawn by vertex,
circular or oval figure Drawn by line
If the figure is
The figure in of the enclosed
different color from type, the level
the boundary color display is used.
is filled
APPENDICES
Level frame Level frame
INDEX
10.2 Level 10 - 15
10.2.1 Required knowledge for level setting
2 Level and figure overlapped
100 Figure
Numerical display
50
Level
Figure and numerical object must be enclosed within the "level" frame.
0 Arrange level frame and figure to the same length.
If the length of level and figure are different, the value different with actual one is displayed.
[When length is the same] [When length is different]
Upper limit: 100 Level frame
Level frame
D10: 80
Upper limit: 100
D10: 80
Direction Direction
Lower limit: 0 Lower limit: 0
80% filled. Completely filled.
3 Basic Tab
Set the direction, boundary color and upper/lower limit of level.
500 100
Direction (Up)
50 Monitor device (D10)
Boundary color (set to the same color as shape)
0 0
Upper/Lower limit (upper limit: 500, lower limit: 0)
Remark Display the value out of the upper/lower limit
When the monitor device value exceeds upper limit, it will be displayed as the new
upper limit. When falling below lower limit, it will not be displayed.
Upper limit: 500
Lower limit: 0
D10:-100 D10:600
10 - 16 10.2 Level
10.2.1 Required knowledge for level setting
10.2.2 Arrangement and settings 9
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
PARTS
Click on [Level Graph].
Select [Object] [Level] from the menu. 10
2 Click on the level arrangement position to arrange the level.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
GRAPH, METER
3 To display the level within a figure, adjust the dotted frame in order that it will fit the figure.
If the internal position mark ( )is overlapped with the figure and then reversed, this means the level
display has been arranged. 11
ACTIONS
Level
Inter. pos.
mark data
TRIGGER
Figure
12
4 Adjust the dotted line of level display in order that it will fit the outline of the figure.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
5 Double click on the arranged level object to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
OTHERS
reference to the following explanation.
14
Easier setting method
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.2 Level 10 - 17
10.2.2 Arrangement and settings
Remark When internal position mark ( ) are not overlapped with the figure
When internal position marks are not overlapped with the figure, move the internal
position mark according to the following procedure.
The level display is not applicable to the figure that is not overlapped with internal
position mark.
When level display is valid When level display is invalid
Figure of
level
Frame for
level display
area
1 Right-click the dotted frame for the level display, and then click [Edit Touch
Area/Frame Region].
Internal position mark data change from to .
2 Drag the internal position mark in order it will overlap with the figure.
Figure is reversed and
level display is valid.
10 - 18 10.2 Level
10.2.2 Arrangement and settings
10.2.3 Setting items 9
1 Basic tab
PARTS
Set the upper/lower limit and display attribute (color, direction) for monitor device and level.
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Set the device to be monitored.
OTHERS
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Device For GOT-A900 series, the device data format is preset to "Signed BIN (Treats it as signed binary
Device
value)" as a default.
The device data format is changed on the extended tab.
14
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Set the frame line color of the figure for level display.
Line of figure
The level without the frame line is not displayed inside of the figure.
Example 1: When the boundary color is the Example 2: When the boundary color differs
View Boundary Color
same as the figure frame line color from the figure frame line color
Format
APPENDICES
Figure Figure
Shape of level object Shape of level object
Level display is validLevel display is invalid
Level Color Select filling color for level display.
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
10.2 Level 10 - 19
10.2.3 Setting items
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the pattern and background color for level display.
Level Pattern
The selected pattern in the level color is displayed on the background color.
Level Pattern + Level color
Pattern Example: Pattern Background :
Background Color Level Pattern :
Level color :
Pattern Background
Select the direction the color changes when the monitor device value increases.
View [Right] [Left] [Up] [Down]
Format Direction
Select whether the device value range (upper/lower limit) for level display is displayed based on
Upper Limit the setting by fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed : Sets the fixed values as the upper/lower limit values.
Device : Sets the device values as the upper/lower limit values.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Lower Limit The range available for this setting depends on the data format of the device to be monitored. Set
the data format in advance.
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
10 - 20 10.2 Level
10.2.3 Setting items
9
2 Extended tab
Set the security and offset.
Check Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Extended
Basic Case Trigger Data Operation
13
Items Description A F
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
OTHERS
Data Type
BCD : Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value.
Real : Treats word device value as floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].) 14
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
When not using the function, set it to "0".
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Security
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.2 Level 10 - 21
10.2.3 Setting items
3 Case tab
The attribute can be changed on this setting depending on the device status.
For details of states, refer to the following.
Section 5.4 State Setting
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
State*1 Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
New State Creates a new state.
Delete State Deletes a specified state.
Previous
Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
/Next
Up/Down Changes the priority of the current state.
Displays the list of preset states.
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
Level Color Select the filling color for level.
Select the pattern and background color for level display.
Level Pattern
The selected pattern in the level color is displayed on the background color.
Level Pattern + Level color
Pattern Example: Pattern Background :
Background Color Level Pattern :
Level color :
Pattern Background
For details of *1, refer to the following.
10 - 22 10.2 Level
10.2.3 Setting items
*1 State 9
(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is in condition other than those set on the Case tab, it is displayed with the display
attribute set on the Basic tab.
PARTS
(2) Display when conditions are overlapped
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority.
10
Example: Level object and comment are combined.
Set the same condition (display range) to the level display and comment display, and
GRAPH, METER
change the level color and display comment simultaneously.
Level display setting Comment display setting Display result
11
+ Increase = Increase
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
Level Comment display
Monitor device : D100 Monitor device : D100
Direction : Up Display mode : Transparent
12
Upper limit : 100 Register comment : Comment No. 1 Increase
Lower limit :0 Comment No. 2 Decrease
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Comment No. 3 Proper
OUTPUT
Operation priority Level Comment display
for setting overlap State No. Display range
Level color Display comment
condition 13
High 1 71<=$V Red Increase
2 $V<=30 Yellow Decrease
OTHERS
Normal case
Low Light blue Proper
(State 0)
* $V represents the monitor device value
When the device value is 71 or greater (71 $V), the level color will
14
appear as red and the text, "Increase", will be displayed.
State 1 SCRIPT FUNCTION
Increase
When the device value is 20 or less ($V 20), the level color will appear
as yellow and the text, "Decrease" will be displayed.
Decrease
State 2
APPENDICES
Under the condition other than the range of state 1, 2, the level color will
appear as light blue and the text, "Proper", will be displayed as text.
Normal case Proper
(State 0)
INDEX
10.2 Level 10 - 23
10.2.3 Setting items
4 Trigger Tab
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the trigger for displaying the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) in 1-second unit.
Trigger Type
Ordinary OFF Fal Range
ON Rise Sampling Bit Trigger
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items.
Word
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Range
Trigger Select the data type of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
Data Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
Range Click on the Range button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
When [Multi Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be
Multi Bit
Bit Number used for the trigger.
Trigger
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their triggers.
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
Initial Display
displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be
Hold Display held even though the trigger is not satisfied.
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not satisfied.
10 - 24 10.2 Level
10.2.3 Setting items
9
5 Data operation tab
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
PARTS
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function 10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Basic Extended Case Trigger Data Operation
OTHERS
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
14
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
SCRIPT FUNCTION
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.2 Level 10 - 25
10.2.3 Setting items
10.2.4 Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using the level function.
1 Maximum number of level objects settable on one screen: 256
2 Precautions when numerical/comment display object is arranged on a level object
(1) Precautions for arrangement
(a) To display XOR-combined level display and numerical display/comment display
Result Description Display example
The XOR-combined numerical display and comment
display is displayed with XOR display mode.
Numerical display
Possible Level
The numerical display and comment display extended
off the level range are not XOR-combined.
Numerical display
Impossible Level
: Can be displayed as expected, : Cannot be displayed as expected
(b) To display numerical value/comment unaffected by level
Result Description Display example
The numerical display/comment display is unaffected
by the level with transparent mode.
Numerical display
Possible Level
: Can be displayed as expected, : Cannot be displayed as expected
(c) To display multiple numerical displays/comment displays over level
Result Description Display example
Only one numerical display/comment display is Numerical display
displayed. :Displayed.
The second or later numerical displays/comment
displays are not displayed.
Impossible Comment display
:Not displayed.
Level
: Can be displayed as expected, : Cannot be displayed as expected
(d) With figure frame to numerical display/comment display
Result Description Display example
Normal display may not be displayed normally.
Numerical display
Impossible Level
: Can be displayed as expected, : Cannot be displayed as expected
10 - 26 10.2 Level
10.2.4 Precautions
(2) Precautions for use
9
(a) The numerical/comment display will be updated when the level is updated.
The settings (trigger) to update the display for numerical display/comment display is not
relevant.
PARTS
(b) Numerical display/Comment display is not blinked or reversed.
3 Display on the drawing screen 10
If internal position mark is not displayed on the drawing screen, the level will not be filled.
GRAPH, METER
Internal
position
mark 11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.2 Level 10 - 27
10.2.4 Precautions
10.3 Trend Graph
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This function is used to collect word device data continuously and display it in trend graph.
D10 = 100 D10 = 200 D10 = 150
D11 = 50 D11 = 100 D11 = 100
200 200 200
100 100 100
0 0 0
Graph1 ( ): D10 Displays to the end of Continues to collect data
Graph2 (------): D11 graph display range in when the following graph
order. is displayed by scrolling.
10.3.1 Required knowledge for trend graph setting
1 Setting method of trend graph
The basic functions of trend graph are set on the following to tab.
The following example explains the general procedures for setting trend graph.
Example: Trend graph for the comparison between Plan and Actual
Productivity : 0 to 100%
Time : 0 to 3
Production : 0 to 1000
Plan (Graph 1) : D10
Actual (Graph 2) : D11
Actual
Monitors the value of D10.
1000 100 Plan
Monitors the value of D11.
50 Scale value
X: Represents productivity.
0 Y: Represents elapsed time.
0 -3 -2 -1 0
Upper/Lower limit
Sets production.
10 - 28 10.3 Trend Graph
10.3.1 Required knowledge for trend graph setting
9
1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, upper/lower limit, number of points and figure.
Number of graphs (2)
1000
PARTS
Points (6)
Direction (Right)
Shape 10
0
Upper/Lower limit
(Upper limit: 1000, Lower limit: 0)
GRAPH, METER
Remark Displaying the value exceeding upper/lower limit
When the monitor device value exceeds upper/lower limit, it will be displayed as new 11
upper/lower limit on the graph.
ACTIONS
Upper limit: 1000 D10: 1500
TRIGGER
Lower limit: 0 12
D10: -50
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the device to be monitored, line attribute and scale.
Monitored device (D10, D11) 13
1000 100
Line attribute (Graph color, line type, line width)
50 Scale
X (Scale points: 5)
Y (Scale points: 7)
OTHERS
0
0 0 50 100
Scale value: Displays default value.
X (Scale points: 3)
Y (Scale points: 3)
14
3 Extended tab (in the case of GOT-A900 series)
Change the numeric value used as scale. SCRIPT FUNCTION
1000 100
50
Scale value
X (Lower limit: 0, upper limit: 100)
0 Y (Lower limit: -3, upper limit: 0)
0 0 -1 -2 -3
APPENDICES
4 Trigger tab (in the case of GOT-A900 series)/other tab (in the case of GOT-F900 series)
Set the timing of collecting data.
The default timing of collecting data is set in 1 second (1000ms) cycle.
INDEX
10.3 Trend Graph 10 - 29
10.3.1 Required knowledge for trend graph setting
2 Store memory
The trend graph collects data only when the screen including the graph is displayed. When switching to
other screen, the collected data will be cleared.
Make sure to check [Store Memory] to collect data even after switching to other screen.
The status of device value is usually monitored and stored in the internal memory of GOT.
Set [Store Memory] on basic tab.
Example: Monitored device: D10, D11
Base screen 1
Device value
100
D10 50 D11 25
50
0
0 60 120
Switch display screen Change device value
Base screen 5
D10 50 D11 25
Produce menu
Line 1
D10 25 D11 50
Line 2
D10 75 D11 90
Display base screen 1 again
Store memory Do not store memory
100 100
50 50
0 0
0 60 120 0 60 120
Display the device value Display current device value
before switching to other only after collecting and displaying
screen, as well as the one new data.
displayed on other screen
on the graph.
Timing of erasing the display stored in memory
The data stored in memory will be erased according to the following timing.
When the condition for clearing trigger is enabled
When GOT is reset or power supply is OFF.
Download of project
Display of build-in memory information
Execution of utility setup and message display switching (display language
switching)
10 - 30 10.3 Trend Graph
10.3.1 Required knowledge for trend graph setting
10.3.2 Arrangement and settings 9
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
PARTS
Click on [Trend Graph].
Select [Object] [Graph] [Trend Graph] from the menu.
10
2 Click on the position where the trend graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
GRAPH, METER
3 Double click on the arranged trend graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
reference to the following explanation.
11
Easier setting method
ACTIONS
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
TRIGGER
4
12
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
Object outline frame
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Shape frame
OUTPUT
5.3.3 Object size change
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.3 Trend Graph 10 - 31
10.3.2 Arrangement and settings
10.3.3 Setting items
This dialog box is common to the settings for displaying the three types of graphs (line/trend/bar graph).
This section provides the explanation about setting trend graph.
1 Basic tab
Set the graph type (line/trend/bar graph), number of graphs, upper/lower limit and object shape.
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Basic Device/Scale Extended
Items Description A F
Select the graph to be set (line graph/trend graph/bar graph).
Graph Type
This section explains the setting for trend graph.
Set the number of graphs to be displayed.
Number of Pens GOT-A900 series : 1 to 8
GOT-F900 series : 1 to 4
Set the points (the number of collected data) to be displayed on the graph.
GOT-A900 series : up to 100 (2 to 100) points can be set.
GOT-F900 series : up to 50 (0, 2 to 50) points can be set.
The space between each point is automatically specified by the set points and display range of X.
View
Example:
Format Points: 5
Points
Space between
points = 20 dots
X 100 dots
(Continued to next page)
10 - 32 10.3 Trend Graph
10.3.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
9
Basic Device/Scale Extended
Items Description A F
PARTS
Select the direction for graph.
Right Left
Monitor device Monitor device 10
Direction value
value
GRAPH, METER
Elapsed time Elapsed time
Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) for trend graph is displayed based on the
Upper Limit setting by fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed
Device
: Sets the fixed values as the upper/lower limit values
: Sets the device values as the upper/lower limit values.
11
ACTIONS
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Lower Limit
The range available for this setting depends on the data format of the device to be monitored. Set
View
the data format in advance.
Format
TRIGGER
Base Value Not available for trend graph.
Check this item to continually collect data when the screen in which trend graph is not set is
displayed. 12
The data as many as the number of points for the graph are stored in the GOT internal memory.
Select the timing to erase the data stored in the GOT internal memory.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
No Clear Trigge : Does not clear the data stored in the GOT internal memory.
Clear ON Trigger Rise : Clears the data stored in the GOT internal memory when the
Store Memory
OUTPUT
bit device rises (turns ON).*1
Clear ON Trigger Falls : Clears the data stored in the GOT internal memory when the
bit device falls (turns OFF).*1
When [Clear Trigger Rise] or [Clear Trigger Fall] is selected, set the bit device for the clear trigger.
13
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
OTHERS
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
selected.
( 5.3.2 Object shape setting) 14
Frame
Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Format
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Frame
Plate
Plate
Shape
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
APPENDICES
For details of *1, refer to the following.
*1 Timing for recognizing clear trigger
The timing of recognizing clear trigger in GOT is same as that set on [Trigger Type] (trigger tab).
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], [OFF Sampling] is set in [Trigger Type], the device ON/OFF status set
for clear trigger must be retained longer that the cycle set in [Trigger Type].
INDEX
10.3 Trend Graph 10 - 33
10.3.3 Setting items
Example of data retention for a period longer than that specified for "Trigger Type"
Clear trigger :Set the timing to "Rise" and the device to "M10".
Trigger type :Set "Sampling (3 s)."
Touch switch :Set the device to "M10", and the action to "bit momentary" and "OFF Delay (4 s)."
The "sampling (3 s)" trigger type condition is met during the time from pressing the touch switch until the
clear trigger (M10) is turned off by the OFF delay (4 s), and the graph is deleted.
100 100
50 50
0 0
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Touch the touch switch The previously displayed
where a clear trigger graph is deleted.
is set.
The graph is
deleted.
Sampling (3 s) OFF Delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)
10 - 34 10.3 Trend Graph
10.3.3 Setting items
9
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the display attribute (graph color/width/type/scale) of graph and monitor device.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Device/Scale
OUTPUT
Basic Extended
Items Description A F
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
13
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
In the case of GOT-A900 series
Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
OTHERS
Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
BCD : Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value.
Data Type
Real : Treats word device value as floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].) 14
In the case of GOT-F900 series
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
When displaying more than two graphs, select the method of setting the device to be monitored in
Device each graph.
Device Settings Continue : The device to be monitored in the first graph will be set as the head device.
The devices will be consecutively assigned to the second and later graph.
Random : One device to be monitored is set for each graph.
Set the graph attributes.
Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
APPENDICES
Then, make the settings as follows:
Device : Enter the word device name here, or click on the Dev button and select a
Display Attribute
word device from the given options to set the word device for monitoring.
View
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Graph : Select the graph color.
Style : Select the graph style.
Width : Select the graph width (1 to 7 dots).
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
10.3 Trend Graph 10 - 35
10.3.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Basic Device/Scale Extended
Items Description A F
Set the scale and scale value to the trend graph.
Example:
100 100
50 50
Scale Style
0 0
0 50 100 0 50 100
Scale Scale value Scale is displayed in
(X: 5) (X: 3) combination with scale
(Y: 5) (Y: 3) value.
Check this item to display the scale.
After checking, set the number of horizontal and vertical scale points (GOT-A900 series: 0, 2 to
11; GOT-F900 series: 0, 2 to 50) and the scale color.
Scale
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points. Therefore, a scale can be
displayed in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
Check this item to display the scale by using numeric values.
Set the number of numeric values (0, 2 to 11) in [Value Number] and numeric size (0.5 to 8) in
[Size].
Scale Value The default numeric values for both height and width are set to any of 0 to 100.
When changing the numeric value, set the upper limit/lower limit values for the scale value in the
extended tab.
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points. Therefore, a scale can be
displayed in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
10 - 36 10.3 Trend Graph
10.3.3 Setting items
9
3 Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
Set the security and offset and the upper/lower limit of scale value.
Check Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
OUTPUT
Items Description A F
Check this item to display the frame, i.e., shape for the graph.
Rectangle frame 13
Rectangle Frame
OTHERS
Before changing a scale value, set the upper/lower limit values.
Set the scale value for height (Y axis) and width (X axis).
Upper
Example: Change the upper limit of the scale value on Y 14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Upper 100 Changed 500
Scale
automatically
Value
50 250
Lower Lower 0 0
0 50 100 0 50 100
Change scale value on Y
Upper: "100" "500"
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
APPENDICES
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
After checking, set the offset device.
Offset
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Data length is fixed to 16 bits.
This setting cannot be set with "Store Memory" (Basic tab).
INDEX
10.3 Trend Graph 10 - 37
10.3.3 Setting items
4 Other tabs (for GOT-F900 series only)
Check Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
Basic Device/Scale Others
Items Description A F
Check this item to display the frame, i.e., shape for the graph.
Rectangle frame
Rectangle Frame
Sampling Cycle Read the monitor device data for each setting sampling from PLC CPU and then display them.
10 - 38 10.3 Trend Graph
10.3.3 Setting items
9
5 Trigger tab (for GOT-A900 series only)
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
PARTS
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting 10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
13
Items Description A F
Select the trigger for displaying the object.
Set sampling (0.1 to 3600 seconds) with 100ms as unit when selecting [Sampling] [ON Sampling]
Trigger Type*1
OTHERS
[OFF Sampling].
Rise Fall Sampling ON Sampling OFF Sampling
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
14
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
Initial Display
displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
For details of *1, refer to the following. SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.3 Trend Graph 10 - 39
10.3.3 Setting items
* 1 Causes and measures when the graph display is not updated in the set sampling cycle.
(1) Setting of Sampling
When data cannot be collected or graph display cannot be updated in the set sampling cycle, the
trend graph will be displayed with the value different from actual one.
To display the trend graph correctly, check whether the trend graph is displayed based on the
actual device value, and make adjustment to prolong setting sampling.
(2) Updated timing at setting "ON Sampling" or "OFF Sampling"
When "ON Sampling" or "OFF Sampling" is set, there are cases the graph is not updated in the set
sampling cycle.
The causes for this problem and the measures to be taken are explained below.
(a) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling cycle set in the "Trigger Type".
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is not updated.
(When setting both "Trigger Type" to "On Sampling" and sampling cycle to one second)
one one one
second second second
Sampling cycle set in "Trigger Type"
ON
OFF
Status of the device set in "Trigger Device"
3)
1) 2) 4) 5)
At the timing of 1), the trend graph is updated.
At the timing of 2), the trend graph is updated.
At the timing of 3), the trend graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the trend graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device
condition.
At the timing of 5), the trend graph is updated.
(b) Measures
The sampling cycle set using the "Trigger Type" is not depending on the status of the device.
(The sampling cycle is not changed even if turning on or off the device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.
1 Set "Rise" or "Fall" using "Trigger Type".
2 Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the display using the
sequence program.
10 - 40 10.3 Trend Graph
10.3.3 Setting items
(3) Updated timing when setting the either following sampling, "Sampling", "ON Sampling" or "OFF
9
Sampling"
If store memory is used when [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is set, the graph
update timing will differ from the set sampling cycle.
PARTS
(a) Without setting store memory
Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
At trend graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.) 10
At station No. switching
At security level change
GRAPH, METER
(b) With setting store memory
Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
At starting GOT
At project download
At build-in memory information displaying
11
ACTIONS
At execution of utility setup and message display switching (display language switching)
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.3 Trend Graph 10 - 41
10.3.3 Setting items
6 Data operation (for GOT-A900 series only)
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
10 - 42 10.3 Trend Graph
10.3.3 Setting items
10.3.4 Precautions 9
This section provides the precautions when using the trend graph function.
1 Precautions for drawing
PARTS
(1) Maximum number of trend graph objects that can be set for one screen
GOT-A900 series: up to 24 10
GOT-F900 series: up to 1
GRAPH, METER
(2) When using store memory
For the trend graph with store memory set, up to 16 objects can be set on the whole project.
(3) Precautions in using the F920GOT-K 11
ACTIONS
The trend graph function is not provided in the F920GOT-K.
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.3 Trend Graph 10 - 43
10.3.4 Precautions
10.4 Line Graph
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This function enables multiple word device data to be collected in batch and displayed in a line graph.
400 400
200 200
0 0
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
D10 = 100 D10 = 150
D11 = 50 D11 = 100
D12 = 200 D12 = 250
D13 = 150 D13 = 350
Example:
Compare the data with the ones previously collected. (Display the locus)
Set on Extended tab.
Updated line
400 400 400 400
200 200 200 200
0 0 0 0
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Every time cascade Clears the displaying graph by
the collected data with clearing the trigger. Displays the
the new graph. graph with the new collected data.
10.4.1 Required knowledge for line graph setting
Method for line graph setting
Set the basic function of the line graph on the following tabs, to .
The following line graph example explains the general procedure for the line graph setting.
Example: Line graph for displaying production quantity of multi production line.
Achievement ratio: 0 to 100%
Production quantity: 0 to 6000
Actual quantity (line 1): D10
(line 2) : D11
(line 3) : D12
(line 4) : D13
(line 5) : D14
Production quantity (D10 to 14)
6000 100 of each production line(1 to 5).
Scale value
50 Vertical : Indicates the completion ratio.
Horizontal: Indicates the No. of the production
0 line whose production quantity is
0 1 2 3 4 5 monitored.
Upper /lower limit
Set the production quantity.
10 - 44 10.4 Line Graph
10.4.1 Required knowledge for line graph setting
9
1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, the upper and lower limit values, the number of points and the shape.
Graph number (1)
6000
PARTS
Points (5)
Direction (to right)
: The setting procedure of device.
Figure frame
10
0
Upper/lower limit
(Upper limit: 6000, lower limit: 0)
GRAPH, METER
Remark Display of values beyond the upper/lower limit.
When a value of the monitored device exceeds the upper or lower limit, it is
11
displayed numerically on the graph.
ACTIONS
D10: 7000
Upper limit : 6000
TRIGGER
Lower limit : 0
12
D10: -1000
EXTERNAL INPUT/
2 Device/Scale tab
OUTPUT
Set the monitored devices and the scale.
6000
Monitored device 13
100 (D10, D11, D12, D13, D14)
50 Scale
Vertical (scale points: 5)
0
Horizontal (scale points: 5)
OTHERS
0 0 25 50 75 100
Scale value: Display the default value
Vertical (scale points: 3)
Horizontal (scale points: 5)
14
3 Extended tab
Scale values can be changed on this tab. SCRIPT FUNCTION
6000 100
50
Scale value
Vertical (upper limit: 100, lower limit: 0)
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 Horizontal (upper limit: 5, lower limit: 1)
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.4 Line Graph 10 - 45
10.4.1 Required knowledge for line graph setting
10.4.2 Arrangement and settings
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
Click on [Line Graph].
Select [Object] [Graph] [Line Graph] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the line graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
3 Double click on the arranged line graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
reference to the following explanation.
Easier setting method
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
Object outline frame
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Shape frame
5.3.3 Object size change
10 - 46 10.4 Line Graph
10.4.2 Arrangement and settings
10.4.3 Setting items 9
This dialog box is common to the settings for displaying the three types of graphs (line/trend/bar).
This section provides the explanation about setting a line graph.
PARTS
1 Basic tab
Set the graph type (line/trend/bar graph), number of graphs, upper and lower limit and object shape.
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation 13
Basic Device/Scale Extended
Items Description A F
OTHERS
Select the graph to be set (line graph/trend graph/bar graph).
Graph Type
This section explains the setting for line graph.
Set the number of graphs to be displayed. 14
Number of Pens GOT-A900 series : 1 to 8
GOT-F900 series : 1 to 4
Set the points (the number of monitored devices) to be displayed in one graph. SCRIPT FUNCTION
GOT-A900 series : 2 to 500.
GOT-F900 series : 2 to 50.
The space between points is automatically decided by the set points and the display range of X.
View
Format Example: Points : 5
Points
APPENDICES
Space between
points = 20 dots
X 100 dots
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
10.4 Line Graph 10 - 47
10.4.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Basic Device/Scale Extended
Items Description A F
Select the setting direction for the graph.
To right To left
Value of the Value of the
Direction monitored device monitored device
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
Direction of the set Direction of the set
monitored device monitored device
View
Select whether the device value range (Lower/Upper limit) for line graph is displayed based on the
Format
Upper Limit setting by fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed : Sets the fixed values as the upper/lower limit values.
Device : Sets the device values as the upper/lower limit values.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Lower Limit The range available for this setting depends on the data format of the device to be monitored. Set
the data format in advance.
Base Value Not available for line graph.
Store Memory Not available for line graph.
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
selected.
( 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame
Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Format
Frame Plate
Plate
Shape
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
10 - 48 10.4 Line Graph
10.4.3 Setting items
9
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the display attribute (graph color/width/type, scale) and devices to be monitored.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
(Example: In the case GOT-A900 series)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
OUTPUT
Basic Device/Scale Extended
Items Description A F
13
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
In the case of GOT-A900 series
Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
OTHERS
Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
BCD : Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value
Data Type
Real : Treats word device value as floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
14
In the case of GOT-F900 series
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Device Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Device Settings Not available for line graph.
Set the graph attributes.
Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box.
Then, make the settings as follows:
Display Attribute
Device : Click on the Dev button and set a word device to be monitored. *1
View
Graph : Select the graph color.
APPENDICES
Style : Select the graph style.
Width : Select the graph width (GOT-A900 series only).
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
10.4 Line Graph 10 - 49
10.4.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Basic Device/Scale Extended
Items Description A F
Set the scale and scale value to the line graph.
Example:
100 100
50 50
Scale Style
0 0
0 50 100 0 50 100
Scale display Scale value display Combine the scale display
(X: 5) (X: 3) and scale value display
(Y: 5) (Y: 3)
Check this item to display the scale.
After checking, set the number of horizontal and vertical scale points (GOT-A900 series: 0, 2 to11;
GOT-F900 series: 0, 2 to 50) and the scale color.
Scale
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points.
Therefore, a scale can be displayed in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
Check this item to display the scale by using numeric values.
Set the number of numeric values (0, 2 to 11) in [Value Number], the color in [Color] and numeric
size (0.5 to 8) in [Size].
The default numeric values for both X and Y axes are set to any of 0 to 100.
Scale Value
When changing the numeric values, set the upper limit/lower limit values for the scale value in the
extended tab.
A scale is not displayed at setting "0" to the number of scale points.
Therefore, a scale can be displayed in the horizontal or vertical direction only.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
10 - 50 10.4 Line Graph
10.4.3 Setting items
*1 Edit device dialog box 9
Set the devices to be monitored in the Edit Device dialog box.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
Items Description A F
TRIGGER
Select the setting method in [Device List] described below.
Continue : The device to be monitored at the first point in the graph will be set as the head
Device Settings device, and any other device will be consecutively assigned to the second and 12
later points.
Random : Devices to be monitored are set at random.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Check this item to display a point using 2 devices.
Display 2
OUTPUT
devices by
one point.
2 Device/point
13
1 device/point 2 devices/point
Click on the desired item in the list to set the monitor device by direct input or clicking on the
Device List button.
OTHERS
Dev
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.4 Line Graph 10 - 51
10.4.3 Setting items
3 Extended tab
Set the security, offset, graph display method (locus, not-displayed value setting) and upper and lower
limit scale values.
Check Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
(Example : when setting GOT-A900 series) (Example : when setting GOT-F900 series)
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Basic Device/Scale Others
Items Description A F
Check this item to display the frame, i.e., shape for the graph.
Rectangle frame
Rectangle Frame
(Continued to next page)
10 - 52 10.4 Line Graph
10.4.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
9
Basic Device/Scale Others
Items Description A F
PARTS
Before changing a scale value, set the upper/lower limit values.
Set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and horizontal (X axis) lines.
Upper Example: Change the upper limit scale value on Y 10
Upper limit 100 Changed 100
Scale automatically
GRAPH, METER
Value 50 250
Lower Lower limit 0 0
0 50 100 0 50 100
Change the scale value of Y.
Upper limit : "100" "500" 11
ACTIONS
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
TRIGGER
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset
After checking, set the offset device. 12
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Data length is fixed to 16 bits.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
This setting cannot be set with "Locus".
Check this item when cascading the updated line graph and the previous graph.
OUTPUT
The previous graph is stored in the GOT internal memory.
100
Display at the first time
100
Display at the second time
100
Display at the third time
13
50 50 50
OTHERS
0 0 0
Locus 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
Display the cascaded 1, 2, 3 data contents.
14
Select the timing of clearing locus after the check.
No clear trigger : Does not erase the locus.
Clear trigger rise : Erases the locus with the rise (turns ON) of bit device.*1 SCRIPT FUNCTION
Clear trigger fall : Erases the locus with the fall (turns OFF) of bit device.*1
When selecting [Clear Trigger Rise] or [Clear Trigger Fall], set the bit device to be used for the
clear trigger.( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Check this item when setting the value without line connection.
After checking, set the not-displayed value.
Example:
When setting not-displayed value Set "300" to the not-displayed value.
APPENDICES
Not-Displayed Value
300 300 300
200 200
100 100
00 0
1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4
The line connecting 1 to 3 is not displayed.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
INDEX
10.4 Line Graph 10 - 53
10.4.3 Setting items
*1 Clear ON trigger recognition timing
The timing when the GOT recognizes a clear ON trigger is the same as the timing set in "Trigger Type"
(Trigger tab).
When "Sampling", "ON sampling" or "OFF sampling" has been set in "Trigger Type", hold the ON/OFF
status of the device set to clear trigger at the sampling set in "Trigger Type" or longer.
4 Trigger tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting
10 - 54 10.4 Line Graph
10.4.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
9
Items Description A F
Select the trigger for displaying the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) in 1-second unit.
PARTS
Ordinary ON OFF Rise
Fall Sampling Range Multi bit trigger
Trigger Type
The trigger is displayed as follows, when [Locus] is set on the Extended tab. 10
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF sampling] is selected, set the sampling cycle (1 to 3600
seconds) by second.*1
GRAPH, METER
Rise Fall Sampling ON sampling OFF sampling
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
Word Range Trigger When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items.
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
11
ACTIONS
Select the data type of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
Data Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
Range Click on the Range button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
TRIGGER
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used for
Multi Bit
Bit Number the trigger.
Trigger
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their triggers. 12
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
Initial Display
displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be
held even though the trigger is not satisfied.
OUTPUT
Hold Display
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not satisfied.
This setting cannot be set with "Locus".
For details of *1, refer to the following. 13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.4 Line Graph 10 - 55
10.4.3 Setting items
*1 Causes and measures when the graph display is not updated in the set sampling cycle.
(1) Updated timing at setting "ON Sampling" or "OFF sampling"
When "ON sampling" or "OFF sampling" is set, there are cases the graph is not updated in the set
sampling cycle.
The causes for this problem and the measures to be taken are explained below.
(a) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling cycle set in the "Trigger Type".
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is not updated.
(When setting both "Trigger Type" to "On Sampling" and sampling cycle to one second)
one one one
second second second
Sampling cycle set in "Trigger Type"
ON
OFF
Status of the device set in "Trigger Device"
3)
1) 2) 4) 5)
At the timing of 1), the line graph is updated.
At the timing of 2), the line graph is updated.
At the timing of 3), the line graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the line graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device
condition.
At the timing of 5), the line graph is updated.
(b) Measures
The sampling cycle set using the "Trigger Type" is not depending on the status of the device.
(The sampling cycle is not changed even if turning on or off the device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.
1 Set "Rise" or "Fall" using "Trigger Type".
2 Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the display using the
sequence program.
(2) Updated timing when setting the either following sampling cycle, "Sampling", "ON Sampling" or
"OFF Sampling"
If locus display is used when "Sampling", "ON Sampling" or "OFF Sampling" is set, the graph
update timing will differ from the set sampling cycle.
(a) Without setting locus
Counting the sampling cycle is started and reset at the following timing.
At line graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
At security level change
(b) With setting locus
Counting the sampling cycle is started and reset at the following timing.
At starting GOT
At project download
At build-in memory information displaying
At execution of utility setup and message display switching (display language switching)
10 - 56 10.4 Line Graph
10.4.3 Setting items
9
5 Data operation tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
PARTS
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function 10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation 13
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
OTHERS
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR. 14
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.4 Line Graph 10 - 57
10.4.3 Setting items
10.4.4 Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using line graph function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) The maximum number of line graph objects that can be set for one screen.
GOT-A900 series: 32
GOT-F900 series: 1
2 Precautions for the line graph which locus has been set.
(1) Only one object can be set for the whole project.
When the base screen arranged with line graph is multi-displayed in other base screen with the Set
overlay screen function, only the first line graph can be displayed and the second and later will not
be displayed.
(2) The setting is available for the base screen only.
(3) When setting the line graph size, do not exceed the max. size of the overlap window.
Line graph will not be displayed in the area exceeding the max size of the overlap window.
Refer to the following for the max. size of the overlap window.
( 2.1.2 Window screen specifications)
(4) The Overlap Window 2 and the test window ( Section 13.2 Test Function) cannot be
displayed on the base screen arranged with line graph.
(5) The offset function and the station number switching function are not available.
(6) Pay attention to the following when a line graph is overlaid on a shape.
(a) The BMP file pasted to the screen cannot exceed the line graph frame.
Otherwise, the area that is not overlapped in the line graph frame will not be displayed.
Example:
Line graph frame BMP files
for shape
Arrange BMP files in BMP files exceed
the line graph frame the line graph frame.
(b) When using shapes filled with color, arrange the frame of the shape (the boundary line of paint
area) within the line graph frame. Otherwise, the shape will not be painted normally.
(c) Since the shape set in the overlay screen is not displayed, it must be directly placed over and
as the background for the line graph.
(d) Do not use the superimpose window because shapes within the superimpose window will not
be displayed as background.
Example:
Base screen Window screen Set locus display Do not set locus display
10 - 58 10.4 Line Graph
10.4.4 Precautions
9
10.5 Bar Graph
PARTS
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
10
This section explains the function for collecting word device data and displaying them as a bar graph.
GRAPH, METER
D10 100 D10 -200 11
D20 400 D20 200
ACTIONS
D30 200 D30 400
Example
TRIGGER
Change bar display
Extended Tab
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Bar display can be sorted in ascending/descending
order based on the device values
OUTPUT
Sort bar display in deseending order.
13
10.5.1 Required knowledge for bar graph setting
OTHERS
Set the basic function of the bar graph on the following tab, to .
The following example explains the general procedures for setting a bar graph.
Example: Bar graph displaying production quantity of multiple lines
14
Achievement ratio : 0 to 100%
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Production quantity : 0 to 6000
Actual quantity (Line 1) : D10
(Line 2) : D11
(Line 3) : D12
(Line 4) : D13
(Line 5) : D14
The production of each line
6000 (1 to 5)(D10 to 14)
APPENDICES
Scale value
X: Indicates achievement ratio.
Y: Indicates line No.
0
Draws with figure and text.
Upper/Lower limit
Sets production.
INDEX
10.5 Bar Graph 10 - 59
10.5.1 Required knowledge for bar graph setting
1 Basic tab
Set the number of graphs, figure frame (object shape), base value and upper and lower limit values.
Number of graphs (5)
6000
Figure frame
Base value
0
Upper/Lower limit
(Upper limit: 6000, lower limit: 0)
Remark Display of values beyond the upper/lower limit
When a monitor device value exceeds the upper/lower limit, it will be displayed
numerically on the graph.
D13 = 7000
Upper limit: 6000
Lower limit: 0
D11 = 1000
2 Device/Scale tab
Set monitor device, graph color, scale and scale value.
6000
Monitor device (D10, D11, D12, D13, D14)
Graph color
0
Scale (Scale points: 5)
Scale value (Numerical value number: 3)
3 Extended tab
Scale values can be changed on this tab.
6000
Scale value (Upper limit: 100, lower limit: 0)
10 - 60 10.5 Bar Graph
10.5.1 Required knowledge for bar graph setting
10.5.2 Arrangement and settings 9
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
PARTS
Click on [Bar Graph].
Select [Object] [Graph] [Bar Graph] from the menu.
10
2 Click on the position where the bar graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or use ESC key.)
GRAPH, METER
3 Double click on the arranged bar graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
reference to the following explanation.
Easier setting method
11
ACTIONS
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
TRIGGER
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
12
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Object outline frame
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Shape frame
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.5 Bar Graph 10 - 61
10.5.2 Arrangement and settings
10.5.3 Setting items
This dialog box is used in common among three types of graph (line/trend/bar graph).
This section provides the explanations of setting of bar graph.
1 Basic tab
Set the graph type (line/trend/bar graph), number of graphs, upper limit/lower limit/base value and
object shape, i.e., frame.
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Basic Device/Scale Extended
Items Description A F
Select the graph to be set (line graph/trend graph/bar graph).
Graph Type
This section explains the setting for bar graph.
Number of Pens Set the number of graphs (1 to 8) to be displayed.
Points Not available for a bar graph.
Select the setting method of monitor device.
GOT-A900 series: Select either of X direction or Y direction.
View Y direction: X direction:
Format
In the set
Direction Monitor order of
device value the device
In the set order of the device Monitor device value
GOT-F900 series: Select either Y direction (Up/Down) or X direction (Right/Left).
(Continued to next page)
10 - 62 10.5 Bar Graph
10.5.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
9
Basic Device/Scale Extended
Items Description A F
PARTS
Select whether the device value range (Base value, Lower/Upper limit) for the bar graph is
Upper Limit
displayed based on the setting by fixed values or specified device values.
Fixed : Sets the fixed values as the upper limit/lower limit/base values 10
Lower Limit Device : Sets the device values as the upper limit/lower limit/base values.
View
Format ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
GRAPH, METER
The range available for this setting depends on the data format of the device to be monitored. Set
Base Value
the data format in advance (on the Device/Scale tab).
Store Memory Not available for bar graph.
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
11
ACTIONS
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
TRIGGER
Frame
Format Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Frame Plate
12
Plate
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Frame
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
OUTPUT
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.5 Bar Graph 10 - 63
10.5.3 Setting items
2 Device/Scale tab
Set graph display attribute (graph color/scale) and monitor device.
(Example: When setting in GOT-A900 series)
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Basic Device/Scale Extended
Items Description A F
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
In the case of GOT-A900 series
Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
BCD : Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value
Data Type
Real : Treats word device value as floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
In the case of GOT-F900 series
Device Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
When displaying more than two graphs, select the method of setting the device to be monitored in
each graph.
Continue : The device to be monitored in the first graph will be set as the head
device.
Device Settings
The devices will be consecutively assigned to the second and later
graph.
Random : One device to be monitored is set for each graph.
(For A-900 series only)
(Continued to next page)
10 - 64 10.5 Bar Graph
10.5.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
9
Basic Device/Scale Extended
Items Description A F
PARTS
Set the graph attributes.
Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box. Then, make the settings
as follows: 10
Device : Enter the word device name here, or click on the Dev button and
select a word device from the given options to set the word device for
GRAPH, METER
monitoring. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Display Attribute Graph Color : Select the graph color.
Device
View Pattern : Select the filling pattern of the graph.
Background : Select the background color of the graph.
Example: Pattern + Graph 11
ACTIONS
BG :
Pattern :
Graph : BG
TRIGGER
Set the scale and scale values to the bar graph.
100 100
Scale Style 50 50
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
0 0
Scale points = 5 Scale value = 3 Scale is displayed in combination
with scale value
OUTPUT
Check this item to display the scale.
After checking, set the number of horizontal and vertical scale points (GOT-A900 series: 0, 2 to11;
Scale
GOT-F900 series: 0, 2 to 50) and the scale color.
Once this is set, the space between the scale ticks are automatically defined.
13
Check this item to display the scale by using numeric values.
Set the number of numeric values (0, 2 to 11) in [Value Number], the color of numeric display in
[Color] and the numeric size (0.5 to 8) in [Size].
Scale Value
OTHERS
The default numeric values are set within the range from -100 to 100.
When changing the numeric value, set the upper limit/lower limit values for the scale value on the
extended tab.
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.5 Bar Graph 10 - 65
10.5.3 Setting items
3 Extended tab
Set the security level, offset and upper/lower limit of the scale values.
Check Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
Basic Extended
Device/Scale
Device/Scale Extended Trigger
Trigger Data Operation
Data Operation
Basic Device/Scale Others
Items Description A F
Check this item to display the frame, i.e., shape for the graph.
Rectangle frame
Rectangle Frame
Before changing a scale value, set the upper/lower limit values.
Upper Example: Changes lower limit of scale value.
Upper 100 100
Scale Sets lower limit of the
scale value to "0"
Value
0 50
Lower
Changes
automatically
Lower -100 0
Scale Position Select the position (left, right, up, down) for displaying scale.
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Data length is fixed to 16 bits.
(Continued to next page)
10 - 66 10.5 Bar Graph
10.5.3 Setting items
Basic Extended
Device/Scale
Device/Scale Extended Trigger
Trigger Data Operation
Data Operation
9
Basic Device/Scale Others
Items Description A F
PARTS
Set the graph width (1 to 500 dots) of the bar graph to be displayed.
The graph width includes the 1 dot on the boundary line (Vertical bar: Left side, Horizontal bar:
Upper side) 10
Graph Width
GRAPH, METER
Boundary line (1 dot) Boundary line (1 dot)
11
Graph width: including the boundary line
Set the space between graph OP and the selected position to edit text in bar graph that is near the
ACTIONS
OP (1 to 100 dots).
Distance from Graph Frame
TRIGGER
(Offset)
Distance from
graph frame
Distance from graph frame
12
Set the space between bar graphs (including graph width) (1 to 500 dots).
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Vertical graph Horizontal graph
Width + Space
OUTPUT
Space (including
Sorting the bars. 13
Select the sorting type and check the corresponding check box.
None : Sort is invalid. (Bars are displayed in the device setting order.)
Ascending : Arrange from small value to large value.
Descending : Arrange from large value to small value.
OTHERS
[Ascending]
Y direction X direction
Sort
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
[Descending]
Y direction X direction
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.5 Bar Graph 10 - 67
10.5.3 Setting items
4 Trigger tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the trigger for displaying the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) in 1-second unit.
Trigger Type
Ordinary ON OFF Rise
Fall Sampling Range Bit Trigger
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
Word Range Trigger When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items.
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type of the word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
Date Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
Range Click on the Range button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used for
Multi Bit
Bit Number the triggers.
Trigger
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their triggers.
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
Initial Display
displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be
Hold Display held even though the trigger is not satisfied.
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not satisfied.
10 - 68 10.5 Bar Graph
10.5.3 Setting items
9
5 Data operation tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
PARTS
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function 10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
OTHERS
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation. 14
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.5 Bar Graph 10 - 69
10.5.3 Setting items
10.5.4 Precautions
This section provides the precautions when using the bar graph function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) The maximum number of bar graph objects settable on one screen
GOT-A900 series: up to 256
GOT-F900 series: up to 50
10 - 70 10.5 Bar Graph
10.5.4 Precautions
9
10.6 Statistics Graph
PARTS
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
10
The statistics pie/bar graph shows the data ratio of multiple word devices to the total data value.
GRAPH, METER
1 Statistics pie graph
11
ACTIONS
D10 33 D10 12
D20 33 D20 76
D30 34 D30 12
TRIGGER
2 Statistics bar graph
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
D10 33 D10 12
D20 33 D20 76
D30 34 D30 12
13
Application example
Sorting the corresponding graph sections according to
Displaying the graph with the data list on one screen
device values
OTHERS
Section 7.2 Data List Set in Extended Tab
No. Ma. name Target vol. Prod. vol.
1 Ma. 1 5000 2000 14
2 Ma. 2 5000 1200
SCRIPT FUNCTION
3 Ma. 3 5000 1000
The sections are sorted in the ascending/descending
Device status can be displayed more effectively by
order of device values.
including the line graph legend.
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.6 Statistics Graph 10 - 71
10.6.1 Required knowledge for statistics graph setting
The following to tabs can be used for setting statistics graph basic function.
The procedure for setting the statistics graph is shown as follows.
Example: Statistics pie graph displaying the production ratio by model
Type A : D10
Type B : D11
Type C : D12
Production ratio by model
0
Scale value
75 25 Display scale value
50
1 Basic tab
It is to set the graph type, division number (number of divided sections) and shape.
Graph type, division number
0
66.7 33.3 Shape
2 Device/Scale tab
It is to set the monitor device, graph color, scale and scale value.
Device (D10, D11, D12)
0
Graph color
Scale (scale number: 4)
75 25
50 Scale value (value number: 4)
10 - 72 10.6 Statistics Graph
10.6.1 Required knowledge for statistics graph setting
10.6.2 Arrangement and settings 9
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
PARTS
Click on [Statistics Pie Graph/Statistics Bar Graph].
Select [Object] [Graph] [Statistics Pie Graph]/[Statistics Bar Graph] from the menu.
10
2 Click on the position where the statistics graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
GRAPH, METER
3 Double click on the arranged statistics graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
reference to the following explanation.
Easier setting method
11
ACTIONS
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
4
TRIGGER
12
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Object outline frame
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Shape frame
OUTPUT
Section 5.3.3 Object size change
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.6 Statistics Graph 10 - 73
10.6.2 Arrangement and settings
10.6.3 Setting items
1 Basic tab
It is to set the graph type (statistics bar graph, statistics pie graph), division number (number of divided
sections) and shape.
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Basic Device/Scale
Items Description A F
Graph Type Select the statistics graph type (statistics bar graph/statistics pie graph).
Set the number of word devices to be monitored
Division Number GOT-A900 series : 2 to 32 word devices
GOT-F900 series: 1 to 8 word devices
Select the setting direction of device to be set in [Statistics Bar Graph].
GOT-A900 series
Up Down Right Left
D12 D10
D11 D11
Direction D10 D12 D10 D11 D12 D12 D11 D10
GOT-F900 series
Up Right
D12
D11
D10 D10 D11 D12
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Frame
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
Format
selected.
( Section 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
(Continued to next page)
10 - 74 10.6 Statistics Graph
10.6.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
9
Basic Device/Scale
Items Description A F
PARTS
Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Frame
Plate
Frame 10
Format Frame
Plate
GRAPH, METER
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
2 Device/Scale tab 11
ACTIONS
It is to set monitor device and graph display attribute (graph color, scale).
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series) 14
Device/Scale
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Basic Extended Trigger Data Operation
Basic Device/Scale
Items Description A F
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
In the case of GOT-A900 series
Signed BIN : Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
APPENDICES
Unsigned BIN : Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Device BCD : Treats the word device value as a BCD (binary decimal) value.
Data Type
Real : Treats the word device value as a floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
In the case of GOT-F900 series
Signed BIN : Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value.
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
10.6 Statistics Graph 10 - 75
10.6.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Basic Device/Scale
Items Description A F
Select the method of setting the device to be monitored.
Device
Continuous : Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections continuously.
Settings
Random : Set the devices as many as the number of divided sections randomly.
Set the graph attributes.
Click on each item of the list in [Device] to display the setting dialog box. Then, make the settings
as follows:
Device : Enter the word device name here, or click on the Dev button and
select a word device from the given options to set the word device for
Device monitoring. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Display Graph Color : Select the graph color.
Attribute List Pattern : Select the filling pattern of the graph. (for GOT-A900 series only)
BackGround : Select the background color of the graph. (for GOT-A900 series only)
Pattern + Graph color
Example: BG :
Pattern :
Graph color :
BG color
Set the scale and scale value of statistics graph.
Example:
0 0
Scale Style 75 25 75 25
50 50
Scale points: 8 Scale value: 4 Combined display of
scale and scale value
Check this item to display the scale.
After checking, set the number of scale points (GOT-A900 series: 2 to11, GOT-F900 series: 0, 2
Scale
to 50) and the scale color.
Once this is set, the space between each scale tick is automatically defined.
Check this item to display the scale numerically.
Scale Value After checking, set the number of numeric values (2 to 11) in [Value Number], numeric color in
[Color] and numeric size (0.5 to 8) in [Size].
10 - 76 10.6 Statistics Graph
10.6.3 Setting items
9
3 Extended tab (For GOT-A900 series only)
Set the security, offset and the order displaying graphs (sort).
Check the Extended Function at the bottom of dialog box to display this tab.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
Extended
OUTPUT
Basic Device/Scale Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15). 13
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
OTHERS
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
14
Data length is fixed to 16 bits.
Sorting the graph sections.
Select the sorting type and check the corresponding check box. SCRIPT FUNCTION
None : Sort is invalid. (Graph sections are displayed in the device setting order.)
Ascending : Arrange from small value to large value.
Descending : Arrange from large value to small value.
[Ascending]
Bar graph Pie graph
Sort
APPENDICES
[Descending]
Bar graph Pie graph
INDEX
10.6 Statistics Graph 10 - 77
10.6.3 Setting items
4 Trigger tab (For GOT-A900 series only)
Set conditions for displaying the object, i.e., trigger.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of trigger, refer to the following.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select trigger for displaying the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) in 1-second unit.
Trigger Type
Ordinary ON OFF Rise
Fall Sampling Range Bit Trigger
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
Word Range Trigger When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items.
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type of word device (Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real).
Data Type
Real can be set only if [32bit] is selected in [Data Size].
Range Click on the Range button and set conditional expression for the word device range.
When [Bit Trigger] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the number of bit devices (2 to 8) to be used for
Multi Bit
Bit Number the trigger.
Trigger
After setting, click on the Setting button and set the bit devices and their triggers.
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
Initial Display
displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
When [ON] or [OFF] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object display needs to be
Hold Display held even though the trigger is not satisfied.
If not checked, the object will be deleted when the trigger is not satisfied
10 - 78 10.6 Statistics Graph
10.6.3 Setting items
9
5 Data operation tab (For GOT-A900 series only)
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
PARTS
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function 10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
Basic Device/Scale Extended Trigger Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
OTHERS
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
OR :Carries out logical OR. 14
Bit Operation
XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.6 Statistics Graph 10 - 79
10.6.3 Setting items
10.6.4 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using statistics graph function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Maximum number of statistics graph objects settable on one screen
GOT-A900 series: 32
GOT-F900 series: 1
(2) Precautions in using the F920GOT-K
The statistics graph function is not provided in the F920GOT-K.
2 Precautions for use
(1) For statistic graph, the absolute value is displayed when monitor device value is a negative
number.
Example: When D101 is " 30"
D100=20 D101=-30 D102=50
0 20 40 60 80 100
Display "30"
(2) Filling circle graph with graph color
When one device value of a circle graph is extremely smaller than the entire graph, the graph may
not be filled with the graph color correctly.
Centerline
Enlarged Centerline
Not filled with graph color.
10 - 80 10.6 Statistics Graph
10.6.4 Precautions
9
10.7 Scatter Graph
PARTS
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
10
By taking the values of 2 word devices as X and Y coordinates, a corresponding point is displayed on the
graph.
GRAPH, METER
1 Sample
Two word device values are collected, and then displayed as a point on the graph.
This graph is updated to the new one with the previously displayed point(s) remained. (Locus)
11
(50, 300) (300, 200) (200, 100)
ACTIONS
X device: D100 400 400 400
Y device: D200 300 300 300
200 200 200
TRIGGER
100 100 100
0 0 0
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300
12
2 Batch
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Multiple data of 2 word device values are collected together and displayed as corresponding points.
When refreshing the data, the previously displayed point(s) can be either kept or erased depending on
OUTPUT
the setting selection.
X device: D100
400
300
400
300
400
300
13
D109 200 200 200
Y device: D200 100 100 100
0 0 0
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300
D209
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 81
10.7.1 Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
1 Setting method of scatter graph
Set basic function of the scatter graph on the following tabs to .
The following example explains the general setting procedure.
Example: A scatter graph to display power consumption and temperature during line operation
Digital output range for temperature : 0 to 600
Digital output range for power consumption : 0 to 10000
Power consumption variation range : 0 to 5000W
Temperature variation range : -10 to 50
Conversion value (Digital output value of temperature) : D100
Conversion value (Digital output value of power consumption): D200
Monitor conversion value
X: D100 (temperature digital output value)
10000 5000 Y: D200 (power consumption digital output value)
Display attribute
2500 Switch according to operation mode.
Operation mode A: , operation mode B:
0
0 -10 20 50 Scale value
Vertical : Indicates power consumption
0 600 Horizontal: Indicates temperature
Upper limit/lower limit
X: Indicates temperature digital output range
Y: Indicates power consumption digital output range
1 Basic tab
Set the graph type, upper/lower limit values and object shapes.
Graph type (sample)
10000
Points
(Fixed to 1 when graph type is sample)
0 Object shape, i.e., frame
0 600
Upper/lower limit for X
(Upper limit: 600, lower limit: 0)
Upper/lower limit for Y
(Upper limit: 10000, lower limit: 0)
Remark Display of values beyond the upper/lower limit
When a value of the monitored device exceeds the upper or lower limit, it will be
displayed numerically on the graph.
(800, 11000)
Upper limit: 10000
Lower limit: 0
Lower limit: 0 Upper limit: 600
(-1000, -1500)
10 - 82 10.7 Scatter Graph
10.7.1 Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
9
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the monitor devices, scale, and scale values.
10000 100
Monitor device (X: D10, Y: D11)
PARTS
0 Scale
(Scale points Horizontal: 7, Vertical: 5)
0
-100
-100 0 100 10
Scale value
0 600 (Value number Horizontal: 3, Vertical: 3)
: Default value (Upper limit: 100, Lower limit: -100)
GRAPH, METER
is displayed
Can be changed in extended tab.
3 Attribute tab
Set the type (point/line) of graph display attribute. 11
ACTIONS
Display attribute (point)
10000 100 : Select either of point or line.
Point
0
TRIGGER
Straight line
-100
0 -100 0 100
0 600 12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
4 Trigger tab
Set the graph display method.
OUTPUT
Switch display attribute : Make setting on this to change the display attribute set in according
to the condition of a specified switching device.
Data collection timing : Set the sampling of data to 600 seconds in this case. 13
The default value is set to 1 second.
Attribute switch (bit, switching device: M10)
10000
: Switch between 2 types of display attributes
Set display attribute in the following [ON/OFF attribute].
OTHERS
ON/OFF attribute (ON: OFF: )
0 : Set display attribute when M10 is ON or OFF.
14
0 600
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Point is displayed as. Point is displayed as
when M10 is ON. when M10 is OFF.
5 Extended tab
Change the scale values.
10000 5000
APPENDICES
2500
0
0 -10 20 50 Scale value
Upper limit (Horizontal: 50, Vertical: 5000)
0 600 Lower limit (Horizontal: -10, Vertical: 1)
INDEX
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 83
10.7.1 Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
2 Store memory
Check the store memory before collecting data after the screen has been switched to another.
Be sure to save device values into the internal memory of GOT.
The contents stored in the memory will be erased in the case of GOT reset or power OFF.
The setting for Store Memory is made on the Extended tab.
When no setting is made for Store Memory, the scatter graph executes data collection only when
displaying the screen with the graph arranged. If switched to other screen, the collected data will be
cleared.
Example: Screen switching operation
Graph type [Sample], X-device: D100, Y-device: D101
Store memory
100
Device value 50
D100 50 0
0 50 100
Device value changes
D101 50
D100 50 100 0 Base screen 1
Display both the device value (before being
100 D101 50 25 100 switched to other screen) and the device value
50 in the display of other screen.
0
0 50 100
Switch to Display base
and display screen 1 again. Do not store memory
Base screen 1
base screen 5
100
50
0
Production menu 0 50 100
Line 1
Line 2
Base screen 1
Only graph display current device value
Base screen 5 after collecting and displaying new data.
(1) The maximum sampling results which can be stored in the memory
Up to 2000 points displayed in scatter graph can be saved in the internal memory.
The following shows the upper limit for each graph type of the scatter graph (sample, batch).
Sample 2000 times
2000
Batch times (Round off the part after decimal point)
Points
For the case that the number of displayed points exceed 2000, make setting for [Operation at
frequency over time] on the Extended tab.
Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts data collection
Initialize and continue . . . Clears the internal memory, erase the scatter graph display and
collects data again.
Displaying an error message when the sampling number reaches the maximum
An error message can be displayed when the storage sampling number has
reached the maximum.
( Section 8.1 User Alarm Display)
10 - 84 10.7 Scatter Graph
10.7.1 Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
(2) Conditions for when the stored memory data is erased 9
(a) When the clear trigger condition is satisfied
(b) When the number of sampling data available for storage in memory exceeds the maximum
(c) (Only when setting [Operation at frequency over time] to [Initialize and continue])
PARTS
(d) When GOT is reset or power supply is turned OFF
(e) Download of project
10
(f) Display of build-in memory information
(g) Execution of utility setup and message display switching (display language switching)
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 85
10.7.1 Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
3 Accumulate/Average
The accumulation frequency and the average/maximum/minimum of the data collected in the scatter
graph can be written to devices.
Example: X-device: D100, Y-device: D200
400 400 400 400 Value that has been
300 300 300 300 Contents to be written
200 200 200 200 written
100 100 100 100
0 0 0 0 Accumulation
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300 4
Frequency
D100 50 300 200 250
D200 250 200 100 200 Average Value 200
X Maximum 300
Minimum 50
Average Value 187
Y Maximum 250
Minimum 100
Remark (1) Average value
(a) The fractions below the decimal point of the average value are rounded off.
If the data type (set on the Device/Scale tab) of the monitor device is real,
however, fractions below the decimal point will be written.
(b) Since the average value is calculated on the basis of the average values of
every sampling, it is probable to have an error.
(2) Maximum and minimum values
When the value of the monitor device exceeds the upper or lower limit of the
scatter graph, the upper or lower limit value will be written as the maximum or
minimum accordingly.
(1) Upper limit of sampling number available for accumulation frequency/average value
The upper limit of the sampling number that can be counted as accumulation frequency/average
value varies according to the data type (set on the Device/Scale tab) of the monitor device.
[Data Type of Monitor Device]
Unsigned BIN, Signed BIN, Real, BCD (32 bit) : 65535
BCD (16 bit) : 9999
When the accumulation frequency exceeds the upper limit, please set the operation in [Operation at
frequency over time] of the extended tab.
Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts the sampling of data.
Initialize and continue. . . . . Initializes the value of the accumulation frequency, and then recollects
data.
Displaying an error message when the accumulation frequency value exceeds the
upper limit
When the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit, an error message
can be displayed in the alarm list (system alarm).
( Section 8.1 User Alarm Display)
10 - 86 10.7 Scatter Graph
10.7.1 Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
(2) Initialization timing of accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum
9
Value "0" is written to the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum in the
following timing.
(a) When the conditions for the clear trigger (set in the Trigger tab) are satisfied
PARTS
(b) When the accumulation frequency value exceeds the upper limit
(Only when setting [Operation at frequency over time] to [Initialize and continue])
(c) When switching the screen
10
When switching the screen (base screen, window screen) with scatter graph arranged
When switching the screen with scatter graph arranged to other screens, the current
GRAPH, METER
accumulation frequency/average value will be held. However, when the screen is switched
back to the previous screen, the data will be initialized.
When switching the base screen
The scatter graph arranged in superimpose window will be initialized when the base screen 11
is switched over.
ACTIONS
(d) When the security level is changed
(e) When the station number is changed
TRIGGER
Remark Executing "the accumulation frequency/average value write" and the "store memory"
simultaneously 12
If the "accumulation frequency/average value" and "store memory" are used
EXTERNAL INPUT/
simultaneously, the data of accumulation frequency/average value will still be
collected even when the screen is switched to others.
OUTPUT
However, accumulation frequency/average value can be written until the time that
the sampling number for store memory reaches the maximum.
Refer to the following for the maximum sampling number of store memory. 13
This section Store memory
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 87
10.7.1 Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
10.7.2 Arrangement and settings
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
Click on [Scatter Graph].
Select [Object] [Graph] [Scatter Graph] from the menu.
2 Click on the position where the scatter graph is to be located to complete the arrangement.
(After arrangement, release the arrangement mode by right-clicking the mouse or using ESC key.)
3 Double click on the arranged scatter graph to display the setting dialog box. Make the settings with
reference to the following explanation.
Easier setting method
Using the property sheet enables direct on-screen object setting.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
4
Remark Method of adjusting objects in which figure frame is set D10
Adjust the display position of object and the shape
Object outline frame
after enabling [Edit Touch Area/Frame Region].
Shape frame
5.3.3 Object size change
10 - 88 10.7 Scatter Graph
10.7.2 Arrangement and settings
10.7.3 Setting items 9
1 Basic tab
Set the graph type, upper limit/lower limit and shape.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
Basic
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Device/Scale Attribute Case/Trigger Case Extended Data Operation
Items Description A F
OUTPUT
Graph Type Select the graph type (sample/batch).
Points Set the points (2 to 500) to be displayed in the graph of [Batch].
Select how to update the graph display of [Batch].
13
Mode Replacement : Only displays the graph of the latest data.
Locus : Displays the latest data with the previous displayed graph overlapped.
Select whether to set the range (upper limit/lower limit of X/Y) of device displayed in scatter graph
View
OTHERS
in fixed value or in the value of the specified device.
Format Fixed : Set a fixed value to the upper limit/lower limit.
X: Upper Limit/
Lower Limit Device : Set a device value as the upper limit /lower limit.
Y: Upper Limit/ ( Section 5.1 Device Setting) 14
Lower Limit The range of the upper limit/lower limit that can be set depends on the data type of the monitor
device.
Set the data type (set in the Device/Scale tab) in advance. SCRIPT FUNCTION
Set a frame for the object.
When [None] is selected, no frame will be displayed.
Shape By clicking on the Others button, figures other than those in the list box or library figures can be
selected.
( 5.3.2 Object shape setting)
Frame Select the shape, i.e., frame/plate color.
Format Frame Color Plate color
APPENDICES
Plate Color
Frame color
When allocating category to the object, select a proper category.
Category
( GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual)
INDEX
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 89
10.7.3 Setting items
2 Device/Scale tab
Set the devices to be monitored and the scale displayed in the graph.
Basic Device/Scale Attribute Case/Trigger Case Extended Data Operation
Items Description A F
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Data Type
Real : Treats word device value as floating point type real number.
BCD : Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value.
Device (Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
Select the setting method for monitoring devices when [Batch] is used.
Continue : The device to be monitored at the first point in the graph will be set as
Device Settings
the head device.
Random : Devices to be monitored are set at random.
X-Device/ Input the device directly for each of X and Y axes, or click on the button to set the monitor
Y-Device word device. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Set the scale and scale values for the scatter graph.
Example:
100 100
Scale Style 50 50
0
0
0 50 100 0 50 100
Scale display Scale value display Combine the scale display
(X:5, Y:5) (X:3, Y:3) and scale value display
Check this item to display the scale.
Scale After checking, set the number of scale points (i.e. tick marks) (2 to11) and the scale color.
Once this is set, the space between each scale tick is automatically defined.
Check this item to display the scale by using numeric values.
Set the number of numeric values (2 to 11) in [Value Number], the color in [Color] and numeric size
(0.5 to 8) in [Size].
Scale Value
The default numeric values for both X and Y axes are set within the range from -100 to 100.
When changing the numeric values, set the upper limit/lower limit values for the scale value in the
extended tab.
10 - 90 10.7 Scatter Graph
10.7.3 Setting items
9
3 Attribute tab
Set the display attribute (type of point/line) of scatter graph.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic Device/Scale Attribute Case/Trigger Case Extended Data Operation
Items Description A F
13
Display Attribute Select the display attribute (point/line) of scatter graph.
Fixed Attribute Set display attribute for the case that [Fixed] is selected for [Attribute Switching] on the Trigger tab.
Select the type of the point/line that indicates coordinate position.
OTHERS
Type of point :
Type Type of line : 14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
When the line is set to a type other than the solid line, it may not be displayed properly if it is
positioned close to other point/line.
Size Select the size of the point (large, medium, small)/line (1 to 7).
Color Select the display color of the point/line.
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 91
10.7.3 Setting items
4 Case/Trigger tab
Set the display attribute switching of scatter graph, updating of graph display and timing of erasure.
Basic Device/Scale Attribute Case/Trigger Case Extended Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the switching display attributes for the scatter graph (type, size and color of point/line)
Fixed : The display attribute is not switched.
The display attribute set on the Attribute tab is used.
Bit : The display attribute is switched depending on the bit device conditions
ON/OFF.
Signed BIN16 : The display attribute is switched between multiple settings depending
on the word device value (16-bit binary value).
BCD16 : The display attribute is switched between multiple settings depending
on the word device (16-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)).
When [Bit] is selected, set the display attribute in [ON/OFF Attribute] of this tab.
When [Signed BIN16] or [BCD16] is selected, set it on the Case tab.
Example1: Attribute switching: [Bit], Switching device: M10
Attribute Switching
M10: ON M10: OFF
Points are Points are
displayed as . displayed as .
Example2: Attribute switching: [Signed BIN16], Switching device: D10
D10 = 1 D10 = 10 D10 < 100
Points are Points are Points are
displayed as . displayed as . displayed as .
Set the device for display switching.
Switching Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
(Continued to next page)
10 - 92 10.7 Scatter Graph
10.7.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Attribute Case/Trigger Case Extended Data Operation
9
Items Description A F
ON/OFF Attribute Set the display attribute for ON/OFF statuses of the display-switching bit device.
PARTS
Select the type of the point/line that indicates coordinate position.
Type of point :
10
Type Type of line :
GRAPH, METER
When the line is set to a type other than the solid line, it may not be displayed properly if it is
positioned close to other point/line.
Size Select the size of the point (large, medium, small) /line (1 to 7).
Color Select the display color of the point/line. 11
ACTIONS
Select the trigger for displaying the object.
When [Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds) in 1-second unit.
Display Trigger
( Section 5.5 Trigger Setting)
Type*1
TRIGGER
Sampling Fall OFF sampling
Rise ON sampling
Display Trigger
Device
Specify the device used for the trigger.
12
When [Rise] or [Fall] is selected in [Trigger Type], check this item if the object needs to be
Initial Display
EXTERNAL INPUT/
displayed only at the initial time after screen switching even though the trigger is not satisfied.
Trigger Check this item to set the trigger for erasing the display of graphs.
OUTPUT
After checking, select the timing of erasing graph display.
Rise : Erases the graph at rise (turns ON) of bit device.
Clear Trigger*2
Fall : Erases the graph at fall (turns OFF) of bit device.
The clear trigger will clear graph display stored in memory and the accumulation frequency/ 13
average value.
Assigning a device to function as a clear trigger.
Clear Trigger ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Device When the trigger type is set to [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling], make sure to hold
OTHERS
the clear trigger device status for more than the sampling cycle set in [Trigger Type].
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 93
10.7.3 Setting items
*1 Causes and measures when the graph display is not updated in the set sampling cycle.
(1) Updated timing at setting "ON Sampling" or "OFF sampling"
When "ON Sampling" or "OFF Sampling" is set, there are cases the graph is not updated in the set
sampling cycle.
The causes for this problem and the measures to be taken are explained below.
(a) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling cycle set in the "Trigger Type".
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is not updated.
(When setting both "Trigger Type" to "On Sampling" and sampling cycle to one second)
one one one
second second second
Sampling cycle set in "Trigger Type"
ON
OFF
Status of the device set in "Trigger Device"
3)
1) 2) 4) 5)
At the timing of 1), the scatter graph is updated.
At the timing of 2), the scatter graph is updated.
At the timing of 3), the scatter graph is not updated because is unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the scatter graph is not updated because is unmatchable to the device
condition.
At the timing of 5), the scatter graph is updated.
(b) Measures
The sampling cycle set using the "Trigger Type" is not depending on the status of the device.
(The sampling cycle is not changed even if turning on or off the device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.
1 Set "Rise" or "Fall" using "Trigger Type".
2 Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the display using the
sequence program.
(2) Updated timing when setting the either following sampling cycle, "Sampling", "ON Sampling" or
"OFF Sampling"
If store memory is used when "Sampling", "ON Sampling" or "OFF Sampling" is set, the graph
update timing will differ from the set sampling cycle.
(a) Without setting store memory
Counting the sampling cycle is started and reset at the following timing.
At scatter graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security level change etc.)
At security level change
(b) With setting store memory
Counting the sampling cycle is started and reset at the following timing.
At starting GOT
At project download
At build-in memory information displaying
At execution of utility setup and message display switching (display language switching)
10 - 94 10.7 Scatter Graph
10.7.3 Setting items
*2 Clear ON trigger recognition timing 9
The timing when the GOT recognizes a clear ON trigger is the same as the timing set in "Trigger Type"
(Trigger tab).
When "Sampling", "ON sampling" or "OFF sampling" has been set in "Trigger Type", hold the ON/OFF
status of the device set to clear trigger at the sampling set in "Trigger Type" or longer.
PARTS
Example of holding the display for the sampling period set by [Display Trigger Type] or longer 10
Clear Trigger : Set rise timing and M10 for the device
Display Trigger Type : Set to sampling (3 s)
GRAPH, METER
Touch Switch : Set M10 for the device, bit momentary for Action and 4 s for OFF Delay
The condition of [Display Trigger Type]: Sampling (3 s) is met after pressing touch switch until the clear
trigger (M10) turns off by the OFF Delay (4 s), and the graph is erased.
11
ACTIONS
400 400
300 300
200 200
100 100
TRIGGER
0 0
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300
12
Touch the switch set for The graph displaed previously
the clear trigger erased.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Erase
the graph
13
Sampling OFF delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)
(3 s)
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 95
10.7.3 Setting items
5 Case tab
Set the attributes according to the state of device state condition.
This tab will be displayed only when [Attribute Switching] of the Trigger tab is set to [Signed BIN16] or
[BCD16].
Refer to the following for details of state.
Section 5.4 State Setting
Basic Device/Scale Attribute Case/Trigger Case Extended Data Operation
Items Description A F
Make the setting for display conditions and object display for each state.
State*1 Up to 64 states can be set (including the normal case).
(State No. 0 indicates the normal case)
New State Creates a new state.
Delete State Deletes a specified state.
Previous/Next Switches the currently editing state to the previous or next state.
Up/Down Changes the priority of the current state.
Displays the list of preset states.
Select State
Selecting any state from the list can make it active on the tab.
Range Set the range of word device values for display change using a conditional expression.
Select the type of the point/line that indicates coordinate position.
Type of point :
Type Type of line :
When the line is set to a type other than the solid line, it may not be displayed properly if it is
positioned close to other point/line.
Size Select the size of the point (large, medium, small) /line (1 to 7).
Color Select the display color of the point/line.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
10 - 96 10.7 Scatter Graph
10.7.3 Setting items
*1 State
9
(1) Display for condition other than those set on the Case tab
When the state is in condition other than those set on the Case tab, it is displayed with the display
attribute set on the Basic tab.
PARTS
(2) Display when conditions are overlapped
When conditions are overlapped, a state with smaller No. has priority. 10
Example: Graph type: Sample,
Switching device: D10
GRAPH, METER
Operation priority
for setting overlap State No. Display range Type Size Color
condition.
High 1 8<=$V<=12 Big White
11
ACTIONS
2 13<=$V<=18 Small Black
Normal case
Low Big Black
(State 0)
TRIGGER
*$V indicates the value of the monitor device.
When the value of the switching device is between 8 and
12 (8<=$V<=12), it will appear as big white quadrangle 40
30
12
( ).
State 1 20
10
EXTERNAL INPUT/
0
0 10 20 30 40
OUTPUT
When the value of the switching device is between 13 and
18, it will appear as small black triangle ( ). 40
30 13
State 2 20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40
OTHERS
When other conditions except for the conditions of state 1
to 3 happen, it will appear as big black circle ( ). 40
Normal case
30
20
14
(State 0) 10
0
SCRIPT FUNCTION
0 10 20 30 40
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 97
10.7.3 Setting items
6 Extended tab
This tab allows the following attributes to be set:
Scale values, security, offset, and the write of collection data's accumulation data.
When the Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box is checked, the tab is displayed.
Basic Device/Scale Attribute Case/Trigger Case Extended Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item to display the frame, i.e., shape for the graph.
Graph frame
Rectangle Frame
When changing a scale value, set the upper/lower limit values.
Set the scale value for vertical (Y axis) and/or horizontal (X axis) line.
Upper Example: Change the upper limit scale value on Y
Upper limit 100 100
Scale
Value 0 Change the scale value 0
of the horizontal axis
Upper limit: "100" to "200"
Lower Lower limit -100 -100
-100 0 100 -100 50 200
Lower limit Upper limit
Changed automatically
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Offset After checking, set the offset device.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
This setting cannot be set with "Store Memory" (Extended tab).
(Continued to next page)
10 - 98 10.7 Scatter Graph
10.7.3 Setting items
Basic Device/Scale Attribute Case/Trigger Case Extended Data Operation
9
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable data collection during display of the screen without a scatter graph.
Store Memory
Data of the points displayed in the graph are stored in the internal memory of GOT.
PARTS
Check this item when setting the not-displayed value for X and/or Y of the scatter graph.
Example: [0] is set as not-displayed value for X and Y
Not-displayed Not-displayed 10
value value
400 400
(0, 400)
Value not displayed 300 300
(0, 400)
(50, 0) (50, 0)
GRAPH, METER
200 200
100 100
0 0
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300
Graph of [Point] Graph of [Line]
Select the operation when the following functions exceed the maximum sampling number.
Store memory : When exceeding the maximum display points (2000 points).
11
ACTIONS
Accumulation frequency : When accumulation frequency exceeds 65535/average
value/maximum/minimum (9999).
Operation at frequency over
Interrupt : Interrupts the data collection, and does not update the graph
time
TRIGGER
display.
Initialize and Continue : After erasing the graph display and initializing the memory
and accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/
minimum, continues data collection. 12
Check this item when the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum of collected
data needs to be written into devices.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Not-displayed value set in the scatter graph display is not included.
Set the writing interval of the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum into
Accumulate/Average
OUTPUT
device by specifying the number of update times.
While the accumulation frequency/average value/maximum/minimum is written, the display of
objects will be delayed, if the interval of the store memory and trigger is short. In this case, set a
long Write interval. 13
Set the head bit device to which the accumulation frequency/average value is written.
According to the data size (16bit/32bit) of the monitor device, the device range varies as follows.
Example: The device that has been set: n
OTHERS
When setting 16 bit When setting 32 bit
Write contents
(using 7 word) (using 14 word)
14
Accumulation frequency n n, n+1
Device
Average value n+1 n + 2, n+3
SCRIPT FUNCTION
X Maximum n+2 n + 4, n+5
Minimum n+3 n + 6, n+7
Average value n+4 n + 8, n+9
Y Maximum n+5 n + 10, n + 11
Minimum n+6 n + 12, n + 13
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 99
10.7.3 Setting items
7 Data operation tab
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by computing the device values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom of the
dialog box.
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function
Basic Device/Scale Attribute Case/Trigger Case Extended Data Operation
Items Description A F
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern].
Bit Mask
AND :Carries out logical AND.
Bit OR :Carries out logical OR.
Operation XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
10 - 100 10.7 Scatter Graph
10.7.3 Setting items
10.7.4 Precautions 9
This section provides the precautions for using the scatter graph function.
1 Precautions for drawing
PARTS
(1) The maximum number of scatter graph objects settable on one screen
GOT-A900 series: 24 10
(2) When using store memory
GRAPH, METER
For the scatter graph with [Store Memory] set, up to 16 graph objects can be set in a whole project.
(3) Precautions when displaying superimpose window
Set the superimpose window not to overlap with a scatter graph. 11
ACTIONS
The scatter graph area where the superimpose window is overlapped is not displayed.
Setting [Store Memory] enables full display of the scatter graph in such a case.
TRIGGER
12
Superimpose
window Base screen Scatter graph is not The area overlapping with
EXTERNAL INPUT/
displayed fully when superimpose window is also
[Store Memory] is not set. displayed when [Store Memory] is set.
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.7 Scatter Graph 10 - 101
10.7.4 Precautions
10.8 Sampling
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
It is the function to collect PLC word device value according to clock function built-in GOT in a certain cycle
or when the bit device turns ON/OFF.
The sampling results can be displayed in list or graph format on GOT.
They can be read to GT Designer2 and then stored into FD, or edited on PC as text data.
They can be printed using the printer that is connected to GOT.
Displayed by
graph and list
Upload
Trigger/Sampling
D100 First time
Second time Saved to FD
Edited as text data
Third time
Fourth time
Fifth time
10.8.1 Settings
1 Select [Common] [Sampling] from the menu.
2 As the setting dialog box is displayed, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
Remark When setting in the project workspace
The setting dialog box will be displayed by double clicking on in the
project workspace.
10 - 102 10.8 Sampling
10.8.1 Settings
10.8.2 Setting items 9
Set the sampling function.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Items Description A F
OUTPUT
Use sampling Check this item to use sampling function.
Device
Set the device to be monitored.
13
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
The specified device data are collected when the trigger is satisfied.
Trigger Device : Data are collected when the specified bit device rises (ON)/falls (OFF).
Cycle : Data are collected at the specified interval.
OTHERS
Set the timing to start or end sampling.
Start/End
Data is collected if the end trigger is not satisfied.
Start : Starts sampling when the specified bit device rises (ON)/falls (OFF).
14
Device
End : Ends sampling when the specified bit device rises (ON)/falls (OFF).
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Start : Set the time to start sampling.
Time
End : Set the time to end sampling.
Frequency End : Ends sampling after getting the data as specified times.
APPENDICES
INDEX
10.8 Sampling 10 - 103
10.8.2 Setting items
10.8.3 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using sampling function.
1 Maximum number of sampling function objects
Only one object can be set for each project.
2 Sampling operation
(1) Even when the trigger is satisfied, sampling cannot be done if the start trigger has not been
satisfied.
Also, sampling cannot be done after the end trigger is satisfied.
(2) To restart sampling, make sure to clear the sampling data in GOT system menu.
(3) Up to 2000 sampling results are stored even when other than [Frequency] is set as end trigger.
When sampling is performed more than 2000 times, the stored data will be cleared from the oldest
one.
(4) Starting sampling requires maximum 500ms after the trigger is satisfied
Therefore, sampling may not be performed normally if the time interval between triggers has been
set to short.
3 Precautions about hardware
(1) Incompatible GOT
Sampling function is not supported by F920GOT-K, F930GOT and F930GOT-K.
10 - 104 10.8 Sampling
10.8.3 Precautions
9
11. TRIGGER ACTIONS
PARTS
11.1 Status Observation Function 10
GRAPH, METER
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This function enables operations such as turning a device ON/OFF, writing a value and outputting a sound
when the specified conditions are satisfied.
11
ACTIONS
Condition
satisfied Write
TRIGGER
12
Operation
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
1 Settable conditions
Up to 2 settings are available for the following conditions. 13
Bit device ON/OFF
The range specification of word device values (GOT-A900 series only)
2 Write or other operations allowed when conditions are satisfied
OTHERS
Turning ON a bit device when the condition is satisfied
Turning ON/OFF a bit device 14
Reversing a bit device status
Writing a value into a word device
Outputting sounds through the external speaker (GOT-A900 series only) SCRIPT FUNCTION
3 Types of status observation functions
The status observation functions can be set with the following two types of monitoring methods
Status observation common to the entire project
As the specified condition is satisfied, devices are always monitored.
Status monitor for each screen
APPENDICES
As the specified condition is satisfied, devices are monitored only when GOT displays the
corresponding screen
Remark About the sounds output through status observation.
Sounds to be output through status monitor needs to be registered at first.
Section 12.5 Sound
INDEX
11.1 Status Observation Function 11 - 1
11.1.1 Settings
1 Select [Common] [Status Observation] from the menu.
2 The setting dialog box will appear. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
Remark When making the setting on the project work space
The setting dialog box can be displayed by double-clicking on
on the project work space.
11 - 2 11.1 Status Observation Function
11.1.1 Settings
11.1.2 Setting items 9
Project tab .....Setting the status observation function common to the entire project
Screen tab .....Setting the status observation function for each screen
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Items Description A F
OUTPUT
Select a screen for setting the status observation function.
Then select a screen No.
Screen Type
Base Screen :Select this when setting the status observation function on a base
(for Screen tab only)
screen. 13
Window Screen :Select this when setting the status observation on a window screen.
Screen No. Set the screen No. where the status observation function is set.
(for Screen tab only) Click on the Browse button to confirm the screen image.
OTHERS
List of Status Observation
Displays status observation function data (Trigger/Action)
Function data
Adds new status observation function data.
GOT-A900 series :Setting of up to 512 data is available 14
GOT-F900 series :Setting of up to 40 data is available
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Add Click on this button, and a dialog box for setting trigger/action appears.
( This section [Trigger/Action] dialog box)
In GOT-A900 series, the device NW No. and station No. set in trigger must be set as the same
when setting plural status observation function data.
Changes the selected status observation function data.
Edit Click on the button, and a dialog box for setting trigger/ action appears.
( This section [Trigger/Action] dialog box)
Copy Copies the selected status observation function data.
APPENDICES
Paste Pastes the copied status observation function data to the end of the list.
Delete Deletes the selected status observation function data.
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
11.1 Status Observation Function 11 - 3
11.1.2 Setting items
Items Description A F
Select the observation cycle for the status observation function.
Ordinary (In the case of GOT-A900 series):
The status of the device set from the Trigger tab is monitored when
END processing is completed of the sequence program scan time/link
Observe Cycle scan time.
Ordinary (In the case of GOT-F900 series case):
Monitors the trigger device status every 200ms to 300ms.
Sampling :The status of the device set from the Trigger tab is monitored at the set
sampling cycle (1 to 60 s).
11 - 4 11.1 Status Observation Function
11.1.2 Setting items
9
1 [Trigger/Action] dialog box
(1) Trigger tab
Set the trigger to execute the status observation function.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series 12
Trigger
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Action
Items Description A F
OUTPUT
Set the trigger to execute the status observation function.
Up to 2 triggers can be set. (Setting 1 trigger only is allowed)
In the case of 2 triggers, when both of triggers are satisfied, the status observation function is 13
executed.
ON :Operation is executed when bit device turns ON.
Trigger1/Trigger2 OFF :Operation is executed when bit device turns OFF.
Word range :Operation is executed when the word device value is within the set
OTHERS
range (GOT-A900 series only).
After setting the trigger, assign the device that is used as a trigger.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
14
In the case of a word device, set the data size, data type and specified range of values.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Data Size After checking, set the offset device.
Select the data type of the word device to be monitored.
Signed BIN :Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN :Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Data Type
BCD :Treats the word device value as a BCD value.
Real :Treats the word device value as floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
Set the word device value range for trigger conditions.
Specified Range To the word device value, set the [operator] in the left, and the [fixed value] in the right.
APPENDICES
of Word Device Example: [<], [100]......Executes operation when the word device value is less than 100.
Value [==], [100]......Executes operation when the word device value is equal to 100.
[! =], [100]......Executes operation when the word device value is not equal to 100.
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
11.1 Status Observation Function 11 - 5
11.1.2 Setting items
Trigger Action
Items Description A F
Delete
Deletes the set data of Trigger2.
(Only for Trigger2)
Offset Check this item when executing monitor by switching between multiple devices.
Trigger1/ (Only allowed in
( Section 5.7 Offset Function)
Trigger2 setting of status
After checking, set the offset device.
observation
function for each ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
screen) Data size is fixed as 16 bits.
11 - 6 11.1 Status Observation Function
11.1.2 Setting items
(2) Action tab
9
Setting the action data for the status observation function
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
Trigger Action 12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Items Description A F
Type of action settings for the status observation function.
OUTPUT
Momentary :Momentary triggers the bit device ON for an instance.
SET :The bit device is turned ON
RST :The bit device is turned OFF
ALT :The current bit device status is inverted (OFF ON). 13
Action Data SET (16bit) :Writes a value into the word device (16bit).
Data SET (32bit) :Writes a value into the word device (32bit).
Sound :Outputs sounds. (GOT-A900 series only)
Set the file No. of output sounds.
OTHERS
Sound can be selected from the list by clicking on the Browse button.
( Section 12.5 Sound)
Storing Device
Set the target device that will result from the action type when the status observation function 14
trigger is satisfied.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Set the number of action devices (Points) when the trigger is satisfied.
The maximum points of devices depend on the setting of [Action].
Points Momentary, SET, RST, ALT : 40 points
DataSET(16bit) : 20 points.
DataSET(32bit) : 10 points.
Select the data type in which data are written into devices when [DataSET (16bit/32bit)] is set in
[Action].
Signed BIN :Treats the word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN :Treats the word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Data
APPENDICES
BCD :Treats the word device value as a BCD value.
(GOT-A900 series only)
Real :Treats the word device value as a floating point type real number.
(GOT-A900 series only)
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
11.1 Status Observation Function 11 - 7
11.1.2 Setting items
Trigger Action
Items Description A F
Select the device setting methods
Continuous :Select this item to set the specified number of devices continuously and
Device Settings
starting from the set device automatically
Random :Select this item to randomly set the specified number of devices.
Check this item to enable writing other word device value into this word device when the trigger is
satisfied.
Indirect *1
When 2 or more points are set in [Points], select the action (FMOV/BMOV) of the word device to
Storing which the current value is written.
Device
Set the target device for when the trigger is satisfied. ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
GOT-A900 series :Setting of the head devices will automatically set the subsequent
devices when [Continuous] is set in [Device Settings] and [Indirect].
Device
When [Random] is set, click on each column to set the device.
GOT-F900 series :Setting of the head devices will automatically set the subsequent
devices.
Fixed *1 Check this item to enable writing a fixed value into the word device when the trigger is satisfied.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
* 1 Fixed and Indirect
If [Fixed] and [Indirect] are set, the fixed value or other word device value can be written into the preset
device.
Both of the [Fixed] and [Indirect] settings can be set concurrently.
(1) Fixed (2) Indirect
Write fixed value(50) into D100 when trigger is satisfied. Write value of D200 into D100 when trigger is satisfied.
11 - 8 11.1 Status Observation Function
11.1.2 Setting items
(3)Fixed + Indirect 9
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
Write value of D200 + fixed (50) into D100
TRIGGER
when trigger is satisfied.
When 2 or more setting device points are set under the indirect setting (as shown in above (2), (3)), select
the write action to the device. (When [Fixed] is set, the fixed value is added to the written value.) 12
FMOV : When the trigger is satisfied, writes the current value of the word device specified in [Indirect] to
EXTERNAL INPUT/
the set device.
BMOV : When the trigger is satisfied, writes the current values of multiple word devices specified in
OUTPUT
[Indirect] to the set device.
(1) FMOV (2) BMOV 13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
When trigger is satisfied, writes D200 value When trigger is satisfied, writes values of D200
into D100 to D104. to D204 into D100 to D104 respectively.
INDEX
11.1 Status Observation Function 11 - 9
11.1.2 Setting items
11.1.3 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using status observation function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) The maximum number of status observation function data that is settable for the whole project
GOT-A900 series : 512
GOT-F900 series : 40
(2) The maximum number of status observation function data that is settable for one screen.
GOT-A900 series : 512
GOT-F900 series : 40
(3) The maximum number of write action data
Momentary, RST, SET, ALT : 40
DataSET (16bit) : 20
DataSET (32bit) : 10
(4) Precautions for setting
When data size exceeds 64k bytes, the status observation function setting becomes disabled.
In this case, [Data size exceeds restriction] message is displayed at the end of the setting. Change
the settings to make the data size less than 64k bytes.
(5) When the setting of the observe cycle is not correct, (e.g. incomplete data collection owing to timing
delay)
And the object with the offset function specified is set on the screen, trigger device monitored in the
status observation function will be delayed.
If this happens, the observe cycle setting may not function normally owing to data collection
omission resulting form timing delay.
Set the observe cycle to [Ordinary] to execute normal data collection.
(6) Trigger device
The status of the device executing the status observation function (trigger device) must be held for
the time of the status observation cycle or longer.
(7) When outputting sound
Refer to the precautions for the sound function when outputting sound.
Section 12.5 Sound
11 - 10 11.1 Status Observation Function
11.1.3 Precautions
(8) Influence on GOT response time (specific for GOT-F900 series)
9
When many points are set (applicable to the following conditions) and/or multiple status
observation functions are activated, GOT response time may be prolonged.
(a) When a bit device write with only one condition, especially [Momentary] is set, and when the
PARTS
number of the write points or the set triggers for the momentary action are too many.
(b) When many triggers are satisfied and multiple writings are frequently being executed.
(Especially when the watch cycle is set to [Ordinary] or the cycle interval is short.) 10
Influence on GOT
GRAPH, METER
(a) Influence on the parts and functions operated in fixed cycle
Periodically operating functions may not be operated as set.
For example, the Observe cycle (status observation), sampling function, alarm history, list
function, current time and trend graph function may be affected. 11
(b) Influence on screen data transfer
ACTIONS
[Errors in main unit processing] message may appear in the drawing software when the screen
is automatically switched to the PC transfer screen to execute the screen data transfer.
TRIGGER
In this case, switch to the [PC transfer] screen through key operation to enable the screen data
transfer.
(c) Influence on monitor, screen switch and key operation 12
For the screen switch, monitor and key operation, the operation may be delayed as well.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
(9) Influence to 2-port interface function (specific for GOT-F900 series)
OUTPUT
A communication error may occur on a peripheral device when the ladder monitor, device batch or
monitor registration, etc. is executed on the peripheral device.
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
11.1 Status Observation Function 11 - 11
11.1.3 Precautions
11.2 Recipe Function
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This function enables reading/writing of a value from/to the specified device according to the operation status
of the device.
1 Writing to device (without Memory card)
The values set with GT Dsigner2 are saved in the built-in Memory (user area) of GOT and then written
to the PLC CPU according to the operation status of the device.
Conditions required for production can be set or changed easily.
X10(write trigger) OFF ON
Write the set
Set value D10 100 value into device D10 100
D11 200 D11 200
D12 300 D12 300
2 Read from/Write to device (with Memory card)
The values read from the PLC CPU device are saved on a Memory card as a CSV file.
(For GOT-F900 series, they are saved in GOT.)
The saved CSV file is useful for project management and production management, because it can be
edited on a computer.
Data of Memory card (e.g. dada edited on a computer) can also be written into the PLC.
Memory card Memory card
Edit the value read from X10 (read trigger) OFF ON
D10 100 300 Memory card on computer D10 100 Read the device value of PLC CPU D10 100
D11 200 400 D11 200 D11 200
D12 300 500 D12 300 D12 300
X20 (write trigger) OFF ON
Store the edited PC card in GOT Write the value in Memory card D10 300
D10 300
D11 400 D11 400
D12 500 D12 500
Remark CSV file saved on Memory card (specific for GOT-A900 series)
Every time the recipe is set, the CSV file will be created inside the Memory card.
Recipe name File name (can be randomly changed)
Recipe operation 1 RECIP001.CSV
Recipe operation 2 RECIP002.CSV
Recipe operation 3 RECIP003.CSV
11 - 12 11.2 Recipe Function
Example: 9
Change the quantity of used materials according to the products
Make setting in the recipe setting dialog box
Product A
PARTS
D100: 20 D100: 20 51
D101: 42 D101: 42 52
D102: 22
D102: 22 94
D103: 65
Product B
During product
A production
Switch the
production of A to B
D103: 65 16 10
D100: 51 a 20
Pr. A
b 42
D101: 52 c 22
d 65 Pr. B
D102: 94
GRAPH, METER
D103: 16
11.2.1 Settings
11
ACTIONS
1 Select [Common] [Recipe] from the menu.
2 As the setting dialog box will appear, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
TRIGGER
Remark When making the setting on the project work space
12
The setting dialog box can be displayed by double-clicking on in the
EXTERNAL INPUT/
project work space.
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
11.2 Recipe Function 11 - 13
11.2.1 Settings
11.2.2 Setting items
Set the operation details of each recipe function.
In the case of GOT-A900 series
Items Description A F
Displays the list of the preset recipe function data.
If plural recipe functions are set, a recipe function data can be selected by clicking on the No. on
the left.
The preset recipe function data can be edited using the following icons.
(Edit) :Edits the operation details of the selected recipe function data
( This section Recipe setting)
Recipe operation View
(Cut) :Cuts the selected recipe function data
(Copy) :Copies the selected recipe function data
(Paste) :Pastes the cut/copied recipe function data in the end of the view display
(Delete) :Deletes the selected recipe function data
(Delete all) :Deletes all the set recipe functions data
11 - 14 11.2 Recipe Function
11.2.2 Setting items
9
1 Recipe setting
Set the operation details of the recipe function.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
Items Description A F 12
Set a recipe name.
Recipe name
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Points Set data type and points of the device to be read and written when executing the recipe function.
OUTPUT
Set the points of device to be read and written.
Set the specified number of devices consecutively starting from the head device.
The points that can be set depend on the data types of devices as follows:
GOT-A900 series: 13
Device Points 16bit (signed/unsigned) : Up to 8192 points *1
32bit (signed/unsigned) : Up to 4096 points *1
GOT-F900 series:
OTHERS
16bit (signed/unsigned) : Up to 4000 points *1
Select the data type of the devices.
GOT-A900 series : 14
Signed BIN16 : Process the word device value of 16bit in signed way
Unsigned BIN16 : Process the word device value of 16bit in unsigned way
Signed BIN32 : Process the word device value of 32bit in signed way SCRIPT FUNCTION
Data type
Unsigned BIN32 : Process the word device value of 32bit in unsigned way
GOT-F900 series :
Signed BIN16 : Process the word device value of 16bit in signed way
Unsigned BIN16 : Process the word device value of 16bit in unsigned way
(Continued to next page)
APPENDICES
INDEX
11.2 Recipe Function 11 - 15
11.2.2 Setting items
Items Description A F
(Erase) : Erases the column (s) of the selected number (s).
(Copy) : Copies the column (s) of the selected number (s).
Recipe Edit buttons (Paste) : Pastes the cut/copied column (s) of the selected number (s) to the end of the list.
(Import)*2: Reads the setting of the recipe that was edited in a CSV file into GT Designer2.
(Export)*2: Saves the setting of the recipe that was set by GT Designer2 as a CSV file.
Device List The devices that are read/written when the recipe function is executed are displayed in a list.
Start Device Set the head device of the devices that are read/written when the recipe function is executed.
Value Input the device value to be written to the PLC when the condition is satisfied.
Set a device that will execute data write and its trigger condition (ON/OFF) for the recipe function.
Write Trigger1
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Check this item to enable data write when both of two conditions are satisfied.
Set the device and its trigger conditions (ON/OFF)
Write Trigger2 ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
With Write Trigger 1 and 2 set, data write is executed only when the both device conditions are
satisfied.
Set a device and its trigger conditions (ON/OFF) that will execute data read for the recipe function.
Read Trigger1
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Check this item to enable data read when both of two conditions are satisfied.Set the device and
its trigger conditions (ON/OFF).
Read Trigger2 ( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
With Read Trigger 1 and 2 set, data read is executed only when the both device conditions are
satisfied.
Set the file name saved in PC card when using a PC card.
File Setting (Up to 8 alpha-numerical characters can be used.)
The default is set to "RECIP*.CSV". (*: No. of recipe setting)
(Continued to next page)
11 - 16 11.2 Recipe Function
11.2.2 Setting items
9
Items Description A F
Select to use or not use a Memory card for the recipe function.
Not Used : Writes the value saved in the built-in Memory of GOT (the value set in GT
Designer2) into the device.
PARTS
1) Write value
Saved value in Write
build in Memory device 10
GRAPH, METER
GOT
PLC
Use (In the case of a file not being used, a file will be created with the recipe device)
: Create a recipe file with the value setting in GT Designer2 when there is not any
recipe file in the Memory card at starting up.Initially, writing by the set value can 11
be executed.
ACTIONS
1) Write value when starting GOT
2) Read the
Value set by Memory card value of Memory card
TRIGGER
Memory Card GT Designer2 Write
3) Read the device value device
12
GOT PLC
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Use (Not set recipe device value)
: Does not create any recipe file if there is no recipe files in Memory card when
OUTPUT
starting GOT.Because the value setting in GT Designer2 is not needed, data
volume transferred to GOT can be decreased and the download time can be
shortened.
13
1) User created Memory card 1) Read device value
recipe file Write
2) Write Memory card value device
OTHERS
GOT PLC
Check this item to specify a file register name when a device executing read/write is set in the file
14
register (R, ER, ZR).
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(Only when the PLC type is set as [MELSEC-QnA/Q, MELDAS C6*]/[MELSEC-Q (multi.)/Q
File register
Motion] in GT Designer2)
When no file register has been specified, the file register with the file name specified by QCPU in
the "END" process.
Drive Select the drive No. of the PLC CPU.
Set a file name.
File Name
(Up to 8 characters can be input.)
*1: Applicable to each setting for GOT-A900 series, to total points in each project for GOT-F900
APPENDICES
series.
For details of *2, refer to the following.
INDEX
11.2 Recipe Function 11 - 17
11.2.2 Setting items
*2 Import/Export
The exported CSV file can be edited using such as the spreadsheet software. The CSV file, after editing,
can be imported to and opended by GT Designer2.
Example: Importing and exporting in CSV file
Exported in CSV file
Exported in CSV file
Editing the exported file
Add the setting using applications
R
such as Microsoft Excel.
Importing to GT Designer2
The added contents are displayed.
11 - 18 11.2 Recipe Function
11.2.2 Setting items
9
(1) Setting items of Memory card
Available operation of the recipe function depends on the selected item.
Select the item corresponding to a desired operation of the recipe function.
PARTS
<Operation of recipe function according to the selected items> : Applicable : N/A
Recipe function operation to be used
Items
Write only Read only Read/Write 10
Not used
GRAPH, METER
Use
(In the case of a file not being
Memory card *2 *1 *2 *2
used, a file will be created with
the recipe device)
Use
(Not set recipe device value)
*3 *3 *3 11
ACTIONS
*1: It is advisable to select "Use (not set recipe device value)" when executing read operation only.
*2: Since value setting is necessary, GOT memory capacity for the set values is required.
*3: It is necessary for the user to create a recipe file.
TRIGGER
(After initially reading the PLC CPU device, reuse the recipe file created in Memory card in GOT.)
(2) Memory card check when using recipe function
GOT executes the following operation according to the status of the Memory card.
12
(a) When recipe file is not valid or corrupted
EXTERNAL INPUT/
A system alarm "351:Recipe file error. Confirm content of recipe file." occurs
and recipe operation is stopped.
OUTPUT
(b) When no Memory card is installed in the GOT
A system alarm "352:Recipe file make error. Reboot GOT after inserting
memory card." occurs. 13
Precautions when executing recipe function
(1) Many read/write devices are set
OTHERS
Other processing such as monitoring of other object function or key input will not
be executed until the completion of the recipe function.
<How to check the execution of the recipe function>
14
It is possible to check whether or not the recipe function is executed by setting the
lamp, which monitors the recipe processing signal (system signal 2), on the GOT SCRIPT FUNCTION
screen.
Section 3.5 System Information Setting
System signal 2
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Recipe processing signal
APPENDICES
Recipe processing signal Recipe processing signal
The lamp is lit while the The lamp goes off at the
recipe function is executed. completion of the recipe function.
INDEX
11.2 Recipe Function 11 - 19
11.2.2 Setting items
11.2.3 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the recipe function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Setting number of recipes in a project
GOT-A900 series : 256 pcs.
GOT-F900 series : 256 pcs.
(2) The maximum number of write action data
GOT-A900 series : 8192 points (Data type of device: 16bit) *1
4096 points (Data type of device: 32bit) *1
GOT-F900 series : 4000 points (Data type of device: 16bit) *1
*1 is applicable to each setting for GOT-A900 series, to total points in each project for GOT-F900 series.
2 Precautions for OS
(1) Extended function OS (specific for GOT-A900 series)
Be sure to install the extended function OS (recipe) to GOT when using the recipe function.
Be sure to install the extended function OS (CSV) to GOT when using the CSV format file.
3 Precautions for hardware
(1) GOT operating restrictions
Read operation is not available for the A95* handy GOT as it does not accept the Memory card.
(2) Required optional devices and GOT
The following are needed when using the recipe function.
GOT Required accessories
A985GOT, A97*GOT, A960GOT Memory board
A956WGOT Memory board
When using SRAM type: Memory card interface module
Memory card Compact flash PC card: NO additional devices required
A95*GOT GOT of memory extension type (A95*GOT-*BD-M3)
When using SRAM type: Memory card interface module
Memory card Compact flash PC card: N/A
4 Precautions for use
(1) CSV file saved in Memory card
Only one CSV file can be stored in Memory card for one recipe function.
For the CSV file data, only the read data are saved and historical data are not saved.
(Old data will be overwritten.)
When historical data are necessary, save data in the computer every time the recipe function is
executed.
11 - 20 11.2 Recipe Function
11.2.3 Precautions
(2) Number of recipe files that can be saved in Memory card (When using A985GOT/A97*GOT/
9
A960GOT/A956WGOT/A95*GOT)
The maximum number of recipe files (including other object files) that can be set in a Memory card
differs with memory capacity as follows:
PARTS
Memory card memory capacity Number of files
1M, 2M 128
4M 256
10
16M (A9GTMEM-10MF*1), 32M (A9GTMEM-20MF*1), 64M (A9GTMEM-40MF*1) 512
GRAPH, METER
*1 Memory capacity differs according to the hardware versions of flash PC card.
The memory can be checked on the rated plate of flash card.
(3) File data size 11
ACTIONS
Refer to the following for the data size stored into a memory card when the recipe function is used.
Section 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
11.2 Recipe Function 11 - 21
11.2.3 Precautions
11.3 Time Action Function
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This function performs any of the following actions to when the set day of week/time of day is
reached.
The operation initialization of the GOT-A900 series is determined by the PLC CPU clock settings (day-of-the-
week and time).
When the GOT is connected to a network, the initialization is determined by the data and time in master sta-
tion or control station.
The operation initialization for the GOT-F900 series (except F920GOT-K) is determined by its own internal
clock settings.
1 Turns bit device ON/OFF.
Start time End time
OFF ON
ON OFF
2 Writes value to word device. (specific for GOT-A900 series)
Start time End time
0 100
Write the set value Write the set value
3 Outputs sound. (An external speaker is required) (specific for GOT-A900 series)
Start time End time
Start running
Output the sound Output the sound
4 Sends various data such as alarm history data/recipe file/screen image by email
(specific GT SoftGOT2)
Start time End time
Internet
Send email
11 - 22 11.3 Time Action Function
Example: 9
Play sound1 on Monday morning and sound2 on
Send alarm history data by email every evening
Friday evening
Set on the Time tab and Action tab Set on the Time tab and Action tab
PARTS
Monday: Morning Friday: Night Contact constantly
10
Internet
GRAPH, METER
New batch count Batch count for this
started for this week week is completed
11.3.1 Settings 11
ACTIONS
1 Select [Common] [Time Action] from the menu.
TRIGGER
2 As the setting dialog box will appear, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
12
Remark When making the setting on the project work space
EXTERNAL INPUT/
The setting dialog box can be displayed by double-clicking on in the project work
space.
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
11.3 Time Action Function 11 - 23
11.3.1 Settings
11.3.2 Setting items
Set the action, start time and end time for the time action.
In the case of GOT-A900 series
In the case of GOT-F900 series
Items Description A F
Time action setting will be deleted by clicking on the Delete button after selecting the time action
Delete
to be deleted on the list.
Delete All All the time action settings will be deleted by clicking the Delete All button.
Edit *1 Time action setting is available by clicking on the Edit button after clicking (selecting) the No. of
the row to be set/edited on the list.
Set the head device (occupying 8 points) to be turned ON/OFF in the time action function.
Common Settings Clicking on the Device button to set the head bit device.
Clicking on the Update button register the common settings.
Set the day-of-the-week and time when the time action function is selected.
Setting the start time and end time to different days (exceeding 24 hours) is not allowed.
Clicking on the Update button to register the settings.
Individual Clicking on the Clear button to delete the settings of the currently selected row (channel).
Settings Weekdays Select the days from Sunday through Saturday to be set.
Start Time The bit device is turned ON corresponding to the selected No. at the set time.
End Time The bit device is turned OFF corresponding to the selected No. at the set time.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
11 - 24 11.3 Time Action Function
11.3.2 Setting items
*1 Edit settings (GOT-A900 series only) 9
Time tab
Set the day-of the-week and time when the time action function is to be used.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
Items Description A F
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Set the mode type for the time action function.
Mode VDaily :Time action is executed only on the specified day-of-the-week/time.
OUTPUT
Through :Time action is executed continuously for the specified number of days.
Select the day-of-the-week and time when the time action function starts/ends.
Start :Set the day/time when the time action starts.
When the mode is set as [Daily], multiple days can be set.
13
Start/End
End :Set the day/time when the time action ends.
Only when the mode is set as [Through], the day-of-the-week setting is
available.
OTHERS
Setting the same time action twice a week
When Through is set, a single action only can be executed once in a week. 14
To set a single action executed twice a week by Through, please set the time
function with different start/end time twice ( Mode of Time tab: set in Day).
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Turn M0 ON in AM of Monday, and turn M0 OFF in PM of Tuesday (Set this in
time action1)
No action on Wednesday
Turn M0 ON in AM of Thursday, and turn M0 OFF in PM of Friday (Set this in time
action2)
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday
APPENDICES
M0 ON M0 OFF M0 ON M0 OFF
Remark When actual day-of-the-week does not match the date controlled by PLC CPU
Even if the day-of-the-week data of the PLC CPU is incorrect, GOT will calculate the
correct day of the week from the date data of the PLC CPU and execute the time
action function on the day.
INDEX
11.3 Time Action Function 11 - 25
11.3.2 Setting items
Action tab
Set the condition trigger executing the time action function.
Items Description A F
Check this item to turn bit device ON/OFF at the start/end time.
Bit
Set the bit device to be turned ON/OFF.
Check this item to write the specified value to word device.
Word
Set the word device to which the value is written.
Select the data type of the word device for value write.
Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Data Type
BCD : Treats word device value as BCD (binary decimal) value.
Real : Treats word device value as floating point type real number.
(Only when selecting [32bit] for [Data Size].)
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Start Write Value Set the value to be written to the specified word device at the start time.
End Write Value Set the value to be written to the specified word device the at end time.
Check this item to output sound at the start/end time.
Sound Click on the Browse button to select the sound to be played from the list.
( Section 12.5 Sound)
Start Set the sound No. of the sound file to be played at the start time
End Set the sound No. of the sound file to be played at the end time
Check this item to send the following data by e-mail at the start time.
Select the contents to be sent by e-mail.
One type of data can be sent for each time action.
Alarm history : Sends alarm history data (CSV file).
Send Mail in GT SoftGOT2
Recipe : Sends recipe data (CSV file).
(Only Start)
Screen image : Sends screen image (BMP file).
Refer to the following manual for the details of send data.
GT SoftGOT2 Version1 Operating Manual
11 - 26 11.3 Time Action Function
11.3.2 Setting items
11.3.3 Precautions 9
This section provides the precautions for using the time action function.
1 Precautions for drawing
PARTS
(1) Number of points settable for the time action function
GOT-A900 series : 32 10
GOT-F900 series : 8
(2) Precautions for multiple time action function settings
GRAPH, METER
Do not set different time actions to the same day-of-the-week and time. Otherwise GOT may work
abnormally.
2 Precautions about hardware 11
ACTIONS
(1) System configuration not applicable for the time action function
The time action function is not applicable if there are no time data in the connected PLC CPU.
As GT SoftGOT2 and GOT-F900 series (except F920GOT-K) do not use the time data of PLC CPU,
TRIGGER
the time action function can be used even if there are no time data in the connected PLC CPU.
Section 2.4.2 PLC CPU with clock function (GOT-A900 series only)
12
Remark Communication board with built-in clock function (specific for GOT-A900 series)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
If the communication board (A9GT-RS2T) with built-in clock function is installed in
GOT-A900 (except A95*GOT/A956WGOT), the time action function can be
OUTPUT
executed when PC is connected.
(The clock function of the communication board is not available in the case of
computer link connection (including connection with the PLC made by other
13
company))
(2) Mail sending
The mail sending in the time action function is applicable for GT SoftGOT2 only.
OTHERS
3 Precautions for use
14
(1) During operation of time action function
Time action function may be affected if the clock setting on the PLC CPU or the preset device
status is changed. SCRIPT FUNCTION
Attention must be paid to change the clock setting and the set device status.
Example1: When the set bit device (M0) is turned ON before the time action is executed
The action is not executed at the time set by the time action function
8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00
ON
APPENDICES
OFF
M0 device status
ON OFF
Action set by time action function
INDEX
11.3 Time Action Function 11 - 27
11.3.3 Precautions
Example2: When the time of PLC CPU is changed
The action is executed at the next start time.
It will not be executed if the change is made after the start/end action time.
Start action : 8:00 Output sound1
End action : 17:00 Output sound2
7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 21:00
7:00 20:00
Output sound1 Output sound1
Sound2 does not act as
there is no 17:00. exist.
(2) When outputting sound
Refer to the precautions for the sound function when outputting sound.
Section 12.5 Sound
(3) Time action of GOT-F900 series
[SET] (sets) the specified bit device when the time of the clock built in GOT-F900 series comes to
the preset start time.
It [RST] (resets) the specified bit device if it comes to the preset end time.
7:00 8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00
ON
OFF
M100 status
Remark Action lasting more than one day (24 hours)
Assign ON action of the device to time action No.1 and OFF action to No.2 by
programming with sequence program combining No.1 and No.2 (totally 2 points)
time actions.
Example: Turn ON at 09:00 on Monday and OFF at 17:00 on Friday
For No.1 (M100), check only Monday. Set the start time to 09:00 and the end time
to 09:01.
For No.2 (M101), check only Friday. Set the start time to 17:00 and the end time to
17:01
Program by sequence program so that the device to be turn ON will be SET (set)
by M100 and RST(reset) by M101.
(4) When the screen data of the software DU-WIN is read
Comments on time action set by the software DU-WIN are deleted.
11 - 28 11.3 Time Action Function
11.3.3 Precautions
12. EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT 9
PARTS
12.1 Report Function 10
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
GRAPH, METER
It is the function that collects and prints the data of production management and status.
Following information can be printed with this function.
Word device value
11
ACTIONS
Comment corresponding to the device status
1
02/11/25 16: 53:24
TRIGGER
Operation Production
Line
status volume
RUN 10
MC-1
RUN 20
MC-2
RUN
RUN
60
80
12
HALT 10
MC-1
RUN 80
EXTERNAL INPUT/
RUN 90
OUTPUT
Comment corresponding Word device value
to device status
13
Remark Comment to be printed
The comment must be registered in advance
Section 4.1 Comment Registration
OTHERS
Select the timing for printing the collected data from the following two options.
14
1 Real/Cont
The data are printed as soon as they are collected.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
It is selectable whether to print on the changed (next) page or not.
2 Log/Page
Data collection timing and print timing can be specified. This function collects and prints data at the
specified timing.
The collected data are stored in memory card. The stored data will be printed based on the change
page setting at the specified timing.
APPENDICES
When using Log/Page
Memory card is required for using [Log/Page].
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 1
3 [Real/Cont] and [Log/Page]
Following shows the comparison between operations of [Real/Cont] and [Log/Page] settings.
Device value 10 30 50 70 40 60 80
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
Collect trigger
A B
Print trigger
(Log/page only)
Clear trigger
(Log/page only)
Real/Cont
Data are printed at each collect trigger.
Change page: Never
1) The 1st time 2) The 2nd time 3) The 3rd time 6) The 6th time
1 2 3 6
10 10 10 10
30 30 30
50 50
70
40
60
Change page: Done
1) The 1st time 2) The 2nd time 3) The 3rd time 6) The 6th time
1 1 1 6
2 2
3 10 6
10 10 10
30 10 30
3050 50
60
70
Log/Page
Data stored in memory card are printed at each print trigger.
Those data are deleted at each delete trigger.
A The 1st time B The 2nd time
1 2
10 70
30 40
50 60
Print the remained data
after clearing the collected
data with clear trigger.
12 - 2 12.1 Report Function
12.1.1 Arrangement and settings 9
1 Print format
PARTS
Create the print format on the report screen. Up to 8 formats (8 screens) can be registered.
This section provides the general procedure for print format setting.
1 Create report screen ( Section 12.1.2 Report screen creation (screen property))
10
Create a report screen and make the report function settings on that screen.
GRAPH, METER
Screen property dialog box setting Real/Cont Log/Page
Basic tab Screen No., title etc.
Report style (Real/Cont/Log/Page)
Type/Trigger tab
Collect trigger, Print trigger, Page No., Time 11
ACTIONS
Method of storing data to memory card,
Logging tab -
Print operation, Delete trigger
: Required - : Not required
TRIGGER
2 Set print range ( Section 12.1.3 Setting common to each report (report setting))
Set on the report setting dialog box the number of lines and columns, margin, according to the printable
area of the printer to be used.
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Time Set by
Top space
OUTPUT
02/11/25 16: 53: 24 1 Page No. Set by
Operation Production volume
Line Model Header Set by
A1
status
Running
Expected
300
Actual
10
13
MC-1
A2 Running 250 20
Repeat line Set by
A1 Running 300 60
MC-2
A2 Running 250 80
Lines A1 Halt 300 10
MC-1
OTHERS
A2 Running 250 80
A1 Running 300 90
MC-2
A2 Running 250 115
MC-1
A1
A2
Inspection
Running
300
250
10
128
14
A1 Running 300 130
SCRIPT FUNCTION
MC-2
A2 Running 250 180
Left space Columns
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 3
12.1.1 Arrangement and settings
3 Set print layout ( Section 12.1.4 Print layout setting)
Open the created report screen to set the print layout.
Operation Production
Line Model Header
status Plan Actual
A1 Run normally 550 125
MC-1
A2 Run normally 400 89
Repeat line
A1 Run normally 600 136
MC-2
A2 Error occurs 380 81
Bit comment print
Word comment print Numerical print
Line Text
Machine Operation Production Run normally 550 125
Line
type status Plan Actual Run normally 400 89
A1 Run normally 600 136
MC-1
A2 Error occurs 380 81
A1
MC-2
A2
Line Used to draw a report table. Section 12.1.4
Text Used to draw fixed texts in the table. Section 12.1.4
Numerical print Used to arrange the object that prints the word device value. Section 12.1.4
Used to arrange the comment to be changed according to the
Bit comment print Section 12.1.4
ON/OFF status of bit device.
Used to arrange the comment to be changed according to word
Word comment print Section 12.1.4
device value.
Header Used to set the header part of the report table. Section 12.1.4
Repeat line Used to set the part to be repeatedly printed in the report table. Section 12.1.4
Edit of created report screen
As the base screen, the created report screen can be copied and deleted for each
screen.
Refer to the following manual for screen editing operation.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
12 - 4 12.1 Report Function
12.1.1 Arrangement and settings
12.1.2 Report screen creation (screen property) 9
This section explains how to create a report screen.
1 Select [Screen] [New Screen] [Report Screen] from the menu.
PARTS
2 As the setting dialog box will appear, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
10
3 Click on OK button to display the set report screen.
GRAPH, METER
1 Basic tab
Set the screen No. and screen name.
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Basic Format/Trigger Logging
Items Description A F
Screen Number Select the report screen No.
13
Enter the title of report screen as necessary.
Screen Name
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Enter the explanation of the newly created report as necessary.
OTHERS
Detailed Explanation
Up to 512 characters can be entered.
Set the header and repeat lines.
Header/Repeat
( Section 12.1.4 Set header/repeat line)
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 5
12.1.2 Report screen creation (screen property)
2 Format/Trigger tab
Select the report style (Real/Cont and Log/Page) to set collect trigger and print trigger.
Basic Format/Trigger Logging
Items Description A F
Report Style Select the report style (Real/Cont and Log/Page).
Page No. Select whether to print page No. (upper right) on the paper.
Select whether to print time (at upper center/upper left/upper right).
Time is displayed using the format of yy(year)/mm(month)/dd(day)/hh(hour): mm(minute):
Time *1 sec(second).
02/11/24 17:38:04 (fixed 17 digits)
Space
Select the timing to collect data.
Rise : Collect when the bit device turns ON.
Fall : Collect when the bit device turns OFF.
Sampling : Collect at a fixed interval and store the data into memory card.
Collect Trigger Type *2 Then, set the data sampling (data collecting) interval (3 to 3600 s).
This setting is available only when report style is set as [Log/Page].
Set the bit device to be collect trigger when [Rise] or [Fall] is selected.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Select the timing to print the data stored in memory card.
This setting is available only when report style is set as [Log/Page].
Rise : Print when the bit device turns ON.
Print Trigger Type *2 Fall : Print when the bit device turns OFF.
Then, set the bit device to be print trigger.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Set the header and repeat lines.
Header/Repeat
( Section 12.1.4 Set header/repeat line)
*1 Time printing
Time printing may be unavailable according to the connection method or the PLC CPU.
Section 2.4 Clock Function
*2 Devices to be set as collect trigger or print trigger
Make sure to set different devices as collect trigger or print trigger for each report screen.
12 - 6 12.1 Report Function
12.1.2 Report screen creation (screen property)
9
3 Logging tab
Make the setting of report style [Log/Page] (method of storing data to memory card, print action).
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
Basic Format/Trigger Logging
Items Description A F
TRIGGER
Set the number of times (0 to 499) for repeated printing.
Repeat line can be set in report screen. ( Section 12.1.4 Print layout setting)
When printing all the data stored in memory card, set the number, that is the result of subtracting 1
from [Sampling Num.], to [Repeat Num.].
12
Example: when the settings are [Sampling Num.: 3] and [Repeat Num.: 2]
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Collect data Print result
PC card Production list
Line 1 10 Line Vol.
OUTPUT
Repeat Num. 1st sampling Line 2 50 Line 1 10
Line 1 15 Line 2 50
2nd sampling
Line 1 15
13
Line 2 82
Line 2 82
3rd sampling Line 1 20
Line 1 20
Line 2 78 Repeated
Line 2 78
times: 2
Sampling times: 3 Print repeat lines and
repeat times (2 lines)
OTHERS
Set the number of times (1 to 500) to collect data.
Sampling Num. Make settings according to capacity of the memory card.
( Section 2.3 Specifications of Available Object Functions)
Select the processing method when sampling data was executed more than the number of times 14
set in [Sampling Num.].
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Overwrite : Continue the sampling and overwrite the data in the order collected (sampled).
Over Processing
Break : Interrupt the data sampling.
When restarting data sampling, clear all the data stored in memory card by clear
trigger.
Select the order of printing the data stored in memory card.
Logging Oldest : Print from the oldest data.
Latest : Print from the latest data.
(Continued to next page)
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 7
12.1.2 Report screen creation (screen property)
Items Description A F
Select the timing to delete all the data stored in memory card.
Rise : Delete when bit device turns ON.
Fall : Delete when bit device turns OFF.
Delete Trigger Type Power ON : Delete when GOT starts.
Print : Delete after printing.
Set the bit device as clear trigger when [Rise] or [Fall] is selected.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Enter the file name of collected data to be stored in memory card.
Files can be created on each report screen.
File Name
Name the file using alphabets (upper case) and/or numerals (0 to 9).
Example: AREPORT.DAT [Name (up to 8 characters). Extension (up to 3 characters)]
Set the header and repeat lines.
Header/Repeat
( Section 12.1.4 Set header/repeat line)
12.1.3 Setting common to each report (report setting)
Set the common information of report function.
The setting items are common to all the report screens.
1 Select [Common] [Report Settings] from the menu.
2 As the setting dialog box will appear, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
3 Click on OK button to complete the setting of report function.
Remark When making the setting on the project work space
The setting dialog box can be displayed by double-clicking on in the
project workspace.
12 - 8 12.1 Report Function
12.1.3 Setting common to each report (report setting)
9
1 Common tab
Set the trigger watch cycle; abort trigger type and action for changing page during printing.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
Common Print Format
11
ACTIONS
Items Description A F
Check this item in order that change page will be always executed before printing when [Real/
Cont] is set. Otherwise, change page print will not be executed after printing each object function
TRIGGER
(report function, alarm history function and hardcopy function etc.)
This setting is not relevant to [Log/Page], change page is always executed before printing.
Checked Not checked
Print report on Print report without
12
the changed changing the page.
(next) page.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Line Pro.
Line A 28
Change Page (Before Print) Hard copy print Line B 44
Hardcopy print
OUTPUT
Line C 52
Line D 41
Change page
Line
Line A
Pro.
28
13
Line B 44
Line C 52
Line D 41
OTHERS
Set the cycle for GOT to monitor the device ON/OFF status that has been set in each trigger
(collect trigger/abort trigger/print trigger/delete trigger).
14
Make the settings in order that the device set for each trigger will keep the ON/OFF status longer
SCRIPT FUNCTION
than the period set by trigger watch cycle.
GOT may not recognize the device ON/OFF status, if the period of device ON/OFF is shorter than
the trigger sampling.
ON ON ON ON
Trigger Watch Cycle Bit device of
collect trigger
(trigger action: OFF OFF OFF
Rise)
3s 3s 3s 3s 3s
APPENDICES
Trigger watch Unrecognized Recognized Unrecognized Recognized
cycle (3s) (OFF OFF) (OFF ON) (OFF OFF) (OFF OFF)
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 9
12.1.3 Setting common to each report (report setting)
Common Print Format
Items Description A F
Select the method of interrupting the printing operation.
Rise : Interrupt printing when the set device turns ON.
Fall : Interrupt printing when the set device turns OFF.
Abort Trigger Type
None : Abort trigger is not set.
After selecting, set the device to be trigger.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Check this item to clear the print lines counted by GOT.
Check this item to restart printing from the changed (next) page after printing operation is
interrupted once.
It is unnecessary to check this item to continue printing from the interrupted position.
Initialize change page after
This setting is invalid if the following setting is made.
aborting *1
When [Change Page (Before Print)] in report setting dialog box is checked
( Section 12.1.2 Report screen creation (screen property))
When report style [Log/Page] in the screen property dialog box is checked
( Section 12.1.3 Setting common to each report (report setting))
For details of *1, refer to the following.
12 - 10 12.1 Report Function
12.1.3 Setting common to each report (report setting)
*1 Initialize change page after aborting (Effective example when report print is interrupted) 9
When printing operation is interrupted once, and then printing is started from the changed (next) page, the
print line shift can be avoided by checking [Initialize change page after aborting] in advance.
Example: Operation example after interrupting report print
PARTS
Number of first print lines : 2
Repeated frequency : Twice
10
Usually
GRAPH, METER
1 2 3
Repeated 10 70 130
lines 20 80 140
Repeated 30 90 150
40 100 160
printing
(twice)
50
60
110
120
170
180
11
ACTIONS
Change page after printing repeated
lines twice (repeated lines: 6).
TRIGGER
Checked
12
1 2
50 110
10 60 120
20 70 130
EXTERNAL INPUT/
30 80 140
40 90 150
100 160
OUTPUT
Abort trigger occurs after After page change, print the repeated
printing repeated lines once. lines twice, and then change page.
13
Not checked
1 2
OTHERS
50 70
10 60 80
20 90
30 100
40 110
120
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Abort trigger occurs after If two lines are printed after page change,
printing repeated lines once. GOT judges that repeated lines are printed
twice, and then changes page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 11
12.1.3 Setting common to each report (report setting)
2 Print Format tab
Set print format (number of lines and columns, top margin, left margin), according to the printable area
of the printer.
This setting defines the size of created report screen.
Common Print Format
Items Description A F
Set the number of lines (1 to 127) and columns (1 to 255), and the space for the top (the number of
lines) and the left (the number of characters) of the printout.
Top
space
Left 02/11/25 16:53:24
Machine Operation Production vol.
space Line
type status Planned Actual
A1 Running 300 10
MC-1
A2 Running 250 20
A1 Running 300 60
MC-2
Lines/Columns/Top Space/ A2
A1
Running
Halt
250
300
80
10 Lines
MC-1
Left Space
A2 Running 250 80
A1 Running 300 90
MC-2
A2 Running 250 115
A1 Running 300 10
MC-1
A2 Running 250 128
A1 Running 300 130
MC-2
A2 Running 250 180
Columns
Print area
Print sheet
Print format setting
Refer to the following for the methods to calculate the width (number of columns +
maximum set value of left margin) and length (Number of lines + maximum set value
of top margin) based on the printable area of the printer.
Section 3.6 Print Format Setting
12 - 12 12.1 Report Function
12.1.3 Setting common to each report (report setting)
12.1.4 Print layout setting 9
Arrange figures and objects to be printed on the created report screen.
1 Before creating report screen
PARTS
Arrange figures and objects on report screen based on grid.
Grid : Displayed in the fixed unit of 16 dots (vertical) x 8 dots (horizontal). 10
Space between figures/objects : Arranged in the unit of 16 dots (vertical) and 8 dots (horizontal).
GRAPH, METER
8 dots
Grid
16 dots
11
ACTIONS
(1) Grid display
TRIGGER
Set the grid color as black when the grid is indistinct.
Grid color can be changed on the [View] tab in [Preferences] dialog box (Select
[Project] [Preferences] from the menu).
12
(2) Arrange the figures and objects to be printed
By using toolbar, report screen can be created more efficiently.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Report function toolbar can be displayed in [Toolbars] of [Preferences] dialog box
(Select [Project] [Preferences] from the menu).
OUTPUT
2 Draw lines and quadrangle
13
(1) Drawing method
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
Click on [Line]
OTHERS
Select [Shape] [Line] from the menu.
2 Drag from the starting point (1)) to the end point (2)) of line/quadrangle, release the left key on 14
mouse, and line/ quadrangle will be displayed.
Draw line SCRIPT FUNCTION
1) 2) Draw by dragging from starting point
vertically/horizontally.
Draw quadrangle
1)
Draw by dragging from starting point
APPENDICES
sideways.
2)
Arranging the line/quadrangle
Make sure not arrange text and line/quadrangle in order they will overlap.
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 13
12.1.4 Print layout setting
(2) Precautions
(a) Line attributes cannot be changed. (Style: Full line, Width; 1 dot, Color: Black)
(b) Vertical line will be printed as broken line.
3 Text arrangement
(1) Arrangement method
1 Carry out either of the following operations.
Click on [Text]
Select [Shape] [Text] from the menu.
2 Click on the position to arrange text.
3 As [Text] dialog box will appear, enter text there.
4 Click on OK button, and the entered text will be arranged in the screen.
(2) Precautions
(a) Page change cannot be done for text arranged on report screen.
(b) Text attributes (style, text color, etc.) cannot be changed.
(c) Character is displayed in the unit of 16 8 dots.
16 dots
8 dots
(d) Up to 255 characters can be printed. (When [Columns] is set to the maximum value)
12 - 14 12.1 Report Function
12.1.4 Print layout setting
9
4 Numerical print arrangement
(1) Arrangement method
1 Carry out either of the following operations
PARTS
Click on the [Numerical Print]
Select [Object] [Numerical Print] from the menu 10
2 Click on the position to arrange numerical print object.
GRAPH, METER
3 Double click on the arranged numerical print object to display [Numerical Print] dialog box.
Make settings with the reference to the following explanation.
(2) Numerical print dialog box
(a) Basic tab 11
Set the print format and the device for printing value.
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
Basic Data Operation
Items Description A F
14
Set the word device for printing device value.
Device
SCRIPT FUNCTION
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Data Size Select the data size (16 bits/32 bits) of the word device for printing.
Device Select the data type of device.
Signed BIN : Treats word device value as a signed binary value.
Data Type Unsigned BIN : Treats word device value as an unsigned binary value.
Real : Treats word device value as a real.
(Only when [Data Size] selection is [32 bit].)
(Continued to next page)
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 15
12.1.4 Print layout setting
Basic Data Operation
Items Description A F
Select the print format of word device for printing.
Signed Decimal : Print the value in signed decimal.
Unsigned Decimal : Print the value in unsigned decimal.
Format
Real : Print the value in floating point type real.
Binary : Print the value in binary.
Hexadecimal : Print the value in hexadecimal.
Set the number of digits for numeric value to be printed.
The following are the number of digits that can be set in [Form].
Real : 1 to 32 digits (minus ( ), decimal point and decimal part are included)
Digits
Hexadecimal : 1 to 8 digits
Binary : 1 to 32 digits
Print Format Unsigned Decimal : 1 to 13 digits (minus ( ) is included)
Decimal Point When REAL is selected in [Print Format], set the number of digits (1 to 32) for the decimal part.
Select how to align objects within the print area.
Alignment Left Alignment : Align to the left of the print area.
Right Alignment : Align to the right of the print area.
When [Right Alignment] is selected in [Alignment] and displaying zeros on the left to the numeric
value is needed, check this item.
Example (In the case of five digits)
Fill with Zeros
5 00005
Zero not suppressed Zero suppressed
12 - 16 12.1 Report Function
12.1.4 Print layout setting
(b) Data Operation tab 9
Operational expression is set on this tab when monitoring the device by operating the device
values.
Setting on this tab is displayed by checking the corresponding extended function at the bottom
of the dialog box.
PARTS
For the details of data operation, refer to the following.
Section 5.6 Data Operation Function 10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
Data Operation
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Basic
Items Description A F
OUTPUT
Check this item to enable the bit mask operation.
After checking, select the mask operation type, and set the pattern value to be masked in
Bit Mask
hexadecimal in [Mask Pattern]. 13
AND :Carries out logical AND.
OR :Carries out logical OR.
Bit Operation
XOR :Carries out exclusive logic OR.
Check this item to enable bit shift operation.
OTHERS
Select the shift direction and set the number of bits to shift in [Shift Number].
Bit Shift
Left :Left shift
Right :Right shift
Data Operation Select an operational expression format for data operation.
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 17
12.1.4 Print layout setting
5 Bit comment print arrangement
(1) Arrangement method
1 Carry out either of the following operations
Click on [Bit Comment Print]
Select the [Object] [Comment Print] [Bit Comment Print] from the menu.
2 Click on the position to arrange the comment print object.
3 Double click on the arranged comment print object.
4 As the setting dialog box will appear, make the settings with reference to the following
explanation.
(2) Bit Comment Print dialog box
Set the print format and the device for printing comment.
Items Description A F
Set the bit device for printing comments
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Set the number of digits for the comment to be printed
Print Digits
Up to 255 digits can be set.
Set the comment No. (0 to 32767) to be printed when the bit turns ON/OFF.
Comment No. ON/OFF The comment will not be printed when setting comment No. to 0.
(To print comment only when the bit turns ON, set the comment No. when the bit turns OFF to 0)
(3) Precautions
(a) Only the first line of multi-line comment is printed.
(b) The text attribute (style, text color etc.) cannot be changed.
(c) Character is displayed in the size of 16 dots 8 dots.
16 dots
8 dots
(d) Up to 255 characters can be printed. (When [Columns] is set to the maximum value)
12 - 18 12.1 Report Function
12.1.4 Print layout setting
9
6 Word comment print arrangement
(1) Arrangement method
1 Carry out either of the following operations
PARTS
Click on [Word Comment Print]
Select the [Object] [Comment Print] [Word Comment Print] from the menu. 10
2 Click on the position to arrange the comment print object.
GRAPH, METER
3 Double click on the arranged comment print object.
4 As the setting dialog box will appear, make the settings with reference to the following
explanation.
11
(2) Word Comment Print dialog box
ACTIONS
(a) Basic tab
Set the print format of comment and the device to print comment.
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
Basic Data Operation 14
Items Description A F
Set the word device for printing comment. SCRIPT FUNCTION
Device Print the comment of which No. corresponding to the set word device value.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Set the number of digits for the comment to be printed
Print Digits
Up to 255 digits can be set.
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 19
12.1.4 Print layout setting
(b) Data Operation tab
The setting items of data operation tab are the same as numerical print.
Refer to the following for the details of the setting items.
Numerical print arrangement
(3) Precautions
(a) Only the first line of multi-line comment is printed.
(b) The text attribute (style, text color etc.) cannot be changed.
(c) Character is displayed in the size 16 dots 8 dots.
16 dots
8 dots
(d) Up to 255 characters can be printed. (When [Columns] is set to the maximum value)
12 - 20 12.1 Report Function
12.1.4 Print layout setting
9
7 Set header/repeat line
Set print range (header/repeat line) on the report screen.
PARTS
Production vol. Header Maximum 10 lines
Operation
Line Model The range for the header of each
Status Expected Actual page that can be printed only once.
MC-1
A1
A2
Running
Running
300
250
10
20
Repeat line Maximum 20 lines 10
Lines repeatedly printed when collect
A1 Running 300 60 trigger acts.
MC-2
A2 Running 250 80
GRAPH, METER
Line Model
A1
MC-1
[Print example] A2
A1
MC-2
A2
[Print repeatedly]
MC-1
A1
A2 11
A1
ACTIONS
MC-2
A2
TRIGGER
Remark Printable area
Number of Lines : Up to 30 lines can be printed/collected for 1 timing.
Number of Columns : Columns as many as the number set in the "Columns" of 12
print format can be printed.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Section 12.1.3 Setting common to each report (report setting)
OUTPUT
(1) Setting method
1 Carry out either of the following operations. 13
Click on the [Selection: Report Line] on the tool bar
Select [Edit] [Object of Selection] [Report Line] from the menu.
OTHERS
2 Drag and select the area specified for the header and repeat line on the report screen.
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
3 Carry out either of the following operations.
APPENDICES
When setting the header: Click on the [Header] on the tool bar
When setting the repeat line: Click on the [Repeat Lines] on the tool bar
4 The selected range for header and repeat line will be set.
The header area is shown by cyan frame, and repeat line area is shown by yellow frame.
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 21
12.1.4 Print layout setting
Remark Set the header/repeat line on the dialog box.
Header/repeat line can be set on the dialog box too.
Select the [Screen] [Header/Repeat] to display the setting dialog box. Make the
settings with reference to the following explanation.
Items Description A F
Check this item to set the header in the report screen.
Uncheck it to cancel the header.
Header Set Set the start line and end line.
Up to 10 lines can be set as the header in the range of 1 to 30 lines
(for whole screen).
Set the start line and end line of the repeat lines.
Repeat Up to 20 lines can be set as the repeat lines in the range of 1 to 30
lines (for whole screen).
(2) Precautions
(a) Numerical print and comment print objects cannot be set within header.
12 - 22 12.1 Report Function
12.1.4 Print layout setting
12.1.5 Precautions 9
This section provides the precautions for using report function.
1 Precautions for drawing
PARTS
(1) Maximum number of the report screens that can be set for 1 project
8 screens 10
(2) Maximum number of numerical print and comment print objects on report screen
256
GRAPH, METER
2 Precautions for OS
(1) Extended function OS
Make sure to install the extended function OS in GOT when using report function. 11
ACTIONS
3 Precautions for hardware
(1) Incompatible GOT
TRIGGER
(a) A95* handy GOT is incompatible.
(b) [Log/Page] setting is not available because A95* handy GOT is not compatible with the printer
and PC card.
12
(2) Required extended devices and GOT
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Following devices or GOT are required when using report function.
OUTPUT
GOT Required devices
A985GOT(-V), A97*GOT, A960GOT None
A956WGOT Printer interface module 13
Memory expansion type GOT (A95*GOT-*BD-M3)
A95*GOT
Printer interface module
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.1 Report Function 12 - 23
12.1.5 Precautions
4 Precautions for use
(1) When the print trigger of other object/other report screen occurs during report print.
After a report print is competed once, the other object/other report screen will be printed.
However, if the same print trigger occurs before the report print, that was executed when the former
report trigger occurred, is completed, the latter print trigger will be handled as invalid.
Check the report function operation
The printing status by report function and the printed report screen can be checked
using the system information.
Controlling the relevant signals by PLC CPU prevents the overlap of print trigger
occurrence timing.
Section 3.5 System Information Setting
(1) Report function-relevant signals of system information
(a) Report output signal (system signal2(b8))
ON : Report function is printing
OFF : Printing by report function is completed or interrupted
(b) Currently Printed Report Screen (write device)
Write the report screen No. being printed to PLC CPU.
After printing, the written report screen No. is kept until the next report screen
will be printed, instead of being cleared.
(2) Operation of the system information function when printing the report screen.
Printing status of Printing report screen "1"
the report screen
ON
OFF
Report output signal
0 1
Printing report screen
(2) When data collection timing is overlapped (Log/Page only)
After a data collection is competed once, the data of other report screen, that was delayed because
its collection timing overlapped with the completed one, will be collected.
However, when the same collect trigger occurs before the data collection, that was executed when
the former collect trigger occurred, is completed, the latter collect trigger will be handled as invalid.
(3) Delete trigger
Execution of the delete trigger deletes the contents of the report file but does not delete the report
file.
To delete the report file, do so using a personal computer or format the memory card.
(4) The number of collected data stored in memory card
(A985GOT/A97*GOT/A960GOT/A956WGOT/A95*GOT)
The maximum number of object files (including other object files) that can be set in a memory card
differs with the memory capacity as follows:
Memory card memory capacity Number of files
1M, 2M 128
4M 256
16M(A9GTMEM-10MF*1), 32M(A9GTMEM-20MF*1), 48M(A9GTMEM-40MF*1) 512
*1 Memory capacity differs according to the hardware versions of flash PC card.
The memory can be checked on the rated plate of flash card.
12 - 24 12.1 Report Function
12.1.5 Precautions
9
12.2 Hard Copy
PARTS
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
10
This function is used to save the currently displayed GOT monitor screen to memory card in BMP/JPG file
format or print it out with a printer.
GRAPH, METER
This function can be executed by bit device's ON/OFF or touching the touch switch (extension: Hard copy).
The BMP/JPEG files saved in memory card can be used for various documents on the computer. (Specific
for GOT-A900 series)
GOT
Line A pro. situ.
11
ACTIONS
Line A pro. situ.
Print current displayed
Screen oper. meth.
TRIGGER
monitor screen
Printer Line A pro. situ.
Save in
BMP/JPEG
format
12
Memory card Monitor screen can be used
PC in various document.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Printer
(Edit)
OUTPUT
GOT status during execution of hard copy function
When the hard copy function is executed, GOT will interrupt the monitor screen 13
display for approx. 5 seconds or less.
Also, print time will be displayed because more priority is given to the monitor
screen display. (In the case of bus connection, print delay time will be much longer.)
OTHERS
App.4 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function (Reference Value)
The hard copy function is executed as shown below.
14
Save hard copy screen in GOT Print the data saved in internal
internal memory temporarily. memory with the printer.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Monitor screen GOT internal Print
memory
GOT-A900 series: Maximum 5 seconds The print time is different with
GOT-F900 series: Maximum 1 second the different printer performance.
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.2 Hard Copy 12 - 25
12.2.1 Settings
1 Select [Common] [Hard Copy] from the menu.
2 The setting dialog box will appear. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
Remark When making the setting on the project work space
The setting dialog box can be displayed by double-clicking on on the
project work space.
12 - 26 12.2 Hard Copy
12.2.1 Settings
12.2.2 Setting items 9
Set the output target and the style of the hard copy.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
Items Description A F
12
Target*1 Select the output target (Printer/Memory card)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Select the format (BMP/JPEG) of the saved file when [Memory card] is selected in [Target].
Style
([JPEG] is not available for GOT-A960 series.)
OUTPUT
Select the processing method for the case in which memory card capacity is insufficient or the file
of the maximum file number (9999) exists.
Not checked : New monitor screen will not be saved in memory card when memory card 13
capacity is insufficient or the more than the max. number files (9999) exists.
Checked : Execute the following operation according to the memory card status.
The minimum number's file is
File number in
deleted when capacity is With spare capacity in the mem- No spare capacity in the
OTHERS
the memory
exceeded and make initial ory card memory card
card
state when the maximum is
Creates the file with he Deletes the file of the
filled *2 When file No.
9999 does not
number next to the exiting smallest No. and creates a 14
largest file number in the file with the number next to
exist.
memory card the largest one.
Deletes all the data in memory card and create a new No.1 file. SCRIPT FUNCTION
When file No.
(Data-deletion timing can be confirmed in the system information
9999 exists.
(system signal 2 area).)
Print Mode *3 Select the print color (256 colors/16 colors/monochrome).
Rev./Norm *3 Check this item to reverse and print monochrome area of the monitor screen.
Check this item to move to the next page after the monitor screen is printed out.
Change Page
Set the number of printing screens before changing the page.
APPENDICES
Start Trigger Set the device to start the hard copy.
Abort Trigger Set the device to interrupt print.
Set the watch cycle of start trigger and abort trigger in the unit of second within a range from 2 to
60 seconds.
Trigger Watch Cycle
The bit device, used as a start or abort trigger, must stay ON or OFF longer than the Trigger Watch
Cycle.
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.
INDEX
12.2 Hard Copy 12 - 27
12.2.2 Setting items
*1 Target
Files will be automatically created under the following file names when BMP/JPEG files are output to
memory card.
The BMP/JPEG files saved in the memory card can be retrieved with image processing software for
computers.
The number of screens File name
saved in PC card In BMP format In JPEG format
Screen 1 SNAP0001.BMP SNAP0001.JPG
Screen 2 SNAP0002.BMP SNAP0002.JPG
Screen 3 SNAP0003.BMP SNAP0003.JPG
: : :
Screen 9999 SNAP9999.BMP SNAP9999.JPG
*2 The minimum No.'s file is deleted when capacity is exceeded and make initial state when the maximum is
filled.
When this item has been checked, whether the number of file saved in memory card is close to the upper
limit or not can be checked by the following bit device status of the system information function. (Specific
for GOT-A900 series)
Hard copy sub-signal (system signal2 "b12")
The file number of screen data (file No.) is ON from 9900 to 9999.
Section 3.5 System Information Setting
*3 Print Mode and Rev./Norm
The [Print Mode]/[Rev./Norm] setting can be online-changed by the following bit device status of the
system information function. (Specific for GOT-A900 series)
Hard copy setting enable signal (system signal 1 "b10")
The output setting of hard copy can be changed by turning ON this signal in the system information.
Turn ON this signal before executing the hard copy function.
In this case, it must be turned ON earlier than the time (about 300ms) of identifying the GOT internal
processing.
Hard copy black-white print signal (system signal 1"b11")
ON : Changes hard copy print mode into [Monochrome]
OFF : Changes hard copy print mode into [Color (256 colors/16 colors)]
Hard copy black-white inversion signal (system signal 1 "b12")
ON : Reverses and outputs the monochrome area of monitor screen.
OFF : Keeps the original monochrome display of monitor screen and outputs as it is.
Section 3.5 System Information Setting
12 - 28 12.2 Hard Copy
12.2.2 Setting items
12.2.3 Precautions 9
This section provides the precautions for using the hard copy function.
1 Precautions for drawing
PARTS
(1) Number of settable points for the hard copy function
Only one hard function is available for one project. 10
(2) Start/Interrupt setting of the hard copy
When using a touch switch to turn ON the device used for start trigger/abort trigger, the device must
GRAPH, METER
be kept ON for five seconds or more.
When a touch switch (bit momentary) is used, make the delay setting (OFF delay) for the touch
switch so that it will stay ON longer than the Trigger Watch Cycle.
11
2 Precautions for OS
ACTIONS
(1) Extended function OS
Install the extended function OS (ESC printer/PLC printer/Chinese (Big5/GB) printer) in GOT when
TRIGGER
using hard copy function. (It is not required when using GT SoftGOT2, GOT-F900 series)
3 Precautions for hardware 12
(1) GOT inapplicable for this function
F920GOT-K, A950 handy GOT and F940 handy GOT are not applicable.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
4 Precautions for use
OUTPUT
(1) Bit devices of start trigger and abort trigger
The bit device, used as a start or abort trigger, set in Trigger Watch Cycle must stay ON or OFF 13
longer than the Trigger Watch Cycle.
(2) 256-color print
(a) Only the GOT (A985GOT, A975GOT, A956GOT) with 256 color monitor display (TFT type) is
OTHERS
capable of printing with 256 colors.
The 256-color type A95*GOT will choose the 16 nearest colors for printing.
(b) Memory card is required for the 256-color print (470K free space required). 14
Memory card is not required for the print other than the 256-color print.
(3) Printer SCRIPT FUNCTION
The print of monitor screen cannot be executed when the hard copy starts with the printer power
OFF.
Ensure that the printer is powered ON.
Otherwise, a system alarm will occur (340 (A printer error occurs or the power supply is OFF)).
(Starts printing when the printer turns ON.)
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.2 Hard Copy 12 - 29
12.2.3 Precautions
(4) Timing of hard copy execution
(a) While the hard copy function (saving or printing the monitor screen into GOT internal memory
or saving it to memory card) is being executed, another hard copy function cannot be
activated.
Execute the next hard copy after printing the previous one or saving it to memory card.
The completion of the operation can be confirmed in the system information (system signal2)
Section 3.5 System Information Setting
(b) The hard copy function may not be started if the GOT screen is being operated.
In such a case, execute the hard copy function again after the GOT screen operation.
(5) Video window, RGB screen
(a) The image displayed in the video window is printed in 256 colors
RGB screen cannot be printed.
(b) When GOT is in the screen save condition, the video image cannot be hard-copied correctly.
Confirm that GOT is not in the screen save condition before hard-copying the monitor screen
displaying video image.
(6) When using GOT-F900 series
(a) Only the user-created screen (the screen displayed in the screen mode) is available for hard
copy.
The system screen (in the HPP mode, alarm mode, sampling mode, other mode) cannot be
printed.
(b) GOT-F900 series are capable of monochrome print only.
Other display colors are printed as follows:
Black, red, blue, green : Black
White, purple, yellow, cyan : White
(In the case of 256-color display, colors similar to each of the above 8 colors are printed as
white or black)
(7) The number of files that can be saved in memory card (A985GOT/A97*GOT/A956WGOT/
A95*GOT)
The maximum number of object files (including other object files) that can be set in a memory card
differs with the memory capacity as follows:
Memory capacity of PC card File number
1M, 2M 128
4M 256
16M(A9GTMEM-10MF*1), 32M(A9GTMEM-20MF*1), 48M(A9GTMEM-40MF*1) 512
*1 Memory capacity differs according to the hardware versions of flash PC card.
It can be checked on the rated plate of flash card.
12 - 30 12.2 Hard Copy
12.2.3 Precautions
9
12.3 Operation Panel
PARTS
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
10
1 In the case of GOT-A900 series
GRAPH, METER
The operation panel is connected to GOT externally, and then various kinds of input (touch input,
numerical input, screen switching, etc.) are operated from the operation panel.
The operation panel can be used with the external I/O interface module installed to GOT.
11
External I/O
ACTIONS
interface
module
X0
TRIGGER
X0=ON
Input key to set X0 as ON. 12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
2 In the case of GOT-F900 series
(1) The function switches of GOT F920GOT-K, F930GOT-K with keyboard can be set.
OUTPUT
F920GOT-K F930GOT-K
13
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
Function switch
7 8 9
Function switch
SET ESC
OTHERS
4 5 6
7 8 9
1 2 3 SET ESC
DEV ENT 4 5 6
0 - .
14
1 2 3
. DEV ENT
0 -
SCRIPT FUNCTION
There are 6 built-in function There are 8 built-in function
switches (F1 to F6). switches with LED (green) (F1 to F8).
(2) The function switches of electronic operation terminal ET-900 series can be set.
Function switch
APPENDICES
There are 6 function switches with LED (green/red) (F0 to F5).
INDEX
12.3 Operation Panel 12 - 31
12.3.1 Required knowledge for operation panel setting
1 Available operation panels
(1) In the case of GOT-A900 series
Refer to the following manuals for the operation panels that can be used.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection System Manual).
(2) In the case of GOT-F900 series
In GOT-F900 series, function switches of F920GOT-K, F930GOT-K, or ET-900 are set through the
operation panel.
Refer to the following manuals for the details.
GOT-F900 Series HARDWARE MANUAL (Connection)
2 Description about settings of keys on the operation panel
To the operation panel keys, actions and key codes can be set.
(1) Action
More than one setting as shown below can be assigned to one key on the operation panel.
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series Precedence for multiple settings
Momentary *1 : 20 Momentary *1 : 50 High
Set : 20 Set : 50
Reset : 20 Reset : 50
Alternate : 20 Alternate : 50
Word set : 20 Word set : 50
Base screen switching *1 : 1 Base screen switching : 1
Window screen switching *1 : 1 Recipe transfer : 50
(Overlap window1) Data change : 50
Window screen switching *1 : 1
(Overlap window2)
Window screen switching *1 : 1
(Superimpose)
Station number switch : 1 Low
Total : 105 Total : 50
*1 If the momentary function and the window switch function are set to one operation panel key, switching the
screen is not available while the key is being pressed.
After the operation panel key is released (bit OFF output), the screens will be switched.
12 - 32 12.3 Operation Panel
12.3.1 Required knowledge for operation panel setting
(2) Key code (specific for GOT-A900 series)
9
The key code can be set for each object.
The key codes for alphanumeric input (numerical input, ASCII input)
The key codes for object functions (the numerical input, ASCII input, data list, alarm list, alarm
history functions)
PARTS
App.2 Key Code List
10
Remark When the above (1) Action and (2) Key code are set at the same time
GRAPH, METER
(1) Available key codes
The following are the key codes that can be set together with action setting.
"FFFFH (no key code)"
"000DH (write execution key)"
(2) Precedence for operation
11
ACTIONS
The key codes take precedence over to the action settings.
(3) In the case of GOT-F900 series
The key code setting is not available for GOT-F900 series.
TRIGGER
12.3.2 Settings
12
1 Select [Common] [Operation Panel] in the menu.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
2 The Setting dialog box will appear. Make the settings reference to the following explanation.
OUTPUT
Remark When making the setting on the project workspace
13
The setting dialog box can be displayed by double-clicking on in the project
workspace.
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.3 Operation Panel 12 - 33
12.3.2 Settings
12.3.3 Setting items
The actions and key code can be set to operation panel keys.
In the case of GOT-A900 series In the case of GOT-F900 series
Items Description A F
Set actions which are executed at ON and key codes to the input signals.
When an input signal button is clicked, the action/key code setting dialog box will be displayed. Set
the action, trigger and key code.
[Arrangements of the input signal buttons]
The following shows the arrangement of input signal buttons used in GT Designer2.
The key codes for the operation panel produced by Kanaden are preset in the initial state.
When using the ten-key panel of the A8GT-TK type, check [Initialize Mode A8GT-TK], and initialize
the state, to change it to the one suitable for the A8GT-TK ten-key panel.
Make the setting referring to the user-created arrangement of input signals. *2, *3
+00 +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 +06 +07
X000 X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
X008 X8 X9 XA XB XC XD XE XF
X010 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
Action/Key code setting *1 X018 X18 X19 X1A X1B X1C X1D X1E X1F
X020 X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X25 X27
X028 X28 X29 X2A X2B X2C X2D X2E X2F
X030 X30 X31 X32 X33 X34 X35 X36 X37
X038 X38 X39 X3A X3B X3C X3D X3E X3F
Displays the input signals of ET-900 series (F920GOT-K, F930GOT-K) function switches and the
actions set to each operation panel key.
Click on the input signal button, the action/key code setting dialog box will be displayed. Set the
action and trigger in this dialog box.
After the setting, "*" will be displayed on the key.
F920GOT-K F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
F930GOT-K F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
ET-900 F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
GOT-A900 series : Initializes the action/key code setting of the operation panel to be suitable
Initialize *2 for the key arrangement/input signal of kanaden operation panel.
GOT-F900 series : Deletes all of the actions of the operation panel for initialization.
Action Clicking this to switch the display on the input signal button between the action and key code.
When displaying key code : Displays the key code set to the key. 0042
Key code
When displaying action : Display "*" on the key to which an action is set. *
Check this item to make the setting of the currently editing operation panel available.
Available Operation Panel
After setting the function of the operation panel, make sure to check this box.
*3
Check this item when initializing the setting of operation panel according to the key arrangement of
Initialize Mode A8GT-TK
A8GT-TK ten-key panel. After checking this box, click on the initialize button.
For details of *1 to *3, refer to the following.
12 - 34 12.3 Operation Panel
12.3.3 Setting items
*1 Settings of operation panel key 9
Set the action and trigger for the operation panel key.
(1) Action tab
Set the action data (action, key code) of each operation panel key.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
(Example: In the case of GOT-A900 series)
Action Trigger 12
Items Description A F
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Set the action to be set to the operation panel key.
The set action data are displayed in the list.
OUTPUT
Action The setting method and action contents of each action (bit, word, etc.) are the same as the touch
switch.
( Section 6.2 Touch Switch) 13
Bit Set the ON/OFF action of the bit device.
Word Set the value change of the word device.
Base Click on this to set the base screen switch to an operation panel key.
OTHERS
Window Click on this to set the window screen switch to an operation panel key.
Station No.
Click on this to set the station No. switch to an operation panel key.
([Switch Type] of the station No. switch function of the touch switch cannot be set.)
14
Edit Edits the set action data.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Delete Deletes the set action.
Key Code Set the key code to be set to the operation panel key. ( App.2 Key Code List)
When using the security function, set the security level (1 to 15).
Security When not using the function, set it to "0".
( Section 5.8 Security Function)
Simultaneous Press Check this item to disable other operation panel key while an operation panel key is pressed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.3 Operation Panel 12 - 35
12.3.3 Setting items
(2) Trigger tab
Set the action trigger for the operation panel key.
Check the Extended Function at the bottom of the dialog box to display this tab.
Refer to the following for the details of trigger.
Section 5.5 Trigger Setting
Action Trigger
Items Description A F
Select the trigger to activate the operation panel key.
Trigger Type
Ordinary ON OFF Range (specific for GOT-A900 series)
Trigger Device Specify the device used for the trigger.
Word Range Trigger When [Range] is selected in [Trigger Type], set the following items
Data Size Select the [Data Size] (16 bit/32 bit) of the word device.
Data Type Select the data type (signed BIN/unsigned BIN/Real) of word device
Range Click on the Range button to set conditional expression for the word device range.
12 - 36 12.3 Operation Panel
12.3.3 Setting items
*2 Initialize (GOT-A900 series only) 9
Initializes the set data of the operation panel to be suitable for the key arrangement of the Kanaden
operation panel.
The arrangement of input signal
PARTS
X0 X8 X10 X18 X20 X28 X30 X38 X5 XD X15 X1D
X1 X25 X20 X35 X3D
10
X1 X9 X11 X19 X21 X29 X31 X39 X6 XE X16 X1E
X2 XA X12 X1A X22 X2A X32 X3A X26 X2E X36 X3E
GRAPH, METER
X3 XB X13 X1B X23 X2B X33 X3B X7 XF X17 X1F
X4 XC X14 X1C X24 X2C X34 X3C X27 X2F X37 X3F
Key arrangement 11
Scroll
ACTIONS
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 up Pre.
Scroll
down Next
A B C D E F G 7 8 9 Clear
TRIGGER
H I J K L M N 4 5 6 Set
O P Q R S T U 1 2 3 .
V W X Y Z SP SP 0 GO
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
*3 Initialize mode A8GT-TK (GOT-A900 series only)
OUTPUT
Initialize the set data of the operation panel to be suitable for the key arrangement of the A8GT-TK ten-key
operation panel.
Arrangement of input signal Key arrangement 13
MELSEC/A8GT-TK MELSEC/A8GT-TK
X0 X8 X10 F1 F2 F3
OTHERS
X18 X20 X28 F4 F5 F6
X30 X38 X39 F7 F8 F9
X3A X15 X35 F10
SCROLL
UP
SCROLL
DOWN 14
XD
SCRIPT FUNCTION
X25 X5
X2D
X6 XE X16 7 8 9
X26 X2E X36 4 5 6
X7 XF X17 1 2 3
X2F X1F X27 0 . _
X2C X37 X3F SP BS
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.3 Operation Panel 12 - 37
12.3.3 Setting items
12.3.4 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the operation panel function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) The maximum number of the operation panel function settable for the whole project
GOT-A900 series : 1
GOT-F900 series : 1
2 Precautions for OS
(1) Extended function OS (specific for GOT-A900 series)
When the operation panel function is used, install the extended function OS to GOT.
3 Precautions for hardware
(1) Required optional device (specific for GOT-A900 series)
The following devices are needed when using the operation panel function.
GOT used Required device
A985GOT, A97*GOT, A960GOT,
External I/O interface module
A956WGOT, A95*GOT
(2) GOT with key pad/function keys (specific for GOT-F900 series)
The key pad/function keys are provided for F920GOT-K (key pad), F930GOT-K (key pad) and ET-
900 (function key).
4 Precautions for use
(1) The operation panel function cannot be applied to:
The utility, system monitor function, ladder monitor function, special function module monitor
function, list editor function, motion monitor function, servo amplifier monitor function.
(2) Action of operation panel function
(a) Each key executes the set operation with no relation with GOT screen display.
(b) When a touch switch on the GOT screen and a key on the operation panel are pressed
simultaneously, both instructions are valid. In this case, the operation detected first will be
executed first.
12 - 38 12.3 Operation Panel
12.3.4 Precautions
9
12.4 Bar Code Function
PARTS
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
10
This function is to connect the bar code reader to GOT and write the data read by the bar code reader into
PLC CPU.
GRAPH, METER
Bar code reader is connected to the RS-232C interface at the bottom of GOT which is generally used for
download of the monitor screen data.
Read data
D0
"123456789"
9 Read byte 11
(00 H) (09 H) number
ACTIONS
D1 2 1
(32 H) (31 H)
D2 4 3
Bar code (34 H) (33 H)
TRIGGER
D3 6 5 Storage
(36 H) (35 H) data
D4 8 7
(38 H) (37 H)
123456789
<GOT> D5 SP
(20 H)
9
(39 H) 12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
< QCPU Q (mode) >
OUTPUT
Read data 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 39H
OTHERS
12.4.1 Arrangement and settings
14
The following explains the required setting and function for using bar code function.
1 Data storage and device points read by bar code reader SCRIPT FUNCTION
(1) Device that data can be stored
The data can be stored into word device.
Word of bit device cannot be specified.
(2) Max. No. of device points
Max. 32 points can be set.
(The data read by bar code reader can be stored in max. 31 points of device.)
APPENDICES
(3) Data stored in the device
Data read by the bar code reader is written into PLC CPU devices as ASCII data.
Example: When the read data is "123456789"
INDEX
12.4 Bar Code Function 12 - 39
12.4.1 Arrangement and settings
(a) When the number of read data is less than the set device points
Setting (Storage device: D0, Data points: 8)
Write device Stored data ASCII data
D0 0009H - Writes the bytes that have been read
D1 3231H 21 Writes the read data in the order of increasing bytes
D2 3433H 43
D3 3635H 65
D4 3837H 87
D5 2039H 9
When byte number of the read data is odd, the space
D6 2020H (20H) is written to higher byte of the last data.
Also, 20H is written to the device exceed the read data.
D7 2020H The set device points of data are written.
.....Space
(b) When the number of the read data is more than the set device points
Setting (Storage device: D0, Data points: 4)
Write device Stored data ASCII data
D0 0009H - Writes the bytes that have been read
D1 3231H 21 Writes the read data in order of increasing bytes
D2 3433H 43
D3 3635H 65
Discard the data beyond the set device points
12.4.2 Settings
1 Select [Common] [Bar Code] from the menu.
2 As the setting dialog box will appear, make settings with reference to the following explanations.
Remark When making the setting in the project workspace
The setting dialog box can be displayed by double-clicking on in the
project workspace.
12 - 40 12.4 Bar Code Function
12.4.2 Settings
12.4.3 Setting items of bar code function 9
Set the device in which the data read by the bar code reader is stored.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
Items Description A F
Set the head device of those used for storing the data read by the bar code reader.
Device
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
Device Points Set the points of device used for storing the read data (2 to 32)
11
Delete Click the Delete button to delete the settings.
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.4 Bar Code Function 12 - 41
12.4.3 Setting items of bar code function
12.4.4 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using bar code function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Number of settable bar code function
Only one bar code function can be set for each project.
(2) Usage of bar code function based on GOT connection type
GOT-A900 series:
The bar code function is applicable for any connection type of GOT.
However, the bar code function is not available when the transparent function or the servo amplifier
monitor function is used.
GOT-F900 series:
The bar code function is available when the built-in RS-232C interface is not used.
Precedence of bar code function, servo amplifier monitor function and transparent
function
Only one of the bar code function, servo amplifier monitor function and transparent
function can be used.
The precedence is as follows:
High Precedence Low
Bar code function Servo amplifier monitor function Transparent function
Bar code setting in monitor screen Extended function OS for servo No data item
data amplifier monitor function is
installed in GOT
For example, the servo amplifier monitor function cannot be used even though the
extended function OS for the servo amplifier monitor function is installed in GOT,
when the bar code setting has been made in the monitor screen data downloaded to
GOT.
(3) Bar code that can be read
GOT is not available to two-dimensional code.
For the code that can be read, refer to the following technical news.
List of valid devices applicable for GOT900 series
12 - 42 12.4 Bar Code Function
12.4.4 Precautions
(4) System information setting
9
If the following system signals are ON, the data read by the bar code reader is not written to PLC
CPU.
(a) GOT-A900 series
PARTS
System signal 1
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Bar code input invalid signal
10
Bar code input read complete signal
GRAPH, METER
System signal 2
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Bar code input signal
(b) GOT-F900 series 11
System signal 1
ACTIONS
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Bar code input invalid signal
TRIGGER
Bar code input read complete signal
System signal 2
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
12
Bar code input signal
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.4 Bar Code Function 12 - 43
12.4.4 Precautions
Timing of input signal and input read complete signal
(1) Bar code input signal (system signal2.b6)
When the data read by the bar code reader are stored in the specified device,
this signal is turned ON.
To turn it OFF, turn the bar code input read complete signal ON.
(2) Bar code input read complete signal (system signal1.b6)
Turning ON this signal turns OFF the bar code input signal.
This signal is to be turned OFF by users.
<Relation between bar code input and signals>
Data read by
bar code reader 1234567890123ET
Store the read
data to the "1234567890123ET"
specified device
ON
Bar code OFF
input signal
ON *1
Bar code input
OFF
read complete
signal
*1 Turn the bar code input signal and the bar code input complete signal OFF after reading bar codes.
Otherwise, the bar code reader will not read data next time.
<Sequence program example (for QCPU)>
It is advisable to create a sequence program so that the bar code input read
complete signal will turn OFF when the bar code input signal is turned OFF.
GT Designer2 setting
System signal 1 D10 Device D100
System signal 2 D12 Device points 20
Signal for using in sequence program
Bar code input read complete signal M106
Bar code input signal M126
After Run, OFF for 1 scan only SM403
Transfer the value of D10 to M100 to M115
Store bar code input complete signal in M106
Transfer value of D12 to M120 to M135
Store bar code input signal in M126
After standby until bar code data is stored in
D100, transfer the value of D100 to D119 to
W100 to W119
Turn M106 ON GOT turns M126
OFF after M106 is turned ON.
Standby until M126 is OFF, turn M106 OFF
Transfer the value of M100 to M115 to D10
12 - 44 12.4 Bar Code Function
12.4.4 Precautions
9
2 Precautions for OS
(1) Extended function OS (specific for GOT-A900 series)
To use the bar code function, install the extended function OS (bar code) in GOT.
PARTS
3 Precautions for hardware
(1) GOT that can not use the bar code function 10
The bar code function is not available for the GT SoftGOT2, A950 handy GOT, F920GOT-K and
F940 handy GOT.
GRAPH, METER
(2) System configuration
Refer to the following manuals for the system configuration for using the bar code reader.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection System Manual)
11
GOT-F900 Series Hardware Manual (Connection)
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.4 Bar Code Function 12 - 45
12.4.4 Precautions
12.5 Sound
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This section explains the function to output sound from the speaker connected to GOT.
Sound output is available for the following functions
Touch switch function
Status observation function
Time action function
For using the sound output function with the GOT, register sound files on the GOT with the settings in this
section.
Example:
If the set conditions are satisfied, sounds are output.
Set with status observation function
M0 stop
OFF ON operation
If the set conditions are enabled, (M0 changes from OFF to ON), output the specified sound file.
12.5.1 Settings
1 Select [Common] [Sound Files] from the menu.
2 As the setting dialog box will appear, make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
Remark When making the settings in the project workplace
The setting dialog box can be displayed by double-clicking on in the project
workspace.
12 - 46 12.5 Sound
12.5.1 Settings
12.5.2 Setting items 9
Register sound files to be output with the GOT.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
Items Description A F
Click on the column of file names to select a sound file to be output.
Sound Files
Up to 100 sound files can be set.
TRIGGER
Delete Deletes the selected sound file.
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.5 Sound 12 - 47
12.5.2 Setting items
12.5.3 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the sound function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) The number of sound function data that can be set
Up to 100 sound function data can be set for one project.
(2) When executing sound output with touch switch
Make the settings in the auxiliary setting to play WAV sound files by touching the touch switch.
Section 4.5 Auxiliary Settings
(3) Sound files:
(a) The sound files data that can be played in GOT are limited within 8 seconds.
Extra sound part exceeding the limit of 8 seconds will be cut.
(b) Any change in data of WAV files that have been set as sound files will not be updated.
To update the change in data, reset it again as WAV sound file in the sound function setting.
(c) Sound files available for GOT are in the audio format of "8.000KHz, 16 bits, and mono"; while
most of sound files are generally created in different format.
Therefore, in order to use the general sound files for GOT, it is necessary to convert the audio
format to "8.000KHz, 16-bit and mono" with general sound editing software such as the sound
recorder in Windows 98.
Sound files conversion method with Window 98 sound recorder
1 In Windows , select [Start] [Program] [Accessory] [Entertainment]
[Sound Recorder] to start the sound recorder. (If there is no Sound
Recorder, add it from Windows 98 Add/Remove Programs)
2 Select [File] [Open], and then select the sound file to be converted.
3 Select [File] [Property], and then click on [Convert Now].
4 In the [Sound Selection] dialog box, set the attribute to [8.000KHz, 16-bit,
and mono] in the list box.
5 Save (Save or Save as) the converted file.
12 - 48 12.5 Sound
12.5.3 Precautions
9
2 Precautions for OS
(1) Extended function OS
Make sure that the extended function OS (sound) is installed in GOT when using the sound
function. (The installation is not required when using GT SoftGOT2)
PARTS
3 Precautions for hardware 10
(1) Unusable GOT
The sound function is not available for A95*GOT and A956WGOT.
GRAPH, METER
(2) Required optional devices
The following device is required when using the sound output function
GOT Required device
11
A985GOT(-V), A97*GOT, A960GOT Memory board
ACTIONS
(3) Other devices
The external speaker is required for sound output.
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.5 Sound 12 - 49
12.5.3 Precautions
12.6 Video
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This section explains the function that displays the image taken by video camera on the video window.
As the video window operates independently of other screens, base screen can be switched while the video
window is opened.
Video camera
(Channel No.1)
A 1254
Video camera
B 348 (Channel No.2)
Video camera
(Channel No.3)
Video camera
(Channel No.4)
Video window4
Video window3
Video window2
Video window1
Video operates in full mode ( This section ) or clip mode ( This section ).
<Difference between full mode and clip mode>
Items Full mode Clip mode
Overview Display the total image Display a part of the image in its original size.
Video window resolution (dots) 720 480 or 640 480 64 64 to 720 480
Display size change 100%, 50%, 25% of the original size Unchangeable (fixed at 100%)
Number of screens 4 1 (video window only)
12 - 50 12.6 Video
9
1 Method of displaying video window
Video window is displayed when 1 to 4 is stored into the video window channel No. device.
Video window is closed when 0 is stored into the video window channel No. device.
(There is no close button on video window)
PARTS
Example: When the image of channel No.1 is displayed on video window1.
10
<GT Designer2 setting>
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
<Operation>
D106
D107
0
0
1
0
(channel No.)
(Display size: 640 480)
13
D108 0 32 (X)
D109 0 32 (Y)
OTHERS
The image of channel No.1
is displayed based on the
settings of channel, size and
position for video window 1
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
The size and position of video window
The size and position of video window can be controlled based on the device (video
window device, video window X/Y device) value.
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.6 Video 12 - 51
2 Position of video window
Video window can be arranged on the base screen and overlap window1.
The position of video window can be specified within the following range.
Range A [Dot] B [Dot]
A
Base screen 0 to 736 0 to 528
Specify the top-left position Overlap window1 0 to 784 0 to 464
of video window as the
display position.
Video window
Display of video screen
(1) Setting of display position
Set the display position with the multiple of 16 (dot).
Even if display position is not set with the multiple of 16 (dot), the screen will be
displayed automatically with the multiple of 16.
(2) Video window on base screen
Even if video window is displayed out of the base screen, it will be arranged to fit
to the base screen automatically.
(3) Video window on window screen
If video window is displayed out of the overlap window1, the video image cannot
be displayed.
(4) Order of laying video screen
Video window can be displayed over or under overlap window (1, 2) or test
window according to the video/RGB common device settings.
( Section 12.6.2 Setting items of video)
However, the followings will be displayed over video window.
Floating alarm Key window
Comment window Confirmation or similar message displayed on GOT
12 - 52 12.6 Video
9
3 Method of moving video window
There are no move buttons in video window.
To move video window, change the device value set in display position (X-coordinate, Y-coordinate).
If overlap window is touched to move while multiple windows are being moved frequently, the overlap
PARTS
window may not be moved.
In this case, make sure to move the overlap window by device, or move it after the video window is
moved.
10
4 Arranging video window on overlap window
GRAPH, METER
(1) Video window can be arranged on overlap window1 only.
(2) The windows displayed over the overlap window1 will appear over the video window.
For the display order of windows, refer to the following.
Section 2.1.3 Whole screen specifications 11
ACTIONS
(3) When video window is arranged on overlap window1, the video window will automatically execute
transparent processing. (Refer to for transparent processing.)
TRIGGER
Pictures or objects on the overlap window may be displayed visible in the background of video
window.
(4) When video window is displayed, if arrangement setting (base screen/overlap window1) is 12
changed, the video window may be closed temporally and it will be opened at the specified position
(base screen/overlap window1).
EXTERNAL INPUT/
(5) The size of a video window placed over an overlap window is not changed even when the video
OUTPUT
window is touched.
To change the size of a video window, change the value of the device that has been set for window
size change. 13
( Section 12.6.2 Setting items of video)
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.6 Video 12 - 53
5 Full mode
In full mode, the image taken by video camera will be displayed on GOT as it is.
When full mode is applied, up to 4 screens can be displayed simultaneously on a video window.
The image can be switched to other one on one video screen by switching the channel No.
Video image
Image taken by camera is displayed as it is.
(1) Resolution (number of valid pixels) and display size
In full mode, image can be displayed in 720 480 dots or 640 480 dots. And the size of each
image can be changed in 3 levels (100%, 50% and 25%).
Display size Resolution of 720 480 dots Resolution of 640 480 dots
100% 720 480 dots 640 480 dots
50% 360 240 dots 320 240 dots
25% 180 120 dots 160 120 dots
*1 The resolution is based on the same setting as channel.
12 - 54 12.6 Video
(2) Change display size
9
The video window size can be changed by the following methods.
(a) Change by touching video window
(Size change by touching can be disabled by turning [Video/RGB Common] device b4 ON.
PARTS
(Refer to Section 12.6.2 )
10
GRAPH, METER
Display size: 25% Display size: 50% Display size: 100%
When video window display size is changed by touching, the window will change as follows.
11
<Example of changing display size>
ACTIONS
Display size: 50% When the video window is displayed at magnification of
25%, the first touch changes the magnification of
TRIGGER
display size into 50%.
Display size: 25% Display size: 100%
* The 50% magnification will change to 100% by first
touch.
Display size: 50%
12
(b) Change by writing value to the display size device
EXTERNAL INPUT/
(The magnification will differ according to the written value 0: 100% 1: 50% 2: 25%)
OUTPUT
D105 1 1 1 (Channel No.)
D106 2 1 0 (Display size)
D107 32 32 32 (Xposition)
D108 32 32 32 (Yposition) 13
Display size: 25% Display size: 50% Display size: 100%
OTHERS
(3) Display of multiple video windows
(a) The most lately displayed video window is located in the front.
14
(b) The video window, of which display position or size is changed, will be located in the front.
(c) As for overlapped video windows, the hidden one will be brought to the front by touching.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
If transparent processing is executed, video windows do not operate as above.
(d) If it is intended to display the image of the same channel on multiple video windows, it will be
displayed on the currently specified video window only.
Other video windows will be displayed in blue.
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.6 Video 12 - 55
(4) Invalid area of the touch switch around video window
According to the size of displayed video window, the following areas are invalid for touch switches.
Video window Right : Valid touch switch area
: Invalid touch switch area
: Current invalid touch switch area
Down
Display size Resolution 720 480 dots Resolution 640 480 dots
720 480 dots 640 480 dots
100%
(No invalid area) (No invalid area)
360 240 dots 320 240 dots
50%
(Invalid area Right: 8 dots) (No invalid area)
180 120 dots 160 120 dots
25%
(Invalid area Right: 12 dots, Down: 8 dots) (Invalid area Down: 8 dots)
Precautions for full mode
1. When returning the display size to the video window display size by touch
operation, the display position will be returned to the video window display
position.
2. If the resolution of a video image is higher than the resolution of a video window, a
part of the image is not displayed in the video window.
The image display position can be adjusted by changing the setting for the video
display setting items of the utility.
3.If the resolution of a video window displayed on the GOT is higher than that of the
video image, in the window area where the video image is not displayed, bright
points or indefinite colors are displayed.
For the method of selecting video window resolution, refer to Section 12.6.2.
12 - 56 12.6 Video
9
6 Clip mode
This mode is used to specify one part (clip area) of the image taken by video camera to display it in
actual size on GOT.
With this mode, the image can be displayed in actual size on the reduced display area of video window.
PARTS
It is applicable for video window 1; inapplicable for video window 2 to 4.
10
GRAPH, METER
Specified
part
11
ACTIONS
Video image
TRIGGER
The specified part of video image can be displayed in actual size.
(1) Select clip area
When setting the clip area, specify the top-left position to be displayed on the video image, and Y 12
(64 to 720 dots) and X (64 to 480 dots) size.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Set the top-left position of the part to
be displayed in clip mode.
OUTPUT
Set the X display size.
Set the Y size. 13
OTHERS
Video image
14
Operations of video window 2 to 4 in clip mode
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(1) Switched from "Full mode" to "Clip mode"
If full mode is switched to clip mode while video windows 2 to 4 are all opened,
these windows will be erased forcibly.
(2) Switched from "Clip mode" to "Full mode"
If clip mode is switched to full mode, video windows 2 to 4 will be displayed based
on the set channel No., display position and display size.
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.6 Video 12 - 57
7 Still image
The video image displayed in full mode and clip mode can be switched to still image.
When displaying multiple video windows in full mode, all the windows are switched to still image.
(Dynamic/still image selection bit
ON: b5) Turn bit ON to switch a
dynamic image to the still one.
D10 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
OFF ON
Precautions for using still image
(1) Invalid operations for still image
The following operations are invalid for still image.
To validate the operations, switch to animated image at first.
Change of video window channel Size change
Change of display position Erase of video window
Video window display
(2) Video window on overlap window
Make sure not to move the overlap window, when the video window image
arranged on the overlap window is set to still image.
Otherwise, the video image will not be displayed.
(3) When GOT is powered ON
When still image (when animated/still image selection bit is ON) is used, make
sure not to power the GOT ON.
If powered ON, the video image will not be displayed.
12 - 58 12.6 Video
9
8 Transparent processing
Specify the thru color to display the objects and shapes under the video window.
There are two processing methods: [Other Color Transparent] and [Specified Color Transparent].
When multiple video windows are displayed, all the windows execute transparent processing.
PARTS
(Selection bit for transparent
processing execution ON:b2).
The transparent processing is
executed when the bit turns ON
10
(Selection bit for transparent
processing specification method
ON:b3)
GRAPH, METER
The specified color is made
transparent when the bit turns ON A FED A FED
B CDE B CDE
D10 b3 b2 b1 b0
OFF ON
OFF ON
The figures/objects of the specified 11
color are made visible.
ACTIONS
Example:
Selection bit for Thru color specification
TRIGGER
Thru color Display
method: b3
The shape and object of color other than black are visible on
OFF (make other color transparent) 0 (Black)
video window
12
ON (make the specified color transparent) 0 (Black) Black shape and object are visible on video window
EXTERNAL INPUT/
When video window is arranged on overlap window
OUTPUT
When video window is arranged on overlap window, even if the transparent
processing selecting bit (b2) is OFF, the transparent processing will be executed
automatically. 13
Touch switch and numerical/ASCII input under the video window
By executing the transparent processing, touch switch and numerical/ASCII input
OTHERS
function under the video window will be usable.
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.6 Video 12 - 59
9 Application example of video window
The following are examples of using video window.
(1) Switching channel by touch switch
The channel on overlap window1 is switched whenever the touch switch is touched.
Channel1 Channel2 Channel3 Channel4
Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting
1 2 3 4 1...Repeat
Set video input signal D106 D108 32 (X-coordinate)
D100 (Channel No.)
(NTSC or PAL)
D107 0 (size) D109 32 (Y-coordinate)
(2) Enlarging screen as necessary
(a) Display the windows in small size at the bottom of screen usually, and enlarge them as
necessary. (The size can be changed by sequence program or touch switch)
Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting
D106 1 (Channel No.) D114 3 (Channel No.)
D107 2 (Size) D115 2 0 (Size)
D108 32 (X-coordinate) D116 384 32 (X-coordinate)
Set video input signal D109 480 (Y-coordinate) D117 480 0 (Y-coordinate)
D100
(NTSC or PAL)
D110 2 (Channel No.) D118 4 (Channel No.)
D111 2 (Size) D119 2 (Size)
D112 208 (X-coordinate) D120 560 (X-coordinate)
D113 480 (Y-coordinate) D121 480 (Y-coordinate)
12 - 60 12.6 Video
(b) Display windows in small size at the bottom of screen, and enlarge them in order as 9
necessary. (The size can be enlarged by touch switch or script)
PARTS
10
Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting
GRAPH, METER
D106 1 (Channel No.) D114 3 (Channel No.)
D107 2 0 2 (Size) D115 2 (Size)
D108 32 32 32 (X-coordinate) D116 384 (X-coordinate)
D109 480 0 480 (Y-coordinate) D117 480 (Y-coordinate)
11
Set video input signal
ACTIONS
D100
(NTSC or PAL) D110 2 (Channel No.) D118 4 (Channel No.)
D111 2 2 0 (Size) D119 2 (Size)
TRIGGER
D112 208 208 32 (X-coordinate) D120 560 (X-coordinate)
D113 480 480 0 (Y-coordinate) D121 480 (Y-coordinate)
12
Create the script that repeats the following operations whenever the touch switch is touched.
1) Window1 Small Big
EXTERNAL INPUT/
2) Window2 Big Small
Window2 Small Big
OUTPUT
3) Window3 Big Small
Window3 Small Big
13
(c) Display only one part of video image at the bottom of screen usually, and display the whole
video image as necessary. (The full mode and clip mode can be switched by sequence
program or touch switch)
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting
D101 70 (Clip X-coordinate) D105 1 (Channel No.)
Full mode/Clip mode selection D102 50 (Clip Y-coordinate) D106 0 (Size)
D100
D100.b0 ON OFF D103 256 (Clip width) D107 32 (X-coordinate)
D104 256 (Clip height) D108 400 32 (Y-coordinate)
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.6 Video 12 - 61
(3) Changing display target part of video image
Display the specified part of video image at the bottom of screen usually, and change the display
target part as necessary. (The X/Y-coordinate used in clip mode can be changed by sequence
program or touch)
Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting
70 90 80
D101 D105 1 (Channel No.)
(Clip X-coordinate)
50 60 20
D100 Select clip mode D102 D106 0 (Size)
(Clip Y-coordinate)
D103 256 (Clip width) D107 112 (X-coordinate)
D104 256 (Clip height) D108 112 (Y-coordinate)
12 - 62 12.6 Video
12.6.1 Settings 9
1 Select [Common] [System Environment] from the menu.
PARTS
2 Select [Video/RGB] on the system environment dialog box.
3 As the setting dialog box is displayed, make the setting according to the following explanation. 10
Remark Setting in project workplace
GRAPH, METER
Double click on [System Environment] to display the system environment dialog
box. And then, double click on Video/RGB.
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
Double click
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.6 Video 12 - 63
12.6.1 Settings
12.6.2 Setting items of video
Set the device used for video.
This dialog box is common to Video/RGB.
Items Description A F
Check this item to use video window or RGB screen.
In the case of A9GT-80V4/ A9GT-80V4R1:
Check this item to use video window only or use both video window and RGB screen.
Video Window/RGB Screen
Then, set the number of video windows to be video-displayed.
In the case of A9GT-80R1 (specific for RGB screen)
Check this item to use RGB screen.
Set the device that displays video window/RGB screen.
If video/RGB common device is set, the devices will be set in the following items automatically.
Video/RGB (When [Use A9GT-80R1 (RGB Screen Only)] is selected, only video/RGB common device is set)
The value of the device used for displaying video/RGB screen is handled as 16-bit binary value.
For the details about Video/RGB setting list, refer to and in this item.
12 - 64 12.6 Video
12.6.2 Setting items of video
9
1 Device setting items of GT Designer2
Following table explains the device setting items in video/RGB setting list.
Items Description Settings
PARTS
This device is to control video window and RGB screen operation.
Video/RGB Common *1 ----
(Refer to for details of the device)
10
Thru Color 0 (Black) - 255 (White) Specify color when executing transparent processing.
X position Specify the X-coordinate to display video image in clip mode
GRAPH, METER
Y position Specify the Y-coordinate to display video image in clip mode
Clip
Width Specify the width of clip image
Height Specify the height of clip image
Channel No. Specify the channel No. to be displayed in video window1. (0 to 4)
11
Specify the size of video window.
ACTIONS
*3
Size
Video Window1 *2 (0: 100% display, 1: 50% display, 2: 25% display)
X position Specify the X-coordinate to be displayed on video window
TRIGGER
Y position Specify the Y-coordinate to be displayed on video window
*1 When displaying RGB screen, the settings other than [Video/RGB Common] device are not required.
*2 Set video window 2 to 4 for multiple video windows setting. (The settings are the same as video window1.)
*3 When the display size is changed by touching video window, the set device value will not be changed. 12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.6 Video 12 - 65
12.6.2 Setting items of video
2 Setting items of [Video/RGB Common] device
The following information will be stored in the device specified in [Video/RGB Common].
Control the operation of video window/RGB screen by turning each bit device ON/OFF.
The settings for video window are common to video window 1 to 4.
Bit position Description Bit status Remarks
Valid when displaying video window
ON : Select clip mode
b0 Full/Clip mode selection Changeable when video window is
OFF : Select full mode
displayed
Video window arrangement ON : Select overlap window1 Execute transparent processing
b1
screen selection OFF : Select base screen automatically when b1 turns ON
Transparent processing ON : Execute transparent processing
b2
selection OFF : Do not execute transparent processing
Section 12.6 Transparent
Thru color specifying method ON : Make specified color transparent processing
b3
selection OFF : Make other color transparent
Select whether to change/keep Valid when opening video window
ON : Do not change size
b4 display size when touching Changeable when video window is
OFF : Change size
video window displayed
ON : Still image
b5 *1
Animated/still image selection Section 12.6 Still image
OFF : Animated image
ON : Display video window in front of
Valid when video window is opened
Display priority selection of overlap window and test window
b6 Changeable when video window is
video windows OFF : Display video window behind the
displayed
overlap window and test window
b7 Disabled ---- ----
Valid when opening video window is
Video input signal (type) ON : Input by PAL displayed for the first time after GOT
b8
selection OFF : Input by NTSC power is turned ON
Unchangeable after the above operation
Valid when video window is displayed for
ON : Select 720 480 dots the first time after GOT power is turned
b9 Video image resolution selection
ON
OFF : Select 640 480 dots
Unchangeable after the above operation
b10 to b14 Disabled ---- ----
Display/hide RGB screen ON : Display RGB screen
b15 Section 12.7 RGB
*2 OFF : Display GOT monitor screen
*1 When it is ON with other bits, the operations of other bits will not be reflected. (b5 has a higher priority than other
bits)
*2 When the screens of utility, system monitor function, ladder monitor function, special function module monitor
function, network monitor function and list editor function are displayed on GOT, they cannot be switched to the
RGB screen even if the bit turns ON.
Switch to the RGB screen after all the functions are completed.
12 - 66 12.6 Video
12.6.2 Setting items of video
12.6.3 Precautions 9
This section provides the precautions for using video function.
1 Precautions for drawing
PARTS
(1) The number of video function objects that can be set.
Only one object can be set for one project. 10
(2) Precautions for setting
GRAPH, METER
(a) Objects cannot be arranged on video window
(b) When using multiple video cameras, make the same video signal (NTSC/PAL) setting for
them.
If the video signal is different from that specified in GOT, the video image may not be displayed
correctly. 11
ACTIONS
Example:
GOT side Video camera side GOT side Video camera side
TRIGGER
NTSC NTSC
NTSC NTSC NTSC PAL 12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
2 Precautions for hardware
(1) Required extended device
OUTPUT
To use video function, the following device is required.
GOT Required device 13
Video input interface module
A985GOT-V
Video/RGB hybrid interface module
OTHERS
3 Precautions for use
(1) Display video image
(a) If cable is disconnected or camera is powered OFF and video signal is not input to the 14
specified channel, video image cannot be displayed.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(b) The width of the video image is 1.1 x longer compared to the actual image. APPENDICES
INDEX
12.6 Video 12 - 67
12.6.3 Precautions
12.7 RGB
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
This function is used to display PC screen on GOT.
When using RGB screen, select SVGA (800 600 dots) or VGA (640 480 dots)
1 Method of displaying RGB screen
RGB screen is switched to/from GOT monitor screen on PC according to the ON/OFF status of RGB
screen display/hide selection bit (the bit device within word device).
(GOT monitor screen and RGB screen cannot be displayed simultaneously.)
(RGB screen display/hide selection bit ON:
b15) When the bit is turned ON, switch the
GOT monitor screen to RGB screen.
A FED
B CDE
D10 b15 b2 b1 b0
OFF ON
Monitor screen
Switch
RGB screen Even when RGB screen is displayed,
monitor screen operates as well.
(1) Method of switching the RGB screen to the monitor screen
The monitor screen can be called by touching RGB screen.
Select the valid touch area within the GOT utility.
Refer to the following manual for GOT utility
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Extended Option Functions
Manual)
Whole Left-top Left-bottom
Touch the screen to switch Only touching the left-top of Only touching the left-bottom
to the monitor screen. the screen enables switching of the screen enables switching
to the monitor screen. to the monitor screen.
Right-top Right-bottom None
Only touching the right-top of Only touching the right-bottom Touching the screen switches
the screen enables switching of the screen enables switching to the monitor screen.
to the monitor screen. to the monitor screen.
12 - 68 12.7 RGB
(2) Precautions for switching to GOT monitor screen by touching RGB screen 9
When switching to GOT monitor screen by touching RGB screen, the selection bit
status of RGB screen display/hide will not turned OFF.
This keeps the selection bit of RGB screen display/hide ON, and RGB screen
cannot be called.
PARTS
Therefore, when switching to GOT monitor screen by touching RGB screen, make
sure to turn OFF the selection bit of RGB screen display/hide.
10
Using the script function enables the selection bit status of RGB screen display/
hide to turn OFF, when the RGB screen is switched to the GOT monitor screen by
GRAPH, METER
touching the screen.
The following shows the setting of the above mentioned script function.
Setting items Setting data
Screen switching
11
Video/RGB common device: D100 (RGB screen display/hide selection bit: D100. b15)
ACTIONS
device setting
System information
Write device: set 15 devices starting from D33
setting
TRIGGER
Type : Project script
Trigger : Ordinary
Data type: 16-bit signed BIN 12
Script description:
EXTERNAL INPUT/
if(([b:D100.b15]==ON) //If the selection bit of RGB screen display/hide is ON
&&[w:D35]==-1)){ //And the base screen No. storage area of system information
is -1(RGB screen)
OUTPUT
Script function setting
[b:TMP0000.b0]=ON ; //Turn ON the flag displayed on RGB screen.
}
else{
if([b:TMP0000.b0]==ON){ //When switching the RGB screen to the monitor screen
13
[b:D100.b15] = OFF ; //Turn OFF the selection bit of RGB screen display/hide
[b:TMP0000.b0] = OFF ; //Turn OFF the flag displayed on RGB screen
}
}
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.7 RGB 12 - 69
2 The screen save of RGB screen
When RGB screen is displayed, GOT screen save function will operate after energy saving function of
PC monitor.
While energy saving function of PC monitor is not active, screen save function is disabled even if it has
been set for GOT.
Execute RGB screen save is executed as follows.
(Only when human sensor is set)
[ ATTENTION NO [ ATTENTION NO
SIGNEL PLEASE SIGNEL PLEASE
CHECK INPUT OR CHECK INPUT OR
CONNECTION ] CONNECTION ]
The above message appears Even if the human sensor OFF When the screen save time
after the energy saving of PC delay set on GOT side has passed, set on GOT side has passed,
display has been detected. display (message) does not change. GOT is in screen save status.
<Relation between PC status and validity of GOT screen save>
PC status Validity of GOT screen save
PC screen Invalid
Screen save action (It is still PC screen)
Valid
Energy saving function operation of the display
(PC screen Above message GOT screen save status)
Remark (1) Screen save operation during monitoring
Screen save function operates when GOT monitor screen is displayed. Energy
saving function of PC display is not relevant.
For the details of GOT screen save function, refer to GOT-A900 series Operating
Manual (Extended Option Functions Manual).
(2) No RGB signal is input to GOT
When no RGB signal is input to GOT due to cable disconnection or other
accident, the same screen as the energy saving PC display appears on the GOT
display
3 VGA Display
When using VGA (640 480 dots) for display, since the resolution is different from that of A985GOT-V
(800 600 dots), the margin parts will be displayed in black.
12 - 70 12.7 RGB
12.7.1 Settings 9
1 Select [Common] [System Environment] from the menu.
PARTS
2 Select [Video/RGB] from the tree on the system environment dialog box.
3 As the setting dialog box is displayed, make the setting according to the following explanation. 10
Remark Setting in object workplace
GRAPH, METER
Double click on System Environment to display the system environment dialog box.
And then, double click on [Video/RGB].
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
Double click
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.7 RGB 12 - 71
12.7.1 Settings
12.7.2 Setting items of RGB
Set the devices used for RGB display.
This dialog box is common to Video/RGB.
Refer to the following for video settings.
Section 12.6.2 Setting items of video
Items Description A F
Check this item to use video window or RGB screen.
In the case of A9GT-80V4/ A9GT-80V4R1:
Check this item to use video window only or use both video window and RGB screen.
Video Window/RGB Screen
Then, set the number of video windows to be video-displayed.
In the case of A9GT-80R1 (for RGB screen only)
Check this item to use RGB screen.
Set the devices used for displaying video/RGB screen.
The value of the device used for displaying video/RGB screen is handled as 16-bit binary value.
The followings are stored in the devices that are specified in [Video/RGB Common].
Turn ON/OFF bit device to control RGB screen operation.
b15 b14 to b0
Video/RGB Setting View Enabled/disabled in video window
Select the display/hide of RGB screen ON : Display RGB screen
OFF : Display GOT monitor screen
*1 When each screen of utility, system monitor function, ladder monitor function, special function
module monitor function, network monitor function or list editor function is displayed in GOT, it
cannot be switched to the RGB screen even if the bit is turned ON.
Switch to the RGB screen after all the functions are completed
12 - 72 12.7 RGB
12.7.2 Setting items of RGB
12.7.3 Precautions 9
This section provides the precautions for using RGB function.
1 Precautions for drawing
PARTS
(1) The number of RGB function objects that can be set.
Only one object can be set for each project. 10
2 Precautions for hardware
GRAPH, METER
(1) Required extended device
To use RGB function, the following device is required.
GOT Required devices
A985GOT-V
RGB input interface module 11
Video/RGB hybrid interface module
ACTIONS
3 Precautions for use
TRIGGER
(1) Offline display
GOT screen is displayed offline (when downloading monitor screen data from GT Designer2)
If bit for RGB control is ON when GOT goes from offline to online, the RGB screen will appear after 12
monitor screen is displayed once.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
<Example of screen during download>
OUTPUT
13
RGB screen Downloading Monitor screen RGB screen
(2) Object function when RGB screen is displayed
All the objects will operate even when RGB screen is displayed.
OTHERS
(3) Hard copy function when RGB screen is displayed
Even though the hard copy function is used when RGB screen is displayed, printing RGB screen or 14
storing BMP file to memory card is disabled.
(When hard copy is executed, the message, ATTENTION NO SIGNAL PLEASE CHECK INPUT
OR CONNECTION will be hard-copied.) SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
12.7 RGB 12 - 73
12.7.3 Precautions
13. OTHERS
13.1 Set Overlay Screen Function
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
Other base screens or window screens can be called on the base screen and displayed as a single screen
by using this function.
Setting the same objects onto multiple screens can save memory capacity.
<When not using the set overlay screen function> <When using set overlay screen function>
Set four touch switches. (2 on production status screen1 and Set two touch switches. (2 on the set overlay screen)Touch switch
2 on production status screen2) setting is not required for production status screen1 and 2 because
these touch switches have already been registered on the called
screen.
Production Production
status screen1 status screen1
RUN ST. RUN ST.
Base screen1 Base screen1
(Base screen1)
RUN ST.
Production Production
status screen2 status screen2 Called screen
(B-10: Base screen10)
RUN ST. RUN ST.
Base screen2 Base screen2 Create touch switch dedicated screen
(Base screen2) called from each screen
1 Multiple called screens can be displayed
Multiple called screens can be displayed on one basic screen.
A FE D Called screen
B CDE (B2: Base screen2)
Basic screen
(Base screen1)
Called screen
(B3: Base screen)
13 - 1 13.1 Set Overlay Screen Function
9
2 Up to the 16th nesting can be called (specific for GOT-A900 series)
As up to the 16th nesting can be set, screen setting with high flexibility can be realized.
Production status screen1 A1254
A1254 B 348
PARTS
B 348
Called screen
Basic screen Called screen Called screen
(W-3: Window screen3)
10
(Base screen1) (B-10: Base screen10) (B-6: Base screen6)
GRAPH, METER
Production status screen2 A1254
A1254 B 348
B 348
Called screen
(W-1: Window screen1)
Basic screen
(Base screen2) 11
First Second Third
ACTIONS
13.1.1 Arrangement and settings
TRIGGER
1 Activate the basic screen.
12
2 Select [Object] [Set Overlay Screen] from the menu.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
3 In the Set Overlay Screen dialog box, select the screens to call up and click on the [OK] button.
(Click on the Image button to display the Screen Image List dialog box.)
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Set Overlay List Screen Image List
4 Arrange the called screen on the basic screen. (It will be arranged in the front for GOT-F900 series.)
APPENDICES
Click on the start Display the
position for call. called screen.
INDEX
13.1 Set Overlay Screen Function 13 - 2
13.1.1 Arrangement and settings
(1) Editing of called screens
By double-clicking a called screen placed on the basic screen, the called screen
can be opened to be edited.
(2) Easy setting method
The screen calling setting can also be made by dragging from the workspace or
the Screen Image List window.
For details of the workspace or the Screen Image List window, refer to the
following manual.
GT Designer2 Version&drsquare Basic Operation/Data Transfer Manual
Drag
Drag
13 - 3 13.1 Set Overlay Screen Function
13.1.1 Arrangement and settings
13.1.2 Check of the settings 9
The setting details of the call function can be checked in the project work space.
PARTS
Check
Production status screen1 A1254 10
A1254 B 348
B 348
GRAPH, METER
W-3: Window screen3
Production B-10: Base screen10 B-6: Base screen6
status screen1 A1254
(Base screen1) B 348
W-1: Window screen1 11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
Items Description A F
Check this item to display the setting of the display overlay screen.
When this is set, the called screen names will be displayed in a tree structure.
12
Click on or to display or hide the called screen of the lower level.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Right click on the called screen name to display the right-click menu*1.
When the screen name is enclosed with "<>", the display overlay screen is set as a functional
OUTPUT
loop; therefore any screens after this point will not be called.
Display Overlay Screen
1) Screen calling 13
1 base screen W-1 window screen1
OTHERS
2) Screen calling
For details of *1, refer to the following.
14
*1 Right-click menu
SCRIPT FUNCTION
The following table explains the menu items displayed when right clicking the called screen name. APPENDICES
Items Description A F
Edit The setting of display overlay screen can be changed in the Display Overlay Screen dialog box.
Remove Overlay Deletes the setting of the Display Overlay Screen.
Open Opens the screen.
INDEX
13.1 Set Overlay Screen Function 13 - 4
13.1.2 Check of the settings
13.1.3 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using the set overlay screen function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Screen that can be called
GOT-A900 series: Base screen, window screen
GOT-F900 series: Base screen
(2) Maximum number of called screens (The number of screens that can be called and displayed on
the basic screen)
GOT-A900 series: 2047 screens
GOT-F900 series: 5 screens
(3) Maximum nesting number (nesting of further call to the called screen)
GOT-A900 series: 16 (Not including the basic screen)
GOT-F900 series: Nesting is not available.
(4) Edit of called screen
(a) The called screen cannot be edited on the basic screen.
Edit must be done on the called screen.
(b) Once the called screen is edited, it will be reflected to all of the basic screens where the edited
screen is called.
Base screen1 Base screen1
Base screen4 Base screen5 Base screen4 Base screen5
13 - 5 13.1 Set Overlay Screen Function
13.1.3 Precautions
(5) When cascading shapes and objects
9
GOT-A900 series
Figure
The figure of called screen is
PARTS
displayed in the front.
10
Basic screen Called screen
Screen
GRAPH, METER
Object data
Among the objects of basic screen
and called screen, the one whose
12345
000001
12345
000001 value is changed will be displayed in 11
the front.
ACTIONS
Basic screen Called screen
Screen
TRIGGER
Touch switch
Initially, the touch switch
corresponding to the latest screen will 12
be displayed in the front.After, the
screen where touch switch trigger has
EXTERNAL INPUT/
changed will be displayed.
Basic screen Called screen
OUTPUT
Screen display
The touch switches on the called screen has different validity of display and action according
to the number of called screens and their overlapping state. 13
(Even if the touch switch is displayed in the front, it may not function properly.)
This section (9) Touch switch operation
Screen background
OTHERS
The background color of the called screen will be displayed in the front.
When the background color and the basic screen shape color are overlapped, the shape will
not be displayed. 14
The shape of basic screen will not be
SCRIPT FUNCTION
displayed
Basic screen Called screen
Screen display
APPENDICES
INDEX
13.1 Set Overlay Screen Function 13 - 6
13.1.3 Precautions
GOT-F900 series
Figure
The figure of called screen is
displayed at the back.
Basic screen Called screen
Screen
Touch switch
Touch switch of called screen is
displayed at the back.When touch
switches are overlapped, only the
touch switch of basic screen will
Basic screen Called screen
Screen function by touching.
(6) When exclusive objects (which only one setting is allowed per each screen) are overlapped
Do not cascade such objects created by the data list function and the alarm history function.
Otherwise, the set numbers of objects are displayed, however, they cannot be displayed correctly
because of the function restrictions.
(7) Display/hide called screen according to the security level and nesting of called screen (GOT-A900
series only)
The security level set in each called screen is valid.
The precautions for security setting in each called screen are as follows.
(a) The called screen will not be displayed when the security level of the called screen is higher
than that of the password input on the basic screen.
(b) The screen display using the nesting structure cannot be called from the screen with security
settings enabled.
(c) The status observation function and the script function set to the called screen that is not
displayed cannot be executed.
Example: Called screens that can be displayed by password of security level2
Basic screen
Security level0
Called screen1 Called screen5 Called screen8
Security level1 Security level4 Security level1
Called screen2 Called screen4 Called screen6 Called screen7 Called screen9
Security level3 Security level2 Security level1 Security level2 Security level2
Called
Called screen3
screen10
Security level1
Security level3
Screen not displayed
13 - 7 13.1 Set Overlay Screen Function
13.1.3 Precautions
(8) Displaying order for calling multiple screens (specific for GOT-A900 series)
9
When multiple called screens have been set on one screen, they are displayed in the order of
setting in GT Designer2 or called screen nesting.
Since the current screen is displayed on the previous screen, the screen with the lowest order will
be displayed in the front most.
PARTS
Precedence for display priority
1. When multiple called screens are set, they are displayed in the order set in GT Designer2. 10
2. For called screens that have been nested, the screen with deeper nesting will be displayed in
the front most.
GRAPH, METER
3. If the above conditions 1 and 2 are both applied, priority is given to the nested called screen.
Example: When setting multiple called screens including nested called screens ( 1) to 11): Display order)
The setting order of called screen in GT Designer2
11
1) Basic screen
ACTIONS
2002/3/25
TRIGGER
2) 6) 9)
12
First
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Nesting 3) 5) 7) 8) 10)
of called
screens
Sec. A 1254 B 1254
C 348 D 348
13
4) 11)
OTHERS
Third
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(1) Security function, status observation function and script function of called screen
The security function, status observation function and script function set for each
called screen are processed in the same order as the called screen display.
(2) Check methods of nesting and setting order
Nesting can be checked in the project workspace.
Section 13.1.2 Check of the settings
APPENDICES
The set order can be checked in the data view. (Data are displayed in the order of
setting in the data view.)
Refer to the following manual for the data view.
GT Designer2 Version Operating Manual
INDEX
13.1 Set Overlay Screen Function 13 - 8
13.1.3 Precautions
(9) Touch switch operation
When screens are called up to the same screen, operable touch switches are those set on called
screen 1 to 99. (The touch switches set on called screen later than 100*1 are not available.)
Note that, when touch switches are overlapped, up to touch switches on the sixth screen from the
basic screen will function.
Touch Touch Touch Touch Touch
Called screen100
Called screen99
Called screen98
*2
Called screen9
Called screen8
Called screen7
Called screen6
Called screen5
Called screen4
Called screen3
Called screen2
Called screen1
Basic screen (calling screen)
Touch switch acts. Touch switch doesn't act.
*1: The called screen number of GOT-F900 series is 1 to 5.
*2: Indicates no overlapping of touch switches are observed in the called screens 9 to 98.
When touch switches of different called screens are overlapping one another, the upper most
touch switch will be executed.
Therefore, touching it in short time may not be enough to activate all of them.
(Make an appropriate setting such as lamp display so that a lamp will light up when the touch
switch on the bottom is activated.)
If the simultaneous press keys are overlapping one another, then they will not be functioning,
even if the upper most key is touched.
Remark Touch switch overlapping
Multiple actions can be set for one touch switch even if the set overlay function is not
used.
Section 6.2 Touch Switch
13 - 9 13.1 Set Overlay Screen Function
13.1.3 Precautions
13.2 Test Function 9
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
PARTS
This section explains the test function that displays test window on monitor screen and changes device
value.
This function is applicable for maintenance and inspection using monitor screen, providing the following
10
functions.
Test function provides following operations.
GRAPH, METER
Bit device ON/OFF Change the current value of word device
Change the set value of timer/counter Change the current value of buffer memory
Arrange touch switch (special function switch) to set the test function. 11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
NETWK No.[0] STATION[ ]
DEVICE[X] [ 0 ] RST:0 SET:1TN
X Y M L S
B F
G AC DEL
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Remark Test except when the monitor screen is displayed
The test window can be displayed to change the device value, as well when the 13
ladder monitor function, system monitor function or special function module monitor
function is used.
Refer to the following manuals for the test methods of various functions.
OTHERS
GOT-A900 series Operating Manual (Extended Option Functions
Manual)
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
13.2 Test Function 13 - 10
1 Method of operating test window
This section explains how to operate the test window.
Touch the touch switch to display the test window.
NETWK No.[0] STATION[FF]
SET/RST VALUE16 BM VAL16
SET VAL VALUE32 BM VAL32
CANCEL
Select the device type to be changed
SET/RST : Set/reset the bitdevice.
NETWK No.[0] STATION[FF]
Current value 16/Current value 32 : Change the currentvalue of
SET/RST VALUE16 BM VAL16 word device.
Set value : Change the set valueof T.C.
SET VAL VALUE32 BM VAL32
CANCEL
BIN Value 16/BIN Value 32 : Change the currentvalue of
buffermemory.
Specify the network No., device and value of the device of which value
is to be changed.
, Change the input area by keys.
NETWK No.[ ] STATION[ ]
In the case of data link system
DEVICE[ ] [ ] VLIK
S
D W R Network No. :0
A Z V T C
E G AC DEL Station No. : FF (host), 0 (master station)
1 to 64 (local station)
In the case of network system
Network No. : 0 (self loop), 1 to 255 (specified loop)
Station No. : FF (host), 0 (control station),
Change keys according to input area. 1 to 64 (normal station)
Define the value change by the definition key
13.2.1 Arrangement and settings
Refer to the following section for arrangement and settings of the touch switch.
Section 6.2.1 Arrangement and settings
13.2.2 Setting items
Refer to the following section for setting items of the touch switch.
Section 6.2.4 Setting items of special function switch
13 - 11 13.2 Test Function
13.2.1 Arrangement and settings
13.2.3 Precautions 9
This section provides the precautions for using test function.
Refer to the following section for the precautions other than described in this section.
Section 6.2.12 Precautions
PARTS
1 Precautions for drawing 10
(1) When setting line graph
GRAPH, METER
When locus type line graph has been set on base screen, the test window cannot be displayed.
(2) Windows that cannot be displayed on the same screen
The test window and overlap window 2 cannot be displayed on the same screen.
11
2 Precautions for hardware
ACTIONS
(1) Inapplicable GOT
The test function cannot be used in GT SoftGOT2, A95*GOT, A956WGOT, A950 Handy GOT and
TRIGGER
GOT-F900 series.
3 Precautions for use
12
(1) PLC CPU control
Executing test function may affect the control of PLC CPU.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Make sure to fully confirm the security before executing the test function.
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
13.2 Test Function 13 - 12
13.2.3 Precautions
14. SCRIPT FUNCTION
14.1 Overview
This chapter explains the script functions applicable to the GOT-A900 series.
The script functions are designed to control the GOT display with the GOT's original programs (hereafter
abbreviated to "script").
Controlling the GOT display with the GOT side script drastically reduces the load on the system side (e.g.
PLC CPU, microcomputer) display.
In addition, the specifications, GT Designer2 settings, program example and troubleshooting of the script
functions are explained in this chapter.
14.1.1 Features
1 Ease of system maintenance
As the necessary programs can be created and assigned to GOT with the script functions in advance,
the system side handles only machine control programs, facilitating system maintenance.
2 Various screen controls by GOT alone
Using the script functions enables the following operations that could not be achieved by GOT alone.
(1) Various object functions are available
(a) A single lamp represents multiple bit device statuses.
(b) A specific part is displayed if any of multiple bit devices is ON, and is erased if they are all OFF.
(c) At the same time as a numeric value is input, a part indicating "Already input" is pasted to the
place adjacent to the input value display frame.
(d) A single touch switch can make multiple operations corresponding to multiple statuses.
(e) At the same time as the alarm list (system alarm) function detects an error, the corresponding
troubleshooting screen appears automatically.
(2) Processing of complicated arithmetic
(a) A polynomial operation can be more simply represented on a single line as compared with
ladder program.
Ladder program Script
[w:D5] = ([w:D1] - [w:D2])/100+[w:D3]-[w:D4])-100;
(b) Not only four fundamental operations but also various application arithmetic functions, such as
trigonometric and exponential functions, can be used optionally.
14 - 1 14.1 Overview
14.1.1 Features
(3) Expanded applicable fields
9
(a) The date is calculated by entering the start date (month, day and year) and the duration
(number of days) after that date.
What is the date 345 days after May 20, 2000? April 30, 2001
PARTS
(b) The day of the week is calculated by entering the corresponding date (month, day and year).
Which day of the week falls on February 21, 1961? Tuesday
10
3 Easy programming language
Script can be created with entry-level programming knowledge, as it is C language-like program.
GRAPH, METER
4 Compatibility with commercially-available programming editors
Commercially-available text editors (e.g. Microsoft Windows -standard memo pad, Wordpad) are
applicable for programming to improve program productivity. 11
ACTIONS
5 Execution condition selectable for each script
Any of various conditions (any time, periodic, bit OFF to ON/ON to OFF, during bit ON/OFF, periodic
TRIGGER
during bit ON/OFF) can be selected as a trigger to execute each script, which enables script execution
scheduling.
12
6 Fully useful debugging functions
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Since a script is C language-like program, the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g.
Microsoft Visual C++) can be used for its simulation by making slight corrections. This is effective for
OUTPUT
debugging a complicated script that includes many control statements.
The system monitor function is useful for hardware debugging using GOT.
The test and device monitor functions are available to check conditional branching in a script. By
13
monitoring the GOT special registers (GS), error information and a script in execution can be easily
confirmed.
7 Check the validity of the syntax for the created scripts
OTHERS
The validity of the syntax for the created scripts can be checked using GT Designer2 before executing
on GOT, which increases the programming efficiency.
14
8 The script language created on Digital package is convertible
It is possible to convert the script language (D script/global D script) created on Digital package "GP- SCRIPT FUNCTION
PRO/PBIII for Windows 95 (Ver. 3.0)" in order to operate it on GOT.
Remark (1) Execution condition setting and syntax validity check
Make "execution condition setting" and "syntax validity check" on GT Designer2 at
the time of monitor screen creation.
For details, refer to the following.
APPENDICES
Section 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings
(2) Converting script language created on Digital package
Convert the script language created on Digital package using GT Converter.
Refer to the following for details of convertible data and conversion method.
GT Converter2 Version Operating Manual
INDEX
14.1 Overview 14 - 2
14.1.1 Features
14.1.2 Precautions for Use
This section provides the precautions required for using script function.
1 Applicable range of the script functions
Since script functions are designed to control the GOT display, do not use them for machine control that
requires the severe timing for execution.
When changing the data within PLC from GOT, create an interlock circuit in a sequence program to
ensure that the whole system will operate safely.
2 Stop of the script processing
Any of the following cases disables the corresponding script to be processed, resulting in an error.
A numerator is divided by a denominator of 0
A monitor device value cannot be handled as BCD when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" is selected as
a script data format.
Example: [D0]=[D1]: Current value of D1 is "0x991A"
An operation result is outside the BCD range when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" is selected as a
script data format.
Example: 16-bit: Other than 0 to 9999
32-bit: Other than 0 to 99999999
As the write target device of the while statement, a temporary work (TMP) is not used but the PLC
CPU device or GOT internal device (GD) is used.
For details, refer to the following.
Applicable data range
Section 14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
Details of while statement
Section 14.2.2 Control structure
Corrective actions to be taken when script processing has stopped
Section 14.7 Troubleshooting
3 Differences in processing result between data formats
Note that any of the following cases will result in an unintended processing.
When other than "16-bit BCD" and "32-bit BCD" has been selected as script data format, the constant
is described that is outside the selected format range.
When "16-bit unsigned BIN" or "32-bit unsigned BIN" has been selected as the script data format, the
negative constant is described.
When other than "real number" has been selected as script data format, the constant with a decimal
point is described.
For details on data format, refer to the following.
Section 14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
14 - 3 14.1 Overview
14.1.2 Precautions for Use
9
4 Instructions for monitor device description
Some PLC CPU includes the monitor devices of which Nos. have to be described in the specific number
of digits.
Failure to observe this instruction may cause a malfunction.
PARTS
For details on describing method, refer to the following.
Section 14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods 10
5 Instructions for assignment delay
GRAPH, METER
The script function writes the operation result to the PLC CPU at the end of one script.
Therefore, performing assignment processing as "Example 1" causes a write delay.
Describe a script as "Example 2" and "Example 3" to reduce the frequency of communications with the
PLC CPU and avoid influence on monitor processing. 11
ACTIONS
Example 1: Assignment processing using PLC CPU devices
TRIGGER
[w:D1] = [w:D0]; //substitutes D0 into D1.
[w:D2] = [w:D1]; //substitutes D1 into D2.
12
D0 100 100
EXTERNAL INPUT/
D1 200 100
OUTPUT
D2 300 200
Script start Script end
13
In this script, the D0 value is not reflected on D2 immediately, causing a write delay.
This status persists until this script is processed.
Note that using the GOT internal devices (GD, GB) as the assignment devices will give the same
result.
OTHERS
Example 2: Assignment processing using temporary works
14
[w:TMP0001] = [w:D0]; //substitutes D0 into TMP0001.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
[w:D1] = [w:TMP0001]; //substitutes TMP0001 into D1.
[w:D2] = [w:TMP0001]; //substitutes TMP0001 into D2.
D0 100 100
D1 200 100
D2 300 100
APPENDICES
Script start Script end
Using the temporary works designed for script functions prevents a write delay.
For details on temporary works, refer to the following.
Section 14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
INDEX
14.1 Overview 14 - 4
14.1.2 Precautions for Use
Example 3: Assignment processing using GOT internal devices (GD, GB)
[w:GD1] = [w:D0]; //substitutes D0 into GD1.
[w:D1] = [w:GD1]; //substitutes GD1 into D1.
[w:D2] = [w:GD1]; //substitutes GD1 into D2.
Using GOT internal devices (GD, GB) enables the same processing timing as temporary works and
prevents a write delay.
When using the GOT internal devices to prevent an assignment delay, cancel the GOT internal
device assignment delay in the script setting of GT Designer2.
When GOT internal device is used.
When GOT internal device (GD, GB) assignment delay is cancelled, a link scan will
be made on each line including the GOT internal device (GD, GB).
Note that the monitor processing of the GOT may delay when GOT internal devices
(GD, GB) are used in many places.
6 Precautions for converting script language created using Digital package
The LS devices described within the script language that is created using Digital package are designed
to be free from an assignment delay.
Therefore, when Digital-based script language including LS devices as shown in "Example 1" in (5) is
converted, this may result in different operation on GOT.
As shown in "Example 2" in (5), use temporary works in Digital-based script language including LS
devices to prevent an assignment delay.
14 - 5 14.1 Overview
14.1.2 Precautions for Use
14.2 Specifications 9
This section explains the specifications of the script functions.
PARTS
14.2.1 Type
Script functions can be classified into following types.
10
1 Project script function
GRAPH, METER
This type of script operates for the whole project created using GT Designer2.
The project script function is always executable during online processing of GOT.
A script is executed when its preset execution condition is satisfied.
Up to 256 scripts can be set for one project. 11
ACTIONS
Project script application
As operating for the whole project, a project script is useful for the following case:
TRIGGER
Example: At the same time when the alarm list (system alarm) function detects an
error, the troubleshooting screen is displayed automatically.
12
Precautions for setting project script
EXTERNAL INPUT/
The project script monitor devices are always operating.
Therefore, note that increasing the number of monitor points will make the monitor
OUTPUT
screen slower to appear.
13
2 Screen script function
This type of script operates for each screen created on GT Designer2.
The screen script function is executable only while the corresponding screen appears during online
processing of GOT.
OTHERS
A script is executed when its preset execution condition is satisfied.
These scripts can be set on base screens/window screens (superimpose window, overlap window 1,
overlap window 2).
14
Screens called by the screen calling function will also be the targets of script processing.
However, screens shown by the part display function will not be the target of script processing. SCRIPT FUNCTION
Up to 256 scripts can be set for one screen (including the screen called by the screen calling function).
Precautions for setting screen script
Note that increasing the number of screen script monitor device points will make the
monitor screen slower to appear.
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.2 Specifications 14 - 6
14.2.1 Type
14.2.2 Control structure
This section explains the control structure of the script functions.
The following commands (control statements, operators, functions, etc.) are used to program scripts.
Nesting is allowed in if, while and switch statements.
A return statement is used to end a script.
Item Command Description
[Statement example] if (conditional expression) {set of expressions}
[Function] Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression), and if its result is true
if (other than 0), executes the {set of expressions}.
[Point] An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to perform specific
processing for a given value or to change a program sequence.
[Statement example] if (conditional expression) {set of expressions 1} else {set of expressions 2}
[Function] Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression), and if its result is true
(other than 0), executes the {set of expressions 1}, or if false (0), executes the {set of
if to else
expressions 2}.
[Point] An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to perform specific
processing for a given value or to change a program sequence.
[Statement example] while (continuous conditional expression) {set of expressions}
[Function] Evaluates the (continuous conditional expression), and if its result is true (other than 0),
repeats execution of the {set of expressions}.
If the "continuous conditional expression" is false (0), escapes from the while statement
without execution.
while
[Point] A while statement is used to perform given processing for up to a specific purpose.
(For example, waiting for touch key input)
Making the continuous conditional expression always true (other than 0) results in an
infinite loop.
A temporary work must be used as the write target device.
Control [Statement example] switch (term)
statement {
case constant : set of expressions;break;
case constant : set of expressions;break;
default : set of expressions;
}
[Function] Creates a control statement using four reserved words of switch, case, break and default.
switch In either of the following cases, executes the "sets of expressions" following the case and
case default statements.
default The (term) value matches the "constant"
break It does not match the case statement and there is a default statement
In either of the following cases, escapes from { } of switch without execution.
There is a break statement within a script
There are no case statements including the "constants" corresponding to the (term) and
no default statement.
Note that there may be no break and default statements in the control statement.
[Point] The switch statement is used when a given variable value requires different processings
to be performed.
[Statement example] return;
return [Function] Ends a script.
[Point] A single script can have multiple returns.
[Statement example] ;
; [Function] Represents the end of a single statement.
This symbol is necessary at the end of a single statement.
(Continued to next page)
14 - 7 14.2 Specifications
14.2.2 Control structure
9
Item Command Description
[Statement example] if ((relational operation expression) && (relational operation expression)) {.....}
&& [Function] If two (relational operation expressions) are both true, resulting in 1; if either is false,
resulting in 0. (Logical AND operator)
PARTS
[Statement example] if ((relational operation expression) || (relational operation expression)) {.....}
[Function] If either of relational operation expressions is true, resulting in 1; if both are false,
Logical ||
resulting in 0. 10
(Logical OR operator)
[Statement example] if (!(relational operation expression)) {.....}
GRAPH, METER
! [Function] If the relational operation expression is 0, resulting in 1; otherwise, resulting in 0.
(Logical NOT operator)
[Statement example] <Term 1> < <term 2>
<
[Function] <Term 1> is less than <term 2>. (Left inequality operator)
11
[Statement example] <Term 1> <= <term 2>
ACTIONS
<= [Function] <Term 1> is less than or equal to <term 2>.
(Equivalence left inequality operator)
TRIGGER
[Statement example] <Term 1> > <term 2>
>
[Function] <Term 1> is greater than <term 2>. (Right inequality operator)
Relational
[Statement example] <Term 1> >= <term 2>
>= [Function] <Term 1> is greater than or equal to <term 2>.
12
(Equivalence right inequality operator)
EXTERNAL INPUT/
[Statement example] <Term 1> != <term 2>
!=
[Function] <Term 1> is not equal to <term 2>. (Non-equivalence operator)
Operator
OUTPUT
[Statement example] <Term 1> == <term 2>
==
[Function] <Term 1> is equal to <term 2>. (Equivalence operator)
[Statement example] <Term> + <factor> 13
+
[Function] Adds <factor> to <term>. (Addition operator)
[Statement example] <Term> ---- <factor>
----
[Function] Subtracts <factor> from <term>. (Subtraction operator)
OTHERS
[Statement example] <Term> * <factor>
*
[Function] Multiplies <term> by <factor>. (Multiplication operator)
Arithmetic [Statement example] <Term> / <factor> 14
/ [Function] Divides <term> by <factor>. (Division operator)
[Point] If <factor> is 0, script operation stops. SCRIPT FUNCTION
[Statement example] <Term> % <factor>
[Function] Finds a remainder derived from division of <term> by <factor>.
%
(Remainder operator)
[Point] If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.
[Statement example] <Term> & <factor>
& [Function] Finds the logical product (AND) of <term> and <factor>.
APPENDICES
(Bit accumulation operator)
Bit device
[Statement example] <Term> | <factor>
| [Function] Finds the logical add (OR) of <term> and <factor>.
(Bit addition operator)
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
14.2 Specifications 14 - 8
14.2.2 Control structure
Item Command Description
[Statement example] ~ <bit>
~
[Function] Negates (inverts) <bit>. (Complement operator)
[Statement example] <Term> ^ <factor>
^ [Function] Finds the exclusive logical add (XOR) of <term> and <factor>.
Bit device (Bit difference operator)
[Statement example] <Term> << <factor>
<<
[Function] Shifts <term> to the left by <factor>. (Left shift operator)
[Statement example] <Term> >> <factor>
>>
[Function] Shifts <term> to the right by <factor>. (Right shift operator)
[Statement example] <Device> = <term>
Assignment =
[Function] Stores <term> into <device>. (Assignment operator)
[Statement example] set (<bit device>)
Operator set
[Function] SETs <bit device>.
Device [Statement example] rst (<bit device>)
rst
operation [Function] RSTs <bit device>.
[Statement example] alt (<bit device>)
alt
[Function] Inverts <bit device>.
[Statement example] bmov (<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)
[Function] Batch-transfers the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from <word
bmov
Continuous device 1>, to the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from <word
device device 2>.
operation [Statement example] fmov (<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)
fmov [Function] Transfers <word device 1> to the number of devices specified at <integer>,
starting from <word device 2>.
[Statement example] sin (<word device or constant>)
sin [Function] Calculates the sine of the specified <word device or constant>. (Sine)
<word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
[Statement example] cos (<word device or constant>)
cos [Function] Calculates the cosine of the specified <word device or constant>. (Cosine)
<word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
[Statement example] tan (<word device or constant>)
tan [Function] Calculates the tangent of the specified <word device or constant>. (Tangent)
<word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
Application [Statement example] asin (<word device or constant>)
Function arithmetic asin [Function] Calculates the arcsine of <word device or constant>. (Arcsine)
operation <word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
[Statement example] acos (<word device or constant>)
acos [Function] Calculates the arccosine of <word device or constant>. (Arccosine)
<word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
[Statement example] atan (<word device or constant>)
atan [Function] Calculates the arctangent of <word device or constant>. (Arctangent)
<word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
[Statement example] abs (<word device or constant>)
abs [Function] Calculates the absolute value of <word device or constant>.
(Absolute value)
(Continued to next page)
14 - 9 14.2 Specifications
14.2.2 Control structure
9
Item Command Description
[Statement example] log (<word device or constant>)
log
[Function] Calculates the power (base e) of <word device or constant>. (Natural logarithm)
[Statement example] log10 (<word device or constant>)
PARTS
log10 [Function] Calculates the logarithm (base 10) of <word device or constant>.
(Common logarithm)
Application
[Statement example] exp (<word device or constant>)
10
Function arithmetic exp
[Function] Calculates the power (base e) of<word device or constant>. (Exponent)
operation
GRAPH, METER
[Statement example] 1dexp (<word device 1 or constant 1>, <word device 2 or constant 2>)
1dexp [Function] Multiplies <word device 1 or constant 1> by 2 to the power of <word device 2 or
constant 2> . (Exponential product)
[Statement example] sqrt (<word device or constant>)
sqrt
[Function] Calculates the square root of <word device or constant>. (Square root) 11
ACTIONS
[Statement example] Constant
[Function] Represents a constant (decimal/hexadecimal/BCD/real number).
Constant
Refer to the following for details of constants.
TRIGGER
Section 14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
[Statement example] [Device type: device No.]
Others
Device and temporary [Function] Represents a PLC CPU device, GOT internal device or temporary work. 12
work Refer to the following for details of the devices and temporary works.
Section 14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
EXTERNAL INPUT/
[Statement example] // (comment)
Comment //
OUTPUT
[Function] A comment for a script can be described in (comment).
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.2 Specifications 14 - 10
14.2.2 Control structure
14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
1 Script data formats
Any of the following seven different data formats can be selected for the script functions.
Note that the selected data format is fixed for each script.
Select the data format using GT Designer2 when the monitor screen is created.
16-bit, signed BIN 16-bit, unsigned BIN
32-bit, signed BIN 32-bit, unsigned BIN
16-bit BCD 32-bit BCD
32-bit real number
To operate different types of data
Device value of integral number can be calculated as real number by using integral
number real number conversion function for each script.
This section Integer Real number conversion function.
2 Applicable constants and representation methods
The following four different constants are applicable for the script functions.
Constant Representation Method
Decimal number 124
Hexadecimal number 0xFF12, 0x14AC67F1
Real number 32.124, 3.2124e + 10
BCD 344
Note that the data format of each script determines the applicable constants and data ranges as shown
below.
Data Format Usable Constant Applicable Data Range
Decimal number -32768 to 32767
16-bit, signed BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFF
Decimal number 0 to 65535
16-bit, unsigned BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFF
Decimal number -2147483648 to 2147483647
32-bit, signed BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFFFFFF
Decimal number 0 to 4294967295
32-bit, unsigned BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFFFFFF
BCD 0 to 9999
16-bit BCD
Hexadecimal number 0 to 270F
BCD 0 to 99999999
32-bit BCD
Hexadecimal number 0 to 5F5E0FF
Signed 13-digit notation
Real number
32-bit real number (decimal fraction format only) *1
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFFFFFF
*1 The real number can be accurate to the millionth place. The ten-millionth and later digits are invalid.
For examples of display of a number having ten-millionth and later digits, refer to the following.
Section 5.2 Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT
14 - 11 14.2 Specifications
14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
9
3 Applicable devices and representation methods
The devices available for the script functions are the same as those of the other monitor functions.
The following table shows the device representations by device type; a station No.-specified device is
represented differently from others.
PARTS
Device Type Statement Example Representation Example
Word device [w: device No. *2] [w: D100]
10
Bit device [b: device No. *2] [b: X100]
GRAPH, METER
Specified bit of word
[b: device No.*2. bit position] [b: D100.01]
device
Specified word of bit
[w: device No. *2] [w: X100]
device
Station No.-specified
[Network No.-station No.: w: device No. *2] [0-FF: w: D100] 11
device *1
ACTIONS
*1 When the QCPU, QnACPU or ACPU is used, omitting the network No. and station No. monitors the devices of the
host station (0-FF).
*2 Depending on the PLC CPU device monitored, the device No. must be described in the following number of digits.
TRIGGER
Number of Described
Digits (Digits) Representation
PLC CPU Device Name
Word Example
Remarks 12
Bit specified
specified
EXTERNAL INPUT/
.. -- 2 [b:..2303] As the channel + relay format is used, the
OMRON PLC
LR, AR, HR, WR -- 2 [b: HR207] relay part is described in 2 digits.
OUTPUT
The file No. is described in 3 digits, the
[w: B000003]
B 6 7 element No. in 3 digits, and the bit
[b: MB02343]
Allen-Bradley position in 1 digit.
13
PLC N, TP, TA, CP, CA 6 -- [w: N007255]
The file No. is described in 3 digits, and
TT, TN, CU, CD,
-- 6 [b: TT004255] the element No. in 3 digits.
CN
The data block (DB) is described in 4
OTHERS
SIEMENS PLC D -- 9 [w: D000100000]
digits, and the data word (DW) in 5 digits.
14
Remark Devices that can be monitored on the GOT
Devices that can be monitored on the GOT depend on the monitor target PLC CPU.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Section 2.6 Supported Devices
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.2 Specifications 14 - 12
14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
4 Applicable temporary works and representation methods
For temporary device area, 1024 points of from TMP0 to TMP1023 are applicable.
One variable is handled as 32 bits, and stores 0 at power-on of the GOT.
Since the temporary device area is a global variable, it can be browsed or updated from any script when
multiple scripts are created.
The temporary work representation changes with the specified device type as indicated below.
Device Type Statement Example Representation Example
Word device [w: temporary work No.] [w:TMP0001]
Bit device [b: temporary work No. bit position] [b:TMP1023.01]
Temporary works are used in the following cases.
Example 1: Prevention of a write delay in assignment processing of the PLC CPU ( Section 14.1.2
Precautions for Use)
Example 2: Write target device of while statement ( Section 14.2.2 Control structure)
Example 3: Variable for operation
When assigning a D0 + 1 value to D1 and assigning a D1 + 1 value to D2
[w:TMP0001] = [w:D0]+1; //substitutes D0+1 into TMP0001.
[w:D1] = [w:TMP0001]; //substitutes TMP0001 into D1.
[w:D2] = [w:TMP0001]+1; //substitutes TMP0001+1 into D2.
Temporary work
The temporary work is a 32-bit global variable.
Note that a correct value cannot be read in either of the following cases.
A value is read in the script of which data format is different from that of the script
used to write the value to the temporary work.
Example: Script A (data format: 16-bit unsigned)
[w: TMP0000] = 0x1234;
Script B (data format: 32-bit unsigned)
[w: GD0000] = [w: TMP0000];
A value is read in the script represented (as word device/bit device) differently
from the script used to write the value to the temporary work.
Example: Script C (data format: 16-bit unsigned)
[w: TMP0000] = 0x3;
if( [b: TMP0000.b0] == ON) {
Make sure to write and read a value to and from one temporary work in the same
data format and representation.
14 - 13 14.2 Specifications
14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
9
5 Representing bit device (system define)
Bit devices can be represented as indicated below.
(1) When performing relational operation of bit device
PARTS
A device value, which is normally represented as "1" or "0", can also be represented as "ON" or
"OFF".
10
if([b:X100]==1){[w:D0]=100;} //if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.
GRAPH, METER
if([b:X100]==ON){[w:D0]=100;} //if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.
11
ACTIONS
(2) When performing assignment processing of bit device
A bit device, which is normally represented by assigning "1" or "0", can be also represented by
assigning "ON" or "OFF".
TRIGGER
set([b:X100]); //X100 turns ON.
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
[b:X100]=1; //X100 turns ON.
OUTPUT
[b:X100]=ON; //X100 turns ON.
13
6 Replacing devices and constants (user define)
A device or constant used in a script can be replaced with any character string.
OTHERS
Make user define setting with the script symbol of GT Designer2.
For details of the setting method, refer to the following.
Section 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Example: When replacing "b:X100" with "LS1_ERROR" using GT Designer2
if(LS1_ERROR==1){[w:D0]=100;} //if X100(LS1_ERROR) is ON, D0 is 100.
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.2 Specifications 14 - 14
14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
7 Device offset
The device offset can be specified.
This specification is allowed only in screen script.
(1) Format
Example: When D200 is 5, store 48 in D105.
[ w:D100[ w:D200] ] = 48;
Offset device
Base device
(2) Applicable device
(a) Base device
The PLC CPU device, GOT internal device, gateway device, and temporary work can be
specified.
Only word device is applicable. (Word specification by bit device is not applicable)
(b) Offset device
The PLC CPU device, GOT internal device, gateway device, and temporary work can be
specified.
Only word device is applicable. (Word specification by bit device is applicable*1)
*1 Please set device as the multiple of 16.
(3) Example
Switch the parameter according to operation mode.
D10 : for switching operation mode D100 to D900 : for storing parameter value
GD500 : base device TMP100 : offset device
(a) Script 1 (specify parameter value)
[w:GD500]=10; //parameter value of operation mode1
[w:GD501]=11;
[w:GD502]=12;
:
[w:GD600]=20; //parameter value of operation mode2
[w:GD601]=21;
[w:GD602]=22;
:
[w:GD700]=30; //parameter value of operation mode3
[w:GD701]=31;
[w:GD702]=32;
:
(b) Script 2 (offset value is determined by the device value for switching operation mode)
switch( [w: D10] ){
case1:[w:TMP100]=0;break; //when D10 is 0, offset value is 0.
case2:[w:TMP100]=100;break; //when D10 is 2, offset value is 100
case3:[w:TMP100]=200;break; //when D10 is 3, offset value is 200
}
14 - 15 14.2 Specifications
14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
(c) Script 3 (write parameter according to offset value) 9
bmov([w:GD500[w:TMP100]],[w:D100],10); //write the device value of (GD500+TEM100) to D100 to D109.
PARTS
When script (b) and script (c) are executed simultaneously or in a single script.
The offset switching is delayed, causing the system to operate abnormally.
10
(4) Precautions
GRAPH, METER
(a) Install Standard Monitor OS (GT Desiner2 Version1 00A or later) in GOT before using.
([-10] will be stored in script error data ( Section 14.7.2 Errors and corrective actions for
script execution on GOT))
11
(b) When PLC CPU device is used as base device, even if offset device value is changed, the
ACTIONS
processing will be delayed, causing the system to operate abnormally.
When offset cannot be performed normally, use temporary work or GOT internal device.
TRIGGER
When GOT internal device is used, check [Enable internal device (GD/GB) assignment delay].
( Section 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings)
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.2 Specifications 14 - 16
14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
8 Integer Real number conversion function
In script function, the data type is selected for each script. Once it is set, it cannot be changed (fixed).
However, the integer device value can be calculated as real number by using integer real number
conversion function.
(1) Conversion method
Integer real number conversion is executed by taking GOT internal device (GD) as conversion
target.
Integer real number conversion can be executed by specifying the following devices.
Maximum 4096 devices can be converted once.
For details about GOT internal device, refer to the following.
Section 2.6.1 GOT internal devices
Device that can be the target of integer real number conversion
Integer real number conversion can only be executed by GOT internal devices (GD).
To convert the device value of PLC CPU, transmit the device value of PLC CPU to
GOT internal device (GD) by script (bmov instruction).
(a) Read device
Device Function Description
Specify the conversion start and conversion method by each bit.
b0 : 16 bit unsigned BIN 32 bit real number
b1 : 16 bit unsigned BIN 32 bit real number
Conversion start b2 to b3 : Disabled
GS460
instruction b4 : 32 bit real number 16 bit unsigned BIN
b5 : 32 bit real number 16 bit singed BIN
b6 to b14 : Disabled
b15 : Execute conversion when it is turned ON.
Number of conversion
GS461 Number of devices
devices
Conversion source Specify the head device No. of GOT internal device (GD) that stores the value before
GS462
head device No. conversion.
Conversion destination Specify the head device No. of GOT internal device (GD) that stores the value after
GS463
head device No. conversion.
When error occurs, specify the device value to be stored in the conversion source
GS464 Storage error value
device. (Useful for error recognition)
(b) Write device
Device Function Description
Store the conversion completion notification and error occurrence status into each bit.
When conversion start instruction (GS460.b15) is turned OFF (0), each bit becomes 0.
b0 to b13 : Disabled
GS260 Status
b14 : It is turned ON when error occurs during conversion
processing by GOT. (Store error code in GS261)
b15 : It is turned ON when conversion is completed by GOT.
Store the error during conversion.
GS261 Error code *1
Store 0 when the conversion is completed normally.
For details of *1, refer to the following.
14 - 17 14.2 Specifications
14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
*1 Error code 9
Error codes stored in GS261 and the error information are as follows:
Error code Description Remark
1 Conversion start instruction is not initialized
PARTS
2 Conversion start instruction is not set correctly.
Conversion processing is not
3 Number of devices is set out of the range.
executed. 10
4 Device is out of range.
5 Conversion source overlaps with conversion destination.
GRAPH, METER
6 Not used ---
Conversion processing
7 Conversion error (overflow, ect.)
continues.
11
(2) Example
ACTIONS
Display the average value of the data (16 bit signed BIN) stored in PLC CPU device as real number
on GOT.
TRIGGER
(a) Operate when GB50 (trigger) turns ON
Transmit the value to GOT internal device
(b) Integer GD100 50
D100 50
12
real number
conversion GD109 139
D109 139
(c) Store average
value in GD300
EXTERNAL INPUT/
GD300 68.25
OUTPUT
GD300 68.25
Display on GOT
(a) Script 1 (conversion start processing) 13
Transmit the devices (D100 to D109) value of PLC CPU to GOT internal devices (GD100 to
GD109) and execute integer real number conversion.
After conversion is started, script 2 starts.
Data type: 16 bit signed BIN Trigger: GB50 is ON
OTHERS
bmov ([w: D100], [w: GD100], 10;
[w: GS461]=10;
[w:GS462]=100;
//Number of object devices to be converted
//Conversion source head device No.
14
[w: GS463]=200; //Conversion destination head device No.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
[w: GS460]=0X8002; //Conversion starts
set ([b: GB1001]; //Script 2 starts
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.2 Specifications 14 - 18
14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
(b) Script 2 (conversion completion monitor processing)
Wait the completion of integer real number conversion.
If error does not occur after conversion is completed, clear the conversion start instruction
device simultaneously when starting script 3.
Data type: 16 bit singed BIN Trigger: GB100 is ON
if ([b: GS260.15]=1)
{ //Conversion completed
if ([b: GS260.14]=0)
[
set([b: GB101]): //Conversion is completed normally (script 3 starts)
}
[w: GS460]=0; //Clear conversion start
rst([b:GB100]); //Clear the start of script 2
}
(c) Script 3 (Average calculating processing)
After converting to real number, calculate the average value of GOT internal device and store
in GD300.
Data type: 32 bit real number Trigger: GB101 is ON
[w: TMP001]=0
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD200];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD202];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD204];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD206];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD208];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD210];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD212];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD214];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD216];
[w: TMP001]= [w: TMP001] + [w: GD218];
[w: GD300]=[w:TMP001]/10; //Store the average in GD300 (real number)
rst([b: GB101]); //Clear start of script 3.
(3) Precautions
(a) Turn the conversion start instruction (GS460) OFF after conversion completion.
When the device is ON, the conversion cannot be executed even if conversion start instruction
is executed.
(b) During integer real number conversion, figures after the decimal point will be rounded off.
(1.53 1)
(When it is out of the real number range, error code will be displayed during operation and the
conversion cannot be executed.)
14 - 19 14.2 Specifications
14.2.3 Applicable data and representation methods
14.2.4 Script execution 9
This section explains how to execute the script functions.
1 Execution conditions
PARTS
When an execution condition is satisfied, the script function executes the corresponding script and
writes the result to the PLC CPU. 10
Execution condition is set when the monitor screen is created using GT Designer2.
There are following execution conditions.
GRAPH, METER
Ordinary
Rise/Fall
ON/OFF
ON/OFF Sampling
Sampling (1s increments) 11
ACTIONS
2 Execution unit
The script function executes scripts one by one.
TRIGGER
If the execution conditions of multiple scripts are satisfied, they are not processed concurrently.
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.2 Specifications 14 - 20
14.2.4 Script execution
3 Execution sequence
The script functions are executed in the following order.
Max.
Function executing Screen Calling Function Script Executing Order Set with GT Execution
Screen Setting Order Execution
Order Laying Order Designer2 Sequence
Count
Script A 1)
Project script
---- ---- Script B 256
function
Script A 2)
Base Script B
Script A
First called screen Script B
Base 256
Script A
16th called screen Script B
Script A 3)
Superimpose window Script B
Script A
Screen script First called screen Script B
Superimpose window 256
function
Script A
16th called screen Script B
Script A 4)
Overlap window 1 Script B
Script A
First called screen Script B
Overlap window 1 256
Script A
16th called screen Script B
(Continued to next page)
14 - 21 14.2 Specifications
14.2.4 Script execution
9
Max.
Function executing Screen Calling Function Script Executing Order Set on GT Execution
Screen Setting Order Execution
Order Laying Order Designer2 Sequence
Count
Script A 5)
PARTS
Overlap window 2 Script B
10
Script A
Screen script First called screen Script B
GRAPH, METER
Overlap window 2 256
function
Script A
16th called screen Script B 11
ACTIONS
4 Execution status
TRIGGER
The following table describes the script statuses and the corresponding processings to be performed.
Script Status Processing
12
A script waits its processing turn in accordance with the execution sequence.
Waiting for turn
When its turn has come, the script "waits for execution".
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Processing changes depending on the execution condition status.
Waiting for execution Enabled : The corresponding script is "executed".
OUTPUT
Disabled : The corresponding script "waits for turn" and the next script "waits for execution".
When the script ends, the processing result is written to the PLC CPU and the corresponding script "waits
for turn".
And, the next script "waits for execution".
13
Execution
If an error occurs, the corresponding script "stops" and the next script "waits for execution".
If a screen is changed when the screen script function is used, the scripts set on the corresponding screen
are all "executed" and then the next script "waits for execution".
OTHERS
Stop The script is kept "stopped" until the error history is cleared.
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.2 Specifications 14 - 22
14.2.4 Script execution
14.3 Settings and Procedure for Execution
This section provides the settings and procedure for executing the script functions.
Start
Create/edit scripts using a script editor or commercially ...... Section 14.5
available text editor.
For a complicated script including many control statements,
...... Section 14.7.1
the operation has to be simulated using general Compiler as
necessary.
If a commercially available text editor is used to create/edit
scripts, read them using GT Designer2.
Set the data format, trigger type, etc. for the scripts using ...... Section 14.4
GT Designer2.
Perform syntax check on the scripts using GT Designer2. ...... Section 14.4
No
Valid?
Yes
Download the project data from the personal computer to the ......
GOT using GT Designer2 GT Designer2
Version
Operating
Manual
Start monitoring and check the script operating status using the ...... Section 14.7.2
system monitor.
No
Normally operating?
Yes
End
14 - 23 14.3 Settings and Procedure for Execution
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 9
14.4.1 Settings
PARTS
1 Select [Common] [Script] from the menu.
10
2 The setting dialog box will appear. Make the settings with reference to the following explanation.
GRAPH, METER
Remark When making the setting on the project work space.
The setting dialog box can be displayed by double-clicking on on the
project work space.
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 14 - 24
14.4.1 Settings
14.4.2 Setting items
1 Project tab
Set the script function applicable for the whole projects.
Project Screen Script Symbol Option
Items Description A F
Display the set script functions in list format.
Script Function List
The script for the selected script function is shown below the function list.
Adds a new script function.
Add *1 Click on this item to display [Edit Script] dialog box.
The order of executing script functions will be set according to the order in which they are added.
Edit *1 Edits the selected script function.
Copy Copies the selected script function.
Paste Pastes the copied script function to the last line of the script function list.
Delete Delete the selected script function
Up
Changes the order of executing selected script functions.
Down
Used to edit the selected project script by the editor selected at [Select Script Editor] in the Option
tab.
For details of the Option tab and script editor, refer to the following.
Edit Script
Option tab - - - - - - - - - This section Option tab
Script Editor - - - - - - - This section Project tab
Displays the registered script files in list format.
Script files can be added, registered and edited on the list.
Script List
( This section Script list)
For details of *1, refer to the following.
14 - 25 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings
14.4.2 Setting items
*1 Script Edit 9
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
(When [External File] is selected in the Option tab) (When [Project Data] is selected in the Option tab)
Items Description A F 11
ACTIONS
Order Display the order of the script function under editing.
Register the script No. for the current script which is being edited.
Script No. Click on the View button to confirm the registration No. of other script files.
TRIGGER
( Script list)
Display the drive and folder that include the script file to be executed.
Script File Name
(When [External File] is If the script file is not registered, click on the Browse button to specify the script file to be
12
selected in the Option tab) executed.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Set the name of the script to be executed.
Script Name
Click on the Import button and the script edited in a text file is read out to GT Designer2.
(When [Project Data] is
OUTPUT
When importing the script file, the file name with the extension (".TXT") eliminated from the script
selected in the Option tab)
file name is displayed at [Script Name].
Used to edit the script selected by [Script File Name] or [Script Name] using the editor selected at
[Select Script Editor] in the Option tab.
13
For details of the Option tab and script editor, refer to the following.
Edit Script
Option tab - - - - - - - - - This section Option tab
OTHERS
Script editor - - - - - - - This section Project tab
File Comment Input the comment of the script function being edited.
Checks the validity of the syntax for the script selected in [Script File Name]. 14
Syntax Check The applicable device type and device range are also checked.
( Section 14.4.4 Message displayed during syntax check)
Select the data type of script to be executed. SCRIPT FUNCTION
Signed BIN 16/32 :Treats script data as 16/32 bits signed binary value.
Data Type Unsigned BIN 16/32 :Treats script data as 16/32 bits unsigned binary value.
BCD 16/32 :Treats script data as 16/32 bits BCD (binary coded decimal) value.
Real :Treats script data as floating decimal point real number.
Select the trigger for operating the script.
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected, set the cycle (1 to 3600 seconds)
in 1-second unit.*2
APPENDICES
Trigger Type
( Section 5.5 Trigger Setting)
Ordinary ON OFF Rise
Fall Sampling ON Sampling OFF Sampling
When [ON], [OFF], [Rise], [Fall], [ON Sampling] or [OFF Sampling] is selected, click on the
Trigger Device Device button to set the device to be used for the trigger.
( Section 5.1 Device Setting)
For details of *2, refer to the following.
INDEX
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 14 - 26
14.4.2 Setting items
*2 Update timing when the trigger type is set to [Sampling], [Cycle during ON] or [Cycle during OFF]
The sampling cycle counting is started when the trigger condition is satisfied.
When the trigger type is set to [Cycle during ON] and the sampling cycle is set to 10 seconds, for
example, the script will be executed 10 seconds after the device set at [Trigger Device] turns on. (When
the trigger device turns off after 10 seconds, the script will not be executed.)
When the trigger condition is not satisfied, counting of the sampling cycle will be reset.
(1) Script file name
A file name of a script file (excluding extension ".TXT") must be within 32
characters independent of the character type (1-byte character or 2-byte
character).
The file name is used for [Script Name] when converting the script data with
[Project Data] selected in the Option tab.
If a specified file name is longer than 32 characters, the first 32 characters are
taken for the file name and the rest are disregarded.
(2) [Script Name]
Set a unique script name.
The script name set at [Script Name] is used as the script file name when
converting the file with [External File] selected in the Option tab.
When the script name set for [Script Name] is already existed, set another script
names.
14 - 27 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings
14.4.2 Setting items
(1) Script editor
9
The script editor is used for editing and importing/exporting scripts.
PARTS
Script edit area
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
(When [Project Data] is selected in the Option tab)
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
(When [External File] is selected in the Option tab) 13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 14 - 28
14.4.2 Setting items
Items Description A F
Scripts can be edited directly.
(Undo) : Returns the script edit operation one step.
(Redo) : Redoes returned operation.
(Cut) : Cuts the selected character string.
(Copy) : Copies the selected character string.
(Paste) : Pastes the copied or cut character string.
(Delete) : Deletes the selected character string.
Script Edit Area (Import) : Reads out the script edited in a text file to GT Designer2. *1
(Export) : Saves the script edited by GT Designer2 in a text file. *1
(Search) : Displays the search dialog box.
Input the search target texts and click the Find Next button after
selecting the search direction (upward/downward), and the input texts
are searched for.
(Symbol) : Set script symbols. *2
Input Navigation : Checking this item displays [Input Navigation] in the Edit Script dialog
box.
Line No. : Checking this item displays the line numbers in the script.
Save
(When [External File] is Overwrites the script file with the project script and save it.
selected in the Option tab)
Close
(When [External File] is Closes the script editor.
selected in the Option tab)
Functions, devices, etc. that are inserted to a script can be selected from the tree.
An example of how to used [Input Navigation] is shown below.
Input Navigation
This section (1) (a) Use example of input navigation
Checks the syntax, device type and device range.
Syntax Check
( Section 14.4.4 Message displayed during syntax check)
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
14 - 29 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings
14.4.2 Setting items
*1 Import / export 9
Even if a script is stored in the project data, the exported text file can be used for simulating the operation
using a commercially-available general-purpose C compiler and editing the script using a commercially-
available text editor.
The edited text file can be imported to GT Designer2 to be read.
PARTS
Example: When editing the script data stored in the project data using a commercially-available text 10
editor
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
Exporting the data as a text file
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Editing the exported file
Edit the script using
OUTPUT
the ext editor.
13
Importing the data to GT Designer2
Edited contents are
OTHERS
reflected.
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 14 - 30
14.4.2 Setting items
*2 Script symbols
A script can be described using a character string, instead of a device or fixed value.
This is possible by setting a device or fixed value to each character string in the Script Symbol window
(Even when a character string is described in the script, the script operates on GOT.)
This setting is valid to project scripts and screen scripts.
Items Description
Symbol Name
Device or Fixed Value Setting contents are the same as that made in the Script Symbol tab.
For details of the setting, refer to the following.
(Import)
This section Script Symbol tab
(Export)
14 - 31 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings
14.4.2 Setting items
(a) Use example of input navigation 9
How the input navigation is used is explained below using an example of inserting an
assignment statement of the temporary device area to a script.
1 Select [Items] [Other] [Temporary device area] from the tree.
PARTS
2 Edit the temporary device area number, assignment operator, etc. referring to [Description].
3 Click the Insert button, and the assignment statement in the temporary device area is inserted to 10
the cursor position in the [Script edit area].
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 14 - 32
14.4.2 Setting items
2 Screen tab
Set the script to be executed for each screen.
Project Screen Script Symbol Option
Items Description A F
Screen Type Set the screen (Base/Window) on which the script function will operate and the screen No.
Displays the set script functions in list format.
Script Function List
The script for the selected script function is shown below the function list.
Adds a new script function.
Add *1 Click on this item to display [Edit Script] dialog box.
The order of executing script functions will be set according to the order in which they are added.
Edit *1 Edits the selected script function.
Copy Copies the selected script function.
Paste Pastes the copied script function to the last line of the script function list.
Delete Deletes the selected script function.
Up
Changes the order of executing selected script functions.
Down
Used to edit the selected screen script using the editor selected at [Select Script Editor] in the
Option tab.
For details of the Option tab and script Editor, refer to the following.
Edit Script
Option tab - - - - - - - - - This section Option tab
Script editor - - - - - - - This section Project tab
Displays the registered script files in list format.
Script List Script files can be added, registered and edited on the list.
( This section Script list)
For details of *1, refer to the following.
This section *1 Script Edit
14 - 33 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings
14.4.2 Setting items
9
3 Script Symbol tab
A script can be described using the character string, instead of the device or fixed value.
This method is available by setting a device or fixed value to each character string in this tab screen.
(Even when a script file is described using character strings, the scrip operates on GOT.)
PARTS
This setting is made for all scripts.
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
Script Symbol
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Project Screen Option
Items Description A F
OUTPUT
Input the character string to be described in script files (Up to 32 characters).
Symbol Name Up to 100 words can be set.
"#" cannot be used.
13
Input the device or character string for the symbol name, i.e., character string (Up to 32
Device or Fixed Value characters).
Up to 100 words can be set.
OTHERS
(Import)*1 Reads the script symbol setting, edited in a CSV file/Unicode text file, to GT Designer2.
(Export)*1 Saves the script symbol setting, made by GT Designer2, as a CSV file/Unicode text.
14
Displays the registered script files in list format.
Script files can be added, registered and edited on the list.
Script List
( This section Script list) SCRIPT FUNCTION
For details of *1 refer to the following.
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 14 - 34
14.4.2 Setting items
*1 Import/Export
The exported CSV file/Unicode text file can be edited using such as the spreadsheet software.
The CSV file/Unicode text file, after editing, can be imported to and opened by GT Designer2.
Editing exported files
When "0" is used as the first character of symbol names and device or field values,
"0" can be deleted with application functions for editing files, including
Microsoft Excel.
Pay attention to the above for editing exported files.
14 - 35 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings
14.4.2 Setting items
Example: Importing and exporting in CSV file 9
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
11
ACTIONS
Exported in CSV file
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Editing the exported file
Add the setting using applications
OUTPUT
R
such as Microsoft Excel.
13
Importing to GT Designer2
OTHERS
The added contents are displayed.
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 14 - 36
14.4.2 Setting items
4 Option tab
Set the text editor for editing script file and the processing when internal device is used.
Project Screen Script Symbol Option
Items Description A F
Check this item to avoid substitution delay, which occurs when Project script or Screen script is
used, by using the GOT internal device (GD, GB).
Enable internal device
Refer to the following for cautions about substitution delay.
(GD/GB) assignment delay
( Section 14.1.2 Instructions for assignment delay)
Select the area where the script data of project scripts and screen scripts are stored.
Project Data : Stores the script data in the project data.
If the setting is changed from [External File] to [Project Data], the script
Script Data Storage
data is converted from the script file to the project data. *1
Destination
External File : Stores the script data in the script file.
If the setting is changed from [Project Data] to [External File], the script
data is converted from the project data to the script file. *2
Select Script Editor Select and set the editor used to edit project scripts and screen scripts.
Select the editor used to edit project scripts and screen scripts.
Script Editor : Select this item to use the built-in script editor of GT Designer2 to edit
project scripts and screen scripts.
Script Editor
User Select Editor : Select this item to use the text editor specified by the user to edit project
Type
scripts and screen scripts.
Selection of [User Select Editor] is possible only when [External File] is
selected for [Script Data Storage Destination].
When [User Select Editor] is selected for [Script Editor Type], specify the file (such as Notepad
Program Path
(NOTEPAD.EXE) or WordPad (WORDPAD.EXE) of Windows ) used to open the text editor.
Specify the options used on the text editor when [User Select Editor] is selected for [Script Editor
Option
Type].
Update Script Data
Update the script data that is read by GT Designer2.
(Project and Screen)
Displays the registered script files in list format.
Script files can be added, registered and edited on the list.
Script List
( This section Script list)
For details of *1, *2, refer to the following.
14 - 37 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings
14.4.2 Setting items
*1 Converting the script data from script file to project data 9
To convert the script data from script file to project data, follow the steps indicated below.
1 When the selection for [Script Data Storage Destination] is changed from [External File] to [Project
Data], the dialog box as shown below is displayed.
PARTS
10
GRAPH, METER
2 Click the Yes button and the script data is converted to the project data.
*2 Converting the script data from project data to script file 11
ACTIONS
To convert the script data from project data to script file, follow the steps indicated below.
1 When the selection for [Script Data Storage Destination] is changed from [Project Data] to [External
TRIGGER
File], the dialog box as shown below is displayed.
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
2 For [Store to Script File Folder Path], specify the folder where the script is saved.
13
3 Click the OK button, and the script data is converted to a script file.
File name of the converted script file
OTHERS
When the script data in the project data is converted to a script file, the script file
name before conversion is used as the file name of the script file (extension is
".TXT"). 14
If the script name already exists, the dialog box as shown below is displayed.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
If the dialog box as above is displayed, click the No button and change the file
name.
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 14 - 38
14.4.2 Setting items
5 Script list
The registered script files to be executed are displayed in list format.
They can be added, registered and edited on this list.
(When [External File] is selected in the Option tab) (When [Project Data] is selected in the Option tab)
Items Description A F
Displays the registered scripts in a list (script file/script name *1, modified date and comment).
The script file specified in the [Script Edit] dialog box is reflected in this dialog box.
Script File List
A comment can be directly input in the Comment column of the list.
The contents of the selected script are displayed in the area below the list.
Browse
(When [External File] is Registers the selected script.
selected in the Option tab)
Import
(When [Project Data] is Reads out the script edited in a text file to GT Designer2.
selected in the Option tab)
Convert Path *2
Changes the path name of the selected script file.
(When the selection in the
Click on Convert Path button to specify the path name to be changed.
Extended tab is [External File])
Checks the validity of the syntax for the selected script or all the registered script.
Syntax Check
When an error occurs, the error line No. and its details are displayed.
The applicable device type and device range are also checked.
All Check
( Section 14.4.4 Message displayed during syntax check)
Delete Deletes the selected script file
Used to edit the selected script using the editor selected at [Select Script Editor] in the Option tab.
For details of the option tab and script editor, refer to the following.
Edit Script Option tab - - - - - - - - - This section Option tab
Script Editor - - - - - - - This section Project tab
Jump Makes the script set in [Script No.] selectable.
*1 When [External File] is selected in the Option tab, the path name is displayed. When [Project Data] is selected in
the Option tab, the script name is displayed.
For details of *2, refer to the following.
14 - 39 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings
14.4.2 Setting items
*2 Convert File Path 9
PARTS
10
Items Description A F
GRAPH, METER
Before Display the old path name of the script file.
After Clicking on the Browse button to specify the path name of the script file after the conversion.
Check this item to convert all the files that have the same path name except for the file to be
Convert the same path
changed. 11
ACTIONS
Registered script path name
TRIGGER
Register script file into the project data folder of GT Designer2. This will update the
script path name automatically when the project data folder is moved to other drive/
path, which eliminates the necessity to modify the path name.
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 14 - 40
14.4.2 Setting items
14.4.3 Precautions
This section provides the precautions for using script function.
1 Precautions for drawing
(1) Number of script functions that can be set in one project/on one screen
Up to 256 script functions can be set.
(2) Number of script file that can be registered
Up to 32767 script files can be registered.
(3) When editing script file
GT Designer2 cannot be operated when editing the script file from the text editor by clicking on the
Edit Script button from the setting dialog box.
Even if GT Designer2 seems to be in freeze status, it can be operated once the text editor is exited.
(4) Restoration of a script file
When the project for which [External File] has been set in the Option tab is opened, if the script file
does not exist in the set path, GT Designer2 restores the script file.
In this case, set the folder where a script file should be restored at the dialog box as shown below.
14.4.4 Message displayed during syntax check
1 The dialog box displayed during syntax check
The following dialog box will be displayed during syntax check.
If there is an error in script, the error code will be displayed in the dialog box.
When the error code is displayed, refer to Error code list for the troubleshooting.
Error code
14 - 41 14.4 GT Designer2 Settings
14.4.3 Precautions
9
2 Error code list
The following list provides the error codes that may be displayed in the script error dialog box.
Error code Error occurrence causes
PARTS
0 The configuration error of script
1 The address of device is not an even number
2 Extended file register (ER) setting error (inter-block settings)
10
3 The bit device made word access.
GRAPH, METER
4 Out of the range of device No. (displayed in HEX. number)
5 Out of the range of device No. (displayed in DEC. number)
6 Out of the range of device No. (displayed in OCT. number address)
7 The setting is not executed with the multiple of 16 when specifying the bit device word.
8 The setting is not within the range of 0 to 15 when specifying word device bit. 11
ACTIONS
9 The set device is out of the range or does not exist.
11 Out of the range of device No.
14 Access to the device disabling bit accessibility by using bit.
TRIGGER
15 Access to the device disabling word accessibility by using bit.
16 Octal device are set with odd number.
17 The setting is not executed with the multiple of 16 when specifying the bit device word. 12
20 The specified CPU does not exist.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
21 The specified Word type does not exist.
22 A CPU not included with network settings has been specified.
OUTPUT
25 No expression exit between {and}
26 The operator type of expressions table flow
27 The control type table overflew. 13
28 The switch statement includes no "case".
29 "Default" exist although there is no switch statement.
30 There are multiple "default" settings in switch statements.
OTHERS
31 There are too many switch "case" statements.
32 There are too many "switch break" statements.
33 Switch nest is deep.
14
34 System memory is insufficient.
35 Parenthesis nest is deep
36 Regarded as invalid statement. SCRIPT FUNCTION
37 No semicolon
38 There are invalid characters.
39 File input is not specified.
40 The specified input file does not exist.
41 The nest of if/while is deep.
45 The CPU incompatible with multi-CPU is specified as multi-CPU.
APPENDICES
46 The multi-specified station No. is incorrect.
47 Network specification or station No. specification is incorrect.
48 Set network in GOT internal devices.
101 No closed parenthesis.
111 The bit device is specified for the device with indirect specification.
INDEX
14.4 GT Designer2 Settings 14 - 42
14.4.4 Message displayed during syntax check
14.5 Program Examples
This section explains script program with examples.
14.5.1 Touch switches with interlock function
1 Operation
When the Ready and Run/Stop keys turn ON, the Running lamp is lit.
The system operation is controlled synchronously with the Running lamp.
Screen Image Part Operation Definition
Running lamp : Indicates the operating status of the system.
Ready key : Acts as an interlock for the Run/Stop key.
Run/Stop key : Used to switch the operating status (run/stop)
of the system.
2 Monitor screen settings
Part Name Object Type Setting Item Setting
Monitor device M0001
Ready key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit ALT
Monitor device M0002
Run/Stop key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit ALT
M0003
Running lamp Lamp indication function (bit) Monitor device
(System operation controlling device)
3 Program example
Item Description
Data format 16-bit, signed BIN
Trigger type Ordinary
if ([b: M0001]&[b: M0002]==1){ //if the ready and run/stop keys both turn ON
set([b: M0003]); //the running lamp is lit and the system starts operating.
}
Script
else{ //if not
rst([b: M0003]); //the running lamp turns off and the system is stopped.
}
14 - 43 14.5 Program Examples
14.5.1 Touch switches with interlock function
14.5.2 Lamps which change the display attributes under multiple conditions 9
1 Operation
PARTS
The operation of each line is controlled with a touch key and the control statuses of three lines are
represented by one lamp.
Screen Image Part Operation Definition
10
Control status lamp : The lamp color and comment are changed
GRAPH, METER
according to the operating statuses of the lines.
Line 1 key : Used to control the operation of line 1.
Line 2 key : Used to control the operation of line 2.
Line 3 key : Used to control the operation of line 3.
Stop all lines key : Used to stop all lines.
11
ACTIONS
TRIGGER
12
2 Monitor screen settings
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Part Name Object Type Setting Item Setting
Monitor device D10
OUTPUT
Display range : $V==0 Lamp color: 182
Text : All lines stop
Display range : $V==1 Lamp color: 3 13
Text : Line 1 running
Display range : $V==2 Lamp color: 224
Text : Line 2 running
OTHERS
Display range : $V==3 Lamp color: 227
Control status lamp Lamp display function (word) Text : Line 3 running
Display method (word)
Display range : $V==4 Lamp color: 28
Text : Lines 1, 2 running 14
Display range : $V==5 Lamp color: 31
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Text : Lines 1, 3 running
Display range : $V==6 Lamp color: 252
Text : Lines 2, 3 running
Display range : $V==7 Lamp color: 162
Text : Lines 1, 2, 3 running
Monitor device X1
Line 1 key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit ALT
Monitor device X2
APPENDICES
Line 2 key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit ALT
Monitor device X3
Line 3 key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit ALT
Monitor device X0
Stop all lines key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit SET
INDEX
14.5 Program Examples 14 - 44
14.5.2 Lamps which change the display attributes under multiple conditions
3 Program example
Item Description
Data format 16-bit, signed BIN
Trigger type Ordinary
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){ //if line 1, 2 and 3 are all OFF
[w:D10]=0; //stores 0 into D10.
}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){ //if line 1 is ON and line 2 and 3 are OFF.
[w:D10]=1; //stores 1 into D10
}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){ //if line 2 is ON and line 1 and 3 are OFF.
[w:D10]=2; //stores 2 into D10
}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON)){ //if line 3 is ON and line 1 and 2 are OFF.
[w:D10]=3; //stores 3 into D10
}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF)){ //if line 1 and 2 are ON and line 3 is OFF.
[w:D10]=4; //stores 4 into D10
}
Script
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON)){ //if line 1 and 3 are ON and line 2 is OFF.
[w:D10]=5; //stores 5 into D10
}
if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON)){ //if line 2 and 3 are ON and line 1 is OFF.
[w:D10]=6; //stores 6 into D10
}
if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON)){ //if line 1, 2 and 3 are ON.
[w:D10]=7; //stores 7 into D10
}
if ([b:X0]==ON){ //if all lines stop turns ON
rst([b:X1]); //turns OFF line 1.
rst([b:X2]); //turns OFF line 2.
rst([b:X3]); //turns OFF line 3.
rst([b:X0]); //turns OFF all lines stop.
}
14 - 45 14.5 Program Examples
14.5.2 Lamps which change the display attributes under multiple conditions
14.5.3 Password input screen with time limit function 9
1 Operation
PARTS
The password enter screen returns to the previous screen if a correct password is not entered within 10
seconds after it appeared.
Screen Image Part Operation Definition
10
Manager button : Used to shift to the password enter screen (base
Screen with Manager key (base screen 3)
GRAPH, METER
screen 4).
Password enter : Password entered with 1 to 0 keys appears.
Screen change Returns in 10 seconds 1 to 0 keys : Used to enter a value.
11
ACTIONS
Clear key : Used to clear the entered value.
Confirm key : Used to confirm the entered value.
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
Password match
13
Manager screen (base screen 5) appears.
OTHERS
2 Monitor screen settings
Part Name Object Type Setting Item Setting 14
Manager button Touch key function Operation setting Switching to base screen 4
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Password enter Numerical input function Monitor device D10
1 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0031H]
2 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0032H]
3 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0033H]
4 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0034H]
5 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0035H]
6 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0036H]
APPENDICES
7 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0037H]
8 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0038H]
(Continued to next page)
INDEX
14.5 Program Examples 14 - 46
14.5.3 Password input screen with time limit function
Part Name Object Type Setting Item Setting
9 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0039H]
0 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0030H]
Clear key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0088H]
Confirm key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [000DH]
3 Program example
Item Description
Data format 16-bit, signed BIN
Trigger type Ordinary
if([b: GS1.01]==ON){ //only when the password input screen has appeared
[w: TMP0001]=[w:GS7]; //assigns GS7 to TMP0001.
}
if([w: D10]==3238){ //when the correct password is entered
[w:D0]=5; //switches to the manager screen (base screen 5).
Script [w: D10]=0; //clears the password.
}
if([w: GS7]-[w: TMP0001]>=10){ //if more than 10 seconds have elapsed after the password enter screen
had appeared
[w: D0]=3; //returns to the screen with manager button (base screen 3).
}
About this program example.
This program example uses GOT special registers (GS).
The GOT special registers (GS) store the GOT's internal data, communication
status, script error data and others.
A wide variety of operations can be achieved by correctly using the GOT special
registers (GS) together with the script functions.
For details on GOT special registers (GS), refer to the following.
Section 2.6.1 GOT internal devices
14 - 47 14.5 Program Examples
14.5.3 Password input screen with time limit function
14.6 Precautions for using BMOV 9
If using the script function BMOV instruction (many times) to read device values from the PLC CPU into the
GOT internal devices, this may cause the performance of the GOT display refresh and screen change by
PARTS
use of the touch switch to slow down considerably.
This Section provides guidelines for using the GOT in order to improve the monitoring performance by
reducing the number of times to communicate with the PLC CPU using the BMOV instruction.
10
1 Reducing the communication time when using BMOV instruction
GRAPH, METER
With the script function, the GOT only reads*2 a batch of device values from the PLC CPU direct
address*1, regardless of script execution condition, or conditional 'if' or 'switch' statements.
Also, when using the BMOV instruction to read devices from the PLC CPU, communication with the
PLC CPU from the GOT is done one or more times for each instruction*2, depending on the amount of
11
data.
ACTIONS
Therefore, in order to reduce the communication time, it is recommend to read a batch of values from
the source devices into a TMP (Temporary work) area before transferring the data to the GOT internal
devices.
TRIGGER
*1 When device offset is specified, the offset device becomes the direct device address.
*2 The screen script function applies only to the currently displayed screen on the GOT.
12
The following counter measures should be taken into consideration.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
(1) The batch of divided blocks are read from the PLC CPU to the GOT internal memory during one
communication processing. The script is then customized as to split the batch of devices into
separate blocks and transferred to the Temporary work and then to the GOT internal devices, such
OUTPUT
as GD.
(1) Reading a batch of device values into Temporary work 13
(2) The batch of divided blocks (for each 'if' and 'switch' statement) are read from the PLC CPU to the
GOT internal memory during one communication processing.
The script is then customized as to split the batch of devices according to the 'if' and 'switch'
OTHERS
statements and transferred to the Temporary work and then to the GOT internal devices, such as
GD.
(2) Reading BMOV in a batch of steps within a script
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
(3) When reading a batch of devices from the PLC CPU to the Temporary work, make sure the devices
fall within the specified range, as shown in the table below.
If the number of words is greater than the specified reference, the number will be automatically
divided and then transferred.
Number of words transferred by BMOV for each
Connected PLC CPU
communication processing
QCPU (bus connection only)
960 words
APPENDICES
Motion controller CPU (Q mode)
QCPU (other than bus connection)
QnACPU
480 words
Motion controller CPU (A mode)
MELDAS C6/C64
ACPU
64 words
FXCPU
INDEX
14.6 Precautions for using BMOV 14 - 48
2 Script solution examples
(1) Reading a batch of device values into Temporary work
This solution saves the communication time by reducing the communication between GOT internal
memory and PLC CPU down to just once, where it took 3 times to do the same processing before.
(When transferring from Temporary work to GOT internal devices (e.g., GD), the internal memory*1
does not communicate with PLC CPU.)
*1 System area used for communication processing. The user is not permitted access to this area.
[Normal process]
(a) Processing outline
Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1004, R1010 to R1014 and R1020 to R1024
into GD360 to GD364, GD370 to GD374 and GD380 to GD384, respectively.
(b) Script description GOT
bmov([w:R1000],[w:GD360],5); PLC CPU internal
device
Internal
memory GD
bmov([w:R1010],[w:GD370],5); R1000 to R1004 GD360 to GD364
bmov([w:R1020],[w:GD380],5);
R1010 to R1014 GD370 to GD374
R1020 to R1024 GD380 to GD384
3 times : Indicates the communication with PLC CPU
: Indicates the bmov processing
[Solution applied]
(a) Processing outline
Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1024 into TMP0 to TMP24 within GOT at once.
Then they are transferred from TMP0 to TMP24 into GD360 to GD364, GD370 to GD374 and
GD380 to GD384, respectively, as shown below.
(b) Script description GOT
bmov([w:R1000],[w:TMP0],25); PLC CPU internal
device
Internal
memory GD
bmov([w:TMP0],[w:GD360],5); TMP0 to TMP4 GD360 to GD364
bmov([w:TMP10],[w:GD370],5); TMP5 to TMP9
R1000 to R1024 TMP10 to TMP14 GD370 to GD374
bmov([w:TMP20],[w:GD380],5); TMP15 to TMP19
TMP20 to TMP24 GD380 to GD384
1 time : Indicates the communication with PLC CPU
: Indicates the bmov processing
14 - 49 14.6 Precautions for using BMOV
(2) Reading BMOV in a batch of steps within a script
9
This solution saves the communication time by reducing the communication between GOT internal
memory and PLC CPU to just once, where it took 10 times to do the same processing before.
(When reading internal devices within PLC CPU in 'if' or 'switch' statement, the internal memory
communicates with PLC CPU regardless of the execution condition. When transferring from TMP
PARTS
to GOT internal devices (e.g., GD), the internal memory does not communicate with PLC CPU.)
10
[Normal process]
(a) Processing outline
GRAPH, METER
Device values are transferred from R1000 to R1004, ... and R1900 to R1904 into GD360 to
GD364 depending on the amount of data.
(b) Script description
PLC CPU internal
GOT
11
switch([w:D1000]){ case device
Internal
memory GD
ACTIONS
case 1:bmov([w:R1000],[w:GD360],5); 1 R1000 to R1004 GD360 to GD364
break; 2 R1100 to R1104
: : :
case 2:bmov([w:R1100],[w:GD360],5);
TRIGGER
: : :
break; 9 R1800 to R1804
: 10 R1900 to R1904
case 9:bmov([w:R1800],[w:GD360],5); 10 times : Indicates the communication with PLC CPU 12
: Indicates the bmov processing
break;
case 10:bmov([w:R1900],[w:GD360],5);
EXTERNAL INPUT/
break;
}
OUTPUT
rst([b:GB1000]);
[Solution applied] 13
(a) Processing outline
A batch of device values is transferred from R1000 to R1904 into TMP0 to TMP904 within
GOT once, and then it is transferred from TMP0 to TMP904 into GD360 to GD364 depending
OTHERS
on the amount of data.
(b) Script description GOT 14
PLC CPU internal
bmov([w:R1000],[w:TMP0],905); device
Internal
memory TMP case GD
SCRIPT FUNCTION
switch([w:D1000]){ TMP0 to TMP4 1 GD360 to GD364
TMP5 to TMP99
case 1:bmov([w:TMP0],[w:GD360],5); TMP100 to TMP104 2
: :
break; R1000 to R1904 : :
case 2:bmov([w:TMP100],[w:GD360],5); TMP800 to TMP804 9
TMP805 to TMP899
break; TMP900 to TMP904 10
: 1 time : Indicates the communication with PLC CPU
: Indicates the bmov processing
case 9:bmov([w:TMP800],[w:GD360],5);
break;
APPENDICES
case 10:bmov([w:TMP900],[w:GD360],5);
break;
}
rst([b:GB1000]);
INDEX
14.6 Precautions for using BMOV 14 - 50
14.7 Troubleshooting
The script function does not display an error message at the time of error.
It stops the script in error to prevent the other scripts and various monitor functions from stopping.
Therefore, each script must be debugged without fail by reference to the followings.
14.7.1 Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger
Since a script is C language-like program, the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g. Microsoft
Visual C++) can be used for its simulation by making slight corrections.
This is effective for debugging a complicated script that includes many control statements.
Observe the following procedure to perform simulation using the general C language compiler or debugger.
Changing file extension 1 Change the script file (extension ".txt")
created for the GOT into a C language
text1.txt text1.c
source file (extension ".c").
Additional description of main and include 2 Open the C language source file with a
Additional #include<stdio.h>
commercially-available text editor and
description
create a frame with "main(){}". Also,
Additional main(){
description [w:TMP0001]=0;
describe "#include<stdio.h>" at the
while([w:TMP0000]<[w:D100]){ beginning.
if(!(([w:TMP0000]-1900)%4)){
[w:TMP0001]=[w:TMP0001]+1;
......(Omitted)......
[w:TMP0010]=[w:TMP0002]+[w:TMP0003]
+[w:TMP0004]-1;
[w:D200] = [w:TMP0010]%7;
Additional
description }
Changing device (variable) describing method 3 Change the device (variable) describing
method from that for script function to
#include<stdio.h>
main(){
that for C language.
Description Changing the variables into for C
change _wTMP0001__=0;
Description
while(_wTMP0000__<_wD100__){ language based on the following
change
Description if(!((_wTMP0000__-1900)%4)){ definition enables smooth restoration to
change
Description _wTMP0001__=_wTMP0001__+1; the GOT script.
change
......(Omitted)......
Definition 1 "[w:" "_w"
Description
change _wTM P0010__=_wTMP0002__+_wTMP0003__ Definition 2 "[b:" "_b"
Description Definition 3 "]" "_ _"
change +_wTMP0004__-1;
Description _wD200__=_wTMP0010__%7;
change
} Using the batch replacement function of
the commercially available text editor is
convenient to make changes.
(To the next page)
14 - 51 14.7 Troubleshooting
14.7.1 Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger
9
(From the preceding page)
Variable definition (auto variable declaration) 4 For C language, the variables must be
#include<stdio.h> defined prior to use.
PARTS
Description
change
void main(void){ As only one data format can be selected
Addition unsigned short _wTMP0000__; for one script, the variable types of the C
Addition unsigned short _wTMP0001__;
language must be set all the same. 10
Addition unsigned short _wTMP0002__;
Being conscious of the script data format,
Addition unsigned short _wD100__;
assign the variables as indicated below.
GRAPH, METER
......(Omitted)...... Script Data Format Variable Type
_wTMP0001__=0; Signed BIN 16 short
while(_wTMP0000__ <_wD100__){ Unsigned BIN 16 unsigned short
if(!((_wTMP0000__-1900)%4)){ 11
_wTMP0001__=_wTMP0001__+1; Signed BIN 32 long
ACTIONS
Unsigned BIN 32 unsigned long
......(Omitted)......
Real number float
TRIGGER
_wTMP0010__=_wTMP0002__+_wTMP0003__ BCD32/BCD16*1 ----
+_wTMP0004__-1;
*1 Selecting "32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD" as the script data
}
_wD200__ = _wTMP0010__%7;
format disables simulation with the general C language 12
compiler or debugger.
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Execution of simulation 5 Perform simulation with the general C
OUTPUT
language compiler or debugger.
(The example shown on the left uses
Microsoft Developer Studio.) 13
6 The step run, variable watch and other
functions specific to debugger are usable.
7
On completion of debugging, execute the
OTHERS
steps to in reverse order to restore
the GOT script file.
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.7 Troubleshooting 14 - 52
14.7.1 Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger
(1) Selecting "32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD" as the script data format disables simulation
with the general C language compiler or debugger.
(2) As dedicated for the script functions, the set, rst, alt, bmov and fmov statements
cannot be simulated with the general C language compiler or debugger.Use
assignment of 1 or 0 instead of the set or rst statement.
(3) When the system define (ON, OFF description) of the GOT is used unchanged,
the define must be added to the C language source file.
(4) The assignment delay does not occur during simulation with the general C
language compiler or debugger, although it occurs when a script is executed on
GOT. Therefore, take the possibility of assignment delay occurrence into
consideration when performing simulation.
(5) By applying the above, a new program created using C language can be used as
a GOT script after being debugged.
14 - 53 14.7 Troubleshooting
14.7.1 Simulation using general C language compiler or debugger
14.7.2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT 9
1 Error checking method
PARTS
The error data of the script functions is stored into the GOT special registers (GS).
Check the stored data using the system monitor function and various object functions (numerical
display, lam indication and others) of the GOT. 10
Details of GOT special registers
GRAPH, METER
Section 2.6.1 GOT internal devices
Details of system monitor function
GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (Extended Option Functions Manual) 11
ACTIONS
The following types are all items related to GOT special register (GS) script function.
TRIGGER
Address Item Name Description
Stores the data of error occurrence.
GS14.00:Turns ON at error occurrence.
GS14 Script common information (read only)
GS14.07:Turns ON at BCD error occurrence. 12
GS14.08:Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.
GS14.12:Turns ON at communication error occurrence (including access to out-
EXTERNAL INPUT/
of-range device).
The pointer that indicates the area where the latest error code is stored.
OUTPUT
The latest error code is stored in a 2-word area within the script error data (GS16
to GS47).
The value at GS15 cycles as shown below each time an error occurs.
13
"-1" "16" "18" "20" ....... "46" "16" (cycles back to "16".)
The relationships between the GS15 value and the error code storing area are
shown below.
GS15 Script error pointer
OTHERS
GS15 Area where the latest error code is stored
16 GS16 to GS17
18 GS18 to GS19
14
... ...
SCRIPT FUNCTION
46 GS46 to GS47
Stores the script No. of error occurrence and the corresponding error codes in due
order, starting from the higher addresses of the storage area.
GS16 to 47*1 Script error data When an error occurs, the script No. and error code are stored in 2-word unit as a
history.
Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the higher addresses are overwritten in order.
(Continued to next page)
APPENDICES
INDEX
14.7 Troubleshooting 14 - 54
14.7.2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT
Address Item Name Description
The pointer that indicates the area where the latest script execution number is
stored.
The latest script execution number is stored in a 1-word area within the script
execution numbers (GS49 to GS79).
The value at GS48 cycles as shown below each time a project script/screen script
is executed.
"-1" "49" "50" "51" ....... "79" "49" (cycles back to "49".)
The relationships between the GS48 value and the latest script execution number
GS48 Script execution pointer
storing area are shown below.
GS48 Area where the latest script execution number is stored
49 GS49
50 GS50
... ...
79 GS79
GS49 to 79 Script execution number Stores the script Nos. of the scripts executed as a history.
GS384.0 :Clears the script error data (GS16 to GS47) when turned ON.
GS384 Script common control (write only) GS384.1 :Re-executes the script that has been suspended due to an error
when turned ON.
Set the monitor time of one script in second unit.
If a script does not end the preset time after its start, script processing is stopped.
(Error code: 15)
The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.
Setting Example Monitor Time
GS385 Script monitoring time
0 (default) 10 seconds
1 1 seconds
10 10 seconds
11 11 seconds
Set whether initial operation will be performed or not when any of the following
conditions is satisfied.
The screen script function is used.
The execution condition (trigger type) selected is "Rise/Fall".
Switched to the screen including scripts.
Security Switching
Switching station No.
Offset switching
GS386 Screen script initial operation
Setting
Trigger Type Bit Value of Trigger Initial Operation
Example
Rise ON
0 Performed
Fall OFF
Other Rise ON
Not performed
than 0 Fall OFF
*1 According to the error, script No. may be "0".
For the script function error, refer to the following.
Error code list ( This section )
14 - 55 14.7 Troubleshooting
14.7.2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT
9
2 Error code list
Error Code Error Definition Corrective Action
Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts.
PARTS
1*1 Initialization of project script functions failed.
Reduce the number of times to execute the project script function.
Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and base screens.
2*1 Initialization of screen script functions (base) failed.
Reduce the number of times to execute screen script function (base). 10
Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and superimpose
Initialization of screen script functions (superimpose screens.
GRAPH, METER
3*1
window) failed. Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script function
(superimpose window) .
Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and overlap window
Initialization of screen script functions (overlap screens 1.
4*1
window 1) failed. Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script function (overlap 11
window 1) .
ACTIONS
Reduce the number of monitor device points for scripts and overlap window
Initialization of screen script functions (overlap screens 2.
5*1
window 2) failed. Reduce the number of times to execute the screen script function (overlap
TRIGGER
window 2) .
The operation result is a value outside the usable Check the processing of the device that was brought outside the data range
6
data range specified by the data format of the script. of the corresponding script, and correct the script. 12
Change the number of times to execute scripts in one project to 256 or less.
The number of times to execute scripts exceeded
7*1 Change the number of times to execute scripts on one screen to 256 or
EXTERNAL INPUT/
the limit. And some scripts were left unexecuted.
less.
When "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" was selected as Check whether the device to be monitored is correct.
OUTPUT
8 the script data format, the monitor device value Check the processing of the device which could not be handled as BCD,
could not be handled as BCD. and correct the script and sequence program.
When "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" was selected as
Check the processing of the device that was brought outside the BCD data
13
9 the script data format, the operation result was
range.
outside the BCD data range.
Check the factor that caused zero division in the corresponding script, and
10 The numerator was divided by the denominator of 0.
correct the script.
OTHERS
11*1 Write to a device failed. Check the device description of the corresponding script.
Reservation of an internal area for device write
12
failed.
Reduce the number of write device points in the corresponding script. 14
The while statement includes the description of a
13 Replace the write device in the while statement with a temporary work.
SCRIPT FUNCTION
device other than a temporary work.
14 An expression was too complicated to process. Simplify or divide the operation expression in the corresponding script.
Check whether the corresponding script has gone into an endless loop.
15 A script did not end within the script monitoring time.
Increase the value of script monitoring time (GS385).
Access to GOT internal device failed, resulting in Check the corresponding processing to GOT internal device and check the
error (BCD conversion out of device range) script and PLC program.
occurrence. Check the object script description.
16
Check whether Extended Function OS of gateway function is installed in
APPENDICES
Access to gateway device failed. GOT.
Check the cable.
*1 Script No. "0" is stored to GOT special register (GS).
INDEX
14.7 Troubleshooting 14 - 56
14.7.2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT
APPENDICES
App.1 Object Display Speed (Reference Value)
The display speeds (reference values: GOT-A900 series) of each object are as listed below.
The actual display speeds depend on the number of objects set on a screen, the shape of a figure drawn,
and the frequencies of transient transmission.
Comment Parts Lamp Trend Touch key
Numerical ASCII User Line graph Level
display display display graph (Bit
display display alarm display display
(Bit) (Bit) (Bit) display momentary)
Object name 240 120
240 120
Setting 6 digits, 10 48 48 48 48 dots, 160 160
6 digits --- dots, ---
condition 16 bit characters dots dots 8 lines, dots
8 lines
10 points
Bus Consecutive device 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.35 0.1 0.15
connection Random device 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.35 0.1 0.15
CPU direct Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.2
connection Random device 0.2 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.2
Computer link Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.3
connection Random device 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.3
Sequential
0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15
device
Cyclic
Random
MELSECNET 0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15
device
/10
Sequential
connection 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
device
Transient
Random
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
QnACPU device
ACPU CC-Link Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
connection
Display
(Remote Random device 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
speed
device station)
(Unit : s)
Sequential
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
device
CC-Link Cyclic
Random
connection 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
device
(Intelligent
Sequential
device 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device
station) Transient
Random
0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device
Ethernet Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.3
connection Random device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.4
Bus Sequential device 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.35 0.1 0.15
connection Random device 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.35 0.1 0.15
CPU direct Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.2 0.7 0.2 0.2
QCPU
connection Random device 0.2 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.7 0.2 0.2
Computer link Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.7 0.2 0.3
connection Random device 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.2 0.7 0.2 0.3
(Continued to next page)
App - 1 App.1 Object Display Speed (Reference Value)
Numerical ASCII
Comment
display
User
Parts
display
Lamp
display
Trend
graph
Line graph Level
Touch key
(Bit 9
display display alarm display display
(Bit) (Bit) (Bit) display momentary)
Object name 240 120
240 120
Setting 6 digits, 10 48 48 48 48 dots, 160 160
6 digits --- dots, ---
condition 16 bit characters dots dots 8 lines, dots
8 lines
10 points
PARTS
Sequential
0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15
device
Cyclic
MELSECNET
Random
device
0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15 10
/10
Sequential
connection 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
device
Transient
GRAPH, METER
Random
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
device
CC-Link Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
connection
(Remote Random device 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
QCPU device station)
11
Sequential
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
ACTIONS
device
CC-Link Cyclic
Random
connection 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
device
(Intelligent
Sequential
TRIGGER
device 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device
station) Transient
Random
0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device
Display
speed Ethernet Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.3 12
(Unit : s) connection Random device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.4
CPU direct Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.4 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5
EXTERNAL INPUT/
FXCPU
connection Random device 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.4 0.5 1.20 0.22 1.06
Programmable Sequential device 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.50 0.30 0.30 0.25 0.60 0.26 0.35
OUTPUT
controller by Omron Random device 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.50 0.36 0.30 0.30 0.80 0.27 0.35
Programmable Sequential device 0.21 0.30 0.35 0.70 0.35 0.35 0.27 0.8 0.2 0.3
controller by Yasukawa Random device 1.09 0.68 2.34 10.40 2.42 2.20 0.53 5.72 0.46 2.50
Programmable 13
controller by Allen- Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5
Bradley
Programmable
Sequential device 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.7 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5
controller by SHARP
Programmable
OTHERS
Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.9 0.4 0.4
controller by Toshiba
Programmable
Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.7 0.4 0.4 0.5 1.2 0.3 0.4
controller by SIEMENS
Programmable
14
Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.8 0.3 0.3
controller by Hitachi
SCRIPT FUNCTION
Matsushita Electric
Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.8 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.8 0.3 0.3
Works APPENDICES
INDEX
App.1 Object Display Speed (Reference Value) App - 2
App.2 Key Code List
(1) List of key code for numerical and ASCII input
Key Key code (H) Key Key code (H) Key Key code (H) Key Key code (H)
SP 0020H @ 0040H ` 0060H 0080H*1
! 0021H A 0041H a 0061H 0081H*1
0022H B 0042H b 0062H 0082H
# 0023H C 0043H c 0063H 0083H
$ 0024H D 0044H d 0064H (Clear) 0088H
% 0025H E 0045H e 0065H
& 0026H F 0046H f 0066H
0027H G 0047H g 0067H
( 0028H H 0048H h 0068H
) 0029H I 0049H i 0069H
* 002AH J 004AH j 006AH
+ 002BH K 004BH k 006BH
, 002CH L 004CH l 006CH
- 002DH M 004DH m 006DH
. 002EH N 004EH n 006EH
/ 002FH O 004FH o 006FH
0 0030H P 0050H p 0070H
1 0031H Q 0051H q 0071H
2 0032H R 0052H r 0072H
3 0033H S 0053H s 0073H
4 0034H T 0054H t 0074H
5 0035H U 0055H u 0075H
6 0036H V 0056H v 0076H
7 0037H W 0057H w 0077H
8 0038H X 0058H x 0078H
9 0039H Y 0059H y 0079H
: 003AH Z 005AH z 007AH
; 003BH [ 005BH { 007BH
< 003CH \ 005CH 007CH
= 003DH ] 005DH } 007DH
> 003EH ^ 005EH 007EH
? 003FH _ 005FH | 007FH
*1: Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.
App - 3 App.2 Key Code List
(2) List of key code for objects
9
(a) Key code for numerical input
Key code (H) Application
PARTS
Deletes the least signification digit and shifts the entire digits to the
0008H*
right by one.
000DH Write to the destination device (Execute)/Move the cursor
10
001BH* Delete cursor
GRAPH, METER
002DH "-"
002EH "."
0030H to 0046H Input value
* Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.
11
ACTIONS
(b) Key code for ASCII input
Key code (H) Application
TRIGGER
Deletes the first character and shifts the entire characters to the
0008H*
right by one character.
12
000DH Write to the destination device (Execute)/Move the cursor
001BH* Delete cursor
EXTERNAL INPUT/
ASCII code Input characters
OUTPUT
* Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.
(c) Key code for data list display function 13
Key code (H) Application
00F2H* Scroll up by one line
OTHERS
00F3H* Scroll down by one line
* Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.
14
(d) Key code for alarm list display function
Key code (H) Application SCRIPT FUNCTION
00F2H* Scroll up by one line
00F3H* Scroll down by one line
FFB0H Show cursor
FFB1H Hide cursor
FFB2H Move cursor upward (Insert page break when cursor is hidden)
APPENDICES
FFB3H Move cursor downward (Insert page break when cursor is hidden)
FFB8H Display detail information
FFBCH* Display ladder
* Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.
INDEX
App.2 Key Code List App - 4
(e) Key code for alarm history function
Key code (H) Application
FFB0H Show cursor
FFB1H Hide cursor
FFB2H Move cursor upward (Insert page break when cursor is hidden)
FFB3H Move cursor downward (Insert page break when cursor is hidden)
FFB4H* Display date/time of selected data
FFB5H* Display date/time of all data
FFB6H Clear the selected alarm data
FFB7H Clear all alarm data
FFB8H Display detail information
FFB9H* Reset designated device
When using GOT-A900 series: Save alarm contents to PC card
FFBBH
When using GOT-F900 series: Reset designated device
FFBCH* Display ladder
* Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used
FFB6 and FFB7 are supported by GOT-F900 series OS version 3.0 or higher.
App - 5 App.2 Key Code List
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 416 432 448 464 480 496 512 528 544 560 576 592 608 624 640 656 672 688 704 720 736 752 768 784 799
0
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
App.3 Drawing Sheet
208
224
240
256
272
288
304
(1) For A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/A960GOT
320
336
352
368
384
For A960GOT
400
416
432
448
464
479
For A975GOT/A970GOT
480
496
App.3 Drawing Sheet
512
528
544
560
576
592
For A985GOT
599
App - 6
EXTERNAL INPUT/
9
INDEX APPENDICES SCRIPT FUNCTION OTHERS OUTPUT TRIGGER ACTIONS GRAPH, METER PARTS
11
14
13
12
10
App - 7 App.3 Drawing Sheet
(2) For A95*GOT
9
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 319
0
16
32
PARTS
48
10
64
80
96
GRAPH, METER
112
128
144
160
176 11
ACTIONS
192
208
224
TRIGGER
239
(3) For A956WGOT 12
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 416 432 448 464 480
0
EXTERNAL INPUT/
16
32
OUTPUT
48
64
80
96
13
112
128
144
OTHERS
160
176
14
192
208
224
SCRIPT FUNCTION
234
APPENDICES
INDEX
App.3 Drawing Sheet App - 8
App - 9 App.3 Drawing Sheet
(4) For F940GOT
9
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 319
0
20
PARTS
40
60
80
10
100
GRAPH, METER
120
140
160
180
11
ACTIONS
200
220
TRIGGER
239
(5) For F930GOT 12
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 239
0
EXTERNAL INPUT/
20
40
OUTPUT
60
79
13
(6) For F920GOT
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 127
0
OTHERS
20
14
40
60
63
SCRIPT FUNCTION
* There is no touch switch.
APPENDICES
INDEX
App.3 Drawing Sheet App - 10
App - 11 App.3 Drawing Sheet
App.4 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function (Reference 9
Value)
PARTS
During printing, it is recommended that a monitor screen with fewer object functions is displayed.
When a screen with object functions (e.g. value display function) which are changed very fast is displayed on
the GOT, the GOT gives priority to display of object functions. Therefore, the printouts take longer.
The following table shows the print out time (reference value) using the hard copy function while the monitor
10
screen with value display function for 50 points is displayed.
GRAPH, METER
Type of printer to be used*1
GOT main Printer applicable for Printer applicable for
Connection Printer applicable for
unit ESC/P command ESC/P command (black
PCL command
(16 colors) and white)
CPU direct connection 1min40s 40.9s 31.3s
11
ACTIONS
Bus connection 1min39s 40.9s 30.9s
A985GOT Computer link 1min39s 39.1s 30.6s
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 1min42s 42.4s 32.2s
TRIGGER
MELSECNET connection (network system) 1min37s 40.1s 33.5s
CPU direct connection 1min08s 33.4s 27.9s
Bus connection 1min09s 31.0s 27.0s
12
A975GOT Computer link 1min07s 33.4s 26.7s
EXTERNAL INPUT/
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 1min09s 31.1s 28.2s
MELSECNET connection (network system) 1min09s 31.5s 28.0s
OUTPUT
CPU direct connection 1min10s 32.3s 27.1s
Bus connection 1min08s 30.4s 28.1s
A970GOT Computer link 1min07s 33.1s 26.8s
13
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 1min08s 30.4s 28.1s
MELSECNET connection (network system) 1min08s 33.5s 28.0s
CPU direct connection 30.5s 20.3s 22.9s
OTHERS
Bus connection 30.3s 21.2s 23.0s
A95*GOT
Computer link 30.7s 21.5s 22.8s
-SBA/SBD
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 31.5s 19.5s 22.5s
14
MELSECNET connection (network system) 33.6s 19.3s 23.0s
CPU direct connection 19.3s 20.6s 23.7s SCRIPT FUNCTION
Bus connection 20.9s 20.9s 23.2s
A95*GOT-
Computer link 19.1s 20.2s 23.1s
LBA/LBD
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 22.1s 21.9s 22.6s
MELSECNET connection (network system) 21.6s 19.8s 23.0s
CPU direct connection 37.2s 22.8s 22.7s
Bus connection 36.0s 23.1s 22.5s
APPENDICES
A956WGOT Computer link 36.9s 23.1s 22.8s
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 35.7s 23.1s 23.1s
MELSECNET connection (network system) 36.7s 23.1s 22.5s
*1 Either of the following printers was used to measure printing time.
ESC/P command-ready printer: Canon BJC-600J
PCL command-ready printer: HEWLETT PACKARD Laser Jet6L
INDEX
App.4 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function (Reference Value) App - 12
App.5 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR
The following table indicates the colors and corresponding numbers available when using the parts display
function XOR drawing mode.
(1) GOT having 256 display colors
When using the XOR for any colors other than the following, preview them in the preview of GT
Designer2.
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
Black 0 blue red purple green cyan yellow white black
3 224 227 28 31 252 255
2 160 162 20 22 180 182 109
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
blue red purple green cyan yellow white black
0 0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255
2 160 162 20 22 180 182 109
Blue Blue Black Purple Red Cyan Green White Yellow --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
3 3 0 227 224 31 28 255 252 1 163 161 23 21 183 181 110
Red Red Purple Black Blue Yellow White Green Cyan --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
224 224 227 0 3 252 255 28 31 226 64 66 244 246 84 86 141
Purple Purple Red Blue Black White Yellow Cyan Green --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
227 227 224 3 0 255 252 31 28 225 67 65 247 245 87 85 142
Green Green Cyan Yellow White Black Blue Red Purple --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
28 28 31 252 255 0 3 224 227 30 188 190 8 10 168 170 113
Cyan Cyan Green White Yellow Blue Black Purple Red --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
31 31 28 255 252 3 0 227 224 29 191 189 11 7 171 169 114
Yellow Yellow White Green Cyan Red Purple Black Blue --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
252 252 255 28 31 224 227 0 3 254 92 94 232 234 72 74 145
White White Yellow Cyan Green Purple Red Blue Black --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
255 255 252 31 28 227 224 3 0 253 95 93 235 233 75 73 146
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- Black ---
blue blue purple red cyan green white yellow
1 226 225 30 29 254 253 0 111
2 2 162 160 22 20 182 180
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- Black ---
red red purple blue yellow white green cyan
163 64 67 188 191 92 95 0 205
160 160 162 2 180 182 20 22
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- Black ---
purple purple red blue white yellow cyan green
161 66 65 190 189 94 93 0 207
162 162 160 2 182 180 22 20
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- Black ---
green green cyan yellow white blue red purple
23 244 247 8 11 232 235 0 121
20 20 22 180 182 2 160 162
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- Dark Black ---
cyan cyan green white yellow purple red
21 246 245 10 7 234 233 blue 2 0 123
22 22 20 182 180 162 160
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- Black ---
yellow yellow white green cyan red purple blue
183 84 87 168 171 72 75 0 217
180 180 182 20 22 160 162 2
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- Black ---
white white yellow cyan green purple red blue
181 86 85 170 169 74 73 0 219
182 182 180 22 20 162 160 2
Dark Dark
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- Black
black black
110 141 142 113 114 145 146 111 205 207 121 123 217 219 0
109 109
App - 13 App.5 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR
(2) GOT having 16 display colors
9
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
blue red purple green cyan yellow white black
0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255
2 160 162 20 22 180 182 109
PARTS
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
blue red purple green cyan yellow white black
0 0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255
2 160 162 20 22 180 182 109 10
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Blue Blue Black Purple Red Cyan Green White Yellow
purple red cyan green white yellow black blue
3 3 0 227 224 31 28 255 252
GRAPH, METER
162 160 22 20 182 180 109 2
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Red Red Black Purple Blue Yellow White Green Cyan
purple blue yellow white green cyan black red
224 224 0 227 3 252 255 28 31
162 2 180 182 20 22 109 160
Purple Purple
Dark Dark
Black
Dark Dark Dark Dark
Red Blue
Dark
White Yellow Cyan Green
Dark 11
red blue white yellow cyan green black purple
ACTIONS
227 227 0 224 3 255 252 31 28
160 2 182 180 22 20 109 162
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Green Green Black Cyan Yellow White Blue Red Purple
cyan yellow white blue red purple black green
TRIGGER
28 28 0 31 252 255 3 224 227
22 180 182 2 160 162 109 20
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Cyan
31
Cyan
31
green white yellow blue
Black
0
purple red
Green
28
White
255
Yellow
252
Blue
3
black
Purple
227
Red
224
cyan 12
20 182 180 2 162 160 109 22
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
EXTERNAL INPUT/
Yellow Yellow Black White Green Cyan Red Purple Blue
white green cyan red purple blue black yellow
252 252 0 255 28 31 224 227 3
182 20 22 160 162 2 109 180
OUTPUT
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
White White Black Yellow Cyan Green Purple Red Blue
yellow cyan green purple red blue black white
255 255 0 252 31 28 227 224 3
180 22 20 162 160 2 109 182 13
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Purple Red Cyan Green White Yellow Blue
blue blue black blue red purple green cyan yellow white
227 224 31 28 255 252 3
2 2 109 2 160 162 20 22 180 182
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
OTHERS
Purple Blue Yellow White Green Cyan Black Red
red red black purple blue yellow white green cyan
227 3 252 255 28 31 0 224
160 160 109 162 2 180 182 20 22
Dark Dark
Red Blue
Dark
White Yellow Cyan Green
Dark Dark
Black
Dark Dark Dark Dark
Purple
14
purple purple black red blue white yellow cyan green
224 3 255 252 31 28 0 227
162 162 109 160 2 182 180 22 20
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark SCRIPT FUNCTION
Cyan Yellow White Blue Red Purple Black Green
green green black cyan yellow white blue red purple
31 252 255 3 224 227 0 28
20 20 109 22 180 182 2 160 162
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Green White Yellow Blue Purple Red Black Cyan
cyan cyan black green white yellow blue purple red
28 255 252 3 227 224 0 31
22 22 109 20 182 180 2 162 160
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
White Green Cyan Red Purple Blue Black Yellow
yellow yellow black white green cyan red purple blue
APPENDICES
255 28 31 224 227 3 0 252
180 180 109 182 20 22 160 162 2
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Yellow Cyan Green Purple Red Blue Black White
white white black yellow cyan green purple red blue
252 31 28 227 224 3 0 255
182 182 109 180 22 20 162 160 2
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White Black
black black blue red purple green cyan yellow white
3 224 227 28 31 252 255 0
109 109 2 160 162 20 22 180 182
INDEX
App.5 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR App - 14
(3) GOT having 8 display colors
Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255
Black Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
0 0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255
Blue Blue Black Purple Red Cyan Green White Yellow
3 3 0 227 224 31 28 255 252
Red Red Purple Black Blue Yellow White Green Cyan
224 224 227 0 3 252 255 28 31
Purple Purple Red Blue Black White Yellow Cyan Green
227 227 224 3 0 255 252 31 28
Green Green Cyan Yellow White Black Blue Red Purple
28 28 31 252 255 0 3 224 227
Cyan Cyan Green White Yellow Blue Black Purple Red
31 31 28 255 252 3 0 227 224
Yellow Yellow White Green Cyan Red Purple Black Blue
252 252 255 28 31 224 227 0 3
White White Yellow Cyan Green Purple Red Blue Black
255 255 252 31 28 227 224 3 0
App - 15 App.5 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR
App.6 Comparison between GT Designer terms and GT 9
Designer2 terms
PARTS
The following terms are different between GT Designer and GT Designer2.
GT Designer terms GT Designer2 terms Remarks
The operation for editing the touch switch valid
10
Edit key group Edit touch area/frame region key area and changing the figure/frame size of
the object with frame set.
GRAPH, METER
Settings for change the object display attributes
Case State
according to the device status (condition).
Generic term for system libraries and user
Library
Parts library
Panel kit
defined libraries.
11
Generic term for objects and figures registered
ACTIONS
Template
in each library.
TRIGGER
12
EXTERNAL INPUT/
OUTPUT
13
OTHERS
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
App.6 Comparison between GT Designer terms and GT Designer2 terms App - 16
App.7 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version
Upgrade (For GOT900 Series)
The following describes the functions added by version upgrade of the GT Designer2 Version2.00A to 96A.
For using the following functions, use GT Designer2 or OS of the corresponding version or later.
1 Added GT Designer2 functions
Version of GT
Item Description Version of OS
Designer
Reading BMP image Enables displaying BMP image data reduced to
2.77F ---
data an available resolution on GT Designer2.
Copying comments in column unit on Comment,
Comment 2.09K ---
etc.
Improved library structure and added import
2.09K ---
function
Improved library structure, expanded the
maximum registration number of user libraries,
2.17T ---
and copying the figure data to the designated
user library
Library workspace Enables setting the background color of the
2.47Z ---
figures in the Library Editor screen.
Enables sorting the figure data by subject or
function and displaying different-shaped figures 2.58L ---
in the same color in the image list.
Real type data are added to the subject in the
2.63R ---
library.
Copy OFF ON Copying only text is possible for lamp display,
2.17T ---
Copy ON OFF touch switches and comment display.
Alarm history and recipe function setting can be
2.17T ---
edited in CSV file format.
Import and Export Items that can be imported or exported with the
alarm history are added. (Device No., comment 2.77F ---
No., and detail No.)
Print Printing with header and footer is possible. 2.17T ---
With grouped objects, setting change is possible
Data View 2.17T ---
for individual objects.
Security level changing and language switching
2.17T ---
can be confirmed in image.
Screen Preview
Enables switching screens in the Screen
2.96A ---
Preview window.
Wizard used for setting the GOT type and PLC
Wizard type and also for communication setting when 2.17T ---
creating a new project.
Function for capturing the specified range and
Screen capture 2.43V ---
loading to GT Designer2
Set Overlay Screen A screen can be called by dragging it. 2.43V ---
App - 17 App.7 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT900 Series)
Item Description
Version of GT
Version of OS 9
Designer
Supports expansion/reduction when multiple
2.47Z ---
objects and shapes are selected.
Expansion / Supports automatically zooming in and out
PARTS
Reduction objects and figures suitable for the screen size
2.73B ---
when the GOT type is changed to a GOT type
with different resolution.
10
Interval of magnification specification has
been changed.
Zoom +/- buttons have been added. 2.47Z ---
GRAPH, METER
Zoom in/zoom out operations using the "Ctrl
key" and "Mouse wheel" have been added.
Lines to align figures and objects are displayed
Guidelines 2.90U ---
when arranging a placed figure or object.
Text list Enables displaying the direct input texts in a list. 2.90U ---
11
ACTIONS
Enables storing the script data in the project
data.
Enables using the script editor for editing the
TRIGGER
scripts.
Enables the user to specify the storage areas
Script function 2.77F ---
for script files when no script files exist in the
specified project data file.
Setting items are added in the Script dialog
12
box. (Script data storage destination and
EXTERNAL INPUT/
script editor type)
2 Functions not supported
OUTPUT
Compared with GT Designer, GT Designer2 does not support the following functions.
Functions Deleted contents
13
Object list Delete the function that enables displaying by list and editing each object type.
Set overlay screen Delete the function that enables changing in batch the screen No. for setting overlay screen.
(1) Outputs object information (details) to printer
OTHERS
Print
(2) Outputs images of set devices only or object ID only.
14
SCRIPT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
INDEX
App.7 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade (For GOT900 Series) App - 18
INDEX
[A] Buzzer one-shot output signal ............................ 3-35
Alarm history display .......................................... 8-31 Buzzer output signal ........................................... 3-35
Before setting .................................................. 8-33
Cautions .......................................................... 8-64 [C]
Description on touch switches......................... 8-62 Case ............................................................... App-16
Placement and setting..................................... 8-39 Centering ............................................................ 5-26
Setting items ................................................... 8-41 Changing property of the registered parts .......... 4-34
Basic tab .................................................. 8-41 Changing the registered comments settings...... 4-15
Frame tab................................................. 8-46 Changing the registered parts settings ............... 4-33
Device (Common) tab .............................. 8-47 Character size by magnification.......................... 2-14
Option (Common) tab .............................. 8-55 Clock display....................................................... 7-57
Print (Common) tab (GOT-A900 series only) Arrangement and settings ............................... 7-58
................................................................. 8-58 Cautions .......................................................... 7-62
Extended tab............................................ 8-60 Setting items ................................................... 7-59
ASCII display ...................................................... 7-44 Basic tab .................................................. 7-59
Arrangement and settings ............................... 7-47 Extended tab (GOT-A900 series only) ..... 7-61
Before setting .................................................. 7-46 Clock function ..................................................... 2-36
Cautions .......................................................... 7-55 Clock function for monitoring by GOT................. 2-36
Setting items ................................................... 7-48 Comment display ................................................ 7-63
Basic tab .................................................. 7-48 Arrangement and settings ............................... 7-64
Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only) Cautions .......................................................... 7-83
................................................................. 7-50 Setting items of bit comment ........................... 7-65
Trigger tab (for GOT-A900 series only) ... 7-52 Basic tab .................................................. 7-65
Other tabs (for GOT-F900 series only) .... 7-54 Comment tab............................................ 7-67
ASCII input ......................................................... 7-44 Extended tab (GOT-A900 series only) ..... 7-69
Arrangement and settings ............................... 7-47 Trigger tab (GOT-A900 series only)......... 7-71
Before setting .................................................. 7-46 Setting items of word comment ....................... 7-72
Setting items ................................................... 7-48 Basic tab .................................................. 7-72
Basic tab .................................................. 7-48 Comment tab............................................ 7-74
Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only) Extended tab (GOT-A900 series only) ..... 7-76
................................................................. 7-50 Case tab (GOT-A900 series only)............ 7-78
Trigger tab (for GOT-A900 series only) ... 7-52 Trigger tab (GOT-A900 series only)......... 7-81
Other tabs (for GOT-F900 series only) .... 7-54 Data operation tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Automatic screen saver disable signal ............... 3-44 ................................................................. 7-82
Auxiliary settings................................................. 4-45 Comment registration ........................................... 4-1
Copying the registered comments ...................... 4-10
[B] Copying the registered parts............................... 4-31
Bar code function.............................................. 12-39
Cautions ........................................................ 12-42 [D]
Setting items of bar code function................. 12-41 Data list............................................................... 7-28
Settings ......................................................... 12-40 Arrangement and settings ............................... 7-31
Bar graph .......................................................... 10-59 Cautions .......................................................... 7-43
Arrangement and settings ............................. 10-61 Required knowledge for data list setting ......... 7-29
Cautions ........................................................ 10-70 Setting items ................................................... 7-32
Required knowledge for bar graph setting .... 10-59 Basic tab .................................................. 7-32
Setting items ................................................. 10-62 List tab...................................................... 7-34
Basic tab ................................................ 10-62 Extended tab ............................................ 7-39
Device/scale tab..................................... 10-64 Case tab (GOT-A900 Series only) ........... 7-40
Extended tab.......................................... 10-66 Trigger tab................................................ 7-42
Trigger tab (GOT-A900 series only)....... 10-68 Data operation function....................................... 5-45
Data operation tab (GOT-A900 series only) Deleting the registered comments ...................... 4-13
............................................................... 10-69 Deleting the registered parts............................... 4-32
Barcode input disable signal............................... 3-35 Device Setting....................................................... 5-1
Barcode input read complete signal ................... 3-35 Device types for screen switching ........................ 3-7
Barcode input signal ........................................... 3-39 Devices ............................................................... 2-42
Base screen specifications ................................... 2-2 Drawing sheet................................................... App-6
Index - 1
[E] Setting items of external lamp
(for GOT-F900 series only) ............................. 6-14 9
Edit key group................................................. App-16
Edit touch area/frame region .............................. 5-26 Setting items of screen lamp
(for GOT-F900 series only) ............................. 6-13
Setting items of word lamp
[F]
(for GOT-A900 series only) ............................... 6-6
PARTS
Figures.................................................................. 2-9 Basic tab .................................................... 6-6
Figures and data capacity .................................... 2-9 Text tab ...................................................... 6-9
Floating alarm..................................................... 8-67 Extended tab............................................ 6-11
Cautions.......................................................... 8-71 Data operation tab ................................... 6-12 10
Setting items of floating alarm......................... 8-69 Level ................................................................. 10-14
Settings ........................................................... 8-68 Arrangement and settings ............................. 10-17
Forced screen saver enable signal..................... 3-35 Before setting ................................................ 10-15
Cautions ........................................................ 10-26
GRAPH,
METER
[G] Setting items ................................................. 10-19
GOT bit register .................................................. 2-42 Basic tab ................................................ 10-19
GOT data register............................................... 2-42 Extended tab.......................................... 10-21
GOT error detection signal ................................. 3-36 Case tab................................................. 10-22
Trigger Tab ............................................ 10-24 11
GOT error reset signal........................................ 3-35
GOT ready signal ............................................... 3-36 Data operation tab ................................. 10-25
GOT special register........................................... 2-42 Line graph......................................................... 10-44
TRIGGER
Arrangement and settings ............................. 10-46
ACTIONS
GOT type .............................................................. 3-1
Required knowledge for line graph setting.... 10-44
[H] Setting items ................................................. 10-47
Basic tab ................................................ 10-47
Hard copy ......................................................... 12-25 Device/scale tab..................................... 10-49
Cautions........................................................ 12-29 Extended tab.......................................... 10-52 12
Setting items ................................................. 12-27 Trigger tab (GOT-A900 series only)....... 10-54
INPUT/OUTPU
Settings ......................................................... 12-26 Data operation tab (GOT-A900 series only)
Hard copy black-white inversion signal .............. 3-35
EXTERNAL
............................................................... 10-57
Hard copy black-white print signal...................... 3-35 Cautions ........................................................ 10-58
Hard copy output signal...................................... 3-36
Hard copy setting enable signal ......................... 3-35
[N]
Hardcopy sub-signal........................................... 3-36
How to create user-created key window............. 4-65 Number of screens can be registered................... 2-2
Human sensor detection signal .......................... 3-36 Number of screens can be set.............................. 2-2 13
Numeric value error detection signal .................. 3-37
[I] Numeric value input read complete signal.......... 3-35
Numeric value input signal........................ 3-36, 3-39
OTHERS
Internal devices of GOT...................................... 2-42 Numerical display ................................................. 7-1
Arrangement and settings ................................. 7-3
[K] Setting items of numerical display..................... 7-4
Key code list ..................................................... App-3 Setting items of basic tab ........................... 7-4
Key code read complete signal .......................... 3-35 Extended tab.............................................. 7-7 14
Key input signal .................................................. 3-36 Case tab (GOT-A900 Series only) ............. 7-9
Key window ........................................................ 4-61 Trigger tab (GOT-A900 Series only) ........ 7-11
Key window output signal ................................... 3-36 Data operation tab (GOT-A900 Series only)
FUNCTION
Keys on default key window and display items .. 4-62 ................................................................. 7-12
SCRIPT
Numerical input..................................................... 7-1
[L] Arrangement and settings ................................. 7-3
Cautions .......................................................... 7-24
Lamp display ........................................................ 6-1
Setting items of numerical input ...................... 7-13
Arrangement and settings................................. 6-2
Extended Tab........................................... 7-16
Setting items of bit lamp area
Basic tab .................................................. 7-13
APPENDICES
(for GOT-F900 series only) ...................... 6-13
Case tab (GOT-A900 Series only) ........... 7-19
Cautions.......................................................... 6-14
Trigger tab................................................ 7-22
Setting items of bit lamp.................................... 6-3
Data operation tab (GOT-A900 Series only)
Basic tab .................................................... 6-3
................................................................. 7-23
Text tab ...................................................... 6-4
Extended tab (GOT-A900 series only)....... 6-5
Index - 2
[O] Extended tab (bit)..................................... 9-44
Object arrangement ............................................ 5-20 Trigger tab (bit)......................................... 9-45
Object display speed (reference value) ............ App-1 Setting items of fixed parts movement ............ 9-57
Object shape setting ........................................... 5-22 Basic tab (fixed) ....................................... 9-57
Object size change ............................................. 5-25 Extended tab (fixed) ................................. 9-61
Object specifications........................................... 2-18 Trigger tab (fixed)..................................... 9-61
Objects ............................................................... 2-18 Setting items of word parts movement ............ 9-46
Offset function .................................................... 5-52 Basic tab (word) ....................................... 9-46
Operation panel ................................................ 12-31 Extended tab (word)................................. 9-51
Cautions ........................................................ 12-38 Case tab (word)........................................ 9-52
Required knowledge for operation panel setting Trigger tab (word)..................................... 9-55
...................................................................... 12-32 Data operation tab (word) ........................ 9-56
Setting items ................................................. 12-34 Setting of parts move route
Settings ......................................................... 12-33 (common setting for each screen)................... 9-37
Overlap ............................................................... 2-40 Parts registration................................................. 4-24
Overlap between figure and object ..................... 2-40 Password ............................................................ 3-21
Overlap between objects .................................... 2-40 PLC CPU with clock function
(GOT-A900 series only) ...................................... 2-38
PLC Type .............................................................. 3-1
[P]
Print Format ........................................................ 3-49
Panel kit .......................................................... App-16 Printer error detection signal............................... 3-37
Panelmeter ......................................................... 10-1
Arrangement and settings ............................... 10-3 [R]
Cautions ........................................................ 10-13
Required knowledge for panelmeter setting.... 10-1 Read device........................................................ 3-28
Setting items ................................................... 10-4 Recipe function ................................................. 11-12
Basic tab .................................................. 10-4 Cautions ........................................................ 11-20
Scale/Text tab (GOT-A900 series only) ... 10-6 Setting items ................................................. 11-14
Display/Scale tab (GOT-F900 series only) Settings ......................................................... 11-13
................................................................. 10-8 Recipe processing signal.................................... 3-36
Extended tab (GOT-A900 series only)..... 10-9 Report function ................................................... 12-1
Case tab (GOT-A900 series only).......... 10-10 Arrangement and settings ............................... 12-3
Data Operation tab (GOT-A900 series only) Cautions ........................................................ 12-23
............................................................... 10-12 Print layout setting......................................... 12-13
Parts display ......................................................... 9-1 Report screen creation (screen property)........ 12-5
Arrangement and settings ................................. 9-7 Basic tab .................................................. 12-5
Cautions .......................................................... 9-26 Format/Trigger tab ................................... 12-6
Setting items of bit parts display ....................... 9-8 Logging tab .............................................. 12-7
Basic tab .................................................... 9-8 Setting common to each report
Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only) (report setting) ................................................. 12-8
................................................................. 9-11 Common tab............................................. 12-9
Trigger tab (for GOT-A900 series only) ... 9-12 Print Format tab ..................................... 12-12
Setting items of fixed parts display.................. 9-23 Report output signal............................................ 3-36
Basic tab .................................................. 9-23 RGB .................................................................. 12-68
Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only) Cautions ........................................................ 12-73
................................................................. 9-26 Setting items of RGB..................................... 12-72
Setting items of word parts display ................. 9-13 Settings ......................................................... 12-71
Basic tab .................................................. 9-13
Extended tab (for GOT-A900 series only) [S]
................................................................. 9-17 Sampling ......................................................... 10-102
Case tab (for GOT-A900 series only) ...... 9-18 Cautions ...................................................... 10-104
Trigger tab (for GOT-A900 series only) ... 9-21 Setting items ............................................... 10-103
Data operation tab (for GOT-A900 series only) Settings ....................................................... 10-102
................................................................. 9-22 Scatter graph .................................................... 10-81
Parts library .................................................... App-16 Arrangement and settings ............................. 10-88
Parts movement ................................................. 9-28 Cautions ...................................................... 10-101
Arrangement and setting................................. 9-39 Required knowledge for scatter graph setting
Cautions .......................................................... 9-62 ...................................................................... 10-82
Setting items of bit parts movement................ 9-40 Setting items ................................................. 10-89
Basic tab (bit) ........................................... 9-40 Basic tab ................................................ 10-89
Index - 3
Device/Scale tab .................................... 10-90 Settings ......................................................... 11-23
Attribute tab ........................................... 10-91 Touch switch....................................................... 6-15 9
Case/Trigger tab .................................... 10-92 Arrangement and settings ............................... 6-18
Case tab ................................................ 10-96 Cautions .......................................................... 6-80
Extended tab.......................................... 10-98 Keyboard function ........................................... 6-78
Data operation tab ............................... 10-100 Setting items of bit switch................................ 6-19
PARTS
Screen size........................................................... 2-2 Basic tab .................................................. 6-19
Script functions ................................................... 14-1 Text/lamp tab ........................................... 6-21
Security function ................................................. 5-56 Extended tab
Set overlay screen function ................................ 13-1 (for GOT-A900 series only) ...................... 6-24 10
Arrangement and settings............................... 13-2 Action tab ................................................. 6-27
Cautions.......................................................... 13-5 Trigger tab................................................ 6-34
Check of the settings ...................................... 13-4 Setting items of change station No. switch ..... 6-59
Sound ............................................................... 12-46 Basic tab .................................................. 6-59
GRAPH,
METER
Cautions........................................................ 12-48 Text/lamp tab ........................................... 6-63
Setting items ................................................. 12-47 Extended tab............................................ 6-63
Settings ......................................................... 12-46 Action tab ................................................. 6-64
State Setting ....................................................... 5-28 Trigger tab................................................ 6-64
Station No. switching device............................... 3-14 Setting items of data change switch................ 6-68 11
Statistics graph ................................................. 10-71 Basic tab .................................................. 6-68
Arrangement and settings............................. 10-73 Text/lamp tab ........................................... 6-69
TRIGGER
Cautions........................................................ 10-80 Trigger tab................................................ 6-70
ACTIONS
Required knowledge for statistics graph setting Setting items of data set switch....................... 6-36
...................................................................... 10-72 Basic tab .................................................. 6-36
Setting items ................................................. 10-74 Text/lamp tab ........................................... 6-38
Basic tab ................................................ 10-74 Extended tab
Device/scale tab .................................... 10-75 (specific for GOT-A900 series) ................ 6-38 12
Extended tab Extended tab
INPUT/OUTPU
(For GOT-A900 series only) .................. 10-77 (for GOT-F900 series only) ...................... 6-39
EXTERNAL
Trigger tab Action tab ................................................. 6-40
(For GOT-A900 series only) .................. 10-78 Trigger tab................................................ 6-40
Data operation tab Setting items of go to screen switch................ 6-49
(For GOT-A900 series only) .................. 10-79 Basic tab .................................................. 6-49
Status observation function ................................ 11-1 Text/lamp tab ........................................... 6-57
Cautions........................................................ 11-10 Extended tab
13
Setting items ................................................... 11-3 (specific for GOT-A900 series) ................ 6-57
Trigger tab ............................................... 11-5 Action tab ................................................. 6-58
Action tab ................................................. 11-7 Trigger tab................................................ 6-58
Settings ........................................................... 11-2 Setting items of key code switch ..................... 6-65
OTHERS
Storing/reading a comment as file ...................... 4-16 Basic tab .................................................. 6-65
Synthesized colors available for XOR ............ App-13 Text/lamp tab ........................................... 6-66
System alarm display ......................................... 8-23 Extended tab
Before setting system alarm ........................... 8-24 (specific for GOT-A900 series) ................ 6-66
Placement and settings................................... 8-27 Action tab ................................................. 6-67 14
Precaution....................................................... 8-30 Trigger tab................................................ 6-67
Setting items ................................................... 8-28 Setting items of multi action switch ................. 6-73
FUNCTION
Basic tab .................................................. 8-28 Basic tab .................................................. 6-73
SCRIPT
Extended tab............................................ 8-29 Text/lamp tab ........................................... 6-75
System information............................................. 3-28 Extended tab
System signal 1 .................................................. 3-35 (specific for GOT-A900 series) ................ 6-75
System signal 2 .................................................. 3-36 Indirect Text tab
(specific for GOT-A900 series) ................ 6-76
[T] Trigger tab................................................ 6-77
APPENDICES
Setting items of recipe transfer switch ............ 6-71
Test function ..................................................... 13-10
Basic tab .................................................. 6-71
Arrangement and settings............................. 13-11
Text/lamp tab ........................................... 6-72
Setting items ................................................. 13-11
Trigger tab................................................ 6-72
Time action function ......................................... 11-22
Setting items of special function switch........... 6-41
Cautions........................................................ 11-27
Basic tab .................................................. 6-41
Setting items ................................................. 11-24
Index - 4
Text/lamp tab ........................................... 6-43
Extended tab
(for GOT-A900 series only)...................... 6-44
Trigger tab................................................ 6-48
Trend graph ...................................................... 10-28
Setting items ................................................. 10-32
Basic tab ................................................ 10-32
Device/scale tab..................................... 10-35
Extended tab
(for GOT-A900 series only).................... 10-37
Other tabs
(for GOT-F900 series only) .................... 10-38
Trigger tab
(for GOT-A900 series only).................... 10-39
Data operation
(for GOT-A900 series only).................... 10-42
Arrangement and settings ............................. 10-31
Cautions ........................................................ 10-43
Required knowledge for trend graph setting
...................................................................... 10-28
Trigger setting..................................................... 5-35
[U]
User alarm display ................................................ 8-1
Before setting user alarm .................................. 8-2
Placement and settings..................................... 8-9
Precautions ..................................................... 8-20
Setting items ................................................... 8-10
Basic tab .................................................. 8-10
Device tab (GOT-A900 series only) ......... 8-13
Detailed tab (GOT-F900 series only) ....... 8-15
Extended tab............................................ 8-16
Trigger tab (GOT-A900 series only)......... 8-18
Touch switch for displaying user alarm ........... 8-19
[V]
Video ................................................................ 12-50
Cautions ........................................................ 12-67
Setting items of video.................................... 12-64
Settings ......................................................... 12-63
[W]
Window screen specifications .............................. 2-2
Write device ........................................................ 3-28
Index - 5
MEMO
Index - 6
SCRIPT EXTERNAL TRIGGER GRAPH,
9
14
13
12
11
10
APPENDICES FUNCTION OTHERS INPUT/OUTPU ACTIONS METER PARTS
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co., Ltd. in the United States.
MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
This product uses Arphic Mobile Font.
VS-FlexGrid8 LEADTOOLS(r) DLL for Win32
(c)ComponentOne LLC. All rights reserved Copyright (c) 1991-2003 LEAD Technologies, Inc.
SH(NA)-080522ENG-N
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd. MALTA Kazpromautomatics Ltd. KAZAKHSTAN
German Branch Wiener Strae 89 99, Paola Hill Mustafina Str. 7/2
Gothaer Strae 8 AT-2500 Baden Malta- Paola PLA 1702 KAZ-470046 Karaganda
D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816 Phone: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60 Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817 Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 TEHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. CZECH REPUBLIC Oktyabrskaya 16/5, Off. 703-711 bld. Traian 23/1
Czech Branch BY-220030 Minsk MD-2060 Kishinev
Avenir Business Park, Radlick 714/113a Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES
CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280
Phone: +420 (0)251 551 470 ILAN & GAVISH Ltd. ISRAEL
ESCO DRIVES & AUTOMATION BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOM.TECHNIEK B.V. NETHERLANDS 24 Shenkar St., Kiryat Arie
Fax: +420 (0)251-551-471 Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. FRANCE BE-1831 Diegem NL-2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone: +972 (0)3 / 922 18 24
French Branch Phone: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 30 Phone: +31 (0)180 46 60 04 Fax: +972 (0)3 / 924 0761
25, Boulevard des Bouvets Fax: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 31 Fax: +31 (0)180 44 23 55
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex CEG INTERNATIONAL LEBANON
Koning & Hartman b.v. BELGIUM Koning & Hartman b.v. NETHERLANDS Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA
Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Woluwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21-23
Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 Lebanon - Beirut
BE-1800 Vilvoorde NL-1101 CH Amsterdam Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 430
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. IRELAND Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40 Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00 Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 438
Irish Branch Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49 Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount INEA BH d.o.o. BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY
IRL-Dublin 24 Aleja Lipa 56 Postboks 487
Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800 BA-71000 Sarajevo NO-3002 Drammen
Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
Phone: +387 (0)33 / 921 164 Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. ITALY Fax: +387 (0)33/ 524 539 Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77 CBI Ltd. SOUTH AFRICA
Italian Branch AKHNATON BULGARIA MPL Technology Sp. z o.o. POLAND Private Bag 2016
Viale Colleoni 7 4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd. Pb 21 Ul. Krakowska 50 ZA-1600 Isando
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MB) BG-1756 Sofia PL-32-083 Balice Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 928 2000
Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1 Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6004 Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00 Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 392 2354
Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312 Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. SPAIN INEA CR d.o.o. CROATIA Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA
Spanish Branch Losinjska 4 a Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3
Carretera de Rub 76-80 HR-10000 Zagreb RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Valls (Barcelona) Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06
Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131 Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02
Fax: +34 935891579
AutoCont C.S. s.r.o. CZECH REPUBLIC Craft Con. & Engineering d.o.o. SERBIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. UK Technologick 374/6 Bulevar Svetog Cara Konstantina 80-86
UK Branch CZ-708 00 Ostrava-Pustkovec SER-18106 Nis
Travellers Lane Phone: +420 595 691 150 Phone:+381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5
UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB Fax: +420 595 691 199 Fax: +381 (0)18 / 292-24-4/5
Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00
Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 B:ELECTRIC, s.r.o. CZECH REPUBLIC INEA SR d.o.o. SERBIA
Mladoboleslavsk 812 Izletnicka 10
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN CZ-197 00 Praha 19 - Kbely SER-113000 Smederevo
Office Tower Z 14 F Phone: +420 286 850 848, +420 724 317 975 Phone: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku Fax: +420 286 850 850 Fax: +381 (0)26 / 617 163
Tokyo 104-6212
Phone: +81 3 622 160 60 Beijer Electronics A/S DENMARK AutoCont Control s.r.o. SLOVAKIA
Fax: +81 3 622 160 75 Lykkegrdsvej 17, 1. Radlinskho 47
DK-4000 Roskilde SK-02601 Dolny Kubin
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc. USA Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66 Phone: +421 (0)43 / 5868210
500 Corporate Woods Parkway Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26 Fax: +421 (0)43 / 5868210
Vernon Hills, IL 60061
Phone: +1 847 478 21 00 Beijer Electronics Eesti O ESTONIA CS MTrade Slovensko, s.r.o. SLOVAKIA
Fax: +1 847 478 22 53 Prnu mnt.160i Vajanskeho 58
EE-11317 Tallinn SK-92101 Piestany
Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40 Phone: +421 (0)33 / 7742 760
Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49 Fax: +421 (0)33 / 7735 144
Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND INEA d.o.o. SLOVENIA
Jaakonkatu 2 Stegne 11
FIN-01620 Vantaa SI-1000 Ljubljana
Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 500 Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8100
Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 501 Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170
UTECO A.B.E.E. GREECE Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN
5, Mavrogenous Str. Box 426
GR-18542 Piraeus SE-20124 Malm
Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900 Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00
Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999 Fax: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 02
MELTRADE Ltd. HUNGARY Econotec AG SWITZERLAND
Fert utca 14. Hinterdorfstr. 12
HU-1107 Budapest CH-8309 Nrensdorf
Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Phone: +41 (0)44 / 838 48 11
Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Fax: +41 (0)44 / 838 48 12
Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA GTS TURKEY
Vestienas iela 2 Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok. No:5
LV-1035 Riga TR-34775 Yukari Dudullu-Umraniye-ISTANBUL
Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280 Phone: +90 (0)216 526 39 90
Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281 Fax: +90 (0)216 526 3995
Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA CSC Automation Ltd. UKRAINE
Savanoriu Pr. 187 4-B, M. Raskovoyi St.
LT-02300 Vilnius UA-02660 Kiev
Phone: +370 (0)5 / 232 3101 Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55
Fax: +370 (0)5 / 232 2980 Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66
MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Strae 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
FACTORY AUTOMATION Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// [email protected] /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com
You might also like
- GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual Functions100% (2)GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual Functions1,158 pages
- GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)No ratings yetGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual (Functions)1,304 pages
- GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5: Reference ManualNo ratings yetGT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5: Reference Manual268 pages
- GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5: Reference ManualNo ratings yetGT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5: Reference Manual338 pages
- SH (NA) - 080862ENG-M - GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual For GT Works3No ratings yetSH (NA) - 080862ENG-M - GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual For GT Works366 pages
- GOT1000 - Handbook L (NA) - 08087-C (01.09) - J PDFNo ratings yetGOT1000 - Handbook L (NA) - 08087-C (01.09) - J PDF294 pages
- Operating Manual Operating Manual (Startup - Introductory Manual)No ratings yetOperating Manual Operating Manual (Startup - Introductory Manual)82 pages
- INDEX MENU GOT2000 Series, GOT SIMPLE SeriesNo ratings yetINDEX MENU GOT2000 Series, GOT SIMPLE Series1 page
- GT Designer Got 2000 Screen Design ManualNo ratings yetGT Designer Got 2000 Screen Design Manual3,896 pages
- GT Works3 - Installation Instructions (SW1DND-GTWK3-E)No ratings yetGT Works3 - Installation Instructions (SW1DND-GTWK3-E)2 pages
- SH (NA) - 080861ENG-AF - GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual For GT Works3No ratings yetSH (NA) - 080861ENG-AF - GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual For GT Works3178 pages
- D203460-17 JFX200-2513EX 2.5DTextureMakerGuide eNo ratings yetD203460-17 JFX200-2513EX 2.5DTextureMakerGuide e42 pages
- Mitsubishi Simple Motion Module MELSEC-Q Series QD77MS4: Sample Screen ManualNo ratings yetMitsubishi Simple Motion Module MELSEC-Q Series QD77MS4: Sample Screen Manual35 pages
- Tajima DG/ML by Pulse Ambassador Edition Xi Version 11.0 Release NotesNo ratings yetTajima DG/ML by Pulse Ambassador Edition Xi Version 11.0 Release Notes7 pages
- GX Converter Version 1 Operating Manual Ib0800262edNo ratings yetGX Converter Version 1 Operating Manual Ib0800262ed66 pages
- Export Div Data To PDF in ASP Net Using CNo ratings yetExport Div Data To PDF in ASP Net Using C2 pages
- Material Didático para o Curso de Linux Básico Aplicado À IntelbrásNo ratings yetMaterial Didático para o Curso de Linux Básico Aplicado À Intelbrás0 pages
- HP Virtual Server Environment Capitalizes On Workload Management IntegrationNo ratings yetHP Virtual Server Environment Capitalizes On Workload Management Integration27 pages
- STMP3410: Integrated Mixed-Signal SolutionsNo ratings yetSTMP3410: Integrated Mixed-Signal Solutions213 pages
- Simatic: STEP 7 V5.5 Programming Software For SIMATIC S7 / M7 / C7No ratings yetSimatic: STEP 7 V5.5 Programming Software For SIMATIC S7 / M7 / C736 pages
- How To Call Win32 Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLS) From LabviewNo ratings yetHow To Call Win32 Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLS) From Labview12 pages
- College Information Retrieval Using Touch Screen KIOSK100% (2)College Information Retrieval Using Touch Screen KIOSK88 pages
- Google File System Basics: Google World Wide Web ComputersNo ratings yetGoogle File System Basics: Google World Wide Web Computers5 pages
- Familiarization With PC Components: Computer Hardware and Networking Lab (R707)No ratings yetFamiliarization With PC Components: Computer Hardware and Networking Lab (R707)93 pages
